PLANETARY SERVICE: A WAY INTO THE THIRD MILLENNIUM

Argo Books, Norwich, VT – 1978
Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

PROBLEM AND PREFACE: This essay raises the question and offers a solution to the most significant problem of our day – how to change without violent conflict.  His argument proceeds as follows:

a.We cannot survive without borders (boundaries). Reasoning, in general, is based on our ability to make distinctions, defining and characterizing, all of which means drawing boundaries; boundaries create inclusion and exclusion.  There are many types of  boundaries, political, between disciplines of knowledge, between peoples (friends/enemies,  social class, cultures, all types of groups, marriages, gender, social roles, wealth, law and outlaw).  Some of these are spacial such as between nations and residential neighborhoods, some of timespans, such as between generations and some separating groups of people..

b.It may be said that the major activity in the world is in the act of changing these borders.  THE GREAT PARADOX OF HUMAN EXPERIENCE is that we must have borders to realize our human potential. We do not progress unless there is stability, but change inherently creates instability. How, then can change be brought about with the least amount of disruption?

Up to now it has been an iron law of human behavior that change of borders never occurs except by war.  Not only shooting war, but also less violent, equally oppressive actions. For instance, war between the sexes, between academic disciplines, or between social classes.

c.But while this may have been an “iron law” in the past, is it to continue to be human nature?  If so, we are now doomed to extinction because technology, mostly the “bomb,” precludes the possibility of continued life?  A barrier to war is communication, and herein, ERH asserts,  lies the solution to our problem.

d.Work-service is proposed as the primary method by which we can learn to communicate with others and begin to understand them. We can only understand when we work and pray together, is the assumption.  Work service is the first step in a process to creating new boundaries in our thinking.

Introduction and Chapter 1

1.The chapter begins with an axiom, a request for a commitment, as compared to mere description of the world, a commitment to act. Science is the dominant language and method for solving all problems today, but it fails to teach us to change.

“Therefore they (scientists) know all about everything, and they know it very exactly.  But they know nothing about the direction which we men have to choose…that is, to know nothing about anything important.” (p.xvii)

2.  Religions are characterized by their type of sacrifice, as religion meansthe willingness to sacrifice;  “…the only religion which would be appropriate for all of mankind would require that we sacrifice a part of ourselves.” (p.xvi)

3.Our human destiny is a superior problem to that addressed by natural science, which describes (objects) only.  The first chapter proposes to find “The Tone” of our age.”

4.”What,”  ERH asks, “are the barriers to peaceful borders between peoples?”  War can no longer be the main method for change, there is no future for the human race if this condition persists.  What are to be the alternatives?  By inference, he seeks peace in the sense that progress can only be made during peace.  There is yet another paradox to seeking peace; it is that real wars seem to be our only method for distinguishing between serious issues and play.

Chapter 2. A World Without War?

ERH quotes William James, 1910:

Fie upon such a cattle yard of a planet if war is to disappear without an equivalent.  Men would sink to the level of tame cows and dogs. (p.5)

No progress without peace, no progress with war, would seem to be solved by defining the notion of war, as well as defining the changing of borders without war.  May we quote the cynic about love, “If it weren’t for the consequences, it would be a parlor game.” (p.6)   The Crucifixion of Jesus symbolizes sacrifice as a requirement to change borders.  It is crucial to make a distinction between war and peace, between seriousness and play.  War is just as essential as peace, but there must be an alternation between them

We must be aware of the fact that borders between peoples  (between religions, men, sexes, or generations), are serious only if they are final, if they can be changed only at the risk of life.  Otherwise it is a game.  Nothing is truly serious that can be changed in the course of a phone call, like an invitation to a party. (p.6)

5.A world that cannot change borders would be hateful. “What is missing is a powerful and enheartening means of changing borders without war.” (p.9)

6.Borders can also be in “time.”  There must be cooperation between generations, otherwise methods for the creation of peace may not be remembered.

7.The theme of unity, in this instance of time, is mentioned in this context.  “The true man reaches across the times from the dawn of creation to the furthest future.” (p.11)  [RF – I assume he means the term “true” to mean the man capable of regeneration]  failing to make the proper distinction  between war and peace, between serious change and games, is to insure that there will always be a shooting war. ERH cites Hitler, and the “thousand year Reich” as an example that would insure its very fall in the short term.

8.The beginning of true planetary peace will seem an insignificant event at the time; Teilhard de Chardin note:  “No one recognized the first Roman as such.” (p.13)  He points out, for instance, that the initiation of universal postal rates was a great revolution in thinking because it articulated a consciousness that the hithertofore described “world,” which implied endless space, was now recognized as a “planet” with limited space. This meant a recognition that the world had to be seen for what it was, a place where there had to be peace or the countries would tear each other apart by war.  Usually such a revolution is not recognized as such in the beginning.

9.In the context of erasing borders, he cites a number of examples to illustrate the principle that social time and social space can be eliminated, to our benefit in terms of creating peace.  Here he makes the distinction between “world,” which represents “other,” and “planet,” which connotes a community.  Social time and space elimination is represented by universal postal rates (same cost across town as across the country, illustrating the importance of cheap communication within a community to keep it together).  Also important is a basic wage, (same price for one hour as for a day). (p.17-19)

10.He admits the need for borders (limits).

They reveal all of the causes for which men have risked their lives.  National borders are not as contemptible as we like to make them nowadays. (p.19)

And in the words of Goethe.

We mortals feel the greatest reverence for things revealed to us so far, and all things revealed hitherto have led to the construction of borders.  Therefore, at this moment I want to warn myself against presenting borders only negatively.  No, they are venerable insofar as they allow us to hand on things entrusted to us.  You can revive your heritage only because borders exist.  (p.19)

Here also we draw a parallel to the term “problem.”  The problem sets the limits, the borders, indicating (in context) what is significant and what is not, what is to be included and excluded!

11.He goes on to say, paradoxically, that while we must strive to move borders, at the same time we must strive to eliminate them; but such elimination must be cooperative (both sides must agree). THEN MANKIND MUST BECOME ONE!

12.Finally, he points out a distinction between a noun and an adjective, regarding the breaking down of a border.  When a border is eliminated or changed the noun representing each side becomes a adjective, which describes only one aspect of the new unity.  Thus, to be Jewish is to speak of both origins and membership in the larger human community; to be a Jew means to belong to a distinctive group or association.  ERH is Jewish, but not a Jew.  He cites the example of Europeans: German and French are adjectives, while Frenchman/German are nouns. (p.23)

Chapter 3, Planet – World – Earth

1.The title, PLANET, WORLD, EARTH infers the necessity to make some distinctions about our concept of our concrete environment.  ERH suggests that these reflect attitudes essential to correct in modern times.  The discussion IS TO POINT OUT THAT, GIVEN MODERN TRANSPORTATION, RADIO AND THE LIKE, WE MUST UNDERSTAND THAT WE NOW LIVE ON A PLANET, WHICH MEANS THE GLOBE IS OUR NEIGHBORHOOD.

2.The implication is fundamental; what goes on in any part of the planet will effect people everywhere in one way or another. The terms “world” and “earth” suggest a we and they attitude.  We = our culture, nation, neighborhood, which we love and defend; and they = those we hate and fight.  No longer can we afford such an attitude because of our ability to destroy life on earth.  (pp. 24-28)

3.The number of examples ERH gives reflect the interaction between, and interdependence of, countries for trade, the flow of ideas, etc.  He also cites a number of persons who considered Europe a single culture in 1918, and who were willing to sacrifice themselves for the whole.  Albert Ballin and Walter Rathenau knew Germany at that time was wrong and that it must lose the WWI. (p.30,31)  He cites also Stauffenburg, who believed in the “old, Holy Germany” (p.32), and the fine, honorable things it stood for.   ERH cites that again in WW II von Moltke noted that Germany must lose the war because the paganism of Hitler  was no longer at attitude to create peace. (p.33)  (RF – I presume one could cite here also the metaphor of Abraham having been an instrument of freeing the Jews, but was not allowed into the Promised Land. – a reminder that a member of a movement may not personally reap the rewards.)  von Moltke was executed by Hitler.

4.These men, Stauffenburg, Ballin, von Moltke, Bonhoffer, and others, by naming the meaning of their time, allowed a future to be entered.  They all sacrificed themselves and therefore, and accordingly deserve a  right to be listened to. ERH also pointed out an important principle in citing von Moltke’s case, that he created a situation whereby the German people could be believed after the end of the war (WW II), by admitting guilt before defeat.

They (these German martyrs) are the legitimate embodiment of their time.  For out of mere  occurrences they made “events” for which they are personally responsible and for which they have suffered.  Thus the time is set right, because their voices will determine its meaning. (p.34)

[RF – It is perhaps useful to pause for a moment and speak to the reader who may not be familiar with other essays of Rosenstock-Huessy. One must be mindful of the fact that original thinkers who have a world view, as does Rosenstock-Huessy, are difficult to comprehend at times when one is not in possession of the broader context in which certain statements assume.  For example, in making the point (4) above, in speaking of the importance of naming the times, of the need to sacrifice, of giving meaning to events when they are so named, he writes:

World and soul join one another, that is they must join in order to provide meaning.  For the world is meaningless.  The world would just be uncreated chaos were it not for those who stood up with their lives to provide meaning: every time anew it would become an uncreated chaos in which speech decayed and every border became insurmountable.  Chaos does not precede God’s creation.  No, chaos occurs when we little devils abolish God’s word.  (p.35)

I take this to mean, naming eliminates chaos; to name is risky; naming gives meaning; not to give meaning to problems renders them insurmountable, sooner or later causing cultural degeneration.  Insurmountable borders robs us of the opportunity for peace and, chaos follows eventually. Naming categorizes, limits, creates boundaries.  The term “borders” means boundaries.]

5.However, boundaries are a two edged sword. They not only help identify problems, in another way they are barriers to communication.  Abolishing borders can therefore also mean speaking to one another, “…as though we had no secrets from one another.” (p.35)  At this point ERH goes in another direction, examining  the meaning of speech. In sum, the chapter seems to provide examples as to how people in recent times in Europe have understood that we are now a global village, a planet.  All of this clears the ground for a united Europe.

Chapter 4  Nipped in the Bud

1.Summarizing his three points so far in the book:

a)The meanings of war and peace have been jumbled.  War means changing borders, and is serious business; border changing is the source of “…the carrier of life.” The obvious paradox is that to survive we must define and name, creating borders (boundaries).  But also to survive we must grow, which is to say change.  And to change means changing definitions, taboos, alliances,  boundaries.  There are many types of boundaries and heretofore changing boundaries has been accomplished by war. But,  since shooting war is no longer possible, how are we to maintain  change in the future?

b)Home and the world, once friend and enemy, can no longer be so easily distinguished, because we are forced together; we must see ourselves as a single planet, and the planet is now really “home.”

c)Obviously borders are other than geographical; they divide labor and management, Jew from Moslem, Aborigine from cosmopolitan, rich from poor, idealist from realist, etc.

2.The notion of work service began roughly in 1910 (p.39), and since has appeared in many western countries, Germany, Switzerland, U.S. (The Friends Service Committee and Unitarian Universal Service Committee for instance).

a)Work service must be serious and a full time commitment for a specified time (1 or 2 years), and run parallel to a military camp.

b)The weakness of those past attempts were that they were summer, part-time efforts and run by pacifists.

Conditions of serious work service:

3.Such work service must erase rank, i.e. eliminate barriers of class so that there is equality and competence arising unfettered. (p.41,42)

a)It must be serious, and therefore last long enough to allow contemplation, suffering, or  sacrifice.

b)Work groups cannot represent one class only. This criterion is crucial. ERH cites the bunching together of unemployed whereby, their misery was increased by meeting only with their own kind.  ALL DIFFERENT GROUPS IN SOCIETY MUST BE MIXED TOGETHER SO THAT THEY LEARN TO COMMUNICATE, TO UNDERSTAND  EACH OTHER, AND TO RESPECT EACH OTHER’S PROBLEMS.  (p.43)    Unemployed and employed are enemies because one poses as competition to the other.

…industrialization must take two things into account: (1) Unemployed people must “belong” and be able to make friends in spite of the fact that they are out of work. (2) Employed people have to stick their noses beyond the borders of their jobs, physicians as well as lathe operators, ministers as well as alpine farmers.  (p.46)

In general ERH describes these early efforts at work-service, their mistakes, the misunderstanding about them, the world forces that opposed them (Hitler and Pearl Harbor, Capitol and Labor).  But he also says that these brave attempts produced many good ideas, and that they must be  re-invented and tried again to fit the times; “…a cause may become legitimate only when it has once failed…….Misuse (ala Hitler taking over the youth camps) never disproves the proper use.” (pp.48,49)

Chapter 5,  It Can’t Go Slowly Enough

1.ERH’s point here is that charity from rich to poor creates enemies. (pp.50,51).  “We are not helping the underdeveloped countries when we give them part of our wealth….Goods only benefit the right people.” (p.52)

2.He then begins to define service or charity, making the point that change can  come only when the hearts of men are moved and this operates on a very different time span than transfer of technology.  Thus, to provide pure wells, bathrooms, and the like to “developing” countries is of less importance than working with them and teaching them to help themselves. This is consistent with the notion that “Rome was not built in a day.”  ERH cites as example that today the technology of war allows fighting to last for a relatively short time, but the actual anger or hatred goes on for generations.  He also cites his own experience; from 1941 to 1944 few people thought of him as a German, but by 1945, even his friends thought of him as “…that awful German.”  So long did it take their hearts to comprehend the meaning of Nazism.  Technology and human time spans are basically different.

3.The essential notion of time and timing here is that we live in  multiple time spans, each of which must be recognized and balanced.

Every event contains the extremes of lightning flashes and snails.  And for that reason we are burdened by both as if they were one.  Assimilating facts only, contributes to bringing about the end of the world. ….Peoples are not flashes of lightening;. they are snails. (p.55)

They must respond to both the demands of the day, and those of the century.

4.How to recognize the demands of the day?  ERH cites the example of saving a baby from a burning building or saving the building;  “..developing countries are like the baby.”  He goes on to make the distinction between the stages of developing countries, politically, economically, socially, as compared to our own industrial societies.

5.The concept “economy” to ERH means that there are three basic elements evolved over long periods of time. After the hunter and gatherer came, 1) the peasant who tilled the land and who was given the gift of agriculture from the monk who taught him, 2) the craftsman who could build the cathedrals, taught by the engineer, and 3) the technologist/inventer who was taught by the natural scientist.  Each lives according to a different time span; the farmer is slowest, technological change the fastest.  Modern society lives in all three at once,which is its strength and the source of its adaptability and creativity.  All three are necessary side-by-side:

Thus if the expanses of the continents of our planet are to be cultivated now as the Creator of the soil and its treasures demands, then industry, craft and peasantry must pool their gifts: the reliable dedication of the free peasants who need not be overseen, the reliable craftsman of a team, and the coherence of the antipodes brought about by enterprises spanning the globe. (p.61)

Finally, he points out, finally that psychologically many of us tend to retain the values of the peasant, being tied to one country, or one neighborhood, or culture.  The future person cannot be tied only to the past, but also to the future.  He cites airline pilots and stewardesses who can only fly 72 hours per month, have no home because they are always on the move, and who become exhausted because of lacking a place to call “home.”  This, he suggests, is the metaphor for the new planetary man, who must respect all three time-zones of life, and know that the future will make unique demands upon us.  If we are to recognize these, our planetary service, which involves working with all three types of peoples, must respect their time-tables.

Chapter 6, the Planetary Household

1.Appropriate change is the universal necessity for a vital community. There is a Latin word, hostis, which connotes both enemy and guest.  The daughter becomes a mother, the son a father, the obstreperous student a teacher of obstreperous students.  In these examples, change did not occur, one simply repeated one’s experience. To solve this problem one needs to understand, not only different demands in different roles, but also the transition from one to the other.  If the change doesn’t create peace, the old behaviors perpetuate war between the roles.

What is important instead is the ability to change at the right time from apprentice into master, patient into doctor, or subject into ruler.  We must be able to call forth from within us the variation; teacher, or maybe policeman, or welder, or juryman, at the right hour.  (pp.64,65)

2.The great decision we have at any moment is to respond to being called to take-on some new role.  And that role may be the opposite to what we have done before.

3.To find peace, we must create inner time.  Inner time is the opposite from clock time, it is the time to reflect, to create a new time by seeing how we must change.  ERH tells the story of the young man who chose to be shot rather than enter the SS.  “A man who accepts death in order not to commit evil deeds helps us to do the things which must be done to replace war, lest we lose our creative breath.”  (p.68)

4.Development means decay. Things left by themselves “develop,” then die out.  “The mere world will become a planet only when worldly development is stopped and replaced by loving participa­tion.” (p.60)   What ERH means here is that things cannot be left by themselves to just “develop.”  For example, to give money to “developing countries” will never work.  One must, instead, participate with the country receiving the aid, working along with them to teach the spirit of regeneration, to create mutual understanding, to teach them that they are not alone and that we are brothers and sisters.

THIS IS THE MAJOR EMPHASIS OF PLANETARY SERVICE.

5.Such teaching will take at least two generations, indicating fruitful achievement only in the third generation.  (p.71)   With reference to the young man who resisted the SS, he writes:

A truthful, courageous, and believing declaration like the letter from the farmer’s young son should give us the courage to realize that three generations truly belong together.  I am the mediating generation and I am extricating him from death by burdening you, the reader, with him.  One generation can indeed listen to another.  I am transposing the dying boy into you, and he will endure through you. (p.71)

Chapter 7, The Peace of the Pirates

1.The world needs a new type of pirate; one who asserts himself in the absence of formal authorities.   He points out that, although the notion of a pirate is generally negative, the action can have positive consequences, especially when the laws of the land are corrupted. (p.74)  What are the acts of piracy in this context?

2.Acts are morally different from one another.  A new piracy might be rescuing shipwrecked persons, freeing slaves, protecting women, preserving valuable documents, paying ransoms, feeding the hungry, or extinguishing flames at the danger of one’s own life.   ERH points out that the pirate normally operated in free, unregulated space, on water, land, and air that had not been claimed by some country.  Nowadays, there is little or no unregulated space.

3.The relevance of the pirate to creating “inner time” is that creating a future requires free space and free time.  So the question is, how is that time to be created?  And his answer would seem to be, nowadays, by acts of piracy, by stealing what other people believe is theirs.

Once the policemen impose the same borders as the geographers, the child of God within us will suffocate.  The double pressures of the law and of knowledge will overwhelm our consciences and make us believe that no one can fly, write, love, hate, or serve except on the legitimate paths of the railroad, the airlines, the ski-lifts, the various academic scholarships, the state exams, the draft, the street signs, the IQ tests, and birthcontrol. (pp.75,76)

4.As I understand his text, one of his points is that any religious creed is potentially dangerous to its “so called” believer, or it is nothing. The distorted thing about our situation today is that almost nobody who is earning his daily bread with the Christian creed (i.e. clerics) realizes that the credo may be deadly dangerous.  Only laymen believe that, or people like Bonhoeffer, who take off their frocks.  If the creed is not considered dangerous, divine worship is emasculated.  The creed is either high voltage or empty straw.

And for this reason, planetary service must be placed under the pirates flag because piracy is the last bit of freedom from regulation.  Since the pirate need not start wars because no state can be blamed for his actions, he is capable of creating a kind of peace. The pirates peace.   (p.77)

5.Pirate’s peace means that the pirate does not call or name himself, contrasting with  warring nations, which create their own myths by speaking to themselves as to who they are.  ERH describes peace as the act of allowing someone else to call you by your name, and they allowing you to do the same.  Friends greeting others call each other by name, the sign of a peaceful relationship.  But, as so many nations are greedy today, ignoring the environment and other elements necessary for survival, they be circumvented.

…the messengers of the planet will have to grab the globe away from the raving nations.  Wanting to determine its own fate empties a nation.  Lacking the justice which accords each its own place, a nation becomes, in the words of Augustine, a band of robbers. `If the states themselves are becoming similar to pirates, I will have to seek shelter with the pirates myself in order to show my readers the way to the source of health.’  (p.81)

6.The first step is to act.  One does not need to know, or cannot really know, how something will come out.  One must simply , “…relax and accept the fact that eventually the things will take hold which I helped to start. One doesn’t need to know more.” (p.88)  ERH cites a number of Peace Corps workers who validated this idea: to listen and ponder, to act, then to wait and see what grows.

And most importantly, one’s patience must reject the time-clock of a scientific world.  The establishment expects to go by the appointment book.

The coming generations will have to master two completely different types of times….The so-called time of the technological age is robbing us of our own real time…beat back the raging time of technology with the time of healthy hearts. “One doesn’t need to know more” represents the time of our hearts. ….Men love to act for themselves, and with spontaneity; and as I have sometimes observed, have come at length cheerfully and voluntarily into measures, which they would have opposed, if they had imagined they were to be driven into them” (pp.90,91)

[RF – Is not this last phrase a fundamental dictum for all teaching and learning, and for the basis of planetary service as well?]

Chapter 8,   David Scott Palmer

1.This chapter seems to be devoted to establishing the importance of identity for persons taking action.  Pirates?  This is important because it is not groups per se that take action, but action is taken through the courage of individuals within that group.

There is always a great temptation to hide within a group, to set  aside the personal danger of taking a stand, of “sticking one’s neck out.”  But ERH is asserting that there must be leadership, a personal owning up to ideas and commitment to action, otherwise nothing gets done.

One can step into the light of history only by bearing one’s first and last name.  Bearing your name stops one from just belonging to a class or social stratum and disappearing into it.  That’s when a person rises above his social class costume; that’s when his face shows above his clothing……The spirit of peace and the peace of the spirit require that we think, act and decide by overcoming our race, class and our self-interest. (p.94)

2.He goes on to suggest that, “…we would rather put up with a bad reputation than sink to the level of types, concepts, and numbers with which one does not speak.” (p.94)

Indeed, the great criticism of politicians these days is that they will not own up to a political view on their own.  As it is, they agree with everyone.

[RF – However, the planetary servant must have the courage to speak out and must therefore be willing to risk the danger  of having and acting on beliefs.  A danger which cannot be avoided, he might have said, if one is to evolve with a soul.]

3.Life in planetary service must be involvement with individuals.  “Life in service has to be life in service of a name, or the service remains lifeless.” (p.95)  Social science that attempts to deal only in abstractions remains ineffective.   An important step in establishing EFFECTIVENESS IS TO GET TO KNOW PEOPLE PERSONALLY! “That is why I named the chapter David Scott Palmer.” (p.96)

Chapter 9, A Pirate’s Esperanto

1.In all of this, what is revealed to me is the primary social effect of large massive populations who do not know each other, where there are ghettos established between social classes and various groups within them, e.g. academics and business, Spanish and black (gangs), red-necks and Unitarians, etc. The separation of these people, the fact that they do not speak to each other, INCREASES CRIME BECAUSE PEOPLE WHO DO NOT SPEAK, DO NOT TAKE CARE OF ONE ANOTHER.  Thus, modern society tends to have the large crime rates in the cities, including white collar crime.

2.What ERH is interested in here is what he calls the new language that is necessary to establish between strangers, who make peace between themselves. The language must speak to the calendar of celebrations.  Because every technological advance expands space and shortens time needed for adapting,  it destroys a familiar living group.  “This human group must be replaced explicitly.” (p.98)

3.Destruction of a familiar living group!  If technology destroys living groups, how can new ones be established?  THIS IS A CRUCIAL QUESTION FOR THE PIRATE! ERH puts this question in the context of increasing space as a result of technology.

The answer is that to re-create groups one must be patient, one must get to know all persons with whom one works.  ONE MUST COUNTER THE TECHNOLOGICAL SPEEDING UP OF TIME, BY INSISTING ON SLOWING DOWN ONE’S OWN TIME.  We constantly under estimate the time needed to solve social problems. (p.100)

4.What time schedules must we understand?

a.The speechless stage of the pre-human world living in the present, “…laughing, crying, hunger and love, sleeping and being awake alternate their reign over us.” p. 102  These are “urges” propelling us through life,  the twilight dawn (of consciousness).  (p.102)

b.Second is war,  where we are brought together to a focus on a specific goal, a purpose, to conquer an enemy, be it an invader, or reduce famine or crime.  Here, time is explicit, and all impatient urges must be set aside in the interest of achieving the goal.  One works on long-range assignments, and the steps to take are to be clarified; during war one does not speak to the enemy, there is no “…time in common.”

c.Peace is concluded when a common time is established.  This occurs when one shares common sorrows and joys. When such common time does not exist, either there is the twilight of the present, or war! (p.103)

Time without a calendar of the soul’s sorrows and joys shared in common, is an abstract time, is time artificially reduced to measuring external things, like police, labs, walls, borders…office hours, the working day, terms of service…..One generation after the other has to be won over explicitly and induced to conclude peace.(p.104)

5.Peace rests on people being leveled, seeing each other as equals.  Then common goals and joys become more important than war! p. 104

[RF – I believe this is an example of why so many people have trouble understanding ERH as George Morgan describes so eloquently in his book SPEECH AND SOCIETY.  Issues such as,  war and peace, love and hate, science and feeling have different meanings in different situations.  When he writes about these issues in different contexts his explanations, his applications and interpretations are shaded to fit those circumstances.  Time, for instance, has many dimensions,  but these can only be understood in specific circumstances.  The definition of time must therefore be understood as the sum of these uses.]

Peace joins together “distemporaries,” war divides, peace (contrasted with an armistice) requires trust and usually requires several (at least 3) generations to establish. (in the mean time an armistice may prevail). War requires only a single generation to explode.

Technology, and by inference commerce, according to ERH, allows a condition between war and peace. These forces, he asserts, are therefore in control.

6.Peace breaks out only when people “come to themselves.”   This is to say, when people care less for their reputation, appearance, rank, honor or rights.  Actually we can only come to ourselves if we don’t care whether the world considers us legitimate or illegitimate, decent or indecent, noble or plebeian.  (p.106)

7.Rights are won, not given, and our age claims to offer many rights by law.  These need to be protected, as  “…NO ONE WILL GIVE THEM BACK.” if they are lost. (p.108)

8.Time and timing are crucial to establishing peace.  We must take time to allow knowledge of each other. This alludes to the time of war (everything needs to be done fast and on time),  like the time of the craftsman, who has much time.  TO ESTABLISH PEACE, THESE TWO TIMES MUST BE WELDED TOGETHER BY THE PIRATE, SO THAT HE CAN USE BOTH.

9.Pirate service must be civilian, so that there can be freedom to be creative  freedom for an individual.  The Peace Corp’s secret of success was that its members were laymen.  Cardinal Roncalli, later Pope XXIII, are example of prelates who ranked laymen above themselves because lay-people tend to be free to be creative, unbound by politics, or economics, or long-range plans.    “Isn’t it remarkable that in our age the extraordinary things can only be done by lay-men?” (p.110)

The professional, the technician, plans everything beforehand, based on what he knows, on what is known; he creates “things in space.” Things in space die.  The layman surprises us; he takes time, then may abandon it through overcoming his fear of death. (p.110)

The technological world anticipates all functions by planning and every expert is pre-determined and pre-programmed.  He must accomplish something, something which has been known beforehand.  With this he enters the world of space, space makes him visible.  Since what is visible about us is prone to death, the spaces in which the experts act are not only dead, but deadening.  Only pure time is free of death, and a man can take part in it only by forgetting space and overcoming fear of death. (p.110)

[RF – Another interesting paradox in life.  In order to create something lasting and of worth one must forget a fear of death.  The aphorism is,  “We gain life by being willing to die?”  Clearly president Bush was not willing to take time to pave the road toward peace in the middle east situation in 1991.  He took the fast track, so to speak.  He made war rather than waiting for sanctions to work.]

10.Planners and administrators are important, but only one step in a link.  As with William James, one must be able to look at an old phenomenon afresh, as if seeing it for the first time.  That is not what the planner does, but what the pirate must learn to do.

11.To be a proper pirate, one must not work only for one’s self interest or even only for that of his country.  ERH cites Theodore Roosevelt and Kaiser William II, as examples  of both sides of this question.  The new pirate must work for peace for mankind, not just for one’s self. (p.112)   And “…doing the proper thing ranks above officiality.” (p.113)

12.One must learn to listen to the moment, to know how to make the distinction between following rules and breaking them, by doing the unpredictable.

13.Service on the planet must achieve a celebration for peace, a holiday whereby all, normally distemporaries, will work closely together.  “This is what the service on the planet must achieve.” (p.115)

14.A pirates of peace must be anointed, recognized beforehand by a group, as one committed and willing to take what may come, like a bride or groom entering a marriage:  “…all will know themselves anointed by the prophesy that the world is waiting for them in order to become a planet.” (p.115)

15.Peace cannot be force upon us, “The soul has to enter peace explicitly and voluntarily.” (p.116)  When victories are won, a new language is born. (p.117)

 

WHAT FUTURE THE PROFESSIONS – 1960

Lectures 1-4
Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.What is a profession? What does it mean?  In terms of: 1) what kind of a code of knowledge should be generalized throughout the world, 2) how our society threatens professional standards and undermines them, and 3) how we should  respond to those threats. (p.3)

2.Obviously, a profession represents expert knowledge in some field needed by society such as dentistry or law or teaching,  but it also must be underpinned by a code of ethics that goes beyond the technical aspects of that knowledge.

Ethics are essential because they form the bedrock upon which public trust is built. At all costs, trust must be maintained.  SO THE FIRST PRINCIPLE IS THAT THE PROFESSION MUST BE RECOGNIZED (TRUSTED) BY SOCIETY.  Usually this means backing by law.

3.There are three sets of relationships to be understood; 1) between the professional and his profession, 2) between the professional and his clients, and 3) between the professional and the law (authorities). (p.1-5)

The same applies to teaching, between 1) teacher and parents, 2) teacher and students, and 3) teacher and school board. AND, AS IN ALL RELATIONSHIPS, THESE CLASH AT TIMES.

4.There is a “body politic” that must exist first before all professions; ERH’s reminds us that “the whole exists before the parts.”  The professional must be “called” and must be recognized by the society, which means someone else must bestow a name, a title one the professional. NONE OF THIS CAN BE SELF-APPOINTED, as  “…the recognition that the political and social names in a society are given, and not self-made….Somebody else has to make sure that you are a dentist in their eyes.”  (pp.10,11)

5.All of this comes down to three things, 1)a brotherhood of the people who do the same service,  2)  people who are in need of that service, and 3) authoritative recognition by community leaders that the service is being satisfactorily performed.

6.Law should never be enacted unless it is valid for the next generation. Any idea that should live longer than a single life-time must be institutionalized!

Just as liquid water has two other states, ice and gas, so professions live in three time-spans: 1) the immediate (e.g. the dentist services a tooth ache), 2)  the life-time of the professional as he relates to his profession, and 3) the service to humanity, which is recognized by law to apply to the next generation. THERE IS NO COMMON DENOMINATOR BETWEEN THESE THREE TIMES; THEY ARE SEPARATE ELEMENTS OF A UNITY THAT INVESTS EVERY PROFESSION.

7.This tripartite is expressed in three languages, the language of law, of the profession between professionals, and finally, the language of everyday activity, between professional and client.

The professional man then is also a layman a member of the “public,” and a legislator who looks toward eternity.  In each of these roles we represent three time-spans, 1) the immediate or present, 2) our own lifetime, and 3) eternity.

8.Finally, these time-spans represent a hierarchy of values, 1) eternity is most important (like dying for one’s country), 2) second is one’s life-time, and 3) and last is the present (the tooth-ache, so to speak).

Lecture 2

1.As “public,” man is passive, unseen and unrecognized as an individual. Man, in his strength, has a title – engineer, doctor, dentist etc. (p.1)

a.Professional standards are universal, not bent by local mores.

b.Professional also means that one is changing the aspect of the technical or specialized knowledge.

c.Professionals are (or should be) “infected” with a spirit of the calling.

2.IN AMERICA THE PROFESSIONAL IS IMPOVERISHED! , because he is seen either as an individual or as a member of the “public,” but never in brotherhood with his professional colleagues. (p.4)

3.IT IS CRUCIAL TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN THE “SELF”  (as your flesh and blood individuality) and one’s spiritual use of the term “I,” as a professional.  The professional, professing the opinion “I,” is speaking within the learning, tradition, and research of the professional community.

4.One must understand the sequence in education.  The sequence of learning is to receive knowledge, then to re-learn it in terms of his/her own experience.  To re-learn, is to re-search.  These are separate and necessary stages in learning.  To research comes after the initial learning. To re-search adds new“meaning” to the learning.

ERH asserts that, today, we tend to assume the child can learn everything immediately, and thus “…our poor American child has no future, because all its imagination is destroyed when he/she is told `You can do everything now…”  (p.8)

The notion here is that, at the university, the professor is engaged in a new level of teaching in which “research” meant that the meaning of knowledge could be changed and created anew. (p.11)

5.Thus, the “high” in higher education recognizes this change in approach to learning. The professor has been recognized as having the authority to say “I” in the spiritual sense.

ERH cites the old man who got up in a meeting, having lived in the community for over 70 years, to pronounce the historical sense of values in the community.  His “authority” was derived from his experience in the community and was recognized as such by the group at the meeting. (p.11) At that moment his “self” changed from a “we” into an “I” – a great mystery of transition.

Transition, authority, and experience are the social variables determine the destiny of the community through history. These are factors of social time.  By contrast, the objects of natural scientific investigation measure time very differently,  their focus being oriented toward spacial elements, i.e. the clock rather than phases or stages of a process.  (p.12)

6.The “self,” in the sense described above, represents spatial considerations, as do all concrete entities. Personally experienced events such as  hunger, intoxication, and nervousness are expressions of the “self.”  However, when individuals act in the name of a profession, such as an M.D. writing a prescription, his  “I” represents “authority” conferred by a group, just as a scientist pronouncing a new discovery. In these cases the social role represents a wider arc of time.

7.The Christian tradition has waged war against stagnation by way of attempting to balance between change and tradition.  The Greek mentality was to see no change; life went in cycles of repeated experience, of forgetting what is to be learned through experience that should be acted upon to bring about change.

8.Change occurs by considering what idea is to be applied at the right time.

9.The churches in American are filled with cowards.  “They have no social status, they have no courage, they have no convictions, and they do what’s pleasing.” (p.15)   His evidence is that no church “consecrates” divorces, and any church will marry the same person four times.  His second criticism of the churches is their numerous “squabbles,” and tendency toward fragmentation into sects. This, ERH asserts, is confusing and damaging to the lay persons attempting to follow “the true faith.”

10.Regarding the issue of what ERH calls “corollaries,” or in other writing, “paradox,” he points out the constant decision between change and tradition.  This is revealed in the different roles (and dress) of men and women.  Women change dress each day, mens’ stay the same.  The reminding of this phenomenon represents a continuity from generation to generation that will “save the world.”

Lecture 3

1.ERH begins this lecture with a discussion of the fragmentation between divisions of labor in the work force. HIS POINT IS THAT ALL PARTS OF THE `WHOLE’ ARE INTERDEPENDENT. EACH PART COMPLIMENTS THE OTHER.

a.Today, capital and labor are separated; unions fight CEO’s.

b.Historically, the peasant, the artisan, and the leader (designer) had to work together to build a cathedral.

c.Today, it is the same; production depends upon the unity of unskilled labor,craftsmen (on the machines), and  leaders who design, but the fragmentation causes undue disruption of this process.

2.ERH draws the conclusion that a flow of trained personnel is required for the chain of continuity to be maintained from generation to generation.  It follows also that one needs to maintain a loyalty to a division of labor, to a profession, if a society is to properly produce the goods and services the next generation needs.

3.The Irish, French Canadians, and Italians were dedicated to the church because it offered them more than religion; it offered them a place in the world by way of teaching them to be loyal to a work, or to a plot of soil. (3 virtues: “stick-to-it-ness to place, to purpose, and to group).  (p.11)

4.As a continuation of this point, ERH asserts that “…nobody is more superstitious than modern man, after he has gone to high school.  Because he believes in the latest fad.  He forgets everything that has existed before.”  (p. 12)

5.Today, more than ever before, a revival of professions depends upon an apprentice system, as in medicine. One role of  interns is to re-establish craft.

ERH defines a law of LIFE:  “…ALL GREAT REFORMS START AT THE TOP AND GO DOWN TO THE BOTTOM.  In complete contradiction to the gospel of the common man, nothing ever happens down below that hasn’t happened first at the top.” (p.17)

6.Today we are threatened, not only by soil erosion, but by SOUL erosion; it is a matter of caring for the community.  “What we do to our neighbor and to the land, we do to ourselves.” (p.21)

It is a decision from one’s soul that calls us individually to be loyal to our work, to seek perfection (pride in one’s work), and to work with others in a team spirit.  (p.23)

Lecture 4

1.ERH is making the point of continuity and education (and by indirection toward the professions), by quoting the Bible.

ALONG THE WAY HE MAKES THE POINT THAT ONE CAN’T PROVE ANYTHING BY QUOTING THE BIBLE BECAUSE EVERYTHING HAS ALREADY BEEN PROVEN BY QUOTATIONS. (And the devil quotes as well – shades of the fundamentalists!   BUT HE DOES ASSERT THAT ONE CAN PROVE POINTS BY QUOTING THE BIBLE AS A WHOLE, by which he means looking at the larger context of quotations, what precedes and succeeds any particular quotation.

a.His first quote is at the last of the Old Testament, where he states that a parent cannot concern him/herself only with his own generation; he must mind the future for his children, and the professions as well,  and it is the role of the “elder” in society to see to this. (p.2)

b.The “elder” is beyond egotism, beyond the “I.”  The elder is wise, as “..the fruit of living in human society is not muscles, but wisdom.  (p.5)

c.The elder would point out that every institution is good at times, and at other times bad, AND WE MUST BE ALLOWED TO SAY THESE THINGS.  We must be allowed to be bored, disciplined, to suffer, “…to say it’s terrible.” (the education)  Education is never all happiness.  In other words, we must always invest part of our lives in the future if we wish for an improvement in community life.

2.There is a time to take  orders, to listen (to commands), and ultimately to prophesy and to give commands (i.e. the 12 tones).  ERH points out that each group in society may have its elders, and that the two groups that seem to have become deprived of elders are women and industrial workers.  (p.9)

3.ERH enumerates other problems with professions. 1) They tend to look narrowly on creativity. (e.g. the story of the pharmacist who invented the lotion, unaccepted by the doctor, but which worked. 2) They must recognize that others participate in different roles that effect their profession, e.g. the parent who administers at home. In the practice of professions one must see the whole, including these different roles, and the roles must be respected by the professional.  Finally, 3) while we need rules that must be taught, we must also teach that there are exceptions to those rules, depending upon circumstances.  And it is always our burden, as professionals, to decide when and where to make these  exceptions.

What Future the Professions – 1969 – Review

The central issue here might be called the problem of how thought is circulated and its vitality maintained.  The underlying assumption is that any idea that is to live longer than one human life must be institutionalized.  What then  are the problems of institutionalization that maintain the power of thought to change us?  The topic of “professional” is used to apply, by inference, to the practice and teaching of all services needed by the community requiring professional knowledge from doctor, lawyer, or teacher to plumber, or carpenter. The author points out the disastrous consequences when any of the stages of professional practice become either corrupted or omitted, such as when the relationships between the professional and his colleagues, or his clients and the law, break down.

 

MAKE BOLD TO BE ASHAMED – 1953

On Freedom, Growth and Self-Knowledge
(Transcribed from an LP recording)
Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

1.     Shame protects the integrity of groups, marriages, clubs, friendships, etc.  If these groupings are to contribute to our lives, they must be protected by differentiating their “inside” (uniqueness) from the “outside” (how others see them). Their uniqueness is their most intimate secret.

2.     Shame is only obliquely related to anything to do with sex.  [For instance Shakespeare’s deep emotional feeling toward England.] ERH cites a number of examples of shamelessness, whereby the “inner” was revealed to the outside world unnecessarily or inappropriately, and points out that this destroys one’s inner world.

3.     Shame opposes science, in that science tends to be dedicated to turning “inner” to “outer” in this sense. Thus, “social science” tends to destroy what is intimately “social” in society.

4.     The power to “unify” to create a new union, of friends or business associates, or to join a church, etc. is identified by our speech.  When we speak, we characterize ourselves as either for or against, or as inside  or separate from a group or cause.

He who says, “We are within, and this has to stay without,” begins to live meaningfully. (p.7)

This language comes from the heart and describes a new inner creation as a visible being.  We impart life, or we can kill spiritual life when we mistake “inside” for “outside.”.  To speak in second person to another  (i.e. you and me) is to unify: to speak in third person, i.e. him or her, is to kill.

5.     What is accomplished by such unions is the time and protection to grow. We are protected (accepted) by the group, because the beginning of growth must always be in secret.

What we gain by shame, then, is space, too, an inner space which we can use to discuss, to converse freely… It remains in the bosom of the family.  So we gain time, and we gain space for irresponsible, playful, preliminary talk…But we now know that the essential problem for man is: when is he willing to be recognized by others for what he wants to stand?  (p.13,14)

Then we must judge when to make a commitment. This commitment effects our character, and when taken in sum represent what we have become, spiritually,  at some point in time.  To live fully one  must remain capable of being transformed throughout life, defying prediction.  We can never know ahead of time when transformation will happen.  This not knowing is important self-knowledge.

6.     The old Greek admonition, Know yourself, was not meant to mean, “Be predictable.” Rather it meant, be humble.  Self-knowledge in this sense is creative, because it assumes that we must remain strong enough to end a relationship, if and when that becomes necessary for our continued growth.

7.     To change the world around us we must create new unions, new corporations, new associations that can support a new way of doing things.

8.     Shame is about having secrets.  It is about our “inner sanctum” which powers freedom to change,  assuming others, do not know certain things about us ( those things that must change). When others know too much about us we become imprisoned by that power they have over us. Knowledge of others is paradoxical in this sense.  To learn about the meaning of our experience we need to reveal our  thoughts on significant issues to others.  But we always do this at a risk, so we had better to select our friends with care for this reason.  Knowledge other have about us is both a path and a barrier to understanding reality.  To some extend, we become what other allow us to become.  Our friends forgive  our ignorance, judging us subjectively,  and our enemies judge us objectively.

9.     Shame and timing go together. The least important type of knowledge about us can be known can be known at any time; the most important type of knowledge, one can only know at the right time.  ERH’s example is Jesus, who declined to be called Messiah in public until his last hour.  He forbade his disciples to say it.

10.   AT ONE TIME, SOMETHING MIGHT BE RIGHT, AND AT ANOTHER TIME, WRONG. WE CONSTANTLY WALK A TIGHTROPE BETWEEN KNOWLEDGE TOO LATE OR TOO EARLY.  (p.27)

11.   The great problem, then, is to know when to speak or act at the right time. This is the meaning of the message of Jesus. It is the unique message of Christianity, AND THIS KNOWLEDGE, WHEN TO SPEAK AND ACT, CANNOT BE KNOWN BEFORE THE MOMENT IS AT HAND!  (p.29)

12.   REVELATIONS AND VEILS:  To know at the last moment means to remove the “last veil.” Shamelessness is to tear away all veils, to recognize no veils, to not understand that certain things cannot and must not be known until the right time. (pp.29,30)  Shamelessness is to know something out of the context of time  But this does not necessarily mean consciousness of its  significance.

THUS, WHILE THE FACTS OF LIFE TEND TO RULE OUR LIVES, WE DO HAVE POWER AND THE BASIS OF THAT POWER IS PRECISELY TO DECIDE THE RIGHT MOMENT TO DO THINGS. p. 1-31  We must eat, sleep, love, go to work, breathe, etc.  But we can decide when, which makes all the difference in our lives.

And now comes something most people never consider: Great truth also must be forgotten again, because it is so true that timing allows us to know great truth, that obviously later on, it isn’t wise to remember it, when we are back again in the slime and in the — mud of everyday living.  (p.31) …importance decreases when availability increases. (p.34)

13.   To rise above certain personal problems,  such as jealousy, to put them in their place is important knowledge of course, but this sense of how to hold such generalizations in our memory and apply them at the right time is only known through art, specifically poetry, such as in Shakespeare’s Othello.

“Poetry therefore is protecting you against the shamelessness of your own soul, because although the whole issue is there, right before you, it is in the disguise of another man’s or another women’s life….We will have to walk in frankness, thanks to poetry, but not in nakedness.”   (p.36)

Review

ERH describes shame as a crucial link to personal growth.  While we may acquire knowledge in the abstract, we can know its meaning, as related to our lives,  only at the right time.  Shame is the veil by which we protect our inner life until its meaning can be revealed to ourselves and others.  And while there are many forces that must control our everyday behavior, our freedom is in determining the right moment to reveal those inner thoughts.  This essay is a succinct and complete statement of one of his brilliant insights on human nature.

 

GREEK PHILOSOPHY

Lectures 1-26
Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.The principal purpose of philosophy is to go against the trend by creating a new system of organized thought.

2.Greek philosophy arose because their culture was faced with specific needs for knowledge.  Our job here is to understand those needs and become able to apply that type of thinking to our own lives.  This is to say,  to not take the ideas of the Greeks of that day as truth eternal, but to adapt those ideas to our own lives.  As with all historical knowledge, it must first be understood in terms of the context in which it arose, as the first step in applying it to new situations.  All knowledge is historical, in the sense that it was created before the present moment,  and all knowledge (abstractions) is incomplete in the sense that, in the process of application, one must complete the concept by considering the unique elements of the present situation.

To ignore this admonition is to become enslaved by old ideas, blinded by failure to examine the assumptions upon which the principles  were based. The following are the bedrock assumptions of the classical Greeks: 1) Mind and body are separate entities that can be considered in isolation. 2) Homosexuality is an essential ingredient for creativity.  3) Women are inferior to men, both intellectually and socially.  4) Other races are inferior to Greeks. 5)  The laws of nature apply to social life.  All five of  these assumptions destroy society because they represent a gross distortion of reality.

Our tendency is to believe that the way we think is “natural” and  logical. The term “natural” we define as logical and descriptive of the natural environment, with the exception of social life.  In other words, “Greek thinking,” as  ERH defines it, recognized only laws of the natural environment, and his hypothesis is that social life is essentially different from sticks-and-stones and therefore demands different principles to understand it.   What we must do to understand social experience is the major topic of this entire series of lectures.     ALL OUR MODERN SCIENCE AND PHILOSOPHY IS BASED ON GREEK THINKING. These two streams of thought serve different gods; science studies facts of nature, and philosophy attempts to understand – it is an exercise in “wonderment.”

3.Philosophy also determines how to define types of reality.  For instance, science, by categorizing, shows us the parts of complex phenomena such as the many types of plants, minerals, people, etc.  These distinctions are essential to all understanding, allowing us to  identify what we see and what we will be blind to, what we believe to be right and wrong, good or bad.  EACH PHILOSOPHY IS A SEPARATE “SYSTEM,” EACH OF WHICH HAS A UNITY AND PROVIDES A VISION OF A DIFFERENT REALITY.  Obviously one needs to comprehend these predispositions to thinking of different people if one is to understand their experience and respond to it appropriately.

4.Three senses of wonder would allow one to  see the world freshly each day, and this type of wonder is the first step in removing distortions of reality we carry around in our mind.   1) Wonder about things outside you (i.e. in the world). 2) Wonder about God, or the creative force of the universe. 3) Wonder about the nature of humankind. Philosophy helps create these senses of wonder.

5.Society, and therefore ourselves as individuals, cannot continue to exist without paying attention to natural things, to God, and to society, and such attention defines cultures, what they value and reject.

6.Greek Philosophy has 4 historic periods: 1) Pre-history, 800-600 BC, Homer’s era, (The first Olympic games  were held in 776 B.C.).  2) The Classical period, 600- 50 A.D. (This included the work of  Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle).  3) 50-529 A.D., (The period when Greek philosophy  competes with Christianity.)  And finally, 4) 529-877 A.D. (Greek philosophy  hides within Christianity.)  Each of these periods describes a different situation and therefore different interpretations of Western reality during these times.

7.Our modern view of Greek philosophy is  distorted because it was rediscovered in modern times by Western culture, in a reverse order, of the historical sequence. Aristotle was rediscovered around 1230 AD. by St. Thomas Aquinas, Plato was  rediscovered in 1450 A.D., and the pre-Socratic era rediscovered in 1840.  Understanding of “The Enlightenment” was distorted  because these historical  “foreign spirits”  were only understood in a limited version. When ideas are taken out of context and sequence it is not possible to see how changes evolved.  The original spirit of the Greek philosophers was changed by successive events of cause and effect, and this reality was, for the most part,  not perceived by 19th and 20th century thinkers.

Greek philosophy had already been changed by Christianity by 1230 A.D. Originally the Greeks 1) assumed men superior to women, 2) assumed the necessity for slavery, 3) assumed homosexuality was a necessary motivator for creativity, and 4) assumed human nature could not change.  Christianity never assumed any of these four postulates. But the scientific thinking of the Greeks had been absorbed into Christianity.

8.The churches today are therefore Greek in orientation;  Catholics are Aristotelian (Thomistic), and Protestants teach Plato.  Neither teach Christ.  Today Christianity has decided how to interpret both Greek and Jewish tradition, as of the enlightenment.  ERH claims this has led to Bolshevism and Nazism in the sense that these ideas are Platonic, following the Republic.  The U.S. today is dominated by Greek thought.  This means the iron laws of nature will be utilized for prediction and control of social events as well.

9.Christianity is not for everyone because it makes life more complicated. It questions old ideas, offers new ones and requires a pragmatic attitude (i.e. knowledge is given meaning by application and analysis of results).

Lecture 2

1.To philosophize, means  being able to think for one’s self!.  Now the strange story of Greek philosophy is,  “..that every thought that the human mind can think up about the universe, about man, and about the directions of man’s life in the universe, or the treatment of man by the universe has been thought before.”  (p.1)

2.Paradoxically,  the act of trying to be original,  renders one to be un-original!  (p.3)  This sounds strange, but to seek truth requires one to respect truth, which is to follow what has been done.  But if one is a Platonist (respecting ideas over experience), one cannot be truly original.  To find truth, one must test ideas with experience, i.e. be a scientist. In the process one finds new truths by testing existing theories, or finding old theories to be false. “Truth demands from us submission, obedience to truth.”  (p.3)

3.One creates a future only by obedience and service.  One cannot be self-seeking and find the truth or build a future. Science must be respected, as must art, literature, and even ethics and religion.  To serve is to know what a command is. To serve philosophy is to serve a sense of wonder about what the universe is. We need both philosophy and prophesy because we need to ask, “What is the world like and what shall we do about it? ”  (p.5)

4.This voice that pushes us to respond to commands is the voice of God, from an invisible part of us.  What is behind you, you cannot see; but you do see what is before you?  (p.7)

The Greeks emphasize what has come before us, to “make everything visible.”  The Jews neglect the eye. The inner eye, idealism, is a Greek concept, but to exemplify God by trying to see him is pagan.  The Jews say, “Listen to God’s commands,” rather.

THESE ARE TWO BASIC TENDENCIES WITHIN US, TO TRY TO SEE BY MAKING THINGS VISIBLE, AND TO BE MOVED OR PUSHED FORWARD BY HIDDEN FORCES WITHIN US.  WE SEE, ON THE ONE HAND, AND TO LISTEN  COMMANDS ON THE OTHER.

As example would be to assume the future of America lies in manifest destiny (possession of territory), or, by respect for humanity.  One is visible, the other hidden.  TO SEE THINGS IS NOT TO KNOW WHAT TO DO ABOUT THEM!    Each represents only half the truth. (p.8)

Philosophy can never deal with things that cannot be seen. (p.9)

5.           If you read the Bible right, you must be grateful that in one great case, you know all the consequences when people do not obey orders from the invisible.  And in Greek tradition, you can see what happens when people neglect reason, neglect the search for nature, and causes, and science, because the Greek philosophers have founded all the sciences we enjoy today. (p.9)

Greek thinking, philosophical thinking, represents the powers of seeing.  Jewish thinking represents the powers of responding to commands (the invisible).

6.The 1900’s represent the height of Greek influence in Europe.

7.The chief reason philosophy cannot be the sole nourishment for the mind is that it comes too late. It can only occur “after” an event has become manifest or corporeal in the world.  To act at the right time requires an intuitive sense, which is to say a sense of listening to an inner voice, or to a command.

8.Christianity is a coalition of Israelic, and of Greek philosophy; Of prophesy (listening to commands) and of trying to see the world, of ethics (religion) and of science.

Here ERH breaks into an engaging analogy between the power of polarity and the increasingly higher forms of life, especially creative life.  Inanimate life has no polarity, it is just there; algae has divided cells; mammals have female and male.  Now, when it comes to the spirit, “…the embrace, the mutual polarization is even more needed.” (pp.13,14)  We need, not just love, but also enmity, i.e. one must love the enemy if one is to respond and see all of reality.

9.The notion of combining opposites is the condition of seeing more of the universe, of reality.  To marry (truly), to belong to groups, to combine opposing religions is to see more reality, to transcend beyond the individual to the greater, more inclusive form of which the individual is only a part.

This is, of course, a paradox, that the individual reflects the whole, and the whole includes the part; neither can exist without the other.  Subject and object cannot be separated in understanding reality.  The scientist is the subject, and he/she must be objective about his work.  But he cannot be true to his work unless he loves it, and to love is to be subjective and creative.  Thus, the scientist can never explain his passion for science by using his method.  One deals with the outside (Greek thought), the other with inside (Jewish thought). It is a puzzlement, a paradox!

Any intellectual act has two sides to it, faith and reason! Religion and science – one must believe (have faith) that one knows enough to act when necessary; otherwise, knowledge without action is impotent. Truth must eventually be actualized.  This does not mean that all knowledge per se must be acted on, but that which is acted upon must be related to the effect of that action on the welfare of the community.

10.The acquisition of the truth is philosophy,  but that truth must permeate the individuals’ being if it is to have power. To permeate means one is impelled to act on it, and to act on it requires faith. FAITH AND ACQUISITION MUST NEVER BE SEPARATED IF KNOWLEDGE IS TO BE POWERFUL.

To begin action requires faith, because one doesn’t know how that action will come out.  Thus, “…faith and knowledge pertain to the same content.”  (p.22)

11.Friendship, love, loyalty, hate, and other emotions are acts of faith.  Faith is based on passion,  knowledge upon reason.

12.Ancient Greek philosophy was based on an integration of reason and religion, upon knowing and believing, upon receiving a command and acting upon it, upon seeing and believing.  Contrast this with today, where we have philosophy only and no felt need to believe.  Contrarily, religion today is based upon believing and even acting, but without questioning and interpreting the consequences.

Lecture. 3

1.All second-hand life, such as book knowledge and knowledge acquired from others, is not real life.  It is painless; there are no commitments to be made, only the work required to acquire it.  TO ACQUIRE TRUTH AND UNDERSTANDING IS DIFFICULT!

a.Youth, metaphorically, can be defined partially as absorption of information before judgment is acquired. The act of acquisition is more or less mechanical, often automatic, not requiring analysis except perhaps with abstractions like learning mathematical formulas.

b.The act of acculturation, of growth occurs when one needs to apply the knowledge. Then one begins to participate in real life.  Acculturation takes courage, but its result is understanding.

c.As one becomes more understanding of life, as one comprehends real meaning, knowledge becomes more organized as it becomes associated with your own life experience.  (p.1)

2.Knowledge at inception may have no meaning for us until we need it; it doesn’t speak to us, and we can best store it in memory for future use. Only when we need it and apply it,  only when we use it to engage in problems of our personal experience, do we then understand.  When we apply knowledge and analyze its consequences, when we philosophize we are really living; only then are we awake, so to speak.  Many people go through life half-awake at best!

Each sunrise, each repeating experience, like getting up in the morning, is different, effecting us differently depending upon our readiness for it; and no two people see the same experience as the same. (p.3)  THIS STATEMENT IS RELEVANT TO THE CREATION OF MEANING AT EACH MOMENT OF APPLICATION,  AND IS CRUCIAL TO UNDERSTAND. THE MEANING OF FACTS IS CONSTANTLY CHANGING. It varies with different approaches to life.

3.Man is a riddle, and his life full of mystery. The process of acquisition and understanding is mysterious.  ERH points out that Lucretius, in the beginning of his work, THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE, recognized his need for all the help he could get.  He begins by invoking the muses:

“…yours is the partnership I seek in striving to compose these linesOn the Nature of the Universe for my noble Memmius.  For him, great goddess, you have willed outstanding excellence in every field and everlasting fame.  For his sake, therefore, endow my verse with lasting charm.” (p.3)

We hope for answers to three questions:  1) about the world, 2) whether our teachers will care enough to speak the truth to us, and 3) whether they have something of value to say to us.   In short, to be creative, to think and learn for ourselves, is difficult, and we need all the help we can get!  Lucretius recognizes this, and is asking the mysterious powers of the universe to be his partner.

His creative act  begins with an invocation, which is to accomplish 3 things, 1) insight into what he is going to treat, 2) understanding for his intended audience, and 3) authorization for himself to treat it (i.e. for original work, the spirit that enables one to write it).

4.All of this is necessary because our own thought and actions under our control represent only a small portion of the forces that determine the outcomes.  When we marry, when we speak out in a forum, when we create a hypothesis and test the elements of its success, these acts begin as a mystery to us.  One would say then that “SUCCESS LIES IN THE HANDS OF THE GODS,”  only partially under  our control.

To act, to learn, to understand anything of basic value is always difficult, and we should recognize this, be humble before the forces that overwhelm us.

You must understand, gentlemen, that with all your cleverness and all your conceit as modern men, for the great actions of your life, like marriage, you totally are in the hands of the gods.  (p.7)

To act, to risk, to suffer the pain of original thought is to have faith!  Lucretius, Schopenhauer, and Nietzsche all were atheists, but they invoked THE SPIRIT OF THEIR FATHER.  Original thought, by definition, is a turning away from all teachers, accepting risk,  and taking responsibility for one’s actions.

5.The Muses in antiquity were the powers by which one participated in the divine mind. One prayed to have muses “participate” with them to engender their creative thought. We cannot be alone in the world, we depend upon others passing things on to us.  It is the same way in a higher plane, invoking the Muses to participate with us.

Thus, prayer is essential to knowing the world.

6.We can  understand only if we are open to experience and have that experience.

You can talk about love, but before you have fallen in love, you don’t know what all the talk really is…

I must not go astray.  I must stick, to speak, to what I really can test every day by my palette, and by my skin, and by my hands.  That’s all I really know.  All the rest is dangerous abstraction.  (p.13)

This is but another expression of the notion that we live in two worlds, one of concrete nature, and the other  the world of ideas.  Each must be understood as part of the larger whole that is reality.

7.It is important also to see that these ideas, idealism and materialism, philosophy and religion, are not opposites, but a matter of emphasis in time.  To begin to see reality, one must begin the command to action, then have the experience, then describe what happened, then analyze (be scientific, and reasonable as to what is to be generalized from it). The first is faith, the second sensual, the third linguistic, the fourth scientific.

8.In real life there can be no absolutes; because we are mortal, everything to us is relative. (p.14)   This is why we need friends.  One is never defined by him/herself alone.  Someone else must be willing to speak for you, or in your behalf, in order for you to be believed.  Our own persona is thus relative to and dependent upon others, the community, a friend, a husband or wife, one’s working group.

9.In making an invocation, one is admitting they are in constant fear and trembling, as Kierkegaard put it.  ” `Tell me O Muse,’ – It is a prayer.  It is an imperative, and then when the Muse tells, I must obey.”  Thus, the writer tells under whose orders he is operating in order to do this.

10.The truth can be, and often is, dangerous.  Commands may be very unpleasant to carry out, but if they are important imperatives they must be.

The truth is admitted to any country only to that extent as people are willing to suffer for it… (p.21)

11.Dedication:  We must also tell readers by what right we must be listened to. What is our source of authority?  God (the Muses), or the world (of knowledge)?

a.Theology deals with the power that makes men speak.

b.Philosophy deals with the things about which we want to speak.

c.Sociology creates the environment within which we speak.

All of these factors are incorporated within the invocation.  “Anyone who speaks believes in God, believes in the world, and believes in society.”  (p.23)  Regarding society, one goes insane when there is no listener. The universal truth of the unity of humankind is that all these three things are always with us, whether we know it or not.

Lecture. 4

1.In the beginning ERH seems to  continuously to put philosophy in context, contrasting it with other things.   First, he points out that as we age our mood changes; Homer wrote the Iliad as a young man, and the Odyssey as an old man.  The first is about war, and the last about peace.

He points out that Homer, who was a poet and not a philosopher, created a foundation for Greek Philosophy lasting until the end of the classical period (St. Augustine, 376 AD).  Finally, he differentiates poetry from philosophy.  Poetry can deal with anything, because it is “just singing.”  Philosophy, by contrast, is about systems of thought, and therefore must define subjects specifically.  (pp.3 to 6)

2.Poetry is “first impression,” philosophy is “second impression” (analysis).  Philosophy (second impression) is very difficult and painful (in terms of intellectual effort) to come by.  To remain a poet one remains naive.  To arrive at philosophy is to arrive at old age, metaphorically speaking.  Figuratively speaking, childhood is poetic, maturity is reflectively philosophical.

Lecture. 5

1.The early Greeks and Jews lived very difficult lives because they had to struggle to evolve the ideas behind philosophy and prophesy. “You wouldn’t like to be a Greek and you wouldn’t like to be a Jew in antiquity. The burden was too heavy.” (p.1)   But our lives are better because we now can learn to live between the two extremes.  The early Greeks and Jews sacrificed in order to work through their ideas. Sacrifice is essential for all progress.

You can all reach your destiny.  You can be blessed.  You can be a saint. You can be a hero.  You can be a mother.  You can be a good man.  But you can’t be happy.  The pursuit of happiness is a chimera. (p.1)

Happiness is a by-product; you can’t aim for it. You can look at the wrapping of the sandwich. “I am interested in the sandwich. You are interested in the wrapping.”  (p.2)  Happiness always has a price, and the price is paid by people who sacrifice for those who find happiness.  All heros and martyrs have a life of tragedy, but those acts help others.

2.Life is not here for enjoyment, life is here to be lived, and it is serious business. All of this speaks to the notion that in youth we look for happiness, while in older age we look for the serious business of living, of becoming philosophical.

3.One needs both philosophy and prophesy because these are integrally related by time, two parts of a sequence.  Because philosophy is analysis, it comes after events.  But what is to motivate us to enter events?  What is to get us to go into the “cold water” of the unknown?  Obviously this must be by command, by the prophesy of what will happen if we don’t. (p.3)

4.Experiment is not first impression, it is set up, and is second impression.  But we cannot live by second impressions alone! We must act before we know all about what we need to do, and thus our expectation, the command we might follow, must carry us into action.

5.Speech allows us to see the relationships between all parts of our experience, between things, between relationships, and even in our inner life, between our emotions and our soul.  The animal, by nature, lives in fragmented pieces of life.  BUT LANGUAGE ALLOWS US TO NAME AND SPEAK ABOUT THESE RELATIONSHIPS, TO VERIFY THOSE IMPRESSIONS WITH OTHERS, AND TO FIND UNITY IN ALL THIS.

Adolph Portmann, a Swiss biologist (c.a. 1956?) wrote about this difference between animals and humans, that humans are formed in a major way by speech, by being told what to believe.  We can thus teach people to burn other people (witches, for instance), or persecute others ala McCarthyism; in short, we are unavoidable products of the powers of speech.  Portmann described animal passion in intercourse, and contrasted this with human needs for love, compassion, sacrifice, the cultivation of noble feelings all interconnected.  One act of animal passion cannot be looked at without injecting these other elements of our experience that are pure creations of speech.  Animals are accepted as rapists, humans are considered subhuman who do the same!

6.ERH goes on to point out that, while we are rooted in nature, our future (logos) depends upon society.  That there are two points of view, 1) that we can remain “natural,” which he believes would condemn us to remaining animals, OR, 2) we must strive to be supernatural, that is, we must try to become civilized.  To become civilized we must take the influence of our speech seriously. (p.9)

7.He continues on this theme of the necessity for language as a basis for society. Logos is created by the authority that makes us speak and tell the truth. (Several pages later he calls this “duty” to the community, to create a future for the community, inferring that as individuals we are nothing if we do not do our duty.)

Ethos is our behavior toward our neighbor. Phusis, the contacts with the elements of reality that do not speak, those not related to us through human speech.

The usual division today is a dualism, ethos (society) and phusis (nature).  But in this country today, ERH asserts, we have omitted logos.  Following the dualism, one addresses what natural laws dictate; we must eat and we must have friends (friendly relations).  “BUT WHAT ABOUT THE TRUTH (that must guide us?),” ERH asks?

He mentions Dale Carnegie,  pointing out that to win friends and influence people is not enough.   To reduce the realm of our experience to nature and society does not ask the question,  “What is important for me to do?  Shall I go against society, or my human nature?”  He tells the story of Dorothy Thompson who saved the life of a European who had a different point of view, and who thought she was foolish for having done such a heroic act.  He knew he would not have done the same for her, and she knew it too, but she acted humanely, helping him regardless.  It became an example for others.

8.The whole world is run by sacrifice.

…if you cannot see your parents go down on their knees, or being contrite, or being overwhelmed by authority that is greater than their purely physical existence, you will always misunderstand life.  (p.14)

To sacrifice, to do one’s duty, to create a future comes before everything, but also at times one’s duty may be to oneself.  (Especially if one believes the community is wrong – to survive individually for the purpose of trying to change the community can be one’s basic duty.)

The child is born and developed primarily under the power of logos, of understanding that his/her parents are contrite, are unsure of themselves before the overwhelming powers of the world.  To be so overwhelmed is why we must pray, pray for the courage to make a considered decision, pray that we see reality itself, pray that we will be up to doing our duty, sacrificing ourselves instead of pleasuring at the country club. (p.15)

9.To say something that hasn’t been said before in the process of uniting a group requires metaphor, a metaphor that those who speak disparate languages can understand.  Metaphor likens something new to something that is known.  [RF – From here to the rest of the chapter, his exploration on “naming” seems incomplete. I admonish to reader to go back to the text.]

Lecture. 6

1.Remember, philosophy deals with “second impressions;” it is the product of analysis which comes after “first impression” experience.

2.ERH then makes a distinction between Homer and Plato (as representatives of philosophy). Myth, he explains, means personal witness (intended truth that hasn’t been verified by others).  It is partial truth, therefore, until given “second impressions” by others.  Myth is a perfectly honorable term without which one couldn’t live, because we often cannot wait to act on second impressions. It is the difference in science between anecdotal accounts and the average of many stories. First impressions are always unsystematic

3.Another distinction between Homer and Plato, between poetry and philosophy, is that poetry deals with small things, with individual things.  Philosophy classifies; it deals with types.  It is the difference between the particular and the general. In classification one cannot address individuals, one can only deal with abstractions, with ideas of generalizations!

Lecture. 7

1.Humanism means that truth is respected, even listened to by our enemies.

All chivalry, all international law, all behavior of truth between modern lobbies, farmer’s union, Republican Party, bankers’ interest, are still based on the humanistic creed that there will be a limit to their mutual slander and the pursuit of their interest. (p.1)

It (humanism) has something to do with admiration, a virtue, a central virtue for everyday living. In the end it means teaching  children ethics, whom to admire, what qualities to admire, and fairness.

2.A FIRST PRINCIPLE OF HUMANISM.  All powers to love (admire) are limited.  There must be a limit to love or hate; we cannot have an unlimited ability in any direction, because this unbalances our judgment.  To love God, ourselves, others, things, or ideas in an unlimited way is to become unbalanced. Just as all items in an organization’s budget are limited, all of the parts of operations are necessary, and one cannot be valued above others, except of course for a special case; but on average they must be balanced.

Believe it or not, friendship is limited.  We only have time to be a friend to so many people, “…you can’t make friends with everybody. There isn’t time.” We  have only so much energy, and must therefore economize and balance our powers, just as we do when achieving or solving a problem.  Just as no tool in the carpenter’s tool box is more important than others, and just as the carpenter doesn’t have time to become expert in everything.

3.A SECOND PRINCIPLE OF HUMANISM.  It forces the expansion of the circle of our admiration. THERE IS A PROBLEM HERE! How does one make a decision?  If our country goes to war, and we know the enemy’s side has a point, what are we to do?  This decision therefore cannot be made on the basis of logic, of our reasoning. IN THIS SITUATION, TO ACT HUMANELY IS NOT ROOTED IN LOGIC.

4.A THIRD PRINCIPLE:  For example, the rich man treats the beggar nicely because he knows that he himself could be in that position some day.

5.TO TEACH AND LEARN, one must either love the subject or the teacher (and students?). The pivotal term here is LOVE. Love is not based on logic.  Any teaching that is to stick, MUST focus love on one of those two, the subject or the students.  “If the subject matter is boring, then the teacher tries to make it interesting and is loved by the students for this effort.”  (p.8)

6.One must always be both specific and general.  Philosophy, in the process of generalizing, strips all particulars, such as specific names as compared with names of “classes” of things. Poetry insists on naming the specifics.  TO DO BOTH IS TO BE HUMANISTIC.

7.HUMANISM is the cult of friendship, with the friend  valued over all else.  ERH points out that in France after the revolution there were two religions, the Catholic church and the cult of friendship.  In other words, the humanist values friendship at least as much as, if not more than, above wonder at the universe, its creator, and all its mysteries. (p.11)

8.We all need cults, of course, these minor gods may be our goals (such as completing a book), ideas, money, or some other idol. These keep us going, and we value these loves or we fall ill. [RF – by extension I believe he implies, that such “need” comes with the territory of feeling creative, and in some control of our lives.]

9.           In all real societies, there are no synonyms.  You cannot call the president of the United States “great chief.” He is the president of the United States…If you don’t call him the president you turn him into a tyrant….All original speech is metaphorical. (p.12)

This statement is completely consistent with the previous point (several chapters back) that second impressions (philosophy) speak in terms of categories, and first impressions, (speech relating directly to experience), speaks in specifics.  To call God a “supreme being” would put him in the same category as the head of the Freemasons, as a class of “types.” A real society is one in which people speak to and about each other, not as classes.  To classify is to kill off the individual personality and make someone into “one of many.” The use of metaphors in poetry is an attempt to return to the specific, the uniqueness of an individual.

Homer’s Achilles was not just “another human being,” he was a lion among men.

Philosophers cannot create obedience and loyalty, which are essential to the first orders of life, essential for friendship and community building.  This is because their “forte” is generalization.

10.We know who we are by whom we address. To say “father” or “mother” means one is a son or daughter; to say “brother” or “sister,” one is a sibling; to address “Mr. Smith” or others, we increase our status.  Prayer is the formal addressing of the power over us,  “…a desperate attempt, prayer,…to sing yourself into your proper place in the cosmic order.”  It elevates us in status as the children of God.   (pp.18-19)

11.Real prayer is specific, and it cannot be printed because it must be said at a specific occasion; at another occasion it has a different meaning. THE GREATEST THINGS IN LIFE ARE THE MOST FRAIL – A LIFE, A STATEMENT MADE AT THE RIGHT TIME (WHICH HAS THE MAXIMUM INFLUENCE), A PRAYER.  LANGUAGE (SPOKEN HONESTLY, SENSITIVELY,  AND AT THE RIGHT TIME) CANNOT BE BOUGHT OR PUT IN A SAFE. There is no opportunity to recapture those moments, to repeat them.

Wars are not ended unless each side prays for peace.  Otherwise, war is still in some hearts and it goes on, waiting for an opportunity to rise to the surface.

Life goes on by specific statements, not generalizations, this is why the Greeks were conquered, first by Alexander, then by the Romans; at those times they were still fighting among themselves, victims of thinking in terms of generalizations, of not speaking about specifics.  Peace, any type of peace, cannot be made by philosophers or by poets, but only by those who pray for peace.

12.The first one third of the phases of Greek Philosophy, roughly from Thales to Socrates, was to speak only in generalizations, only 2nd person (he, she, it), to eliminate first impressions. Socrates said there were some good things in unique events – that is where life is lived. Parmenides was at the height of this period. Descartes (1596-1650) did the same.  He was Greek in this thinking!  He sought generalizations without specific experience first!

13.The genius of Thales of Miletus was that he conceived the idea of the common denominator, that is to say, classes of things.  To classify is the essence of philosophy.

Lecture. 8

1.ERH begins by making a distinction between “public” and “people” The former an assembly of individuals with no common spirit which would unite them.  Their characteristics would be interest only  in the present, in entertainment or immediate gratification. The latter consider themselves a community; their  characteristics would include, a common spirit, interest in maintaining a community and in building a future.

2.Homer wrote to a “public,” for their entertainment. (p.13)   When one goes “public,” one has entertainment.  When there exists only public, one has tyranny, or the foundation for tyranny, because a “public”, as disparate individuals, has very little power to resist. (p.13)  By definition, a “people” have enough power to resist.  Whenever we philosophize, we gather people we do not live with from day to day.

3.ERH points out also that the purpose of poetry is to relieve the everyday tensions by way of stories, (even though those stories have mostly metaphorical wisdom).  Poetry also is for the purpose of inspiring. But art does not solve problems, win wars or begin movements.

4.The great problem of philosophy is to ennoble.  With our leisure time we can attain entertainment, but we also need to spend time creating a future, and that is what philosophy will help do.  But it must be supplemented by other activities, right action, in addition to our monetary work.

5.Paradox – atheists and gods:  We live with and must create paradoxes.  Humankind is not mathematical, we must try to find balance and unity among contradictions in life.  For instance: 1) We must leave our family, eschew them when we are mature, when we marry.  We must protect the integrity of the two unities (our own new families and the home of our parents).  We must, in other words, attempt to remain part of both. 2) We must be atheists, invoke the gods, and speak from the authority of our teachers.  All authorities act in the role of a god by virtue of the truth they proclaim. Each god competes with the other, but we must find unity and balance between them, or we cannot make life’s decisions with fruitfulness – imbalance would tear us apart just like an unbalanced flywheel.

Examples:  Lucretius is an atheist, an Epicurean worshiping the material world.  Yet he invokes the gods (Muses) and speaks  through the authority of his teacher, Memmius. Nietzsche likewise pronounced “God is dead,” then went mad and (crossed himself – so much was he instilled with Christianity).  Gods represent the source of strength and creativity within us, whatever we believe a source of power might be, i.e. materialism, money, knowledge etc. Public pronouncements are not necessarily the indicators of our “gods”, until they are backed up by actions!

Further examples:  Our different social roles are often contradictory.  To be a father, son, friend, husband, community member all may demand  different (contradictory) behavior.  The secret of balance must be in the specifics of  the situation.  That is, each action must be the right action at the right time.  One time we may need to emphasize our fatherhood, sacrificing other roles at that moment, and so on.

In another context, there is a time to philosophize, a time to be a poet or listen to poetry, a time to act.  In short, we must balance these contradictory purposes, acting (overall) in a balanced way. Scientific inquiry would be another example; there is a time when science should be limited. The atom bomb, and gene splicing would be examples of perhaps not doing something just because it can be done!

6.           …philosophy is the perpetual sense of wonder to distribute in us our power to find new truth, our power to get along with our fellow man, and our power to dominate dead matter.  And to distinguish what is dead matter, what in you and me, for example, is just routine, is a question for our changing concept of nature, our changing concept of theology, and our changing concept of ethics, or of mores, or morality of the social sciences.  (p.21)

7.Thales is the driving power of Greek philosophy because he showed the world the tremendous power of generalizations.  Generalization, in turn, allows different civilizations to find common ground. It thus has a civilizing effect.  The effect of Thales was, for instance, to eliminate the severity and much of the sacrifice of the many local cults in Greece. (p.22)

8.Thales, Anaximander and Anaximenes tried to establish three ideas about the universe: 1) We must generalize to find common qualities of things so that the cultures can communicate about the universe (i.e. all matter is one).  2) Thatthe source of matter has no limits, and therefore cannot be called by a specific name; it must have a general name. And  3) We exist in a living universe (natural and social), as compared to one which is purely physical (i.e. dead).  The universe experienced by man is created by his consciousness of it!  IF THE UNIVERSE IS NOT TREATED AS ALIVE (AS IT IS NOT BY THE AVERAGE PERSON) THEN ONE FEELS FREE TO KILL OR TO POLLUTE  IT.  LIVE THINGS SPOIL, DEGENERATE,  AND DIE.  WHEN WE TRY TO MAKE FOOD THAT WILL NOT SPOIL, FOR INSTANCE, WE DETRACT FROM ITS NUTRITIOUS VALUE.

Lecture. 9

1.We live by making decisions, about what is important, about what is alive, about what must be acted upon, etc

2.Russian Communism was ultimately seen as impotent because it saw the universe as dead consisting only of dead matter. [RF- I believe he means by this that human beings in this state follow iron rules of nature. I have spoken to any number of scientists in the U.S. who believe the same.]  America has made the opposite mistake, that every country is as alive as every other country.  The former and latter are both untrue; the universe is alive  and all countries have a different level of aliveness (vitality – a different ability to regenerate themselves at any given point in their history).

3.One must attempt to see reality as best he/she can.  During ones lifetime one must try to make one original statement (be creative), as did Thales, Anaximander, Anaximenes, or Heraclitus.  Their bit of  originality was not great,   but that enough for them to have lived for 2500 years in the history books.

4.Religion means sacrifice, to practice it truly is demanding, to live such a life is not easy. For Greek philosophy to have become established, for Christianity to have become established, for any religion to have become established was brought about by great effort, sacrifice, bloodshed. Quite something!

Bloodshed in itself is not wicked.  There is good and bad bloodshed.  To spill blood in an effort to throw off tyranny is good,  freedom is always bought by blood.

5.Parmenides is more original than Plato or Aristotle in that he pronounced the radical aim of philosophy is to “…penetrate against his own local times and his own temporal limitations.”   (p.10)

The implication of this is fundamental,  it is a turning inward, to live in the mind only. In the mind anything is possible, it is a dream world where one is completely in control.  ERH asserts that Parmenides was the first to create a community based on homosexuality, a community that could engage in sex without consequences, without worrying about social taboos, etc.

…Greek philosophy is an attempt to get outside first impressions, and that always means to get outside the city.  And that always means to try to do without the community and its austere rules of chastity, and of probity, and of honesty….and so you can have various ways of escaping.  (p.11)

So the “life of the mind,” taken to extremes, can be a way of escape from community demands, but extremes always destroy the community. Robinson Crusoe was a story about such escape.  To escape for a limited period of time may be beneficial in the short term or in one instance, but as a permanent act it would destroy society!  It means as well that one is selfish, that one would not sacrifice for the community.

6.Parmenides represents the beginning of IDEALISTIC philosophy.  It creates, as the true reality, that which lasts (for the life-time of man on earth), the reality of essences of things, the idea behind the material reality. It would be like viewing the world from on high, like an eagle, lacking all detail of the unique. This is the tendency of “The Ivory Tower,” attempting to gain a foothold in the everlasting, the eternal truth.  ERH likens any isolation, college, sickness, 40 days and 40 nights in the wilderness, for instance, as necessary but not to be mistaken for the norms of everyday living.

7.ERH contrasts “first impressions” with the establishment of truth.  First impressions describe “the way of opinion,” they are raw facts or data, yet unfiltered by either your own experience or that of others, subjective, personal, unique. But this personal experience may bear little relationship to the experience of others.  Language and community must be based on common agreement, a very different order of information. Therefore, another name for what we call “truth” becomes a political issue, established by common agreement. Common agreement, however does not tell us anything about the social effect of acting on information. “Truth” as a term describing social experience must be differentiated from the truth of natural science. The meaning between the two is very different. Social truth must be tested in terms of its effect, damaging or efficacious, to the community. This is why three generations are required to establish, “the way of truth.” In Biblical terms, this is the meaning of the phrase, father, son and Holy Spirit, representing three generations to establish social truth. The way of first impressions describes personal life, the way of social meaning becomes the basis for communication and a path to a future of social peace. Parmenides was trying to escape the transience of opinion and that was why he is acclaimed as a great original thinker.

8.The genius of Heraclitus (succeeding Parmenides by a century) was that he said we must find truth, not just in terms of second impressions, but also within the realm of first impressions.  This, ERH claims, is the essence of the Christian contribution, that truth must be all-inclusive of experience. (p.20)

This notion of Heraclitus went against the opinion of the day, and no doubt would go against scientific and Humanistic opinion today.  It would go against the scientist/philosopher who worships “second impressions”, and against traditional Christian religious opinion today, which, in reality, represents the same scientific philosophy. It also opposes the sensualists (first impressionists).  Truth must include felt experience, as well as generalizations. HERACLITUS WAS THUS AGAINST BOTH THE EPICUREANS (FIRST IMPRESSIONISTS), AND THE RELIGIONS, thus he suffered. and …..

…anybody who is willing to be the underdog, who is willing to suffer, can know the truth. (p.21)

9.ERH claims the worst destroyers of community are the “luke warm”, those who go along with the powerful, but will not stand up to them when necessary.  The luke war represent the majority of any population.

[RF – Now for the first time I understand the difference between philosophy, as defined here, and Christianity as he defines it, although it would seem that by this definition Christianity has become corrupted into reflecting second impressions only.  Jesus, according to ERH, symbolized the merging of first and second impressions by his honoring the law, on the one hand, and breaking it on the other.  That is, he (Jesus) realized that rules were essential to community, but by themselves they were always incomplete, oriented toward past experience, not considering the new.  In breaking the law he reflected  the necessary path to seeking the truth, his suffering on the cross symbolized the sacrifice necessary  to correcting the law and therefore helping the community survive. ]

10.The remainder of the chapter presents readings of translations from Parmenides.

Lecture 10

1.The purpose of this chapter is to show the “idiocy” of the view that “second impressions” are of  superior importance to actual experience, as if they could be separated. .  Another way of stating this, ERH implies is to say that “observers” are superior to “participants” in social events.

2.The fundamental notion of the Parmenidean theory of criticism is – looking at any event only after the fact. Parmenides failed to see the difference between natural and social events.

“The general plebiscite in this country among the college students is that the critic is cleverer than the poet…The critic is paid for passing silly judgments.  Costs him nothing. Absolutely nothing.”  (p.5)

Parmenedean philosophy, “nature first,” means dead things first.  It is like saying that “the laws of nature are more true than the laws of men.” If this were true, ERH asserts, then no country would ever exist because no laws of man, or country, or improved community occurs without sacrifice and often bloodshed!. (p.6)  One might observe that modern psychology seems to follow this trend, as it seeks the “laws of nature” to find out how man behaves,  omitting, it would seem, the notion of how man should change according to what would be right socially.  For instance; greed is natural, selflessness is an effort away from this tendency, and must to taught if we are to create peace.

3.Nature doesn’t contradict you, nature, as with animals, doesn’t know progress, doesn’t know the human spirit, doesn’t know self-denying ordinances. Nature isn’t ascetic, it cannot renounce any claim.  Marcus Aurelius followed nature and destroyed the Roman Empire by putting his own son in as his successor, as  Claudius did before him. Vital decisions, i.e. those related to regeneration of human community, are not natural.  (p.11)

4.Parmenides is followed in time by Sophistry, by people who attempt to cheat you by way of isolating situations from the stream of history; all of which is then followed by tyranny; the price paid for cheating.  Our mass media, and most, if not al,l institutions lean in this direction  today. They tend to be self-serving rather than working for the benefit of society.

5.Sophists were the original community consultants.  In  the beginning it was an honorable profession, later evolving into corruption.

6.Those who ask questions are always “outsiders,” and those who claim to answer are insiders; these are basically two different societies.  Those who are willing to test for answers can be said to be  “within,” included as part of a group.

Questions can be derived only from answers; many questions (most) either cannot be answered,  or are nonsense, which in either case they should not be asked. Does God exist? has no answer. One can ask a question to establish a fact.

As long as you try to answer every question of a child, you are their  slave, but not their educator.  Because there are wrong questions and right questions.  Certain questions can be asked, and certain cannot be asked.  I am not against asking questions,…  (p.19)

Parmenides originated raising questions about things, and the Sophists asked many questions. The next step in the evolution of philosophy was to determine what questions were worth asking.

7.Socrates represents the beginning of this third period.  He says, THE LAW CANNOT BE QUESTIONED. Especially, one cannot ask, “When can I disobey the law?”  The questioner has no right to ask this if they may profit from the answer. One can ask it, if one asks in behalf of others! (p.20)  Heraclitus anticipated Plato on this issue.  Socrates proved his point by being willing to die for it.  The law of the community must be obeyed unless to question it will not profit the asker.

8.In sum, questioning in the abstract is, at best, a waste of time, and at worst, can be destructive to community. Many, many questions are asked for which there is no single or clear answer; the result is endless speculation.  Questioning can only be beneficial in a specific situation where a specific problem is presented.  In this case the outsider, the consultant, the “observer” who has no direct stake in the consequences of any decision (answer) is always secondary in importance to those who are “insiders,” those who do live with consequences!

In sum, certain questions can be asked in a given situation, and otherscannot, otherwise decadence will occur, just as the child is allowed, even taught that he/she has a right to question anything and so asks endlessly.  There are certain questions he must not be allowed to ask!

9.The point of the Socratic method is to question the questioner, ask, “Who is asking and why?”  Those who are insiders, who are members of an institution, have a right to ask and criticize their own institution, but outsiders who do not live under those rules have no understanding of the consequences.    A CRUCIAL QUESTION TO THE QUESTIONER IS ALWAYS, “WHO IS ASKING?”

10.In Greek history, Parmenides represented opening analysis to outsiders; all things could be discussed, he said. Heraclitus previously had maintained that the laws of the city had to be obeyed.  But unlimited questioning, just as unquestioned laws, represented an unbalance.  Socrates represented the bringing of these two in balance, of limiting the rights of each, where BOTH THE LAWS OF THE CITY AND THE QUESTIONER CAN BE QUESTIONED.

Socratic philosophy meant that man must both question the city, and be patriotic.

Lecture 11

1.One may need several philosophies to get through life, one for each different mood.

2.A nation is “…a unit of man plus a spiritual center that contributes to mankind.” (p.2)  America is a nation because of the Declaration of Independence. A nation also needs a church to nourish the spirit of the people, who in turn nourish the government.  Governments do not nourish people, it’s the other way around.

3.Philosophy, because it attempts to seek truth and these truths may offend persons of certain values or beliefs, may not be acceptable to some cultures.  HOWEVER, because it seeks the truth, it becomes a common ground by which one nation can speak to another nation. Philosophy goes against trends; that is its purpose.  Philosophy contributes a standard of truth to all parochial dialogue.

4.Textbooks should be filled with a history of the people who suffered during some crisis, e.g. a revolution, or the McCarthy era, then students would know the purpose of a revolution and the price paid for reform.

5.Common sense is “the trend” in thinking today, but it is by definition from the past.  Philosophy is against common sense because it represents a new way of looking at things. Every great advance in thinking has its origin in a new way of looking at the world. Old and new represent one of the many paradoxes of experience. We need both.

6.The price of change is always pain, – in the extreme. This may mean war and bloodshed. All new things must pay this price for existence!

7.For a democracy to exist, there must always be a separation of church and state, because theologies are always monistic, and all people would not be given freedom if it were otherwise.  In Russia the head of the state is also head of the party (communism is a religion by any definition). This always leads to tyranny.

Lecture. 12

1.Nationhood:  a nation is a group of people who can live together with a common spirit, a common philosophy, so to speak.  A mass of land with people on it is not by definition a nation; it is a miscellaneous conglomeration where anarchy may break out at any time unless tightly controlled by force.

2.To have a nation, there must be a cohering philosophy. Today in the US such a philosophy is represented by the university.  Its function is to criticize the elements of everyday life.  TO SO CRITICIZE, ONE MUST HAVE SOME CONCEPTION OF WHAT THINGS IDEALLY SHOULD BE LIKE.

…before you know how society should look, how can you know what to do about juvenile delinquency?…I mean, don’t you see that juvenile delinquency’s importance can only be stated after you know what’s important?  (p.3)

3.Philosophy is the first step in preparation for action, and the taking of action is crucial to the meaning of our pronouncements. Part of our burden is to sense when action should be taken, otherwise opportunities are missed, and it becomes too late. Desired change cannot occur until another propitious moment comes. Much more suffering occurs in the interim.

4.It is often the martyrs who speak up first about what is wrong.  ERH cites Billy Mitchell, who said after the first world war that the job wasn’t finished; he was court-martialed for this speech.  At times we need more martyrs.

5.THE GOLDEN MEAN: We have no idea what this is unless we know the extremes. Stevenson and Eisenhower were political examples in the 50’s. Democracy is maintained when there is a balance of power.  When politics, philosophy, and law are singularly controlled, then civilization collapses. THE GOLDEN MEAN results from tremendous suffering on each side.  The golden mean results when someone “sticks out his/her neck.” It does not mean the middle road all the time, but rather, a balance of actions over time.  There is justifiably a time to take extreme actions occasionally.

Thought cannot be bought with money, it only occurs when independent thinkers compete and interchange ideas.

6.Independent thinkers are expensive; it would be more economical to have only one around, but then the issues of life cannot be measured by the criteria of the marketplace.  Competing individuals, competing universities, competing cities all represent vitality, but are expensive in commercial terms.

Small is beautiful; to many people doing the same thing diminishes the importance of the individual.  The principle is that the presence of masses always diminishes the importance of the individual.  In Greece, the great philosophers came from small towns.  Bigness is a principle of commerce, but not of vitality,  just as one wife is more precious than a hundred.  “That’s why  businessmen are all Moslem, they would like to have any number of wives.” (p.12)   For “practical” things numbers may seem good, but for precious things, it is the opposite.  A true friend is better than 100 chums.

In another context, vitality, creativity, original thinking comes from the ability to be astonished!  But this means as well that one must choose to be astonished over only a few things, one at a time with time to think about them. The general tendency today is indifference toward many experiences, we seem to be astonished over insignificant events however, and be astonished every day, but only momentarily. .

These notions about vitality, of creative thinkers (people who can think for themselves), cannot be educated by mass production, by commercial principles.  This means yes/no testing,  identical curricula for 1000 students, standardized testing, only teaching for  memorization, does not promote independent thinking.

7.The principles for governance, for economics, and for vitalization of people, must differ. As an example, for economics, economy of scale is important because monopolies decrease cost; for government, interest in protecting the country’s economics of scale should be  less important than vitality, ideas, defense, etc.  For the individual and original thinking, smallness is the incubator.

8.Modern times, roughly since 1900, are modern because some basic relationships have changed. Before 1900 AD, the economy followed from the larger, more pervasive institutions of church and state.  Today it is just the opposite, as the economy is the major international concern in every country, and philosophy and government must follow.  We do not have a one-world church or state, but we do have a one-world economic order.  Oil is an obvious example.

“…we have to try to find a language of philosophy, of criticism, of freedom…which stands up under the impact of our economy..” (p.18)

[RF – the inference being that today economics has undue influence on all other crucial elements of the country such as justice and freedom. Another example would be that, it makes no difference what country controls the Suez or Panama Canals because they must be geared to a world economic order.]

9.In past times philosophy, theology and government stood for unity.  No longer is this so; it is economics. ERH also reminds us that this is another example of the dominance of the economic order over concerns for the health of the living part of nature.

…`nature’ is what you see out of the window when you look out of your family livingroom. That which is not your immediate self you call `nature,’ which is separate from you, which you can only see with the help of your family through their eyes, through their education, and through the faith they have implanted in you… You live without philosophy, but with the World Bank. The Greeks couldn’t live without philosophy, because the philosophy gives them direction.  (p.19)

Nature, to the Greeks, was something to be looked at, to find something to do with.  Today the world has been “economized,” and there is no more “outside.”  To look at nature in terms of “the outside” is to think in the Greek mode. It breaks up our experience,  separates the “inside” from the “outside.”

This point of view is the same with all parochial thinkers, who see the world only in the form of “them and us.”  “Us” is inside, “them” are outside, outsidemy church, outside my profession, outside my culture, social class, trade, family etc.

10.The opposite point of view is to see the world as one, a creature of God our creator. We are then part of the world of the stars, of the forests and animals, of other cultures, all as God’s creations.

11.Today, the economy seems so big that we feel little power to influence it, either by theology or philosophy, or by government. WE FEEL POWERLESS, AS ROLLO MAY ASSERTED:

Cassandra:  Apollo was the seer who set me this work…

Chorus:  Were you already ecstatic in the skills of God?

Cassandra: Yes; even then I read my city’s destinies.

–from Agamemnon, by Aeschylus

The old myths and symbols by which we oriented ourselves are gone, anxiety is rampant; we cling to each other and try to persuade ourselves that what we feel of love; we do not will because we are afraid that if we choose one thing or one person we’ll lose the other, and we are too insecure to take the chance.

The bottom then drops out of the conjunctive emotions and processes–of which love and will are the two foremost examples.  The individual is forced to turn inward; he becomes obsessed with the new form of the problem of identity, namely, Even-if-I-know-who-I am, I-have no-significance.  I am unable to influence others.  The next step is apathy. And the step following that is violence.  For no human being can stand the perpetually numbing experience of his own powerlessness.

–from LOVE AND WILL, Rollo May,pp.13,14 New Delta edition, 1989

12.Our grammar indicates how we see the world.  First and second person, you and me, are alive, we respond to each other and recognize each other’s integrity as an individual human.  To call something “it” means that it is outside us, something for us to be objective about, to possibly conquer, something to “use”.  “Its” have to be investigated by you and me, and examined, because they have no self-consciousness. ( p.25)  Native Americans on reservations are treated as “its” for example.

13.There is clearly a paradox here.  Unity is a necessity in life, because when we see objects or peoples as separated, as fragmented from ourselves or from each other, they become alien to each other.  Our wisdom, in other words, stems from the ability to see constantly larger “unities” in the world.  For instance, our economies are effected by many factors, including demand, attitude toward the environment, our need to consume, our technology, etc. To see these factors as separate blinds us from seeing the disastrous economic effects in the long run. The same is true for all problems, well almost all.

Unity can also tyrannize.  A sustained diet of centralized social control always leads to oppression, because there are no alternatives to submission. How then are we to see or rather to understand the unified concept of “the universe?”  Paradoxically we need a balance between separateness and unity.

14.Of course, we must have both, for at one moment we must decide to see others, or other things outside us subjectively, as equals, as having as much right to exist as do we ourselves.  This would be an ethical attitude. In another moment, we will need to see something or someone outside us objectively, as a scientist might see them. .  Each moment forces this type of decision upon us.  Each point is represented by either religion (seeing ourselves as children of God, and therefore seeing God within other life) or science, as seeing all the world outside us as “objects.”

To always see the world from one point of view or the other turns us into monsters, leading us astray.  For instance, to believe in ideas (i.e. God within everything) is tantamount to acting irrespective of the evidence before us.  But to look only at evidence from a self-serving point of view sets us at war with the everything outside us. (pp.28,29) In essence ERH says that at times we should feel ourselves “above” those outside us, and at times we should feel “below” those outside us.  Love is a good example of the latter he asserts.  We feel inferior to that which we love, and willing to sacrifice for it.  It would be true at times of our country, of our race, or of our friends.

Lecture. 13

1.Insular thinkers, people who come from politically stable communities, do not philosophize. Only when one is in a small country and is forced to reconcile (communicate and relate) with the rest of the world does one need to evolve general concepts.

2.ERH goes on to point out that the Greek philosophers immigrated all around the Mediterranean – Italy, southern France, north Africa, Egypt, Asia Minor.  Athens produced very few philosophers; those who came from the smaller cities and travelled, were the ones who philosophized.

3.These philosophers were trying to find their place as new colonies; they respected the opinions of others and tried to incorporate those opinions with their own.

4.Plato had all of these cities, their ideas and spirit, represented in his academy. (p.12)  These men evolved universal ideas, which gave Greeks a common spirit, a common platform for thinking about the universe, a method of unifying the universe.  They were first, men of action, “…bold pioneers in action.  And they were the wonders of the age.” (p.13);  They were pioneers, and they sought methods for action in the world.

5.Plato attempted to put  all of these different philosophies into relationship. ERH asserted, that Plato was the supreme thinker of the time, attempting to synthesize all previous thought.

6.Democritus put forth the corpuscular theory of light, Pythagoras the wave theory. The former thought the world could be explained in terms of atoms, the latter in terms of numbers. ERH speaks of the universe being made up of people.  The decision as to how to look at the universe IS, OR WAS, A LIFE AND DEATH MATTER TO THE GREEK THINKERS.

…the question: what is the small community and the large universe,..to me? and how do the two fit together:  how much have I to be loyal to the laws of my community: do I have to go to war for my country: do I have to become a citizen of the world?–all this has been thought out here–very carefully, and much better than you think it out. (p.19)

To repeat once again, the genius of the Greek thinkers was that their thoughts were basically original issues that we still must deal with today. What is a species? for instance was the same problem that Aristotle dealt with.

7.Greek thought, however, dealing as it did with secondary impressions (objectively, that is), was not enough.  One can know things objectively, but this isn’t  wisdom.  Objectivity leads to exploitation, but not to new insights.  To find new insights, one must love and be willing to sacrifice.

8.Original thought  comes only through being dissatisfied.  One cannot seek to be content, or to set out to love some specific thing.  Pleasure, contentment, happiness can only be by-products of commitment and love.

9.One must understand facts of life; that it takes the efforts of many to create successes. Many run in a race, but there can be only one that comes in first.  That person would have found no invention without the contributions of all the others.  Plato would have had no ideas to integrate if there hadn’t been 100 other philosophers who contributed original work, work that we have never attached their names to.

The point of all this is that the primary ingredient to a fruitful life is to understand that we can never control fame and fortune for ourselves, but our sense of satisfaction must be within us. The primary criterion for anyone’s success is that he/she kept trying, that he acted on what he knew, that he persisted, and to do this takes love of the subject.  If it is success that one always seeks, one is very likely to either give up, or go insane.

10.More differences in meaning between “first”  and “second” impressions:

A.First impressions, personal experience,  is uniqueness, which, in turn means the basis upon which love, dedicate ourselves or our community and country; indeed the only basis upon which we claim any individuality.  It is the basis for our idiomatic language (english, egyptian, german, etc.) as contrasted with the universal languages of art, music, and mathematics.  To live, individually, means we are not a number, but have a unique name.  Names of our city, country, individuals, songs all represent the notion of our sensual world.

B.Second impressions, are products of thought which thinks in terms of generalizations, of universals, of classes of things.  Numbers indicating quantities are not alive.  The weight of our bodies is not alive, but is part of us that is. Second impressions define the dead things in life which last longer than one lifetime.  Theories, numbers, musical notes, etc. which have no uniqueness.  The note “C” in the musical scale is always the same in every song.   Parmenides attempts to destroy idiomatic language.  Pythagoras attempts to replace idiomatic language with numbers.

In contrast to all of this, Heraclitus believed that, to know reality we must include the meaning of both first and second impressions,  thus utilizing all languages which have been developed for each of these phenomena.  The world of emotion is described by art, including idiomatic language.  The concrete world is described by number.  Both utilize logic.

11.Our universe is made up of two entities at this time, human society and nature and this lays out the need for two sciences to describe the nature of each.  The ultimate creator, God is a power which cannot disappear.  Pages twenty seven and eight of this lecture go on to describe details of these relationships.

Lecture 14

1.Socrates lived in 470-399 BC, Plato in 428-348 BC, Aristotle in 384-322 BC.  Plato spent his professional life developing Socrates’ ideas, and in the process founded his Academy.  Aristotle was a student of the Academy for 20 years.  Plato was a founder, Aristotle a classicist (that is, born into an established method).

2.The evolution of the Greek ideas was that in expanding (generalizing) the learning of the different gods, the Greek thought became more universal. Alexander’s conquests replaced those of Egypt, Babylonia, and Syria; replacing their parochial thinking with the common Greek (more universal) thought.  Rome carried on that tendency after they conquered the Greeks.

3.Socrates was executed because he disobeyed the laws of Athens.  Plato founded the Academy, to the effect of being allowed to conduct free thought (beyond that of the Athenian gods).  ERH likened the Athenian Council to McCarthyism.  BUT MOST IMPORTANTLY, HE POINTS OUT THAT THEY WERE BOTH RIGHT.  SOCRATES WAS RIGHT IN INSISTING ON MORE FREE THOUGHT, AND THE COUNCIL WAS RIGHT IN INSISTING THAT THEIR LAWS BE OBEYED.  PROGRESS COMES WHEN THE LOGIC OF THE THINKING CAN ACCOMMODATE PREVIOUSLY DISUNIFIED IDEAS INTO A LARGER, MORE INCLUSIVE CONCEPT.  Such is the way of progress, and to found a new idea, as in this case of Athens, the law had to be changed. Socrates paid for that change.

Socrates was a tragic character; concepts of “second impressions” came into collision with concepts of “first impressions.” (p.7)  The difference is between abstraction and concrete reality, the world of the mind and of “things.”

4.ERH  enlarges on the foundations of progress and unified relationships.  It was not that Marxism was wrong per se, he asserts, but that the Russians claimed it was the ultimate doctrine.  Lack of change means death to the culture.  This is why the new idea of generalization was so progressive for the Greeks.  Every age, he claimed, in order to maintain vitality needs a new genius to expand its thinking. It needs original thought, like a Freud, or a Marx, or Einstein.  The act of jogging peoples’ thinking is the crucial act, equally or more important than the substance of their ideas!. (p.9)

And therefore there are three miracles in the world, gentlemen.  The logical miracle, they are great minds, in seeming contradiction in every generation renewing the life of our race.  The ethical miracle, that although at first they sound impossible and madmen, we finally bow and make room for the current which they create, for the stream of life which they impart.  And third, that the universe looks different when we bow ethically to the logical power of these spirits.  (p.9)

His reference to madmen here is directly related to Socrates as an example of why he was put to death for moral corruption of the youth.

You will find it again and again that without this careful division of the logical, and the ethical, and the physical, you have no philosophy.  Today man in modern society has no philosophy, because he treats genius also as physical, and God also as a fact.  God is not a fact,…It’s a power that makes you say something new.  That’s something quite different. (p.10).

Pythagoras discovered the power of numbers.

5.Our great problem today is to understand the limitations of the thinking of our age so that we may change and progress.  We tend to have ears and not hear, or eyes and not see the logic of our age by which our thinking has been invested, and therefore limited.

6.The succession of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle demonstrates the notion that three generations are necessary to establish an idea. All three were necessary.  One alone could not have established Greek thought.  Just as John the Baptist (who prophesied the coming of Jesus), Jesus himself, and the establishment of the church, beginning with the Apostles, were all three necessary to establish commonly accepted Christian ethics.

Also, the four cardinal virtues of man – courage, justice, prudence, and temperance – and the three mystical virtues of regeneration (God) – hope, faith, and love, are examples of  the notion of Pythagoras, that numbers have importance, and mean more than how the scientist uses them to quantify. (p.14)  All of these examples indicate the three divisions of labor needed to establish an idea; they also indicate how complex the interactions must be. It is not easy to establish a positive movement, as contrasted with how easy it is to create disastrous consequences.

The complexity of the idea of virtues is indicated by the fact that there is aspecific sequence of events  as well as a specific division of labor. Thus the three represent a unity in which neither one nor another has meaning outside the context of the others.

7.It is very strange, ERH asserts, that in order for one person to be the same (person), he/she must change at different stages in his life. It is very strange, but true.

In order to be the same, because an element of your sameness is that you are, for example, vital.  Now you can’t be vital if (you) only do for 20 years long the same thing.  (p.20)

8.It is clearly difficult to remain vital, to see when and how one should change one’s views, to understand that this represents an example of human power – of the art of living.  Great writings, re-read, have a freshness because of our change in perspective over the years; we understand them in a different light.  Therefore, great works must be re-read.  IT IS THE SAME WITH PEOPLE.  AT EACH STAGE IN THEIR LIVES THEY MUST BE SEEN IN A DIFFERENT LIGHT.

9.Socrates’ contribution was to blend second and first impressions, abstract thought with the consequences of using that thought in the community.  Art for the sake of art, experience for the sake of having experience, anything for its own sake leads to disaster, madness, social sickness, etc.

Plato, writing a Utopia (which means “no place”), means that theory must be put into practice if it is to have meaning.

Lecture. 15

1.Greek thought, for the first time in human history, fragmented reality (experience).  Tribes tell its members, 24 hours a day, what to do, what is right with regard to the spirit, what and how to say things, what is expected from them (in prayers, songs, and ceremonies, etc.).  By contrast, Greek thought began to separate logic, physical events, and ethics.  “Homeric man is a new invention. The `Greek mind’ is something that hasn’t existed before.” (p.1)

This was quite revolutionary. The unity of pre-Homer was the community and the gods that supported it; they were all one.  By contrast, there became many gods, e.g. commerce, the physical world,  the church. Today, for example, the god from Sunday School didn’t need to carry forward into the god of business, beginning Monday morning.

2.Unity in the universe means that we do not have to think, as all is known and understood and agreed- upon.  THE MOMENT THESE ELEMENTS BECOME SEPARATED, one must think, one needs a philosophy to bring some unity back to experience.

3.God is the power that makes you do something you didn’t think you could do.  (p.4)

4.Another distinction between Greek thinking (philosophy) and …”life”. It is simply that “the universe” as a physical entity is dead, and therefore it cannot die.  Greek philosophy, emphasizing “universal truths” as it does, makes no distinction between living and dead things.  Life, by contrast, you and I, the human spirit, can die – and we fear death and do not wish to die.  Greeks did not fear death! Modern psychology does not begin with a fear of death.

They (modern psychologists) dismiss it.  They investigate your retina reactions, and they investigate your muscle….But the general experience of humanity is that we must die…What you call the “soul”, is the power to anticipate your death.  The soul is the power in man who, for the very first days of a child being spoken to anticipates the death of the child.  The soul is not born at birth, but the soul comes into you as anticipation of your death.  That’s what we call the soul.  (p.7)

Another aspect of the greatness of Socrates is that he showed us how to die.  Jesus, on the other hand, showed us that we should live fruitfully. [RF, didn’t Socrates show this also?  ERH tells us that there is no relation between the two, because Socrates was unafraid to die, Jesus agonized on the Cross.  The meaning of Jesus’ death was in the fact of death itself.  The meaning of Socrates’ death was the cause of the city, its law.]

5.Here is the paradox (dichotomy) man always faces when he philosophizes. He is a member of the city, but thinks beyond it (these two roles are in conflict). He looks for the laws of the universe while being temporarily under the laws of the city.  [RF – interesting parallel here with the anti-abortionists today who break the laws of the city “for a higher law.”]

6.Plato, speaking of governing the “Republic,” wants the government workers to take a vow of poverty.  MONKS MAKE THREE VOWS, HE REMINDS US; OBEDIENCE, CHASTITY, AND POVERTY. Obedience comes from the Jews, Chastity comes from India, but Poverty comes from the Greeks, from Plato.  ERH asserts the question remains open, “is it better to be governed by poor or by the rich?  Lincoln was one example of the former, but for the most part we are governed by the rich.

7.In Plato’s idea of governance,  the leader, the physician, or any other worker must find happiness in serving his clients; he should not find happiness for himself per se.  The notion behind this dictum is that, to serve others (to do God’s works), one must tell and follow the truth, and ERH asserts strongly that no one likes the truth.  Thus, there is always hostility toward persons who tell the truth.  (p.20).

The word “happiness” in the Declaration of Independence meant, in 1776,salvation to the founding fathers; ERH asserts that the word happiness was used because it was secular, representing the lowest common denominator of  the word salvation.  Thus, to say  “…in pursuit of salvation…” would not be gross.  If one tells the truth in order to serve his clients, then he is helping regenerate the other person(s) and the community, but that will not have that he will be without hostility in the course of his work.

Jesus on the cross, by having sacrificed himself was saying to the people, “Forget happiness and you will be saved.” (p.22)  The same with Socrates three and one half centuries before. One must do right and not consider the consequences for himself.

Lecture. 16

1.The beginning of life describes the fact that our first experience in the world is social, not of nature.  By the time we can look out the window we have been nurtured by laws of the family and community, and have been given language by which to describe nature.  Thus, we see nature from the standpoint of the social situation.

[RF – THIS IS IMPORTANT BECAUSE, BY INDIRECTION, HE IS SPEAKING ABOUT THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE TWO WORLDS IN WHICH WE LIVE – THE WORLD OF NATURE (DEAD THINGS), AND THE WORLD OF SOCIETY,  (OF MIND AND SPEECH.]

2.ERH points out that, of course, man is a natural evolution of nature, but on the other hand, nature in part is the product of the community, of the seeking of “truth,” of our ability to communicate, to agree on what is real to us.

The meaning of truth, beauty, and goodness is that truth refers to nature (the non-speaking world of what is observed),  goodness refers to (the goal of) the community (mankind), and beauty is common to both.  THIS IS PLATO’S NOTION, THAT BEAUTY CAN BE COMMON TO BOTH NATURE AND POLITICS. THIS IS THE TRINITY OF THE HUMANISTS, PARALLEL TO THE TRINITY OF CHRISTIAN DOGMA.

3.Christianity, on the other hand,  has the trinity that means the continuation of human society, of mankind, through unifying the generations.  The father, son, and holy spirit is the sequence of events – to reconcile the age (teachings) of the father with the age of the son (his reality that is different), through the holy spirit.

No true Christian believes in an unmitigated beauty of nature and of man.  In society there is ugliness (greed, violence, malice, etc.)  Thus, mankind is both good and bad, beautiful and ugly.  “When you see a picture in which Jesus is beautiful, you know it’s by a Greek (thinking) painter…most people today are Greeks.” (p.6)

4.THE EXISTENCE OF THE INDIVIDUAL is caused by language, without which there is no consciousness of ourselves. Therefore, society is not a product of nature, per se, but rather a product of communication, of language. KNOWLEDGE IS DETERMINED BY VOTE OF THE PEOPLE, THE PRODUCT OF AGREEMENT HANDED DOWN FROM OUR FATHERS OR GENERATED IN OUR OWN TIME.

I have no consciousness, You have no consciousness.  But we have consciousness…What’s the truth?  That which I also have to believe…Nobody has (a mind of ones’s own).  I certainly have not. That’s why I have a very good mind, because I have never the illusion that it is my mind. (p.3)

He likens truth and the holy spirit to the light in a light bulb.  You and I may have light, but the power source comes from elsewhere.

5.The universe, to the Greeks, is purely space-driven; it is timeless, eternal, and the “idea” lies out of time. There is no death to the Greeks. Death is ugly, it concerns us individually, we don’t wish to die, and we fear it.

In Christianity by contrast, we must recognize death, recognize that we are corruptible, that we care about things, that some things are beautiful and some are not.  Christianity is steeped in time, and also recognizes space.  Of course the scientist recognizes time, but it is a very different type of time than that of human consciousness, it is a timeless time, with no beginning and no end.

6.With Greek philosophy, truth is like money in the bank, it can stay with you once you have it. It is a release from the fear that nothing is permanent.

THE NOTION OF IDEALISM, is that through thought and numbers we can describe the universe and gain a mental picture of it, and through our imagination, we can describe a picture of good, and both are beautiful and everlasting.  In this concept, thought and nature stabilizes the world.  It is an idealism, and is therefore beautiful.  But these remain SPACIAL ideas, i.e. inside and outside. Truth is found outside, and good is found inside; beauty combines both, and the inside is equal to the outside.

7.Finally, ERH points out that the average person cannot be an idealist in any meaningful sense of the term, because he does not have time to know both the heart and the universe. He/she can only know one, and (normally) the twains never meet. One must be an unusual person to achieve true idealism.  (p.8)

8.Utopia means nowhere.  Utopian belief is that some place is perfect, no greed, hunger, avarice and most of all, peace. This is a product of the mind, just as are truth, goodness, and beauty. These are difficult to experience in real life with any permanence; they are mental products, but not reality. Utopia was originally a Platonic creation.

By contrast, in Christian thought, eschatology is an expectation of something; it is time-bound, considering the beginning and the end.  Eschatology is therefore the opposite of utopia.  ERH asserts that today most Catholics are Platonists, as heaven is a physical concept of a utopia, a place “out there,” an ideal. It is a place in space, but beyond the space of the physicists.

9.*A BASIC DISTINCTION BETWEEN GREEK AND CHRISTIAN THOUGHT. TRUTH, BEAUTY, AND GOODNESS ARE ABSTRACTIONS WITHOUT A VOICE AND EARS OF THEIR OWN. THEY CANNOT SPEAK TO YOU, NOR YOU TO THEM.  IT IS JUST THE OPPOSITE WITH FATHER, SON, AND HOLY SPIRIT.  TO THE IDEALIST, THE UNIVERSE IS SPEECHLESS.  Ideals cannot comfort you, nor advise or criticize you.  An ideal is of your own making, you can neither commune with it, nor it with you.  You therefore cannot commune with nature.  You can only contemplate it.

Now with Christianity, your father and son can speak and listen to prophesy, command, chastise, and comfort confront you.

10.*The important fact of prayer is not the content, but the invocation.  Whom does the speaker address?  In more immediate contexts, the speaker acts in the role of father, and the listener as son.  Obviously the roles reverse during the conversation.

11.*To speak and tell the truth to others, to converse, means that one believes in the holy spirit; the holy spirit is the common understanding about truth (knowledge) that is the basis for communication. (p.21)

Lecture. 17

1.*We cannot trust our personal view of the world until we have verified it with others, especially those who are more alive than ourselves, the wise, the artist, a pretty girl or handsome boy; in this process we join others to agree about what is reality, then feel more secure.  This act quite literally “creates” our reality and allows us to “…join up with life.”

In the process, we have an understanding of our culture, because language becomes connected with acts and thereby gives them meaning.  This we call culture, or the “holy spirit.”

2.Every hour we are conscious we try to join up with people who are more alive than we are; it confirms or creates our sense of reality.  Those whom we wrong, i.e. attempt to manipulate, we don’t love, we treat them as “things.”

3.Science, dealing with objects, things outside us, can understand what they mean. By their writing and speaking, we can understand scientists’ descriptions because they deal with dead things (things that can’t speak back).  But with people, we don’t know what the words mean unless we experience their behavior.  What, for instance, does good mean? It can mean many things, especially in different cultures. (p.4)

4.We must judge people as being either good or bad.  But our responses to the acts of others are always emotional.  “Physical facts can be expressed in the form of indicatives.  But all ethical facts can only be expressed in emotional form of `yes’ or `no’,…in the sense of let us do this, or let us avoid it. (p.4) One must remember ethics are always more important than things not alive.

5.The moment we judge others, we put them outside our circle of associations, outside our personal “unity.”  Thus, we do not judge friends, or family, or loved ones unless we are through with that association.  Ethical rules cannot be generalized into absolutes without creating injustices. There are times, for instance, when lying to a loved one may save their sanity. In the same sense, law always requires interpretation in the light of particulars. Paradoxically ethical and legal and other types of rules must be seen as both absolute and changeable.

ERH cites an example of this point. Once while in the army he found one of his officers asleep on guard duty, a boy of 18 years. Instead of ruining his life by a court-marshal, he slapped him in front of others, which was punishment enough. The young soldier was immature, still little more than a child, he should not have his life ruined. Ethical statements aren’t always good, or bad.  It depends upon the situation. As described below, exceptions to law are acceptable when validated by, and in the presence of others.

6.The relationship between ethics and law is a movement from ethics toward“physis.”  Law is outside nature. The evolution is from act – to precedent – to law – to natural law.

By the concept of the law, ethics are always transformed into physis.  Law is experienced act, respected as precedent, transformed into rule and regulation,..and finally applied to the world outside as always having this implication,  (p.11)

[RF – All of this seems to be related to the act of judgment (freedom to make interpretation). The idea is that, when we are under law or ethical prescription we have less freedom to make judgment.  To interpret the situation in context, one makes two judgments: 1) When it is questionable whether it is  covered by law, one can assume freedom to make an ethical judgment. 2) When there is clearly a rule, but application of the rule would create devastating consequences beyond reason, then one asks the consent of others in judgment.

This is what ERH did with the young officer, therefore not having to submit him to court-marshal.  If this action is committed before others who approve of the action, then justice is judged to have been achieved, and peace returns to the community. ERH exercised the freedom to so act, and saved the man’s future.  Jesus commonly did this, as in his response to the adulteress.

There is another qualification to this type of judgment I feel impelled to mention at this point because I see it so often the case, what I consider a malfunction of justice. That is, the conflict of interest situation. It is to me a foreboding thought that, in the U.S. today, conflict of interest seems to be ignored by these in public service and with the public alike.]

The rule or law that is absolute (perhaps one of the very few) is that if one is to exercise the freedom to so interpret a situation,  then one must first have listened to the experience from the past —

…if you cannot hear the voices that contradict your move, that warn you against it,..If you are just in a frenzy, you must expect the full fury of the law, and of wisdom, and of precedent coming upon you, because you have acted, you see, without listening…The word precedes the act. And the act precedes the law.  (p.12)

The words of the past, the words of wisdom, the words of experiences, the words of suffering, the words of love and sympathy a man must listen to….You must listen to the law.  But you can also create for this friend, you see, a refuge from the law.  (p.13)

One must both respect the law, but also solve an immediate problem if a just alterative to the law is available.  Basically there must be justice, and one must know when to act within the law, or alternatively when to break it.  THIS IS WHY SOCIAL LIFE IS SO FULL OF PARADOX.  The situation determines what the “good” action or “good” response would be, and sometimes it would be one way and sometimes another.  IT IS THESE DECISIONS THAT WE ARE CALLED ON TO MAKE FROM HOUR TO HOUR (if we are alive that is, or if we are to develop a soul).

IN CONCLUSION, OUR CONSCIENCES MUST BE INFORMED AND SYMPATHETIC IN THE PROCESS OF BRINGING ABOUT JUSTICE, if we are to be creative in our acts. The act of judging should be humbling, and one must quiet critics by reminding them that at any moment they themselves may be the subject of judgment (and how would they like to be judged?).

7.The word Bible means, “Book of Books,” which means that all other knowledge takes its meaning from this, which means the measure of all things is in society. [RF – The humanists say, that the measure of all things is “man”; but they seem to think this means one man, or if it is also plural, they dichotomize it into man/community.  ERH enlarges this concept.  The center of science lies in a measurement of space, and the center of human society lies mainly in both time and space. But “inside,” or non-spacial measure, since it is not concrete, must lie in time.

Ethics has always to do with timing…. These are the real problems in life…Ethics is the problem of timing.  Physics is the problem of spacing.  ..what makes you an expert on a thing, where to put things…But when to say things, and when to be silent, shows that you are a human being….If you have only physis and logos, then all knowledge is good.  If you have any ethical situation,..then knowledge has to be timed. (p.20,21)

In other words, one cannot know beforehand how one will act in a hypothetical situation, one must await the moment.

8.ERH goes on to show that to rule a state (and by intimation one’s self), one must know ethics, that is, what to do next, what would be both ethical and just.  This cannot be determined by law-absolute,  as has been asserted by fundamentalists.

He further points out that the ideal Platonic state, as in the philosopher king of the REPUBLIC, has generalized all situations and leaves no freedom to correct possible injustices.  Plato’s Republic therefore rejects the issue of paradox.

[RF – The implication of all of this is profound; ethics is knowing when to reveal knowledge and when to keep it secret.  For effectiveness, for justice, one must have the right amount of knowledge at the right time.  Otherwise, since we cannot know everything, we cannot understand the meaning of anything out of context.  And ethics deals with meaning, or it is nothing!]

9.All great art begins with the knowledge (anticipation?) of the outcome.  What is interesting is how it all evolved, and why, not who was guilty.  This is why ERH believes mystery stories are uninteresting; he isn’t interested in who did it, but why it was done and how it might have been prevented.

Lecture. 18

1.Our dilemma is not only to be a good American, but also to be a good “individual.”  Thus, our ultimate goal is not America, per se, but our (and its) humanity.  We make judgments on each side of this question, knowingly or unknowingly.  To do this we need philosophy.  The problem, then, is not only to attempt to philosophize well, but to insure that we do not build our philosophy on some passing prejudice, or upon some other’s thoughts, without having thought them through and taken responsibility for upholding them ourselves. (p.2)

2..Ethics is related to what you DO, as contrasted with what you say.  If you are a hypocrite your words don’t match your action.  And with ethics, “the word,” what we say, must be re-thought in relation to the consequences of our actions. What we do and say we are doing, may not turn out the way we anticipated.  Then, our ideas must be revised accordingly.  One changes beliefs in the light of experience. Then one must begin anew. (p.4)

3.Logos, the viewing of the universe, comes to us in two different ways.  Exterior things, the stars and stones, come to us through our senses.  But with people the first route by which the universe comes to us is language, from our parents. We are provided for, we are spoken to, and so we learn to understand part of the universe by being told what to anticipate.

4.The speaker and the listener must always trust each other, otherwise there can be no communication in any real sense, because one will not believe the other, and vice versa.  The weak aspect of Greek philosophy, its failure, is that it assumes language is natural.  Nothing could be further from the truth.  Cratylus, Plato’s dialogue on language,  treats it as a tool, as a natural formation of man.

5.Philosophy does not deal with groups, with being “inside” or part of a group, it deals with concepts.  To be a member of a group you must love it, accept it.  Even if one is critical of it, it must be for the purpose of improving it, of not allowing it to die.

6.Defining People:  Unlike “things,” people cannot be defined completely, unless one has stereotyped them (declared them dead in terms of vital, changing human beings.  People who utter empty phrases (who congratulate everyone else’s efforts automatically, and whose remarks we therefore dismiss as unthinking) would be an example of persons rightfully “defined” as spiritually dead.  BEWARE OF AUTOMATIC PHRASES.

This notion is fundamental:  To make an absolute judgment of another means one has ceased to allow them the freedom to change. In this case, one never anticipate that they will act differently. To never change is to never learn. Such a state of mind  virtually destroys all possibilities for meaningful relationships!

…the more a person is alive, the more it is impossible and harmful for you to try to define him. You cannot elect a president of the United States for everything he has done before.  You must expect from him that he will do something that you couldn’t do.  (p.10)

So please, the greatest heresy in all your minds, gentlemen, is that it is meritorious to begin a speech by saying, “I shall define my terms.”  On no important thing can you do anything but speak English.  And English is much richer than the definitions which you can give any term.  You just look up the dictionary; every word is a poetical word, and it has 10,000 shades of meaning. And it is your business to use the word so that the other person gets all the shades of meaning which you wish to stress.  It’s no business of yours to define it beforehand; that’s making the speech trite. (pp.10,11)

7.The difference between natural science and social science methodologies:

…the road of nature is through the senses to the concept. The road of the community is through reciprocity to agreement….Speech is mutual before it is definable. (p.12).

We deal with nature by way of concepts because “natural objects” can’t talk back. Addressing people makes all the difference and requires different rules for interpretation of meaning.

Thus, the road to knowing the “universe” has two parts, one through mutual agreement and the other  through concepts.

8.Speech is not natural, it is political  We develop only when we are spoken to, only when we are named, only when we have an “inner life”, only when we have speech.  We can only obtain a more complete concept of reality with both the natural (outer) view and the (inner) contemplative view, not of the eye, but of the heart (spirit).  (p.14)

9.Only with both (outer and inner, physis and politics) can we obtain the power to change, to grow, and this can only occur through community. Otherwise the family of man would have obliterated itself eons ago.  TO GROW WE MUST THEREFORE RISE ABOVE NATURE AND BECOME “SUPER-NATURAL” – THE CARRIER OF ENTHUSIASM, OF DIVINITY. P.18/18

10.In Greek philosophy the mind is in charge and the heart follows, and courage follows.  No Christian believes this. (p.23)

Plato organized the city with the mind (logic) the highest, the heart in the middle, and the passions below,   and therefore the state must organize the same way as our human “endowment.” And, ERH claims, our Constitution is “Platonized” in this pattern.  “The secular society of today is still thought of very much in the Platonic pattern.” (p.24)

11.All of this Platonizing leads to a natural or physical (physis) view of humanity, i.e. “millions of objects,” whereby, if one has ethos (is led by the heart), one has community.

Lecture – 19

1.There is a crucial distinction between the terms NATURE (that which occurs regardless of man’s intervention) and society (that which is created by humans).  These two realities are contradictory. Nature is merciless (we are killed in earth quakes, hurricanes, war, and disease, unrelated to our worth), but society which accredits even the worst criminal with rights.

Nature and society are thus opposites, and connected by the human mind.  LOGOS is the attempt of the mind to find the same meaning and the same truth and the same revelation and the same wisdom in both the stars and the human heart. (p.1)

Nature treats everything in the universe as “things,” all tyrants like Hitler treat people as things, as does anyone who believes people to be “natural.”

Business people who exploit the environment, destroy animal habitats, and treat workers as commodities, assume society follows the laws of “nature,” as contrasted with laws of ethics.  ERH points out that early in this country’s history, farmers were allowed to “squeeze the soil dry,” then move on to another plot to do the same. The two opposites, nature and ethos, if unified by the concept of logos would not allow this.  Europe, for instance, has the same percentage of forest as it had in 1100. (p.4)  [RF – By contrast, the US is eliminating theirs, there is now less than 10% of the old-growth left since the last 200 yrs.)

2.With “ethos” man is understood to be the steward (mouthpiece), of all other animals, and with no right to exploit or destroy them.

Our ethical problem is that since man must live off the land and forests, there is a constant need to reconcile the needs of the two.

Logos…is the apportionment, the apportioning of ethics, and ethos, and physis to reality.  (p.5)

3.NAMES — In the world of ethos, names move people, they “…create tremendous emotions and tremendous actions.” The name Hitler evokes emotions, The Battle of the Bulge in WWII evokes emotions, calling you a liar evokes emotions. The names professor and student describes social roles, and with them emotions.

In society we “experience” how others treat us.  We experience nature, of course, but with a very different attitude.  “Natural things” in the universe we give names to, but these things cannot respond to us; we therefore divide up the natural world into different classes of things, constantly fragmenting its parts.

The law of society is to find unity, solidarity, peace – otherwise we have war, degeneration, revolution and anarchy. When any part of our experience in reality addresses us, we cross over from experiencing nature to experiencing ethos.

4.In nature incest is natural, as most animals practice it.  In human society, incest is taboo because it weakens the genetic strains.

5.FAITH:  one aspect of faith is to believe in what we know.  ERH points out that many people know things that they don’t believe.  To “know something” implies that it must be acted upon in one way or another.  To know someone is unfaithful means we must not trust them.  To know we destroy the environment means we must act to rectify it.

6.SPACE AND TIME:  Space, we experience as a whole, then subdivide it.  Time, we experience in fragments, but that experience can be given meaning only when those fragments are unified into courtships, marriages, communities, and nations – cycles of unified phases of  social processes.

The unity of time and the division of space is the achievement of the logos, arbitrating between the space of physis and the time of society. (p.15)

We must make room for a nation, create peace from the beginning to the end. People “grant” each other the right to live among themselves.

7.ERH credits Plato’s SYMPOSIUM as his greatest work, in the sense that it demonstrates or reflects an ideal, that man is a micropolis (not a macrocosm) of a community, and a community is a macropolis of men.  Also, the Symposium represents “heaven,” an ideal community. Nature is based on selfhood, on impenetrability, on resistance, on gravity, on no escape.  Society is based on interpenetration, on mutual understanding, on reciprocity, and on inheritance.

Lucretius, Epicurius, Democritus and others saw the world (society) in terms of physis, in terms of nature.  Heraclitus, Socrates, and Plato struggled to restore a balance to our view of reality.

8.The philosopher can teach (if he rules himself), but cannot rule (other than himself).  This is because he knows the “truth,” and would tyrannize the population – they would have no freedom.  Others must then rule who can lead, and listen and bring about concordance. Leaders, by definition, must possess the skill to bring unity (concordance).

It is the same with the church.  The church must never rule, for the same reason that the philosopher cannot; he teaches, criticizes, instructs, corrects, prophesies, but never rules.  Remember the inquisition!  THIS IS WHY THERE MUST BE A SEPARATION OF CHURCH AND STATE. “This Plato did not know.” (p.20)

9.A living soul must be greater than its mind. its love of reality (meaning truth) must dominate, rather than cleverness!

10.Back to the SYMPOSIUM: The college should be analogous to heaven, there must be trust, logos, admiration, tolerance of other opinions. “…two, three people can meet in the mind.  That is neither logos, nor ethos, nor physis.  That’s Heaven.” ERH claims that the seed of Plato’s thought lies in the SYMPOSIUM, and not elsewhere.  In the seventh letter, “I have never written down what I really mean to be the kernel of my philosophy,” (except in the Symposium). (pp.27,28)

Lecture 20

1.One of the most fundamental problems in philosophy is that of UNIVERSALS, and this is the primary problem raised by Greeks, namely Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle.  In this time there was recognized no universities, only “schools” (representing single points of view).

Plato’s ACADEMY was not the first university, it was a school (reflecting his ideas only).  The idea of a university (multiple schools) was a Christian idea. (In antiquity, you had to break with one school to attend another.)

2.ERH is interested in how several people form a unity of ideas, which in turn represents a yet more powerful idea.  He cites, for instance how Hayden/Mozart/Beethoven form a “miraculous unity” – just as does Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle.

3.As a digression, ERH asserts that there is never an infinite number of possibilities of ideas  (citing Hindemith on atonal music, which he wrote because other possibilities of harmony, rhythm, etc. had been developed).  THERE ARE ONLY FINITE POSSIBILITIES, THEN  VARIATION IN REPETITION.

What he is driving at is that in philosophy one cannot be original, one can only patch together different (established) thoughts. “Greek mentality is a complete story of the human mind.”  (p.5)

THE IMPORTANT QUESTION THEN IS, WHAT DID SOCRATES, PLATO, AND ARISTOTLE CONQUER?

4.Socrates’ contribution was to make doubters aware of what they doubt, as well as where, and in what context, that doubting should lead to!  This is a positive contribution to thought, as contrasted with doubting or curiosity for its own sake. (p.7)  Curiosity, doubting, questioning must serve the purpose of regenerating the community (or it isn’t worthwhile).  Significant questions, unanswered endanger the city.  “Socrates asks for the better.” to improve the city.

5.*Plato asks for the best, “What is the ideal?”  Aristotle asks, “How do we measure where we are,  against the ideal?” (p.8)

ERH points out that our “democracy” in this country is only an emphasis. At times we need a dictatorship (as in war).  So the unity of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle is, “What will make the community better – what will make it best – and what is the nature of the existing order?”

6.Logos is “creative conversation.” It forms a unity of thought. ERH asserts that thought DOES NOT precede speech, it is the other way around.  All clear, organized thought is in the form of words.  Thought is our dialogue with ourselves.  Speech is a response to an event.

He describes thought as built on three pillars – first experience and response, then description (narrative) of experience, then analysis.  Logic belongs to the last part.  Thus, LOGOS represents the unity of these three parts.

7.In Aristotelian rhetoric we gain the audience by application of “the whole man,” by the process of logos, by including all three parts of understanding.  Logic is mere repetition of a formula, as with a syllogism. (p.11)  Today, ERH asserts, logic has replaced logos.  “Any boy in high school can use logic.”  The creative part of speech, the convincing of another, requires creative effort.  ERH cites the attempts to logically prove the existence of God, which cannot be done. In the same way, he suggests, we cannot prove our patriotism logically.

8.ERH cites another example of logos, with the old syllogism of Socrates being, mortal. Obviously part of him is dead (and thus mortal), but also another part has lived for 2500 years.  So logic has a limited truth,  not the whole truth – and this perhaps best describes the difference between the notion of man’s whole experience and only a part of that experience.

Another aspect of the unity of logos, between Socrates, Plato and Aristotle is related to skepticism.  The steps of the method are raising the skeptical question, the question of standards for judgment, judgment about the meaning of a specific event.

ERH calls this “…my trinity, my human trinity.” (p.14) One is a “criticist,” one an “idealist,” and finally the “realist.”  THIS IS THE TYPE OF FUNDAMENTAL IDEA THAT ENHANCES OUR ABILITY TO DESCRIBE OUR EXPERIENCE, AND THUS, TO SERVE EACH OTHER.  NO ANIMAL CAN DO THIS.

9.The ideas of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle need to be understood as coming from separate persons, and not from only one.  The reason is that in our lives there are times to take these separate roles – as contrasted with a different meaning if all ideas were rolled into a single set.

10.NOW TO THE ISSUE OF CATEGORIES AS RELATED TO CREATIVE THOUGHT!  Categories are an important issue because they describe a class of unique objects.  One cannot understand the singular unless there is some notion of the “context”, or plural.  Categories represent generalizations, but all events in real life are singular or particular (unique).

But what is a generalization, a common denominator?  Universals can only be discerned AFTER THE FACT, they are the sum of common properties of many events.  It is the mind’s arbitrary classification.  BUT THERE ARE TWO OTHER TYPES OF UNIVERSALS.  The “ideal” is one that precedesthe fact.  That is, one cannot identify a particular unless one already has a category, such as animal.  To have a standard as a criterion (type of generalization), it must precede the time of specific judgment.

a.With sophists, the universal, the category occurs as a result of summarizing common properties; thus the act occurs “post rem,” after the fact.  The plural follows the singular.

b.With idealists, the universal comes before the event, one enters an experience with a preconceived notion of categories, thus it is called “ante rem.” Ideals exist before the event.  All naming is therefore Platonic in form. The plural precedes the singular.

c.The third form of universal occurs during the event in which both plural and singular are considered at the same time. This is Aristotelian; the universal occurs “in rem,” during the process, or experience.  Plural and singular follow each other closely.

11.All of this is important because to utilize the full power of speech and thought, one must realize all forms of categories, or universals. Our tendency is to think only in one form,  as Platonic, as Sophistic, or as Aristotelian. To think creatively, to identify a unique experience, to categorize it appropriately so that truth may be achieved, one must be prepared to employ all three.  FOR LIVING EVENTS, THAT IS, HUMAN EVENTS, ONE MUST EMPLOY LOGOS. (p.24,25)  (This type of logic is analogous to the mathematics of algebra, where one is attempting to find an unknown, beginning with one or two knowns. One must determine what is arbitrary and what is necessary for creative thinking.

When we speak, we reveal how we see the event, and thus we reveal ourselves to others.  If we are sophists, we do not commit to any category as a necessity, and therefore shield ourselves from others.  ONLY IN A COMMUNITY WHERE PEOPLE SPEAK WITH EACH OTHER, WILLING TO REVEAL THEMSELVES, CAN WE HOPE TO HAVE A CIVILIZED WORLD.  SOPHISTRY, POST REM, IS ONLY FOR DEAD THINGS.

Lecture 21

1.The first four-six pages of this chapter is a castigation of our teaching methods in American colleges and an exploration of his teaching philosophy. He begins with the problem statement, skips around until one gets a sense of the structure of the argument. For example, in this lecture, “…Philosophy is an attempt to see wholes…” is difficult to fathom. (p.3)

ERH warns us, If a book is worth reading, read it again and again. Read a body of work on the subject to get a picture of the whole (of a man’s work). Only books that are difficult are worth reading,

The story of the human race, is the transmission of acquired faculties. That is, to transmit faculties that did not exist in the cave man, but in the process of the ages have entered the race, the bloodstream.  (p.7)

Faculties (ways of thinking and acting) that have allowed for social evolution, must be continued.

2.The contribution of Greek Philosophy was to think either materialist, realist, or idealist. But we know now that each of these ways of looking at experience is limited and our thinking today must include all three. We must learn when and how to apply each in the process of evaluating our experience through life. Our goal in thinking is to outgrow our physical development and counterbalance it with a growth of wisdom in aging.

ERH goes on a bit about learning. Real learning is when we are taught and convinced to do voluntarily what needs to be done, rather than believing the purpose of schooling is to pass required assignments.  (p.11) He sets out to convince the reader that the PROBLEMS WE FACE IN ATTEMPTING TO UNDERSTAND OUR EXPERIENCE ARE THE BEGINNING OF ORGANIZED THOUGHT. Finding Truth about the meaning of experience can only be arrived at by employing  the method of “logos.”

History is educational because it tells us the problems past cultures had in their experience, how they thought and solved them, and the consequences of those applications. Students need to learn this process because they must re-interpret past knowledge in the course of living.

3.The teacher and student, the old and experienced and the “empty” (youth) need to come together. In the Phaedon, sometimes Socrates and Plato see that “immortality” derives from the empty and the old, the student and teacher coming together and passing on truth. “We have to die very real.  Then we may come to life again…” (p.13)  That is, the method for rising above the fact of our physical death is through passing on the spirit of our thinking to the next generation in the faith that they will carry it on. Socrates died physically 2500 years ago, but his spirit lives on in us today.

4.THE PROBLEM WITH GREEK THOUGHT IS THAT IT CAN DEAL ONLY WITH REPEATED THINGS (GENERALIZATIONS), NEVER WITH UNIQUENESS.

That’s why Thomas Aquinas is not a religious founder, but just a theologian.  Theology is much poorer than religion….The only unique thing in the Platonic dialogue is the personages of Plato and Socrates..these are the only unique figures in the whole story.”  (p.15)

5.The chances of wisdom occurring are greater when people get old, and possibly even physically infirm. Then they have left ambition behind, and are more likely to be interested in truth and ethics.

ERH recalls here the necessary roles of  the three  ages of, youth, old age and “elder” (the prophet), each having a crucial role to play in the socializing of the community.

Lecture – 22

1.”…the Greek philosopher himself presents the problem of physis (nature), ethos (social life), and logos (wisdom), a co-mingling of the three into a vitality for their culture. It welded three generations together.  But it had limitations, as well.

2.Knowledge (his case in point mathematics) is only “real” during the process of being created. Teachers (one might say in his context “mere” teachers) pass on only old knowledge.  To truly teach, one must get students to both “create” new knowledge, and re-create old knowledge in the process of putting it to use.  IN OTHER WORDS, ORGANIZE THE COURSE AROUND PROBLEM-SOLVING OF SIGNIFICANT PROBLEMS FROM LIFE.

3.There is confusion between schooling (regurgitating of information), and creative learning, the act of learning how to learn (to create knowledge).  Examinations were unknown in antiquity, and the notion of “finals” is stultifying because it implies something is “finished,”  In antiquity, formal schooling was for adults, usually above the age of 25 years because it was considered serious business dealing with the survival of the community.

4.In Platonic dialogue, the only “real” dialogue is THE SYMPOSIUM.  But Greek science stagnated because the Greeks never followed up an idea, they only discussed possibilities.

Christianity created the first university out of academies, (which were single-minded; if one thought differently, such as Aristotle from Plato, he had to leave to found his own academy.)

5.Dartmouth, ERH claimed, was “…no worse than any other college…” The Christian idea, that one could “love their enemy,” that opposites could learn to live together in peace, allowed for progress.  The Greeks never learned to re-create old ideas, nor to live together in peace with those who held other ideas than those of a master.

Lecture – 23

1.The prime advance of the Christian era was that it asserted the possibility of progress, of change, TO HAVE CHANGE, ONE MUST HAVE REFERENCE POINTS. Reference points are crucial to understanding Christianity. Reference points are before and after indicators of change; indicators that something makes a difference.  We are burdened to understand our own time, to understand the context for our ideas and actions,  to understand what is different and what will make a difference.

2.Mankind is always in danger of moving in a circle. [RF – Reminds me of Harvard management professor Chris Argyri’s theory of circular thinking – when we don’t learn from our experience, we keep running in circles.] “Progress is possible when we cut this Gordian knot.” (p.2)  Once again ERH demonstrates the connection between Christianity and action, i.e. acquisition of knowledge is preparation for action, the action that will prevent us from going in circles. Mohammed forbade his followers to change, to progress beyond his word.

3.The difference between Greek Philosophy and the Christian era is our relation to the future, a dedication to progress, which the Greeks didn’t believe in. They believed in cycles, endlessly recurring cycles.

Humanism and Christianity are irreconcilable. The humanist believes in an automatic future, while the  Christian believes the future must be created. The Humanist can memorize, store information, but is not admonished to act on his information. The Christian has a moral obligation to act, and when necessary, sacrifice, to help his community,  to create a future that will continue to revitalize itself.

4.Nature (animal instincts) is second rate as contrasted with humanizng social life. Nature is automatic, predictable; social life must be created, or society will die.  Today, man acting as a natural being is the scourge of the earth, over-populating, over polluting and destroying everything in his path. “Man is absolutely lost if he is not satisfied to create communities.” (p.9) This is the logic behind the dire prediction ERH makes at the beginning of this essay, that we have been born in the midst of a dying culture. The prediction is not intended to be gloom and doom, however, but rather to call us to action, to insure it does not become a self-fulfilling prophecy.

Nature is general, but human society requires uniqueness as the price for survival through change. To assume the “nature” of which we are born is unchangeable, reduces us to the state of animals. (p.10)  Greece came to an end because it couldn’t make this distinction.

[RF – THE IMPLICATION OF THIS IDEA SEEMS TO ME FUNDAMENTAL, THAT THE PRICE FOR EVOLUTION OF THE HUMAN SPIRIT IS CHANGE, USUALLY PAID FOR BY REAL PAIN AND SACRIFICE. THIS IS HOW I UNDERSTAND ERH INTERPRETS THE MEANING OF JESUS’ CRUCIFIXION AND RESURRECTION. WE MUST NOT ASSUME TO ABSOLUTELY KNOW OUR NATURE, AND THEREFORE MUST BE SURPRISED EACH DAY TO REDISCOVER OUR CAPABILITY FOR NEW THINGS.  TO THINK OTHERWISE ARRESTS THE VITALITY OF ANY COMMUNITY, CULTURE, OR CIVILIZATION.]

5.The word “creatura” (creature) derives from creation, and is appropriately applied  to humans to mean they are capable of being constantly re-created.  It should be clear as well that if we are to progress, we need milestones, reference points to identify either progress or retrogression. Knowledge of time, in terms of sequences of  stages become concrete indicators of any progress. This is because, in a science of society time cannot be exactly predicted, but we can learn the etiology of social processes for measurement.

6.Social Time:  Christianity means to evolve,  to create a new future.  The Greeks had two types of time, two tenses; mythical time  (when founders created things), and present time, or “the time of the law,” as ERH calls it .  All times are ordinary except mythical time. The Greek conception of time makes no allowance for creativity in the present or future. In other words, of changing one’s present state (of ordinariness) to one of creativity, to one of founding a new future.

The essence of the problem with the Greek disconnection between the mythical past and “present” (or one’s “own” time) is just that, disconnection, time is not unified What does this mean?  It means one cannot connect past, present, and future, and therefore harness the power of cause and effect through the generations. Significant progress takes at least three generations to establish.

The CHRISTIANS, on the other hand, made this connection, and this is why the Bible begins with a naked human couple, Adam and Eve, not with Prometheus or Heracles or any of the other mythical figures.  Time as a unity connects different parts of our reality, and thus opens the door for our better understanding of our experience from day to day.  That is, seeking these connections between past, present, and future, and how human intervention can be effective.  THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SOCIAL TIME AND “NATURAL TIME” is that, in the natural world things happen to animals, in the human social world, we must attempt to shape the course of society.

But the Bible is an attempt to make the people of the past ordinary and the present-day people extraordinary, because it had to correct the Greek mind…The Greek mind says, “The people in the beginning were heroic. And we are ordinary.  We are reasonable.  We therefore can understand rationally what we’re doing,”…And we can report these miraculous beings at the beginning.

But the Christian revelation says that because man tries to behave as an ordinary man, he misses out about the future.  And if he is not extraordinary man, he cannot create the future.  (p.19)

ERH asserts several pages later that the problem with the Greeks, the source of failure of their civilization, is that they had not the faith in their own creative ability.

Logos is the power to explain how the clock runs down, and the power to wind it up again.  For the Greeks, however, and for you, logos is only logic. (p.22)

Logos is wisdom, not logic, ERH reminds us.

7.ERH goes on to explain how the various sacraments have their origins in transmitting basic processes of living that emphasize the extraordinary things mankind has accomplished, and how we are similarly burdened to do the same every day if we are to survive (create a future).   His example is in the Communion ceremony with real bread and wine, which has aged and is awaiting its use to remind us of this.

If you cannot realize this you will always be superstitious with regard to Holy Communion.  (p.20)

[RF – I assume he is saying this is an example of going through the procedures of a ceremony without understanding its original meaning.]

8.ERH asserts strongly that whatever we utter in speech we must be willing to be accountable for; only then can we feel part of a truly human community, and only then can we preserve our ability to communicate.

Ultimately then, we seem to fail to solve the problems of our day for the same reason as the Greeks. This makes most of Western societies, including most of all the Christians Greek thinkers.

Lecture 24

1.The Greeks believing in truth, goodness and beauty, means, to simply know truth is to act rightly. The Cypriot Zeno introduced the notion in 300 BC, that the “heart” ruled above the “head”, i.e. emotions ruled over logic.  This led to the Benedictine movement in the Catholic church whereby knowledge andwisdom was bought at the expense of asceticism, with vows of chastity, obedience, and poverty.  All of this was a mixture of Greek and Buddhist/Hindu cultures, which later became manifest in Christianity.

2.What is the difference between the Greek gods and a living God?  The living God cannot be characterized by “graven images,” i.e. cast in stone.  How, then, can we know of God’s existence? Through mankind.  The living God fights death.  Fruitfulness (“by your fruits you shall be known”) means the regeneration of life, of a community.

To regenerate, one must be creative.  Fruitfulness follows from present action. Thus, Greek thinking began to break down in 300 B.C. with Alexander’s interaction with Buddhists and Hindus, and again after Christ, to the fall of the Roman empire.

3.The real difference between the coward and the courageous man is that the coward runs away in the moment of danger, and the courageous man fears what may happen after the danger,  after having withstood the dangerous situation.  Jesus’ last words on the cross were, “My lord, why have you forsaken me.”

The courageous man then doubts his truth from time to time, but he does not run away from it.

4.In the classroom we do not live, but only prepare to live.

5.Acts 18, 17  is Paul’s address to Athens, in which he tried to reach the academics.The problem of the secular (logic-dominated mind) is that it learns too late!  (p.15)

6.You cannot judge by the facts only. They lead nowhere, because facts always lie in the past.  One must know one’s destiny, i.e. THE PROBLEM is always one’s destination, the goal. This, in turn, determines what action to take in the present. (p.16)

7.ON TEACHINGand on creating the future. The prophet, the “sower” of ideas, the true teacher, is condemned to never know what will come of the harvest – never to know who heeds his word, or if it was heard at all.

Today we have too much stimulation and too little philosophy (too little time to be astonished by the world), too little religion (time to plan and anticipate and work toward one’s future).

The secret of the Christian message is the criss-cross between Greek and Judaic beliefs. The teacher is always bound to disappointment if he/she desires to be “recognized” while sowing the seeds of ideas, recognized for our personal wisdom as a teacher of  ideas – but this can never be.  Only later, when ideas are tested, can one know fruitfulness.  THIS PATIENCE TAKES AN EXTRAORDINARY EFFORT.

The future cannot be reached by people who want to live an ordinary life, because they omit that their own ways of life have created extraordinary time…to be a creatura means to be that we are unfinished at this moment, and we still have to expect the outcome of  our own creation, tomorrow. (p.20)

The great figures in history have been “creatura.”

8.THE MEANING OF ORIGINAL SIN is that, having inherited something that was original out of the past, we are no longer burdened to think of it ourselves.  This is why we are all born into original sin.  IN RESPONSE, WE MUST THEN BECOME CREATIVE OURSELVES, TO RISE ABOVE THIS SIN.

Paul tried to reconcile the Greeks and Jews and be respected for it.  And of course he failed in this attempt, demonstrating a lack of faith in Christianity at that moment.

9.ERH asserts that the difference between the Greeks and Christianity is that, the Greeks created an ideal, and Jesus created a vitality in us to create.  THE DIFFERENCE IS ENORMOUS.  Instead of invoking an ideal, as the Greeks do, one invokes instead an example of a life lived creatively. Paul was attempting to logically connect Greek and Jewish philosophy, thus falling into the failed logic of the Greeks.

In a like way, we can (or should) celebrate the acts of genius throughout history, much, much more than the ideals of “systems” they set down. The reasoning is that these systems are always limited and faulty.  This is why the principles must be reborn each generation by us – that is to say, interpreted differently in the light of new experience.  THIS IS THE CHRISTIAN POSITION OF EVALUATING HISTORY.

The conflict between philosophy and Christianity is that philosophy always comes too late, i.e.  analysis after the facts, and the meaning of all facts must be constantly revitalized by us for what new meaning they might have.

Lecture – 25

1.DISTINCTION BETWEEN PHYSICAL AND SPIRITUAL: To grow, to change, to think anew, these are fundamental goals necessary, for survival. ERH names this as a “first cause” of personal growth.  In science the past determines the future, cause leads to effect, etc., which would mean that if we are conceived as “natural,” we are totally determined by certain things.  While this is true physiologically, it can never be true spiritually, otherwise we would never be able to be original thinkers.

To love, to propose, to commit an act of charity, to speak out our thoughts against odds, are all acts of being a “first cause” ourselves.

2.Greeks conceived of two dimensions of time, mythical and present, whereall first causes derived from mythical times. (p.1) To think this way is to condemn one’s self to being always a follower, dross in the community.

3.We are admonished by ERH to reverse the Greek time concept, and view the past as “ordinary time” and the present as existing in “mythical time,” where first causes can occur.  We all tend to live within today’s myths!

4.Physis, ethos, logos can be characterized in terms of relationships. These are 1) to see one’s self as having a commander (being “overlorded”) which equals logos; 2) as being the commander which equals physis, or 3) as having comrades of equal rank which equals ethos.  Each of these are basic experiences in life, where we play out different roles; “That’s the experience of everybody.”  (pp.2,3)

5.Of these, only physis can be described by numbers, (p.4) and people experience becomes a constant loss of power from generation to generation, by reducing logos to physis.

To speak of ideas only is to be sterile.

The difference between nature and truth is the difference between being in charge – i.e. giving orders,  and being conscious-struck (listening to a higher command).

6.What is the meaning of the Trinity?  The Christians were trying to counter the Greek value of treating logos and physis (nature) as the same; that is, thinking only logically (for instance, it is logical and natural to be self-serving).  Mind (if  seen as the same as logos) is mechanical, logical only.  Logos is to understand that we must be commanded by some higher powers (rather than our own self-interest). By 300 BC the Greek spirit of logic had led to decadence.

7.Pneuma, the spirit, the logos, the “Holy Spirit”:

“The doctrine of the Holy Spirit is an attempt to link up the Greek Odyssey, the Greek migration, the Greek exodus from normal humanity into philosophy.  This attempt to look at the mind as a mechanism, and to treat it as something that is under law, and whose results can be pre-calculated…The pneuma is an attempt to restore the balance… (p.12)

And in the ancient world, from Paul to St. Augustine, is the attempt by the Christians to bring the Greek philosophers back under the domination of the spirit, to reconnect humanity and philosophy.

8.In many places ERH asserts that in the physical world life precedes death, but in the spiritual world, death precedes life. THIS IS A PROFOUND DISTINCTION, because it means that we must live our lives by bringing spiritual life into our physical life, otherwise we cannot maintain community.

Truth dies when it is not acted on, when it is made into “mere ideas.” We thus validate truth by acting on it, or in the case of truth from the past, we must regenerate it, bring it back to life.

9.To live the life of the philosopher, one believes that one can rule the world with one’s thought. The Trinity was an attempt to indicate how this is a failed view, given the fallibility of mankind.  Thus – just as ERH viewed man as multiform and not to be understood except in all his basic roles as individual, friend, and lover, team member and community member – in a like way God cannot be understood except as having three forms of Himself (the ultimate creator and lord of the universe), as being within the Father, who then passes this spirit on in the possession of  the Son or Daughter. “That’s the minimum, in order to understand the authority which He has over me.”

The Trinity is a very chaste attempt to place you in the middle of the process between logos, and physis, and ethos.  It has nothing to do with denomination.  It has nothing to do with the pope in Rome.  It has something to do with truth…Because you have to believe in the Trinity, you must be a Christian. (p.19)

[RF – See #7 Lecture 9 for a detailed explanation of supporting logic for this quotation.]

The Trinity is a counter to Greek philosophy, which believes that mankind evolved from dead things and now has the power of life and death over the rest of nature, that everything is less alive than he.  “He is perfectly willing to admit that he can be deduced from the `less’ life.”  (p.19)

10.We are most alive at our greatest moments of creativity, of courage, of commitment. We cannot be the yardstick of our own truth, it must be tested over three generations of the Holy Spirit from the past, of the father, and taken up and practiced also by the son.  Then social truth can be ascertained. And this is why we must believe in the Trinity if we wish to find ourselves and find truth (social truth).

Ministers of the church today no longer understand, because they have neither studied Greek, nor Latin, nor Hebrew, nor philosophy…They are slaves of the fashionable philosophy of our day today, these poor, so-called ministers of the word… (p.20)

Belief in the Trinity is the only remedy against our own mind’s haughtiness and arrogance.  There is a constant exchange between different authorities, whereby each of us is on the middle rung of a ladder, and therefore there is a higher authority than ourselves, just as we are lords of things and animals below us.  The message of the Trinity is that Greek thinking must come under the authority of the spirit.

11.Greek philosophy tried to make man the master of his own destiny.  It failed.  At best we are only partly masters of our destiny.  We can manipulate nature and our society, but such manipulations are always self-serving, when they are not guided by a power beyond ourselves. [RF – which is most of the time with most people?]

…the doctrine of the Holy Spirit, is not a religious doctrine, and a religious experience, but the necessity of expressing the Greek experience in terms that were no longer Greek, but that led the Greeks back into the general experience of the whole human race, that the loss of spirit, the loss of logos, by mere logic, instrumentalism, mechanism, cleverness, had to be rebuilt, or replaced, had to be remedied by making man again able to be inspired by a power higher than he himself. (p.24)

Lecture – 26

1.The fundamental necessity for education is to know “what is necessary in life,” in other words, “What is reality?”  ERH reminds us that all life is finite, that it leads to death, and that our basic drive is to extend life as much as possible.  To do this we must learn what should be kept for each generation, and what must die, what must end. (p.1)

2.One assumption about reality is that life, especially human life, evolved out of dead things (chemicals), and that at this point in our evolution we are on top, ruling the world.

ERH’s logic is that each day we do many humdrum things, and are therefore not creative most of the time.  Only at certain times are we inspired, and this is a higher state of our being.  Part of one’s life is representative of much more than the average state of being, overlaid with a large part rather ordinary, functioning at a lower level. So a crucial question is which line of thought 1) looking above ourselves, when we are creative, when we are divine, and 2) which part is just natural?

And the mind itself is neither natural nor divine, but is in this transitional stage from life to death, and from death to life, and we know at no one moment whether we are stupid or wise…(p.3)

3.Our natural tendency (of the mind) is to be natural, is to take the path of least resistance, to take the easy road, to give ourselves the benefit of doubt, to glorify our intentions.  BUT IS ALL THAT CONDUCIVE TO TRUTH AND CREATIVITY?  Part of the mind is “natural” or follows those tendencies naturally, but it is certainly not the creative part, or the divine part.

Being objective in the way we look at the world takes no more than ordinary talent. This is hardly the source of a creative hypothesis, however. The creative hypothesis is based on asking several questions, namely, “Are my previous assumptions about the world correct?” “What explains my lack of understanding of this problem?” “Is there some other dimension of reality to be considered, and if so what would it be?” “How can I go about exploring this?”  It is these types of questions that establish new thinking and progress. These questions are interesting and keep us spiritually alive.  SO THE PROBLEM IS TODAY, HOW DO WE INDUCE ENTHUSIASM, INSPIRATION?

4.Truth is that which is valid whether we like it or not, whether we benefit from it or not, and finally, truth occurs when one is willing to present it, “…even if he has to go to the cross.”  (p.6)

We will survive (come spiritually alive) by seeking and accepting truth, not by pursuing self-interest.

5.Our problem is to distinguish which part of our mind is alive and original, and which part is merely repeating what has been done or said before. Truth is engendered by “aliveness,” and self-interest leads to death, always. Death and life are intertwined always in our minds.

…where you are in love, where you are courageous, where you are inspired, you begin something.  And in other ways of life, you learn, and you repeat…Every one of us is half genius, half inspired, and half routine.  (p.9)

6.We are born, not with a soul, but with the potential of developing a soul. We rise to a higher level of life when we give back to the community what we have received from it. This is how a person beginning with a raw animal nature develops into a living spirit.  IN OTHER WORDS, THE COMMUNITY CREATES US, AND IF THE COMMUNITY IS TO SURVIVE INTO THE FUTURE, WE MUST BE WILLING TO GIVE BACK TO IT SOME OF WHAT WE HAVE RECEIVED FROM IT. This becomes essential because the community needs regeneration to live, just as plants and animals must adapt to changing environmental conditions. The regeneration of society requires fertilization by way of our increasing knowledge of reality.

The importance in any country is that little group that swings the balance which is not swayed by self interest. (p.11)

The assumption in our Constitution is that this small group exists!

7.ORGANIZED CHURCHES TODAY, are so steeped in the Bible that they see its platitudes as “natural” and therefore mechanical, therefore they are pagan. (p.12)

ERH likens this process to “inspiration” and “expiration,” to creativity and to repetition of concepts.  In life we require a balance between the two.  Like a balance between day and night, between activity and rest or meditation, between creativity and mechanics, between carnation and incarnation, between sowing and harvesting. “Our mind lies fallow during the night of our consciousness.”

8.The central issue in teaching is to inspire, to fire students with the meaning of the subject so that they will think about it “on their own time.”  THIS IS THE  MOST DIFFICULT THING TO DO.  Can we so inspire students?  Can we so embody the “idea” of the subject so that students will be inspired to turn it into action?

For one thing, one must make students understand that they must constantly balance between repetition and creativity. Order is not all that exists, there is spirit also (which expands our understanding of order). In other words, genius creates order, but what creates genius?  Both are needed. One is driven by logic, the other spirit. One is a first cause, the other the consequence of a first cause.  Each of us must house both attitudes It is not the systems of the Greek philosophers which will be everlasting, but the spirit of the philosophers themselves!  (p.21)

9.TO REGENERATE THE GREEK SPIRIT: In ancient times the poet fought the mechanization of the logician.  Today the poets have stopped being poets ‑ therefore the philosophers must cease to be rationalists only.

“And therefore we need a meta-logic or pneumatology which balances the mechanics and the embodiment processes which permeates your and my strange being…  (p.23)

END

PHILOSOPHY AND THE SOCIAL SCIENCES

Lecture Transcript from a conference in 1942, location not specified. From the library of Lise van der Molen, Winsum Gr. Netherlands.
Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

1. The social sciences deal with phenomena fundamentally different from the subjects of the natural sciences, and therefore require a different method.

2. Today there is no recognized method for the social sciences. There is only a natural science of society, with the inference that those parts of society amenable to the methods of natural science might be properly treated – but other parts of social experience would not be amenable to this method.

Natural science obtains data from controlled laboratory conditions, or from field observations (as with astronomy and climatology), striving for generalizations to either prove or disprove the hypotheses being tested.  If the methods for both natural and social events are to be the same, there should not be two names.  Why then do we have two names?

3. A philosophy for both ethics and for natural science, are two elements of modern thought.  The question of method is all-important.  While man can observe objects of nature from the outside, he cannot apply this method to society with any validity,  for obvious reasons.  Nor is society transcendent, as are the `idea’ and `God.’ (p.2) The social scientist cannot claim a universal truth; this is because there are believers and nonbelievers. [RF – Here ERH infers, and I would agree, that all knowledge, including both natural and social science,  is established by vote. There can be universal agreement about truth only in natural science.]  Thus, when any individual attempts to impose a universal (social) truth,  he/she must be labelled a dogmatist, or theologian of a particular denomination.

4. Other differentiations can be made between “natural” and “social” phenomena. For instance, God does not speak in human language, and nature does not speak at all. However, “…social facts are accompanied (described and evaluated) by the words of those who are producing these facts.” (p.2)  “A family is not a fact like a mountain because the members of the family call themselves the Rosenstock-Huessys,  or the Joneses.  The father ..is called father, the child his son and so forth.” Likewise, a sociologist describing a nation in decay includes the speeches of its members as evidence. Obviously speech lies at the center of all social events.

5. All individuals belong to some group that is either praised or damned by other individuals or groups.

6. All social facts have one quality in common, that they have been NAMED.  This notion is inherent in the concept, “society.”  Society is a collaboration of individuals, who talk and are named, e.g. child, slave, private, woman, Jew, Christian. Any social event is described in a spirit of self-consciousness by all parties. “Words and ideologies, then, are one inescapable element of every subject matter of the social sciences.” (p.2). Neither societies, nor individuals, by definition, could exist without self-consciousness. SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS IS A KEY DISTINCTION BETWEEN SOCIAL AND NATURAL SCIENCE.

7. What can the philosopher offer to enlighten the sociologist in a situation where every word and name has at least a twofold meaning, one relating to his own scientific work, and another among the members of his/her society? ERH suggests that inherent in scientific language is logic, the art of reasoning, and the art of  dialectics (argument).  The philosopher of social science, on the other hand,  introduces grammar (the structuring of speech), to  which must be added,  the question of  who is speaking and who is listening. Thus, to the situation of natural science, where there is a subject and object, one needs to add (for a social science) a responder. His example is as follows:

the crowd says: we go, – the cop says, you go, – the reporter says they go.  Any social act then can be described in at least 3 ways, i.e. in terms of the actor, the antagonist (receiver of the action) and the observer. Gammer is therefore necessary, “…because neither dialectics nor logic admit the law of the plurality of objective and subjective world-languages.” (p.3)

To mention only one of these three ways, e.g. “he goes”,  would omit the other two parties, reducing a social act to an act of natural science, (to only the act of the observer). This would mean giving up his claim to being a scientist (his own humanness).  “The grammatical interaction between the `I’, the `you’ and the `he’ is by no means arbitrary.”

8. A proper method of social science must be centered on grammar, because “he who acts represents the seat of self-consciousness.” (p.4)  Natural science  represents only one third of the total social position that makes up social life.  The scientist, the “he” speaker, is also an “I” and a “you” speaker, and as such can never escape living in all three places.  This is why social science requires a different method than that of natural science. The grammatical element of society places people in their respective roles in any given event.

9.         Social sciences must therefore admit (embrace, consider, utilize) apparent nonscientific language (that of the doer and the receiver of action), because these are crucial elements of a social event. (p.5)   The dialectician asks, “How many opinions can be tolerated about the same values?”  The logician asks, “How many facts can be explained by the same reason?” The grammarian asks, “How many faiths are necessary for preserving the many functions of a society?”

[RF – Is this the essence of a unique social science method, which is to say, the science of how to preserve and regenerate society? Obviously such a method requires some amalgamation of different points of view, one that engenders peace.]

l0.        Social method is a problem of living, that is,  not according to a single attitude about reality such as that of the scientist, or of the theologian, or of the artist, but by combining all of them. A particular `Value’, in the singular,  singles out only one dimension of mankind’s experience.

A rotation of the different horizons of consciousness, from the prejudiced to the scientific and back again is the condition under which the social scientist is allowed to function. Without this rotation between knowing and forgetting again, he would destroy the society of which his sciences are telling from origin and destiny. (p.5)

11.        Going from theory to practice is a very different process in natural science  as compared to social science.  In natural science the theory is kept in mind as a guide constantly.  In social science one must forget the rule in order to practice. ONE CAN LOVE EITHER THE RULE OR THE INDIVIDUAL, BUT ONE CANNOT LOVE BOTH AT ONCE.

Yet the ethnicist who thinks that he can love whilst he is conscious of applying the general rule by his action is not loving.  The simple fact that he believes to apply the rule perverts his action from an act of love into an act of duty. ….He who knows the rule and is rich of knowledge has more trouble to love than the child because he must have forgotten the general rule again before he can really love again.”… Consciousness of the abstract meaning of the act transforms its concrete character and value. (p.7)

12.       ERH asks, “What is the nature of love?”  It is a spontaneous act that is discovered, not presupposed as with duty.  “He who does not discover that he loves with surprise and even  with a kind of panic does not love at all.  It is, then, right to pretend that ignorance and unconsciousness must precede this surprise and this discovery.” (p.7)  Love is rooted in the subconscious of the lover’s personality!

The major distinction here is between love rooted in the subconscious and love of an ideal (for instance the good, true, and beautiful), which is love of concept rather than of an individual.  Love of truth, beauty, and goodnesscannot be equated with faith, love and hope related to social affairs.

13.       Basically, ERH’s entire argument rests on the observation that humans function in an alternating state of both consciousness and unconsciousness.  Love, faith, and hope work only in a state of unconsciousness, spontaneousness, and creatively.  Creativity usually, if not always, stems from the same root, unconsciousness.

14.       In sum, the major difference between social and natural science lies in the fact that natural science calls for two levels of consciousness, 1) the object being research, and 2) the rational consciousness of the scientist which is omnipotent over the object,. manipulating, watching over, changing adjusting the method. ON THE OTHER HAND,  the social scientist needs three levels of consciousness. In addition to the two of the natural scientist, he needs to be spontaneously conscious, this is to say, his attitude should be one of rediscovery, to know when to forget (possible errors of past judgments). One who omits this attitude is in danger of never discovering possible erroneous assumptions from the past.

The following are the final three paragraphs of the essay which seemed difficult to condense:

In the process of man versus nature man is allowed to be like God, omniscient, conscious, ubiquitous, not sleeping, not forgetting, watching and mindful for ever.  In the process of man versus society man is not allowed to be the same at all the time.  Society’s transformations, its vital processes depend on a perpetual change of consciousness and a variety of self-consciousness.  The sociologist himself must point the way to this rotation and law of transformation by heeding the phases preceding and following his own action as much as the phase conceded to him.

In the relation between Society and the Social Sciences, the Scientist is responsible for more than his science.  He is responsible for a second thing too, namely the word, `and’ in the phrase Society and the Social Sciences.  A method of the Social Sciences is not a method of economics, or history, or law only, it is the method of how sciences can become and remain aware of their functions in society which are expressed in the unconscious word `and’.

This, then, is the philosophy of the Social Sciences that they recognize an attitude of the scientist transcending his rational pride and uniting him, in the third level, to all men who have acquired the knowledge when to know and when to forget, when to love and when to legislate, when to trust and when to investigate, when to teach and when to educate, when to rest peacefully in the autumnal starlight of generalities and when to burn ardently from the fire of sudden spring-fever.  The syllogism of logic gives man the power over nature.  The seasons of grammar make man a member of society.  [RF – Here ERH refers back to the previous paragraphs where he discusses the different roles of the “I” and “you” and “he.”] The social sciences are discovering the potentialities of man and the conditions for their realization.  Their philosophy teaches that and how the discovery of these potentialities must not interfere with their realization.  For there is a time for every purpose and for every work.  (p.9)

Appendix – The Philosophy of Academic Science from 1600 to Present Day

1.         ERH’s assertion is that there are basically 3 sciences, natural, theological, and social; and that each represents a different dimension of experience, requiring a different method for analysis.

2. Further, the former two, natural and theological, were never intended to deal with society.  In the following, he makes the case as to why these are inadequate for social analysis.  The purpose of these methods is to describe nature and God (the ultimate creative force of the universe).

3. Theological science (scholasticism) begins with a belief in a few facts and observations; the life and death of Jesus, Resurrection and miracles, “…from which a tremendous science of deductive truth is derived. The METHOD assumes belief in these facts and searches for the meaning that harmonizes with them.” (p.10)

4.  The dialects and rhetorics taught the doctors of the middle ages how to dispute and how to hold different                 opinions on the same facts. “The shortcomings of this method in facing new facts are obvious. But it had great merits too.” (p.10)  He goes on to point out that the Greek philosophers who held different points of view never raised the same problems. Each philosophical school dealt with different problems and different facts (with matter, or ideas, or the nature of beauty, or of pleasure).  Scholasticism was fruitful because it attempted to find all possible truths about the same facts and thus, an epistemology could be created.  THIS IS WHY ERH CONTENDS THAT SCHOLASTICISM IS WITH US TODAY, AS ITS PRINCIPLES OF DIALECTICS AND LOGIC ARE THE BASIS FOR MODERN DISCUSSIONS OF VALUES,  (of Kant, Heidegger or Nicolai Harrmann). (p.10)

5. ERH believes this was a fundamental contribution to our thinking. “Something timeless and eternal is at our disposal through the work of the medieval science.” (p.10)  He goes on to point out that, in the argument about two sides of an issue, a hierarchy of values comes out of the disputation, on both sides, “…in which the lower values are made into elements of the bigger solution.”  This statement infers the basic nature of the problem statement (at least a dialectical problem). This is to say, if two proposed solutions of a social science problem whereby each by itself seems logical, but paradoxical, then the truth is to be found in a higher principle that combines both positions, rendering each, part of a larger whole.

6. IN THE FOLLOWING I FIND A BRILLIANTLY SUCCINCT DESCRIPTION OF THE MODERN METHOD OF NATURAL SCIENCE:

“A” observes two processes in Europe, X and W, and formulates a common rule or system explaining both.  “B,” in Africa, observes Z and V. “C” reports from Mexico three more observations, O,P, and R.  Z,V,O,P and R contradict the rule derived from X and W in Europe.  Research man “D” proposes an experiment which we may call T.  D tells the truth, by testing the European, African and American observations.  How is he going to do it?  He must add, to the empirical observations already made, some more which are not empirical.  The experimental observation transcends the empirical because in it as many elements of the observed facts as possible are taken up separately. The crucial test of the experiments adds, to a series of causal observations, one or more observations of a different nature because they are produced, on principle, in a vacuum……What then is the essence of the experimental method?  Its essential feature is the addition of observation. The principle of the natural sciences is to increase the mass of observed facts. (p.11)

ERH goes on to the conclusion:

Scholastic evaluation increases artificially the number of possible opinions on a limited set of facts.  Naturalists increase artificially the number of observed facts to be interpreted by a limited number of theories. All natural or cosmological philosophy, after Descartes, is willing to doubt all observations and rely exclusively on the self-evidence of logic.  ….In the philosophy of values and the social sciences our relation to facts and theory is precisely reversed.  In a theory of values we have innumerable interpretations, but keep down the number of facts.  In a science of nature we expand the numbers of facts, but keep down the numbers of interpreting theories.

7. Social science is then built on a foundation of both theological and natural science methods “….with the most efficient dialectics and the most symbolic logic have done their work.” (p.12)   He goes on to point out that philosophy has changed its direction twice already in modern times (scholasticism and symbolic logic as described above), and now needs a new turn, one that deals with contradictions.  “It will never allow for one language only…On the other hand it will check the meaningless atomization of the scattered score of sciences around men which revel in disorganized statistics and footnotes on footnotes to facts.” (p.12)

Finally, ERH asserts that the grammatical method  is essential to a science of society, because there are many cultures with different values, and the basic question is “How can they learn to live together in peace so that they can progress?”  The different values may be contradictory, and therefore ERH adds “…a theory of Minima and Maxima of Contradictions.” (p.12)

[RF – These statements are somewhat enigmatic, and the explanation vis a vis the grammatical method is incomplete in this essay, but its necessity is more fully explained in other essays, for which this one is complementary.]

 

THE CHRISTIAN FUTURE or THE MODERN MIND OUTRUN

Chas. Scribner’s Sons, 1946
Feringer notes
Last edited: 7-00

Contents

Introduction

[RF – The notes that follow are from a monumental essay on how humankind is transformed from a squalling, helpless animal at birth into what we like to call reaching toward “human potential.”  Our education tends to leave us with the notion that to be human is a genetic process fired by a family which cares for us into adulthood at which point one makes one’s own way.  This is only partly true, of course.  Our genes provide us with a potential which in itself cannot transform us from animal to human.  This transformation requires a spiritual infusion into our psyche.  This spirit is a gift from past cultures who have successfully engaged the necessities of  living and passed on the mysteries of a divine  chemistry that unifies the physical and spiritual into human potential.

You, dear reader, most probably are  unfamiliar with the author, E. Rosenstock-Huessy, whose name is not a common household term, but his credentials should command your respect. He was dubbed by a internationally known historian, Page Smith, as “…one of a handful of original thinkers that any single century might produce.”  He was a personal friend and admired by such figures as the poet,  W.H. Auden; the Jewish philosopher,  Martin Buber;  author Lewis Mumford; philosopher, Alfred North Whitehead;  and by many others who praised his work. In addition to this essay, Rosenstock-Huessy has written other books on religion, one with a Catholic priest (Joseph Wittigs).  He emigrated from Germany to the U.S. in 1933 when Hitler came into power; he lectured at Harvard University for three years in six different departments, then accepted a chair in  social philosophy at Dartmouth College.

You will find his ideas challenging, requiring careful study. But  persistence will be more than rewarded.  I have met and had long discussions with a number of persons whose lives have been changed significantly by the power of his thought – my own included.   What you have before you are the notes from my own intensive study of this book.

While you read you should keep in mind a few guidelines. Part of  Rosenstock-Huessy’s unorthodoxy is that he always begins by grounding his subjects in common experience with his listeners. Thus, the first few pages portray the present state of our culture in America.  A cynical picture to be sure, but the point is to raise the question, “How do we cure these social diseases and regenerate our community?”  Religion is the ultimate power we need to meet these problems and change our approach to solving them.  To truly change is how we grow, and to change requires monumental perseverance, discipline and most of all, sacrifice.  Considerable inner strength is necessary to bring about such change.    In The Christian Future the reality we experience is at one with the life of the community. Our community is presently  declining from the social diseases of War, Revolution, Anarchy and Degeneration. War reflects the inability of people to agree on borders. Revolution is the attempt to break with the present and enter into a future for which few seem prepared to accept.  Anarchy occurs when different groups in the community fail to communicate or respect each other. – Everyone is shouting and no one is listening. Finally, Degeneration is the failure of the present generation to inspire  youth, so, they are left with the job of having to reinvent society.  The result of all of this among the community is frustration, anxiety, a feeling of a lack of control over our lives, and, finally, violence. Momentous words these, but when one makes a dispassionate observation of our society today, one could hardly disagree.

All religious ideas must arise from human experience. When children are murdering other children and a powerful faction in society says, “The safest society is the one in which everyone carries a gun;” it is difficult to be over dramatic in describing the human condition today.  One needn’t  stretch one’s thinking to describe the present as approaching a living hell.  We often fail to understand that the divine state of life is a community voluntarily at peace with itself.  This would be heaven!   Thus, the mythical religious concepts of angels and brimstone are to be translated into our living experience.

Rosenstock-Huessy declared that our source of knowledge must arise from the direct evidence of history. All of our personal experience reveals that we live in one universe.  It follows that there is one common human nature; all cultures the world over are “human” because they evolved language and the experiential basis for language is the same because all languages can be translated back and forth.  This, in turn, means that however differently people express their experience, the basis of that experience is the same: forces that cause war and bring about peace, as well as the forces that cause degeneration and regeneration.  The concept of bringing about unity in life is fundamental as well.  For forces that separate people destroy; forces that bring them together engender movement toward development into greater human potential.  Evidence for our knowledge as to how to regenerate our communities comes from the historical record, not from the a  spell-binder who tries to sell ideas of painless conversion toward redemption (progress).  This evidence is manifest in the sum of the historical record of the great prophets, such as, Laotze, Buddha, Abraham, Jesus and others. All serious religions,  Rosenstock-Huessy maintains,  state social peace as their goal. Each contributed  ideas essential toward achieving such a goal. We must understand that a universal religion would unify the contributions of these prophets and thereby reduce or eliminate contentious barriers between them.

Humans are defined as that animal with the potential to become half god.  “Man created in God’s image,” so to speak.  But to be a god is to be capable of creativity, so we ask, “In what way can we create in a universe seemingly already created for us?”  The answer must be that the one thing we can create, aside from original thought,  is community.  Community has never been given to us; this is our purpose in the universe and with never a guarantee of  a happy ending.

Finally, the author makes the point that the power to do all of this, to gain some control over our lives, to change into our next stage of spiritual evolution, requires the utmost power because, to do all of this carries a very high price.  No free lunches!  One must discipline, and work and most of all, be willing to personally sacrifice for, to fail in destroying the barriers between us is to tear society apart.  To live is to participate in this great adventure in making  life worth living.  Some challenge!  – Richard Feringer – Bellingham, April, 2000]

1.         In this day and age no one seems to care about significant issues; lethargy pervades, or perhaps a complete inability to understand experience, and people seem incapable of even conversing clearly with others about it.  If this is the case, what can the future, not only of our lives but the future of our community possibly be?

2.         Coffee house palaver emphasizes commerce (consumption), how to save money at the mall), or the latest advance in technology.  Talk about how to prevent the despoiling of the environment or reduce the hatred and violence is rare. No doubt some of this feeling is caused by the intractibility of social problems.  An apparent “healthy economy” seems to breed greater temptation to escape unpleasant facts.

The Great Society, this speechless giant of the future, does not speak English neither does it speak Russian. (p.5)

3.         Two world wars in a period of thirty years should have served as a wake-up call to our methods of social analysis, but society seems to plod on, only slightly aware that something might be amiss.  There is inevitable conflict between society’s future: its penchant to follow expedient courses of action on the one hand, and the church (supposedly an ethical guiding hand for social decision-making),  on the other.  Modern thinking results in fragmentation of all elements of social life, continuing social divisions between rich/poor, Arab/Jew, city/rural, Serb/Croat/Muslim, commerce/environment, etc.

Problems taken individually are simplified for manageability, but this very process is a delusion because, issues torn from the larger fabric in which they were imbedded inevitably misrepresents them.  Another insidious habit is to neutralize the power of our language.  When the ethic of commerce pervades our values everything is presented (sold) on the basis of appearance and expediency: the future is sacrificed for a painless present.  As a matter of fact everything becomes isolated from meaningful elements of social understanding, rich from poor, Arab from Jew, city from rural life, commerce from moral judgment, war from peace.

4.         So community remains divided, our words no longer give us hope!

But a hell which functions so well as the world wars do will not let us climb out unless we can find new words, new names of faith, unheard tones of hope by which to appeal to each other. the old names are shopworn. A spirit of Pentecost has become our immediate political necessity since we must say more to each other than “war of survival….To survive  is one thing for each individual, and quite another for all of us together….It becomes crucial to go beyond stereotype because the new shores of a common and more extensive survival can only be reached on the wings of new names and, in turn, these new names must be spoken  in such a setting that their speaker strikes us as trustworthy and free and not fettered by partisan interest. (p.6)

John Dewey counselled us similarly in 1940 “The old words are no longer believed.”  Politicians, commercial advertisers, legislators are no longer believed, except perhaps by themselves, because their words of promise remain unfulfilled.  Democracy, war to end wars, justice, discount merchandise (like pills from the drug companies which promise cures for everything from better sex to growing hair on bald heads, yes and even to end our depression),  clean up the mess in city hall, better government on the cheap, and even in the universities “knowledge is power,” (but the listeners remain powerless), are a few examples that the reader hears every day.

5.         However, John Dewey simply confused the issue further:

“…the consumption of words and the creation of compelling names.  He, with all the other idealists, takes his notion of speech from the commercial aspect of social communication.”  (p.8)

Famous heros such as Abraham Lincoln, George Washington, Franklin Roosevelt, Anwar Sadot sacrificed themselves in their acts that unified their words with their actions. “The word into flesh,” so to speak. These are examples of those who received, what ERH calls The Holy Spirit.

Such a unifying of words with personal action and sacrifice resurrects dead words to life.  To this end ERH claims he dedicated his life. Social progress has always been by Christians.  But the power to back up our ideals with actions often requires sacrifice, at times the ultimate sacrifice. Originally Christian beliefs put forth this revolutionary notion of empowerment, that truth won in past generations must be fought for in each succeeding generation.  This seems to be forgotten today.

For Christianity is the embodiment of one single truth through the ages:  that death precedes birth, and birth is the fruit of death, and that the soul is precisely this power of transforming an end into a beginning by obeying a new name.  Without soul, the times remain out of joint. (p.10)

Obviously ERH refers to spiritual life in statements like these. Only unification of a common spirit will create a future. The remainder of the text lays out the details of how history tells us how a regenerating spirit holds the power to revitalize communities.

Part II – INTERIM AMERICA: 1890 TO 1940

1.         Today “Suburb” is another name for  “ghetto” that fails to possess the power of vital, regenerating communities.  These modern “monocultures” are characterized by one race, one income group and one cultural background.  Atrue community is however, representative of all levels of humankind, rich/poor, all races, religions, and ages (old, and young). A monoculture pure and  simple that avoids pain and conflict by isolating itself from all of the problems endemic to the city center that houses all representatives of mankind.  Suburb means spiritual inbreeding.

No Romeo or Juliet can come to life in a suburb because Montagues and Capulets do not wage their Homeric battles there, and no Miranda is courted on an island after a tempest; love’s labor is lost.  Children are not born in suburbs but in maternity wards – yet how can a man respond to emergencies of war or peace with the full depth of heroism if he has not quaked in the presence of shattering travail, when woman wages her corresponding fight against death?(p.12)

Sick people are isolated, education is isolated, preaching is isolated.  The suburb is prudent, kind and barren, sterile, polite, with luke warm passions, utterly boring. THERE IS OUTER PEACE, BUT TOO LITTLE INNER PEACE.  One goes to the psychiatrist or marriage counselor because life is incomplete.  It is not a place where strong, spiritually healthy human beings can incubate or maintain themselves.

2,         In short, life is seen so dangerous because the times are out-of-joint, our understanding of experience is incomplete so our actions are misplaced.  A safe haven has been created in these ghettos that is artificial.   When we fail to communicate significantly to our fellows, we become desperately lonely.

Divisions between people cannot be overcome in piecemeal steps; rather they are overcome by the same infinite effort by which one must throw a rope across a stream before a bridge can be built.  No vital society can be built from a monoculture. We grow by having to solve the horrendous problems created when different peoples struggle and sacrifice to live together in peace.

Divisions among  peoples means  diminished, if not obliteration of communication. This reduces disparate elements of society to war with each other, law degenerates into the law of the jungle from which no peace can evolve.  There can never be a war to end wars!

3.         The essence of an industrial world is the specialization of labor and the utilization of people as mere “functions” in the office or factory.  Capitol sees humans only as “labor,”  or simply tools of production oriented toward ever-pressing  demands for greater efficiency. In the interest of efficiency we become more impatient.  Insidiously, this factory mentality invades other parts of the normal life-processes, disruptive of other critical relations. How long does it take to create a friendship, or carry out a courtship, or learn to become a master tradesman or artist?   No stopwatch applies here.

The pervasive ethic of the factory has made us masters of production and applied to education the commodity is defined as mere acquisition of information.  But in the process of learning to create goods and services beyond all imagination begun two hundred years ago, we have depressed our ability at reproduction (regenerating change).  In the mean time, unattended social problems are growing and in this environment violence is not far behind.

Change challenges to us to find constructive ways of overcoming the sterile divorce of labor and leisure, and of mastering the sequence of changes which industrial society makes inevitable in every individual life. (p.20)                

4.         The residential neighborhood and the office remain in isolation from each other. [RF – Public relations directors tell us that technology has made it possible to communicate as we never have before, however, cell phones and pagers reaching us in automobiles, busses, on mountain tops, at concerts, have more often than not accellerated disruption and reduced even more the fading vestiges of personal privacy.  Corporations now expect employees and customers (ala telemarketers) to be available at their beck-and-call at all hours of the day and night.]

It could be said that we communicate more, but the nature of these communications is either for commerce, or is superficial, like calling to have a member of the family pick up groceries.  Yet we find it difficult to express our true feelings face-to-face.  [RF – Marriages have now resulted from interactions over the internet.  How can one imagine that e-mail will do the trick if one has difficulty speaking about serious matters face-to-face.]

5.         The dichotomy between factory and residence tears us apart because, in the factory language is a tool of production. But in the home and on the street, names of people, or of loyalty to groups is crucial. The former setting is impersonal, the latter absolutely personal or it is nothing.

Neither the factory nor the residence are complete enough in themselves to fulfill our lives. We need production, but human nature is not mono-nature. We are also friends, husbands and wives, daughters and sons,  or members of different groups.  We are all of those things, we are “multiform.” We crave, the ability and freedom to change, to shift from one of these roles to another as need be.

6.         In the normal day-to-day functioning for survival inevitably become caught up in the demands of production, of parenting and maintaining a home, but in carrying out these activities efficiency seems to become, working on “automatic pilot.” Repetition living, however necessary for part of our lives,  amounts to non-life as a steady diet.  We crave to come more alive, which is to say, to change education, politics, production, all institutions for that matter,  toward better standards.  Today, in what is called “an interim age,” most of our institutions are on the verge of disfunction to the point of near anarchy. We strive to gain more control of our lives, “following our bliss,” as Joseph Campbell put it.  So the great question then is, “how do we begin?”

7.         To become more empowered requires an inner power (“soul”).  ERH’s metaphor for the environment in which this happens is a “time out,” “The Soul On The Highway.” The highway is the time between the office and the home, figuratively speaking,  wherein one can ponder the condition of one’s being out of the cauldron of the work station and a distraction at home.

One must hunt for similar souls to gain reinforcement. One must admit the chaos of our living environment, then one must begin to take action, getting out of the emotionally neutral role of “observer only.”   One then seeks out others of a like mind with whom to coalesce, drawing additional strength in action.

8.         Renewal must also take place beside other generations which harbor the same spirit.  Governments tend to follow the lowest common denominator of public will.  Taking action may, perhaps always,  take the form of the new and unconventional. (RF – Save-the-streams is one such movement.  ERH writes of others in his book PLANETARY SERVICE, in which he admonishes groups to become “social pirates”, meaning, not awaiting the glacial pace of government to begin new projects.]

These actions have the multiplying effect of firing other spirits in the community giving them hope.  Begin movements, then, is the byword.

The New Nature of Sin p.29

9.         Today, the condition of feeling powerless has reduced us to non-commitment, to impotency. The individual in this state can no longer  sin.  At least the gumption to sin shows some vitality!

Sin is the contradiction between  words by me and my own acts. Whenever  the acts are not mine and my speech is verbiage without effect, sin is impossible…He belongs to a professional group, block, and lobby.  They sin for him.  And at home, he and his wife fall victim to all the drives in the community. (pp. 30,31)

Sins and crimes are quite different.  Crime is a breaking of the law.  Long before an act becomes a crime by law, it is a gross sin.

10.       However,  it is difficult to resist these “pressure group sins,” vitality in a community can only take place by the gathering of vital souls forming new types of groups, new fellowships.  In this process people begin to free each other.  BUT BUCKING TRENDS IS SEEMINGLY IMPOSSIBLE. [RF – Billions and billions of dollars are invested in excessive consumption.  The idealist promises of “capitalism” and  “democracy” and “free trade”  are to be seen as idol fantasy because the truth is, any ideal, practiced in excess becomes monstrous. We no longer have government by the people, but by wealthy lobbies.  Free trade benefits only large corporations,  while  impoverishing many.  Extreme capitalism poisons the soil of everything it touches by treating all things, animal, mineral and vegetable, as commodities. In the mean time, it destroys the regenerating forces of nature: genetically altered foods have sterile seeds that kill the animals that eat them, our health is decreased by poisons that increase food production,  the drug industries produce so called cures that alleviate symptoms in the short-run but depress our immune systems, requiring more drug consumption in a never-ending downward spiral, all in the name of overall health.]

11.       THE FUTURE IS CREATED by a break from the past.  Neither the idealist, who rotely follows some principle, nor the “practical man,” who extrapolates from past ideas, comprehends the notion of regeneration. The dominant thinking of this “scientific attitude” results in endless repetition: mechanical behavior is never vital.

The community mores, however innovative at first, have a life cycle of growth and decline. Innovations inexorably become forgotten, corrupted or obsolete.

The future is created by continuous and contentious battles. [RF – For instance, Blacks have begun to emancipate themselves by decades of marches, sit-ins, boycotts, and court battles, yet opposition continues.  During the first part of the century private armies hired by factories cut down workers trying to unionize. In time the union movement prevailed,  yet today strong forces the world over still take great effort to destroy them.  The rape of the environment has been the deadly side-effect of the industrial revolution: over harvesting of timber and other crops, factories dumping toxic wastes in the air and waterways, the wanton use of insecticides, herbicides, over-fertilization of fields by farmers poison our environment. This carnage is obvious today, but corporations large and small cry, “cleaning up is too expensive and will destroy the economy!”]

Social crisis portending the end of life on the planet, or the end of freedom and justice,  is always in a race against the time when critical corrections must be made in attitudes. Always, this comes down to opposing armies fighting to the death.

Isn’t it strange?  Is war an accident? Are battlefields parts of our geography exactly as much as the Stock Exchange in Wall street or the Pasadena Golf Course?….Indeed, war seems an accident in our system of thought.  Battlefields are not part of “environment” of our educational vision.  Our systems of thought do not ask and do not answer the question:  Why is war indispensable?….Unless peace is employed to create the future, wars are indispensable. (p.33)

12.       This truth seems to have been lost, that peace must be exploited in the interest of creating a future, lest war is endless. For the last hundred years or more we have been blindly stuck on producing goods and services far beyond our needs, and today we seem to lack the will to end this excess. AT PRESENT THEREFORE, WE HAVE NO FUTURE ON THIS EARTH BECAUSE EVERY CULTURE ON  EARTH EMBRACES  ADDICTION TO THE COMMERCIAL MODEL.

13,       Each subject in school curricula is encapsulated, teaching us to mirror this by living peace-meal lives. The innumerable barriers dividing races, values, and social class causes us to lose our ability to communicate effectively about significant issues. We are left with small-talk about non-controversial issues, but no vital community can be sustained by small-talk, or by empty words.

14.       Excessive valuing of a mindset favoring commerce and pragmatism in all phases of daily life have sickened society and there seems to be no antidote on the  horizon. It is even virtually impossible for a determined family to isolate their children from these forces because of media technology.  Individual power is lost to institutions. Children are therefore left with little moral guidance because their mentors every conceivable point of view, and therefore no one. Developing minds are left with the ethic of commerce because that is the influence that comes into every home.

15.       What is to be the guidance we need for inner strength to reverse these forces?  Religion, ERH suggests is a kind of  psychological trick in the sense that we need some type of standard outside ourself. Beyond the creation of the universe, God seen as a supernatural father who judges watches over us has, over the years been the interpretation of this view. But the words of formal religion have become hollow, unconvincing. The notion that we live in order to enter paradise, that right will always win and evil punished is ununderstandable because there is nothing in our experience to confirm this.  In consequence no thinking person can accept these views. There seems to be no powerful force to counter self-serving behavior.

The psychiatrists couch, or drugs, or constant excitement has become our substitute for a void of spirit.  Another substitute has been, by honest people, a dropping out from both government and community.  No “involvement.”  Presently war and violence seem unavoidable, so one seeks refuge by a total refusal to become committed to sacrifice for anything. Indeed, the Biblical admonition, “Go forth and conquer the earth,” has become a justification for violence.

16.       One of the principle mistakes of social scientists in the past one hundred years has been to mistake religious principles of love and forgiveness and feelings of obligation as natural traits of humans.  This same naivete is the call of humanists, (basically, people are good, rational beings).

ERH asserts that model human behavior, as presented by philosopher John Dewey, and by Confucius is: scientific, democratic, depersonalizing, cooperative, functional, preparing one to be a cog-in-a-machine. (see p. 44)  This is modern pragmatism, and classic chinese philosophy as well.  THERE IS NO ROOM HERE FOR PASSION, OR  RENEWAL (BECAUSE A MACHINE CANNOT CHANGE ITSELF),  OR FOR RE-INVENTION OF HUMAN NATURE AND LANGUAGE.

17.       There can be no doubt that humankind, left to their natural tendencies, remain animal-like.  Only some type of superhuman power can jog one into higher levels of development.  WHAT IS THAT POWER AND HOW DO WE OBTAIN IT?

Often great truth is hated and crucified…Free men must shift their allegiance from solidarity and functioning “inside,” (one’s thoughts) to rebellion, to reverence, to sacrifice, according to the evils which have to be resisted most urgently. (p.48)

No humanist doubts the notion of an inherent “goodness of humankind.” They believe, with Dewey and Confucius, that mankind is a natural animal, complete and unchangeable as to its nature. To the humanist, evil, greed, avarice, war need not exist if only we would clean up our logic.

The Christian put forth a different view: humankind must be created and therefore peace will come only when they are willing to pay the price for creating it. Recreating humankind is never easy, or cheap; but that is our purpose on this earth if we will commit to it. To fulfill this command is to “live” spiritually.  Very few people born on this earth move very far along this road. Their animal nature of survival of the fittest is maintained largely in tact, but this animal tendency, when not abated prophesies the end of history.

18.               …revolution proves that not everybody thinks he is inside (the community) and that others who are inside are in peril of being cast out.  This refutes the tenets of Deweyism, of one scientific, all inclusive, cooperative, impersonal, painless order, an order in which nothing vital has to be settled by force; …(p.51)

It the Christian belief that mankind is unfinished and  it is up to us to become, “beyond natural,” so that natural man may be transformed.  Pragmatism may “inform” people, but it has no power to transform them.

19        One force in the move to transformation resides in real leadership. True leaders along with other qualities, move people toward seeing reality as clearly as possible.  Each generation must re-invent standards of civility, i.e. disregarding the lessons from history tends believers toward “natural” tendencies, the laws of the jungle.  Heroes by definition represent the right leadership at the right time.  Roosevelt led us out of the depression of the thirties against enormous odds.

20.       The trouble with the methodology of natural science is that it can only show us the concrete appearance of social events, leading us to speculate as to the spirit underlying those actions.

Science since Darwin abandoned (social) unity; John Dewey abandoned suffering as our basis of understanding the (social) world.  Compare the words of Oscar Wilde: “Suffering is really a revelation.  One discerns things one never discerned before.”  For the reason of unity, we had made all our history since Christ one common enterprise for all men who were converted to this Oneness.  And for the reason of revelation through suffering, we had built up a hierarchy of values according to the degree a man had suffered, we listen to what he had to reveal. (p.56)

Contrarily, to humanists, willingness to suffer is not venerated.

21.       Summing up dominant values of 20th Century man:

a.     The two-fold capacity of modern man: 1) never get excited, pained or violent.  2) we can know everything by logic, and to be civilized is to shun violence at all costs.

At the same time he can be an objective observer of world events such as strife, greed, struggle and blind passions, with no need for involvement.

b.     Simply by producing goods and services, and in seeking a ghettoed neighborhood for peace and protection, he fortifies himself in his “…inoffensive, pragmatic, Confucius style of living and smiling and working and whispering and pitying the follies of others.” (p.57)

To this man the future always comes as a surprise (as contrasted with an attempt to shape it and not relenting until he has).  To the Christian man, the future must be fought for:

How else can it be as the future is the fruit of passionate, dogmatic, devoted, eloquent living?”…He who wishes to be a  little bit less surprised by the world’s fits and tantrums, a bit less unprepared for the next crisis, may now be willing to ask the simple question:  How is Future created?  When does mere living become less important than the coming to life?…And not before you begin to fear for Life’s return, will you meet the original question of  Christianity.   (p.57)

Mere living is the day-to-day physical survival of life.  “Coming to life,” is the act of becoming creative and acting on some part in redefining society.

Part Two: When Time is Out Of Joint (p.61)

“The most significant characteristic of modern civilization

is the sacrifice of the future for the present, and all the power

of science has been prostituted to this purpose.”

William James (1842-1910)

1.                 Christianity is the founder and trustee of the future, the very process of finding and securing it, and without the Christian spirit there is no real future for man. (p.61)

[RF – ERH says in other essays that Christianity existed long before Jesus’ time. By this I take him to mean that any human communities that survived practiced certain patterns of thought and action.  What Jesus did was articulate those truths, that unity and peace could be achieved if man could change and renew himself.  This is why he placed Christianity at the center of history.]

The meaning of Jesus as the center of history is that man had been split into such a variety of specimens that the unity of the species was imperilled, and consequently the lowliest stratum of mannot Caesar Augustus but the child in the manger – had to be made the foundation of a universal unity. (p.73)

When old ways no longer succeed and war, anarchy, degeneration and revolution describe conditions, new ways must be found to re-vitalize a social order.  Those new ways are described by novelty, and surprise.

…”saving” Christianity is unnecessary, undesirable, impossible, because it is anti-Christian.  Christianity says that he who tries to save his soul shall lose it.  Our supreme need is not to save what we smugly presume to have, but to revive what we have almost lost.  The real question is:  Do we have a future?  Then, we would have to be Christians. (p.61)

At the center of the creed is death and resurrection, sloughing off and renewal everyday, – over and over and over again.

2.         Cyclical thinking is the real core of the pagan mind.  The formula echoes in Babylonian, Hindu, Buddhist, Platonic, and stoic teachings. Aristotle speaks of the rotation of government, as do the culture cycles of Vico and Spengler, Mexican myths and Germanic “twilight of the gods.”  In modern times, the penchant of the social scientist (often calling himself humanist) to see humankind as a natural animal and thereby, his characteristics as well are boorishly predictable. In mythical literature, and often in modern novels, the mimic is the inescapable prediction or curse.

3.         All myths divide peoples, time begins with the god which created the tribe (the Haida Raven, Osiris, Odin etc.) and endless wars were fought to the death between these different groups. No tribe was a brother to another unless the first was an extension. Heaven and earth, celestial gods (the mythical heros), and each tribe had iron-clad boundaries.

4.         The essence of Christian doctrine is that there is one, unified, world. Heaven and earth, man and woman, brother and brother, “…namely, that man can progress from fragmentariness to completeness only by surviving the death of his old Adam, his old allegiances and beginning new ones.” (p.66)   Jesus shed his nationality and proved that an end could be turned into a new beginning.  Death and resurrection, and thereby “…death could be made fertile,”  if we anticipate it. Death is survived by successors, having been invested with, say, the spirit of justice, carrying that spirit in one way or another, and thus the next generation is transformed.

5.         Heaven is created on earth by humankind beginning to live, here, today, by acting on Christian principles. Heaven is not  something reached personally, after one’s death. [RF – ERH suggests that is the religion fit for six-year-olds.] Creating heaven on earth is what is meant by the end determining the beginning. Our goal determines what we must become, beginning now.

Men create future when they are more than doubtful about the stability of society as it is, and feel that the end of the world is ever imminent.  By freely anticipating the death of some part of their minds, ideal, old allegiances, they conquer the compulsory total death which hunts pagans down like nemesis. (p.69)

6.         Faith is the demand that one completely surrenders to “…something outside the existing order of things.” Faith that one can achieve the impossible is the only power new, progressive movements have, like present day movements protecting the environment, reestablishing honest government, reforming our system of justice, etc.

7.         The notion that the future is merely an extension of the past may work for natural science, but is backward for social science, according to Christian views. Natural science possesses no guidance for society. “Better bombs may be called progress, but real progress is in not using them.”  Thus,  a viable future for society must be anticipated and sacrificed for by a society unified in spirit. The Holy Spirit.

8.         ERH differentiates between cycles and progress.  Cycles occur both from our own creations (inside us) as well as outside us in nature.  Progress is the result of our own efforts. (pp.78, 79)   “the cycle is an external myth at which we stare, and progress an act of our own creative faith.” (p.79)

For progress there must be a definite commitment, publically stated.

As long as people have not said so, they may sleep, eat, work together and yet not be married at all.  They have not cut out the possibilities of doing otherwise.” (p.79)

Until we have admitted the existence of some problem, like pollution, crime, the gap between rich and poor etc,  we cannot begin to correct an infectious condition.  We have fallen to great depths and must climb out.  Today we usually suspend standards of ethics in public and private life, the ethic of greed prevails more than ever today.  To continue the “old ways,” the conditions which brought on these social disasters, is to get into a groove, to be on “automatic pilot” so to speak, repeating failed courses of actions.  To unify is to get common agreement, first as to the ills of the community, then rise above them by agreeing on some experiments that might cure these diseases. Thus, cycles are automatic and socially degenerative –  progress is calculated and efficacious. OUR NATURAL TENDENCIES ARE TO RELAX AND STAY INTO THE OLD WAYS.  IT TAKES GREAT EFFORT TO CHANGE.  THUS, vigilance must be constant; somewhat on a knife edge, a balance between anticipating the “end of our world,” and maintaining some source of will and energy to innovate.

9.         To ignore, to drop out of society is to once again create barriers between ourselves and the flow of life around us.  Vacation is a temporary dropping out.  As a time for reflection, this is necessary,  but temporary it must be, lest the future is destroyed by constant leisure.

Thus, our lives, if we are aware, cannot be either linear or spiral (as reminiscent of failed theories of history); they must be “crucial.”  One can never drop out from society really, because our existence is inexorably tied to our communities.  Our food, safety, friends, work, all aspects of living are bound to others.

Science and the Christian Era:  (p.84)

1.         In our modern era science has replaced magic and fantasy, but social change is always resisted. Scientific tendencies always favor the past. Darwin, Freud or Einstein fought bitter, stubborn opposition to their new work. Innovators revise their questions in the light of new evidence. Paracelsus, one of the great innovators in medicine said: “The truth begets hatred.”

Mere data today is turning the world into a “tower of Babel.”  Truth unifies, but since it is always incomplete it remains, pseudo-truth, dividing peoples. All fields which strive to progress depend upon other fields of study, and upon acceptance by society. Upon the rise of modern science, society had to accept a new philosophy, i.e. the exploration of nature must be unified by a common set of principles.  Until the public accepted this, they would not accept or support new scientific work.

2.         The notion that revelation of new insights, which always creates new questions and new orientation, calls for subsequent change, is a basic tenet of Christianity as well as modern science.

3.         Progress occurs when our old ways of thinking are seen to no longer solve our problems, and new ways of thinking must be found.  Revelation means a new way to see the world.  Linear thinking keeps applying the old ways, asserting that failures are caused by insufficient data.

Linear thinking causes one to be trapped in a “vicious circle,” it is never capable of seeing an end to the old ways and the beginning of something new: it cannot comprehend the end of an era and beginning of a new era.

Iron-clad (unchangeable) rules therefore enslave us.  The laws of natural science address the question,  “what is nature?”  Its method assumes a universal logic of suppositions (philosophy) which assumes a unified set of methods to describe natural phenomena.  This philosophy assumes that humankind are one hundred per cent children of nature and therefore totally ruled by natural laws, i.e. the nature of man will never change.  Following this logic leads one to conclude that social history is a mere succession of inevitable events.  Just as with the animals of the forest,  a single pattern of living eternalized.

4.         When one assumes that humankind can learn from its experience and change into something different, (i.e. socially evolve) then one calls for a science of society that is different from that of nature. Thus, there must be a difference between “progress” and the “vicious circle.”

Progress is impossible in a society which has lost orientation. (p.89)

ERH goes on to point out that the pagan view of science (i.e. making endless distinctions and isolating events in the interest of defining them) creates the “vicious circle” way of thinking. And reminds us that a science of society must be driven by an orientation of mankind that allows for true social progress (i.e. integrating isolated events), as against mere repetition.  The basic difference is the distinction between static isolation of events and dynamic interaction between them.

The Intermittence of Faith (p.89)

1.         Is Christianity bankrupt today? Yes, and it must start over once again.  This notion once again demonstrates the meaning of death and resurrection.  The same is true in our individual lives. Christianity has been bankrupt many times in its history, at the times of St. Augustine, Thomas Aquinas, Luther, and now today for instance.  The very vitality of Christianity is its mandate to change, be think anew, to redefine itself. THIS IS THE PATH TO RENEWAL, AS LONG AS SOMEONE STILL BELIEVES AND ACTS ON THE FUNDAMENTALS.

Chapt. IV – The Creed of the Living God

How God Is Known – Adults and the Creed – The divinity of Christ – Let us Make Man

1.         God (the power that makes us speak the truth – and act on it at the right time), is constantly killed in our hearts and must rise again.  In secular language, we must keep trying as long as we have living breath.  We experience God when we live the act of changing our lives and moving ahead.

2.         In tribal life, God was the power that kept the tribe together.  That was defined as the spirit of its ancestors.  The ancestors never die, in their words, they “went to the happy hunting ground.” Death is denied.

3.         Pagan  “sky empires” such as Egyptian, Mayan, Incan, etc., believed that God was in the heavens, the cosmic order as revealed in the cycles of the stars.  The stars are eternal, therefore,  God never dies and the laws of the universe are written in stone (hieroglyphs), as guides for man. Death is ignored.

Jews believed that God was the power (in his people) to endure the passing of concrete things and await for him (the Messiah) to come in the future.  Death was neither denied or ignored, but endured.  Death was a negative.

With the coming of Jesus, death was included as a part of life and the key to humankind’s renewal.  By renewal (through the notion of death and resurrection), God’s spirit was victorious over men’s physical presence and  rational minds.

4.         In the previous religions God was a concept, an abstract power.  With Jesus, God was not an object, or a concept. He resided in humans. “He is the power which makes us speak.” (.94)  THE NOTION OF DEATH AND RESURRECTION THEREFORE MEANS THAT HUMANKIND IS CAPABLE OF CONQUERING DEATH.  God then can only be revealed at the time we speak and act on significant truth.  This occurs only at specific times in our lives.  The divine, therefore:

…is known as an event, never as an essence or a thing.  And it can happen to us only in the midst of living, after death in some form – bereavement, nervous breakdown, loss of hope – has come upon us….We have no other authority for our faith in God but the living soul of man…(pp. 94,95)

Thus, we know we have this power of renewal because we can actually live it.  God, according to this interpretation is not the soul of the world, that abstraction cannot know how individuals feel, or struggle to obtain its powers.“The prime mover knows nothing of you or me.” (p.95)

5.         Thomas Aquinas harmonized Aristotle with the Christian tradition, i.e. We experience God because logically something had to create the universe, so both Catholics and Humanists accepted this conception of God, as an abstract concept.

Such natural reason is really immature reason, like the philosophizing of a child prodigy who thinks before he has lived.  A child has to think in external, physical terms about God or science or royalty, for example, because he has not yet lived long enough to identify himself through sympathy, with the more mature phases of human experience.  (p.97)

People think the world into existence by logic, (something had to create the universe),  but one can only experience religion when forced to confront difficult personal problems which overwhelm. [RF – This brings to mind one of ERH’s aphorisms, “90 % of traditional organized Christianity teaches a religion fit only for a six year-old.”] It would seen the God of ERH has the power to transform us, but not the God of the Humanists!]

6.         In life we are driven by many gods – property, power (some control over our lives), sex, greed, art, science,  many social causes.  We pass from one need to another endlessly, they are all of this world, they are multiple, and we are stretched between them back and forth. But, in the end none are permanently satisfying. At different stages in our lives one is dropped and another takes priority.  What is really necessary?  Our wish is for some modicum of stability and meaning in our lives, and these higher needs call for some unity and understanding.

That which sustains us in the material world does not sustain us in the inner, spiritual world where arises our deepest sense of meaning.   The evaluation of our present and past can only begin meaningfully from a vision of a future.  Where we wish to go and what we wish to become and how we intend to get “there,” are the only true basis for social evaluation.  These questions tell us what to keep from the past and what is no longer relevant – toward the future.  If we have no anticipation, we have no basis to evaluate our lives. [RF – Aristotle’s aphorism, “the unexamined life isn’t worth living,”  must be turned around, “the unlived life isn’t worth examining” In which case we don’t have a future!]

Adults and the Creed p.98

1.         The Athanasian Creed:

a.     God created everything in heaven and earth – thus, the universe is one (no separate heaven and earth).

b.     Humankind has the liberty to die (in old ways), and rise again – a metaphor for our potential to change, to recreate our nature, to advance from natural animal to half natural animal and half god. We know we have the divine power to be creative because many people know they think original thoughts.

c.     God gave us the potential to receive the Holy Spirit from our fellow humans, “…which enables us to commune with posterity and start fellowship here and now.”  (p.98)

Modern Christian theologians are reluctant to accept the notion of a “creed” – forgetting that this explains the flow of life (regeneration) for all humans. (RF – Unitarians and many Congregationalists, especially, proudly claim to follow no creed.)

The Christian Dogma is not an intellectual formula but a record and promise of life.  It does not propose ideas for our minds to master; it tells actual events which can master and transform us as they did the first Christians.  It is not a mere topic of thought but a presupposition of sanity.  It is the Christian “a priori,”  (p.98)

2.         The Creed foretells of events that will be experienced when a culture is vital.  The Gospels represent one model of this notion: i.e. The same truth must be told in different ways to different cultures, depending on what their level of understanding might be. Facts and formulas inform, stories, on the other hand, hold the power to transform. The Gospels are the same message told to different groups: Matthew tried to prove it to the Jews,  Mark, Luke spoke to the future generations, and John spoke to the Jews when the Torah was no longer enshrined in the Temple, (i.e. the budding Christians) and he had to convince them that “the word had to become flesh.”

In a like way, myths are the first step in telling a truth to children in a language they can understand.  This is appropriate as long as the more sublime truths are understood by adults.

So legends like Santa Claus are not lies when told to children that they may understand the workings of the Spirit among us – as long as the legend waits to be told again, in appropriate terms, to the adolescent, the man, the father, the community leader. (p.99)

3.         ERH points out how, by Luther’s time, the Church had become so worldly that Luther threw the authority of both church and state over to the people.  His cry was, “everyman his own priest” and asked the Bible be translated from Latin to the vernacular.  In response, both Catholic and Protestant addressed mainly the education of children, largely ignoring the adult population.  And to this day, the child’s version of the Bible is what it told whereby no intelligent adult would take Christianity seriously.

4.                 A good parent or teacher has to discard much mental lumber and reshape his perspective under the stress of having to select what is vitally important for the new generation in his care.  (p.101)

The phrase, “the living God” means that, the event of transformation means rebirth, re-creation, the ability to change our nature, a step from mere animal toward “super-natural” animal. The question of “why” for a creative or heroic act is childish, the questions of “what” and “when” are crucial to our lives.

5.         The cradle of progress can hold only one person – one who is a model for many to follow.  In the material world it is the opposite, a bridge is built by many – in the spirit world the power is carried by an event, a martyr, a hero, a courageous leader “inspires” others.  Otherwise, one merely follows orders, which requires no commitment.

Such leaders set standards, inspire, are to be exemplified – they are not simply “a” person, like all others, but “the” person one follows.  Jesus is the Christian’s model, and thus is called “divine. “A negative (scientific – humanistic?) interpretation would be that, since we have the standard, we no longer need the specific event as a reminder.  The scientific notion ignores the power required for transformation.  It explains why science cannot comprehend the notion of creativity by application of its method.  It is because Jesus created the spirit of the creed and lived by it, that it is given to the community, it allows community members to become creative – that he is called “divine.”

6.         Another dimension of the Trinity appears here (pp.108-112)  whereby the father is guarantor of trust, the son is guarantor of liberty and the Holy Spirit the guarantor of creativity.  And all men are admonished (commanded) to accept and protect these acts as the model for humankind.

The Economy of Salvation  (p.113)

1.         ERH asserts that for the last two millennia the common person and clergy as well, believe that God, after creating the universe has done nothing since.  They, in other words, do not understand that humanity must be recreated constantly as it evolves further from the natural animal state.

2.         He further asserts that, after one thousand years the “church” has become corrupt, void of Christian purposes.  Christianity has been corrupt; in the tenth and fifteenth, and now the twentieth centuries.  In the past it was reborn, will it be once again?  It never promised to eliminate sin, or death, but rather to overcome them. (p.114)

3.         Salvation means the advance of the singular against the plural, and this, we know has happened through Christian history; toward one God, one World, one Humanity.

The Three Epochs

These three epochs are: – in the first millennia the church was established representation of one God over the many false gods. In the second, the rise of science and subsequent realization that there was one world and a single method to describe it.  The goal during the third millennium must be to establish that humankind is singular.

We have yet to establish Man, the great singular of humanity, in one household over the plurality of races, classes and age groups.  This will be the center of struggle in the future, and already we have seen the outbreak of youth movements and Townsendites, class war and race war. (p.115)

4.         The three parts of the Creed exemplified the truth, that Christianity was being practiced  in history  as reflected in the achievements in the first two millennia: redemption in the 1st, scientific discovery of the world in the 2nd,  and stated goal for the 3rd.

5.         The core of the Christian doctrine is the spiritual regeneration (succession) of all people, not heredity.  Success breeds a spirit of imitation.  Failure and attempt to renew requires the members to maintain the spirit of renewal, to continue to be creative and grow.  This represents the vitality of Christianity.

Another aspect of the genius of Jesus is his quality of indirect leadership.  He chose not to lead by demonstrating genius, and thereby rule by sword, or tongue, but rather to create a church that would teach a world full of genius’ who were empowered to reincarnate the spirit.

True spiritual succession does more than perpetuate.  It spreads and deepens.(p.118)

Instilling the Holy Spirit in man is the secret of his ability to be innovative and disciplined in order to quell the earthly tendencies. Temptations of the flesh overwhelm us.

Our penchant to over eat and drink, our greed, our willingness to give in to expediency, our inability to overcome bigotry, faltering courage, lust and perhaps most of all laziness:  all these and other demons in our psyche are barriers to growth. To diminish these traits of a purely physical existence requires developing enormous inner strength at times when sacrifice is demanded of us. Sacrifice is often required in the process of community building and avoid acting simply out of habit.

Our life is haunted  by boredom and neurosis; it is disintegrated by mechanized  society, and by the mechanizing science which makes man a mere derivation of antecedent causes.  (p.121)

The pinch comes especially from seductive cures, when spellbinders promise easy, painless antidotes for social problems.  Gnostics averred that, since truth was around anyway, one had only to know it to solve problems. And the modern day Humanists are well known for thinking about things (endless discussion), while being slow to take up action. Gnostics taught that revelation was unnecessary, Humanists taught that sacrifice was unnecessary.  BOTH PLAY THE SAME TRICK, I.E. REGENERATION OF SPIRIT CAN BE CHEAP AND PAINLESS.

Even man’s lusts and fears have become respectable today because they testify to his vitality.  `Vital, dynamic, powerful, stirring, stimulating, exciting, thrilling, terrific,’ are the medals which modern man bestows.  They are really insults.  To call a speaker stimulating, for instance, is a triumph of Pontius Pilate among us.  It seems the truth no longer matters. (p.121)

ERH points out that, today we have many crusaders and reformers, but their effect is lessened by application to insignificant causes.

6.         Of course  people cannot be “goody – goody” all the time.  We are, after all, unavoidably animal in our nature.  The problem is to develop, as much as possible, the spiritual possibilities in our nature.  And, of course the major instrument by which this occurs is through an honest use of speech (our words authoritated by our action).

Throughout this chapter ERH offers the detail of this insight. The reader is admonished, always, to refer to the sources of these notes, i.e. THE CHRISTIAN FUTURE.

Christianity Incognito (p.115)

1.         Here is a crucial aspect of Christianity: to recognize that we would never be more than half divine (capable of creativity). [lRF – This means, our ability for a complex language means we can think new and complex thoughts far, far beyond animals.  To think original thoughts means we are capable of creativity, which is God-like (divine). Humans then can be defined to be the animal that is capable of becoming half god. One might add that, the acquisition of this enormous power is neutral, the notion of good and evil is how we use that power.]  To be a total Christian would have to mean, to be another Jesus.  To be totally pagan makes us animal-devils.  We will always have these two elements within us, the natural animal that is capable of creating.

2.         Denominational strife is, or should be, unnecessary because all serious religions have the same goal, merely different attitudes toward achieving it.  ERH believes, and I take his point, that Christianity amalgamates the core of all other serious religions, creating one universal religion. Extreme believers in any denomination either renders them boorish, or hypocritical, or dangerous – zealots (such as those bombing abortion clinics in the name of God), for instance.  To be totally secular makes one into a hedonist, directionless, self serving.  Both extremes are the enemies of community.

3.         Membership in a church is not necessary for one to call him/her self a Christian (now especially, because organized churches have lost sight of its goals). One becomes Christian when one demonstrates the existence of the Holy Spirit within them in their everyday activities.

The Death and Resurrection of the Word (p.128)

1.         We must find new names to describe the same regenerating process.

A great Swiss Jesuit writer has even gone as far as to declare, `The word  `God’ is so spent that we do not intend to haggle with Nietzsche on its behalf.’  That would be nameless Christianity indeed.” (p.128

xxxxxxxx

2.         Secular language is either universal and abstract, like mathematics, or concrete and particular. Two times two equals four is for all persons and universal.  “England, my England,” is particular and concrete.  But the Christian notion of the “word,” connected to action is not a concrete representation of a creed per se, its universality unites bonds between persons.  This is yet another manifestation of the notion that we must be both secular and divine in our spirit and actions.

3.         Make the word into the flesh and blood of action.

4.         The death and resurrection of the word also must describe communication between generations.  The “word,” in time becomes flat, loosing its power. Old ways no longer solve the problems and new solutions must be fashioned and named.  Today justice, liberty, equality, are at risk and must be reestablished.  The new means, and new terms must be forged to achieve the same goals from the past.  Loss of orientation from the past generation, and from a dreamed of future isolates and kills the spirit of a people. People tend to lose their power and integrity in due course. Spiritual death, therefore is very real.  For over one hundred years China was dispirited.  For five hundred years the regenerating spirit of Egypt has been moribund. The same may be said for many other once vital cultures.  ERH’s description of America at the beginning of this essay predicts our descent at this time.  The question remains as to when or whether this spirit can be regenerated.

Transition to Chapt. VI

1.         We must learn from our failures of the past: what to discontinue and what to carry forward: such as: [RF – my own reflections extrapolating from text examples to the present.]

a.     When children are left with inadequate direction they are faced with re-inventing society, in which case they always begin with the culture of the jungle. Child crimes, teen pregnancy, runaways, etc. are rampant in the U.S. today.

b.     When we are left with a dominant scientific (secular) basis for thought, that judgement is always toward venerating physical comfort: commerce becomes the primary standard for important decision making.  In this case the social glue eventually comes undone: personal judgement becomes more impersonal, trust and commitment recede. This phenomenon overwhelms us today.

Selfishness and greed dominate our thinking; observe, for instance, the influence of lobbies over the votes of politicians; lobbyists are shameless in admitting the buying of votes in elective bodies.  The logic of commerce tell us that clean water, air and soil become too expensive, and what follows is the reasoning that short-term benefit takes precedence over long term,  health, education  and all other social services become too expensive for proper funding.

c.     “Scientific thinking” exacerbates the “consumer oriented society,” because the cures are always derived from logical, tunnel vision – moral guidance is often illogical when the balance between the  physical (present), is favored over the spiritual (future).

d.     Lack of trust, corrupted institutions, blatant misrepresentation of actions and events by those in power, end in feelings of extreme frustration and cynicism among the public,  which evolves into the rise of extreme groups advocating hate and violence.  [RF – In modern times these conditions have evolved  into fascism: Italy in 1922, Germany in 1933, and in Yougoslavia in 1995)]

In sum, all of these conditions commonly prevail today whereby no other than the destruction of any future for our communities is imaginable.

Before we may be sure that our Creation of Future is more than an academic discussion, the common things near home must regain their splendor.  And when do old things regain their lustre? When do facts become interesting? When words recover their meaning?  When they again appear as things to come, as acts to be done, as names to be invoked; when everything, so to speak, has ceased to exist because we feel that our own infinite insistence alone can give it a new lease on life. (p.137)

Chapt. VI  (p.138)

O FORTUNATE GUILT!  OR LOOKING BACK ON THE CHURCH

1.         Organizations can be called to life by a viable plan, but the real life of the organization may best lie in the passion (aliveness) of the planners.  It is a truism that order opposes creativity. “The sloughing off of old stages and the insistence on new ones distinguishes life from mechanism.” (p.139)  Living things are constantly adapting to the environment, or they die.  [RF – just as a tree must adapt to periods of wet and dry, and as Buddha taught us, one must turn inward to meditation to escape an overpowering chaotic world in order to maintain sanity, at times.  Following blind habit seems difficult to change.

2.         The family is the most alive organization we have.

3.         Any “alive” organization must be vulnerable to suffering, pain and frailty because it is willing to sacrifice and change.

To live means to be vulnerable and he who must remain vulnerable at any moment cannot expect to be secure and happy in the ordinary sense. (p.139)

4.         Hope to regain the past always fails.  Charity (love) that is faint saps will and commitment.  Faith, that risking change will renew life, is essential and this is a constant gamble of course.

a.     In the fifth century A.D. Constantinople began to challenge Rome as the center of the Christian church.  The Greek Christian church attempted to take advantage of the military attacks on Rome, believing it was vulnerable. Their “hope” to transfer the center of the church to Constantinople failed, thereby splitting the easter and western centers of the church.

b.     In 794 AD there was a possibility for reconciliation, but Rome hated and feared the eastern church and bypassed the  opportunity through a lack of Charity in a mood of spite. A lack of love eroded the spirit to reunify.

Summary:  The past cannot be restored in entirety and should not be, because that would also mean restoring the failures as well as successes. [RF – Modern examples would be the hatred between Serbs and Croats,  in America between “pro-choice” and “pro-life” groups, and generally between extreme hate groups of different creeds.]

We should be thankful for some of our failures because the agony and desperation can cause some essential, beneficial side effects.  Our problems force our souls to new life.

5.         Secular thinking can pervade clergy just as much as it can the lay-person.  Its characteristics are dwelling on materialistic, here-and-now thinking, i.e. upon economics avoidance of pain in the present at all costs.)

6.         Contrarily, human progress (peace) is always bought with sacrifice in the name of a lasting unity between peoples.  In our daily living we find the world largely chaotic, fragmented and at war with itself.  The cure is to find or create order from the chaos.  But not a rigid, unchangeable order.

7.         Science has achieved for us a unity in nature.  All scientists agree that a unified method and purpose for science is in place for natural science. The same unity must occur for a science of society that will bring about peace.

In social life there remains many barriers to peace: race, culture, gender, age, ideologies, bureaucracies within corporations and governments, etc. The criterion for a successful science of society is therefore an eradication of these barriers. (See the MULTIFORMITY OF MAN for an expansion of this idea) – (pp.160-163)

8.         Religious (spiritual) unity must precede one’s commitment before secular problems can be solved. When secular problems become our gods, such as economic considerations, this always leads to slavery or war. (In the jungle, the dominant male animal always enslaves the others.)

9.         The social  difference between the scientific mind and the religious mind, as related to human community, is that science looks for causes (i.e. breeding and genetics) and religion looks for effects (in terms of spiritual achievement). For instance, the meaning of a child lies in the future, in what it becomes, not in how it was bred.  With science, the beginning determines the end.  With Christianity, the end determines the beginning (what we do each day to achieve that end).

Chapt. VII (p.165)

1.         We become free (capable) to create a community when we understand the elements of time and space in our experience. To grow we require reference points in the process of measuring progress and for this, only time and space offer a possibility.  The scientist assumes the existence of a unified space, and time is assumed to be a given, with no beginning or end. Indeed, with scientific orientation we experience space as a unified whole, – what we witness in nature is given, and differentiations are products of our thought, such as taxonomies and the dividing of our experience into departments of study in academe.

Socially we also experience not one but two elements of space: the concrete world, on the one hand,  and our thought about it on the other.  Time is divided as well: experienced in three elements, past, present and future.  Generally, in social experience the time of the physicist is of limited value because our life-rhythms are imprecise and of different meanings as compared with the time in nature.  Thus, quantitative measure in social experience should give in to sequence of stages for reference points.

2.         In a sense, time and space are the fundamental elements of experience. The new-born child can quite naturally function without thinking of all of this.  But because, as we grow and become more conscious of the world around us the monumental amounts of stimuli amount to much chaos.   All sorts of things happen of which we have little comprehension. Survival rests on our ability to bring some order to these events.  While natural science has done well for us in bringing order to our perceptions of natural phenomena, ERH strongly asserts, these methods are inadequate to the much more complex social phenomena.

Part of the genius of ERH is his concept of how time and space must be viewed differently between these two types of events (natural and social).  The more we become conscious of these distinctions and their meaning, the more capable we become of exerting some order and control over our social environment.  At any moment. For instance, we are torn in two directions: 1) thinking about the two experiential fronts of past and future and 2) the two worlds of concrete events and thought.  When one imagines two perpendicular intersecting lines, one representing time and the other space, one can imagine that the present is represented at the intersection. One must choose at any moment, consciously or unconsciously, which direction (front of experience) is best to pay attention to.  Action takes place only in the present. THESE ELEMENTS OF TIME AND SPACE REPRESENT THE MOST IRREDUCIBLY FUNDAMENTAL QUALITIES OF OUR EXPERIENCE.

The Cross of Reality (p.166)

1.         This “Cross” as described by ERH bears no direct reference to the Christian cross.  It is, however a symbol of the whole conscious experience of human beings every hour of the day. It is nothing less than a diagram of our contact with reality! An abridged graphic representation of decisions we make every waking hour. To be conscious of the nature of decisions we are called to make reduces the level of chaos around us.  Given any situation commonly confronting us, we are faced with several choices that are often not easy to make: one may respond according to remembered past experience, or  judge in favor of creating a future situation whereby our immediate gratification should be postponed. It may be best to respond guided by intuition, to immediately intervene, or conversely to turn introspective, pausing to  reflect  before acting.

Reality itself – not the abstract reality of physics, but the full bodied reality of human life -is cruciform.  Our existence is a perpetual suffering and wrestling with conflicting forces, paradoxes, contradiction within and without.  By them we are stretched and torn in opposite directions, but through them comes renewal. (p.166)

[RF – A footnote in the text offers a citation referring to Origen and Augustine in their commentaries on Ephesians, “In the philosophical object of knowledge the figure of the cross is engraved like an indelible watermark.”]

2.         We are, of course, familiar with the physical concept of space, but it has long been recognized that the inner space of our thought is another world we inhabit. We imagine, we introspect, our emotions well up despite any attempt at rational control.  And the rules governing these two habitations of our consciousness (inside and outside) are very different.  Outer space functions according to the rules of nature, not under our own control.  Our thought is infinitely more controllable: a world of decisions.

Time, is much more a creature of our imagination. Time is divided, ignored, slowed down, speeded up, all depending upon our psychological states and convenience. Time offers crucial reference points against which our journey through life, but of a different form than that of the physicist. There is a before-and-after major events: before World War II, marriage, children, major crisis in our lives, etc. . Time is fleeting, as the duration of a kiss from a lover, it slows down when we are pained.  Or one can take time-out from life when one enters the world of a novel, film or concert or play.  Both time and space are the source of the reference points we so desperately need to maintain memory and order in events, and one might add, our sanity.

3.         We refer to past events and may relive them in our memories, or suffer in an unhappy present anticipating the fruits of that sacrifice.  We face these four fronts of inner and outer space, and past and future at every conscious moment.

No social progress, whether in the family, or at war can occur without such reflection.  A successful proposal of marriage, or a commitment to a cause can be an agonizing decision that changes our lives.  This is why we can suffer during indecision when making crucial choices. In these ways the “Cross,” depicting social time and space as differentiated from the time and space of the natural scientist, can serve as a powerful symbol of  the flow of life.

Our own civilization, dominated for several centuries by natural science and its applications, suffers most of all from obsession with the outward front.  The essence of man’s attitude on this front is objectivity: whatever we treat as something merely to classify, experiment with, describe, control, is thereby externalized, treated as if it had no solidarity with us, estranged from our living system. (p.170)

This is but one quarter of our existence, and to mistake it for the whole, as many people tend to do, reduces man to a mouse running in a maze.

4.         The scientific psychologist believes that our thinking is motivated by a prior cause.  In fact, it is the opposite.  Our fears are predicated on anticipation.  Our willingness to sacrifice, the same.

The Cross of Reality shows us that the scientific attitude is only one out of four equally valid contacts with reality, and that it depends upon the existence of the others for its own meaning. …Man does not think because he “is.”  We think because change is ahead. …We dread change; therefore we think.  (p.170)

5.         That man is free to find himself in many times and spaces unifies all of history because we can go a long way to understanding and relating to those who lived in the past, and why they took certain actions, as well as learning its consequences. The fact that the same problems for survival arise in every generation means that we should understand the fullest extent of our nature through the study of history. The Peloponnesian Wars were an economic revolt against the domination of Athens, which, failing to share power with other city-states lost much of its power. European nations colonizing America lost much of their power for the same reason. In modern times we are entering a period of enormous demand for resources: competition between nations intensifies  pressures between nations. Oil, copper, cheap labor, educated minds, and numerous other  goods and services are at issue.  Unless these barriers to peace are diminished our fate is eternal war which will eventually do us in.

Too late change means endless wars.  Today, trade reform is essential yet cynicism and despair stifle our will.  Those who read history should learn that only a very few are capable of sparking reform. The “hippie” students marching against the U.S. – Vietnam war evolved into the removal of a president. That this reflected a failed logic of the government is now admitted.

The present intellectual lack of understanding and communication between science and religion grossly distorts the thinking of many.  The “Cross” shows us that, rather than separate or opposing, these means of consciousness are complimentary and essential parts of human need.  Science defines nature, religion guides social decisions relating to creating a community at peace with itself.  Science, contrary to the beliefs of many scientists is an inappropriate guide for our decisions for social action.

Buddha (p.176)

1.         Four religious leaders created a consciousness of rhythms of our thought, thereby keeping us a bit more sane and free to respond to events.

Buddha lived in a time, not unlike our own, of extreme materialism.  This brings on a niagara of stimuli and demands upon us, many gods vie for our attention.  Hinduism advocates many gods, competing -but lacking unity. In such chaos a person becomes psychically overloaded.  Buddha demonstrated a way out of this, which was to renounce the material world, turning inward in meditation.

2.         China, in the time of Laotze was highly organized: too many demands on one’s time to participate in social activities and with too little time out for reflection.  This is another type of tyranny. Laotze’s solution to this enigma was to “drop out” of society, becoming anonymous.  His symbolism for this process was that of a wheel hub, still connected to the spokes (of society), but removed from the centrifigul forces of life. (p.178)

3.         Abraham (p.181) was tyrannized by ancestor worship.  He felt bound to carry out the prescriptions handed down from his father and unfree to oppose them.  One must avenge one’s grandfather’s enemy, for instance.  [RF – Certainly we see stark evidence of this in S.E. Europe in Yugoslavia today.]  The parable of Abraham offering, before God to sacrifice his first born son, is symbolic of this trend.  God, advising against such sacrifice freed Abraham to allow his son to oppose the tradition of his father, freeing the next generation to change. Only so do we correct failed traditions, mandates from the past that were no longer functional in the community.  This meant that Abraham no longer should be seen as his son’s god.  That there must only be one God.

The Jews thereby put faith in God’s goal of unifying all of mankind: God was the spiritual father of all humanity. This belief also demonstrated the Jew’s willingness to remain weak (humble),  before God. The flaw in the this position is that, the Jews awaited for the second coming (for the Messiah) to unite mankind.

4.         Jesus represented a different view of the emancipation of humankind. He completed the process of setting us free first, by accepting the validity of his three predecessors, and second, by addressing humankind’s final tyranny, a tyranny of having  to wait for others to act.  Man was free to create his own heaven on earth.

a.     Before Jesus, each culture had its panoply of gods, myths of origins, heros and a separate history, all of which separated tribes and empires. All those “outside” a given culture were reviled as lowly, thus justifying their pillage and murder. By advocating the singularity of humankind, culture and race wars could no longer be justified.  Thus, rather than separate histories there need be only one universal history, one that didn’t deny unique cultural histories but rather giving them much more meaning in the form of a larger relationship to all others.

b.     Christianity is universal because it subsumed the traditions of Buddha, Laotze and Abraham, adding the final link that would free mankind to act themselves to create their futures. Space and time were seen to unify humanity so that human kind could progress toward its potential.  This was, always is, the future to be created.

Buddha – meditation, turning inward.

Laotze – cultural anonymity, turning outward

Abraham – disconnecting from the past, anticipating a future

Jesus – acting in the present to create a future

c.     Time is unified because all histories are part of a single mankind.  The symbolism of the death and resurrection is that, each day and week and month we should awaken and make, however small, a new beginning toward progress in our lives.  In sum, these four men offered a path toward unshackling mankind from the tyrannies of the fronts of time and space and at once setting us free to evolve from the state of a natural animal to that of a “super-natural” animal.

d.     To live in only one of the four fronts of time or space is so dysfunctional as to endanger humanity.  To think “scientifically only” is to deny our ability to change. To think only in terms of traditions likewise locks out any possibility for correcting dysfunctional mores. To live only a life of meditation is to deny  concrete reality.  The freedom to move back and forth from one to the other mode of thought is the key to understanding fully our experience and acting more efficaciously. Learning from the past, anticipating a new future, meditating on our learning and taking action.

e.     Progress through history has been brought about through the power and courage of individuals who were instilled with an indomitable spirit to risk change (the Holy Spirit). (p.196)  The “Cross of Reality” provides a standard by which judgement about the spiritual health of any society can be measured, identifying both cause and solution to the four social diseases of war, revolution, anarchy and degeneration. It can be said of humankind that, “The creature is made creator.”

But in the light of these experienced lives, the known social facts now can all be deciphered by a final standard.  A social order may be pronounced “sick” according to the amount of tyranny instead of authority, or causation instead of creativity; or it may be predicted “healthy” because of its degree of fellowship, of rhythm and symphony instead of blueprint bureaucracy, or of its quality of serviceable compassion instead of power. (pp.196,7)

Chapt. VIII – (p.198)

THE RHYTHM OF PEACE OR OUR “TODAY”

1.         The Enemy of the Holiday:  The industrial revolution has created a condition of migratory peoples,  “glorified migrant workers,” Eugen called them.  Migrants were a people who became only loosely connected to place, or a group, as they constantly change schools, jobs, marriage partners, and professions in these decades.  Dedication to associations waned and in the process, the ability of different types of communities to regenerate themselves. Peoples are naturally separated by class, culture, language, profession. [RF – now, less than a month from the years 2,000 A.D. few, if any institutions escape full scale degeneration, including that of the family.]  ERH, even in 1946 has asked,  “What is to be the social glue which will regenerate the community?”

…we shall have to create opportunities in which men recover their power to found or re-found communities.  This power is lost.  The modern mind has lost its recipe. (p.198)

The holiday is one unifying force, an indicator of the vitality of  associations of all types when its spirit and purpose is remembered.

On a holiday, we share one time and one space although we are divided by self-interest…we carry on as though we were one and the same man, regardless of birth, unafraid of death, unabashed by sex. unperturbed by fear. (p.199)

2.         The  meaning of holidays has degenerated, having mutated into mere leisure.   We need time out from the everyday struggle for survival of course.  But when cultures forget the price of progress in terms of pain and sacrifice, then the spirit of the holiday becomes individualized, unregenerative loafing.

3.         Leisure tends most of the time to be private, that is playing, getting away from everyday community demands. Leisure therefore may divide citizens. The true HOLIDAY, on the other hand, unites members of a community.  It is a communion of joining in fellowship to celebrate some great struggle in the group’s history.  “Holidays are the mortar of society.” (p.203)

4.         Holidays are an essential part of  religion for religion is not private.  The purpose of religion is to imbue individuals with the strength and courage whick holds the power to regenerate the community. Language and religion are the only avenues to creating a common spirit. Language provides the communication avenue and religion creates the power. Therefore, religion must create holidays to bind communities,  reminding and empowering its members to  continue battling for essential causes.

The deep sorrow at President Roosevelt’s death, and the solemn rejoicing on V-Days, were expressions of a profound  health of the American spirit.  I felt great pride and gratitude for being allowed to share in them. (p.203)

5.         Mere leisure isolates the soul, true holidays on the other hand, unify a common spirit of the people.

Sunday, in the history of the Christian church symbolizes a memory of the resurrection (rising from the dead) in the spirit of a new beginning. “That is the sublime reason why Sunday is the first day of the week, instead of the last.”  In church doctors, lawyers, dock workers, parents and children, people of all stations not likely to interact during our normal working week join in communion.  This unity of spirit reminds us of the necessity to act toward community renewal, to the day of evaluation, to reconsidering our acts, or re-deeming (re-thinking) our lives. The meaning of redemption is to think anew. Holidays represent the pause we need for that reminder.   (p.205)

6.         All churches, even pseudo-religions function on the basis of holidays, which form a rhythmical pattern of reminders.  In Christianity, Christmas, Easter, Pentecost and Advent are examples.  “Philosophical systems are not rhythmical.  Religion is. Why?”   Because the purpose is to lift members up to a higher level of behavior.  The rhythms of holidays remind us of steps to be taken to this end. There must be a period of incubation for the  spirit to evolve. (p.207)

…weeping and joy, winter and summer, victory and defeat, birth and death, make up the rhythm, if and when we tackle them as opposite numbers and do not leave them to accident.  One Sunday in seven days, one vacation a year, mark us out as educated people. (p.208)

Originally man celebrated the seasons, winter equinox, sowing harvest, etc.These and other, previously sublime holiday celebrations have, in modern industrial culture, been doctored for commercial reasons.  This “doctoring” reflects the degeneration of the meaning of true holidays into mere idle leisure.

7.         Sublime religious cycles should not be confused with the mechanical cycles of, 365 days of the year, or of the other mechanical dates of the solstice and equinox.  The fourth of July in America, and celebrations of births, or great victories (V-days ending WWII for instance), or births, deaths and anniversaries  are anything but mechanical.  They represent the eras of great social accomplishments created by mankind.  These un-mechanical rhythms are the essence of our social existence.

A birth represents faith in the future, a death (or end of any era) represents time for refounding.  July 4th in the U.S. most commonly today,  “is only a time for beer and baseball.”

8.         Rhythms are scheduled reference points in our lives, sign posts in life’s journey. We commonly witness depression and lack of will and commitment today: people raise the question as to who, and what they are and what is the meaning in their lives. The frustrating impress of factory and office schedules dominating our lives is attested to by the psychological problems: divorces, and other examples of dysfunctional behavior are indications of having lost our power to understand and control, at least to some extent, our lives.  The separated compartments of our lives have been deadening: religion is only a Sunday morning meeting, the endless racing for more money keeps us encapsulated in the organization. Life’s rhythms are out of joint.  [RF – I witness more and more lonely people, and fewer who can find intimate friends.]

Psychoanalysis is the obvious reaction to the deeper lack of rhythm which factory and suburb imposed on us. (p.211)

There must be a rhythmical balance in our lives between working teams, intimate relationships, professional associations and community, each solves basic necessities of life for production and reproduction.  We tend to get isolated in one or another of these modes of existence which seriously diminishes our ability to maintain our psychic balance.  We change jobs, partners, communities in desperation rather than by plan.

9.         ERH points out that industry has organized so that it is impossible for people to maintain sufficient control over their work so that they can feel any sense of accomplishment, let alone pride.  And it is this type of “breaking natural rhythms of life,” i.e. loss of control over our lives, that is so spiritually eroding.  Under these conditions, groups are merely conglomerations of migrant workers, like mindless cogs. [RF – There is a conscious management tactic which creates this environment, the term for this is, “dumbing down” work assignments.]

10.       The point is, more meaning needs to be reestablished in the different segments of our lives.  For instance, in the past the family was the source of social security, delivery of health services, counseling services, production of goods, and most of all, education. And all of these functions were carried out in fellowship in different types of small groups.  No one could carry out these functions alone, so one learned to found communities in fellowship and mutual respect.  Much of that has been lost in our present organizational systems. Almost 100% of these functions are now carried out by institutions in which the individual has no control.

Modern industry has deprived too many people of their right to crucial living, of a wholesome suspense of growing from one phase of life into the next.(p.214)

11.       The holiday reminds, us, not only of the pain and suffering, but also the elation in remembering great accomplishments of events. Celebrating Labor Day in memory of the war against industrial armies fighting the establishment of unions, or celebrating the American Revolutionary War, or the great martyrs through-out all of history, who paved the way to some human freedom, these and other mile-stones in history at once remind us of the price that must be paid over and over for our freedom from tyrannies. Cementing our fellowship with these heros connects us to the great movement of history and more importantly, adding crucial meaning to our lives by placing us in context with the evolution of all of humanity.

When one’s life becomes insipid, ERH avers, one’s vital spirit (soul) is diminished and with it the ability to participate in life. Life’s essence centers on our ability to face problems and in the process, reproduce vital rhythms of living.

The greatest conflict of our day seems to me to be wider than factory and suburb.  The extremes are reached when warrior and the thinker of our days are confronted in their tendencies…The cleavage between their official philosophies has been taken for granted.  We have left peace-time thinking and war-time action completely unreconciled.  Thinker and warrior have no common history….Thought has been academic, warfare has been brutal, these last decades. (p.215)

12.       In sum, the regenerating potential of the holiday may be said to remind us of how the great forms of our institutions came about.  Those institutions, such as law, government, public schools, and many of our freedoms do not perpetuate themselves.  As a matter of fact, all forms tend toward lifeless, mechanical actions which eventually fail to function as intended.  The necessity to revive the very creative spirit which created those freedoms and social benefits is always present.

13.       FOR ONE TO LIVE SOLELY WITHIN THE SPIRIT OF THEIR AGE ALSO LEADS TO SURE SOCIAL DECLINE.  The tendency, so common today, leads one to exploit our  natural resources and social accomplishments to the limit because, by definition, we live like “there is no tomorrow.”  And, of course, such an attitude becomes a self-fulfilling prophecy.

Unavoidably, we must begin by inheriting the best values of our parents.  But also, we are the inheritors of a million years of the development of language, without which we would be communicating with each other by grunts and squeals.

However, while this (physical) life stretches from the cradle to the grave the life span of an inspiration reaches from the middle of one man’s life to the middle of the life in the next generation…Hence, one’s generation’s background is due to the previous generation’s foreground.  My father’s values determined my education.  (pp.220.221)

14.       Physical mutations of genes have a direct parallel in spiritual attitudes as ideas change from one generation to another.  “The meaning of liberty is our power of creating a new kind of man.”  Without the knowledge of human progress taken from history, we tend to misjudge our power to change, and thus degenerate into mere pragmatic attitudes expecting immediate gratification and thus lose the very power we possess to change. “…creating the world is a perpetual act. What we call creation of the social world is not an event of yesterday, but an ongoing event of all times…Each generation has the divine liberty of recreating the world.” (p. 225)

15,       It has been a failure of our educational system, in declining to teach students they must devise new ways to re-establish the social achievements of past generations.  Students are taught the methods for different disciplines, usually in a fragmented way.  What seems to have been omitted is their obligation to the community and to future generations.  [RF – I heard a neighbor the other day say that, he had to deal with the world the way he found it, and his sons and daughters must do the same. He went on to say that he had no interest or obligation in preserving the environment or use unrenewable resources sparingly. His children would just have to deal with the world as they found it!]

The Camping Mind (p. 231)

1.         The main thrust of this section is to examine the tendencies of organizations to routinize its procedures, thinking problems through carefully and completely before acting.  THE EFFECT OF THIS TENDENCY IS TO COME TO ACTION TOO LATE, the crisis has begun, in other words.  The  opposing view is demonstrated the soldier who sees danger, who responds intuitively and responding to a need to surprise the enemy: often coming to the crisis too early, but in so doing, prevents the crisis. Since the point is allegorized by the term, “war,” ERH’s conclusion is that we will have eternal war unless we can reincarnate some of the soldier’s intuitive process into the bulky procedures of the bureaucracy.

2.         ERH, likens the introduction of intuition to that of the gasoline engine where “explosions” (as in warfare) are to be controlled, which of course, would  be the goal for some modicum of peace in the community.  We must merge these  two qualities of order (rationalism) and intuition —

else society will always come too late to any emergency, to any task. Therefore, the corollary  to the abolition of war is the integration of the soldier’s way of life into the mental life of the community. (p.232)

The organization represents too much rationalism, the soldier symbolizes faith that surprise will be a bridge to a more vital future. Rationalism versus intuition – order versus risk – past versus future, these are the unavoidable paradoxes inherent in our everyday decision making.  They reflect the essential balance that must be struck between the points of the cross of reality, mentioned above.

Would it not be very unpleasant to have these constant conflicts?  Yes, it would be voluntary conflicts spread thin over innumerable occasions which should take the place of the large explosion called a war…catastrophes would be replaced by an infinite number of controlled explosions.

We cannot have life without explosions; let us  bring them under control by spreading them and by dispersing them and by putting them to some positive use.(pp.232,233)

3.         To accomplish this we need to integrate the two “prodigious virtues” of reason and faith.  “Reason is objective and gives us security.  Faith is selective and has a sense of the important.”  For them to be separated leaves us with impotent reason and faith remains too intermittent.  To always be in a state of too earliness, or too lateness, leaves society dead-in-the-water.

The time lag of Reason cannot be cured unless it is put under pressure by the bold approach of youth; and, vice versa, a blind youth goes to Hitler. (p.234)

4.         The academic – overly rational mind – must be tempered by the “Camping mind” which goes back and forth between reason and faith.  Economics lies at the core of most wars, but the science of economics is heartless because science cannot recognize ethical decisions.  Economics must, unavoidably deal with unemployment for instance, putting it at the center of its considerations if we are to avoid war.

Continuance of intractable wars occurs unless the intuitive mentality of the “soldier” demands that peace time must be used to avoid war:

…fire, light, and warmth are three equally necessary phases of the communal life. The fire of the service men and the light of reason, and the warmth spread from their interaction into the mechanized areas of production and consumption, this seems to me the full process of living. (p.238)

The Rhythm of the New World

1.         The remainder of the last few pages summarizes with the ultimate question.  America, perhaps up through WW II, had acted, more than not, to avoid catastrophic war by having integrated the efficiency of order and the intuition of soldier, willing to have faith and risk acting in new ways.

This quality seems to have been squandered in pushing the youthful faith aside.  They have become cynical, our leaders, and we have a society unwilling to sacrifice immediate gratification for a future, living on the physical world only.  ERH quotes an ex-student, a soldier returned from the war:

Those of us who have accepted death and come to life again many times will either have to find our moral equivalent for war or perish or degenerate. (p.241)

How then are we to break this mindset.  This interim period, as it has been called for some time, rather than meaning we must wait and see, should be a wake-up call to recognize these last wars have created a new time and new spaces which require new approaches.  Certainly, the risk is great as well as the sacrifices. [RF – I am now writing this during the Christmas season of (1999), to conserve, to be generous to the needy, to forgive, in short celebrate all of the mandates for Christmas  would appear to destroy the economy.  Every merchant claims that well over half his annual income derives from this season.  The enigma is no less in all other arenas of critical social problems.]  ERH raises the question then as to how we are to balance morals and economics.

2.         The first step must be to change the spirit of the people.  All creative acts have succeeded against impossible odds.  Always, solutions to critical problems seem impossible in the beginning.  Creativity, by its very definition, rises above what previously was thought impossible.  The “Camping Spirit” must be established.  Creativity always begins in small units, with one, perhaps two, then must double, and double, and double again the numbers of small associations in our lives to educate in this spirit.

If we have the courage to do this, we may enjoy the rhythm of peace.  For peace is not the sleep and the torpor of non-movement.Peace is the victory over mere accident.  Peace is the rhythm of a community which is still unfinished, still open to its true future. (p.243)

 

FASHIONS OF ATHEISM – 1968

Lectures 1-2
Feringer notes
Last edited: 11-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

1.The basic problem raised in this essay is; “How do we find unity in our lives?  “…which is after all the question of our God.” (p.1)

2.The method of doing this is to speak the truth about important things to everyone.  But this cannot be done to everyone in the same language.  Peoples of different cultures, different generations, different socio-economic classes must each be told the same truth, but in a different way.

3.”The Gospel is that which can reach all people in the same language. It’s unique.” (p.3) The Bible is a polyglot, it says the same thing in many languages.

4.All living knowledge, knowledge of concern between people, must be regenerated (spoken of differently) each day and in each new situation.  Even the same issue will be spoken of differently in different situations.

5.Science, or knowledge about dead things, is different.  Anything that can be spoken about in the same way to different people at different times, is dead knowledge.  THAT IS WHAT ATHEISM IS, JUST SCIENCE!   Science is  logic and analysis is dead knowledge, representing the remnants of experience.

6.This parochial view, that we can say the same thing the same way to all people, is what constantly separates people. Facts given out of context are not understandable because human events must be narrated to be understandable.  Lack of communication may lead to our destruction.

7.Atheism is an attempt to treat God as a thing.  Natural  science treats the world (including people) as things (objects to be observed).

8.We can only understand experiences when we participated in them; to understand love we must love. And we cannot know the things we have learned,  all the time; we must re-learn them, just as with religion.  One cannot know God all the time, only at certain times.

In general this essay is more about the nature of religion than specifically about atheism; religion is the value for which we sacrifice,  and atheism is a religion in that it is a scientific way of looking at that events “from the outside.”  And this is anti-life or anti-living, because one cannot understand human experience without participating in its processes.

Fashions of Atheism – 1968 – Review

This essay is more about the nature of religion than specifically about atheism.  Religion is the value that addresses living social processes, and atheism is a religion that addresses non-social events ( from the “outside”).  Atheism is thus anti human life because one cannot understand human experience without participating in its processes.

 

TALKS WITH FRANCISCANS – 1965

Lectures 1-2
Feringer notes
Last edited: 11-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.The primary point of these lectures is that while universals may work out “in heaven,” the reality in which we live is always limited and therefore universals applied to our concrete world are limited  in describing, or guiding our experience.

For example capitalism, is just as necessary as communism, and the Franciscans (representing day-to-day consciousness) are just as necessary as the Dominican order, which eulogizes long-range generalizations.  “…our head can think universally, but our heart is of course attached to what we have to do, what we have to suffer for, what we have to stand for in the eyes of the world.”  (p.3)

2.To the Franciscans, the particular illuminates the whole; “…every day has its revelation….all your life you have kept the capacity, the power–the spirit you can say — to look into the chalice of a flower as though you saw it for the first time.”  (p.6)

3.This raises the question, “What can be taught?”  The answer is, of course,generalizations, and that is the division of labor for the Dominicans. To ignore generalizations is to invite anarchy!

4.ERH points out some detail of this unity of two (seeming) opposites. Capitalism was unheard-of before Adam Smith, and Marxism before Marx. What they saw was a world economy, and their solutions were in response to that revelation.

5.A question is raised as to the relationship between different “times” in history, between old and modern. “How can we relate to older times?  Were they not different?”  ERH replies that we are inheritors of the past, and of the present.  The rule is that time cannot be fragmented, otherwise we will not be successful in solving today’s problems.  Modern, is not better than old, and vice versa. “So new is not the criterion of history.” (p.10)   Marx and Smith saw something that others didn’t. “Seeing” is important for us to remember today, because  “…we are blind and deaf if it is in our interest to be blind and deaf.” (p.12)

6.ERH goes from this question into original sin.  Original sin is the attitude that if it has been done before, that is enough. The sins of grandfathers will be visited upon those of future generations.

This attitude, ERH asserts, is not enough; we must also impose our own judgment on the present and go from there, choosing between what is passed on to us and our own “heart,” as representing our experience in the present.

7.Language is about following commands, about carrying out that which must be done, about that which is serious. We must therefore not speak to others, or think of them, in terms of labels like black-white, rich-poor. We must speak to them as human beings, so that they can respond in the highest sense, unbounded by labels, which must be broken out of.

Lecture 2

1.This series seems to be addressing the unity of all mankind, that what is important for the individual or the partnership (two friends or man and wife) is valid for all mankind.  Therefore in a  viable society, persons practice hospitality.  They accept the stranger into their house as if he were a king.

2.Hospitality is like a disarmament conference, it is not a natural act.  It means you treat others not as an abstract category, as “public,” but rather as “people.”  In this situation, to be hospitable is to help others achieve what they were meant to achieve.  (p.5)

Talks with Franciscans – 1965 – Review

In speaking with the Franciscans, Rosenstock-Huessy begins with reminding them of their philosophy, to live intensely each day, to maintain the ability “…to look into the chalice of a flower as though you saw it for the first time.”  But then he goes on to put this attitude in context by comparing them with the Dominicans, who eulogize the big picture, long time-spans, and seek the generalizations from experience. Of course, we need both attitudes, and in this article he gives vivid examples as to why. Generalizations represent order, but the revelations from each day are unpredictable.

 

FOUR DYSANGELISTS – 1954 – BEFORE AND AFTER MARX

Lectures 1-2
Feringer notes
Last edited: 3-99

Contents

Lecture 1

1.Problem:  It is difficult today to get into other people’s minds, as they seem to be driven by nobody but themselves.  ERH likens the situation to the weatherman who can’t predict the weather because he can’t get it into the laboratory.  “…certainly we can’t put ourselves into a laboratory and experiment with ourselves..with war…with our children,…or with housewives.”  (p.3)

[RF – I interpret this issue as  how we experience the same events, but see them rather differently. Our attempts to speak to each other about them results in distortions and misunderstandings,  which in turn have dire consequences when issues are significant to us.]

2.How, then, do we communicate with others?  This leads to the next question; by what type of commonly agreed-upon rules, (values) can we guide our lives?  The answer is that we do so by “connecting the times.”  This, ERH asserts, is why Judaism and Christianity have been given to us.

3.The times become too fragmented when each culture and age has its own mythology, its own invention, art and science.  HOW THEN CAN WE GENERALIZE ABOUT THE HUMAN CONDITION AND FIND GUIDANCE AND FULFILLMENT?  In the beginning of tribal life there existed nothing but fragmentation (chaos).  It would seem that each culture and generation battles the same evils — the prospect of death and destruction.

4.PROGRESS begins in understanding ourselves, in identifying the parochialism of our own times – in other words,  finding truth. Social truth, we learn can only be established over a period of more than one generation (it takes 3, minimum). This is because peace is established by agreement, and agreement takes much more time than truth in natural science.

5.Prophesy and fulfillment must be a central part of our finding social truth and in establishing the validity of our guiding rules.  [RF – The primary source of common experience in Western Culture (Christianity) is the Bible, and this is the source cited for examples from which generalizations can be deduced.

There seems to be 4 stages in the process of becoming “disentangled” from our parochialism: 1) the prophesy, 2) the coming, 3) the defeat, then 4) the gospel (the story of what happened).  In Christian literature these are manifest in the stories of, John the Baptist, Jesus, the apostles, and the four gospels.

6.The fulfillment (the end-point of an era) never looks like the prophesy (the beginning point of anticipation)..  THE TERM “DISANGELISTS” REFERS TO THE FACT THAT FOUR 19TH CENTURY THINKERS REVERSED THE ORDER OF PROPHESIES OF THE EVANGELISTS.  What these four did (Darwin, Marx, Nietzsche, and Freud) was to proclaim that, according to the culture of our times:

1)”…there is no history, but that everything has to go in reverse.” (p.6)

Freud says that children must be emancipated from their parents, therefore there is no history of the culture to build upon.

2)Darwin proclaimed the survival of the fittest, when we know that when a species had evolved to its limit, it was the weak, frail, adaptable ones with sufficient flexibility that heralded the new direction of evolution.  People have survived because they were capable of change, of reorganizing in every generation.

3)Marx divided history into promise and fulfillment, but he separated them so that they had nothing to do with each other. (p.6)  In the ideal Marxian society there is no longer a need for struggle.

4)Likewise as with Marx, with Nietzsche  said that we can no longer be led by our ideas, by our values because our values change.

These four have destroyed the “Greek thinking of our time” — that there was no difference between the good, true, and beautiful (Plato) on the one hand, and Christianity on the other.   They essentially said that, 1) you can do nothing about the class wars, 2) the fight for survival is endless, 3) we cannot inherit tradition (Freud), and 4) man can only go from one sensation to the next (Nietzsche). Christianity opposed all of these concepts, but in spite of this opposition, the four concepts of these 19th century thinkers have dominated our thinking today.

7.We need myths in order to achieve.  (p.15) Christianity posits that one needs frenzy and passion to achieve anything. “There is no way of growing, except by going through the myth, through your mythical period.” (p.16)  “Every age and every sex and every nation has to have their own myth.  Otherwise one cannot pass through the terrible ordeal where they fail to be recognized by the rest of the world. (p.16)

THE GIFT OF THE DISANGELISTS WAS TO ARTICULATE THE VALUES OF OUR AGE, THAT NO PEACE AND NO DEVELOPMENT OF HUMAN SOCIETY WAS POSSIBLE WITH OUR PRESENT (GREEK) VALUES.  These values stated that “self knowledge was more important than creativity.” (p.16)  We can be creative, but we cannot know how we do it at the time; another way of putting this is that we cannot analyze any act until it has been completed. We live with the original “faith” that it is possible for us to create.  Marriage, for instance is not based on logic. Lindberg’s love of his plane, the Wright brothers’ love of building an airplane are cases in point. In other words, love (charity), faith and hope are the basic elements of creativity.

8.Christianity came into the world against idealism.  Idealism says to each of us that , “I am God.”  There is no time element and no history in idealism; both are “out of this world.”  Every one of us, if he is creative,  goes through the 4 phases of prophesy, fulfillment, apostasy, and gospel.

The 19th century was a time of Unitarianism, of not recognizing miracles, of not going through the mythical period or the four phases of creativity, of no divinity, of no obeying commands from the past or from the spirit of the times.  They didn’t see the miracle that peace is when it breaks out, for instance.

Lecture 2

1.The key to creativity is in going through these 4 stages.

The four “disangelists” carried out the 4 phases backwards, first gospel, then the apostasy, then fulfillment, then prophesy.  In effect they demonstrated that our “Greek”/humanistic ways, mistaken for Christianity, reduced man’s creativity, his ability to change and grow. Their assertions would reduce humankind back to the animal state.

2.Humanism infers that we wish to have our cake and eat it too; to have peace without war, and to have peace with the luxury of being a pacifist. (p.3)   This is to say that the mind (with its idealism) and the body are not free to do as they please (if society is to continue). One must follow the commandments necessary to maintain society and seek peace.  Our weakness has been in not recognizing the reality of cause and effect. “If you don’t obey God, then you have to obey General Eisenhower…But if you only wish to think about peace, because that’s so much nicer, you will not think at all.” (p.4)

3.For instance, if we can’t communicate, if we allow language to hide lies, if we lack trust and faith, – in short without the “living word” – there will always be war!  Certain things can only be achieved by war, such as stopping Hitler!

4.The second point is the downfall of Marxism. Marx failed to realize that the workers of the world were not brothers, but patriots willing to fight for their country and against each other.

The only country that took up Marxism, against Marxist prediction, was  a non-industrialized country, Russia. In two world wars, workers fought each other for their country.

Prophecy always comes in ways not predicted, or not accepted, just as the Jews prophesied Jesus, but didn’t recognize him.

Four Disangelists – 1954 – Before and After Marx – Review

This is a remarkable and tightly knit essay about how four 19th century thinkers disprove the notion that scientific (Greek) thinking is a valid basis for the analysis of social problems.  The author shows how the thinking of Freud, Darwin, Marx, and Nietzsche have proven un-prophetic when applied to our social experience of recent times, and that creativity (our ability to think anew about ourselves), follows from Christian doctrine, not Greek Humanism.

 

COMPARATIVE RELIGION – 1954

Lectures 1-25
Feringer notes
Notes started: Feb-March, 96
Last edited: 11-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

1.One of the heresies of today is that people believe that religion is a private affair – and this is not possible. Therefore, there is little religion today.

2.Greek thinking (i.e. analytical thought), treats religion as either history, or a comparison between religions.  The problem is that things cannot be compared without any definition as to what they are, or should be.  Comparisons sans definitions are unfruitful. SO IF WE ARE TO SPEAK ABOUT RELIGION, WE MUST FIRST DEFINE WHAT IT SHOULD BE.

Comparing religions one would hope to find one religion better in one respect, and another in some other way, or for some other purpose.

You must develop an understanding of what religion is and how the various phenomena which we call religions – with a plural – and what they contribute or how they fulfill this postulate, this necessity.  (p.3)

3.It is very easy to compare things, but very difficult to know what to compare.   Do we compare games, superstitions, superfluities, or whether you like it or not, or where different religions are practiced?

4.Why should we compare religions in America, a country which has abolished religion?  America’s religion would seem to be acceleration, to produce technical achievements, consumer goods, and physical stimulation.  Our wealth buys adventure; and life now has no other meaning, it is just material (and sensation), and boring.   Perhaps we will “throw the bomb from boredom.  (p.5)

5.In  sum, one cannot know about other people’s religions, because you cannot understand them when you don’t have religion yourself!   (p.7)

Religion is not that one goes to church, or confesses – these are theology! They are expressions or superstitions of religion.  The religion of yesterday we call “superstition,” and the religion of tomorrow we call heresy. In between is the religion of today.

6.If we eliminate churches, customs, weddings, hocus-pocus, “…we are looking for that power which generates all these forms. “So the first definition, I would suggest, is that religion is a power.”  A power that is pervasive, that cannot be defined, “It is a power for which there is no private property. You cannot appropriate it, but it can have you!”  (p.8)

7.The part of man that is most easily bypassed by religion is the brain.

a.Religion is not a philosophy – it is the opposite.  In modern times the term philosophy has become a hodge-podge of meanings. Philosophy is systems of ideas, and is based on logic after a set of assumptions has been established.  All philosophy must begin with one or two unprovable assumptions that appear to be true. It is the objectified world. Thus, philosophy can only exist within a religious system. (Most philosophers today in this country have science as their religion, but don’t recognize their passion for science as a religion.)

b.Religion is a power, that creates superstitions, customs, churches, rituals, etc. Religion starts with the notion of what the social world should, or might be. In other words, we are to change the social world. And thus, “…the religious soul is the man who knows that from birth to death we have to keep an open mind and have to think differently every day.”  (p.11)

This is to say, that as we gain experience about ideas about society, we learn its meaning and may wish to change our social goals; “…the first religious experience…is that virtues become vices and vices become virtues.”  (p.12)

c.Theology, the science of religion, is not religion. Abelard, the founder of Christian theology was excommunicated for having theorized. All theology is part of philosophy, ruled by logic.  One cannot know what Christianity is through theology. “Religion is a power, and therefore not a system.” (p.15)

Lecture – 2

1.In order to compare religions, we must first know what they are, and believe them to be necessary in society. [RF – this seems reasonable to me because, all intelligence is an attempt to bring order to our experience, and all systems of order begin with unprovable assumptions. The religious notion (or assumption) that we must shape our social world toward what a community ought to be would lead one to reason that religion is necessary.]

2.Three aspects of any activity: playing at it, making a business of it (either making money or managing), or being serious about applying it to social problems. Politics, business, sports, and religion are examples.  But of these, religion is the most difficult to define.  It is everywhere, as everyone has some religion, and it effects all activity. It is frail, easily corrupted, and the corruption is difficult to detect.  (p.3)

Religion becomes corrupted when people use it for their own self-interest.

3.RELIGION IS THE POWER THAT MAKES US CHOOSE TO ACT, OR NOT ACT. Or forces us to action we never considered before. It is the power to place God above men, life above death, living beings above dead things.  To obey only oneself is to use  other people, seeing them as “things.”

4.Prayer means to become aware of the existence of more than yourself, of others. “…a potent man is a man who can look down to who he really is and admit who he is.” (p.5) ERH defines God as becoming manifest in the spirit of  humans. Therefore, all human beings should be respected as having a potential to manifest this spirit. (p.9)

5.ERH defines religion also as “the ability to appropriate a new experience.”  [RF – I’m not sure what he means.  I assume “social” experience, to understand another’s actions toward us.  “…there is no greater gift for any human being than to have somebody who cries for him….God is the power which makes us give a new experience a new name.” (p.10)

6.There are many gods, and we cannot know God as a singular, we can only know parts just as with people.  We can only say we have known some people, but can never know what all of humankind can be or is.  Too cheap, ERH says, to think there is  one and only one god.  Even the concept of God, man, and world is of little use. (p.16)

Man is never singular He/she is son or daughter, father or mother, brother, friend, etc. We can never usefully think of any person in the singular

We tend to treat others and even ourselves as “things,” the same as the next man. This tendency defines, in part, “the common man or common woman.”

7.It is religious to not command any person any more than necessary.  It is religious, respectful, and loving to allow and help others to think for themselves. Of course there are situations when people must follow rules and act with order. Also, we must accept commands from other authorities at times, but for the most part, we must be free to think for ourselves, to face our problems. We should not to blame our problems on others,  and should feel free to accept commands.

When we are drunk, drugged, hypnotized, or afraid we have to be commanded, i.e. treated as things.  Thus, man may be said to be half subservient and half “divine,” half required to take commands, and half free to command (himself at least), half natural animal and half god.

*THE ISSUE IS, when is the individual one personality and when another? We are constantly changing. RELIGION IS A POWER THAT HELPS US DECIDE WHEN WE SHOULD LISTEN AND WHEN WE SHOULD COMMAND, and therefore  it is necessary throughout life.

8.ERH asserts that American “religious naturalism” sees things as always the same: God is always God, man is always man, and things are always things. Contrarily, to grow, we must remain capable of acting differently as situations require of us – to command at times, or to follow at times.  (p.21)

9.America has been founded on the notion that man is good by nature. THIS, ERH BELIEVES, IS NOT THE CASE! We are many things at different times, at one time perhaps a saint, at another a villain, at one time stupid, at another wise.  [RF – ERH said to me once, “Be humbled by the thought that you are quite capable of committing the most heinous crime in the world, or the greatest deed.”]

These three aspects of reality – God, individual, and things – are constantly changing.  ERH provides a number of examples of these points here.

Lecture – 3

1.           IF you are not aware that religion is the most frail and the most  delicate thing, you omit the fact that religion tries to empower us, to realize our life as unique, irrepeatable, one singular event…Religion always invites us to realize that this moment — like here in this class is unique — now you know how difficult this is to realize. (p.1)

2.Nothing that can be numbered or classified is a religious experience. As long as we believe we can predict human behavior, whenever it is predictable, then it is by definition mechanical, repetitive, uninteresting.

The difference between philosophy and religion is really very simple. In philosophy your mind is stable…And in any religious experience, your mind is overcome, overwhelmed by an experience…you are bold enough to admit you have never made (the thought) before. (p.3)

3.Religion and superstition are closely related. WE ARE ALL SUPERSTITIOUS.                 Superstition is a belief that has survived from some past experience. While we          can easily recognize superstition in others, it is difficult to find in ourselves.

Superstition occurs whenever we are too lazy; when we believe we already know all about some thing or some one.  In this state we attempt to solve today’s problems by yesterday’s maxims. A literal translation from Latin, “the left-overs from yesterday.”

4.ERH insightfully explains in some detail the mental phenomenon which causes superstition. In sum, what he seems to say is that the tendency is to view experience in the present in terms of preconceived ideas (of reality), i.e. the act of living too much by reliance on formulas.  By contrast, if we focus our thoughts on what is happening in the present, sans those preconceived notions we will respond much more wisely to present situations. Superstition unbalances our thoughts in favor of “living in the past.

5.We are all superstitious “…let me say, by 90%. That is, the full life is not granted us all  365 days a year.”   He repeats, that  it is easy to identify in others and difficult to identify for ourselves. (p.7)

Paradoxically, being superstitious is precisely the foundation of religion, ERH avers.  All religions are, by definition, dogmatic and prejudiced. ONE’S WEAKNESS IS NOT IN BELIEVING IN A RELIGION, BUT IN NOT KNOWING WE ARE DOGMATIC.  When we are conscious of being dogmatic we can listen to others (hear their dogma), but to be without this self-knowledge precludes the ability to listen thoughtfully and discuss issues clearly.

Without superstition, nobody can live forward, because superstition is simply the former form of faith, the old form of faith. Without dogma, we’ll find out, nobody can reason. (p.7)

Thus, superstition is a step to religion. Superstition means we still have something to learn about religion (in that our beliefs constantly need refining). To have a living (true) religion, thoughtfully, means we still retain the power to recognize uniqueness in situations and respond accordingly, i.e. more realistically, from greater awareness. It allows us to live a more “alive” life, as contrasted with seeing all experience in terms of old ideas.

6.Philosophy (as are all formulas) is unrelated to time, and abstractions.  To have religion is to live in time, fully conscious of the present, sensitive to the nuances of the moment.

*Since the religious experience is by definition spiritual (inside us), it neglects the outside spacial world.  By contrast, philosophy neglects time, since “principles” are assumed to be true for all time. “Religion is the power to neglect space.  Philosophy is the power to neglect time.” (p.8)

7.Understanding the divisions of labor between the brain (thinking rationally, describing, theorizing, philosophizing, creating concepts) and that of religion is crucial. Philosophy and science help us describe the world; religion commands us to respond to experience in a certain way. (p.9)

In order to grow, we must first stop doing something, then begin acting in a new direction. One follows commands.  ERH asserts many people today are ruined by education that fills them with superstition, which they do not recognize.  It precludes the ability to know ourselves.

8.Superstitions, unmediated by (true) religion, lead to ruin. Marriage cannot stand if it is not a unique encounter at each moment. To live this way is to be more conscious of life.9

We tend to live most of our lives repetitively – at lowered levels of “aliveness” – thus deadening our senses. Repetitive living and sensing uniqueness is the difference between the working bee and the truly-living human.

9.Here, ERH begins a new line of thought.

All religions have a uniqueness, emphasizing different facets of living. All religions are only lived partially.  At best, one  lives only a partial “aliveness,” and the rest tends to be repetitive (superstitiously). And by necessity, all life must (should) be both. WE LIVE IN THESE TWO WORLDS.

10.All religions are distortions in one way or another.  ERH raises the question, “What is the American religion, and how much is it distorted from a truly living religion?”

He suggests that America claims a “natural” religion, after the concepts of Thoreau and Benjamin Franklin. This is the religion of most Americans, regardless of the denomination they espouse. A worship of “natural man” assumes all people are born good. By contrast, Europeans worship their nationalism.

The second concept of “natural man”, is that all men are brothers.  ERH is dubious about this term. A literal interpretation creates the wrong image. Here he refers to our social roles, which are many.  We are fathers and sons, mothers and daughters, brothers and sisters, aunts and uncles, friends and enemies, managers and subordinates. Each of these roles calls for different and “unequal” relationships.  UNITARIANS, HE DECLARES, ARE THE PRIMARY NATURAL RELIGIOUS BEINGS IN THIS COUNTRY. Later he points out the great strength of this term.   (p.22)

11.True to this notion, America was founded in protest against everyone being compelled to have the same religion, against European religion. Natural religion allows for individual beliefs.  In another sense, Americans tend to live with this dogma (of independence). Therefore Americans “neglect time” in favor of the abstract dogma. This dependence upon individuality tends to keep people  stuck in the present, “like the old-time town meeting.” (People who are too independent tend to venerate their thinking process to the detriment of reflecting on what we have learned from the past, or of planning into the future.)

ERH concludes that the notions of natural religion and natural man are, at best, only  a very partial religion, because the generations must be unified. That is, we must take from the past that which is vital and to be continued and forget what is no longer productive. Past and future determine the present actions.

Lecture 4

1.Four points to summarize: 1) Europeans believe there is no religion in America and that going to church doesn’t indicate much. 2) Religion is easily corrupted, a frail and refined thing. 3) It is difficult to have a genuine religion because there can be a false appearance, behind which are hypocrisies and heresies. Finally, 4) religion is “innocence restored” (reaching out to others),  but people, weak at times, can easily corrupt good intentions. They can run around innocent looking, but inside are like wolves. ERH warns people how easy it is TO MISTAKE THE FORM FOR THE REALITY.

2.Because it is difficult to distinguish form from substance, it is difficult to understand other people’s religion. It is equally difficult to distinguish superstition from thoughtful belief.  For these reasons, religious belief is easily abused and corrupted.  BUT IN SPITE OF THESE DIFFICULTIES, RELIGION IS SO PRECIOUS, IT IS WORTH THE EFFORT TO ACQUIRE.

3.Religion is not philosophy, or theology or psychology.  MAN WAS PUT ON EARTH TO OBEY AND TO COMMAND – command the dead things and obey the living God. THE IMPERATIVE IS THAT MANKIND IS BETWEEN COMMAND AND OBEDIENCE ALL THE TIME. “Obey God more than man, and command things more than men.”  (p.3)

4.Parents act in place of God toward their children, and they do command dead things and people; people when they are “dead” morally (drunks, the greedy, criminals, etc.), when they seduce others. A dark fact of life is that people, at times must be treated as things. ON THE OTHER HAND, AT ALL OTHER TIMES THEY MUST BE HONORED AND RESPECTED.

5.IF GOD ONLY BECOMES MANIFEST THROUGH PEOPLE, WE CAN ONLY RECEIVE THE WORD (ORDERS) FROM OTHER PERSONS, BECAUSE THAT’S HOW GOD SPEAKS. (Our own thoughts must be confirmed by communication with others). So at all times we must make the distinction between who is to be obeyed and who commanded. AND, OF COURSE IN DECISION MAKING, ONE CAN ALWAYS MAKE MISTAKES AT TIMES.

In sum, people can be things like sticks and stones, and the line between things and other persons runs right through us.

Religion is man’s power to distinguish between persons and things.”…We call the world of things “the world” and we call the unity of persons “God.”  (p.5,6)

6.The world of “social forces” is higher than our individual selves.  The creation of freedom, the practice of science or medicine or other professions, the welfare of youth are examples of social issues that must command us.  We breathe life into our religion by following commands from the right authority this makes it real,  “the word made flesh,” so to speak.

There are thus three entities in the world, the world of things, the world of people, and that of “spirit.” (The latter forms a higher command than that of our personal welfare.)  (p.6)

People are not “things”, because memory of their vital spirit survives natural death.  It is our “natural selves” that die and turn to dust.  But our spirit can live on in memories of others, and thus influence the future. For instance.

Lincoln is not now a part of this world, of things.  He is not natural.  He is an historical leader, an historical gift to this country…he’s an inspiration…” (pp.7,8)

People are part “natural” or of nature, and part spirit.

7.Religion cannot exist unless it divides reality between the world and God. In other words, between the physical world and the spirit of mankind. ERH asserts that, since America’s religion is claimed to be “natural,” it does not make this distinction.  This is why Europeans believe there is no religion in America.

8.If all nature is “one,” then man is inside nature and cannot be religious. Nature acts by physical forces, like gravity. Economics, the distribution of goods and services of this world, is therefore a figment of nature. AND AS A MATTER OF FACT, TODAY THIS SEEMS TO BE THE PRIMARY FORCE THAT  DOMINATES OUR VALUES.

Helen Keller was great because she conquered her natural inheritance, she overcame it.

9.Usually people have two religions, one they espouse and one they practice.

ERH once again sets forth the criterion of revealing one’s own biases (religion) as a basis of understanding why and how one comments about other religions. (p.14) The problem, he reminds us, is, “when another religion is superior to ours and when it is inferior; i.e. when to command and when to obey.” [RF – his reference, at least indirectly, seems to be to get at what is necessary (universal)  in religion.]

10.To ask “why,” he reminds us, is good for the method of physics (dead things), but not useful for social science.  In social science we must ask “when” because we are constantly asked to decide between alternatives, and that decision changes with the circumstances. This point is consistent with the basic difference he describes between social and natural science; social laws change, but laws describing “things” do not.

For example he reflects on the story of Job, who, when he asks God “why,” is never answered.  WE DON’T KNOW WHY WE ARE HERE. But we must, to survive, decide what types of decisions to make and when. Things are dead. Humans are part dead and part eternal, part natural and part God-like because they are capable of being creative and instilling their spirit beyond their death. Nature can be measured by number, while God (spirit, creativity) cannot.

11.The laws of “Nature” are the same tomorrow as today and yesterday. Living, spiritual human beings can change. And extending this idea, in nature every moment is of the same significance. To change and grow requires the strength of the soul and therefore to be “only natural” would be soul killing. We would be unable to change. [RF – ERH’s definition and description of the soul is a large subject and appears in another essay, THE PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE SOUL.]

For these reasons, consciousness of time is crucially different between natural science and social science and religion. Natural scientists apply one kind of time in their work, but live a different kind of time in their social life.  (p.19)

12.Epoch-making events, e.g. causing new discoveries, marriages, deaths, or major political events, cause new eras thereby   different directions.

13.Property (wealth) is natural; it gives us physical comfort, food, shelter – the necessities for staying physically alive.  But this is never enough for us. Comfort by itself is soul-killing.  If we are to grow toward a spiritual nature, we are fulfilled by service to our community.  THUS OUR GOAL SHOULD NOT BE A LONG LIFE PER SE, FOR ONE WHICH  WE CAN REMAIN SPIRITUALLY ALIVE AND FRUITFUL.

Natural religion tends to over-value property. True religion balances this tendency with spiritual growth.

14.Natural religion says “All men are brothers,” which isn’t enough. We are also fathers, sons, daughters, mothers, etc.

15.Natural religion doesn’t recognize that we can change our nature, i.e. that humans are different from things. Thus, one age must change from the preceding one. Each generation must become a new age and  have some different goals than the previous age. (One age may need to re-establish freedom, another may need to defend  against oppression.)  To create that new age is always our challenge.

Natural religion tends to define nature or natural forces superior to those of the spirit. Thus, property is more compelling than ideals (of course beyond the basic need for survival – although even survival under certain conditions may not be worth living. This is why revolution must always be the last alternative.)  Also, with natural religions, the possession of property would take precedence over love as the reason for marriage.  [RF – One is reminded of the sorry state of India, where the religion allows for dowries, and the man can even legally kill his wife to obtain another dowry.]

16.Spirit means a unity between more than two people, and it breaks down barriers between ages, between times, between the sexes, social class, race, etc.

17.The true religion of America described here is twofold: 1) consciousness of the natural unity of man and nature.   Physical things dominate; property and long life are venerated over quality of life. 2) The passion to endow the next generation. [RF – I’m not sure of the meaning of this concept. (See (p.30) where he claims this quality is in direct contradiction to the former point.]

It is a wonderful quality which has kept the American soul alive, because it means that the miracle of conquering death or of overcoming the time limit set in one’s own life span…that the miracle happens in man’s heart….(it) endows other lives. (p.30)

*             All (real) religion consists of a reconciliation of what I think of myself in my own time and what I think should be the cause of events for all time…the real religious problem now we discover is not to be found in natural religion.    (p.31)

18.Nobody can think accurately about oneself. Benjamin Franklin has identified philosophy of nature with natural religion. To believe one can know oneself is an anti-religious attitude.  Natural religion obliterates the distinction between philosophy and religion. Natural religion believes that one’s mind is stable, and things in nature come and go. Our mind is, in fact, fickle.

FINALLY, IN THIS CHAPTER ERH ACCUSES MOST AMERICANS OF BEING PART NATURAL PHILOSOPHERS, AND THEREFORE, ATHEISTS OR AGNOSTICS, AND PART TRULY RELIGIOUS. (P.33)

Lecture – 5

1.Man seems to be in a situation with 3 dimensions, 1) He has a philosophy about religion. 2) He is part truly religious.  3) He values the natural (material) world over the spiritual world.

2.There are several universal dimensions of religion:

a.The living religion, which expresses itself by sacrifice.

b.Mental religion, which expresses itself by philosophy/theology (one’s own    ideas).

*       c.Institutional religion expresses itself by community spirit (authority); the       institution articulates common values and thus is the authority.

*All people have these three religions, and this makes comparison between religions complex. The universals between all religions are that (c) points toward the past, (b) the present, and (a) the future.

Clearly there is conflict here, and this means that at any moment one must decide how to resolve it, i.e. which consideration should appropriately dominate in a particular situation. To be vital and creative, all three attitudes are necessary.

3.Man has separated these parts into three separate religions, thus  fragmenting his time sense. In life these parts of mental functioning are in constant conflict (memory, emotion, and anticipation).  And they are manifest by different action – the future by sacrifice, the past by obedience, the present by reflection.

In another vein, the present is thought about, the past is listened to (and obeyed – for instance the ten commandments, in Hindu, Sruti means literally “what we have heard”), and the future is spoken in terms of prophecy. This is to say, although our speech is in the present, it is directed toward creating a future. We “propose” by speech.  Actions do not speak for themselves, because one action can mean many things. They must be accompanied by speech to indicate intentions, attaching intended meaning to the act.

4.Natural religion tends to abolish certain actions regardless of intent.  Spanking a bad child is out of vogue today.  Today. in this country, children tend to be given too much freedom.  TO SACRIFICE (POPULARITY AT THE MOMENT) IS TO CARE FOR ANOTHER PERSON, to be responsible for another person’s life, and therefore one’s own feelings may be less important at that moment.

Here ERH provides an example of “living” religion, where one person has intentionally (because his last words said so), sacrificed his own life for that of another, forgetting himself (forgetting his philosophy, the church, but being spontaneous).

5.ERH indicates how a sense of time is efficacious, going much further in explaining one’s behavior; being conscious about assumptions from the past, about where he/she is headed, and conscious of what he thinks in the present. In truth one attempts to survive in the present under the conflict of the opposing demands of past and future.

This is instructive for maintaining a vital understanding of our experience.

a.Things from the past may be dead, having been proven false, but still lying around. Our imperative is to forget these things. ERH uses the metaphor of oil, which is the present state of once-living organisms, but which offers no basis for understanding the vitality and nature of past life.  Non-living things cannot die; living things can. Living things that anticipate death RETAIN THE POWER TO RESTORE LIFE.

We can do something about regeneration of human community, and about flora and fauna of which we should be the caretakers. Socially, one can write a book, reform legislation, create a piece of art.  To know the difference between alive and dead is also to know the difference between past and future.

b.Living things enter time and beckon us to the future. RELIGION IS AN ATTEMPT TO SALVAGE WHAT IS LIVING FROM THE PAST.  (p.18)

…if man must obey God more than men, it also means that he must find out whether the people in authority or himself are defending at this moment a corpse interest, or a future interest, or the interest of a future otherwise not possible, otherwise blocked.  (p.18)

All of these ideas are symbolized in the notion of thinking, speaking, and listening.

6.All religions are institutionalized, even the Quakers who claim not to be. One cannot be born into a faith without an institutional presence.  The tendency of Quaker and other churches is to prefer hereditary members over converted members. IT SHOULD BE THE OPPOSITE, for obvious reasons.

7.In Protestantism the “word” is the sacrament. Thus, the text of the Bible is a corpse until it is brought to life by the faithful – “The word made flesh.”

In the text above we have said that to institutionalize is to live in the past, to endow is to live in the future.  We must have the predictable order from the past in our lives, but also the freedom for a new future, and the present to act.  Any religion that does not embrace all three timespans in its teaching is doomed to remain impotent.

We all live according to the three calendars: of the past, which is predictable and natural; of the business calendar, which is 24 hrs. per day and is objective and practical. Then a personal calendar for our own affairs, which is to decide  on problem solutions and take action.

8.Natural religion thinks of time as a given, from outside man, from the beginning until the end of the universe, eternal in both directions. Time of living beings must have other dimensions, extending backward to re-examine and learn new things about the meaning of our experience; into the future, which should be created by us; the living present in which we act; and “time out” for rest and planning. The difference between natural religion and a living religion is that, while we can describe “nature,” it does not tell us what to do about the problems presented to us.  Of course, “naturally” we get food and shelter and defend ourselves against enemies. But to create a liveable society is a different matter. A liveable religion deals with what must be thought about and acted on to create a liveable society.  And to do this, past, present, and future must be combined and lived in.

9.This unification of time is God’s revelation (gift) to man, presenting a method for creating a liveable society.

Lecture – 6

1.Here ERH describes his logic for believing in God, which he defines. The logic seems to be as follows:

a.The atheist believes that his logic, his mental powers are supreme, always dominant. He knows he can speak, but ERH asserts, that to speak is to have faith.

b.No one can speak and expect to be understood, accepted, approved, and believed unless he believes his word is true and that others will (should) respect it. The atheist therefore believes that others should accept his word that there is no God. [RF – I am unsure what he means here!]

c.ERH defines God as the power that makes us speak and listen and that others can understand.  [RF -by inference, ERH suggests that even atheists harbor a part of a living religion, but appear to deny the formalities of religion. In another essay he calls much of what is said in Christian churches  “stories fit for children,” thus recognizing the dis-ease of atheists.]

As an aside he points out that IN AMERICA WE ASSUME THAT ANY PERSON HAS THE RIGHT TO SPEAK TO ANOTHER AND ASK FOR HELP; EVEN ENEMIES HAVE THIS RIGHT. If you believe this you have the best of the natural religion, as assumed in the aphorism, “the brotherhood of man.”

d.To speak means therefore to have faith, a trinitarian faith, 1) that what we say is meaningful, 2) that it is right and found to be true, and 3) that somebody will listen.

e.Whenever we speak we need three processes by which we institute God in our life: faith, love, and hope. Even the atheist hopes to be understood, he feels words are true, and finally by speaking (instead of clubbing the listener), he shows respect and therefore love. THE PROCESS OF SPEECH IS ALWAYS BETWEEN THOSE WHO SEEK A UNION. “WE ALL HAVE RELIGION BECAUSE WE SPEAK.”  (p.4)

2.To speak and to be listened to, we must have peace.  When a situation breaks into fighting, there can be no communication by speech; to an enemy you cannot speak. Thus, “…to speak is always a decision on the timing of the act.”  Virtue is speaking at the right time; vice is speaking at the wrong time. As a matter of fact, all fruitful actions follow the same principle, to be committed at the right time.

3.In spite of the fact that atheists have “some” religion, generally they speak to and for themselves. Non-atheists are just the opposite, speaking to others in the name of their profession, or of a group. NON-ATHEISTS BELIEVE THAT WHEN THEY SPEAK, SOME HIGHER POWER HAS ENABLED THEM TO CONTACT THEIR FELLOW MAN.   (p.7)

Obviously, to lie is to destroy speaking and listening, which is to say, the community. Speech is therefore essential for the survival of a growing social universe created together with others.

4.“Your religion is not embedded in your ceremonies, but in your treatment of your own word.” Every act of speech in society testifies to our belief in God. Because God is not an abstraction, but the power by which peace, truth, and efficiency are united.” (p.8)

*Truth in itself is powerless.  One must speak out and act on it; or must stick one’s neck out and say, “This is true”, for society to survive.”

5.Everyone wants and needs power. We want to speak our minds truthfully, we want to be acknowledged for this truth, and finally we all hope for the power of our truth.  And of course, we all have some fear and trembling as to whether we are right.

6.The term Devil is a metaphor for 1) lying (denying some act or some fact), 2) for being in a hurry (impatient, unwilling to take the time to make peace with enemies),  3) not loving enough to take the time (omitting speech). Somehow one believes that enemies are inherently evil and to be eradicated or controlled one way or another.  THE ATHEIST DOESN’T BELIEVE THERE MIGHT BE A HIGHER POWER what may account for the point of view of one’s “alleged” enemy.  One has no faith that the intentions of others might be honorable. [RF – I wonder if he might, at another time, qualify this statement to, “the tendency of atheists”]

Practically speaking, of course some people wish to do us in,, and we therefore have a natural right to defend ourselves.  But we must be patient enough to discover motives, and to keep trying to discover them even in the face of precipitous acts by others.

7.The nature of our speech, or lack of it, is a fundamental issue.  True, intelligent religionists practice this universal relationship between one’s speech and God.  How we treat our own word, and observing how others do the same, is the only way to discover the religion of others, whether they might have the “religion of the devil.”

8.The notion of sin is, of course, to lie.  We all have the power to be either truthful or to lie. THE NOTION OF ORIGINAL SIN IS THAT FROM THE BEGINNING, HUMANKIND HAS LIED.

But sin can be undone by speech.  We apologize. We stop wars so that we can speak. The advocate of NATURAL RELIGION looks at the jungle and concludes that “social life of human beings is a jungle.”  One of the miracles of human speech is that it renders former enemies capable of rising above nature and making peace. No animal society can do this!

Part of this process of making peace REQUIRES OTHERS TO SPEAK FOR US.  That is, it is assumed that we would speak out in self-interest.  But if some other says that “this person speaks the truth,” then we can be believed.

9.In natural religion the assumption is that peace is normal, that all people are “naturally” good. Sin, then, is a question of will.

In natural religion, following the assumption of “naturally good,” the lie means one has been possessed by the devil.  ERH ASSERTS THAT TELLING THE TRUTH OR LYING HAS LITTLE TO DO WITH MORALITY ( intentions, acted on willfully), and much to do with the individual’s condition of strength or weakness at that moment in time. When we feel weak we lie, and we have little patience. The natural religionist believes that being truthful or lying is an act of the will.  TO HAVE THE COURAGE AND STRENGTH TO SPEAK THE TRUTH IS ONE OF THE MIRACLES OF LIFE.

10.Telling the truth may be dangerous to us physically.  The martyr is not one who wants to die, but one who cannot stand to lie any more.  He/she must speak out regardless of the consequences. The intentional martyr is neither Christian nor an advocate of a true religion. The true martyr has come to prize self-respect above personal safety.

11.We are free because we always have the choice to speak the truth or to lie.

12.To summarize, religion has everything to do with maintaining freedom and little to do with calculation.  We fetter ourselves with calculations, to need our present standard of living, to embrace dogmas (free enterprize, the ethic of consumption, slavery to the timetable and to fads of all kinds, etc.). THE FUTURE CAUSED BY SUCH DOGMAS BECOMES A PRISON. Europeans often say America is a giant, but afraid to use its power, so it hides behind principles (of non-involvement).  A freely religious stance would be to say, AT TIMES WE WILL USE OUR POWER AND AT OTHER TIMES NOT, it all depends.  A true future in this sense is not calculated, but maintains freedom to make choices when consequences are apparent.

13.Freedom happens by breaking the chain of causation.  When our acts constantly seem to work against us, we must regain our freedom through forgiveness from others.  Everyone needs this.

14.In conclusion, NATURAL RELIGION BREAKS DOWN:

a.On the question of speech.

b.On the question of goodness (i.e. man is not eternally good, but neutral; he/she may sin or do good deeds all through his/her life.)

c.On the question of freedom (events occur by natural causation and humans have little choice over the matter, except for minor matters, of course).

Natural laws of cause and effect apply to dead matter, predictably.  In social life we are unfinished, and therefore to some extent unpredictable.

In natural religion, there can be no difference between cause and effect on the one-side and freedom on the other. (p.26)

The notion of cause and effect seems subtle, as a distinction between natural religion and a living religion.  For instance, we can explain any criminal act on the basis of cause and effect.  It can be caused by drugs, or by a poor home life, or by poverty, or some mental break-down, or passion, etc., etc.  BUT THIS DOES NOT MEAN THAT MAN IS FREE FROM PERSONAL RESPONSIBILITY.  If the individual is not assumed to make at least some choices concerning his behavior, we can never be held personally accountable.  We train animals by stimulus-response, and of course humans to some extent, as well. Becoming human means moving away from that fact of nature.  A LIVING RELIGION REQUIRES THE ASSIGNMENT OF FREEDOM TO ALL INDIVIDUALS. OF course our actions are caused in part by instinct, but choice allows us to rise above mere instinct. (p.27)

Lecture – 7

1.Things “natural” proceed according to their nature, and nothing needs to be done by us. But human beings, if they are to rise above their natural animal nature must do things to intervene.

2.We are dominated by economic considerations:

The future of the economic order and the future of Christians are in conflict. This conflict seems to be decided at the outset in favor of the economic order.  For the languages of Church as well as state, of the Bible as well as the Constitution, are losing their power in daily process of advertising…(p.3)

In the following pages ERH read part of an essay written to a class some time before 1954. From the present perspective of 1996, he seems to have predicted the turn of events. Gigantic corporations, the destruction of unions, layoffs and unstable labor conditions generally, increasing gap between rich and poor, greed, commercialism dominating both public and private decision-making, and with almost total disregard for environmental protection. Even the traditional churches seem to have these values as well as a considerable intolerance toward other churches and cultures (e.g. the increasing expression of isolationism in this country and an unwillingness to help keep peace in Bosnia.)

All of this bodes alienation between peoples, the lack of willingness, or ability to speak to one another.

3.In business, one isn’t interested in speaking and listening and serving, as much as in selling.

ERH suggests that, in professions we should be setting examples, training successors.  Moses is cited for leading the children of Israel out of Egypt, because they worshipped the golden calf.  Our golden calf today is commercialism. All is sacrificed for the “bottom line.”  WHO WILL LEAD US BACK TO REGENERATING OUR COMMUNITIES, and getting us to speak meaningfully to each other?  “The Great Society is not a good society.” (p.10)

In dealing with things we follow the line of least resistance. In dealing with God, we always have to follow the line of hardest resistance. (p.11)

We do not grow when we follow our natural tendencies To grow we must rise above those tendencies, and this is always difficult, if not dangerous.  We might get fired or begin a war by speaking the truth.  There is no “profit” in doing good deeds, or in loving one, or in being creative in art or in the art of living, in the commercial sense. Or in sacrificing or volunteering for the community.  YET HOW ELSE ARE WE TO CHANGE OUR COMMUNITIES FOR THE BETTER?

4.Why one is willing to so sacrifice, or to love is inexplicable.  To change something in the world that needs changing is very difficult and seldom is commercially  efficacious.

5.ERH cites the “secret” in drama, where in the play at the end we learn something new about the characters and thus change our opinion.  A living religion, ERH suggests, has this same quality, in which the real character of a person will have its effect in the behavior of others.  THIS IS THEIR POWER, THEIR SPIRIT FINALLY REVEALED.

6.We begin to regenerate the community by regenerating our speech.  We speak to one another because we have something to say. (RF – that is, speech other than small talk over the back fence.]

…all living religion as against institutionalized religion, and against personal religion…where a soldier dies for his country, or where a daughter carries on the memory of her father, or where her father forgoes smoking and drinking so that his girl can get a dowry — in all these cases, both people settle in a point of time between them…this is the secret relation to the next generation. (p.19)

All religious problems are between two generations. TO BE RELIGIOUS, WE MUST SPEAK OUT TO HELP CREATE THE NEXT GENERATION.

All religion is predicated on a relation through time. (p.20)

*It is a religious problem to say, between today and tomorrow I haven’t lost my reputation, my honor, I have some authority for tomorrow.  Nature always threatens to ruin us by cataclysms, or temptation, and it is quite a miracle to maintain our dignity and honor through time. We strive for what should become “everlasting” in life, so that the next generation will have more life.  To have the power to do this is to have God within us.

7.It is because unpredictable situations constantly arise that one must be prepared to “…recreate the world every minute…”. Our children get sick, a natural catastrophe befalls the community and destroys our home, there is an auto accident, a transfer to a new job, etc., etc., these can change our lives, and these events call on us to readapt to the new reality. To “adapt” means to make choices, and to make choices that will be efficacious to both ourselves and the community can be difficult if not overwhelming. In these cases, it is the father (parent) who must lead and remain strong.

ERH suggests that God is in this same role vis-a-vis humankind.  The loving father or mother forgives, offers a second chance, helps along the way. BUT IN REALITY, ALL FATHERS AND MOTHERS ARE LESS THAN COMPETENT TO DO THIS JOB; HUMANS ARE WEAK AND MAKE MANY MISTAKES.  Our image of God is that he is the perfect father.  We are a weak copy of that model, and all religions are based on this notion.

8.Natural religion says, that when a man dies he’s replaceable, like any machine cog.  “Jesus dies and we say he is irreplaceable. So he can’t have died.  He has risen.”  His spirit influences our behavior after his death.  And, of course a living religion would have humans act the same way – that all of us live in such a way that our deeds and our spirit will survive in the next generation. THAT IS THE MEANING OF ALL RELIGIONS, THAT THEY UNITE GENERATIONS AND THEREBY CONQUER DEATH. Thus, a major reason we need religion is because we die. “If you believe it is good to live 150 years, religion is not for you.” (p.30)

9.Greek philosophy (Plato in Phaedon) believes in the immortality of humans. At physical death we simply change our form and go on, just as the traditional Christian church claims – which is childish.  But, from the standpoint of our spirit carrying on in others, that is a more sublime meaning. A religious act, then, is to live in a way that can be emulated in the next generation to create a better community life.

10.Greek philosophy, Hinduism, and other religions believe there is no death.  Christianity is unique in that it holds there must constantly be new beginnings.  Physically, life precedes death.  Spiritually, death precedes life because the new life carries on from the endowment of the dead person’s spirit. Our death  should herald the birth of a new beginning.

The essence of Christianity is that we all say that we have killed Christ and therefore are saved, because His death opens our eyes to our right direction of life. (p.33)

*

When we witness the death of an exemplary, loving parent, we are motivated to continue their example, to bring the parent’s principles to fruition.  Our relation to God and Jesus is the same, writ large.  IN THIS SENSE, THE AUTHORITY OF OUR PARENTS CONTINUES TO GUIDE US.

Summary For First Seven Lectures

To begin, Rosenstock-Huessy lays out two primary conditions that must be fulfilled if one is to compare religions with any understanding. This series of lectures is dedicated to explanation of these conditions. First, one must possess some definition of what religion is, what one means by the term. Second, one must understand one’s own religious biases. The logic for the first point would seem obvious. However, he explains the inclusion of the second on the basis that our biases are unconscious, and that unless we become conscious of them, we tend to reject any opposing ideas out of hand.

He also points out that the concept of God includes the notion that the universe is one entity, that heaven and earth are of the same piece. Our goal on earth is to evolve toward the idealized community (heaven). The method for achieving this is to live religious principles. The concept of devil is a metaphor for the opposite, separation of heaven from earth, of humankind from nature, or from God, of deeds separated from speech and moral values. BY IMPLICATION, WHEN HUMANKIND IS INFLUENCED BY DEVILISH IDEAS, SOCIETY FALLS SICK AND DIES. Different religions throughout history and throughout the world aim toward these universal principles (but all fall short of comprehensiveness. History offers the record of the consequences of our behavior. Furthermore, many of our “natural” or animal instincts such as greed, self- interest to the exclusion of consideration of others, lying, deception, thievery, wanton murder – attributes which we normally think of as “sinful,” – weaken society.            THE GOAL OF ALL SPIRITUAL GROWTH (RELIGION) IS TO LEAD US TO RISE ABOVE OUR ANIMAL NATURE.

He claims that 90% of the population of the U.S. has the same basic religion, regardless of their chosen denomination, This is what he calls in this essay “natural religion.”  It is the religion of commercialism, of over-consumption, of separating religion from business ethics, of exploitation of natural environment for the sake of profit (free enterprise carried to extreme). Finally, “natural religion” embraces the assumption that man cannot rise above his “nature,” what one might call natural instincts, if these instincts are thought, not defendable they must be accepted as unavoidable, unchangeable.

Rosenstock-Huessy, on the other hand, notes that humankind DOES INDEED POSSESS THE ABILITY TO RISE ABOVE NATURE, that we possess the power to make decisions and to change our nature; in other words, mankind is yet unfinished.  However, to metamorphosing our nature is agonizingly difficult: it requires discipline and the ultimate power  we can muster. RELIGION IS, BY DEFINITION, THE POWER THAT MAKES US CHANGE and grow. That human societies have survived for some millions of years gives testament to the fact that mankind has demonstrated this power is worth noting.  But what also must be noted is that most “mainline” religions do not seem to evidence the basic principles which can forge such resolve today.  These principles existed long before any Christian or member of any other religion trod this earth and, by implication, one must conclude that humankind the world-over is, spiritually, the same.  Skin color and cultural mores aside.

However universal are these qualities of humankind, there are many ways of achieving them,  and these differences are marked by different names of religions and denominations with all their different traditions, theologies and liturgies. Comparing these different religions is tricky.  We see that some are strongly consistent with the “universals” on some points, and not on others. The main part of the text in these lectures is devoted to indicating differences between the American “natural religion” and what he calls “a living religion”  that is representative of universal standards by which one cane draw comparisons. These points are summarized in the numbered paragraphs below.

Finally, Rosenstock-Huessy identifies three basic aspects of religion. Categorizing them is helpful for our understanding of this complex subject. 1) There must be a formal church, this is by definition the institutionalization of each denomination, the formal authority.  He points out that the membership and attendance at church “…does not mean very much about one’s religion.”  2), There is the theology of the denomination.  This is the logical deduction that explains and follows from some event which engendered the beginning of the religion.  Theology, ERH points out is not, or does not describe a living religion.  It is a part of philosophy, which is logical and therefore little related to “living religion.” For instance, we will, at times, make “the morale choice,” because we cannot face ourselves otherwise. People are martyred, not because they are masochists, but because they cannot stand to lie any more. When we apply “logic,” we usually rationalize in our own favor.  In this sense, liveable religion is spiritually driven, as compared to philosophical logic. 3) Finally, there is the living religion, or personal religion.  Our beliefs demonstrate their meaning when we have decisions to make about how to behave in crucial circumstances. Do we lie or not lie? Do we stand up (speak out in public) and be counted when required, or are we faint-hearted? Do we give fair work for our pay or slough off on the job? Most importantly, are we willing to sacrifice our personal welfare for the sake of helping others?  Only when we act selflessly at the right time will we build a decent community.

ERH points out that morale action has little to do with willpower, and very much to do with our feelings of strength or weakness at these crucial decision points in our lives. It is the POWER OF RELIGION THAT HOLDS THE POTENTIAL TO STRENGTHEN US AT THESE TIMES, and therefore, religion is a necessity. Considering the three dimensions of religion, atheists eschew formal religion, but embrace a theology and usually possess truly moral (religious) values, as ERH defines them.

Differentiations between natural (American) and living religion are as follows:

1.Philosophy & Religion:  Natural religion makes no distinction between philosophy and religion; in other words, it sees religion as theology only. Thus,choice is a matter of will. Living religion asserts just the opposite: “the moment of truth” is not acted on by logic, but rather by our strength or weakness at that moment in time.  Thus, the religious judgment is based on our emotional state.

2.Time & ReligionNatural religion assumes time to be extending only into the future, and each moment is the same. Time is thus measured and given meaning by the clock. Each moment in time is thus a unit in itself. Living religion doesn’t ask “why” as does the naturalist, but rather, “when.” Time is given meaning by acting at the right time in the right way. We must be conscious of the “pregnant moment.”  Time here is united because we learn from the past. The authority of past values carried forward is followed, in the present we reflect on those commands, and take action anticipating consequences in the       future, thus seeking to unite time. All religions unite the generations.

3.Speech, (the word) and Religion: With Natural religion, the word has a defined meaning. In Living religion, the word is given meaning by our actions, “the word made flesh.”

4.Freedom and ReligionNatural religion binds our instincts. Living religion, frees us to choose whether to follow instincts or act differently.  To act differently, in some instances, is precisely the necessity for surviving under liveable conditions.

5.Spirit & ReligionNatural religion makes no distinction between spirit (God) and man. Man’s view of the world (his logic) dominates thought – which is his God. Living religion views spirit as a unifier between peoples; individuals can understand each other. Words by themselves are abstract symbols. When words are combined with behavior, meaning is created; thus they create common understanding, “the spirit of mankind.”  It is the spirit of understanding that unites generations, races, social classes, etc. This unites thought and the material world, but also makes a distinction between the two. This power to unite lies outside the individual, but can only exist in common with others. Thus, “spirit is a miracle, a “gift from God” to humankind.

6.Morality & Religion  Natural religion holds that all people are basically good and that sin, or lying is a matter of willpower. One chooses to follow the path of the devil, so to speak truthfully.  Living religion holds that we are not good, per se, but are at times strong and at times weak. Thus, moral behavior is determined by our state of strength or weakness at a given point in time.  Freedom means that we choose, to be sure, but we cannot “will” ourselves to be strong or weak. THIS IS WHY WE NEED THE POWER THAT RELIGION CAN CREATE IN US.

7.Death & ReligionNatural religion believes that one does not die, but simply is transferred into a new realm and continues living. The Greeks, Hindus, and many other religions believe in some type of continuation of life; in a type of reincarnation. Living religion holds that we die physically, but our spirit is (can be) remembered and influences others (negatively or positively). We conquer death by our spirit living in others. The spirit of Lincoln, of Aristotle, of Bach and Einstein is carried on by others – as is the spirit of all those who develop strength during their physical life. Christianity holds that we grow through stages in our lives when our old ways are forgotten (put to death), and we take on a new direction in our lives, new beginnings.  This is the meaning of the death and resurrection of Jesus.

In sum, the “living religion” forms the basis for a true religion. ERH holds that “natural religion” is truly the American religion, of perhaps 90% of all Americans, regardless of their proclaimed denominational allegiance.

Lecture – 8

1.First, to lay out the criteria for comparison of different religions, religion involves “…this strange relationship between our powers to do wrong, and our (received) command not to do wrong…these were the ‘mays` and the ‘cans.`”  (p.1)

2.For humankind to dominate nature, they must form associations.  Our major dilemma is that our associations are a two-edged “blade,” as along with the power they give us, they constantly mislead us.  At any moment any family, nation, class, school, lobby, etc. can wrongly influence us if we allow it.

3.The church empowers us to choose between associations, and the state provides the opportunity for association.  Association provides us with our physical needs for food, shelter, security, etc. It provides for the “cans.” Opposed to this is the church, which deals with what we “may” do.

4.The church also gives us the power to dissociate ourselves from associations of the moment. The girl or boy who leaves home to marry, or leaves one church for another would be examples. The pilgrim fathers dissociated themselves from a state and came to America.

5.Religion deals with the problems of association and dissociation, to say yes and no at the right time, and to be willing to risk sacrifice in the process. (p.8) It deals with the question of personal power to maintain the freedom to make this decision, to stand alone or not to stand alone. “…every human being becomes human by having the power of dismissing associations and forming new associations…” (p.21)

6.The questions of “why” or “what” are questions about things, and are not religious questions. Yes and no questions are religious when related to association or dissociation.  To ask why someone loves  you has no answer. Psychology and other social sciences ask “why and what” questions, and therefore they cannot deal with a major dimension of the human psyche. The soul (the soul is the essence of what our spirit is, of what we individually are. Love remains a mystery.  THIS IS WHY THE TRADITIONAL SOCIAL SCIENCES ARE UNABLE TO REVEAL THE TRUE NATURE OF INDIVIDUALS OR OF SOCIETY.

7.The act of saying NO to some significant temptation of life is the road to maturity, to developing a soul. THIS IS  HOW WE EXPERIENCE RELIGIOUS POWERS.

We do not live by asking what and why, but by saying yes and no, thank you and no thank you.  This we do each day of our lives, and at times, each moment of the day. GOD IS THE SECRET OF OUR PROCESS OF BEING REVEALED BY HOW WE ANSWER THESE QUESTIONS PUT TO US, REGARDING ASSOCIATION OR DISSOCIATION, BY SAYING AND ACTING ON YES AND NO.  (p.17)

We impress others by our record of saying yes or no, by our associations to which we have become dedicated, for better or for worse.  This establishes that we have made decisions and that our life is not just drifting.

**

8.Change is a painful process. There is no God outside us (God is part of us). We must learn that God is another part of ourselves. “There is no God outside….God must be discovered by you and me in quite a different manner, as inseparable from yourself.” The question, “Is there God?” is for four year olds. (p.22)

9.God is terrible passion; he isn’t kind.  Love is jealous and powerful. God is not enlightenment, but darkness, mystery. “God is the not-yet-revealed light. And in you, and in nobody else.” God is the power that changes you, and that power is a secret.  (p.26)

10.”Spirit” is two “wills” that have become unified. They may be of different generations, but always between two different people. No single person can have “spirit,” but one moves within a spirit; spirit then unifies associations.

The secret of the Holy Ghost is that it is spirit recognized under the right name,  “…as Baker’s millions and Baker’s books recognize each other in the title, `Baker Library.’ ”  (p.26)

I believe his point is that one cannot have a “good life” without “spirit,” without some type of spiritual experience, and he cites several different situations that reflect “spirit” as an inspiration, as a source of creativity. 1) One problem is what becomes of us after we die? ERH cites Chinese ancestor worship as a response, one’s relations to one’s  ancestors. (they believe they never die). 2) Greek mythology demonstrates the father/daughter spirit, the idolatry of daughter by father (Athena jumping ready-made out of the head of Zeus). 3) The family, the bride/suitor relationship, i.e. Christ and his church, and  from the father the bride comes to a marriage and a family.  William James Senior was a follower of Swedenborg whose philosophy proclaimed the sacredness of the family.

These intimate experiences become a spiritual source of creativity. (p.27)  The religion of philosophers is “a change of mind,” but mind-change, sans action, is impotent, and thus a very superficial religion. CREATIVITY AND ACTION ARE CRUCIAL TO REAL LIVING. SENILITY AND COMPLACENCY ARE TERRIBLE THINGS.

11.As we age our body deteriorates, and for this our mind must make up the difference. Our body changes every 7 years and at each instance our mind must change accordingly, as we mature. At each instance we physically die in a way. One who misses some needed change remains childish until the change comes. Some, for instance wish to remain young all their lives, and persist in acting as teenagers.

12.The more we struggle against death, the more intensely we live.  THOSE WHO ARE INDIFFERENT OR LAZY ABOUT ISSUES FAIL TO BE FULL OF LIFE, BY DEFINITION.

13.What we really seem to seek is that someone will continue our spirit, our ideas, our direction, AND WHEN THIS MIRACLE OCCURS OUR WORLD FEELS FULFILLED, we know then that we could face death.  But we may often not know this, as our ideas may be picked up only long after our physical death. Some religions attempt to put life into us, giving us strength to face death. THESE ERH CALLS  THE ACTIONS OF  NATURAL RELIGIONS. [RF – which seems to me would include most organized religions.]

Lecture – 9

1.To come alive, to find fulfillment in life we must live a paradox; each day we must move toward re-inventing ourselves, we must change as we learn new lessons from our experience.  However, we also remain the same in the sense of our spirit of freedom, our dedication to principles and carrying on commitments from the past which represent necessity. This is the process of deciding what from past behavior should change in the light of new knowledge.  The crucial point is maintaining the freedom to decide.  “God is freedom.”  (p.1)

2.Life and death is a mystery. However, many religions and philosophies deny death.

…never misunderstand Christianity.  It’s not an attempt to leave man in the lurch or to declare him to be a sinner, but it’s an attempt to give man his share in divinity…a religion which tries to discuss this secret…So this is revealed religion, a power to withdraw the veil,…revealed religion.  (pp.4,5)   [ RF – Emphasis mine]

3.Revealed religions center on change.  But most of us have 3 religions that are compatible, each emphasizing a different human need.  1) Be a stoic, buckle down and accept a new condition, such as weathering a storm. We are our own god in this mode, following our own direction. The force for change comes from outside us, however. 2) Another is, of course the revealed religion, which means our work and the fate of people must be changed to improve the social health of the community. [RF – An example that comes to mind today would be the need to recycle our waste. Another would be to persuade people to work toward reversing the destruction of the living environment.] THESE ARE RELIGIOUS DECISIONS BECAUSE THEY MAY GO AGAINST THE VESTED INTERESTS OF SOME GROUP. 3) Finally we must accept the need for change in our hearts, once the need is revealed.

These three sources of authority must command us to change, come from 1) God, manifest in events around us, 2) the authority of the groups to which we belong and revere, and finally 3) within ourselves. WE MUST REMAIN FREE TO MAKE THE CHOICE BETWEEN THE THREE AT ANY PARTICULAR MOMENT IN TIME, ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT OF OUR SITUATION.

4.All of this may be understood as commands from God, to obey during our lives, made manifest in nature, in our communities, and within ourselves. Also, these concepts can be understood from their time perspective: 1) to obey authority from the past (identifying movements from the past that should continue, like justice, human rights, free press etc.; 2) – to attend to our social survival in the present; and 3) to found new institutions needed for a future. TO SO OBEY IS TO MAKE A RELIGIOUS DECISION. This is why religion is at the heart of our everyday activities, why it is therefore necessary, and why all religions are the same.  They respond to the same basic problems of life at a general level, BUT WITH DIFFERENT ADMIXTURES,  just as all governments deal with the same problems in different ways. (p.10)

5.           …the Bible is very careful to assert that long before there were Jews and Greeks, there is God and man in conversation. (p.13)

Jahweh is the God who speaks! Judaism and Christianity are trying to fight against the notion that there can be religions separate from the “universal.”

The average person is religious.  IT TAKES A SOPHISTICATED PERSON TO BE NON-RELIGIOUS. Academics try to separate religions, make them different.  ERH refers to the story of the good Samaritan, who was neither Greek nor Jew, nor academic.  Basically, he was a good man. Religion, at its root addresses to the basic question of “may” and “can.”  The Bible, in the beginning describes nothing but the universal humane condition necessary to sustain humankind.

6.The story of the fall of Adam and Eve is not one of temptation, as most believe, but rather of the unwillingness of Adam to own up to his acts; “the group [serpent and Eve], made me do it.” Here is the typical “may” and “can” issue. Adam did not obey, and was too weak to own up to it.  The notion of original sin (of Eve) “…is just silly.”

7.Another definition of God is “He who can admit his decisions.” In the Adam and Eve story, man makes the divine decision, (to part-take of knowledge and thereby participating in the creation of community), but doesn’t want to be responsible for it. (p.16) Finally ERH points out that this situation is a classic demonstration of the behaviorist nature in man, where he is influenced (forced) by his environment (the situation). “…the difference between the divine life and your life is that you want not to be quoted. That’s always the devil.” (pp.18,19)  It is a sign of sublime courage to admit your decisions, especially those for which one might have to sacrifice in making them public.

8.Humankind cannot be thought of in the singular. Another lesson from the Bible is  that man cannot be thought of in the singular; it must be man and his associations all together. In the singular we cannot build bridges, or create language and change our nature.  The whole center of the Bible teachings, ERH claims is that man is not singular. Individually we are trained, taught language, obey past authority handed down from others.  This central Biblical question comes down to, “Who is man that God should me mindful of him?” (p.21)

9.Islam is a revealed religion, a universal religion “…inside our own..” (p.21)

10.Our lives are spent “incorporating dead matter into our lives.”  We shape material things into food, bridges, beds, houses, etc.  BUT THE POINT IS THAT WE SHOULD WEAVE THESE “CORPSES” INTO MEANINGFUL LIVING.

11.The changes demanded of us change our status vis-a-vis our intensity of life. When we admit that some change could be threatening, such as the bomb or an earthquake, then some aspects of our lives shift.  The question we must address is, “Can we survive the change?”  We cannot understand what these changes might mean until we have experienced them, until after the fact.  These changes dominate our consciousness for a while; we cannot understand their meaning rationally, as the outcome is always different than we imagined.

12.Each religion, emphasizing as it does different aspects of change, at the same time emphasizes a different intensity of life that results from that change.  These different intensities become one of the scales for comparing  religions.

Lecture – 10

1.Degrees of intensity of change we undergo: change is perhaps the dominant experience in life, affecting our body, our soul and our mind.

a)The term “mechanical,” refers to change brought about by physical forces. Driving in a car (movement through space is change), a machine changes raw material (fuel). Mechanics changes things, and we are in control. We control things, and this change is physical.

b)Organic change refers to physiological matters, of aging, and this is metabolic, a loss of form, not of position. All change can be either positive or negative. Illness, for instance, is usually thought of as negative, but it can have meaning, a warning.  Illness in this country is treated as a more or less mechanical phenomenon, but more and more psychosomatic dimensions are being recognized. Thus meditation, imaging, biofeedback etc. are becoming accepted procedures. FOR THE RELIGIOUS PERSON, THESE OTHER DIMENSIONS ARE EASILY ACCEPTED, because the religious person knows both his weakness and strengths.   An organic change must be accepted as a personal challenge, engaging the miracles of nature, and mind and spirit.

c) Change occurs through work.

d) Change occurs through love. [see para. #2 below]

e)Change occurs through politics. Changes in politics are most direct and easy to understand. During the American Revolution, identities and values were reversed in the extreme. Before the revolution, it was an honor to be a Royalist, and afterwards Royalists were defiled. We ceased to be one thing, such as a German, or Italian, and become American. Politics is largely beyond our control.  It involves incalculable risk, and often surprise and disappointment. General Marshal, promoted Eisenhower, only to have his friend refuse to back him up. Hitler experienced unanticipated changes.  Movements get out of our control, even, at times beginning inadvertently. They follow certain rhythms of life. HOW TO DEAL WITH THESE EVENTS IS A RELIGIOUS QUESTION. “The religious man always knows his weakness,” and can therefore handle the political change in time.

Politics are part of community, forces outside us individually, although at times we can influence them. Political changes (the consequences of politicking) are beyond our control, so we must simply adapt to them, accepting any necessary sacrifice that is a part of daily life. Military life, for instance, demands sacrifice. We owe soldiers love and respect when they have died for us. And some respect is shown by our willingness to be called and serve ourselves. ALL OF THESE 5 STATIONS OF “ALIVENESS” (mechanics, organics, love, work, politics) ARE AT THE CENTER OF LIVING LIFE FULLY.

2.We always live in-between right and wrong, ignorance and intelligence, life and death. THE POINT IS TO ATTEMPT TO BE A LITTLE MORE IN THE RIGHT DIRECTION.      We tend to love and hate the same things at different times, whether those loves and hates are our gods, family members, ideals, or things around us. To do so is a healthy sign because it means they are not idols. It reflects the necessary quality of remaining capable of dissociation and reassociation.

3.Coming to be “alive” means we enter history by responding to different roles in life; we give meaning to the words love and politics and mechanics, etc.

TO RECAPITULATE – mechanic life is met by (power), organic life is met by rhythm (falling into the rhythm of the universal), conscious life is met by work, love is met by reciprocity, and politics is met by sacrifice.

Lecture – 11

1.IN SOME INSTANCES WHEN WE KNOW WHERE WE’RE GOING, WE CAN GIVE UP WHAT WE HAVE!  When one doesn’t know where one is going one tends to cling to what one has. Most people in his country have no spiritual direction, so they cling to their possessions, their toys. [RF – Today I suppose these would be exemplified by computers, and cell phones, new cars, stereos, etc.  I’m not sure how to take this statement, except to assume it applies to a person who doesn’t think for himself because it is neither my own experience, nor his. I would refer the reader to his chapter entitled METANOIA, in I AM AN IMPURE THINKER.  In these instances one must be committed to change without knowing what the change might mean! The next paragraph seems to confirm this.]

2.Change requires us to first take a leap into the future, into the new life of change, even before we know much about the consequences. It is our faith that the move will be productive.  Many people claim to be ready for change “when they can afford it.”  But such assurance never materializes.

Love is the first step that carries us over the barrier of fear of change.  To hate anything that becomes a barrier is a necessary dimension of love.  Love means we have the courage to be transformed. (p.12)  All of this refers to #4) above.  We need friends because we need someone to accept us in spite of our shortcomings. Someone who’s love, faith in us and willingness to tell us the truth gives us the strength to take the risk.

Love and will are opposites, we can have one or the other, but not both at the same time.  Love is a surprise, it is “discovered.”

Passion gives us the energy to do things that we would not ordinarily be capable of. When we love something,  the difficult becomes easy. Love cannot be willed, it can only be developed. (p.17)

3.Time must not be understood as a sequence of moments whereby the past causes the present, which in turn, causes the future. This is the phycisists attitude toward time. BUT HUMAN TIME doesn’t work that way; we must first anticipate what our future should be, then contemplate the past as the first step in taking action in the present to get there. THE STEPS TO CHANGE ARE 1) anticipate the future, 2) build a bridge to the past, and 3) take action in the present.

4.Life is built around five items;  man dreads change, but he must produce change, impose change, and must obey God (authority); God is the power that makes us change.

“Mechanics” directs us to employ the laws of physics, controlling power but also falling under the laws of entropy “Organic life” retards entropic processes, and work does the same (slowing down the “fall” of entropy. Passion contrarily “defies the laws of gravity” (love overcomes hurdles),

ERH’s POINT IS THAT, THESE FIVE BASIC FORCES OF LIFE, OF ALIVENESS, are the subject of every religion, because if man can shape them, he can exert some control on his life and death. (p.7) TO DO SO ALLOWS MAN TO RISE ABOVE HIS ANIMAL NATURE, and move toward divinity. Note, for instances the following table of the mythical gods:

a.Mars (pure power) is the god for mechanics, the Roman god of war.

b.Mercredi (Mercury) is the god for metabolism, rhythm.

c.Athene is he goddess of industry, of work

d.Venus is the god of passions

e.Saturnus is Saturn, the god of catastrophe

These represent the 5 days of the pagan week, “What we live under these five influences, that is the common possession of the whole human race.” (p.10)

5.The power of all of these forces is overwhelming, at times threatening us with life and death decisions and this power is, unavoidably on our consciousness, or we know of its presence intuitively. God is not a product of our minds, but of our experience; we know how powerless we are.

Our beliefs are fragmented among the five, or some combination thereof. But one seldom seems to be able to think of them as parts of a whole.  Are any of the different religions superior to the other? Judaism, Muslim, Buddhist, Christian? Not a useful question to ask.  All religions reflect a consciousness of  power represented by the 5 Greek or Roman gods

6.The first change we are forced to experience in life is space; the second is the rhythm (the heart beat, the pendulum spaces of time); the third is the operations or working. Spans of time, cycles of time, stages of time, etc. are the measuring milestones in our lives, BUT THEY CANNOT BE MEASURED AS IN PHYSICS, as they are relative. Whenever we speak of associations of people, space is subordinate to time. Whenever we have mechanics, time is subordinated by space. (p.14)  Things must be done in a timely manner, as a proposal or any influential  speech requires that it be said at the right time.

7.Religion is the reversal of what we call “normal relations of space and time.”  For the phycisist, space has three dimensions, and time is a fourth.  FOR THE RELIGIOUS BELIEVER, time has three dimensions (past, present, future), and space has one.

The great riddle of human experience is how to create new times (changes), a new period in the history of the community, or begin a movement that lasts into two or more generations. To bring about such a change, ERH experienced a loss of friends, country, fortune, profession. To accept such inevitability is to make an asset out of a liability, becoming  stronger in the process.

The other side of this issue is THAT WE MUST DEFEND AND RETAIN EXISTING THINGS THAT MUST NOT BE OBLITERATED. That the plants and animals have taken millions of years to evolve doesn’t mean that we are free now to destroy them. Then what?  It is the same with justice, human rights, the Declaration of Independence. We must not be so blase` as to think that something cannot be wiped out. One aspect of our eternal battles is to know and fight for these issues.  Only sacrifice, work, and passion will keep these miraculous creations going.

8.New creations are miracles – poems, children, love, or sacrifice for a good cause. All of these must be preserved.

9.There is a great difference between creativity and work. Work is mere will and energy. Creativity requires passion for some goal beyond.

10.The first experience of our lives is that we were brought into existence by someone who cares for us and gave us a name.  THIS IS THE STARTING POINT FOR ALL UNDERSTANDING OF OUR EXPERIENCE.

11.EDUCATION.  The worst aspect of our present education is that it is dominated by the physical sciences, which teach us to describe the universe, but end with nothing to do with how we are to evaluate our personal experience.

Those who really love us wish us to be free to grow, not demanding we become carbon copies of themselves. The first thing that should be learned in schools is  “…the spirit in human relations…”

…you must trust your nurse, your mother, your father, your teacher that he renounces all right to mold you in his image. (p.24)

First things tend to rule what follows.  What we must learn then is that human experience and the quality of our community comes before physics. We wouldn’t survive and grow at all if someone had not helped considerably along the way, and sacrificed for us.

Laws of physics, of the natural sciences, are several times removed from our direct experience, so why begin with those?

…you and I, in our highest moments, live in a living universe in which all the voices of the universe talk.  Everything has a voice. And you have…if physics is a questionable entertainment of the mind, then you don’t have to throw the atom bomb. If physics comes first, then there is no way out. (p.16)

Lecture – 12

1.One who has lived in a very abstract world – a world made from their mind, from their fantasies, their wishes of the way things should be rather than how they are – has a difficult time “coming to life,” understanding what is being said here.

2.Change usually means values change their place, and what was once prized becomes useless. The Romans would fear Mars, the god of war as a demon destroying their fields and slaughtering them, then invoke him to come to their side and be a blessing. “All defined experience is a revaluation of our ethics.” (p.2)  In war we defend our way of life by being asked to kill the enemy (who has done nothing to us).  “Every defined process means that you have two logics, which are contradictory: one before and one after the appearance of the god.” (p.2)  Acting on these commands allows us to understand religious experience. THERE IS NO OTHER WAY.

**

3.We should look at ourselves in relation to human history, as a light bulb is related to the electric power house.  We live our lives, shine, then burn out and are thrown away.

4.In life we live in several contexts; in work, in home, in recreation, in study and learning, in many different associations including church. In each we may have a different role; each is essentially different and serves a different purpose with different meaning in our lives.

In any of these parts of our lives, our highest state is when we are un-self-conscious. Our normal state is to be self-conscious, to rationalize everything from this self-consciousness. From this self-conscious state we are attempting to control the situation.  Un-self-consciousness occurs when our spirit moves us, when we do and say things regardless of the cost. When we make important commitments, we tend to be most creative.  SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS therefore is a lesser state of living.

Quantity has little to do with importance.  The important events in life are rare, and usually-short termed, but creative and defining.

**

5.It would seem that what we know most certainly is that which we experience most often. Yet, ERH makes the case that those rare occasions when insight and creativity and decision occur mold us permanently, AND THEREFORE THOSE RARE MOMENTS ARE MOST CERTAIN in our learning. We are the only ones who can find the unique direction that we, individually must take and this direction represents an exertion of great and rare energy.

**

6.These five dimensions of basic religious experience (mechanic, organic, consciousness [work], passion, and politics) can therefore be characterized as having an ascending or descending degree of warmth, of aliveness. (p.12)  We live in these 5 rings of ethical behavior, and the problem is to know which ring we are in, or should be in, at any moment of time, requiring a decision from us.

Each of these dimensions has a quality of excitement from “white heat” to apathy. This, ERH asserts, is why so much advertising literally screams at us to get our attention because we live most of our lives in a state of “suspended animation.” THE POINT IS THAT WE ARE FREE AT EACH MOMENT TO CHOOSE WHAT STATE TO BE IN.

7.Different religions deal, then with the same problems in a different way just as dictatorships, aristocracies, or democracies represent different ways of dealing with the problem of government. In each of these approaches, energy is differently placed.

Hinduism emphasizes the state of deep sleep, an organic vegetative state of low heat, seeking immunity from mechanics (the physical universe). Not to be confused with normal sleeping, it is a special “deep sleep.”  In Africa, the hunting society believes the mind can leave the body, travel thousands of miles, and kill an enemy.  The Hindu attempts to achieve all 5 life processes by emphasizing only one. (p.15)  Also, Hindus have no history – all is thought which is out of (the context of) time.

8.Two criteria for religions: 1) they must be true to their creed, and 2) they must account for all of life’s basic experiences. (p.17)  For instance, philosophy excludes love, sleep (the importance of death), or the importance of political decisions. Therefore it cannot satisfy logically, as  it cannot fit many of our life experiences.

…religious idolatry — would begin when any one of these necessary (5) elements of experience is arbitrarily, or voluntarily, or deliberately omitted and crushed. (p.18)

[RF – By these two criteria, most religions seem unrelated to our everyday life. Perhaps that is their problem or the problem of all religious belief in general. It is either narrow idolatry, or it is misunderstood and rendered irrelevant to life experience.]

This is an important concept – that is, any frame of mind, any attitude that omits any of the 5 criteria narrows one’s view of reality, no doubt causing problems in life.  For instance, if one says to one’s self that the only reality is ones own feelings, one feels free to ignore the law, or their debts, or differing values of  others.

9.The expression, “the fullness of times,” ERH uses to describe those attitudes that recognize all 5 of the states of life experience.

The hope for religion today is that we can bring ourselves to see the one God as a sum of the 5 gods of the Greeks, or the Romans. “..divinity is obviously he who can communicate and go back and forth between those various aspects and temperatures of life.” (p.24) By exercising this freedom to decide, all have the freedom to belong to all the gods.

10.Religion is always ambiguous and never logical because it requires us (if it is complete with the 5 dimensions) to be different things at different times – a lover one time, a worker another, a patriotic soldier at another, a logician also. It argues for us to be always free to move from one to the other as the situation demands. One must maintain the courage to move from one to the other, to change, to end one era of one’s life and enter a new period.

Lecture – 13

1.           “Religion describes a real experience of men, which we call the religious aspect of every man.  There is no non-religious man….people have either a false religion or the true religion…they have their appetites.  And they have their ambitions…So they cannot help being transformed in what they believe in.” (p.1)

One of the main pillars of ERH’s philosophy is that the world is one, that thought and concrete experience cannot be separated, one has no meaning without the other.  This quote indicates his belief that all religious thought must derive from concrete experience, and it is because these experiences are universal among all peoples that there is a core of ideas common to all religions.

2.           …religion has been killed by the word “duty” and it has been killed  by this separation of the religious man and the superior humanist, who has no religion. (that is, no true religion)  The humanists have a very poor religion and I think they have played out — the liberals — because they denied their own prison.  They denied their own captivity under the law of the unknown god.  As long as the gods are unknown, you are under their law.  Because you just carry it out.  As long — as soon as you admit that the gods rule, and we are in their hands, you can choose, you can free yourself from the gods.  That’s the meaning of false doctrine of the law and of grace.  The man who is in grace denies them and says, “oh, I’m a free agent, I do what I please,” doesn’t know what he pleases — what this pleasure is, that this pleasure is always one of these five.  (p.2)

3.Time, in each of the 5 dimensions, takes on a different meaning.  One experiences time, when in love, in an utterly different way than at work or play.

4.Play is important to understand because it means that which we play at, whether games, or ideas, or even life. Play is a mental construct in the sense that it originates with ourselves; we set the rules and participate  THE GODS OF PLAY ARE IDEAS, coming from inside us and therefore removed from God’s creation of the world. We cannot say that whatever we like is true!p. (p.7)

Those who believe that reality is what the mind imagines believe that God is an illusion!

5.Being creative, bringing a new idea or an image into existence, is just like bearing a child, painful and requiring sacrifice. There is nothing playful about art!  WE THEREFORE MUST NEVER JUDGE SERIOUS THINGS FROM THE RULES OF PLAY. “…if it is just a good idea, please don’t do it.  You can only do it if it is (ultimately) necessary and unavoidable.” (p.10)

Life cannot be lived experimentally.  True inspiration awakens us to a new world. (p.11) The primary function of the artist is to tell us what we are doing, and so make us conscious of ourselves. ERH uses the metaphor of the artist fertilizing the egg (creating new possibilities for seeing reality); ordinary people live unfruitful lives until they become conscious of reality. The artist, through his art, attempts to so fertilize our imaginations, attempting to tell us the truth about ourselves.

**

6.The first decision we make, or should make if we are to come alive (live fruitful lives), is about death, ERH asserts. His logic is that we are created by way of the sacrifice of our parents, and we ourselves only “come alive” spiritually by living our lives in a willingness to create new life (meaning not only procreation but new communities, and fruitful change in ourselves). Fruitful creativity, with change is living.  So the experience we have is that fruitfulness is created by sacrifice of all types, then we die.  THIS IS THE FIRST RELIGIOUS DECISION WE MAKE, THAT WE CHOOSE TO LIVE HONESTLY REGARDLESS OF THE RISK, WHETHER WE KNOW IT OR NOT, AND WHEN WE RECOGNIZE AND PRACTICE IT WE OPEN OUR LIVES TO THE REAL FREEDOMS OF CHOICE AND GROWTH. Of course a choice may be to avoid the choice!

His aphorism is that the past is not dead and life is not in the future, but rather the opposite – the past creates life, and our future is always death. (pp.16-19)  All past societies that fought wars for justice, scientists who sacrificed to create a more stable and better physical existence, and our own families – all of these forces created and regenerated life upon which our lives are based.

**

To face the fact that we will die frees us by teaching us the miraculous values and possibilities of life.  We are then motivated to live more meaningfully. ANYTHING THAT IS NOT WORTH DYING FOR WILL EVENTUALLY DISAPPEAR, AND SHOULD.  (p.22)

7.           Another decision (within the 5 dimension paradigm), would be to choose nature, (physics, the universe of laws).  When one begins with nature, one can never derive a logic for love or sacrifice (and all social rules for building a community).  Hormones, sex, glands do not create love. “…sacrifice is a form in which man is deified,… (p.20)

8.There are many gods, of course, the god of sex, of greed, of learning, of work, of play, automobiles, gambling, sports (exercise), vanity, etc. The 5 dimension paradigm (nature, organic, consciousness, love, politics), are generalizations summarizing all basic life experiences. The point is that we must be conscious of that which we worship at some given time SO THAT WE ARE CONSCIOUS OF WHAT WE DO.  Play, for instance, is useful, but not adequate for meaningful life.

9.”Where,” ERH asks, “…does America worship?”  Of course, America worships the god of space, of things, of speed, (half the fuel used in the country is to get somewhere faster, and more than half our income is spent on things we don’t really need! (p.26,27)

10.THE SECOND GOD WE WORSHIP, after mechanics (death), is organic (dance), which informs many of our ceremonies, our play,  “…it means we should bask in rhythm, in harmony.” (p.30)

Worship means to enter the roads created by the gods.  The original name for Christianity was not Christianity, but “the way”.

Lecture – 14

1.ERH claims to provide a precise measure for discerning the quality of particular religions around the world. The Greek meaning of the term “mathematics” is exact knowledge that can be taught.  He claims, contrary to some humanists who believe we cannot know anything, least of all about religion, that if this were so, human society would have self-destructed long ago.

He lauds the Jehovah’s Witnesses, who claim to wish to know the truth and act on it. (p.2)  Where we worship we want the real thing – truth – regardless of what is worshipped.  And we all worship some things, or behaviors, or people (idols), or some evil, or some deserving cause. To march into war is a religious act. THERE IS A GREAT DEAL OF RELIGION IN OUR SECULAR LIFE. (p.5)

2.Life and death: The ancient Egyptians worshipped eternal life, imperishable things like pyramids and gold.  And they thought they had an eternal soul that never died.  To worship dead things and living things at the same time is a paradox. Living things die.  We all die.

Just as we have no peace without war, or no love without danger, there is no life without death.  The course of life runs out.

The Hindus tried to prolong life by seeking suspended animation, but that state is hardly living, in our estimation.

3.All living cells give up their lives to produce new life.  It is the same with human society. That we are always in danger is also a fact of all life.  In danger from natural disasters, from disease, from ignorance, from greed and lack of courage.

“Good works” are the acts that reduce or reverse these dangers. But remember, ERH admonished, good works can always be corrupted.

4.The Bible announces all of the corruption of ideas that impede the discovery of truth. (Read St. John’s Apocalypse, or Revelation). ERH claims a modern example would be social science, especially psychology, whereby everything is explained from the psyche (that is, truth is to be found only through rational thought. Much of our experience would tell us, if we listen, that truth often evolves in exactly the opposite direction from our (previously mistaken) logic.

“…as soon as you don’t read the New Testament, all these irreligions come up again…It is written as the inventory of the stupidities of the human race.” (p.11)

ERH repeats once again, to go to church isn’t much, and certainly not a religious act.  But to seek truth, and be willing to sacrifice and change…!

5.We are pitted against a worship of dead things (space). Of idiotic fantasy, space story, new cars, etc., of liberal ideas. The world of physics is the world of dead matter. “The only purpose of matter is to be told that it doesn’t matter.” (p.16) The profoundest religion you can have about matter is that matter is a means, not an end. We must seek to make dead matter less dangerous, less enticing, less hypnotizing. (p.20)

6.The first natural religions of the sky (having astronomy and worshiping the deities of the heavens as living beings), were those of the Egyptian, Babylonian, Incas, Chinese (to some extent). They thought gold was the source of life. (p.17)  They worshipped the imperishable, and the way for humans to enter that world was to have statues made of oneself. This was not decorative art, but a conduit for the living to enter the dead world of imperishable things.

**

7.We are nothing but dumb animals in the beginning of our lives, and the great goal of growth and development is to “come to life,” spiritually.  This is to say, to seek the truth about living, and how to live and what is of value. To see reality in social relations as well as in spacial relations, and to be willing to create new life. Those who are only self-serving remain at the animal level.  To come to life is to live so that those who succeed us will be instilled with the method of regeneration of the spirit. That is our protection against death.

8.Those who “come to life” as described above, are always in the minority, and must therefore be protected against the majority. Unfortunately, the majority always governs the quality of life for all.

9.The 5 elements are representative of the more frail, more delicate, more perishable and more endangered elements of life. The vote of the majority is, by definition, a vote for death.  Without a religious foundation, no democracy is possible.  “The meaning of your life is that you become the man who deserves the lifesaving by the minority.” (p.26)

One evidence of this is to strive toward the highest standards in one’s profession.

This country, for the last 50 years has dismissed everything which has been known about the human’s place in nature. …And they call this the era of natural science…it has totally dismissed the real relations between a scientist and his nature. (p.27)

**

10.To be a minority is always more difficult.  Hatred is always easier than affection.  To recognize dead things is easier than bringing them to life. RELIGION IS THE POWER NOT TO CONFORM TO THE MAJORITY.  It is easier to conform to orders, and more difficult to – say no, conform, to be unique, or be a minority. (p.29)

11.The Greeks knew all of this.  To them the cosmic order meant to create a decent community, to influence others to do so, to control living things less than dead matter.

Summary of Lectures 8-14

During the first seven essays ERH defends the notion that one can compare religions  only if one has a clear definition of religion, and is conscious of one’s own religious bias.  He also asserts that, basically, all religions attempt to address the same questions.  In this series of chapters he takes the next step for comparison, which is to ask, “What might be these common denominators for different religions?

One of the fundamental assumptions found throughout all Rosenstock-Huessy’s thought is  that we can understand our experience only in terms of ideas that correlate with our experience. In other words, if abstractions such as gravity or love cannot be experienced directly by us, we simply have no notion of their meaning.  It is the same with all abstractions, including religion.  For instance, concepts about a heaven or hell as places of total good or total evil, where either there is no danger or suffering, or just the opposite, are pure fantasy, since we cannot experience them except in our minds. And to the extent that such ideas prevail in religion means the perpetrators are simply maintaining a religion for the four-year-old mentality. While ideas of heaven and hell are useful metaphors describing our experience, taken literally they are really fantasy.

Therefore, the basis for comparing religions is not to look at their churches,  ceremonies, liturgy, and theologies, but beyond these to what all of these are intended to represent to their members.  If all meaning comes from human experience, and humans are essentially the same the world over, then there must be fundamental similarities based on how humans have responded to that experience.  For instance, all societies suffer from natural disasters, disease, failed crops, invading armies, etc. and the gods they conjured up represent their belief in where power lies to resist or placate those gods.

An examination of five core experiences of all humans is the primary thrust of this series of lectures.  These are intended to occur in sequence from birth, but the increasing complexity of our experience as we grow means that these five accumulate and become interrelated as our experience.  These are as follows:

1.Mechanical experience:  This is a recognition that the first experience we have is that of the laws of nature. We fall to the ground, or things fall on us. This can create pain in one way or another. Also, we unavoidably experience day and night, heat and cold, up, or down, and other spacial and natural phenomena. The primary quality of nature is raw power, moving through space, exerting energy to maintain our body temperatures; we build machines to do our work, and spend a great deal of time creating fuel for our machines.

Science is devoted to describing objects in the universe and in discovering the laws that explain how these objects may be manipulated. Science, is perhaps the main “religion” of modern industrial countries, from which is derived a technology to empower us in our endless quest for forms of material Laws of nature Because these laws are inexorable and repeatable, they define the mechanical elements of our experience. These laws are representative of our first experiences of life.

2.Organic experience:  Organic experience defines the processes of living cells, which seem to be dominated by rhythmic patterns. All cells take in food from other living cells. Basically these patterns are defined by such experience as hunger and satiation, seasons of germination, growth, fruition, and sleep (spring, summer, fall, and winter), of stages of aging and all its changes, stages of the healing process, metabolic changes tied to seasons of the year and also to day and night.  Examples of religious ceremonies abound in terms of the winter solstice, of planting, germination, harvest, etc.  But at an individual level all of these rhythms have their counter-part.

One of the most basic elements of organic experience is the contrast between life and death. We tend to fear death and must learn to be conscious of living beyond the most basic emotional and energy responses to life.  Life and death are opposites.  Life is unique in the universe where it exists.  There is perhaps no more clear element of all religious life than explanations about life and death. Consciousness of our state of health when we fall ill or suffer injury dominate our thinking, beginning with our earliest memories.

3.Work experience: Work dominates most of our waking life, and in this effort we strive to plan and predict outcomes. From an early age we are confronted with various types of survival problems, cleaning and washing, food getting, shelter-building, play, learning, and the like. In this experience we consciously attempt to solve the various problems that confront us.

4.Passion:   Consciously or not, emotions dominate much of our thought. “Our passions give life to the world,” ERH wrote in another essay, driving us to frustrations, despair, creativity… We seem capable of developing a passion for almost anything – property, power, love, hate,  but essential significance of emotion lies in the energy it creates.  This energy allows us to do things not ordinarily possible. Art is the method by which we attempt to understand our emotional response to experience.

5.Catastrophe: This is a force outside our individual or social life, about which we have little or no control. These are social or natural events, such as war or earthquake, which overwhelm us and to which we must learn to adapt and change. Catastrophe can represents turning points in our understanding of reality, or, if we seem incapable of learning from our experience, we continue to fail in forming any appropriate response.  For instance, our despoiling of the environment is leading to disaster, and if continued it will force us to pay a heavy price. And war, when it fails to inform us of its meaning threatens endless repetition if not the very end of society. ERH also uses the term “politics” as representative of forces beyond our control.  The sheer inertia of public power is overpowering to the individual.  This is why the individual must associate with others, in one way or another in groups.

ERH contends that all religions derive from the basic needs to respond appropriately to our experience, and that experience can be categorized into these five elements. The power to face problems posed by these experiences is essential to  survival, and therefore the focus of all true religions. This is to say, all humankind have sought to control the elements of these five forces.  The forces that drive segments of our life he would also define as our lesser gods. For instance, sex, or hobbies, or our profession.  Our problem of survival, both individually and as a culture, is to become conscious of what controls all aspects of our experience, so that we can respond to that experience in the most efficacious way.   Through the ages, religions have identified and attempted to explain or control these five categories of forces.

Some religions emphasize only one or two of these elements, believing they are the most important.  For instance, the Hindu religion attempts to eschew the force of nature (mechanics), by ascending into a state of suspended animation, deep sleep in a way, so that the physical forces cannot reach the psyche.  Psychosomatic medicine is one manifestation of this power of the mind.  Some of the mystical religions maintain that mind is the ultimate power of the universe, and thus they believe in telekineses and the inhabiting of people’s minds by others (for which the antidote is exorcism).

An ideal religion would then be comprehensive, addressing all five categories, just as would a complete and balanced comprehension of reality.  The goal of all religions seems to be that which is necessary to create an ideal community, one where individual growth of human potential would be maximized.  This, of course, can only be realized by recognizing what humans “can,” but may not, do. But our sins seem to lie in not attending to what one “may not do” according to the morale commandants from “God’s authority.” Modern industrial cultures seem to err in believing that whatever can be done is all right to be done. The Nazis, for instance, in their plan for the “final solution” of the “Jewish problem.”

Since putting true community-building (as contrasted with community-destructive beliefs) into practice can be difficult if not life-threatening at times, religious power is intended to propel one to confront and overcome such danger. That is, to have the power to bring about change that will regenerate community, to empower willingness to sacrifice for our fellow humans,  and the courage to act accordingly when required.  These are what ERH calls religious decisions.  It is because to act this way requires extraordinary power that religion is a necessity.

In the succeeding essays, ERH expands on the meaning of these five “spheres” of experience and offers examples of how different religions emphasize one or more of them.

Lecture – 15

1.One of the biases of the Greeks was to settle on the notion that the father/daughter relationship was comprehensive; “…a typical pagan, settling on one divinity, one superhuman experience.” (p.2) Paganism then, in part means artificial isolation (from the whole).

**

The American, for instance, believes in the dominance of science in all things, in analysis, the business cycle, the standard of living, “…these are his gods.” (p.2)  People yearn for comprehensiveness for unity, but they don’t seem capable of paying the price to have it.  It is easier to fragment problems, to simplify them.

2.Since the beginning of time there have always been those who are satisfied with a less vital life (pagans) on the one hand, and those who sought the divine inspiration and genius on the other. One makes us smaller, the other, bigger. One only becomes “bigger” by way of sacrifice.

3.The lower life can see the larger life  only when it (the lower) kills it. “You can’t make the embryo understand how wonderful this young mother is.” (p.3)

The difference between atheists and believers is not that one is better than the other, but that the latter knows of the existence of something better than now exists. “Believers” sin and are faint of heart just as much as are non-believers. All men are born  equal, and then become unequal.

4.The purpose of the formal church is to codify the standards for life (not of living, but of life).  ERH predicts a backlash in America, because our technology has dominated our living, but we yearn for something deeper now. We can’t continue to drift through life acquiring property. We have outproduced the world, with our “fragmentary religion.”

5.Man’s tendency is to drift toward, or remain in paganism, polytheism, fragmentary religion.

The Christian creed is the trinity – the Father, and the Son, and the Holy Spirit.  The theology of the first 1,000 years was a belief in Christ as God (or in the representative of God the father), a belief in praising an “ideal” individual. God was met in the form of a suffering son who “…sacrificed for his enemies.” (p.8) In the second 1,000 years A.D. have been characterized by a belief in nature, in natural laws, in Plato and Aristotle. In seeking the order in the world.

This present millennium is coming to believe in God as the Holy Spirit, IN THE CREATION OF SOCIETY. “Spirit” in this sense means commonly held values, which we settle on by communicating with others.  It is the stuff of forming association.  God is thus called by 3 different names; God is more than one, he is Father, Son, and Holy Spirit. (Holy spirit is the understanding between people, that which allows for people to live together in peace voluntarily.)

[RF – THIS IS A DIRECT CONFIRMATION THAT ALL OF ERH’S THOUGHT IS UNIFIED BY THE IDEA  OF BUILDING  A GOOD COMMUNITY.)

6.In the beginning of the 3rd millennium (now) God is met (experienced) in the form of the group.

If you haven’t lived in a family group, if you haven’t lived in a fraternity, if you haven’t lived in college, in a youth camp in summer, you don’t know what the Spirit is….

The logical order in the church was, “I believe in God the Father, and God the Son and the Holy Spirit.”  But practical experience was, for the people who were Christened, “I love Christ.”  The second step was, “I have faith in the order of the world as created by the Father.” And now, “I have experienced the Spirit.” (p.9)

One could experience (vicariously) the crucifixion and have faith in Christ’s love.  In the second millennium, one experiences the application of the power of science and technology.

7.Having experience is crucial.  One does not convince by merely speaking. That comes later.  One must first provide experience. [RF – Given the present degrading of social forms, the family, the work place, war between nations, it is easy to conclude that one experiences precious little “Spirit” of cooperation. In short, there is precious little unity of peoples and therefore, we tend to worship its lacking (paganism). When one doesn’t see the whole, or experience the unity, one gets stuck in partial gods.]

One can experience love of friends and husband and wife, one can experience having hope for one’s children, and one can have faith in one’s country.  And thus have something useful to say to all three. Thus faith, hope, and charity (love) is also another description of the Trinity.  To speak out truthfully this way renews speech.  These three articles of faith engender eloquence.

**

8.THE NOTION IS THAT IN EACH OF THE LEVELS OF EXPERIENCE – mechanic, organic, work, love and catastrophe – at different ages and cultures, each of these is worshipped.  The worship of the golden calf and of the heavens was #1, the worship of organism, of investing life in all things, the animistic and totemic religions would be #2. Religious manifestations here would include living sacrifices to the gods, customs of behavior of people at each age they pass through, rites of passage, etc.

The church in this country is the most irreligious institution I know of. It worships just tradition for its own sake, because it doesn’t tackle your own mysterious changes. (p.19)

We experience all 5 of these levels, to get through life as best we can, to live it fully. It is the unifying power of the single God that represents all 5, which frees us from getting stuck in seeing life in distortion, as being dominated by only one or two of the five.  We, for instance, need to recognize the rhythm of the organic plain (#2), where we age and disintegrate and don’t try to stay young all our lives. We live in a succeeding set of stages and roles. The stages are both physiological and social. One cannot live (and be accepted) the same way at age 30 as one did at 20.  IN SUM, LIFE IS DESCRIBED BY CONSTANT CHANGES TO WHICH WE MUST ADAPT APPROPRIATELY. To enter one stage from another, things must be given up, and new experiences confronted.

9.Our mind seems to be a barrier to these changes.  We are not trained to see them. Our mind can stay at 20 which our physiology is at 40.  Rites of passage recognized as religious experiences remind us of the changes in our lives. Thus, courtship, marriage, becoming parents and grandparents, birthdays, baptisms, promotions and retirements, etc. necessarily change our roles, necessarily must be recognized, and this is another reason why religious ceremony is necessary.

Here is religion.  It isn’t so far away in any one, big heaven.  Religion overtakes you, or your irreligion…It just happens to us, that we undergo these changes.  And to have religion means to receive them with an open mind, and throw your mind into these changes, and to say they are important.  After all, religion is the sense of the important, of what matters…You remember, the first religion was: matter does not matter. The second religion is: physiological change does matter. (p.26)

Lecture – 16

1.Religious beliefs help us maintain some identity, a modicum of stability, unity and permanence of in our lives in an environment of a need for constant change.  We change during life stages, we change roles as we grow, we might need to change nationalities where it may be necessary to migrate, and most of all, we change during the day as we go from one basic life experience to the next. For instance, one hour we may be a scientist, the next a group member, the next, maintaining our health (perhaps doing exercises, or guarding our metabolism by getting proper rest).  In each of these different situations we respect a different god – the god of nature, of politics, the god of life (organisms), etc.

In the light of all of these changes, our religion helps maintain our personal sense of identity. Religion thus rises above the need to change, not getting stuck in any one mode. It frees us to change, helping us to live life more fully and fruitfully.

2.Each of these five elements of experience is essential and must be respected.  Work, the 3rd level, needs to be planned, organized, it is  mainly a daytime activity.  These first three, natural laws (science), organism (the rhythms of life like sleeping and eating), and work, (the getting of food, shelter and clothing), are all outside activities over which we have much control.  For instance, we have discovered many of the laws of nature and can use that power.

**

But our inner life, our strength to think new thoughts, our courage to make difficult decisions, our sacrifices for the group are where the creative and major power of religion lies.

3.Thus, we live in two worlds which are compatible, but different, and in some ways opposite.  In the outer world, more is better.  In the inner world, less is better (we must learn to depress the intoxication of acquiring worldly possessions beyond basic necessities). In love and politics lies our spirit, our faith that we can be self-reliant.

4.Religion and philosophy are opposite, one relating to the outer world and the other to inner world.  Philosophy is the result of being self-reliant and self-assertive. Religion (faith) helps us create by way of our spirit.

So the great question mark for every modern man with regard to this third phase is, “What can I do purposely?”…you can’t breathe purposely. You can’t sleep purposely.  You can only sleep when you no longer have purpose (for the moment).  (p.12)

**

5.ERH asserts that one cannot rely only any one of the five, not on science only, not on our health only, on work, love or on politics only. Not even on God only.  We need all of the above, and this is why we must be capable of change. By extension, ONE CANNOT RELY ON “SELF” ONLY. We need knowledge of nature, we need health, we need work, creativity, and politics.  “…the faith of a scientist consists in that he says, `There must be science’ before he can prove it.  That’s an act of faith.”

Thus, half the content of our acts is rational, and the other half is always based on faith. (p.15)

6.Creativity is high on the list of needs because we need to do things we have never done before, in which case we are never sure of the outcome of those acts. One of the definitions that separates humans from animals is that humans are capable of doing things where the outcome is completely unknown. No animal does this!

“…the experience of novelty is the highest religion of the human mind…As long as you are rational (only) you can never experience novelty.”  (p.27)

**

ERH goes on to suggest that purposeful living is important, but insufficient for living a full life.  When there is no clear way for action, one must simply change, get out of a situation, perhaps establish a new purpose in life – in order to maintain sanity.

…dead things cannot die.  The rationalist is always the deadest element in any family, and so he doesn’t fall sick.  But he, on the other hand, doesn’t live. (p.23)

7.The scientist acts as a god in that he can control things when he learns the natural laws that describe their processes. It is therefore natural and necessary to worship this power,and it gives one self-reliance (within that sphere of activity). But, because of this, it can never (or should never) be more than a partial worship.  (p.27)

Thus, in addition to self-reliance, we all know that humility, a recognition of one’s weaknesses and limitations (and the faith that one can change and persevere) is also a necessity. ERH believed that the propensity for Americans to over-value self-reliance is a sickness.  They (Americans) are stuck worshipping at the first mechanic (scientific) level of experience.  Hindus’, on the other hand, became stuck worshipping the second (organic) level. They believe divinity is achieved by descending into a deep sleep of meditation. SO THE TWO RELIGIONS ARE OPPOSITES, one all for action and purpose, one to eschew the concrete world. One worshipping conscious living, the other unconscious living.

8.Americans, because they worship science and purpose , and control, and willfulness – believe that they can “will” love and creativity and therefore be captains of their souls, and of spirit.  Thus, “…modern man has lost anything that transcends the first and the third sphere.”  Idolizing work, he fills the asylums or psychiatrist couches because he cannot understand his inner emptiness.  (p.33)

Lecture – 17

1.ERH coins the term “spheres of reality” to denote the 5 classes of experience. 1) At the outermost is dead matter, “the space world of stars…” of metal and water, Imperishable things. 2) Next comes the sphere of life, of all living organisms, of which humans are a class of animal – “animated.” 3) Next is the sphere of will, of work (which is to say organized time) – here dead matter (and lower animal life) is incorporated for human use. 4) One should make a distinction between those who create ideas and put them to use, and the worker (who is at level 3). Love, passion, sacrifice, and affection are the essence of level 4.

More on relationships: Each level is more important than that before it, in the course of human society- building. Level 3, (work and the power of will) is capable of combining levels 1 and 2.  Each of these levels is a religion. Those who seek money worship level 1, and everything (including people) is valued in terms of its monetary value. They make no distinction between the different levels. Prince Hal (Henry IV part II) just fooled around when a youth, but knew the difference between play and serious business – and was therefore great.

2.In sum, we all come under the spell of these minor gods, BUT THE IMPORTANT POINT IS THAT ONE KNOWS THE DIFFERENCE between the “spheres of reality,” and can step into the appropriate one when called upon. We pay a price for worshipping each god.  The lesser gods are serious business, because we always pay a price for whatever we worship.

3.In the 4th sphere, people are not seen as one of many, but as unique beings; “..everybody has a personal name.” (p.14) In the 3rd sphere, “workers” are seen as the same, a commodity, where one is the same as another.  In the 4th sphere, one cannot replace another – one’s wife or husband, friend, children, or family members are irreplaceable. This is the sphere of the personal, of love, of passion and compassion, and also the love for one’s work, or one’s country.  Species have a name (not numbers).  Thus, species represent a naming (by category) which is still contained in science (sphere 1).

4.People seem not to understand, today, that since the Renaissance  they have lost their understanding of what it means that every human individual has a different name. Our tendency is to grant everyone inside our own nation, or class, the right to have a different name, but “outsiders” we call by a classification; e.g. Germans, French, Jews, terrorists, etc, implying that it is all right to kill them. If they die in some catastrophe, we view it as a lesser loss. PEOPLE WHO DON’T SEE MAN AS THE CUSTODIAN OF THE EARTH care little for the extinction of plants and animals.

“…remember that where there is a name, there is affection.”…And people will blow their heads out and kill each other for a name…What’s in a name? …a love story…identity, belonging…being a member of reality.  (pp.18,19)

In the old times, after a child was born, it could be destroyed with impunity before it was given a name.

5.           …the condition of a name is that the person or the living being, addressed in this manner, turns around and comes to you, and knows that it is meant, or she is meant,…A name must always enter this field of force.  A name is that term or that expression by which somebody recognized himself, is spoken of, and is spoken to. (p.20)

Affection means that one name stands for all situations. To call someone something behind his back differently than to their face signifies a lack of love or respect. A name is physical, someone hears it.  Thus, names are just are real as things.

Names have consequences by way of addressing people with an admonition, or command, or response to them.

“Every religious person believes that God can hear.  Otherwise we couldn’t pray…IF a name suddenly is heard for which you have waited inside yourself, from the mouth of another person, you have entered a new sphere of life.” (p.23)

6.           The whole of religion is built around the sacrament of love-making, of declaring your love.  That’s why love is according to the Gospel is the greatest manifestation of the divine power…Romeo said, “it is my soul that calls upon my name.”….your real birth. That’s your soul that’s born at that moment. (p.24)

ERH goes on to point out that the difference between living in sphere 3 and sphere 4 is that, in sphere 3 (work and will power) one declares him/herself to be self-made; while in sphere 4, Romeo’s statement exemplified the essence of love, by hearing that someone else defines who one is by calling his name.

7.To be loved means that all past sins are forgiven, and we are born again – made over, so to speak.This gives one the power to face the world and in the end, perhaps the world, will call you by the same name.

We are made by the recognition of others.  This is what politics is vis-a-vis the 5th sphere.  Love is not necessarily agreeable, or perhaps not very often agreeable. One frets, strives to provide for, feels pain for those loves. But love is something one cannot escape.

Love saves you from despair in your own power to be recognized by the world. That’s the best definition of love I know….You need somebody who sees in you what you hope you can be. (p.29)

8.The 3rd sphere, that of the bureaucracy, will turn you into a rubber stamp. You are viewed as a commodity of labor, it encroaches upon your sense of self-respect. No doubt with only rare exceptions, the bureaucracy has an enervating effect on one’s soul.  This is why the 4th and 5th spheres are so important.  They provide an environment where one generates the power to rise above and beyond mere “work.”

9.Love “annihilates” the past because it is only interested in the future.

The lover calls you by your name as part of your future.  And enemies call you by your name as part of your past. So love makes the present. (pp.31,32)

Lecture – 18

1.To call the person by the right name – friend, lover, admiral, garbage collector – creates social order in the world; social order means communication, and the foundation upon which all association (community) is based. Organization (the 3rd sphere) tries to make all relationships impersonal. Passion, love (the 4th sphere) is just the opposite, and therefore more alive.

2.We live in a highly impersonal world. Politics, which is another word for organization (the 3rd sphere), MUST HAVE AN INDIVIDUAL’S NAME ASSOCIATED WITH IT. Organization intends to exclude the 4th sphere (love), and thus, it should never be loved. Respected, responded to, but not loved.

3.THE GOOD LIFE is peopled by a world which, as far as possible, lives in the 4th and 5th spheres – where everyone should be loved by someone and can be unique. This means a world where people are an end in themselves, rather than a means (as they are in spheres 1-3).

4.In the 4th and 5th spheres we really achieve humanness, as distinguished from mere animals. One can say, we begin to acquire a “soul.” WE ARE PART, OR HAVE A PART IN, ALL 5 SPHERES.

But the more careful you distinguish what part of yours has to stay within these rings, the more free you will be for being also a member of the fourth and fifth sphere, of where the man (person) only begins to exist. (p.7)

Where creativity and prophecy occur, engendering the ability to change toward growth.

5.The advent of almost all professions requiring specified formal educational certification is an example of over-organization. There is little improvisation. This is a manifestation of praise of method over content, for formal schooling is more important than demonstrated competence. Why do we channelize our efforts toward organization?

Because you don’t dare to love.  That’s too vulnerable, that’s too exciting, and too dangerous.  And there you can go wrong. (p.8)

All order is an attempt to be predictable. Predictable never leads to innovation, or creativity.  One cannot love a predictable person. The only person who is interesting is the incalculable person, because you can’t calculate her by any standards of organization.

6.Where one loves, truly, one quiets their desire for sex. ERH tells the story of the priest who was excommunicated and had to marry because his congregation could no longer love him. He had to belong to something.  What is love? SEEING ONESELF INSIDE A LARGER BODY. Love therefore is not idolatry – one should not idolize a husband or wife, or friend. But one has a common faith with those  one loves.

Love requires speech. We tend to get stuck on understanding communication in terms of the content of the message – BUT ANOTHER CRUCIAL ELEMENT OF SPEECH IS WHO SPEAKS TO WHOM.

All of these comments about love are an attempt to have you understand the implication of the 4th sphere. By “work” (3rd sphere) we incorporate dead matter into our lives.  By love we incorporate organisms, that otherwise die, into the life of the race. (p.14)  Love is therefore the process by which we really overcome death. One can save the United States from decay, one can save the environment, or reverse degeneration of the culture.

By their fruits you shall know them.  That is the important rule of the Fourth Commandment. (p.15)

6.The fifth sphere is “love to the square, or life to the third power. ..without spirit, no great nation can live.” (p.16)

7.The order of importance of these spheres is for a good reason. Dead matter is just there, we cannot avoid attending to the laws of nature. Metabolism likewise has a rhythm we must pay attention to or fall sick. Organization (work) represents production.  BUT WHAT TO DO WITH THESE METHODS? These are largely if not completely described by quantitative measures. The fourth and fifth spheres must guide and control all the others.  They are qualitative, unmeasurable by quantitative means.

8.Selectivity is the heart and soul of spheres 4 & 5.  It lies at the heart of love, of art, of all creativity. Every new theory demonstrates a different method of selecting elements of the universe, and therefore creating something new, or not-before noticed. Selectivity is qualitative, not quantitative.

To get one’s wishes does not improve one’s happiness, because it would reduce our power of selectivity.  Neither the 1st, 2nd, nor 3rd spheres have any criterion for importance (except within their sphere).  LOVE IS THE ONLY POWER THAT IS SELECTIVE.

9.When one lives in one of the spheres only, one confuses the richness of the others for its own. To differentiate the spheres is a selective process.  When we pass through different roles in life, youth, young adulthood, middle and old age, we have different abilities and privileges, as well as different metabolisms.  Life only becomes interesting by selecting, by making these distinctions, when we separate the generations.

Selection is not organized so much as it is recognized.  Therefore, to be selective is above and beyond mere organization.

The businessman can only speak the language of regulations, and of organization, and of production.  That’s not the language with which you bring people together. (p.29)

Lecture – 19

1.ERH sees a necessity to differentiate willful love from real love.  Willful love is want of eros, “just sex,” it requires no deep relationship; it is playing. Love for which one will sacrifice is deeper, but one has no control over it.   “…much nearer a disease than to a free act of your will.” (p.1)

2.Serious life has that aggravating quality of not being amenable to being called on at the beginning or off at the ending. Play, on the other hand, is completely controlled by will. The issues of serious life are necessity, beyond our choice.

True love is not luxury, it is the only way we have of overcoming death, and it is not sentimental.

3.These 5 spheres, in sum, describe comprehensiveness. They arise from our fear of change. These five spheres arise from a number of questions: 1) What does this change mean? 2) Where can I hold onto something that lasts, across this chasm of change? 3) Where am I before, and where am I hereafter? (That is, what reference points do I have in life and what do they mean?)

One leaves behind the sphere of mutual recognition and enters the sphere of fate, of war, of catastrophe.  The Roman god of catastrophe is Saturnus. And the Jewish god who raised Saturnus says, “I am he who comes.” (p.5)

4.Two conceptions of catastrophe: in one case, as the end of an era, and  the other, as the beginning of the next era, as a new beginning.

Our (American) initial response to deep change is that of fear; that is how the 5 spheres were derived – from our fear of deep change. Jews faced this fear and took the opposite view – that any change is better than the present tyranny. Doing God’s will is better than doing the will of the rich. Jews believe that today is not good enough.  Saturnus (Americans) believe that “the devil we know is better than the devil we don’t know.”

5.One can understand the temptation to believe that deep change will make things worse, (especially if one is rich at present.)  Satan is a metaphor for hatred of the uncontrollable.  Here we tend to value (worship) the ways of flesh rather than what is necessary to create a good community; it is the way of selfishness, of seeing ourselves and our logic as god.

6.It is easier to understand the first 4 spheres than the 5th, where questions of the existence of God arise. All personal and social life must bow to the natural power of the catastrophe, of war and pestilence, of earthquake, of incurable disease, of the atomic bomb and its consequences.

When these things happen, when blindness or crippling disease occurs, when war comes, all of our plans and loves and possibilities must change before such awesome force.  The earthquake means that the earth is still being created. Forces of creation continue. It means as well that the nature of humankind continues to evolve and our goal is to shape that evolution toward an ideal. A momentous insight, that earth and heaven are yet unfinished.

**

7.All of this means that our whole view of the meaning of different religions must be reassessed, because the universe is still in the process of being created.  It means that humankind can participate in this creation as agents of divinity; the creations of humankind are social, in community and  in all our roles.  WE THUS EXPERIENCE CREATION IN OUR LIFETIMES ALL AROUND US.

In this way, we become, or have the potential of becoming reborn, that is, with violent change.  At these times we must decide whether to live a selfish life, or be concerned with the future of the community.  One’s individual life, or the life of one’s small group associations, as against the rest of the world.

8.The question between the secular and the religious lies in sphere 5.  For instance, to judge that Russia and America together must address something bigger than their national survival. THE GREAT QUESTION IS, DO PEOPLE SEE CATASTROPHES?  How much of their experience do they understand!? (p.15)  Every sphere realizes change in different ways, but more importantly, how do different groups address catastrophe?

The Jews prophesy catastrophe far ahead, and imagine, today, “It smells fishy.” (p.15)  The Pagan down-plays future dangers. The Christian takes a stand in between and asks, “When must we let go?”

The Jews try to create a future, and have few loyalties to kings.  Pagans have too many loyalties and don’t wish to change.  Christians accept the notion of creating a social future “kicking and screaming in protest”, but seek, at the right moment to let go of the past customs.  Thus, the Biblical quotation “They have ears and don’t hear, and they have eyes and don’t see.” (p.16)

9.The primary source of meaning in our lives is fighting for a cause. One doesn’t know beforehand which one is likely to be the right cause – it depends upon what others wish to dedicate themselves to, what catches their spirit.  But commit we must, and sacrifice for the cause we must, in order to create a future, with no guarantees of success.

ERH likens the individual decision to a leaf on a tree, which asks, “Do I live my own life, or do I drop and fertilize the roots of the tree (of society)?”  There is so much of the universe that is non-living – dead – and so the life that exists, including humankind and the animals and plants, must fight for its existence. EITHER ONE SACRIFICES TO RENEW LIFE, OR LIFE WILL NOT BE RENEWED. “The solidarity of all life against all death — that’s the problem of level 5.” (p.19)

As long as one denies this question, and this battle for life, and withdraws, one denies the value of religion! It is humanity committing genocide. War is life against life, not life against death.

10.War is death against order, and against sphere 4.  War is a battle between associations, not between individuals – this is why war is in sphere 5 and against sphere 4.

The individual life is less important than the life of the association (unless, of course the association is too corrupt and not worth saving). Individuals must fight for the association (the nation) because it protects individual freedom in many spheres with law and order.

11.A CATASTROPHE forces us to confirm or restate the religious question. The problem is always the survival of the human race against a material universe. Religion  presents the standards for values that allow the race to become unified, otherwise it tears itself apart through anarchy. The problem, at first, is whether or not we recognize an impending catastrophe brought about by human action.  The environment, for instance. A blind society is caught off-guard.

Jesus was said to have addressed the Jews about the impending doom of Jerusalem, the destruction of the Temple.  He gave a warning and proposed a plan of change – to inform the Jews they must live in a different way. And he thus allowed the Jews to survive. He anticipated this destruction by 40 years.

12.Those who cannot anticipate such a future are enslaved within the first 4 spheres, and thus unable to see what is going on in the world.

Catastrophes require us to change our character, our ways of living, our hearts, our interpretation of what is important in life. Social catastrophe indicates an ignoring of social truths that unify society. Anticipation of the catastrophe creates time to adjust and formulate a plan, like providing for a life boat on an ocean- going ship.  THIS IS WHY PROPHECY WAS VALUED BY THE JEWS.

13.This change is not just an adaptation to a new circumstance.  It is much more fundamental to change one’s heart and character. IT IS A REBIRTH. The Fundamentalists seem, as they do in most of their philosophy, to misunderstand the momentousness of this act. To change is no light matter.  They seem to worship the forms and miss the meaning. Just as do scientists and others who are imprisoned in a misinterpreted faith, with no freedom to change their minds about its meaning.

To anticipate the emergency, as said above, is to prepare to meet and survive it somehow.

…sacrifice is, of course, nonsense if it isn’t the condition for surviving emergencies, catastrophes.  That’s what sacrifice is by definition.  (p.24)

14.There were attempts in the past to avoid real sacrifice in the form of change of habits by way of offering of human and other animal sacrifices on stone altars to false gods.  These cultures tried to find a scapegoat, “…to buy off the emergency.”  And certainly this seems to be basic to human nature – to attempt avoidance of pain by cheap methods.

15.One of the differences between Christianity and Paganism is that one says, “I must volunteer to sacrifice (as we all must).”  And the Pagan says, “Who, beside myself can I find to sacrifice?”  Agamemnon sacrificed his daughter, but Jesus volunteered himself.

16.Agamemnon claimed to believe in the gods, but his action belied that belief. Jesus proclaimed an impending catastrophe; it was not his speech, but his actions that empowered his belief.  He was willing to die for them – and thus impressed much of the world with the power of that belief.

Lecture – 20

1.We need to learn to climb up gradually from the first sphere of material things, to a sphere of more life, and eventually to conquer each sphere it by making it easily accessible. This is the importance of production, to rise above spending all our time consuming  and attend more to the quality of social life. THIS IS ANOTHER WAY OF STATING THE PURPOSE OF RELIGION. “…nature is that which has to be treated in the opposite way from all living beings.” (p.2)

2.ERH next tries to make the case for seeing our individual selves as a speck of dust, in contrast to the whole of humankind. Our individual lives are less important than the group; our language is inherited from them, our knowledge, customs, art, institutions – everything that makes us human has been given us on “loan” for our short lives.

The point is, individually we can overcome death  only by love, by dedication to others or to causes or professions – we continue to live in memories after physical death. This is accomplished by accepting and living by the requirements (laws), and fulfilling the purposes of each sphere. Each sphere represents a higher form of living from the previous, and all are essential to survival. Realize and recognize this as the method by which we achieve the fulfillment of humankind.  And of course, this is the purpose and method of religion.

3.‘The term catastrophe needs more definition.  In this essay, catastrophe does not include natural, cataclysmic events such as earthquakes.  Rather it derives from the Greek Katastrophein, TO TURN WHOLESALE. In short, it refers to social events, to the management of affairs.

4.Another interpretation of catastrophe is that it is something that is terrible to live through, but necessary for the future of the society or race. The English, French, American, and Russian revolutions were terrible to survive in the short term, but fruitful in the long run.  As was the Reformation brought on by Luther.

5.RELIGION IS THE POWER TO BOW, ALTHOUGH WE SHUDDER. (p.12)  “He is outside the religious sphere who denies this unity of the necessary and the terrible.” (p.13). Philosophy is on the other side; it attempts to emphasize what should and should not happen, what is logical.  It reflects the wishful thinking of fantasy, it assumes that it can command the forces that created the universe. The fantasy is that good can exist without evil, not recognizing that one always becomes corrupted with the power of knowledge and self-importance.

Religion, on the other hand, should force us to recognize the social catastrophes we have created and act to survive – and be willing to pay the price (of sacrifice) for solutions to social problems.

6.As one goes from sphere 1 to 5, the issue of time and timing becomes ever more crucial.  In the cosmos, a specific physical event is not important, say a volcanic eruption, which could happen at any time.  In sphere 2, the rhythm of the organism demands attention to “when-ness.” With the organization of work, time schedules are at the center.  With love, declarations are  effective only when they come at the right time, which can only be felt or intuited, but certainly not willed.  And finally, with politics, the right moment, the moment of opportunity, of truth,  all are crucial to success or failure.

ERH points out that for the last 400 years philosophers have constantly missed the importance of time.  The coming of Christ is that He came when the times were fulfilled. THIS IS THE NEW ELEMENT OF THE CHRISTIAN RELIGION, compared to other religions. (p.15)  In prophesying the catastrophe, one is being prepared to act at the right time.

Christianity comes into the world to say, “You have forgotten one element, the element of timing.” …The Christian problem is to recognize which (social) catastrophe is indispensable, and then to go into it by voluntarily stripping yourself of the privileges of the old order, which makes the break so much harder if the privileges still stand up. (pp.16,17)

French nobility, in 1789, offered to give up their privileges (August 4), but it was too late.  They had to have been given up before July 14 in order to influence a catastrophe. No sacrifice done under pressure is a real sacrifice. Jesus certainly could be called a political rebel; however, because he sacrificed himself on the cross before the catastrophe of the taking of the Temple, he was a “savior.” Nietzsche, likewise pronounced “God is dead!” Man must now become superman. He, likewise suffered persecution. Most people tend to function in the sphere below their best self, below the highest level of receptivity and understanding.  RELIGION IS PRECISELY FOR THE PURPOSE OF AWAKENING US TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER LEVEL.

When there is not a strong force driving us we tend to slide down into the next lower sphere.  [RF – In modern times someone put it this way, “We are as lazy as we dare to be!”

7.Love, spirit, inspiration “…I call “breathing together” – a shared sense of the world at that moment. Spheres 4 and 5 are to be looked up to because they leave us open to new experiences (and to growth through change). And, of course, these are the realms of religious experience. That which we look down on (spheres 1,2,3) are materials which we manipulate to higher ends (the building of community).  To recognize only  material reality is to omit the other half of experience. (p.23)

The religious experience, or religious issues, are where we decide in favor of action that moves us to spheres 4 and 5. These are the highest experiences of life, serving the community.

8.The very beginning of our lives is in an environment of speech from the authority of our parents, people we must look up to for all our needs. Only by being led by higher authorities do we live more in spheres 4 and 5.

A child is plastic, and can be trained into almost anything.  This is the positive aspect of being said to be “childlike.”  One can still learn.  To be childlike also means that we listen to an authority. Having learned what is believed to be necessity frees us to know where the realms of freedom might be, and therefore to be creative – to think for ourselves.

This means listening to the authority of the dead, of our ancestors. This, ERH claims, is why all religions embrace issues around death.  CREATING A GOOD COMMUNITY IS BY DEFINITION A PLACE WHERE COMMANDS (FROM REAL SPIRITUAL AUTHORITIES, I.E. ALL GREAT FIGURES IN HISTORY AS WELL AS OUR ANCESTORS) ARE LEARNED.  A good community is one that has the power to regenerate itself (teaching citizens to be plastic, changeable).

9.           …worship of the dead is simply a way of remaining childlike. (p.28)

To renew ourselves is the central problem of religion. It is the power to decide when to follow orders from “authority.” This is the only route to human survival and growth.

To lose parents means that we are no longer protected by someone else against death. Death projects survivors forward into a position of the next to die.  Perhaps for the first time, one is forced to face death and the question of what our living has led to.  RELIGION DEALS WITH THE DIFFICULT PROBLEMS OF CHANGE (all things in life resist death and change), empowering us to face down death.

10.An authority is, in part, someone who can face us down, who can criticize us with validity, who can laugh at us without our resentment.

Lecture – 21

1.Thought is inferior to speech.  The real power for humans is the words that are spoken to him(her) and what he speaks in response.  And the meaning of our speech becomes manifest only in our actions. We are forced to think because somebody speaks to us. (p.2)  “And that first layer of speech is an invocation, the name-giving.”

To speak to another person helps us know who we are. “Thinking is a storage room for speech…the first connection of men with real life is speech.” (p.2)

2.The society is in trouble when there are no great authorities to look up to, no Lincolns or Rossevelts – and parents to a great extent have lost their authority with their children, or the respect of youth in general. It is chic today for young people to eschew all authority. No wonder there is so much de-generation. NO DOUBT ONE OF THE CRUCIAL JUDGMENTS ONE MAKES LIES IN CHOOSING  A PROPER AUTHORITY TO LOOK UP TO.

3.One of the important elements of community is integrating groups with different approaches to thought and mores.  In order to include people in our circle, we must understand our own values and religion – only then can we learn to accommodate theirs.

Prayer means invocation, the willingness to learn from the other fellow who you are. (p.7)

The first layer of speech invokes names whose “tone” of utterance is ripe with meaning.  Hindu, Sanskrit, Old German, Latin and Greek are the full flowering of grammatical forms (speaking about something).  Syntax, as in Beowulf and Homer, produces long sentences.  Grammatics and syntax reduce tone and increase  “…estrangement from the people being spoken to.”

This is why the Protestant service has, as a backbone the reading of the Psalms, which intones fully by invoking the name of an authority (the lord).  All of this discussion exemplifies the need to look up to an authority as a fundamental religious act. ERH GENERALIZES THIS EXAMPLE TO THE FUNDAMENTAL NEED FOR AUTHORITY IN ALL SPHERES. This need seems to lie at the base of the method for growth.

4.ERH makes the point once again that all activities are specialized, e.g. the scientist, the government worker, the banker and carpenter and watchmaker —.  But, as humans, we also have other experiences outside our means for making a living.  ONLY RELIGION HAS THE PURPOSE OF BEING UNIVERSAL, of teaching us and giving us the strength to integrate all our experiences into our thinking so that we can understand interrelationships between ideas and one another..

The point is that invocations (names) are the universal language of mankind, because they are the one part of our language that really is universal.  And invocation is the bedrock of religion.  It is not music, as some assert, that is the universal language. And in spite of the fact that there are hundreds of languages, names are still their only universal element. Names do not belong to Latin or German. “The only connecting link between the Siberians and American is the name, Lincoln.” (pp.9,10,11)

5.The reason for the requirement of the Liberal Arts in college is the need to be in touch with the universal names in history. The names of Jesus, of Moses, of Buddha and Lao Tse exemplify universal names of religion.

In Christianity, Jesus invoking the name of our “father,” implies that he, and we ourselves, are mature enough to “take over” the management of our affairs.  And Jesus’ words on the Cross, “Father, why have you forsaken me?” is the first step in this invocation process. “Names are the way of incorporating ourselves into each other.” (pp.14,15)

6.The religious service requires that we recognize the ultimate power that created the universe. It is praising this power, allowing us to participate in it.  In THE ORIGIN OF SPEECH, ERH points out that the first language was that of invocation.  The first act of all cultures was to name all the animals, land, plants around them.  This was also an act of invocation. The rest of our language followed from this.

The importance of our feeling “attached” to the universe could not be more real. For only those persons who are attached to the community have any value to it.

…whom you praise — you can praise the gods, you can praise the spirits, you can praise anybody.  But you have to praise the power, otherwise it becomes oppressive. (p.18)

7.It is important also to understand that this praise is not because God or the universe is large. That is very abstract and perhaps unimpressive (to ERH).  But what is praised in the end is the enormous power to change and to change the world when we are included in the community. The Puritans exercised their power to reject powerful government in Europe, as did the underground that opposed Hitler.  WHAT WE ACTUALLY PRAISE AND GLORIFY IS THE POWER WE HAVE WHEN WE CAN UNDERSTAND AND ACT ON ALL 5 SPHERES OF EXPERIENCE.

The declaration of one’s faith is part of faith itself, as a declaration of love is part of love itself, as the declaration of war is part of war itself.  Great is what forces us to speak of it….this universe, it is so much alive that every one of us wants to participate by having his say about the universe. (p.21)

The point is, when we do not so praise the source of our power and thereby do “His” bidding, our alternative and strong tendency is to become self-centered.

8.The meaning of atonement lies in the fact that since God created life, and in order to live we must take life, we feel that we must give something back to pay for the gift of our lives. All primitive societies  made offerings, at first, of the most desirable parts of the animal.  In general, this is a symbolic meaning of the offertory in the church service. (p.24)

The most primitive phases of religion are incorporated in all of the parts of universal religions.  So aspects of this universality are praise, invocation, and offertory all of which go together, his place.”p.21-29

9.To invoke names, to include in praise of life is to speak to all living things. To speak only about them is to put them outside our living universe. No doubt this is why we seem so casual about exterminating animals and whole species with our technology. IF WE ARE TO BECOME THE STEWARDS OF THE EARTH and accept this burden seriously we must understand all our experience, including all life we can dominate. IT IS ONLY IN THE POWER OF RELIGION that this becomes possible, because by definition, religion includes all elements of the universe, not just some of its parts, like science, or our bodies, or our search for gold, or our institutional life.

Lecture – 22

1.The 5 spheres of existence are largely a matter of “looking up and looking down.” 1) Matter is just there, regardless of our existence. Beginning then with 2) organic, which is our “half existence,” 3) to work, and 4) on to loving and finally 5) catastrophe, we progress in stages of “aliveness.” The final sphere, catastrophe, calls for a necessity to be our most conscious of who we are in order to face the most difficult issues of our lives.

A catastrophe, that you have to be asked to stand up and testify for the truth, or that you have to die in battle as a soldier, or that you have to rescue somebody from danger or from oblivion, or that you have to sacrifice yourself for your children, that is not to be known before it has happened. (p.1)

Other stages are there most every day, and can be planned for and anticipated. Love, creativity, and catastrophe can be anticipated, of course, but not really planned for in the sense that we know when they will happen.

2.One problem is that catastrophe happens seldom. We get the feeling that we cannot or do not ever meet the extreme case. Another problem is that people tend to believe that #3, work, or those levels below (#’s 1 and 2, science (matter) and the half-alive experience of organism) individually may account for all our experiences.  In other words, the sphere in which one lives most hours of the day (work) tends to incorporate standards of explanation that dominate all life experiences.  PEOPLE OFTEN FIND IT DIFFICULT OR IMPOSSIBLE TO MAKE THE DISTINCTION BETWEEN WHAT IS LOW AND WHAT IS HIGH, WHAT IS MERE DESCRIPTION AND WHAT REQUIRES DECISIONS ABOUT SIGNIFICANT PARTS OF LIFE.

3.In sphere 5, “To embrace the darkness of your own death and to affirm the end of the United States, or to affirm that we mustn’t go to war now against Russia…This takes the acceptance of a will that is not your  and my will.” (p.4)  In other words, the will of higher authority – in these examples, either the creator of the universe, or our government, both of which must be higher than ourselves individually.

One may not agree with these higher “wills,” but one needs to accept them. For example, the Civil War general, Lee, didn’t wish for the defeat of the South, but he accepted it.

THE POINT IS THAT IN SPHERES 4 & 5, IN LOVING AND IN CATASTROPHE, WE HAVE NO CONTROL OVER THE SITUATION. WE DO NOT WILL IT, IN OTHER WORDS, AND TO THE EXTENT THAT WE DO NOT ACCEPT THOSE WILLS OUTSIDE US, WE OBSTRUCT OURSELVES.

4.It is precisely this decision, whether to recognize and accept as inevitable the will of powers beyond us, – to accept that which has already been decided – which is the question of religion.

…how many people will look up to catastrophe and love, to things that are bigger than your own mind, and accept the verdict that is expressed by the fact that some people love you and some people don’t love you, and that some certain states of the world come to an end, and certain other states begin?…Why couldn’t the South say, “Thy will be done” for 90 years?….95 out of 100, they pray for all other things except for the one thing they should pray.  That is, that their will be not now recalcitrant and obstructive to what has already happened. (pp.7,8)

ERH saw those who exclude themselves from the common will (or common need, or community interest) or common catastrophe, or “…any judgment of God,” as having a “black soul”.  To reverse this tendency one must first become conscious of how one has excluded oneself from this personal isolation from the world.

5.There is a necessity to accept this higher will, and ERH defines prayer as an attempt to find out what higher spirit should grip you. And, he points out, this spirit is always represented in only a minority. Individually, it grips one only occasionally.  What often passes for prayer, the asking for personal help or for some fortune to come your way, is not real prayer, but merely an expression of desire.  True prayer is an attempt to reach beyond oneself.  And one seldom, if ever, can understand it and should not assume to do so.  If one wishes to be a member of the “creative and fruitful minority”, it is  a necessity. Otherwise prayer is pointless, or “just nice.”

Any nation and any individual who does not pray doesn’t complete his existence, because he does not bring into his life those spheres for which he has to wait, or which have already passed away and which are not with him at this moment. (p.16)

Because we cannot always be at our best, at our peak, “…we must make room for the entrance of the big life. That’s prayer….Many people who think they don’t pray, do pray.” As one attempts to get into this higher spirit, “God’s spirit,” real prayer is always reciprocal. A Sufi prayer expresses this: “Wherever a man says, “O Lord,” he also says, “My Dear Son.”

Prayer creates an association. To bestow a title on God establishes that we are also a reviver of the spirit. A title is bestowed on us, as son or daughter. Thus, the essential of the prayer is the invocation (in both directions), just as one does in addressing his/her sons and daughters. And just the same as we bestow our love and wisdom on our children when we invoke their names.

To find out “who we are” to know ourselves we can be reinstituted in the universe, we find our reference point through this type of prayer. Saying son, or daughter, means the speaker is father or mother.

6.This grand “spirit” is the basis for building a decent community.  It is not building new churches, which is merely mechanical convenience.  It is not grand buildings that reveal a strong faith, but the spirit of the congregation.  No one is self-made, except in the 3rd sphere, that is, one can will to work.  But creativity, the power to love, the power to face difficult issues (catastrophe) comes from outside us.  In these endeavors one can never be “self-made.” Thus, functioning in spheres 4 and 5 helps create a future and lasts more than one generation.

7.One never learns anything unless one feels gratitude toward one’s teacher whoever that person might be – parent, school teacher, etc. Most of the student’s experience is immediately. to forget almost all of what is taught. Those who do connect with students have connected with the times, and taught students to do the same.

You cannot learn without a personal relation to the men (and women) from whom you learn. (p.13)

All teaching is guided by the spirit of the level of the 4th sphere, and lasts beyond one’s generation.

8.The 5th sphere deals with principles geared to last for ages, for hundreds of years.  “The civil war has made law for centuries.  Slavery has been abolished, for good.” (p.13)  Each of the spheres below the 5th is intended to last for shorter time periods – centuries,  generations, a year or more, days or months, – and matter, of course for eternity (out of time).

Prayer is a necessity for those who wish to avoid being trapped in a single sphere; those who wish to be creative; those who need the courage to risk; those who wish not to be trapped in their own “time,” as would, for instance, those who deny the civil war happened (many Southerners for 100 years, and some even now). “Prayer completes man, because he is always incomplete in the spheres in which he has to move.” (p.18)

9.One’s own purposes, which is to say one’s own will, is always smaller than the community issues, such as slavery or corruption in public office.  One cannot build a complete life out of one’s own will.  One must be open to one’s higher potential for the community.

Prayer is the power which links us with what’s really going on at this moment,……The power to find his surrender to a will that isn’t his own. (p.22)

Prayer is not something done in church…Prayer is a public act….your exposure to the power takes you back into full life.  And full life is neither public nor private. It’s just life. It’s open life….only work is done privately, because it’s under your own purpose…Religion is either cosmic, an attempt to get in touch with the cosmic order, or [it isn’t] religion.  (p.24,25)

Differentiating expressions, open from private, is important.  No event concerning the community is private. Prayer is not for private purposes despite popular beliefs.  “…in any lecture there is also prayer. (p.26)

10.Of course, in our everyday experience we intertwine private and public, with personal and public affairs, and therefore function within different spheres of experience.

In order to cover the 5th sphere there are certain institutionalized forms, “liturgies.”  Religion lives by liturgy, “…by forms in which man is all the time kept alert to the 5 challenges of his existence…liturgy is an attempt to make the power to change spheres available to you.”

All liturgy has 5 qualities in order to bring about this power within us. 1) It must oppose superstition about the natural world. 2) It must say that any catastrophe can be a blessing in disguise (e.g. a crucifixion can lead to a resurrection). 3) One passion must not obstruct the rise of another passion. No passion must be self devouring. Otherwise one would go to pieces. 4) It must empower you to give up one type of work for another. For instance, Judaism tries to emphasize that men’s will must have an end, that even the greatest purpose of men may need to be abandoned. 5) Liturgy regarding the organic sphere  (the Sabbath), is to remind us that we always move out of our natural rhythms of life, and must slow down and get back into them.

…you can see suddenly perhaps that the liturgy is very elaborate and very eloquent. A liturgy works itself into you by the calendar.  Liturgy comes to men not by a system of thought, and not by books, and not by philosophies, but in the form of taking you through experience over the years…an attempt to make you participate in the full life of the human race when you are in great danger of being sunk into one of these smaller grooves. (of a single sphere). (p.30)

11.Any acts that cause us to risk our lives are acts for the public good, but are logically inexplicable. We expect uncritically that all people should act humanly toward us, should assume we have rights to live.  Where does this come from?  It is God’s law.

All religious acts are stupid in the eyes of the men of the world…If you are not stupid you will consider your own advantage…To rescue another man’s life,…is not clever…But the whole problem of religion is: is your purpose good enough? (pp.32,33)

Lecture – 23

1.What is “true” is at first agreed upon by one or two, then it may be recognized by a few more, then, eventually everybody.

This meeting will deal with animism, then the astrological (sky) religions, then Greek, then Jewish, and finally Christianity for the next 5 meetings.

2.Animism assumed that not only all plants and animals are alive, but also things like water, stones (such as the  remnant is the Holy Stone in Kaaba, Mecca).  Animism is a religion that attempts to address the issue of “aliveness” (vitality).  It does not deal with the great gods of catastrophe, or of a means to rationalize, “or recognize that which we have to give to the golden calf,…,”   or idolizing of the sun, the moon, or iron & steel. . It was an emphasis on the first experience of life, that is, staying alive.

I must warn you, that it isn’t primitive, but it is only limited, which isn’t the same…you and I must be animists.  But we cannot be only animists.  So my criticism of this first tradition of the human race, animism, is not that it is wrong, or primitive, but that it restricts the universe’s perceptions, and our means of dealing with the universe..,  (p.3)

ERH warns that we must not supersede basic religious ideas, rather we must advance to take one step of development at a time, while advancing, retaining the previous concept. In this case, the first idea is that life is one,  and  “…primitive people had this glowing desire to unite with all life.” (p.5)

3.This notion of inclusiveness is important, the declaring of something being either alive or dead, vital or nonvital. When we speak, we use the terms “is” or “was,” betraying the faith of our (ERH’s) belief. “We either consign a present and future to the individual or group or idea, or we consign it to history.”  [RF  – Consigning to history means, pronouncing it dead. ]

Defining “Heaven and Earth” will also help our understanding of “aliveness.”  Earth is all things that can be measured and counted by mathematics. ERH asserts:

Heaven from now on …in the New and Old Testament, and in the traditions of mankind is a membership inside that world in which everybody has its own name.  And earth is everything which can just be mentioned by counting it, by analyzing it.  (p.8)

4.The enigma for animists was that, while animals and plants were alive, they had to be taken for food.  So their response was to sacrifice in their own lives for this gift from the gods. [ RF – Interestingly ERH cites the example of the WW II, when the government of Germany had to be destroyed, our leaders killed or imprisoned, then we sent CARE packages to help the German people – as a modern version of animistic sacrifice.) Likewise, in primitive times, they had to supplant or increase the plants and animals taken so that there would be a future for the tribe.

5.ERH points out the weakness of modern science lies in its inability to help us understand our experience. An example is that our encyclopedias define animism as a philosophy (meaning something outside our experience rather than part of it, everyday). The issue today persists, “What is alive and what is dead and what do each of these mean?” All through our lives we cannot avoid making this distinction.  ERH goes on to give a number of examples  of religions today that are largely based on this distinction between life or death. Hinduism, for instance, addresses the problems of living by seeking divinity, nirvana by way of rejecting materialism in the form of deep and persistent meditation. Similarly, in the USA, our values focus on dead matter; acquiring property, on organization and work, on poisoning our environment with pollution.  What is all of this other than preferring life-destroying actions, to being stewards of the earth!?

We live, for the last 70 years in an atmosphere of prohibiting life…of saying that life is better when it is predictable, organized, coordinated, registered and measured, measurably under control…(p.15)

…our religion of America, that no life is better than life…as soon as you want to control life, you deprive yourselves of life.  Because by establishment…life is that which cannot be controlled.  And death is that which can be controlled…The pursuit of happiness will always lead you to keep everything under control, because happy is that which you think happy now.  And bliss, or life, or reality, or however you call your real destiny, is that which happens against your will and desire only later showing you that it was a blessing in disguise….The power to realize newness, you remember, we called the power of religion. …Now the animists were able to realize newness, because these migrating, migratory tribes learned new climates, new animals…(pp.16,17)   [RF – emphasis mine.]

6.To recognize newness means that one is forced to decide that which must be revered as indispensable and that which can be pruned, cut out. In America and other industrial countrys the advent of pollution means that water and air and clean soil are of little importance. It is only a minority that recognized who recognize these are essential resources that must be regenerated.

Heads of large organizations as well as a majority of our elected officials the world over, through short-sighted greed, allow this condition to prevail over the life and welfare of the community. WHAT COULD BE MORE OF A MORAL AND RELIGIOUS PROBLEM?!

7.In sum, ERH points out how fundamental to all religion, yesterday and today, the assumptions and guidance of the principles of ANIMISM are.  Animistic tribes recognized  two fundamental human experiences, the differentiation between live and dead things, and the consciousness of reality through naming.  For example, ornithologists working in New Guinea after WW II identified 137 species of birds, and were amazed to find that the natives had names for all of them. Primitive prayer “…very often only consists of names…giving a string of names under which you place yourself….There is nothing more real than something you have to give a special name.” (p.21)  They give us orientation – reference points to who we are in the universe.  [RF – Throughout many of ERH’s essays he emphasizes the importance for us of having reference points by which to judge the nature of some situation, so that our response will be appropriate.

8.Naming creates our consciousness of reality; it also “…completed creation.” It recognized the right of those 137 species to exist.

The recognition by animists of distinguishing living from dead is equally fundamental. The recognition is two-pronged, recognizing the dead ancestors and incorporating their wisdom into the present and future. These profound insights represent a judgment as to what should be preserved from the past. Anticipating the yet-unborn, recognizes that a future must be established for our children.

You cannot meet in any town in America anybody who will make a sacrifice for the year 2050, because nobody in this country believes that this is his concern…That’s why the government had to take over all the holdings and conservation, because no individual cares for the future of the soil of this country….And therefore America has no future. (p.27)

But the animists of past times would know this!  Thus, they knew the problem of reproduction.  ERH goes on for several pages giving examples of how important the issues of production and reproduction are.  Not uncontrolled population, but continuing the life of the species on this planet.

9.Great people are a species by themselves in the sense of examples which, if followed, will help the future of civilization.

Lincoln is a breed completely his own…he is the most religious person of the 19th century in America and that he didn’t belong to a church.  You can’t read his second inaugural without feeling that he has a new revelation.” (p.30)

A saint is somebody who must be succeeded.  And in the saint you have the original hero of antiquity…the animistic religion, is still vigorous and we can’t be without it.  The animistic religion expresses itself by creating species. (p.31)

10.   We have no instance above religion which can tell us what it is to be a religion. You have either a religion of the Devil or the religion of the living God.  That is, you have a religion of fruitfulness, or a religion of destruction.  (p.32)

Joseph McCarthy and Hitler represented religions of destruction!

Lecture – 24

1.A theme throughout this and other essays is that modern social science has not presented us with anything close to an adequate power to interpret our experience. BUT CONTRARILY, RELIGIONS, BEGINNING FROM PRIMITIVE TIMES, HAVE HAD AS THEIR FOCUS PRECISELY THIS, and have accumulated much more wisdom, much more comprehensiveness than our social sciences (which are stuck in sphere 1 mainly).  Albeit, all religions are incomplete in the sense that they emphasize different aspects of the necessities defined by the 5 spheres as he describes them.  The animists, for instance, got the idea of wishing to regenerate their tribal life (forever), but didn’t realize that change must occur, and as new events challenged them some decisions needed to be made as to what should be kept and what should be consigned to the past.

2.ERH speaks often in these lectures of the importance of the group, of the species, but little of the individual, except to point out that the group is always superior to the individual.  [RF – In other essays he qualifies this statement by pointing out the shortcomings of the Russian and Nazi states, which sacrificed the individual, supposedly, for the state. Dictators left out the restraints that religion puts on all human behavior, such as personal sacrifice for the welfare of the group. Something which the “leaders” of devil states failed to apply to themselves.]

The importance of the individual is recognized by Rosenstock-Huessy, but individual importance gains its status in terms of what it does for the group, and as a representative of a group.

3.Meals are, or should be first, religious ceremonies exalting the group.  One doesn’t eat alone normally, but all must have food. Celebrations around meals give thanks for sustenance for the day. Ulcers, over- eating and drinking result from too much eating alone.

The life of the spirit is also part of community, which by definition is a group of people with similar values who wish to live together in peace, voluntarily.  Celebrations, meals, etc. exalt this spirit of the group.

Church buildings are nothing more than a pile of stones, if they are not under-pinned by a common spirit of its members.  He points out that in any situation the meal becomes an opportunity for communication, where “…the unity of humanity begins to sprout.” Where one can make friends, where the foundations of humanity can be revealed. The meal can be an opportunity where the catastrophe of not having food can be felt, at least intuitively. If one cannot understand these things, one  “…cannot understand the ritual of the whole Christian world, as to Communion supper…the sacrament of the Communion makes Christianity into more than an accidental club.” (p.16) [RF – Certainly people working together may accomplish much of the same.]

4.Progress is not mere change. It is where everything from the past that remains a necessity to perform is retained, in addition to the new necessities. Mere change is running in circles, if what is lost is equalled by what is gained. New inventions, and technology which goes today for progress, is a blind alley. Mere change can be destructive if the implications of the change are not thought through.

The future is built upon the vital foundations from the past. In addition to imagining what the world must be like in 2050, we begin to plant the seeds of actions which will realize that dream.

5.Animism emphasized the 2nd sphere (through maintenance of life) , and the 4th sphere (through loving relationships of the group).  The religions of the 3rd sphere were an attempt to break out of the “organic” 2nd sphere and into the universe.  Thus the “sky” religions, those who worshipped the laws of nature first revealed by the cyclical movement of the stars. Contrary to popular belief, the primitives and the “sky” empires never worshipped the sun and moon.  The stars, sun, and moon didn’t die, but always returned.  They were eternity.

Where as the animists worshipped life, and life was unstable, it always died and was unpredictable, the sky empires (Egypt, Mayan, Inca ) worshipped that which was stable and everlasting. This was the dead matter of the universe whereby laws could predict events and calendars could be created.  The two religions, the sky empire  and ancestor worship, were opposites.

…man puts his foot outside his family life, his tribal life, his bush and jungle life in which he was only interested in living things, and tried to look away from dead things. (p.25)

6.With physics, man is master of dead matter. The sky empire or calendar religions were the beginning of this utilization of knowledge of natural laws. Animism created superstition regarding the live sacrifices.  The sky religions eliminated this need and erased these superstitions. They created celebrations for the entire year; animism had only a six month calendar (half the year inside the hut and half outside).

Furthermore, the star religions lead to permanent settlements. “The great idea of the Incan is settlement.”  These led to a faith in the power to develop and order the use of multiple, incorporated communities, expanding  the limits of the outer world (as contrasted with the world of the single tribe).

Lecture – 25

1.To summarize, Religion empowers humankind to instate ourselves into our real home, the community on earth and the life experiences which must be understood and mastered (in so far as we are able to respond). The first step of this method is to recognize powers beyond us that possess authority and wisdom for guidance; ultimately, the power that created the universe (God).

The second step is to place ourselves inside the basic spheres of experience that humankind must confront. These are:

a.Organic sphere, whereby we recognize the rhythm of our metabolism, breathing the air around us, digestion, rhythms of natural physiological functions in general, (rest – healing, shelter, clothing)  adapting to the rhythm of the seasons.

b.We must attend to consciously taking action to survive.  This we can will (or control), our need to work, where we are capable of gaining control over the lower living and dead matter (sticks and stones) of the universe. For instance, the producing of food and  other necessary goods and services needed for physical survival.

c.The sphere of free association, friendship, love, passion, and affection describe the next higher stage.. Love is the power which leads us to sacrifice for something or someone outside ourselves. We are capable of selflessness toward true friends,  our family, our country, our profession, causes. This is the binding force of all vital communities, necessary for survival.

d. Finally, a recognition that we live under the  impact of tragedy, both physical (such as earthquakes, or floods.) and social, (such as war).

2.The first religion revered the organic, the perpetuation of life (one’s self and other life). The ritual of the communion supper represented this concern, recognizing life is everywhere, that it needs to survive off other life and therefore must destroy life. In animism one believes that higher life can take  only life-forms below it, while preserving those species (thus, it is sinful to kill for sport or eat your own species). The aim of animists is to concentrate on the evolution of higher life. JUSTIFICATION FOR TAKING ANY OTHER LIFE IS WHAT IS NECESSARY TO PERPETUATE THE  SPECIES.

ERH points out how, in modern times, we have lost this reverence for lower life, in the sense of conservation of life forms. Pollution, over-grazing, over-plowing, poisoning of air, water, and land, destruction of animal and plant environments, is the evidence around us.

3.Another religion was the so-called astronomical or sky religions, which sought to describe the eternal cycles of the universe, and eventually the laws of nature. Their momentous discovery was realizing some order in the universe. They worshipped the eternal, which they observed were the cyclical nature of the stars. God did not reside “in any space,” however, but was the eternal cycles.

As an aside, ERH asserts, it is a misreading to say these people worshipped the sun and stars.  It is also a misreading to suggest (contrary to common Catholic belief)  that God is “in heaven.”  Jesus, St. Augustine, and Paul said that God resides in the hearts of humans.

The sky religions are considered great because they try to reach out beyond immediate human experience to comprehend the universe and place humankind in some relation to these. Egyptian, Mayan, and Incan are examples; they built temples intended to be a focus point for the universe. In their astronomy they counted in terms of epics, of centuries and millennia. The concurrence of the Pleiades they discovered to be 1460 years. Their observations spanned three cycles, from 2780 BC, to 1320 BC to 140 AD, each cycle is an “eon” and they discovered the solar year of 365 days. Modern industrial society, especially America tends, to look at experience in terms of short cycles, weeks or months.

This penchant for seeing only short timespans, adds some fuel to the destructive belief that pollution doesn’t matter, or that a clean and regenerating environment is too costly.  This bird-in-the-hand religion destroys the future for a community; but long time-spans are bad for business.

4.The sky religions believe in a world without end. Christianity, on the other hand, does not believe this, and ERH claims that the King James version of the Bible is wrong in using the term “world without end.”

The real belief of any Christian and any Jew is that the world has seen many ends and many beginnings, that there are eons.  And if you say “world without end,” you abolish the power of God to end and to begin. (p.19)

5.Herein lies the difference between the sky religions, great an advance as they were, and Judeo-Christian beliefs.  While science discovered star tracts, it has nothing to say about what all this (the laws of nature) mean to life on earth – other than, of course, the impress of natural cataclysms and our knowledge of growing food and shelter.

Many of the churches in America today do not distinguish between these differences in religions.  The Animist wants to keep in touch with what is near and dear; the sky/scientific religions wish to keep track of what is distant and eternal.  In all these religions God created the heavens and earth and established laws eternal, and humankind were the pawns reacting to these powers. THE PROBLEM WITH THESE GREAT RELIGIONS OF SCIENCE WAS THAT THEY FAILED TO BE AN INSTRUMENT TO ANALYZE HUMAN SOCIAL EXPERIENCE.  THEY WERE OVER-RUN BY  HORDE OF MEN. Egypt has been ruled by foreigners since 900 BC. (p.30) These conquests brought to light the unresolved problem, “How were people of different religions to live together in peace?”

6.The Judeo‑Christian approach came along to address this problem and incorporated humans in the continuing creation of the earth, asserting that humans could be creative in terms of emancipating human society  from iron laws of nature. What is more, that humans could change.  That humans, in contradiction to the eternal laws of nature, were the repository of God on earth in the sense that they could change, could think for themselves and participate in creation of society.

Clearly humankind, to survive, needs a reverence for life, including social life,  and it needs science. Our experience would also tell us that we need to learn to live together, voluntarily in peace. The Greeks believed (see the lectures on Greek philosophy): 1) in the superiority of men over women, 2) in the necessity for war (peace was not possible), 3) in creativity as engendered by a homosexual relation between men, and 4) progress in social conditions was not possible – life was controlled by the gods and social life occurred in terms of endless cycles already experienced.

Judeo-Christian religion believes the opposite from the ancient Greeks. the great problem now, in addition to that solved by Animism and science, is to evolve human society to take charge and be responsible for our behavior. We must learn to live together in peace, lest they destroy themselves, and all other life on earth.  In sum, 1) all religions evolved to solve a problem related to human survival.  There are inadequate religions. 2) A vital one, which Rosenstock-Huessy believes was the intent, all along, would be Christianity, which represents an inclusion of the bedrock of all religions and is thus, universal.  The other religions failed because they stood for an incomplete set of guides for the maintenance of society.  [RF -Was Jesus trying to say all along that, “It is all of the above.?”]  3) One can conclude, looking around the world at social conditions, that all alienation, including shooting wars, are religious wars.

TEACHING TOO LATE, LEARNING TOO EARLY – 1940

Lecture given to faculty at Dartmouth College
Chapter 8 from, I AM AN IMPURE THINKER, Argo Press
Feringer notes
Notes started: 7-7-97
Last edited: 11-98

1.The goal of the author is to make three points: 1) The time has come to build a science of timing, of which teaching and learning are its principle elements. 2) Society will be (is) doomed without the timing of teaching – we suffer every day from “brain erosion.” 3) Every individual must be trained in the importance of timing in all of his experiences – the greatest sin of which is being either too early or too late.

[RF – ERH assumes that learning means understanding some experience, taking it into one’s deepest values and being willing and capable of applying that learning in the right situation.  `Applying’ means acting in an efficacious way, at the right time.  The opposite definition would be that learning is achieved by scheduling and teaching by the clock. This is artificial and ineffective, for the most part. One can schedule rote exercises, but not understanding.]

2.A convincing anecdote makes a case for the importance of timing in teaching. A town has prevented its own destruction during the Peasants War in Germany.  It anticipated the possibility of a social breakdown from corruption in the Catholic church 40 years before the Reformation. Town leaders entered into a self education program promoting continued social peace between diverse religious groups. After the inception of the Reformation (1525 A.D.),  marauding bands of religious zealots roamed the countryside, destroying towns in their path. THE RESULT OF THE EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM WAS THAT THE TOWN WAS ONE OF THE FEW THAT SAVED ITSELF, BECAUSE IT WAS UNITED IN ITS BELIEF IN  RELIGIOUS TOLERANCE. IT WAS CAPABLE OF DEFENDING ITSELF AGAINST THESE BANDS.  An important fact of this successful educational program was that it broke monastic rules of that time.

3.Academe faces a crisis today. Curricula is peripherally relevant to today’s needs, and teaching depends mainly on rote memorization.  The social meaning of studies is largely ignored. THIS IS DISASTROUS IN THE STUDY OF SOCIAL SCIENCES.

Objectivity is its god.  It would treat all realities as things external to the mind, things in which we as thinkers have no roots, which may accordingly be touched, weighed, measured, and manipulated without reference to common destiny in which we and they are jointly bound.  This may do for physics.  It will not do for human society. (p.93)

4.Social time is created by humans, not a given datum of nature, and lasts according to our making.  It must be won and preserved by vigilance, “…otherwise our `present’ is starved and distorted.”

5.The past and the future are an “abyss” before and ahead of us.  [RF – I believe he means, by this statement, that our penchant to think mainly in terms of the present consequences of our decision-making is destructive to both ourselves and to the community.  Sacrificing discomfort in the `present’ is always the price one pays for efficacious consequences in the future, for both ourselves and for our communities.]

6.When we speak, we are not only speaking and acting for ourselves, but we are also acting for others.  One is a father or mother, a representative of a group, a son or daughter, a friend, a community member.  ALL THESE FORCES MUST BE BALANCED IN ADDRESSING IMPORTANT DECISIONS.

7.We are able to become more than thinking animals; but in order to rise above this animal state into which we are born, we must communicate with others.  Our ability to do this rests on our willingness to speak the truth and on the preservation of language.

8.As teachers we not only speak for ourselves, but also in the name of great causes through history. Socrates, Jesus, Newton, Abelard, Billy Mitchell sacrificed in order to speak the truth to improve the community. Today these lessons must be passed on. “Man’s dignity is not in producing private opinions, but in timing public truth.” (p.95)

9.Truth must come at the right moment, then the words take on full meaning.  Otherwise, lacking such a timing element, they are abstract, not vital, as seeds fallen on barren earth. Truth becomes concrete (demonstrated) only at that moment. “For these reasons teaching involves the central problems of timing.” (p.95)

10.Any decision, especially teaching, is preparation.  Often it must be too late, because it occurs when we have seen the consequences of action; certainly this learning moment is a pregnant, but only for future use.

Just as often, teaching is too early because we must anticipate – it is “life in advance.”  Facts and anticipation are thus the paradox in timing.  Facts are understood by analysis from past events.  Anticipation conversely is entered only through love, faith, and hope.  Concern for students, faith that the knowledge will prevent harm, move one forward, and hope that the right consequences will evolve.

11.Facts are past events, and are “poison” when their occurrence is not motivated by some problem that must be acted upon to create a future, i.e. when they are “…treated as an agenda.”

12.Learning from others is borrowing (from others’ experience), dead knowledge until brought to life by our applying it (thereby bringing it back to life). Until then, knowledge is only words or formulas.  And when we learn from others, we owe them gratitude for not making us re-invent that reality (completely). We lack enough time to learn what we need to learn as it is. And, of course when one does not learn about reality, one must re-invent it – like reinventing the wheel.

Thus, there must be a close relation between thinking and experience. To separate these is disastrous.

13.Gambling is the short-term substitute for faith. (p.99)  ERH tells the story of a talented son of a missionary who left the studies of his ancestors for a profession in sociology and human relations. But, because modern social science utilizes the methods of the physics – incomplete for understanding our experience.  What was his fate in these studies?

He often feels like going crazy, his big powers being wasted in separation between his sociological head that classifies everything like a botanist, and his living soul and body that must love and hate.  …He tries to analyze himself with modern psychology to find out what is wrong.  OF course nothing is wrong with him; he is sane in a madhouse. But he is overcome by his academic environment that he denies himself his own rescue; he could jump to freedom by serving in a more than personal and more than “objective” cause …(p.99)

The solution of course is to connect the thought with action in service to the community.

14.We tend to teach that no relation between learning and obligation and practice exists.  Other examples in the text testify to this gap between learning and meaning and obligation and fulfillment (living).

We, in teaching, tend to destroy or punish those who live in, or for, the future.   Individuals are usually somewhat self-denying, but groups are ever more greedy in their quest for power. [RF – or is group life the dark side of good individuals?] In groups we tend to be more self-serving. Such indulgence can only be rectified by following goals beyond ourselves.

15.How does one live beyond one’s self-interest?  By the realization that civilization, or our community and ourselves, or successors, will perish unless we act for goals beyond ourselves.   By uniting both “production” and “reproduction,” by connecting facts with meaning. As teachers we must refuse to bury students in an avalanche of facts.

By resting, and reflecting, a willingness to experiment and risk for a good cause we reach  understanding of the subject matter.  Separating fact from meaning creates two types: 1) the prodigy who knows numerous facts [RF – R.M. HUTCHINS coined the phrase, “knowing everything about nothing of importance.”] And, 2) the playboy who can’t take any learning seriously. Both types fail to contribute toward a future.

16.THE PURPOSE OF EDUCATION IS SURVIVAL, TO PREPARE ONE TO OUTLIVE AND GROW THROUGH EACH STAGE OF LIFE, AND MOVE ON TO THE NEXT.

As academics, we tend to become stuck in the stage of disbelief. Our revolt against an overbearing religion has led us to this.  But after several hundred years of this disbelief people are longing for some meaning in life, something more stable than ever-changing social norms.

Sans more fundamental beliefs, one degenerates into despair.  One cannot be an atheist forever. It is useful only for transitions between stages when useful at all.  Social survival is based on the reformation principle, to think anew about one’s beliefs, to be re-deemed. [RF – By this he means to renew the way basic truths must become manifest.]

17.There are basically three life-stages for people; as children, as adults, and as elders. Each has an essential role. The elders reflect wisdom and prophecy – reminding others of the standards to be maintained.  They are suited for this role because they no longer need to compete for power, or sex prowess, or status.

ALL EDUCATION SHOULD PREPARE STUDENTS FOR THESE THREE ROLES; THE ADULTS GOVERN AND FIGHT THE EVERYDAY BATTLES, AND THE CHILDREN MUST ACCEPT THE OBLIGATION TO BECOME PREPARED FOR FUTURE ROLES. The chief goal of all education is to aim toward preparing elders, regardless of the fact that only a few are chosen.

18.Colleges cannot degenerate into trade schools for people to maintain “systems” (maintaining institutions like medicine, manufacturing, education, etc.)

Students must be taught to have an expectancy of a better society, to be taught facts in the context of meaning and use them to that end.

19.The Enlightenment of 1750, with science as a dominant ideal, persists today and creates no social expectancy. No motive to improve society, or for “…a great miraculous, surprising future.”  Expectancy carries one beyond mere doubt, beyond burnout and despair in middle age.

Education must therefore give promise to have a better life as a fruit of knowledge. Life is more desirable than any abstraction, any ideal, any separation of mind from body (i.e. the separation declared by Descartes).

20.Our education today fails to produce genuine elders.  The growth and anticipation of students is stunted; as a consequence it fails now in preparing them to see through quacks and tyrants, whatever their form.

Quackery and tyranny is more often than not subtle and refined in its ability to convince people to give up their power. The only antidote to such a condition is the elder, who warns and prophesies.   Every student cannot become an elder, of course, but he/she can learn to identify one, and be instilled with the courage to identify wisdom and to speak out the truth.

The antidote to facts is “fienda.” The cultural lag represented by teaching, through which society has to assimilate each newcomer, can be balanced by crediting out students with being ancestors of as many generations to come as have gone before.  When we look at teaching from the end of man, from the regeneration of the universal order, we shall treat the student as the founder of centuries. (p.108)

21.What present problems must students be taught to solve?  We must teach them what the ultimate end should be, and what a decent society might be as a standard.  Teaching students their obligation to speak out as determined by that end. THE END DETERMINES THE BEGINNING, in the present. Facts come to life when used to renew society.

We must teach about the dreams of our ancestors, and what is yet unfinished. We must revivify the commonplace, such as that the lack of justice leads to gangsterism.  THIS TAKES GREAT EFFORT AND DEDICATION, AND OFTEN RISK.

22.Three levels of reality must be taught students so that they properly exercise their powers:  1) about “things,” over which we humans are superior; about the ethics of manipulation of things in nature,  in other words, about science, its limits and its purpose.  2) About that which is our equal, our fellow humans, with whom we must learn to  respect and cooperate in order to survive. Achieving meaningful agreement requires an exercise of power “with,” rather than power “over.”  3) We must learn how to deal with those things which have power over us, (natural catastrophes, famine, earthquakes). Perhaps most of all, we must teach the power to instill in ourselves courage and the will to act appropriately. Finally teaching that as we are mortal, and to expect death as a part of nature, but also the difficulty in surviving the change in stages of maturing.  OUR PRESENT CURRICULUM REPRESENTS ONLY THE FIRST OF THESE THREE.

23.Passage from one stage in life to another is a wrenching transformation, a spiritual phenomenon.  Transformation is empowered by two forces, expectation and a sense of time and timing.  How, for instance, do we transform and give hope and power to the down-trodden, so that they will not revolt?  One needs to educate to such assimilation.

Transformation is manifest in our senses.  Science relies mainly on sight.  Wisdom relies figuratively on smell, on suggestion and intimation and intuition.

As a closing statement ….

24.One lecture is never enough for influence. What is necessary is many contacts, so that everyone can be both speaker and listener.  One can never predict when ideas will take seed in one’s thinking.  WHAT THE COLLEGE CAN TEACH IS AN UNDERSTANDING AND RESPECT FOR TIME AND TIMING IN SOCIETY – THIS IS THE HEART AND SOUL OF EDUCATION.

THE UNIVERSITY – 1968

Feringer notes
Last edited: 11-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.What is a university expected to achieve?:   ERH asserts that the university, as with all schools,  is intended to prepare one for the future, and that in the present day, not only has it lost its way, but students also are concerned only with the present, the next course, the next exam! “The world of the universities has detached itself from the human future.”  (p.3)

2.The professors may be interested in the future of physics, or of math, but not of the human race.  The well-known aphorism defining the attitude of academics is – knowledge is good for its own sake.

3.Today the university seems to be “…a workshop for plumbers…” (p.11)

4.A university —

…is only a university if the questions of human race are kept in obeyance there, and alive in these little groups, so that at a decisive moment they can come forward and speak with authority to the rest of the world and make them see this in union.  (p.4)

Here ERH refers to the original purpose of the university to convene, or to consult with the community councils for the purpose of speaking out on issues of the day.  In those days their chief concern was the future of the community.

5.These issues cannot be discussed out of the context of history and of what is to be done to create a future. Issues cannot, or should not, be discussed without such reference. He reminds us that any issue;

…is not a moment in time without relation to past and future, but it is a relation to everything positive that has gone on before, and everything that depends on you and me to achieve in the future.  The university has the longest breath–just as the president of the United States has the shortest breath. (p.4)

6.Here ERH defines past and present.  It is not the time of the physicist, because the purpose of the community is to survive and change, so that it progresses. In social life, if there is no beginning of time, as assumed by natural scientists, there can be no progress.  Progress forces us to cite a time when some movement in a community began.  That is why the Bible begins with the statement, “In the beginning…”

The future is known as much as the past.  Only the present is not known, because we don’t know what cowards we are, what criminals we are, what liars we are.  Because you and I are unknown–we are the X in the equation–it is not known what the present will be like tomorrow…Will you stand up and tell the truth? Will you? It probably doesn’t pay, I mean, in your eyes.  (p.7)

Social time relates to phases of social processes, time spans for making peace, for a courtship or a friendship, or trust, or a reputation to be established.

7.The timespan of the future is proportional to our memory of the past, in the sense that the longer our historical reach, the greater the insight we have into the range and  consequences of human actions; of what we need to know about continuing issues into the future and what is yet undone.  For instance, few people seem to believe that all of humankind is one, and thus, war continues. The essential orientation of thought is that without thinking about direction, the society tends to drift.

The University – 1968 – Review

Here the author summarizes his “dis-ease” with the modern university.  He sees its present emphasis on “knowledge for its own sake” as having rendered the university impotent, because it does not deal with each subject in the context of its relevance in creating a future for the community.  In some detail he lays out what it should be if it is to serve this crucial purpose.

PEACE CORPS – 1966

Lectures 1-3 complete
Vershire, VT
Feringer notes
Last edited: 11-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

1.The notion of the peace corps is a fundamental new direction and must be preserved. “You must have to restore the Peace Corps even if the government of the United States would abolish it.” (p.1)

We are entering a new epic. Previously relations between countries were determined by each nation’s self-interest. Theodore Roosevelt, in  1905, was the first “voice in the wilderness” to speak against this policy, saying that the world was now too small for such a policy, and nations must now work for the benefit of all mankind.

This idea, now taking hold, is the major foundation of the Peace Corps. It heralds a new era and portends the possibility for more peace in the world.

2.The necessity for a “peace corps” is that the world has become so divided, so fragmented, that it will tear itself apart if it doesn’t solve its problems in a different way, A WAY THAT WILL ENGENDER PEACE – peace in terms of common agreement!  Examples of fragmentation in terms of decision-making are, 1) the new electric company, centered in another state, shifted power from community, 2) airplanes built in another country eliminated local jobs, 3) the highway dept. in Washington D.C. decides on distant roads and bridges rather than local constructions.

3.Every technological development causes such fragmentation, and every new development expands the space in which we move, shortening the time we have to adapt to the change. (p.7)

Each new invention requires reorganization, not only of government offices, but new laws, and newly-trained people.

4.We are on this earth to unify its peoples.  Technological change destabilizes the basic ties of unity because it increases the rate of social change.

5.People, for the most part, do not recognize that technological change destroys old groupings. This fact needs to be more broadly communicated and understood, as only a few, exceptional people see this.  New gadgets invented everyday destroy old groupings.

Lecture – 2

1.Because of the rapid change, to which adaptation is far behind, our institutions are near the breaking point. [RF – Today, in 1997 this institutional breakdown continues. The other day a prominent doctor said, “The roof is caving in on the practice of medicine.” There is little confidence in most government agencies, least of all in legislatures. Almost every decision made is justified on the basis of advantage in the short range, for commerce, regardless of the social and environmental havoc that results.)

2.There is little peace in the world, and what peace exists is only apparent.

It is unknown what peace is. You must think that the United States have not made peace in 1865.  They have not made peace in 1921.  They have not made peace in 1945.  We live in a country in which the three greatest wars have ended without peace.  It’s only a semblance of peace. (p.12)

Just below the surface of decision-making there seems to be little ability to solve social problems, regardless of massive efforts to do so.  Is peace the absence of war, or the reverse?  Is it imposed by the victor?

PEACE CANNOT BE WILLED, like love, one can work at it, but it just seems to break out when the time is right! But by itself…”Will cannot make peace.”  Quoted from Goethe, (pp.13)

3.There is no common root for the term, PEACE. Two groups disagree on the method for achieving it. . One group believes in contract as a basis, the other  believes in rational formulation. ERH believes both are wrong.

4.The only basis for peace is for people to do something for nothing. (p.16) This they can only do if they admit that peace is neither will, nor rational, nor a “feeling,” but is sacrificed for. Often well-meaning people cause great friction, so he admonishes the Peace Corps candidates to be aware that their actions in other countries can be productive, or destructive.

Your going to India is under the same stars…You will only make peace there if you can do something – something that is not prescribed by your instructions here….the real problem is: will you find the inventive step that constitutes your experience of peace with these people:  …The main point is that peace is not found in us.  It befalls us.  We may support it.  We may help that it can unfold.  But you can’t even call it your own plant.  It is not like a seed, where we put a seed into the ground,..because it takes so many other people’s peaceful endowment.  (p.18)

5.The gap between the old and new orders has yet to be filled, and the Peace Corps is an attempt to do so.  Only later, after some experience, after looking back on your history, will you know. To the candidates ERH repeats, “You are dangerous people.” (p.9)

Lecture – 3

1.To establish peace, to re-found communities after disasters, one must, through actions, expose oneself to misunderstanding. Only then will one understand.  One can understand the nature of situations only by looking back.

b.For the formation of human character, nothing that lasts shorter than a lifetime is important. And three generations are needed to agree on something before peace is possible. (p.2)

c.When we are exposed to so many events and experiences in a lifetime of new technical advances, how are we to understand them?  So little of each event is left in our memories.

d.Peace is brought about by unifying space and time.  With each new technological invention, expanded space and shifting groups, and contracted time are the factors for which appropriate adaptation must be made if peace is to be established.

e.We are on earth to do the necessary things, without which life cannot go on. We need to understand what needs to be done ahead of time, and with each succeeding generation there is less lead time to discern this.

f.Our lives must be spent being willing to fulfill an indispensable task in the community:

He who does the one thing necessary all alone, against an army of enemies, he’s of course the greatest.  That’s why the Crucifixion ranks as the one greatest act in humanity, because He was the only one who grasped that it was necessary, to show that in defeat we can be victorious. ….I say this because you must not think that everything in human history is natural. Everything is supernatural. (pp.6,7)

g.Language is not natural; there is no natural language. Incest is natural, and it must be a taboo.  Language was created by humans because it was necessary for them to communicate in order to find peace between themselves. But this is not a natural process – it is more super-natural. Little progress in social life is “natural,” it is “super-natural.”

h.Mankind, from the beginning, has always tried to outlast the individual life.  Everything of any importance must last longer than a single lifetime.

PEACE CORPS  –  1966 – Review

Peace is one of the central themes in all of Rosenstock-Huessy’s thought, because it represents a primary measure of a vital community.  This series of lectures presents an outline of major themes, which  present barriers to peace today.  The major barrier, he argues, is defined by his “law of technology,” namely, that each advancement in technology shortens the time available to adapt to change – and widens the space (geographic boundaries) of the effects of the old procedures it replaces.   He suggests that the Peace Corps has the potential as a tool of foreign policy, for success in creating true peace,  where previous policy only created new wars.  For these reasons it offers an important link in his thought for social regeneration.

KARL MARX TO THE PEACE CORPS – 1966

Lectures 1-20
Feringer notes
Last edited: 11-98

Contents

A series of lectures given at the Union Theological Seminary in New York.

Lecture – 1

1.A primary cause of community disintegration in modern times is technology. ERH formulated the rule,  ANY TECHNOLOGICAL INNOVATION EXPANDS THE SPACE IN WHICH WE MOVE, CHANGES GROUP RELATIONS, AND SHORTENS THE TIME IN WHICH WE CAN ACHIEVE ADAPTATION.  We can see its manifestations most clearly in third-world countries where there is destruction of groups — a family,  a village,  a town, or a country.

The issue of facing war and endowing peace is the problem dealt with in this series, as war of one type or another has been a major consequence of this disruption.

2.One aspect of this disruption is the inability of people to speak a common language. In disciplines, too much specialization creates barriers between individuals, social classes, and countries. The implication is the dying of hope all over the globe.

3.ERH claims Darwin, Marx, Nietzsche and Freud were influential voices whose messages contributed to social disruption in a major way.  He dubbed them `disangelists.’ [RF – At the moment it is unclear to me how he defines the term “angelist,” regarding the four scholars who were original thinkers intending to change the way we think. Like all original thinkers they were certainly ex-angelists at their inception. To evangelize is to preach the gospel. My best guess is that since ERH saw Christianity as a unifying force, these four scholars preached ideas that would create further disunity.]

People are separated by social classes, race, language, culture, country; there is discontinuity between ideas, specialization between disciplines, incompatible philosophies.  The Lonely Crowd is what Riesman titled industrial culture.  What will cure this sickness of fragmented realities, generations separated and unable to understand each other?

4.This breakdown of communication between generations must be cured simply because we cannot establish social truths in one generation. In another essay he asserts, that each generation evolves its own myths, and to separate these into truth and non-truth one requires the next generation to either prove or disprove.

5.Prophecy and fulfillment! Were these four scholars prophets?  ERH asserts that Christian doctrine (and history) reveals four stages that define an era: 1) the prophecy, 2) the event prophesied, 3) the defeat (or decline), and 4) the gospels (the stories by apostles of that era). And this seems to be a yardstick to describe how the four were disruptive! “Prophets of doom”, and “devil writers” –  he called them. (p.7)

He points out parenthetically how fulfillment of the prophet is never recognized within the group; the Jews never recognized Jesus as the fulfillment of a prophecy.

6.What these four proclaimed dissolves history as we have lived it!

a.Darwin espouses the survival of the fittest, i.e. the brutes (or the strongest) of the world will always rule. In reality it is the child who starts a new generation. A new idea never has power in the beginning, and other examples can be given whereby a theory for animals does not apply to a world of humans, although his theory has indeed been so interpreted.

b.Marx preached endless class wars, but in the end there is to be peace in his time. How was peace to be brought about?  We are not advised by Marx, in the historical record on this question.

c.Nietzsche preached that there is nothing inherently true, beautiful and good, in this world – only our thinking makes it so.  There are, in other words, no absolutes.  According to Nietzsche true, beautiful, and good are the same as love, faith and hope from Christianity. His logic was, that since we always have change, knowledge is what we wish to believe, rather than anything depending upon historical verification.  The Greeks believed in the ultimate truth as represented in theories, in abstractions, in thought by itself.  Christianity believes that thought must be validated by experience over time, and the meaning of faith, love, and hope are sequential elements revealing progress.  The Greeks didn’t believe that humankind could cause progress – that was up to the gods, which controlled man.

7.The value of these four thinkers was that they forced the Christian theologians to separate the humanist (Greek) thinking  from the “Cross,” i.e. from Christian principles. (p.10)  These four also give evidence from their experiences in life, that for one to proclaim truth, one must be indifferent to the forces of their own time. Nietzsche eschewed academe, Marx eschewed safety (he was chased out of several European countries before living in England), Darwin had to be indifferent to the church at a time when it mattered, and Freud had to disregard concerns of the medical profession about work..

ERH, while not believing in their ideas, did believe in their genius, their sincerity in seeking truth,  “…their way of life.”  He also believed however, that they were out of tune with their own time.

Still another lesson they teach us (following Marx) is that social change must, come about only with war. ERH subscribed to this idea, if one broadens the definition of war to include non-violent revolution. In other words, significant change does not occur incrementally.  Pacificim therefore is not a viable principle for change because, were it commonly held as a belief, the brutes would rule the world. Peace would exist only from the barrel of a gun.

Question & Answer Period

1.Q – What I would like to ask about the distinction between Christianity and myth?

A – In order for any growth, at the beginning we go through a period of frenzy, of mythologizing about the consequences of our change.  The myths and legends in our story books reflect this stage of change metaphorically. “The sleeping Beauty is a much truer love — everything taken together.” (p.22)

Every nation has their myths, George Washington and the cherry tree, etc. And at the time of our change, of our frenzy, do we understand what we are going through? “…this is the human situation, that at no one time where we are acting (taking action) are we allowed to know what’s happening.”

If we attempt to be objective at these moments, we suddenly become impotent.  For example, if we are self-conscious in giving a speech, attempting to assess our impact in the middle of the speech, we fail as a speaker. THESE MOMENTS ARE NOT TO BE OBJECTIFIED, BUT TO BE ENDURED. At these creative moments our passion is obsessive, unconscious, and we totally believe in our acts, that a significant contribution to the world will hang on our invention or act.

2.Q – What was the myth from which Marxism stood apart, in order to create its own myth?

A – The myth of harmony in humanism, that humanism would create the good, true, and beautiful.

3.Q – Was Christian idealism ever a creative myth?

A – There is no relationship between idealism and Christianity.  The idealist (philosopher/humanist) believes that at any moment he can call on all of the creative powers in the world, as with any divine spirit. This is to say that the “ideal” is like a tool on our tool bench. The Christian, on the other hand knows that he/she can never be complete, because for any significant achievement or truth to be revealed, three generations must pass.  This is the meaning of the Trinity, that one must sacrifice oneself in order for any achievement

FULFILLMENT  in one’s life, as demonstrated by the story of Jesus, is described by four phases;

…everything that goes on in Christianity is having to do with these great four phases of promise, of fulfillment, of apostolate, and of the story — the Gospel.  Every one of us, if he is really living at all, goes through these four phases, because you have to be true to your calling, to your own moment of divinity. (p.25)

ERH clarifies this statement — following one’s calling is paralleling the life of the cross,  “…to carry through one thing which at one moment got hold of him and he knew that nobody else was going to do it if he didn’t do it.”  It takes 30 or 40 years to know the consequences.  This is easy for some to accept, and not for others.  But we will never feel fulfillment unless we follow “our bliss,” as Joseph Campbell describes it.

4.Q – Dr. Freud came in for attack here. Where is the crux of Freud’s error, as opposed to the other three dis-evangelists?

A – Freud was wrong in 4 things:  he was philosophically with the Unitarians, who believe that philosophy had to rule theology and that you didn’t need anything more.  Why are they wrong?

a.They didn’t know that war was natural and peace is miraculous, they thought the opposite.

b.They thought that speech was natural, and thought  or philosophy was miraculous or divine.  We know now that it is very easy to have thoughts privately, but to be understood by others is miraculous.

c.They thought that love was natural and sex is divine.  We know that it is just the opposite, that sex is natural and love is supernatural (divine).  We know that there is no love without sacrifice.  Love is desire and sacrifice in balance.

d.It is a victory to be loved, and only then comes a willingness to love in return. The great error of our society in America today is that sex is confused as love.

The evolution of real love is that to be loved is a miracle; it is overwhelming, and calls for love in response.  There is first faith on the part of the girl that her love will be returned,  then love in response because of the realization of that miracle. ALL OF THESE HUMANISTIC BELIEFS WERE OPPOSED TO THIS IDEA, AND WERE HELD BY MR. FREUD

Chapt. 2

1.To summarize, the message of Christianity was in response to the Greeks, who had invented philosophy (pure thought), and advocated science as the sole method for a description of the universe.  Christianity raised the question, how is a community to be created, one in which  people live together freely, in peace?  They found the key in formulating the fruitful cycle from promise to fulfillment:  1) the promise, 2)  the prophesy and command to take action, 3) the apostolic, where others take over the cause, and finally 4) the telling of the story, the Gospels.

2.In sum, these four disangelists dissolved the pillars of community, made us back into animals, into individuals and class warriors, and into  “…insane men in a frenzy.” (p.2)

3.ERH asserts that these “disangelists” represented only one quarter of reality, and that for any generation to have meaning someone must speak out and represent all of reality.  By this he means the “man in business, and the  worker.” They represented also the “scourge of Christianity, pacificism.” He points out that in America in the last 150 years, organized religion was pacifist. This country has had more wars than anywhere else. This means that our wars have been economically motivated, and this is caused by our lopsided view of “the man of business.”

4.During the last 1500 years there have been 3 eras when the time-span of peace was extended, by monasteries, by cities of the late Middle Ages, and by Capitalism. WHAT ERH IS ASSERTING IS THAT WE MUST STUDY WAR AS WELL AS PEACE, THAT OUR EXISTENCE IS AN ALTERNATION BETWEEN THE TWO,  AND FINALLY THAT IT IS WAR THAT IS THE NORMAL CONDITION OF EXISTENCE, AND PEACE THAT IS THE MIRACLE.  (p.5)

5.The mind and the body are not free to do what they please, but each must attend to  obedience to the creator.  This is to say that war is a natural given in nature, and peace is a creation of the living word (which allows us to understand each other)  “…world without the living word is at war.” (p.6)

6.The second generation after the end of a war becomes complacent about paying the price for peace, and then war breaks out once again!  Once again ERH pillories the liberals [RF – in what reads like his half- serious, facetious mood] “…who have doubts about everything and an unwillingness to sacrifice for peace.”

7.ERH charges that the intelligentsia of the West was unable to connect the times between generations with two different values.  Marxism’s downfall was that it assumed all conflicts would be between Capital and Labor. Proudhon predicted in 1836 that the ultimate state in society would not be between capital and labor, nor world government, nor something resembling a league of nations, but rather THE CREATIVE ANTAGONISM BETWEEN TWO GREAT WORLD POWERS. “There is husband and wife, so I don’t see why there shouldn’t be Communism and America.” (p.14)

8.Because in the last century the “church” has been impotent, it has been without prophecy, or fulfillment, without crucifixion and fulfillment  “The church had to leave it to these disangelists to prophesy and to gospelize…” (p.15)  Christianity is not a power in life today because it (the organized churches) has eschewed these acts, to connect the generations by detailing what must come about, or will come about if action is not taken. The great accomplishments after the depression of 1929 were that a liability (unemployment) was turned into an asset.

This was caused by a shift in values. Before 1846 labor was treated as a commodity to be sold over the counter. In 1936, the U.S. Supreme Court reversed this notion, and stated that the unemployed were not “labor” as a commodity, but human beings. Then unions became strong, social security was instigated, with collective bargaining, better compensation, etc. THE POWER OF MARXISM WAS ADDRESSED AND RISEN ABOVE, and a liability was turned into an asset.

9.Here ERH re-introduces a definition of the term METANOIA, a rethinking of old values, of one’s place in the world. Marxism failed, and Capitalism did not crumble by its own injustices, it became socialistic. But Marx as a person deserves a place in history because he was willing to sacrifice for his own ideas, (sacrificing his ability to make a living).  By this standard, his life was a great success!

10.So this new era in America (and Europe) in 1936 is now over. Unions are now broken; there are to be no “dialectics,” that is ideologies.  RATHER OUR NEW ERA MUST BE A DIALOGUE (A CONVERSATION) BETWEEN TWO POWERS.  Not just a theory, but explaining between opponents, “…for war, solidarity; for peace, conversation…”  And Marx’s prophecy was fulfilled?

Strikes have always been fought for the dignity of man and for the solidarity of workers. And that is a religious item.  (p.22)

Thus Marx’s prophecy (of dignity for the working man) must be continued, but the downfall of unions now invites a new prophecy, which is necessary when one prophecy has been fulfilled. The fight of unions was in the end a religious fight. WILL THIS BRING ABOUT A MORE SERIOUS STUDY OF WAR?

11.In the question and answer period the question was raised, that isn’t a study of war, of the warring side of human psyche, opening a Pandora’s box? YES, ERH answers, the devil must be given his day in court, but not allowed to conquer us!

Q – Have not these four disangelists revealed the dark side of mankind, that is, the war between conscious and unconscious, between the animal species, between human groups?

A – Yes, we will always need this, to address ourselves to the reality of the human psyche, BUT ALSO BY DOING THIS, LEARN TO RISE ABOVE IT. But the disangelists have only revealed this side of man, they have not explored it.  (p.26)

Q – Is there no such thing as a war between ideas? Do we always have to have armed conflict?

A – Idealists are the war mongers, because they see their views as absolute, as non-negotiable, because to them the mind is divine!.  The only person you can deal with is the one who can make up his mind, as contrasted with those who follow some idea regardless of real-life situations.  So ideals make for war. (p.27)

Q – How is the next era to begin, through dialogue?

A – Today, dialogue between East and West is not possible.  We have many philosophies, just as in Christ’s time, and these have little common ground.

What unites people is a similar life-style. Generals of opposing armies understand each other, just as do workers in all countries understand each other. The Christian churches have done this, taught us that war is wicked. It can be, but we are kept alive by the conflicts, by the misunderstandings, because our survival is tested in each conflict.  The churches, by avoiding the study of war, have been a barrier to our rising above it!

PEACE CORPS – 1966 Vershire, VT

Lectures given to a group of Peace Corps Volunteers – An Exploration of War!

1.The idea of a peace corps is a necessity; but one must be aware of the destructive nature of fashions that are superficial and impotent.

“The Peace Corps is too serious to leave it to anybody official. You would have to restore the Peace Corps even if the government of the United States would abolish it. (p.2)

War is caused, in part, when a nation oversteps its duty to other nations. The English/Chinese opium war is an example.  When one country damages another war becomes inevitable.  THE PEACE CORPS IS AN ATTEMPT TO BREAK WITH THIS PAST WHEREBY ONE COUNTRY EXPLOITED ANOTHER WITH NO CONSIDERATION FOR ITS PEOPLE AS FELLOW HUMANS. Rather, governments must begin to act “in the interest of mankind.”  HOW THEN IS NATIONAL SELF-INTEREST TO BE BROKEN DOWN?  This is the question of these lectures.

2.ERH repeats once again the evidence from which his stated LAW OF TECHNOLOGY is derived.  This is, that we now live in an age with rapidly changing inventions (technology), and that each new major invention widens the space in which we move, changes fundamental human relationships (i.e. destroying familiar groups such as family, village, town, or country), and decreases the time we have to adapt to these changes.  We are now, therefore constantly off-balance.

Learning the meaning of our experience rests on a striving to unify the forces effecting our lives. It is too casual to call this “the push-button” age, it is much deeper.  It is threatening our ability to fend off fragmentation of parts of our lives, our sense of basic “groupings,” our sense of what is valuable and necessary, and what reality is. Most of all it threatens our ability to maintain a balance of these forces. HOW THEN DO WE CREATE A FUTURE FOR OURSELVES WHEN CHANGE IS SO CONSTANT?

3.How do we bring up our children, and adapt ourselves to rapid change and imbalance?

Lecture 2

1.The town in which these lectures were held, Vershire, VT, has been destroyed by technology. Its fate is controlled by a regional government, or by state and federal funds, where the community has little voice. The meaning to the townspeople, of social and economic forces  derives from another source, rather than their town meetings as in the past.

I mean, we are talking about daily processes that eat the marrow out of our daily life, of our work, out of our friendships. (p.6)

In this situation people lose their jobs, but are held accountable for their behavior in many ways by outsiders, causing them to feel dislocated. Our schools, courts, and all professions are not functioning properly, much of what they do is dis-functional to the community. ON THE INTERNATIONAL LEVEL, THIS IMBALANCE IS A CONSTANT CAUSE OF WARS, BECAUSE NEW ISSUES ARISE, OLD ENEMIES BECOME ALLIES, OLD ANTAGONISMS ARISE IN NEW FORMS, COMMUNICATION BREAKS DOWN AND MUST BE SOMEHOW RE-ESTABLISHED.

2.THE FUNCTION OF THE PEACE CORPS MUST ATTEMPT TO FILL THE GAP BETWEEN THE OLD AND  NEW ORDER (of rapid change). ERH goes on to explain that this has been the focus of all his professional life!  (p.11)

3.If our grassroots are disappearing, or have disappeared, THEN THEY MUST BE REPLANTED.

One must get involved in community issues.

4.It is not trade between countries that will cause wars in the future, but constant technological change. We are all guilty of this malfunction in societies around the world, because we all participate in the technology. Therefore it is incumbent upon all of us that we participate in establishing a cure.

5.Part of the cure is to re-establish our attitudes (this gets to psychological principles we are taught to follow).  At present we are taught that peace and love are acts of will:

…peace has been omitted in the thought of mankind as a task or as a problem for the past 200 years.  It has been replaced by will. Peace will not be brought about by your will. (p.16)

One, for instance, cannot will that someone else falls in love with him/her. One can only act in a way so that this might happen. Peace may come to men ofgood will. ERH refers to a Greek text that says, “Peace to all men of His grace.” (p.17)

6.Peace cannot be imposed.  If a strong power dominates, the peace does not come about by the free will of both parties, only one party, rendering it only temporary.

Friendliness is not peace, in the sense that its time-span may be short.

Contracts, as peace agreements, are insufficient because even if one follows the letter of the agreement, the intent may be destroyed, just as with any law. Just as no lasting marriage between a man and woman could survive if each party followed the letter of some contract.  It must be from the heart, from a desire on both parties to be fair and trustworthy, etc.

Peace and love are also like citizenship, which cannot be defined by some printed formula.  Citizenship occurs when breakdowns bring forth persons who work to rebuild the community. (At this point ERH tells the story of a Nazi speaking in the U.S. south, attempting to sell the idea of a dominant Aryan race. Dissention in the community was quelled by a senior citizen reminding listeners how, historically, peace had been maintained by people of good will.  The citizens responded by escorting the Nazi out of town.

To create peace, at each instance of a threat, “citizens” must invent a solution that may never have been thought of before. THEREFORE, ONE OF THE CONSTANTS OF PEACE IS A WILLINGNESS TO BE INVENTIVE. “You will only make peace if you can do something that is not prescribed by your instructions…” (p.24)

The desire must be in the hearts of citizens. THIS IS WHY A PEACE CORPS MUST BE, IN THE FUTURE, A CONSTANT ACTIVITY IN ALL COMMUNITIES.

Lecture 3

1.ERH begins this lecture by identifying the basis for understanding, explaining why three lectures are a minimum.  One must have time to think and ask questions.  Understanding never really comes before there is first mis-understanding. [RF – My own experience has taught me that, corrective action only occurs where there has been adequate time and discussion to articulate the root problems. Only then can solutions be discussed.  It seems to be the norm that solutions are discussed first, which, of course, never bears fruit.]

2.There seems to be little understanding of the importance of time, and of timing. We have educational programs run by the clock – and thus all that can be measured is some quantity of memorization.  Serious issues cannot begin to be comprehended in less than 3 months. AND MORE LASTING TRUTH ONLY AFTER 3 GENERATIONS. THEN ONE CAN KNOW IF PEACE HAS BEEN ESTABLISHED. Only after persons from a generation have been replaced, and the spirit has been transmitted and interpreted by others.

3.Peace is the form in which transitions between people can take place without”shaking” the old order. He cites the example of Indira Gandhi, whose relationship to a past respected leader allowed a transition in which there would be no bloodshed.

4.How much time is needed by cultures to adapt to  change? HOW, IN OTHER WORDS, CAN AN UNDERSTANDING OF THE REALITY OF THE WORLD ENTER THE “SPIRIT” OF THE PEOPLE, SO THAT THEY ARE NOT ADOPTING AND ABANDONING ATTITUDES EVERY DAY?  Such rapid change:

…would mean that your children would be barbarians, and would upset everything you have created or you have done.  And this danger is very large. …The danger is that all the good there is discarded, in favor for the latest news. (p.5)

In other words, time treated as a commodity to be banked is a curse, but this is the most common way people view it. Time (social time, psychological time, not the time of the physicist) is not the sum of moments.  It has fits and starts, interruptions, moments when important things happen (historical moments), and time when nothing happens of significance in the community.

5.Important tasks must be addressed for community survival in the long run. And for this to happen, only a few people need to know what is necessary ahead of time, even though the rest of the community does not understand.  THIS IS WHAT LEADERSHIP IS! This is the stuff of prophets and fulfillment.  ERH cites the example of Jesus, who was perhaps the only person who understood the significance (necessity) of his crucifixion.

6.ERH suggests, therefore, that these significant events in human history are not natural, but supernatural. They  are not assured.  For instance, animals naturally perform incest. But human tribes early on discovered that this would destroy the tribe; thus, he asserts the first law of the tribe. History has little to do with nature; the human and holy spirits know the ends.

And mankind is “the strange animal” that is allowed to make mistakes, because when he acts rightly (for the community), he is forgiven his sins. ( This is the true meaning of the concept of redemption.)

This is another reason why three generations are necessary to establish what is significant truth. We seldom if ever know the fruits of our own efforts.  One good test for identifying significance  is when our children and grand children tell others to follow our prescriptions!.  SO DON’T LOOK FOR ANY LASTING RESULTS OF YOUR WORK IN YOUR LIFE-TIME.

7.We often fail from the sin of impatience.  And when the going gets tough, when we believe all we have done has failed, perhaps the only thing we can do is to develop (in ourselves and our clients) a strong spirit to survive and begin again or carry on when time permits.

Another source of sin is our failure to address only what is our own business, what is our charge, and our authority to carry out?  The guide to our actions must always begin with an understanding of the problem at hand, or it that is not known, to begin to articulate the problem. Agreement on this is a primary step in articulating our authority. -16

8.These type of social problems test our claim to creativity, because our very survival depends upon their being addressed.  Sewer systems are a technical problem, obtaining agreement of citizens, even thought they may not like the solution, is a social problem.

9.Our society, dominated as it is almost solely by commercial attitudes (where important projects are determined by what they cost rather than by a realization of what must be done) is contemptible, because it diminishes the community.

 

LIBERAL ARTS COLLEGE – 1960

Barnard`60
Feringer notes
Last edited: 11-98

Contents

1.If the university is one where the student is promoted for answering questions on tests, it is no place to ask serious questions.

2.ERH makes a distinction between “people” and “public.” Public is the group with which one must agree, must get along, and therefore he characterizes these as persons who are drawn together by some abstract principle, such as the American Rifle Assoc or the Republican party, or the Democrat party. .  The members of these groups are not known to each other, other than by common belief in a “principle.”

3.Where one belongs to a group in order to put all of one’s values together, such as Christian or Jew, then that is a people.  The politician addresses the “public.”  Academe, in general, addresses “the public.”  One idea today, another tomorrow; that is the public.

4.Four types of groups to which we can belong;

a.people of our blood.

b.people of the spirit (same values).

c.public,  “…which comes together in common mental spirit, intellectual pursuits, such as college students.”

d.mass man, people who are starved, fearful, who can be manipulated  “…under the promise of food,”  for instance.

(Category b contains the people to which one can give a life, a group upon which the           maintenance of the community depends. To study abstractions is not serious business; rather one must put ideas into practice.  “…anybody who is           interested in the life of Jesus doesn’t know what Christianity is.”  (p.7)

5.What is serious business is those ideas that infer or describe actions that can last for generations.  Most intellectual thought is entertainment, an interim, but one which has no lasting import. A thought of lasting import is about something that “…is necessary.”  And – necessary for “the people”.  To shovel snow is necessary for the individual, but not for the people.

6.The “eye” shows us what is only physical about a person, but if you wish  to find the spirit of the person, listen to him/her. (p.11)

7.Four divisions of human physiology:

a.Genitals, directed by the sense of flair, smell, anticipation – sensitivity for the future.

b.Heart, one has sound, song, praise, curses you hear.

c.Eyes, go directly to the brain – mass man worships the brain.

d.Skin, hands, feet  equal the individual “for the moment.”

Heart is for the future, and academic thinking is of the eye.

8.Figuratively, “people of God” live in opposition – those of the heart and of the genitals  make the long- range decisions while those of the skin and the eye make the immediate decisions.

9.People of the heart and genitals are thus capable of being members of a “people” that lasts at least four generations.

Individually we are between our parents and our children; “we” are in the present.  “If you can bring yourself to see your decisions in the light of these two generations…that’s enough eternity, so to speak.”  (p.13)

If we look at our own lives only, we cannot tell what is “really” important.  If we look at these two generations, then we can see what must serve those generations.

ERH quotes from Hugo of St. Victor (11th Century),  “…the church (true religion) has existed since Adam and Eve — Christ has only made it visible.”   Therefore, all denominations have the same root. (p.14)

Important decisions are those that will allow the human race to continue through time, and to make such decisions that when one acts on them one has joined into “the holy spirit.”

10.It is a “people,” then, that through time represents the “holy spirit.”  (p.16)  ERH defines, in greater detail, as to how this takes place.  And what we call reason  is of a secondary order BECAUSE REASON ALONE, OR AS A PRINCIPLE GUIDE, CANNOT LEAD US TO JOIN THE “PEOPLE.”

11.Christianity is based on the brittle, frail, next-to-impossible proposition that the Word will unite two or more people in the spirit,  when they had no idea of each other’s existence before. The consequences of organizing to bring about this unity cannot be predicted.

12.If one belongs to a “people,” one lives in three streams of consciousness,

a.How I think of myself and call myself.

b.What others say to my face (tending to be polite rather than candid).

c.What others say behind my back.

Hell is when all three of these streams are different, and heaven is the opposite. And of course, it is the latter that we must strive for all our lives.  (p.19)

13.Death as the fountainhead  of life  is the problem of Judaism and of Christianity, that the word and wisdom of one generation can inspire the next generation. Thus, Jews and Christians are special only in that they have focussed on this problem.

Liberal Arts College – 1960 – Review

The thrust of this essay is to argue how colleges and universities today do not prepare us for creating a future.  The author describes different types of groups we belong to, what those groups mean to us in terms of past, present, and future, and how traditional colleges should not be mistaken in teaching about the past and present only.  The essay thus serves as a useful foundation for curriculum development;  by inference one may assume ERH also indicates what the liberal arts college should be.

POTENTIAL TEACHERS – 1952

Air Force Academy – 1952
Feringer notes
Last edited: 11-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

1.Where does teaching occur?  And what might be said to be a normal situation? In one way or another teaching occurs everywhere, and most people are teachers. With children the normal situation is within the family at first. In the home, teaching occurs when it is necessary, when some situation requires it. It is the same outside the classroom, in the work place and elsewhere, for instance,  learning to ski.  In the classroom the timeliness is out of kilter because it is arbitrary.

2.What other barriers are there to classroom teaching?  One question is, how much time is there for teaching?  The less time, the more general the teaching must be, and it would follow, the less learned. ERH cites the example of the history teacher who was asked, how much time is needed to teach universal history, he replied, “From one minute to ten years.”  How much time is available?

3.Finally, to whom is the teacher speaking? Outside the classroom teaching occurs individually. In a classroom one must speak to a “mass,” to everyone, but no one in particular.

In sum, one could say that the classroom is the least normal (and least effective) situation for teaching.  The classroom:

a….is too impersonal.

b….too general.

c….too late or too early. Timing is not geared to need.

4.There are three elements to a possible learning situation that define it:

a.Training may be said to deal with automatic responses whereby the method would be practice. These methods derive from science, mainly physiology.

b.Instruction can be defined as the passing on of information. The methods for instruction would also derive from science and deal with the mind.

c.Both (a,b) above are necessary, but do not speak to the issue of what the student might do outside the classroom, where responses to real-life situations are called for. Real teaching  may be said to deal with basic changes in behavior outside the classroom, where personality is changed. Teaching addresses issues of the “soul.”

Category (a) above addresses reaction, something mechanical,  organic. Category (b) deals with transmission, something memorized. But true teaching addresses the transformation of the student, because in real life our goal is always to make things better than they have been, which requires constant thought and action. Knowledge is transformed in the process.

5.All of these three dimensions occur together, but real teaching subsumes the other two and is the most important. Ultimately the student must teach him/herself. The end (goal) of teaching determines its content and methods, of course. Ultimately, it is the spirit, one’s attitude toward engaging in life, whereby there arises a need to  prepare the student to be a teacher.

6.Teaching embodies the basic experience of the culture, passing on what the community believes is the “truth.”  It must therefore deal with the past, present, and future times; e.g. what do we need know today, what has been known about this in the past, and what actions need to be taken by us that will enhance our future?

7.The child doesn’t live in either the past, present, or future.  He/she lives “out of time,” without a consciousness of time except for the moment.

Lecture – 2

1.To summarize up to this point, 1) a trainer is a man who can mold a body, 2) an instructor is a man who can mold a mind, 3) a teacher is a man who can change a mind. (p.1)

A teacher is a time-binder, having assessed the needs of today, of his generation,  to the point where the next step is prepared for.  Education does not mold a person for his own sake, but to prepare him to create a future for himself and the community.

2.Life processes occur in phases.  In marriage, for instance, first a casual meeting, then passionate courtship, then commitment (marriage), then establishing a home are all different phases of this process, each different from the next in intensity. In a like way,  as all of the important parts of living occur in different phases constantly,  TEACHING AND LEARNING ARE THE SAME.  One can never teach the same idea in its different phases, from introduction to practice, in exactly the same way. Just as one could not gauge the whole of marriage experience by learning about courtship only.

3.The first step is mechanical, one involving memory and repetition. This is a preconscious, “sinking in”, non-rational step. This seems like “dead weight,” nothing instinctive (organic).

4.The second step is organic, getting a feeling for the subject, getting an instinct for it.

5.Another step involves passion, a love of the subject, an intense desire to formulate one’s knowledge and practice.  And the next step is enthusiasm. Finally,   comes learning the structure of its principles, the rational part.  This must always be the final step, because only then can one understand the meaning of any of the preceding elements.

6.The sequence of the phases is crucial, as there is a natural rhythm.  When one addresses merely a number of “thinking machines,” irrespective of the personalities, one  taps only one phase of a complex process, and this renders that aspect of the learning incomplete and of little use. One learns to change when one is spoken to on a personal basis. A well-known aphorism about teaching is that learning is greatly enhanced when the teacher cares whether the student learns the subject. This is a personal act.

7.Different methods may be used for each step; certainly no single method will suffice.  How, for instance, does one become infected with the teacher’s love and enthusiasm of the subject? These come from the soul of the teacher and have nothing to do with logic. The rhythms of learning, the mechanics of beginning information, the organic investment, the love, enthusiasm and finally, the logical order  (the theories about its cause/effect aspects) all form a rhythm that can be felt quite naturally.  One might call each progressive step a state of “aliveness,” from  sleep to intense consciousness – Beware of university schools of education which begin with the last step and miss parts along the way.  Is it any wonder most of our school teaching is so ineffective, except of course for training in the simplest sense.

POTENTIAL TEACHERS – Review

In POTENTIAL TEACHERS the author raises the question, “What are the barriers to teaching?” Real learning, he asserts, arises from real life, which is specific and personal and where significant learning occurs unpredictably and only “at the right time.”  The classroom, by contrast, is general and impersonal, and comes either too early or too late (because it must be arbitrarily scheduled).  Because it is difficult to surmount these barriers the norm is to forsake teaching for training or instruction.  Real teaching blends these approaches in a natural rhythm from one phase to another; “Learning dies by being taught with only one rhythm.” These essays help us understand comments he makes  throughout other essays in which teaching is only touched upon in passing.

MAN MUST TEACH

written about 1940
From: Vol.I Argo Press, Norwich, Vt. 1981
Feringer notes
Notes started: 8-13-91
Last edited: 3-3-99

Contents

Sociology of Teaching and Augustine

1.ERH describes the historical situation of 4th century Western culture; the scene is the transition from classical times to the rise of the Catholic church. Augustine finds himself defining his role as a teacher and priest on the one hand, and as a father on the other. Could he, and did he, have the right to attempt to educate his son?  And if so, what were to be the elements of creative teaching?  ERH uses the term “creative teaching” to mean the transmission of the spirit,  as in recreating the human spirit in students (engaging oneself in living, in participating in community life toward its regeneration)

.

2.ERH suggests that  with the break-up of the family today,  the question is relevant once again.  In the 4th century the family was the primary teaching link for society.  Still,  Augustine puts the question to himself, “Can parents teach their children, and if so, by what intellectual authority?”  Today, with institutionalized education, the family no longer has such a primary influence.  It was Augustine’s faith that he can be a rightful candidate.  Another title for the essay could be, “Who is your teacher when I, your father, seem to teach you?”  (p.2)  The thrust of the essay, then, is the method by which his teaching was accomplished.  THIS ESSAY IS NOT AN INTELLECTUAL MONOLOGUE, BUT A STRUGGLE BETWEEN TWO WILLING SOULS, FATHER AND SON.

3.ERH classifies this essay as neither fiction nor philosophy nor theology, nor even autobiography, but rather correspondence, “…a sociological phenomenon.” (p.3)  It is not “personal” in the sense of interest only for the two parties;  rather it has a wider scope, two hearts searching for a general truth. To understand social affairs, all forms of literature must be called upon:

We think for our personal salvation.  And all social forms result from this fight for salvation of persons.  Of this, the De Magistro, is a telling example. (p.3)

4.The essay says a great deal about education, but the treatment would be unheard-of in present-day institutional literature on the subject.  Augustine is not writing as a professional,  a scholar, or Bishop, but personally, with an interest in the state of society.  And ERH makes such a point of the setting and reasons for this dialogue because:

…it is possible that social science springs from personal bias and passion and belonging.  Then, it is true that we do not teach others to do good because we, like Augustine, are compelled to teach by our own life’s forces,  even with the odds as in this case, against our qualification to act the teacher. (p.3)

Teaching, in this sense, is an integral part of life, a necessity implying a new view of education, as the reader will discover below.

5.ERH contrasts his view with that of John Dewey, who, having written voluminously on education,  HAS NEVER STATED WHY HE WRITES. The teacher is taken for granted by Dewey, but not granted any articulated intention.  Is the only reward for the public school teacher his pay?  And if not, do we assume this teacher’s goal is the passing on of information?  Can this situation be the role of a good teacher?  Can there be an unarticulated personal “agenda” of the teacher, and if so, is this a healthy situation?

To raise such questions as who should teach and why, ERH asserts, puts education into the realm of social science and politics.

But as it is, education is a humanistic and even humanitarian specialty since it is mere giving to somebody, with the teacher receiving a salary, in reward. (p.4)

6.ERH’s point in raising all of these issues is to point out Augustine’s relevance for our time.  He developed the ideas of metalogic, which assigned the highest purpose for education,  and of metaphysics, freeing mankind to study nature objectively and thereby de-demonize it.  With metaphysics, the old myths of demonized nature could be overcome, and principles of modern science methodology could be articulated. Descartes later advocated separation of mind and body to articulate the method in greater detail, opening the way for modern science.

Augustine suggests a third method to enlighten us about the understanding of experience, because neither of these first two methods addressed society.   Augustine assumed that humans think, so that they can survive; that this knowledge would be a universal curriculum, and therefore everyone needed to teach. Why is he teaching, by what authority, with what conditions?  He saw that the relation of teacher and  student, and the orientation of both, are therefore of crucial importance in social science! Furthermore, Augustine asserts that a vital science of society must unite all three of these methodologies into a single study of human experience, i.e. the creative powers of the universe (religion), nature, and human society. In other words, human experience cannot be understood without such integration.

The Distemporanity of Education

1.To summarize, Augustine recognized that there needed to be three different methods for understanding experience: 1) meta-ethics for the understanding of the creative powers of the universe, describing  the goals of mankind, 2) metaphysics to study nature so that man could understand the concrete world around him in a de-demonized way, and 3) a science of society in order to understand human behavior. Each of these methods would have to be different, because each phenomenon was intrinsically different. Finally, he recognized that at the core of these methodologies would be different concepts of the phenomenon of time, which he saw  as intrinsically different from space. The concentration on space is the orientation of natural scientists, who define time as the fourth dimension of space.

Since thought requires time, one cannot observe it, although one can know it exists.

If we are products of our time, we shall never know this same time as we may know a fact outside nature. (p.6)

Thought and education both take time.  Modern thinkers have dissected time into “atoms” of before and after, the concept of “present” being a split-second, a fiction.  While this seems satisfactory for physics, it doesn’t work for society.  For if time units are disconnected, unrelated to each other, then education is not possible.  Planning, for instance, can be for hours or even years,  whereby,  psychologically, time appears to stand still. (p.6)

2.The notion that time flows, but also appears to stand still, is paradoxical.  But undeniably all action, including thinking and teaching  takes time.  The teaching act is central to a philosophy of time, because there is an “older'” and  “younger,”  and when interacting they both exist in a conscious “present.”  Another way of stating this is that the teacher has a prior knowledge of the subject, the student a later exposure.  THIS CONCEPT ALSO DESCRIBES THE BASIS FOR ALL SOCIAL RELATIONS. (p.9)   People with different points of view (experience of times) are linked together in the present.

3.The concept of different “times” of people means each has different ideas, different interests, etc. Differences are a prescription for acrimony,  of course, but when persons can function in a group, in harmony in the “present,”  they share the same “times.”

In learning, in teaching, in education, the miracle is achieved of bringing both together in a third time.  This bridge is called the present. (p.7)

ERH goes on the point out that if this harmony were not created, people would be unable to communicate. He  confesses that in all his searches he has found no other thinker before Augustine who has articulated social problems according to this time perspective.

In the “present,” ERH tells us,  “Here, the darkest division of man stares us in the face.” The abyss of time is ahead of and behind the group. The teacher’s preparation is based on knowledge from the past, and the student’s anticipation looks to the future. But ERH wonders why, in all the treatises on education, the teacher is not mentioned. He/she is considered an “objective” observer, without a particular time perspective,  rather than a crucial participant in the act of transforming. IT IS THIS TRANSFORMATION THAT SPELLS OUT THE EDUCATIONAL TASK. Without the transforming role of the teacher, we lack of ability to communicate adequately, to achieve cooperation, and thereby are primed to destroy our communities. To understand, one must have a sense of time and timing. (p.8)

4.Throughout history, movements die, people and ideas pass on, epochs pass on, generations fade. “And yet the spirit’s bloodstream survives every one age.” (p.8)  Where cultures survived, it is precisely this that was their accomplishment and revitalizing engine.  As Augustine and ERH assert, it is this spirit that must lie at the heart of all teaching, because it is the only way that the times, from age to age, can be united and integrated. It is the only way the student can understand his own experience in context.

5.Unless we reach back into history, then forward in anticipation, and strive to build a better future,  we will not rise above animal cultures, which are imprisoned in relearning all of reality each generation.  This concept is the difference between Christian and secular sociology.

When curriculum is based on subject matter only, it becomes hopelessly departmentalized into specialized “disciplines.”  When it is based on mandates from the “state,” it degenerates inexorably into propaganda and lies. The only avoidance of these pitfalls is to put the transformation of the spirit at the center of teaching and learning.

We need an answer to the simple question: How can people who are not contemporaries live together successfully? And Augustine’s answer is: They succeed if they admit that they form a succession, if they affirm their quality of belonging to different times.  If the time difference is admitted, they may build a bridge across the times, in corresponding acts.  By these acts, that which is called “the present” is produced.  The present is not a given data of nature but a fruit of social efforts. (pp.8,9)

Analysis of the Text

1.There are 14 chapters in the “De Magistro” text.  In the first seven,  Augustine and son Adeodatus engage in a dialogue about semantics, which Adeotatus sums up:

All speech is teaching.  Words are signs.  Signs need not be words.  Acts may be shown without a sign.  (p.10)

2.Chapter 8 seems to be a play of ideas back and forth about the reality of words and signs, as differentiated from actions.

3.Chapter  9:  “A sign may be equally or more valuable than the reality signified.  But our cognition of the sign is less precious than our cognition of the reality signified.” (p.10)

4.Chapter 10: There must be a connection between signs and real objects or acts.

5.Chapter 11:  Understanding results from connecting words and signs to concrete things and acts. While words alone can challenge us to “seek reality,”  we must then seek understanding by making the connection between the words and concrete events.

6.Chapter 12:  “Sensations and mental perceptions are two classes of our perceptions.  Sensations never are replaceable through words of others, except on faith.”

This is to say, hearing speech from others is either doubted, or received skeptically, or taken on faith. In no case does this represent proper learning, however. Obviously, with “proper learning,” words must be connected with experience.

7.Chapter 13:  The listener is always the judge of the speaker, that is,  judging speech. The problem, of course, is to determine if the speaker is speaking his mind, or is lying.  Just as often, we may fail to speak our true thoughts, and quarrels or misunderstandings result.

8.Chapter 14:  “Nobody sends his children to school to let them think the teacher’s ideas.  They ought to get the objective knowledge.  This they only learn by spontaneous consideration inside themselves.”  During the teaching act, or dialogue, no time seems to pass (consciously).

Words from outside us should be taken as admonitions; one learns (understands, as contrasted with mere recall of information) only by thinking about the words, and thus, in the final analysis, one must teach oneself.

Repentance for a Social Situation

1.ERH points out that in “De Magistro,” Augustine has laid foundations; foundations are necessary so that regeneration can take place. These foundations are the assumptions to which one can return  as a new starting point.

He also asserts that the essay is not laid out along the lines of a Platonic dialogue. The descriptive part in the beginning does not assume to judge the “traditional” way of seeing teaching at that time, but rather to describe what is being jettisoned in the next part of “De Magistro.”  The dialogue is political, dealing with the relations between father and son, and with little theory per se.

It establishes the difference between Greek and Christian thought, whereby the Greek mind can revel in pure ideas  and the Christian believes in meaning, in terms of the intended consequences of action.  In Greek thought, a dualism  separates theory from practice.  In Christian separation doesn’t exist, but another dualism does,  between seriousness and play.  “…the only dualism admitted by a Christian community.” (p13)  

The first half of “De Magistro” is a prelude to an exercise for more serious topics.

2.ERH goes into a long discussion about the interrelation between work (struggle) and play, which, summarized, turns out to mean both are natural and necessary. To find the truth among us, we must both work and play together. Thus, it was appropriate for Augustine and Adeotatus to play with ideas as a prelude to the   struggle to follow.

If they would analyze the impact of this one little fact, they would face the real educational mystery, which is that man meets his fellow man only when he meets him on different levels. This is not a logical proposition; and it is not a psychological proposition.  It is a social and historical phenomenon…The student plays, the teacher struggles with the truth. (p15)

3.He goes on to explain that the natural attitude of the student, even in the best circumstances, is to come to the classroom with an anticipation to learn.  But, by its very nature, the experience inside the classroom is vicarious reality.  Even though the teacher comes to the same scene with seriousness and conviction, he must allow the student to play with the ideas.  “We need a transformer, to bring the truth from the form of conviction to the form of play.”

Other transformations must take place.  The student must realize that one day the knowledge will have serious meaning in his life, and so his attitude must eventually change from play to seriousness.  “Good teaching begins with a joke and ends with a challenge.”

4.Two dangers degrade teaching into puerility (childishness), or sublimating it into crusading.  When the aforementioned transformations take place, on the other hand, “…all that which education can do, has been done.”

There is, of course, always risk involved; the teacher can be, and often is, misunderstood.  Methods of teaching for rote memory can easily be done, sans risk. Being misunderstood naturally arises when each party believes he/she is a master of the language, and leaves the situation believing he has been understood. This is seldom the case.  Nothing of importance transpires between student and teacher with rote learning.

Both teacher and student must struggle, both must change levels of attitude, and most importantly, the result of this mutual struggle and play must progress beyond how the two conceive of it.

5.That “beyond” lies in use of the knowledge.  At some point in the conversation, the logic, pragmatism, science, and scholarship transform into reality.

6.The “struggle” of the teacher signifies that he has put his heart and soul into the act, and good teaching requires this. Modern educational psychology ignores this fact. Augustine’s meta-ethics requires that the teacher be satisfied with his ethical role.

To teach as defined above portrays the struggle of the teacher to balance duties to the truth with love of the student. These oppose each other.

The conflict which the teacher takes upon himself lies between his thought in his own time and the survival of this thought beyond his own time. (p.17)

To survive these opposing forces, one must have a “soul,” which is the power one needs to rise above these conflicting forces.

7.If this struggle of the teacher can be recognized by the student, the student may be transported into a serious and beneficial fellowship of learning.

8.There are two forces that must be present for good teaching and learning; faith and love underpin the power of the soul. For the student of good will, faith in the teacher and love of truth.  For the teacher, faith in the truth and love for the student.  Without such good will, significant teaching and learning cannot occur.

The Correspondence of Human Beings

1.The power of teaching, of instilling creativity,  is beyond both student and teacher. God is the source of both love and truth.  In modern educational psychology, the teacher is mere facilitator to the student’s intellect.  In antiquity it was the teacher who was the fountainhead of truth.

2.Augustine’s view of these formulations was that they were both deficient.  Dualisms usually turn into exploitation by the half of the duality  that obtains and maintains power over the other. Capitalist exploits labor, husband exploits wife and family, although that power is always limited in practice.

IT IS INSTINCTIVE AMONG HUMANS THAT THEY WISH TO BE CONSIDERED HUMAN BEINGS.  They wish to be loved by someone. ERH points out that we have many names – teacher, doctor, boss, husband, wife, American, Christian – and could abandon any or all of these and survive, with one exception.  We insist on recognition as “being” and as a “human being” (p.19),  without which we could NOT survive.

3.     All specific social functions are mere surface roles compared to this underlying lasting role.  This role consists of a correspondence between my names for myself and society’s names for me. This correspondence binds us.  Without it, we lose our being and our humanity.  Most moderns take this correspondence so much for granted…(p.19)

THE IMPLICATION OF THIS NOTION COULD NOT BE MORE FUNDAMENTAL; THAT A GOAL OF MERE GROWTH IN INTELLIGENCE AND WISDOM AND EVEN SURVIVAL IS NOT ENOUGH. “Foxes are intelligent and weeds grow tall.”  Our fundamental goal for all education must be for individuals to acquire the status of being recognized, addressed, and thought of as a human being.  We risk life and limb and would submit to abuse and endless suffering every day to maintain our need for personal dignity.  The truth of this may be seen in the struggles all around us.

This need for being addressed as human,  the listening for our name to be called, derives of course from our language, which exists only in correspondence with others.

4.No one, then, is self-taught. Neither teacher nor student can claim supremacy. Their humanity arises from a common spirit, a correspondence of spirits.  “Hence the two Egos must be made to perceive this common basis, background, condition of one spirit.” (p.21)

For one’s ego to be sacrificed in an atmosphere of love and faith also means that the creative power from teaching and learning and the willingness to sacrifice for the welfare of the group comes from outside both parties. This outside power is what ERH identifies as God.

The Biographical Place of “De Magistro”

1.What does dialogue achieve in the personal life of the two involved?

There is always the danger that the student can become a follower of the teacher, tied to his ideas and unable to become an independent thinker in his own right! So Augustine makes very clear that he is not the teacher, or leader; he strives in the end to provide (spiritual) emancipation to his son/student.

[RF – This seems to me another paradox in life, where one must have teachers who are not teachers.  Obviously Augustine’s message is that no good teacher attempts to tie the student permanently to his (teacher’s) thinking.  Therefore, teaching and role models can only be temporary.  The student borrows the ideas and behavior until, and only until he rises to the capability to think for himself, and hopefully in time go beyond his teacher.]

Augustine, as a cleric,  states that only God can be our ultimate teacher and leader.

2.This appears to be the logic behind ERH’s view of history – it must be biographical and autobiographical (the professional term is “narrative history”). Otherwise, one reading about Socrates or Plato or any other great figure of the past is very likely to catch too tight a hold on one’s thinking, rendering it narrow and incapable of change.  It would be precisely the teacher’s function to insure that the student then becomes emancipated and free, transformed into  an independent thinker. (see pp.21-23).

As Augustine exclaims in the tenth book of the Confessions: “People must be connected by the bond of charity before they can listen and speak to each other with profit. (p.23)  [emphasis mine – RF]

3.He goes on to explain that teaching is charity, not “thought.”  He asserts that one cannot teach science scientifically, because trust and respect cannot be established by formulae.  In elaboration he explains that love and will are not the same, and modern psychology (especially educational psychology) mistakes them for being the same.  One can force students to do exercises because of the power of  position. One cannot will the student to believe (respect) by this method. The teacher, he reminds us, has no spiritual (lasting) authority outside the classroom.

4.Teaching is the model for establishing efficacious relationships, because it is the model for creating time (gaining time, in other words).  [RF – Armed with knowledge, one is relieved from the necessity of re-inventing it.]

Our life experience is full of stimuli, which pushes us to change, redirecting our attention and dedication too quickly. What is important in life is that which is lasting; behavior, formulations that work, basic principles – truth.  The protection against these fragmenting forces is therefore the teaching situation, which acts to encapsulate teacher and student, literally taking them out of the time of demands from outside the classroom. (Using the term classroom in the broadest sense; it may be inside a building, or beside a shade tree.)

5.Teacher and student give each other time. By the mutual willingness to speak and listen to each other, by the opportunity for each to express their (always different) experiences in reality, by taking time to think and time to understand and grow (a period of incubation), they create an environment of peace. Peace can be defined as the process by which people give each other time.

This requires faith on the part of the student that truth is worth seeking, and love (desire) on the part of the teacher for the student to grow.  This body of time incorporates three times – past, present, and future. The teacher  already has had time with the subject matter, the student  will have time in the future, and both meet in the present to communicate.

6.These then are the principles for establishing transformation.  None of this is incorporated in the modern psychologists’ theories of cognition, or conditioning, or humanistic interaction.

Former Evaluations

1.ERH  evaluates what three other scholars have said ” De Magistro”  was about. Each of these took from the text according to their biases. Leckie, a modern scholar,  was looking for educational method, and  wrote about cognition, the humanities, and Rhetoric.

In 1527, Erasmus of Rotterdam commented on the text.  Being a humanist, he was looking for the basic philosophy; his question was, “What is the fundamental system of ideas he is representing?”  Put another way, Erasmus  assumes religion is one of several philosophies. In the middle ages Bonaventura was looking for God.

2.Each of these scholars put aside parts of the text that were not relevant, according to their biases.  Rosenstock-Huessy does the same, by his own admission, but asks the reader to consider that he left out nothing in his analysis.

Bonaventura separates Heaven and earth as different entities. Erasmus assumes that thought is the principle creative force of the world. And Leckie, the modern scientist,  looks for the scientific method of teaching.

3.Rosenstock-Huessy’s bias is that all of these are part of the same reality, and that the goal of society is to create peace (cooperation).  To do this is no small effort;  teaching is not scientific, but educational and political in essence. The power to speak the truth, to speak and listen,  is a miracle, and its accomplishment represents the creative spirit within us.  This source is not within us, but has been passed down to us,  and of course its carrier is true speech. This ERH calls the Holy Spirit.  Rosenstock-Huessy asserts that St. Augustine was the first great scholar to understand and articulate these concepts.

4.Teaching and learning, by this concept, only truly occurs when a “present” is created between teacher and student.  This present represents a living cell, a time capsule in which the spirit of the discipline and its place in creating community is established.  The living cell creates time and space in which the living spirit can be realized, a social and psychological phenomenon.

Contrarily, modern so-called “sciences” of learning are inadequate descriptions of this more vital educational process. Memorization and logic do not describe the creative act, they are merely mental manipulations,   characteristic of dead cells.  No viable society can be made up from dead cells!

The Creation of a Body of Time

1.Dialogue at the time of Augustine was not new; however, there was a difference between Christian dialogue as articulated by Augustine, and pre-Christine (Platonic) dialogue. In the Platonic dialogues, students were “taught” by the “master.”  The interlocutors were either proven wrong, or all participants were  proven inadequate to the task.  There was play at the beginning, then serious discussion.

2.Augustine introduced a third element, in which each participant would trade roles as speaker and listener, as teacher and student. In this third part there was a free examination of ideas, especially questioning of old ideas. An atmosphere of equality was created, which was to lead to a formalizing agreement about the future.  Formalizing meant articulating a new situation from the past, what should be carried forward, what should end, what possible new or revised methods of examination might be needed. All this indicated  a vitalizing break between past and future.

3.In this new situation, the past can accept change because the teacher (representing past experience) participates.  Future, then,  is in part a continuation, and in part a portent of new directions.

Each generation is made up  partly of the past and partly unique newness.   The goal  is to unify time (correspondence) in the present,  of past, and future. Eugen says:

…my knowledge of this break produces in me the forwardizing energy called teaching by which part of my experience can be regenerated in somebody else. (p.30)

4.Man possesses an innate desire to pass something on, to connect with the future.  He knows death is inevitable.  Consciousness of our own mortality leads us to disregard any importance of the automatic flow of time,  in favor of  influencing life past our own death.  What is important to us personally is the continuation of our spirit, our ideas, our influence.  For example, we desire  less crime, or the welfare of our family, a cleaner environment, more justice, less greed – whatever we fought for in life.

5.There is a reciprocity between teacher and student in this three-part dialogue. The student is relieved of the burden of re-inventing all of reality, while at the same time being given freedom to renew old practices, invent new ones, and in turn leave his own mark on the future. He is free to re-experience the past, without having to be manacled to it.  THIS EMANCIPATION FROM OLD THINKING IS A CRUCIAL GOAL OF AUGUSTINE’S CONCEPT.

The teacher, in his turn, is listened to, receiving validation by having been unburdened of his heart-felt concerns for the future of society.

Man does not live in the present alone but, by merit of the forwardizing energy he reaches a beyond-himself time. The teacher is forced to enter a relation to human beings whom he can teach because he must make this connection with a beyond-himself time.  Once he has determined this beyond-himself time, he is relieved. …Man is he who can inherit faculties acquired by other members of the race. (p.31)

6.The student, by “backwardizing,”  re-enters the ranks of those who determined the past.  He no longer feels a need to be determined by it, rather he determines it by looking at the past from the perspective of questions from the present.  IN THIS WAY, THIS THREE-PART DIALOGUE HOLDS POWERFUL PAYOFFS FOR BOTH STUDENT AND TEACHER. The reciprocity creates a forceful binding process, of cooperation between student and teacher, of past, present, and future, and explains the necessary quality of creative thinking required by everyone who wishes to grow.

[RF – This section of the monograph might have been titled, “The psychology of true teaching.”  In my own experience and reading, this seems far more insightful than any other books by famous modern scholars.]

7.By contrast, Humanism asserts lasting divisions between past, present, and future.  ERH’s binding of all times then unifies all of humankind.  Its basic accomplishment lies in the creation of a “super-time,” a fusion of past and future, and creation of an expanded present (as compared to a momentary present).

Another accomplishment of super-time is that it fends off loneliness, connecting one with all times of history and of the future. It extends one’s relationships beyond personal life restricted to the present.

8.IN SUM, THE CREATION AND ARTICULATION OF A SUPER-TIME IS THE SECRET TO A VITAL SOCIETY.  It is the product of a social cooperation and a method by which one becomes capable of rising above one’s mere animal nature, to be transformed into a maturing human being. It is how human beings conquer death!

9.Antiquity didn’t know how to do this. It lived a life of endless cycles.  Modern views of Humanism, as reflected in all social science today,  accept these fragmenting, Platonic beliefs as well.

Super-time is a conscious creation of energy to transform society, derived from faith, love, and hope.  The  student has faith that the teacher is telling the truth, and a love for the truth.  The teacher has love (and respect) for the student, and faith in the truth.  They both have hope for fulfillment.

The academic world which is Greek in origin still cultivates a disdain for super-time, and for the energies which alone are able to produce it.  Faith, Love, and Hope, are not considered worthy of scientific investigation.  They are called irrational, unproven, non-existent, cobwebs of mystics. ( p.34)

10.         The church in teaching the secrets of the creative life and the standstill present, teaches them in a non-creative and pre-Christian manner.  And she does so to this day, either in the Aristotelian forms of the middle ages or in the Platonic manner of the Liberal Arts college. (p.38)

11.THIS EDUCATIONAL PROCESS BETWEEN STUDENT AND TEACHER IS THE SMALLEST ATOM OF SUPER-TIME.  IT VISIBLY CONNECTS TWO GENERATIONS, AND EXPERIENCES FOUR DIMENSIONS OF TIME: past, future, the fleeting moment, and the timeless present. In our personal lives we experience a tiny speck of reality.  Only through a truly consciously creative educational process can we hope to expand that speck into our human potential.

No teaching of this nature can be based on traditional scientific methods.  Contrary to popular and professional assertions,  teaching is not and cannot be scientific.  The creation of super-time is based on speech.

This power of speech is not an appeal to man’s rational or intellectual faculties only, although it appeals to them too.  But it appeals to the whole man.  Speech is four times as rich as thought.  And without this wealth of appeals it could not move man into super-space and super-time.  Society is built by the energies which enable us to get outside our own short living time and living space and which make us to desire to melt into the world, be born into the future, enter the graves of the past, and reach our own innermost centre. (p.40)

ANDRAGOGY – 1925

Reprint from the “Archive for Adult Education” – 1925
Translated 1992 by Raymond Huessy
Feringer notes
Notes started: 11/92
Last edited: 11/97

Contents

The context of this essay was the tragic situation of Germany after WW I. Rosenstock-Huessy was raising the question, “How has the German education system been faulty to not have prepared its citizens to see, and understand and respond more appropriately to their experience?”  Apparently the German citizens did not see the pickle they were in.   Rosenstock-Huessy writes as though he is offering the German people a method to better prepare themselves for the future, to rise up from the “dead,” in this essay.

I.      Theory & Practice

a.   “Schooling” is defined as the educational method for youth. Its characteristics are: 1) transmission of information, as contrasted with need for an adult education that would transform the students. Transmission is, by definition, oriented toward the past,  with no admonition to act.   2) Teaching is teacher-centered.  Transmission also negates the role of the teacher, because the teacher is primarily an instrument, analogous to a tape player or video today.  3)  The primary activity of the student is to memorize, a situation that does not require leadership, but mere formal authority over the students.

b.   True “education,” for any age, by contrast is much more than mere “schooling.” Adult education,  in particular, is oriented toward solving community problems as a step toward a better future. This requires a curriculum that prepares the student to see, understand and deal with problems at hand.  In the process the adult is transformed into a new being, because creating a future always demands a new type of person to evolve with changed times. The difference in age, in adult learning situations, between teacher and student is much less, and therefore the teacher needs to lead, at first. The authority relationship between student and teacher may shift back and forth.

c.   Of course, these definitions are not pure, as all levels of learning involve passing on information from the past.  However, the solving of problems, where the answers are not known beforehand, new information to be created and tested – a very subtle and demanding process.  Furthermore, since the curriculum arises from community need, adult students have the power to evaluate its relevance and participate in its formulation.

d.   Two “curious” types of adult schools arose in Germany after WW I, one based on humanistic idealism and the other on “realpolitik.”  The purpose and philosophy of these schools could not have been more different.  The “Keyserling” school in 1923 reflected idealism and the “Speidel Workers Council Schools,” represented the latter.  One represented theory (idealism), and the other, practice. These orientations existed previously, but between 1500 and 1900 they grew more and more apart, and finally evolved into isolation and incompatibility.   They became two poles of philosophy, each giving lip-service to the importance of the other,  but in reality they ignored each other.

e.   Rosenstock-Huessy despaired of the educational  institutions for adults in Germany at this time, not only the Keyserling and Speidel schools, but also the university and the church, as offering inadequate and disconnected teaching:

Until now we have in a spiritual sense known only the conscious misleading of adults: demagogy.  But now we attempt conscious spiritual leadership: “andragogy”…So andragogy is the name under which we can group all school-bound teaching of adults.  In any case the rise of andragogy as a renunciation of both mere pedagogy and demagogy is significant. (p.3)


II.     The School of Wisdom

a.   The essential characteristics of the Keyserling school were: 1)  well-to-do people who wished to improve their minds, but, 2)  with no motive to put this learning into practice.  Adults entered to “become wise,” to know themselves, to become “grown-up.”  Entry into the school was voluntary, motivated by a personal desire for enlightenment.

b.   The opposite of this characterized the Speidel school.  Here adults were driven by some community need, by a higher call to “duty,” not something they arbitrarily chose, and not for their personal ends, but for group ends. The problem of  “andragogy” is to resolve these two opposing forces.

c.   The existence of the Keyserling school represented a recognition of the failure of both the university and the church.  The university had become “soulless,” and the church “deadly to the spirit.”

The Keyserling school employed unconventional and perfectly valid methods for teaching, but, like the university and the church, failed to connect learning with action.  The validity of the curriculum and teaching methods did not make up for a failure in philosophy and this turned out to be a fatal flaw.

d.   The notion that knowledge studied out of the context of practice could have power was fallacious, in Rosenstock-Huessy’s view.

Whoever pretends to believe in the lack of preconditions in the social sciences, exaggerates the weight of his little bit of personal morality and good behavior.  It is nice, of course, not to lie consciously.  But it is much worse for the spirit and truth and science, to lie without being aware of it. ….Keyserling’s new approach has little prospect of ending anywhere different than where Plato’s, Marsilio Ficino’s, Richelieu’s, or Leibnitz’s academic life ended: in the highest personal truthfulness, in  institutional unreality and ambiguity!  (p.7)

Knowledge studied out of the context of use, out of the stream of history, knowledge taught as a bundle of abstractions only, isolates people and constrains them from connecting with others, because it offers no basis for commonly agreed-upon validation of the usefulness of the knowledge. Nor does it allow any learning from other generations.

Keyserling does not differentiate between “his” truth for himself and responsible “teachable” truth for others.  Without such a filter, such a spiritual self-purification from the fetters of individuality, one graduating class, one generation, can never connect to another. (p.8)

e.   True teaching means preparing the student to validate the relevance of past knowledge, add to it the knowledge of some present situation, then find a method for solving the problem at hand.  All of this requires some common agreement as to the facts and the effectiveness of possible solutions (which is to say, testing them).   “The problem of continuity, inheritance, transmission, is the problem which causes our existing institutions to wither away.”  (p.8)  Another way of putting this is to say that this form of idealism tries to drive out the devilwith  the devil, subjectivity with subjectivity, individualism with individualism, just as does the university.  What if the professor lacks knowledge, or is biased, how are his pronouncements of the truth to be validated?  In a “pedagogical” system the student is stuck with accepting the knowledge uncritically.  How can such a method prepare a community member participating in community affairs to respond to community problems fruitfully?

Adult experience should move one toward being a wiser and self-assured personality.  Today university students are self assured because Western Culture and its traditional universities emphasize science, which requires only memory, but not social wisdom and a call to action.

f.    The vitality of the society is at stake here.  Any community requires vital leadership, which is to say, outstanding persons, what Rosenstock-Huessy calls “a personality.”   The idea, established in the 16th century  “Humanist” movement, meant that anyone could do anything.  The fallacy of this notion lies in the fact that, when everyone believes they can become a “personality” (great person), then no one can.  Where, then, is the leadership? Even if a leader is present, he/she is not accepted, or worse, not even recognized.  Such  is the result of the cult of individualism (humanism)!  [RF – In my own experience I have many times been confronted with groups who had little or no knowledge of some issue, but claimed the right to have an opinion and an influence equal to that of the expert.]

g.   Another concern Rosenstock-Huessy raises with traditional adult educational institutions is that of homogeneity, of the lack of representation in planning bodies of many group members.  Examples of this phenomenon are too numerous to list.  Police departments, political parties, universities, churches, labor unions – in short all institutions – have failed to reform themselves.  No homogeneous group can change itself, because to do so transforms it into something else:

Whenever members of a homogeneous social group whose inner attitudes are well-known and well-established, makes use of educational institutions as adults, any attempt to effect essential change in the group must end in failure….This is also why all party activity is immune to improvement.  And that is why any homogeneity among students sets narrow limits on the art of the teacher.  (pp.10,11)

III.     The Workers’ Council School

a.   The context of the “workers” situation was the need to re-establish a movement, originated in the past, but  which had faded out.  In the past peasants needed to defend themselves against the powerful. The first step in this process was to know the rule of law, to know one’s rights as well as responsibilities.  With the rise of capitalism and the humanistic notion of individual worth, the new peasants, the workers, became the “soil” for entrepreneurship.  There were  schools established in the 19th century for the peasants to study such subjects as marriage contracts and other aspects of contract law, in addition to some general education.  The present need in post WW I Germany was for the modern peasants (workers) to protect their rights by re-establishing the dissemination of this type of knowledge.  The movements of the 19th century were characterized by political activists for the purpose of raising the economic status of workers and for protection against exploitation.

b.   There was an important distinction to be made, between the study of rules and the rights they bequeathed,  on the one hand,  and political action on the other.  Law is, by definition, oriented toward the past, and changing the law is directed toward the future. This new popular adult education, as represented by the Speidel school,  was oriented toward political action.  However, the orientation was insufficient because it became manifest in a form that was narrow and idealistic.  Rosenstock-Huessy explains in some detail the evolution of this phenomenon.  In a nut-shell, it amounted to Speidel concentrating on political forms, i.e. how to obtain workers rights.  They learned to stop certain types of practices through the courts, but in the meantime the economic disaster of the country made such political concern irrelevant.  The workers could not see that the larger picture was that their economic problems were tied to those of the rest of the country, and single issue political action then took on a bad smell.

“Politics today is filth,”  a businessman wrote recently.  He meant that idealistic political thinking which stares fixedly at Berlin, equating politics with government policy, law with state regulation,   public life with the life of the state. (p.11)

The failure of law was that cases came to be decided on the basis of a technicality.  This distorted the spirit of the law.

c.   The workers were mainly interested in learning 1) their rights and how to defend them, 2) law to become equipped to prosecute a lawsuit, and 3) arbitration processes.  Trials were seen as the scene of the real context between labor and management.  Distinctions between individual legal rights and public rights were important to understand, i.e. those established by legal procedure on the one hand, and those   “…shunted off into politics, campaigns, parties, and parliaments,”  on the other hand.

d.   In practice, the Workers’ Council Schools failed 1) because their membership was too homogeneous, and 2) because they allowed themselves to become too fragmented into a narrow, specialized approach to solving their problems, as described (in b, & c) above. This is to say, because of a failure to identify the larger context of their society into which their movement fitted. Also, 3) they failed because they saw their situation as a microcosm of all social activity.

Do not underestimate the danger of this situation! It is the last bit of “soil” in society which is being consumed….True teaching is, and must be lacking, because it is borrowed, and borrowed from a world divided into theories and practices.  The incest in these schools, that in them the workers are only among themselves, we can only take for the second impediment to the schools’ coming to spiritual independence. But this impediment has a greater importance now than ever before.  Because in our fundamentally weakened people, each individual group is incapable of regenerating the spiritual life, even of its own environment.  (pp.16,17)

e.   “How can we understand the prospects for these two types of schools, “wisdom and law,” and what should we hope for?” (p.17)

 

editorial comments:

Up to this point the author speaks of the degeneration of Germany in 1925, exacerbated by improper teaching of adults.  The failure of both schools was in being incapable of counter-balancing the corrupted institutions.  Therefore the need for a new type of teaching, which Rosenstock-Huessy dubs “andragogy.”  Andragogy was conceived to sensitize adults to the meaning (spirit) of their times, to awaken the spirit and motivate action on the part of the citizenry to improve the community.  It would be entirely appropriate to  call this new teaching, “a higher form” of teaching.  It exactly parallels the relationship of his new form of grammar that ERH called, “The Grammatical Method.” This new grammar goes beyond Alexandrian Grammar, which we all learned.  And in a like way, “Andragogy” goes beyond traditional teaching.

The distinction between pedagogy, demagogy, and andragogy is important, because each has a different but justifiable  purpose.  Each calls for a different methodology.  It is equally true that, in reality,  these types can never become isolated and followed in a “pure” form, because there is always overlap at every level.  Each type either calls for or anticipates the next step.  For instance, all learning requires memory, vocabulary, sequence, logic, and so forth.  And even with andragogy, in certain situations the purpose and methodology of pedagogy and demagogy would be subsumed as part of the teaching process.  This is to say, in some situations with adults, where the students are new to a subject, and the teacher is an expert, the students are hardly in a position to determine goals or participate equally with the teacher.  Contrarily, in elementary school part, of the preparation must anticipate andragogy.

[RF – Having said this, I would hope the reader can better understand the full implications of the final section.]

 

IV.    The School of Law

Rosenstock-Huessy points out that the time to create new institutions is in the time of need.  In this case in Germany, he points out how the lost war reflected  a number of social breakdowns, deeply divided social classes, deeply divided specialized professions, a demoralized citizenry in which self-confidence, a vision for a future, and hope were at the lowest point, and finally, serious divisions as to teaching methods and curricular theories.

A school for adults, which would produce individuals prepared to face problems and create new forms to deal with new problems, what ERH calls in this essay “Schools for men”  (p.19), must break new ground.   The needs (goals)  were clear:  1) to unite deeply divided social classes, 2) to create some commonality of interest between the most deeply divided specialized professions, 3) to also take into account both individual and group needs, and finally 4) “…to melt down the isolated specialized teachers into one teaching community.”   Another way of generalizing this concept is that the educational system must be based upon the experience of the country, an experience where failed institutions and much suffering was rampant.  What was needed was:

…a School of Events, and a school for those who have undergone those events.  The mere man of knowledge, the dogmatist, the professional man, the philosopher, the rationalist, all those who neither can, nor will let their knowledge be changed by events, have no place in andragogy.  The priest and the Levite pass by:  only the Samaritan is ready to think and act anew!  (p.19)

Demagogy:  The state is interested in promoting its own survival, which means that there must be some modicum, some minimum common spirit by which unity and public order could be maintained.  The state there has a primary interest in maintaining an educational system that will sustain this common spirit.  Examples are given: Germany in 1810 and France 1871 were both defeated in war, and each country started new schools.  However, for the reasons stated above, these new schools failed to appropriately prepare adults.  The new concept must recognize and subsume the justifiable need for the state to create unity among its citizens.

Andragogy:  The context in which the need for a new approach to the educational system that would go beyond “Demagogy” was the degenerated, dispirited state of Germany in 1918.  He raises the question, “How are individuals and groups to regenerate themselves and their country?”

It is not only a question of preserving our state, but of barbarization of Europe.  It is not only a question of inspecting politics in the capital, but of ordering life in all parts and places of the country.  It is not a question of teaching a homogeneous student body, but of bringing a disparate population together.

All adult education, if it is to achieve anything original, anything that shapes men, anything that arises from the depths of time, will have to proceed from the suffering which the lost war has brought each of us…  (p. 18)

The basis for a new power of teaching must arise from the shared experience of both student and teacher.  Where  that experience was catastrophic, it heralded the need for a new type thinking and  of a new type of adult.  With andragogy, not only was this experience to be shared in the sense that the background of students was to be a constant source of data in the teaching process, but  the age of student and teacher is shared as well, as the teacher’s age was typically close to that of the student.

1.     The difference between adult and elementary education:

a.   A child, by definition, has not yet the capability of taking on responsibility in the community.  He/she learns to develop skills, follow curiosity, and is allowed to play and enjoy and follow natural inclinations along these pathways.

b.   The adult is one who has taken responsibility, who has entered the life and history of the community, who suffers from the failed processes in the community as well as  having enjoyed its benefits.  The mature adult, in order to heal the wounds of failed processes …”must build on the graveyard of dreams and of withered blossoms, if they mean to rescue what can be rescued.” (p.21)

c.   “Nationalism and Naturalism” are the enemies of adult education, negating the need for adult education.  The focus of nationalism is on the past, and the principle direction is toward solving economic problems.  The narrowly-oriented nationalist tends to be relieved of re-examining present conditions, of freeing the citizen from having to strive for change that is, in fact, needed.  An example is the tendency of nations to go to war over past grievances, rather than finding solutions based upon present conditions.

“Naturalism,” as the name implies, is following natural tendencies; it is natural for workers, according to Rosenstock-Huessy,  to study events of the past that may be interesting, but with no conclusion as to what wisdom these events might offer in the present, sparing them the need to act on that knowledge.  As historian Page Smith put it, “..sparing them the need to attend to what must be learned, rather than merely what might be interesting to learn.”  Growth and change at once oppose natural tendencies, growth and change that are essential for survival from one generation to the next, for creating a more viable future.

d.   Historical thinking is a fundamental dimension of andragogy, in that past events are to be analyzed for what can be learned from them so that  past failures might not be repeated.  In this way the past becomes unified with the present and future.  Adult education must rise above natural tendencies.  Knowledge is never settled for long.  [RF – One is reminded of a well-known aphorism of Alfred North Whitehead, “Knowledge keeps like fish!”   Knowledge must be validated by being acted upon. Since action  takes place only in the present, time is unified completely (past-present-future).  What is most likely to draw people together is a common recognition that dreams must be achieved, or at least movement toward them.

e.   Consistent with these principles, theory and practice are to become unified in the method of andragogy. Only thus is any knowledge validated, and at the same time that knowledge is re-invented and renewed. It then becomes alive, filled with meaning.

In andragogy, theory becomes  practical deed, in the responsible word; in the crucible of necessity, however, practical deeds become the stuff of theory. (p.23)

f.    Synonyms for andragogy would be “adult education” or the “school of events.”

g.   Andragogy is not merely “better” as an education method for this purpose, it is a necessity:

The decision whether we want to continue in the old division of pedagogy and demagogy is no longer ours to make.  For our childish dreams are played out, and the demagogical arts of seduction are no longer of any use.  Dreams and arts have been smashed by a ghastly reality.  We can either do nothing, which is to say, remain dead, or we can say “yes” to the School of Law, speak as men from the prave of our hopes, and so come to life once more. (p.25)

IN THE CROSS OF REALITY – 1927

(Translation from Soziologie by R. Huessy)
Feringer notes
Last edited: 6-29-99

1.The problem focus of this essay is how humankind overcomes death.

All “men”  kill, because  they must seize living things in order to live.  All men die.  So nothing that happens could become history  if there were no cure for death.

The history of mankind is composed on one theme alone:  how does love (of life) become stronger than death?  (p.1)

[RF –  I believe it is useful to add a personal comment here, raising the question as to what Rosenstock-Huessy means by the term “death.”  I have often puzzled over attempts at interpreting his work, until I reminded myself of his specific definitions and assumptions. The reader will find it useful to keep  these in mind.  What Rosenstock-Huessy is referring to here is “spiritual death,” since that is the only form of death we are empowered to overcome.

If the reader reviews several other essays, such as SPEECH AND REALITY, PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE SOUL, or the lecture transcripts on COMPARATIVE RELIGION, he/she is reminded of the three basic concepts of reality Rosenstock-Huessy articulates, with three separate methodologies for the analysis of our experience.  The three methods are, of course, natural science, social science, and religious science.  Yes, “religious science.”  (See the first chapter of SPEECH AND REALITY for a detailed defense of his logic.)  It seems to me these form the bedrock of his concept of reality, upon which the GRAMMATICAL METHOD is founded. Speech  unifies the three phenomena of nature, society and the soul.  The soul being the driving force for one’s journey toward change, growth and fulfillment.

A fountain of youth, or any other  power which claims to extend both  physical and spiritual life, depends upon a vital community and that, in turn, rests on individual strength of character, a willingness to make sacrifices to maintain  community; inner strength he defines as, “the soul.”  For instance, the body of Socrates has been ashes for some twenty five centuries, but his spirit (soul) has survived through history to influence any who desire to be enlightened by it.  Rosenstock-Huessy’s  subject therefore is no irrelevant, abstract artifice of religion.]

All serious religions were created solely to address this issue of death.  That some religions teach a belief in reincarnation of a physical form  is not what Rosenstock-Huessy is defending here.  [RF – The Dalai Lama, presenting himself as living in different bodies for thousands of years, describes the spiritof these lives through history, not  physical continuation. The spirit of previous Dalai Lamas is taught to the next generation.]

2.       Since early times, beginning with the oral tradition, the word has been carried from one generation to the next.  The message is in the form of  stores of how to survive: the strength of heros and failures of villains, in a word, what is reality. Our  earthly existence is determined in part by physical needs; we are born, live for a while and die.  Our social life is ruled by different laws, of initiation, of  celebration of our physical powers (exemplified by sex and passion), and our power to influence our lives (through ceremony, and sacrifice (in modern times, sacrifices in war or other community service).  All religions in all ages have celebrated these basic needs in one way or another.

3.       Tribes throughout history that survived, we can assume, lived a reality that, at some minimal level, engendered survival. But Rosenstock-Huessy attributes the articulation the bringing them to consciousness, to Jesus of Nazareth. The method for achieving regeneration was thus revealed. “This,”  ERH interprets  here what Bible is about, it is the process by which we overcome death.  But the reader may be surprised to learn that this survival may not be what he thinks it does.

4.       The journey to salvation, of both individuals and society, is a journey from “outside to inside,” from  the physical wants of our natural animal nature to the evolution of a spiritual strength of humankind. Another way of putting it is the building of an inner core of strength to face problems and act to correct them – the development of a personality, of a soul.  The method requires giving part of our lives to community service, building inner strength by developing the courage to constantly seek and act on truth as we know it when appropriate, and perhaps most of all,  constantly working at re-discovering reality (truth).

5.       Outer life is ruled by physical needs and described by “natural laws.” Laws that describe the inner life of intuition and thought and that curb grievous animal instinct are vastly different from laws of nature. We live in two worlds, then, and while these worlds are different and ruled differently,  they are inexorably intertwined, forming the unity we call living, coming to life, moving toward human potential.

6.       Natural science cannot comprehend the chasm between natural and spiritual life, between the  “outer,” and the “inner.” Nor  does traditional theology, as interpreted today,  concern itself with how a natural man (Jesus as a child and later, a carpenter) became  supernatural.  Yet, we all change in one way or another. Physical changes derive from nature, but learning which transforms us from one level to another is miraculous. We are the animal which holds the potential to become part god, by virtue of our learning to grow and become creative. While this may seem nonsense, because we do not create seeds or any other living form, one may ask just what we do create.  The answer should be obvious, we create communities which are the environment in which we, individually, may become capable of thinking something never before thought of. Each stage in this transformation is a small miracle in every sense of the word.

Traditional explanations of religions the world over, including Christianity, seem to believe that gods are gods and ever are, and shall be.  Although Christians are in awe of Jesus as a miracle worker, Christian denominations fail to concern themselves with his incredible change represented in this story.

The relevance of this issue, the path from outer to inner, is simply, that the human spirit is the master key to moving in the direction of human potential.   The story of Jesus from the Bible tells us of a journey that we also can make, in part. Science explains nature; it has little to say about non-physical phenomena.The problem caused by the gap, as Rosenstock-Huessy describes it,  between “outer and inner” life is that it creates a barrier to learning how we change from a lustful animal into what we presumptively call, “a vital human being.”  We are born totally demanding of our physical needs but with a potential to become creative.  None would deny that the goal of all cultures is to teach people to think for themselves, to seek truth, to speak out and otherwise act in efficacious ways, on what we believe.  And all of this must culminate in the creation of a decent community because without it we would remain as jungle animals.

7.       Spiritual growth is the linchpin to all such learning. Teaching, as traditionally practiced, is mere transfer of information leading to the creation of drones.  Vital teaching seeks a transformation of the listeners. To be transformed means to become a new type of being with a new nature.  Such growth requires more than thought alone; it must fire involvement, testing of ideas through experience and analysis. This, of course, is not to be taken without risk. The meaning of the Crucifixion of Jesus is that transformation is bought at the price of sacrifice, whatever its form may be.

8.       Creativity needs to be defined. Basically, the term means thinking for ourselves as contrasted with a life of living on the ideas of others; which we all do, by necessity,  much of the time.  Creativity must be a constant process of developing new tools in art and science to constantly refine our knowledge of reality and our changing environment. Even using the thought of others demands that we consider and accept or reject that thought; it demands that we be accountable for our thought and actions. A community, at peace with itself, is the essential environment to engender all of these elements of survival.  So the notion of creativity in this sense is essential to our survival and therefore the central goal of all education. [RF – One doesn’t need to reflect long to understand that survival also depends on a social (religious) morality.]  Heaven is not separate from human experience, not a place of sugar-plumb fairies we go to after death; that is the child’s vision.  The sublime meaning of heaven and hell is as a metaphor for the communities we build.

Thus, the path (method) to our development into creativity is the lesson ERH  takes from the Bible.  What then is the essence of this method, not entirely original with, but articulated by Jesus?

9.       Natural science methods do not claim to inform us about many (the most crucial) aspects of social life, such as the  phenomenon of creativity and inner strength. It was created to deal with description of inanimate phenomena which are predictable and amenable to precise measurement.  Yet many social scientists do indeed use  natural science  method for social analysis. [RF – perhaps as the noted psychologist Edward Guthrie averred, The scholastics systematized a world of unripe knowledge and thereby protected it from its enemies, but at the same time they denied it the chance for progress.

The method is inappropriate for social phenomena because many social events remain inexplicable as to cause, and hardly amenable to meaningful numerical measurement, timing, or useful prediction. This is to say, we often cannot explain why  one or more persons may have taken some action or why they had some insight.  We can only reveal a change by describing a chain of events telling the story of what happened.]

The essence of  human experience is that one witnesses transformation of people; an event may change a person from civil behavior into that destructive psychotic, an honest person may become a criminal, a coward becomes a hero, or an inspiration may cause a person to take action that changes history. Many social events suddenly occur surprisingly.  Such transforming events are not predictable in specific ways. They seem miraculous.  Natural scientists, by their own admission cannot explain the origin of their own creative hypotheses.

10.     Why should we take such interest in spiritual (creative) growth?  Because it is the driving power for all original thought, for perseverance in the face of indomitable force, for our own transforming process as well as the ultimate necessity for the survival of all mankind. Power, unmitigated by ethics tears the community apart.   We enter this world as a powerless, complaining animal interested only in personal gratification and living by the moment with the potential to evolve toward that of  a courageous, intelligent person, willing to confront difficult  problems and having acquired the capability of regenerating ourselves and our community. Some miracle!

11.     Spiritual growth cannot be understood by a method of “pairing opposites” (measurements between acid/base, hot/cold, fast/slow, weak/powerful, etc.  Transformations of the human spirit are seldom logical. Rather, the process can only be understood in its unfolding, like scenes in a moving picture where a person  experiences a number of acts and evolving  stages of  behavior; “after knowledge.”.    But narration can produce crucial aspects of understanding of spirit. We commonly witness fundamental changes in persons.

.

Such witnessing holds the power, either directly or vicariously, to change one. Example, as an effective method of teaching  was known by my grandmother’s grandmother. ERH asserts that this mystery is exemplified by the life of Jesus, who began as a natural person (a carpenter), became a visionary teacher, and finally, Christ.  The message speaks to us – that human beings are capable of similar transformation. The power of witness is the method by which a new “spirit” can enter and transform us.

12.     The term, “nature,” defines entities which cannot change; this is usually dead matter. this lack of ability to change allows for predictable cause/effect relationships to be discovered and cast into useful theoretical concepts with a logical unity.  Paradox, on the other hand is common in social life:  behaviors are often contradictory,  a person evolving from a squalling infant into an Einstein is in one sense the same person that has undergone momentous change.    Tom Jones was Tom Jones from one to seventy-five years.   Speech by itself lacks the power to change one, it must be accompanied by witness.

13.     Logic holds power to inform, but never to transform. Measurement in social experience more meaningfully reckons by mile-stones, before-and-after significant events, a before one had emerged into something else. The “divine world” of spirit is briefly revealed by such witnessing; never by words alone.

14.     A vital life is not the life of mere plodding repetition day after day. Building a community and a vital personality requires an integrated set of evolving behaviors over a lifetime.   One must participate in community life by responding to experience and in the process, learning from it and responding efficaciously to it.  We advance in leaps, as each successful era in our lives ends and the next begins.  Creation is a never ending process of the end (death) of one behavior and resurrection in renewal.  In a small way this takes place in imitation of Jesus, from one stage of evolution to the next, Rosenstock-Huessy implies.

15.     Each advance represents a new spiritual redefinition of the world.  The world (our perceptions of it) has been redefined when we learn; sensitivity to this new stage will carry the power to overcome our fears and risk action on these new insights. The process of growth carries a moral responsibility because one cannot improve oneself without community.  This process of growth by successive stages of transformation advance is trinitarian; we enter the process responding to our world as we have seen it, living what we believe to be a true reality. This, obviously,  accepts the past as our authority. Then some experience creates what seems to be a new insight, a new, advanced concept of truth. This “vision” motivates us in the present to act on (test) the idea.  In the process of living it, we discover its validity. Discovery of a new truth and acting on it reflects a faith that our change will portend a better future.  Obviously, Easter symbolizes this continuous process of creativity.

16.     The transformation occurs in three discrete stages of before, during, and after – living in the past, present and future. The essence of growth is to think in new ways.  Our everyday thinking always looks to the past.

All thought is afterthought, thought about a finished world…The creative speaker on the other hand is the mouth of an unfinished world, one which is becoming a word in him….All discovering thought…happens in just this way. (p.5)

The concept of the Trinity in Christian speech, Father, Son, and Holy Spirit,reflects this discovering process.  This is to say, our views from the past always represent a tentative understanding of the world, but that understanding is enlarged by a discovery of previously unseen reality rather than a conceptualization from the past.  While that conceptualization is a part of the process, it is eternally incomplete by itself.  We only grow through constant stages of change. [RF – certainly this implies the right kind of change at the right time, not change for its own sake.]

17.     Thinking for oneself is a necessary, everyman’s everyday manifestation of creativity.  Rosenstock-Huessy describes the actions of Jesus as demonstrating this trinitarian process available to the human race, unlocking the mystery of growth.  He also explains it in this essay in terms of “Life, Teaching and Wirkung,” that is,  living out of the past, teaching the vision of newness, and being an activist (living the faith in the vision in the present).  It engenders the power which “brings us to life.

Change, of course, can result in either success or failure, for  better or worse.  What does it mean to be overwhelmed by what we believe to be truths we have thought? We must prove (or disprove) the worth of our thought; otherwise it is mere entertainment. Thought, un-acted on, remains impotent speculation. The  creative force of the spirit comes after one has lived the vision. And our words only have power influencing others when they are backed by our own actions.  Failure, negative consequences are be just as valuable as success because knowing what does not work is useful.

18.     ERH cites the metaphor of the seed, blossom and fruit as parallels to creative thought.  The seed must be germinated and the blossom pollinated, then, under the right conditions, the fruit will appear.  No one element of this trinity has power in isolation; the three parts must be a whole and the proof, of course, is the existence of the fruit.

The boy awakens as a youth so his feelings may “be thought through” as thoughts; the youth ripens to manhood so that his thoughts may become deeds.  If the youth does not eventually overcome glorious squandering of self, if the academic remains tangled in systems and analyses of his own free will, the man who grows from them willy-nilly and who must somehow deal with life and its myriad circumstances, will deal with them poorly, lamed as he is in soul and spirit. (p.12,13)

19.     True learning involves accepting the call of the vision, acting on it, describing to others what happened as a result, then, analyzing for generalizations.  What changes us from ordinary to extraordinary  is developing this spirit.

20.     In sum, this essays describes the path from total dependence on “outer” influences to an “inner” weighing of life. In a sense one may say that experience must be filtered through a spirit, the inner life to be matched against a vision.   What is the fruit of  creativity?

The “sinner” looks for life in busy-ness.  The man of action/influence knows that busy-ness  is only death. He has lived.  This life has been transfigured in his vision.  If he looks back at life, it is no longer his life that he rediscovers.  He has sailed forth from his life, steering a strange ship into the world… (p.13)

Having changed, one has unavoidably acquired a new perspective on life and both memory and anticipation of the future take on different colors.  Our vision has put us in touch with divinity for a moment, but only a moment before we are returned to earth, drawn onward, impelled to recreate the world in the direction of that vision.

Connected to the star that stood over it, destined to prove the worth of what it has viewed, it climbs back down from the bright space of the spirit into life on earth … (p.13)

To truly change in this way is one of life’s everyday miracles.  It is to think things never thought before, and to act against odds and even in the face of danger if need be; it is taking on traditional powers and  propelling us beyond the common earthly animal state in which we were born.  We have gone beyond the natural, toward the supernatural state.

…we are not gods. But we can live in the supernatural, and take life from the supernatural which confronted us in the act of vision and illumination, rebirth and change; and that means accepting a call and working. (pp. 13,14)

21.     Mortals are not gods; they are the animal which is capable of being touched by some creative power. Mortals are part children of nature who are totally influenced from outside forces. This part of us is self-centered, taking  no responsibility for the community. We must also become workers, laboring to survive on earth. These qualities of humanness describe our animal nature. Touched by creativity, however, we are also part visionary.

The profound meaning of the Trinity teaches a necessary balance between these three orders of man that  can bear the fruit of transformation.  Transforming from animal to “human,” comes at a price. The moral obligation of intelligence and action is that sacrifice must be made to build the community.

22.     There exists different moralities, one for each of the “stages of man.” The natural animal part of us explains our need to satisfy  selfish  wants and defensiveness.  The worker part of us describes the necessary energy required to accomplish deeds. Both of these qualities, left to themselves, take us down the narrow path toward abuse of others, self indulgence, greed, hatred, all of which leads to destruction.  Individuals and people in groups,  public or private, become killers when not led by a principled soul.

Absolute power in any form, but especially that of the state and large bureaucracies, becomes monstrous when led by pure self-interest. This force destroys social life sooner or later.

The polemics of both Machiavellian “realist politicians” and the ethical fanaticists are so unappealing because they seek the divine in men in mere dictatorial imposition on the one hand, and in mere bourgeois morality on the other.  That is why the full miracle of the trinity had to take on personality in one man, so that the division of man into a diabolical giant and a divine dwarf, into state and individual, could be done away with once and for all.  (p.16)

23.     The final link in the process of  creativity, then, must be one of divine selflessness.  The individual must  pay dues to the community for his survival because a community, fed by both physical and spiritual food, is the creator of language, which is singly responsible for the transformation from the Darwinian society to one which engenders the true human potential.  The creative spirit of the individual which brings one to life is, at once, engendered by the community, and the community gives it everlasting life.  And religion, in the most sublime sense, can never be merely personal.  It too can give us power individually, but that power can only derive from a moral community.  And it is for this reason that every living person owes a commitment of some kind to the community. All three moralities – of natural man, of the visionary, and of the worker/activist   must remain in compatible balance within each of us.

Survival occurs because man is free to move back and forth among these three roles, keeping them in balance.  The “statesman” at the head of government is essential to prevent it from acting as absolute and adrift.  The state, and all organizations within it, must be led by carriers of “divine ethics,” not just those of “natural man.”

UNIVERSAL HISTORY – 1967

Lectures 1-20
Feringer notes
Notes started: 12-91
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.We are constantly threatened with oblivion.  To attempt to avoid this, indeed to also conquer death and to create the most desirable society, we must listen to history, because only there can we find guides to achieve our end.

The minimum potential of mankind is to remain animal and to die.  The maximum is to create, to work toward  “heaven on earth”, [RF – I have found it useful to paraphrase this as meaning  “a decent society on earth.”]  SUCH A SOCIETY CAN BE APPROACHED ONLY WHEN WE KNOW THE UNIVERSAL QUALITIES OF ALL HUMANKIND. THUS, THE NEED FOR A UNIVERSAL HISTORY, as contrasted with historical fragments such as the history of Russia, or of science, or of the American revolution. These are examples of specialized history. THE QUESTION THEN IS, “WHAT ARE THE COMMON DENOMINATORS  THAT APPLY TO ALL OF HUMANKIND?”

Our own age, or any single age, is too short to reflect all problems (generalizations) about man. Therefore, to better understand our experience, the only reference point we have to begin with is history.

2.What is worth remembering, what has to be remembered, and what is the minimum below which man remains a mere animal?

3.IT IS NOT TRUE THAT MAN WANTS TRUTH! “Very few groups in the world are out for truth..”  Read the papers, listen to the politicians, or fishing stories about the one which got away!  Human tendency is to accept expediency, half truths, fictions. Man has a natural proclivity to lie, to self agrandizment, to flee reality for the warm comfort of fantasy, or be lazy and accept simple answers; in short, to deceive both oneself and others.   HOW, THEN, DO WE FIND TRUTH IN HISTORY?

4.False knowledge is eventually revealed. Truth requires three generations who can agree on the meaning of a fact. (p.5)  The Spartans said, “All history — all battles, all campaigns, all legislation – has to be celebrated by three generations, by three choruses, the young; the grown-ups and the hoary heads (the old).”  Then men can understand each other’s judgment. History is very severe in its judgment as to what should enter it.  “Only those things enter history in which the grandfathers and the grandchildren agree.” (p.8)

5.The problems we need to solve today were generated in the past, and only if we know the past can we find some viable solution.

6.Why Universal History?  Only then can we learn what human societies have learned about their follies and successes. Universal history must begin with earliest man, and is only useful if it is this inclusive.

7.The first chapter of UNIVERSAL HISTORY is speech and naming, the calling and response by persons.  “…speech ends where people only talk about other things than themselves.” (p.15)  But to understand social experience, one needs to identify problems, to identify scoundrels and heros, that is the first achievement of speech.  Speech sorts out people, and is therefore dangerous. Speech determines whether there will be war or peace: speech = peace; no speaking = war.

The first lie in the Bible begins with Adam; he blamed his actions on the snake, taking no responsibility. Reflect on the several years it took to reveal the lies of our military, and what a pointless and immoral war (Vietnam)  was perpetrated on the American public!  We are constantly fed lies, and must learn to cope with this fact.

8.Parrots can talk just as can people (that is, repeat what has been taught them). Speech, by contrast is people speaking their beliefs honestly. To speak truth from the heart is divine.  History begins when people speak.

No individual can know truth from his/her own experience. It takes time, usually three generations –  grandfather, father, and son.  When these three agree on some fact or idea, one can have confidence in its validity. Therefore, anyone who believes only in his logic is wrong, because we live in the present, from moment to moment, with our lusts and biases – all of which must  be tempered by wisdom from the past.

9.The second question is, “What is the condition for making people do more than talk?” (p.19)  “The divinity of man is in the fact that he can be spoken to, and can speak–and not talk.” (p.20)  Man is free because he can choose between speaking and not speaking, and free to transform speech into action. History, as with all experience, can only be learned (understood) by response to events.

10.The Bible is universal history because it raises the basic questions of humankind. It was not written as a religious document, but as a sociological one. We learn, for instance, that short term solutions are expensive and never solve problems for long.  Specific events in history have little or no meaning outside the context of larger spans of events. And every people and every generation has something to contribute to universal history.

The first chapter of the Bible addresses speech, not linguistics, but the fact that  “…you call me Mr. Huessy, and I have to say, `Here I am’.” (p.15)  It confers status, in this case saying, “I am American, a Christian etc.” It is therefore beyond mere description, sorting out people into categories as to their beliefs and commitments, saying “yes” and “no,” drawing lines – and all this makes it potentially dangerous.

The divinity of speech (true speech as opposed to mere “talk”) lies in the fact that it is the only way by which mankind can be transformed from animal (at birth) into a truly human person.

Lecture – 2

1.Sacrifice holds humanity (the community, including all humanity) together. But human sacrifice is pagan, and voluntary sacrifice  (e.g. to be called to defend your country, or to do charitable acts.) eliminates that need.  All over the world, different cultures live in different stages of sacrifice, mostly pagan, some Stone-Age Indians. “Most people I meet live 1500 B.C.” (p.3)

You live in the Christian era if you don’t demand human sacrifice.  [RF – I assume this means human sacrifice broadly defined, for instance to blame others for one’s own failures.  And if you insist on voluntary sacrifice,  “…the people who bring these sacrifices must be worshiped, and must be respected, and must be included in your plan of life.” (p.3)

2.When we, as individuals, do not respond to relevant talk about events, when our newspapers or magazines ignore basic issues, when they ignore the lessons of universal history, then our culture is declining.  THE CHRISTIAN ERA ESTABLISHED THAT CERTAIN MINIMAL BEHAVIOR IS REQUIRED TO SURVIVE, I.E. VOLUNTARY SACRIFICE AND ASSUMPTION OF A UNIVERSAL HISTORY. (p.5)

UNIVERSAL HISTORY (the inclusion of everybody in the community) means that, if a community does not speak with its minorities, then eventually there will be war (of some kind) between those two.

3.Three major stages of development of human cultures:  First a universal church (the recognition of a universal creator). Second, one physical world covering the exploration of the universe (to survive we must know the physical world).  THESE FIRST TWO REPRESENT THE HISTORY OF HEAVEN AND EARTH. The third upon which we are now entering, is the recognition of a UNIVERSAL SOCIETY, that all mankind will be part of our consideration.

4.TRAGEDY AND HOPE ARE OPPOSITES.  Tragedy means there is not hope; it means the end.  With hope, the end means a new beginning. Hope is not found in the 4 Christian gospels, only faith.  Hope points backward, and faith toward the future.  Hope looks backwards, and  faith can’t see where its going. ( Faith is the willingness to change, being unsure as to how to change or where it will lead, but knowing that one must change.)  (p.11)

Hopes are of the physical world, faith of the spiritual.  Humans are unfinished; the work of the lord is to have us outgrow our hopes. (p.12)  Our personally centered hopes always produce tragedy.

Rather, our faith should urge us to sense, rather than hope, leading us toward what we are expected to achieve.

5.Since the earliest tribe, the goal has been to belong to the “all,” to the universe.

6.Parents are the creation of the tribes,  a father and mother  bringing up the child. THIS IS ALSO IN THE FIRST CHAPTER OF UNIVERSAL HISTORY.

THE SECOND CHAPTER IS THE CREATION OF PRIESTS over both heaven and earth, originating in the great empires, Egyptian, Babylonian, Assyrian, Chinese, Incan, Mayan. (p.15)

THE NEXT STEP IS THE CREATION OF PHILOSOPHY AND POETRY.

THE FOURTH CHAPTER, OUR PRESENT ERA, IS THE CREATION OF PROPHESY, AND OF PROPHETS. Prophecy, ERH asserts is part of our natural instinct to anticipate a future for ourselves.

Prophesy means that the present is not the mother of the future, but part of the present has to be wiped out, because otherwise we can’t reach our future.” (p.15)

7.There are two opposing points of view:  scientific, – that the past and present produce the future; and social, – that the past and the future will produce the present.  THUS, SCIENTIFIC THINKING, THAT WHICH PRODUCES ECONOMICS AND TECHNOLOGY IS NOT APPROPRIATE FOR APPLICATION TO THE PRODUCTION OF HUMAN COMMUNITY.  “…faith transforms the future into a fact, against the present odds.”  (p.17)

8.The remainder of the course will deal with these four stages of creation of UNIVERSAL HISTORY, the creation of parents, of priests, of poetry,  and of prophets. THE FOUR P’s!

Lecture – 3

1.History is what SHOULD be remembered.  What should be remembered are the elements of important epics, great tragedies, great accomplishments, and the conditions by which they occurred. (p.2)   Thus, “history” and “memory” (that is public memory) must be compatible if they are to be useful.

2.A famous actress stated, “I would like to be read in a hundred years.”  What is required of civilization, to survive in part by useful knowledge from the past, is a “…resolute forgoing of success today.”  That is, universal history should tell us what was important enough for people to be willing to sacrifice for, i.e. those forces required to improve community life in the long run.

3.THIS “FORGOING” IS THE MESSAGE FROM CHRISTIANITY, because it takes a long time for actions to bear fruit.  Not to have sacrificed is not to have made a distinction between past and future – and not to have made this distinction renders “history” a miscellaneous chronology of past events, unrelated to what may be significant in the long run.

4.Lack of memory is perhaps the distinguishing characteristic  of the politician; constancy   “…of your soul, of your body, is the condition of history.”  Changing one’s mind every day means having no convictions. (p.5)

5.Adaptation!  The psychologists admonish us to “adapt” to conditions.  While one must recognize and respond to reality, to a point,  one also needs to consider what needs to be changed.  ERH says, “So it is the essence of speech, of the creation of speech in humanity, to spare man the adaptation to any one moment.” (p.6)  It allows consistency in the long run. There must be compatibility between physical demands of the present and what will lead toward a viable future.

6.Education!  We are taught too much information that is not understood. Instead,  we should be exposed to things we can do something about, which are very important.  WHAT HAS KEPT TRIBES GOING FOR THOUSANDS OF YEARS IS THE POWER OF THEIR COLLECTIVE MEMORY. “History begins where death is survived.” (pp.8,9)

7.A MAJOR SURVIVAL POWER IS THAT OF UNITY, OF THE TRIBE, OF THE COMMUNITY,  AND THIS OF COURSE IS CONSISTENT WITH THE NOTION OF “CONSTANCY,”  OF “COLLECTIVE MEMORY OF HISTORY,” as described above.

The tribe reflects that unity; it was the tribe which made “man” into a singular.

Initiation (into a tribe, profession, community, club ) is an important test, because the individual relies on his/her judgement at the time, not on rote memory.  This is why school exams are of such little use as measures of worth.  TODAY WE LACK PROPER INITIATIONS.  THE PURPOSE OF THE INITIATION IS TO INHERIT THE POWERS BY WHICH MAN SURVIVES DEATH.  Taken figuratively, this applies to the continuation of all organizations.

8.We need to have ancestors, not necessarily blood ancestors, but we may have to choose them,  those who will  enliven our spirit and help us grow, who possess a spirit  needed by the community. The specifics of the present require an emphasis on some actions, but that emphasis must be consistent with leading toward the future.  Mere expediency doesn’t do this.

9.In this, the third millennium, we must now learn these lessons if we are to establish better communities, learning how to court each other, to agree  “…to learn the power to speak something which no one has ever heard before.” (p.15)

10.To sing, to recite poetry, to speak the right thing at the right time, to be begin something new is a means to this end.

Man is not here to cultivate his ego.  He is here to subject his ego to the needs and necessities of history…by beginning to speak time and again, with a new enthusiasm, with a new language. (p.18)

Lecture – 4

1.We are now trying to end the 2nd millennium and begin the 3rd.  And we are not sure where we should be going, how to proceed or what should be the motivation to bring change.

2.For the last 1,000 years we have been in the Renaissance, back to pre-Homeric heroes. We go forward by looking backward (first). ERH believes we must now go back further if we are to gain insight into how to proceed, “…to the oldest layer of human speech and human politics, which we can reach….We are in the midst of an investigation of the tribe in his migration.”  This period from the past, he avers, is analogous to our present migration into the third millennium.

3.Primitive man could not live in cities.  He lived  without “culture”, but nevertheless, still great and heroic. Heroic in the sense that he did what had to be done to survive. The primitives were out to find truth and necessity, and to conquer death. (p.3)  So primitive man was not less than we are today.

For instance, they knew what things needed to be done “at the right time,” neither too late nor too early.  The word “tidy” comes from tide, implying timeliness.  WE ARE LOST TODAY BECAUSE WE HAVE LOST THIS SENSE, AND WE BELIEVE EVERYTHING CAN BE DONE AT ANY TIME. (p.5)  ERH expounds on the origin of the word “meal” as an example,  a reflection of the early tribal sense of politics. It meant doing something at the right time. The “session” of the meeting of the German tribal court was at mealtime.  “A man who is fit to live with others in an organized society”,  is civilized. The tribes knew this.

“Man in a group, inspired and singing, reaches divinity.” (p.7)  Today the tribe is still the taskmaster.

4.Tribes are the people who lived thousands for years in an ordered society, peacefully – it was why they survived.  Their order contained creative speech because generations could understand each other.

5.Because we see things differently at different ages, because we change, we can grow, and we can only grow because through speech we are capable of communicating these changes in ourselves.  Our time and timing in history become reference points for those changes. Thus, our world is “made” by speech.  Animals can’t do  this ERH said, “I used to be German, now I am American, this an animal can’t do.” (p.11)

6.The second thing speech can do is to allow us to join another group.

7.We are now in deep trouble, living with the Greek ethic, “…on the verge of deep corruption….Homosexuality is rampant,” as is incest, child molestation.  We learn 12 languages in our lifetime. (The term “language” is used here in a special sense.  Here ERH reflects on what he called elsewhere the 12 tones of the spirit, each of which required what he calls “language.” )

8.In another sense we need to learn three languages: 1) of the past, 2) of the future, and 3) of the present.  Today we tend to lose some ability to articulate and by indirection formulate our thoughts, because of radio and TV.  It is said we use language to tell lies.

We are thus losing our language.  [RF – one only needs to reflect on the power of most people’s thinking to see this.]   Tribes were able to use the same language for 5,000 years, and ours by comparison seems to be going in 50 years!

9.The tribal order knew they had three things to represent, 1) the impassioning in begetting, 2) the mood of being sober when eating or marching, and 3) the mood when sacrificing.  There are innumerable ways in which to do all of these things.

10.Worshipping the past is appropriate to a point, but one needs to maintain the power to eschew some of that past at some point. The willingness to leave something, to sacrifice, to form new units, these are three miracles that tribes knew.  “…you people cannot understand the Bible any longer, because you do not know that life always needs sacrifice.” (p.18)

11.We  have individual identity only when we speak for some community, some order. We are not important when we speak for ourselves.

11.THE ROLE OF PLAY.  The tribes knew that, out of play people were convinced that something serious should come, that at some time hence the play must be serious.  Today we tend to believe the opposite, that serious things can be turned into play. ERH admonishes us,

…the creative act that is demanded from our society for the next 900 years is that we must learn from studying play and our behavior in play, that probably certain offices have to be created in society, which no longer exist. (p.21)

He points out that the original use of masks, of animals, etc. were examples of this tribal understanding that acting out certain types of events (in play at first) were metaphors for what should become true.

Lecture – 5

**

1.UNIVERSAL HISTORY is different from “world history” in terms of method. World history’s method would be to begin at the beginning and expound to the present. There isn’t enough time in life to do this, nor does it make sense.

The concept of “universe” is limited; it has a unity.  It is the victory over danger that makes history interesting (and meaningful).  Thus, in telling a story about Lincoln, and how he overcame all his problems, we learn some truths. This method, of universal history, begins at the end (in this case a great figure) and tracks his life thus deriving the miracle of how he achieved his accomplishments. In world history, “…everything just happened.”  We see only what the world is,  with no implication as to how to change it.(p.1)

2.The hope of universal history is that we will survive and rebuild society,  achieving victory over death by acting in a way that will be remembered. THUS, CURIOUSLY, WE LEARN TO GO FORWARD BY FIRST GOING BACKWARD.

3.Our choice seems to be to have a vision of utopia, on the one hand,  or simply of endless revolutions as having “happened.”  Revolutionaries “…run forward into the future.” (p.3)  IF WE DO NOT LEARN THINGS THAT RELATE TO OUR OWN LIVES, KNOWLEDGE OF THE PAST IS USELESS. “History without promises is no history.” (p.6)   We must learn to be different tomorrow from what we are today. This insight comes largely from the past.

EVENTS OF THE PAST ARE INTERESTING ONLY FOR WHAT THEY POINT TOWARD IN THE FUTURE, and thus the future can be sensed, felt and touched.

4.WE HAVE TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN THREE UNIVERSES THAT MAN HAS TRIED TO CREATE IN ORDER TO INSURE THAT THE LESSONS FROM THE PAST ARE CARRIED INTO BUILDING A FUTURE.  “…you will all be wiped out unless you recover your sense of a unified purpose for the future, because then you are working at cross purposes.” (p.8)

5.The moods that drive us are: 1) Mating (the power to create  unified generations by song and speech),  2) ecstasy (power to go beyond one’s self, that state by which we forget ourselves and passionately act, courting and singing; 3) death (that is to consider death, that one has only so much time, that one must consider what is worth dying for.)  There is, in other words a time when we must draw a line and risk dire consequences, and say “Over my dead body!” (p.13);  4) faith, the power to survive death, to sacrifice without being sure.

These are the moods that make us a human being, and at the same time serve to regenerate the community. What we learn from the past is subtle, and different from knowing facts about things. With living societies, we can identify one’s intuition as to meaning (before action), only through looking at past events. Only in history can we see some implication for what actions we are to take in the present, by sensing who we are and what we want to be. Second, we must act with passion, forgetting who we are.  Third, we must have faith that our actions will have the desired consequences, because we cannot know for sure.

The Trinity is true! There has never been anything else in the world but to believe in these three great layers of human existence: sacrifice, passion, reason.  Of which reason is for the moment, and your personal satisfaction; in which passion is for the changing of your environment; and in which death is for creating a long-lasting future.  And if this is not the Trinity, I don’t know what it is.  That’s exactly how the Trinity is described in the dogma.  It’s not my fault that the cardinals have forgotten it….This Trinity is the father, and the Son and the Spirit.   (p.17)

6.Speech embraces all these three stages in a unity.  Social Darwinism represents the opposite, a lack of unity.  Survival of the fittest means one must kill in order to live.  “Survival of the (unfittest)…”  Rather the Trinity means another way to live, in the sense of building a future.  With constant killing, there is no future.  Darwinism tries to establish order out of the lowest common denominator, of animal instincts, “…and not of your passions and not of your sacrifices.” (p.21)

Lecture – 6

1.ERH recounts a story about the Aleutian  that establishes and engenders miraculous spirit to motivate correct behavior by way of dancing with masks. (p.2)   HE ASSERTS STRONGLY THAT THE PRIMARY CAUSE OF SURVIVAL OF THE COMMUNITY IS THE CONQUEST OF DEATH.  THE MASK REPRESENTS THE SPIRIT – ONLY THUS WILL A SPIRIT BE STRONG ENOUGH TO OVERCOME THE EVERYDAY TEMPTATIONS AND NATURAL (ANIMAL) INCLINATIONS TO WANT TO LIVE. ONLY THEN  WILL A COMMUNITY HAVE THE POWER TO REGENERATE ITSELF.  PEOPLE MUST BE “VOLUNTARILY” WILLING TO SACRIFICE, EVEN MAKE THE ULTIMATE SACRIFICE.

To look at the dancers meant death; one could only look down at one’s feet when they were unmasked.  To try, to see God, the inspiriting power, was forbidden.

2.The tribal tattoo was their language to establish an identity of a tribal member; no tattoo, no identity. These people, he asserts, were not primitive, they were primeval.

3.In the tribes, the spirit was called by speaking the right sequence of words. (p.5)  Language then was essential to engender the spirit. “Our words are the beginnings of our acts.”

4.”Think of yourself:  what makes you into real men?” (p.6)  One has speech only as long as he belongs…”Speech makes us move, or it isn’t speech.” (p.7)  We become human by receiving and giving commands.

5.”…The Bible is in the tattoo of every tribal warrior, and made him able to enter all kind of disguises, all kind of masks, and recovering his integrity by serving.  (p.8)

6.The first preoccupation of the tribe was the creation of parents and children (including initiating them into the tribe and seeing them evolve into adults). The second preoccupation was the creation of priests. Priest is another name for “an authority.”   ERH says, by implication, that we need to have role models whose spirit we hope to instill into ourselves.  To do this, the spirit of that person needs to be acknowledged, recognized, and spoken of, as one whose commands we will follow.

7.THE HUMAN SPIRIT. HOW TO BECOME POTENT?

It is only through speech, only through meaningful, convincing song, speech, command, obedience, authority, devotion, poetry, what have you.  (But certainly not what you all “intellect,” and not what you call “mind”…You can’t be potent and indifferent, because “potent” means to be enthused.  And “enthused” means to have a spirit that is bigger than your physical existence.

…man is that strange being that can at the same time know that he must be passionate, that he must conquer death, and that he must have a healthy body and be somebody. (p.16)

8.The Christian Church has purified the concept of the trinity.  We overcome death with faith, we overcome passion by love, and we overcome danger by hope. The Trinity symbolizes man’s ability to survive and grow, which means he must overcome death by creating a future through faith, maintain the ability to act in the present by love, and learn from and retain the best features from the past with hope.  Thus,  the father (present), the son (future), and holy spirit (authority from the past), are unified through speech in time.  One individual is all of these things at different times (if he enters history and acts appropriately, (honestly and with courage).

9.THE PRIEST, because he is the acknowledged authority, is assumed to have the wisdom and courage and authority to go outside tribal rules if need be. [RF – this seems to me to reflect the notion that no rules can be followed blindly, they must be interpreted to reflect “intent” in each new situation.]

Lecture – 7

1.The next stage in the evolution of human society (after tribes) was the establishment of the GREAT EMPIRES, Egyptian, Chinese, Aztec, and Mayan  whose pyramids symbolized the connecting of heaven and earth, of the holy spirit to action on earth.

Just as the tribal masks imitated birds and animals, the pyramids imitated  what was visible in the sky. (ERH points out how, at around latitudes 6-10 degrees, a special phenomenon of sun light indicated the pyramidal shape.

2.The pyramids indicated the notion that heaven and earth must be reconciled (p.3), which is to say, reconciling authority to guide actions in the present.

3.ERH goes on to explain how the great calendars were established. It was considered a privilege to observe the stars, implying that observation and obligation (services) must be connected.  To observe is to know, and to know implies competency and qualifications for priesthood.  And to be a priest is to serve.  THERE IS NO POINT IN OBSERVATION WITHOUT SOME DEFINED PURPOSE.  The great contribution of these empires was to discover order in the universe. Life then was seen as not hap-hazard.

4.It is unnatural for man to act against animal instincts. To follow trends or to live according to some type of order is a paradoxical problem. Thus, the thrust of human growth should be to attempt to become super-natural, to rise above nature by dealing with paradox.

Lecture – 8

1.”Man is this animal which, when he goes forward, must go backward.” (p.1)  The idea is that as humans we share in all of human history, which is all of one piece.  Our main thrust is always toward the future, to either recover from present social illnesses, or continue on our present destructive course, or survive one way or another.  To survive we need reference points in time; we need to know where we are now in some evolution of an era. There are eras within eras. We are still in the Christian era in the West, but also in the atomic era and in the beginning of the “cyber” era.

To understand this, one might imagine  one has amnesia, awaking in the morning and wondering what is to be done for the day.  Is there a crop to be harvested?  Is one a judge or doctor?  Obviously, one cannot continue  unless one is equipped with memory.  Likewise society needs memory to evaluate its present state of health, determine where it is in some set of social activities, and determine what must be done next and how long that action is likely to take.  To do this is to say we must determine what must be remembered and what forgotten from the past.  The farther into the future we need to prophecy, the further back into our history we need to know for the simple reason that longer timespans reveal more varieties of experience.

2.The tribal world created parents; the “sky” world created the notion of order”  …which cannot be interfered with.” (p.5)   (That is, the physical cycles and movements of “nature.”  However, the visible world of nature is not all there is.  Laws of nature and  our thoughts are invisible.  The issue then becomes, which world is dominant?)

We all live in two worlds: in the visible world, and in the world of consideration.  You couldn’t possibly, by looking at me, know how you should treat me.  You must have heard my name;…You must have come and sat down here.  That’s all in a second world, in a higher world, in a world of professions, in a world of knowledge, in a world of tradition….We can only be considered as moving in an order, which every one of us tries to smell with our flair, with our scent for the eternal order which we try to reproduce.  (p.5)

In Egypt the tribal power was reversed. “Not the ancestors commanding the living, but the living commanding the ancestors.  But if the tribes had it wrong was the Egyptian reversal the answer?  Jesus’ answer was a resounding NO!  Nature is one phenomenon of life, thought is another, neither is complete in itself.  For a science of society there must be an integration of the two and the following explanation provides an example of the history of this evolution of thought.

3.The Egyptians lived in an extended present which was 1460 years (the cycle of the Pliedes.) But when Christ came the problem of the Christian era was to supersede this long period.  The horoscope was for the empire, not for personal use. It served to anticipate planting and harvest.

The 1460 Egyptian years, the “great year” was too long to understand unity.  CHRISTIANITY INTRODUCED THE IDEA OF A WEEK WHICH EVERY INDIVIDUAL COULD UNDERSTAND AND SEE THE BEGINNING AND END EFFORTS.  This concept was the key to articulating how mankind was to progress, how it was to change society and therefore create a future.

4.Liturgy is the carrying out of steps in an order that is essential to community survival. Myth is a narrative story, which is true, but which cannot be reproduced by facts. (p.18) The narrative gives meaning to the liturgy.

Lecture 9

1.THE SELF doesn’t exist except in “your stomach.” Or in the “sky world”, or in the world of rules of order The purpose of the elementary school is to introduce children into this “sky world” (natural world).  It must begin the process of transposing a raw human being, through language, into “an element,”  a lieutenant in this movement  that is prepared to act toward creating social order.

In sum,  a segment of our education curricula is an attempt to introduce the “order” in nature and the method by which that order is discerned.

2.Great deeds are accomplished,  and crucial problems are solved by tackling that which is most difficult. Jesus could not have founded Christianity in Rome or any large center.  One must learn to solve the problem under the most difficult circumstances.

3.The Egyptians created a government, satisfying its people for 3,000 years, which was quite an accomplishment.  They did this by understanding “nature” e.g.  time of the floods etc.  Their social order was divided into peasants – those who worshipped the natural phenomena (movement of the stars), and  the priests, – those who were super-natural because they traveled “against” nature,  (north and south on the Nile as contrasted with the east-west movement of the sun and  stars).

The Jews came along and attempted to upset this order. [RF – This notion will be explored later I presume. I believe he may mean GREEKS rather than JEWS, as he immediately refers only to Greeks at this point in the essay.]

4.Until the time of the Greeks, knowledge was sacred,  inscribed on temple walls as hieroglyphs.  There was no writing on Greek temples, they abolished or secularized knowledge.

All of these older civilizations PRESCRIBED behavior with their knowledge about ancestors and the stars; this was meant to inspire obedience.   The Greeks, believing the gods controlled society, described behavior and categorized its several tendencies (i.e. systems of ideas – philosophy),  and forms of expression of their emotions (poetry).

5.The Greek substitute for the temple (with its prescriptive hieroglyphs) is the theory, the system.  The “Prescription” of the Egyptians were related only to the natural order of events (events in nature – but not social events).

The Greeks worshipped the notion of “systems,” which assumed humans might become god-like by controlling knowledge.

Both Greeks and Jews inherited the prescribing power of Egypt.

6.Greeks and Jews introduced the notion of man as  not part of the tribe, not beholden to his ancestors, not sticks and stones, but something different, with a mind of his own (mind was his god).

Lecture 10

1.ISAIAH, chapters 40-65, is the most important book of the Old Testament because it explains the notion of separation of church and state. Like the book of Job, no one knows who wrote (the second) Isaiah, nor is it clear how either book was chosen for inclusion.  It speaks to the problem of which power, church or state,  has dominance, or what  the division of labor between the two is intended to be.

ERH guesses  that Moses left Egypt 1280 BC.  Obviously, the Jews raised this problem at that time, that is, of the division of power between heaven and earth (mankind).  Both Isaiah and Job speak to this problem.

2.ERH  suggests that mankind has always been in awe both of the powers of the universe, (God), and his own power and has always attempted to comprehend them.  (p.4)

All over the ancient world, the Chinese, Etruscans, Persians, and other groups  were preoccupied with “…imitating the Egyptian example…They tried to establish empires.” (p.5)

3.Egyptians gave to the Greeks, writing, temples, agriculture, and calendar. Western man, for the last 1,000 years  has been infatuated with the Greeks.  “And the Greeks are not normal.” p.10-7    THE MAJOR GREEK ASSUMPTION WAS THAT THEIR “PHILOSOPHY” COULD  REPLACE PRESCRIPTIVE LITURGY. (p.11)  ERH warns us of the dangers of “systems. ”

He also points out that the meaning of the phrase, “to go ahead we must go back” is that, unless we can see different periods of ideas that (usually) “enslaved our thinking,” unless we see these periods objectively, as having been responses to a before, and an after, then we do not learn to see our current thinking objectively, and thus avoid being enslaved by that thinking.  To be enslaved is to be unable to look critically at our own thinking. Enslavement means imagining  that the way we think today is “natural,” or true!

4.The Greeks are insular; polytheistic, and simplifiers (generalizing experience) HERE HE DEFINES THE IMPORTANT CONCEPT OF“NATURE”.  We are not “natural,” only part natural.  Nature is suffering,  death, destruction, pollution, dirt, “BUT CERTAINLY NATURE IS NOT ORDER. EVERYTHING IN NATURE KILLS THE NEXT. NATURE IS WITHOUT MERCY BECAUSE…EVERY PART OF IT DOESN’T KNOW OF ANY OTHER PART.” (p.15)

The most important character in Greek philosophy is Hercules, who is the hero; THE GREEKS REPRESENT A COMBINATION OF TRIBAL ORDER AND SCIENTIFIC ORDER (from the Egyptians).

5.They accomplished this by stepping outside these systems, overcoming them, and using them.  They invented poetry to sustain themselves (as individuals) during longer periods of loneliness during  voyages, and to assuage their emotional state.

Thus, the nine muses became their gods.  God, the creator of the universe, was too powerful for this purpose.  We can only contemplate God in certain times, and for short periods – on the battle field, at the moment of death.

Lecture 11

1.That we live in this present year (1967) would be untrue, if four “offices” were not in place: 1) no parents in some form (teacher, godfather, nurse, older mentor), 2) no poets who could stylize and cultivate your feelings, 3) no prophets to clarify important aims of the community, and 4) no priests who incessantly direct you to know what is essential in your life, (marriage, childbirth, profession etc.).

THIS IS WHAT ALL INSTITUTIONS HAVE ATTEMPTED TO ACHIEVE FOR THE LAST 6,000 YEARS OR MORE.

All teachers try to bring your mind into compatibility with your soul and body,  i.e. not allowing your mind to fly fancily on its own course.

2.Our great job today is an attempt to save the contributions of Greece, while not worshipping them, and while setting aside the unadmirable aspects of Greece; e.g. homosexualism as the sole motivator of creativity, degradation of women, eternal war, slavery, and eternal repeating cycles of any type.

Poetry and theorizing  must be saved, however neither Greek poetry nor philosophy is a model for the future. [RF – nor are utopias, one might add, because they describe an ideal society, but prescribe no way to create it. As I understand ERH’s interpretation of Christianity, it is the method of creation, but the prices to be paid for social peace seems too high!]

Greeks lived for the moment – not seeing the need for unifying 3 generations. Poetry is to salve the mind for the present, which is necessary at times, but also we need to attend to the reality of survival over the long term.

3.The Greeks discovered or articulated the “other world,” the mind, but this is not all of life; we live in both worlds.

4.The Greek world tells us that we can be humanists (Greek) withoutparticipating in war, death, sacrifice, or passionate love (i.e. that we can have something for nothing, sans sacrifice). Living  requires response: “We cannot laugh always; we cannot cry always. But woe to the man who thinks he can direct his laughter and his woe according to his whim.” (p.9)

5.WHAT DID THE GREEKS ACHIEVE THAT IS ADMIRABLE?  They freed themselves from the “iron clad” vice of Egyptian enslavement, of sky-world prescriptions.  1) They recognized the plurality of the forms of life. 2) Each form was to be understood and respected, e.g. Homer taught that the enemy is to be fought, but also that he is your brother.  3) There are many possibilities for ordering thought. It is difficult for one to judge,  for instance, among the different philosophies!

Greek religion, poetry, the Muses accompany mankind on his travels. HOWEVER, the calendar of nature and the calendar of mankind have very little to do with each other.

6.The Greeks are an “in-between” civilization, freeing us from the iron grip of the prescriptions of nature (the sky empires). They integrated tribal and sky empires by focussing on the individual,  and they integrated the personal emotions and passions; through poetry. In other words, to build up our emotional strength.

…Greece was used to conjure up this poetical power of man to convince ourselves it’s worth living, possible to live, although our personal life is disordered, is unfinished, and the life of the nations on this earth is unfinished, too.   (p.16)

This is what is indispensable about Greece.  Not eternal war, not contempt for women, or homosexual creativity, or indifference to slavery. “The inability to create peace is one of the lasting handicaps of the Greeks.” (p.18)

7.GREEK CULTURE was a necessary transition in becoming free from ancestors, from applying the iron laws of nature to man’s society, and this is reflected in the second part of Isaiah, 40-66. It describes the separation of church and state whereby the individual has some part of existence in addition to tradition and nature. (p.20)

Lecture 12

1.The difference between poetry and priesthood is that the liturgy is strictly bound with a beginning, middle, and end – unchanging, irreplaceable, indispensable.

Poetry, by comparison, is motivated by inspiration, is unique, and may come at any time and anywhere. The poet is arbitrary, and free to deviate at any time  the spirit moves.  “…the Muse is the companion of the good life, but she is not the originator.” The Muses can accompany, but they cannot lead. As Goethe noted.  (p.2)

2.All art unifies and abstracts, and this is what united Greece, along with a common language.

3.The law of life is not where you have leisure; the order of life is where you have liturgy, and specific and adamant sequence of events. (By definition, law = order).

4.The Christian church is the heir of Israel and of Greece, and “…the expressions for the divine service are partly taken from Greek tragedy.” (p.7)

5.The word school is Greek in origin, and means “neither here nor there.”  Students are not expected to take responsibility for the community outside.

School is like life, and therefore can never sustain intense interest.  Life is at times monotonous.  The teacher therefore cannot control, any more than we can control our lives.  THAT IS THE SECRET OF LIVING, THAT TIME IS NOT UNDER OUR CONTROL. (p.9)

6.One of the purposes of the Muses is to run away from the humdrum of life.

7.To be potent,  one must be also able in “forms,” with regard to consecration, blessings, prayers, songs, i.e. liturgy.  We need to know the form of the ceremony to bury somebody, or to marry them in a way that is recognized and accepted by the community .  Muses and angels are the same, messengers who tell us how to communicate, enhancing our ability to communicate. All of this must occur at the right moment, to “get hold of them (these moments) – and dismiss them again. *p.13)

8.The political character of the Muses is that they anticipate the future.

9.Phoenician and Chinese languages do not write vowels, only sounds omitting vowels.  GREEKS INVENTED VOWELS FOR WRITING SO THAT THE RECITER OF THE PLAY COULD PERFORM WITH THE PROPER INTONATION.  THE HOMERIC PERIOD, AROUND 800 BC,  added to the old script the 5 vowels, epsilon, alpha, omega, u, and oi.

10.Jews did the opposite of the Greeks; they eschewed the Muses and devoted themselves to the future, to prophecy.  Their Angels were of mercy,  or of wrath.   ERH asserts that man is the being who resists natural causes, because nature has no reasons; nature is blind, deaf, and dumb.

11.The Greeks are the great artists of antiquity, and the Jews the great prophets.

Lecture 13

1.One can “know” things, (acquire information), but have no sense of its meaning.  One understands only through participation, through application of knowledge.

.2The basic assumption in approaching history, whereby it makes sense, is to study epochs, periods that have some unity, where there is a new idea in a culture and idea which develops, rises and comes to fruition, then an end.  ERH contends that the 1st unity is in the tribal life which created parents & families.

The 2nd period of unity was that of the great empires, Chinese, Babylonian, Mayan, etc.,  which predicted events through astronomical observations, i.e. the flood of the Nile.

The 3rd period was the Greek/Jewish, which broke away from both of the above, and was transitional to Christian; it produced philosophy, poetry, and prophecy. This was roughly from Homer (800 BC to 0 AD)

The 4th period was Christian. ERH contends that today the 2nd and 4th are in contention and that the Christian is losing out in this tug-of-war.  (p.3)

So you understand that knowledge of the thousands years BC, before Christ, is an important way of understanding our own era. (p.4)

4.We live because  the “electricity” of speech vibrates through us, in spite of ourselves.  The harmonies of the universe include a wave length from the past (speech evolved over the millennia, and is handed down as a gift to each generation.) through today and must be carried on by us into the future. In all periods there have been forces at work to destroy our precious speech by way of the many forms of deception or just plain rendering it meaningless.

Thought is an abstraction from speech, it is no substitute for speaking out, or from listening attentively to others. The Greeks seem to have understood this, and thus invented vowels.  One cannot participate in society simply by listening; one must also speak up and be counted in his opinions.

5.WE CAN UNDERSTAND THESE PERIODS IN HISTORY ONLY BY CONTRASTING THEM WITH WHAT PRECEDED AND SUCCEEDED THEM.

6.The meaning of the term “Greeks and Barbarians” is that those who could not recite were barbarians. And the term “humanity” meant that the Greeks assured themselves that they would always be at home with Greek.

Because the Greeks were able to see other communities from “outside,” objectively, their culture was fruitful; for example,  Athenians saw  themselves as citizens of Athens first, but also as citizens of a wider community as well.  This was unique thinking in the world in classical times.

To Greeks, the political order was of first concern, and nature came after.

The inner sanctum is the community which has given you life, which has sent you here, inside which I, and you are talking to each other.  Thisis the life which has been granted us.  And we have it only together.  And you have no life by yourself. (p.11)

Thus, the Greek response to the sky empire of Egypt, which was overwhelming to the individual,  was to create a courageous “individual” attitude:

We must, in addition to our political existence, which is too small compared to the pharonic Egypt or the Persian empire, we have to look outside and give life, and context, and meaning to the environment around the city.  And then polis and physis together, they will teach us how to live. (p.12)

And the City of God, of Augustine included both civitas and nature.

7.The Greeks conquered by way of poetry and philosophy.  The Jews survived and conquered by prophecy. TO PROPHESY IS ONLY TO BE OPEN TO THE FUTURE, AS YOU ARE OPEN TO THE OUTER WORLD. (pp.13-15)

Thus, the prophetic faculty is to admit to what God has ordained, to what is coming, to articulate what is already in process of coming true.  Prophecy has nothing to do with prediction.  To predict is to anticipate a future event; to prophesy is to utter a truth, e.g. “No house can stand divided, half slave and half free.”  Lincoln, — is prophecy.  NOBODY CAN THUS LIVE WITHOUT PROPHECY!

THE GREEKS ACHIEVED POWER BY UNITING MANY CITY-STATES.  THE JEWS ACHIEVED POWER BY RECOGNIZING THAT THEY WOULD NEVER PHYSICALLY OVERWHELM THE GREATER POWERS FROM OUTSIDE – BUT IN RESPONSE TO THIS, THEY NEVER GAVE IN.  This is the creative role of minorities, that they speak the truth and never give in!

Lecture 14

1.As we live in a world dominated by abstract (Greek) thinking, we never expect something to come about in the sense of trying to create it.  The dynamite invented by the Jews to `blow apart’ Egypt was the creation of the Sabbath,  “…the most revolutionary time unit dealing with the calendar, because it defies the year:”  (p.2)

That is, the great 1460 years of the Egyptian cycle, was representative of other calendars as well, where a large unit of time (covering many lifetimes of the individual) governed one’s consciousness of experience.  These calendars were based on astronomical observations, long cycles of stars.  THE NOTION OF THE SABBATH, of seven days, WAS  THUS A CREATION WITH A SOCIAL PURPOSE.  That is, psychologically we can comprehend  events within 7 day timespans; we can see the effects of our actions and take corrective action if appropriate, and begin once again.

2.Psychologically, the feeling of man that he could comprehend and participate in creative acts by seeing the beginning and end of a process, freed man from the humdrum, deadening sameness of hundreds of years.  For us to see cycles, stages of progress is crucial to our freedom to be creative.

YOU CANNOT SAY THAT YOU HAVE EXPERIENCED ANYTHING IF YOU ARE JUST INSIDE OF IT. (p.4)

Just imagine remembering heroes who committed great acts, as summarized only every 1400 years?  Too much condensation to feel the reality of the act, the great passion and willingness to suffer for the sake of it!  Man, thus freed from the iron grip of either ancestors, or the movement of the stars, could begin to take charge of his own destiny.

Therefore the future and the past in the  Jewish doctrine are indivisible,  inseparable.  And that’s the meaning of the Sabbath.  The Sabbath is so short, and condenses the idea of time in such a short period of seven days, and you see, that even a child can encompass this.  Only professors can’t. (p.7)

3.The end and the beginning are one!  This sounds so simple.  One must remember, ERH asserts, that, while we can imagine what we would like in the future, we can have hope, –  the present will cause the  future only when we anticipate the future, and utilize the present to act toward building the future we want.

4.Our fear of death roots us in time, and thus we wish to survive as long as possible in life; to do this, we must create or participate in creating the future that ought to be.  Create heaven on earth, so to speak.  “So the experience of Israel is that God is in coming.” (p.9)   UNLESS WE UNDERSTAND THESE ASPECTS OF TIME WHEREBY WE TAKE ACTION TOWARD OUR FUTURE, WE CANNOT SURVIVE.

The physicist conquers space, but not time in social terms.

IT IS THE IDEA OF THE SABBATH, THE 7 DAY WEEK WHERE WE CAN COMPREHEND THESE TRUISMS OF TIME, THAT THE JEWS CONTRIBUTED TO CIVILIZATION.

5.SIGNS OF A PAGAN COUNTRY.  Pagans are concerned with their own soldiers, but not those dead of the enemy. Nor do  they make no distinction between leisure and holiday.  The holiday means to become whole again, spiritually.  Leisure means to do what we wish.  Today, all holidays are turned into leisure, and we have lost their meaning of remembrance.    The future is always older than the past because it explains the past, not the other way around.  This is why pagans have no future.

6.Thus, the content of this day cannot be determined on this day.  Also inferred by this attitude toward time is that whatever is happening now will pass.  ERH points out that even though the Nazis executed 6 million Jews, that did not alter the fact of their downfall.

7.When we are alone, we must hold out against the forces of the world.  Poetry has allowed us to do this, just as the prophecy of the Jews allow us to create the future.  Both go together and occurred as a unit in history to free civilizations from the iron beliefs in ancestors and the heavens as determiners of human behavior.

Lecture 15

1.THE CHARACTER OF CALENDARS:  February 28 was the last of five Roman days that denoted an interregnum, before the beginning of the new year March 1.  What ERH  is diving at here is that calendars and  religious customs are based upon experience, not abstractions.  The calendar is based on Egyptian calculations of the flood. Roman experience was different.  Egyptians did notworship the sun or moon, contrary to popular belief, but rather the skies that told them when the flood would come. Their sky reference was the position of the pleiades constellation.

THE  IDEA OF THE SABBATH WAS LIKEWISE RELEVANT TO HUMAN EXPERIENCE, to remind mankind that this time was for God, not himself. It was the day of rest to contemplate  behavior regarding  divine mandates. There is nothing from science which otherwise explains the designation of a 7 day week.

2.On the Sabbath we are to be reborn, rejuvenated, re-created and to be creative in reflecting about the meaning of events, in turn. Holidays are a “sabbath written large,” to be distinguished from leisure time by virtue of the fact that with leisure we can do as we please.  On the sabbaths, we are not intended to have that freedom. TO DO NOTHING  is the recipe for vacation, and this is terribly difficult, but the sabbath must remind us of our obligation to the community.

3.The notion of the holiday:

On the holy day, on the seventh of every week, man leaves the world and passes over to that source, this fountainhead of novelty, of renovation, of renascence, of rebirth in which this world hasn’t been created yet, but begins all over again. (p.5-6)

4.The Bible was intended, by its authors, as an account of human experience, and to offer universal. EXAMPLES: the account of the flooding of the Nile to describe the religions of the great empires; the Jewish custom of circumcision at birth to indicate that one must pay a price for entering society and also as a symbol of human sacrifice (the spilling of blood).

ERH points out that all pre-Christian cultures required life-long membership; once a Jew, always a Jew, or Egyptian, or tribal member, or Greek. THE CHANGE INTO CHRISTIANITY WAS TO ESCAPE THIS TYPE OF ABSOLUTISM. (p.12)

5.THE ESSENCE OF CHRISTIANITY IS SYMBOLIZED BY EASTER, BY RESURRECTION.

It begins with resurrection, it begins with renascence, it begins with rebirth, it begins with regeneration.”….(man is) responsible for reappraisals, the renovation, the reinstitution, the reproduction of mankind. (p.12)

6.Christianity allows us to go back to the beginning, to begin afresh, without original sin.  Thus, the flight of Jesus and Mary back into Egypt, from which the Jews had originally fled.  It meant that he no longer recognized Israel and that  to return to the beginning, to the land of absolutes, was necessary for their ownnew beginning,  to find salvation in this way. (p.15)

ERH points out that the meaning of recording the accusers of Jesus –  the Greeks, Romans, and Jews – was that  the previous orders (of tribes, sky empires, Greeks and Jews), were not enough They were incomplete, too narrow, and Christianity sought to break out of this narrowness toward thinking anew. This meant  one had to be able to utilize the methods of all the old orders, by means of alternating between them. “The old orders are not rejected, but they are made relative.” (p.16)

In other words, past experience, science, philosophy, poetry and  prophecy – contributions of tribes, empires, Greece, and Judaism – are all necessary to the understanding of our experience. But each quality of thinking is to dominate at different times. There is a time to love, to analyze, to sing, to remember and to anticipate, to sew and to reap. The four Gospels are different because each culture had to be incorporated into a unified, larger insight.

7.No Christian country is guaranteed to stay Christian.  Today, ERH  suggests that the  USA is 90% pre-Christian and 10% Christian.

He claims furthermore that experts about God (theologians) are an anachronism,  that each of us is just as expert about God (presumably because one must be inspired to experience His spirit in order to understand).

Lecture 16

1.Christianity is never stable, the Christian era consists of a constant rebirth. Ethiopia has fused the antiquity of Judaism and Christianity, which is unique in the world.

A new Christian era must be recreated by ourselves; it is constantly in trouble with other religions.  Ethiopia, the Roman Empire and the papacy are experiments during the first 1,000 years of Christianity.

2.The prophets of Judaism are replaced by the Apostles during the first 1,000 years. “Apostle” means a messenger carrying good news.  But they found out that each of the four “orders” – tribes, Egyptians, Greeks, and Jews – had to be addressed in a different way,  and  thus the 4 Gospels. They explained the new doctrine that all men are equal, all man had the same task on earth (to establish communities at peace voluntarily), and they should all worship the same God.

a.The tribes thought that their ancestors were the only true source of  truth  (according to Jacob, founder of the 12 tribes of Israel).  “Matthew was written  to the Jews, to the tribesmen in Judaism…it was the most difficult to write to the most primitive people. He spoke of genealogy, which was of major interest to the tribal people.”

b.The empires thought that only by the stars was fertility guaranteed. The second Gospel, Mark, was written for the empire-builders.  He was the secretary to Peter, who lectured in Rome, and his writing obviously was from those lectures. The Romans and Egyptians were not interested in genealogy of the Jews, but rather in salvation so this is where Mark begins, with the Baptism of Jesus.

c.The Greeks thought that only through their genius could they understand     the universe. The third Gospel was written by Luke for the Greeks.  He was  Greek-educated, and writes in the tradition of schools.  He wrote to literate people.

d.The Jews thought that the “chosen,”  minority group was the only one to win over tyrants and idols of the mighty powers.

John strips the story of Jesus from all paraphernalia of geography and cult.  It’s not a cultural history (but)…The eternal truth,… (p.8)

3.All these four cultures had limitations; none of their thinking could be transferred outside their countries.  (ERH  calls Mohammed the great impostor and imitator of Christianity; he had to write his own scripture, and he chose four Caliphs to spread his word.)

Christianity is a doctrine asserting that all times (ages of humankind) are contemporary, (from the beginning of history to Armageddon) in a unified history of humankind. This means that all people should be understood to be contemporaries.  “To make all men contemporaries is the essence of treating time in the right and proper way.”  (p.17)

Christianity is therefore intended to be a model for behavior of all human beings, of how they can develop individually, and how they can create a community in which peace is accomplished.  Vitality comes from constant change toward regenerating one’s knowledge by finding new ways (which speak to new generations) to re-establish the old ideas.

We cannot save ourselves, we can only save each other, is part of this doctrine. To whom can we appeal when we are in deep anguish? To someone with a greater soul than our own!

4.The Gospels were written “in danger of life…” as a last resort, as a statement of what the authors wished to be remembered for, giving a warning to the rest of mankind that their communities would become hell if these (Christian insights) were not followed.   They were written during the first 100 years, AD (p.13)

5.Christianity stands for regeneration; therefore every generation must find a new way to say the same thing, a way to be understood by  the new generation. “It lives by a renewal of its forms.” (p.15)   Nor would Christianity  have persisted if there was only literature.  People had to be willing to sacrifice, make the ideas manifest in their actions, “make the word into flesh” in order to spread the message.

The spirit of the original four Gospels was regenerated by four notables who lived 300 years later, St. Anthony, St.Augustine, St.Athanasius, and St. Jerome.

a.Anthony (251-356 AD) founded a monastery in the desert to show that all of the earth was important, not just the fertile lands. These “nowhere lands” are part of the Lord’s as well. [RF, this seems to have a message for those who dump toxic wastes today!]

Lecture 17

1.From Anthony we learn that one must take the route of greatest resistance to educate others (presumably to convince the most skeptical).. This is to say, solve problems in terms of the long range consequences, and exert patience.

2.ATHANASIUS (290-376 AD) originated the notion of the trinity which frees us from the tyranny of human gods (emperors, kings, god-rulers).  The Trinity exemplifies a unity of time, of 3 generations that are necessary to establish any significant social truth. Athanasius would not accept that any ruler was divine, only Jesus was, so he was in exile most of his life. When the king of Egypt died, he returned to Alexandria,  having lived out the truth of the Nicean Creed, of the meaning of the Trinity.

3.AUGUSTINE (354-430 AD) proved,  by living the notion that no matter how wealthy and powerful one might be, his earthly power is of lesser importance.  He wrote in their language (Latin) that the poor and uneducated could understand religious spirit (a very difficult feat).  He was a great teacher, who  established the notion that progress could be made and that history was not an endless repeating cycle.

St. Augustine knew that there had to be this city of God in unintermittent renovation, unintermittent rebuilding, unintermittent rediscovery. (p.14)

4.All four established the notion that the common man was more divine than the emperor. That all people should be noticed, and every person is one’s brother or sister. If the victim is not as divine as the ruler, then there is no basis for the humane treatment of man. (p.16)

5.ERH notes 4 relationships that are an important aspect of reality:

a.The sacrificer and the victim.

b.The astrologer and the cosmos.

c.The poet and his poem (the poem precedes the poet,  and the poem is exalted by him above himself because it would not exist without speech, which was originally a gift to the poet).

d.The prophet and the prophesied. No prophet, no expectations, and therefore no recognition when some new expectation arises.

…without these four orders, we have no orientation.  You all live in a natural, geographical economic cosmos from certain geographical, physical, chemical, biological laws.  Well, these are laws of course that which this creation story has tried to propagate.  That man has a strange place in this creation (of society) He is part of it; he is a creature.  And yet he is also a re-creator, because he knows of his creation, as no animal does.  And he can shift the  emphasis.  And he is at all times on both sides of the creator and the creature. (p.19)

Another example of the paradox of humankind – half natural animal, half god.

Lecture 18

1.As long as we are willing to co-create, we cannot blaspheme God.

2.The idea of progress in Christianity comes from the book of John,14, where Jesus says his disciples will do greater things than he Himself. In other words, great teachers, geniuses, recognize that their achievement is always to produce persons capable of recognizing progress or retrogress, and attempt to achieve the former.

3.In 540 AD, a monk in Italy said we will count the Christian era from Jesus’ birth. It took this long before people felt they could do this. They could finally believe themselves capable of producing progress. (p.4)

Before this time, every country and every era had its unique chronology. “Therefore, to invent a chronology which would be valid for the whole globe is a very ingenious thing.” (p.4)

4.The Christian era sets a standard for the world, according to ERH, and it is the only era in which social progress has been made. If it disappears, we will revert to slavery.  The notion of progress is built into  Christian philosophy.

5.On Immortality:  “All the immortal stories otherwise, outside Christianity, pretend that you can have deathlessness without dying. Jesus said, it is just the opposite. Of course one must die to create an eternal life.  To die for the human race, is to be sane; to put the life eternal over one’s own existence.” [RF – On the surface this sounds paradoxical, but previously he stresses that one achieves eternal life by living in the minds and hearts of one’s successors.]

6.During the first 900 years of the church, it defined its principles by way of:

… witness, and the testimonial, and the sufferings, and the martyrdom of the saints….(All Saints Day recognizes this and)…is therefore a complete summary of the first thousands years of the Church history. (p.10)

The essence of the Christian story is that ordinary, vulgar, common people have done the most surprising and extraordinary things.  And that’s why they are called saints.  And for no other reason.  They are neither geniuses, nor are they talented, nor are they noble, nor are they rich, nor do they get the Nobel Prize.  (p.12)

7.ERH then evaluates the misunderstanding of the Reformation, in which he says that most churches misunderstood Luther, who said that every individualmust become a priest and speak the liturgy.  “The problem over the world is that liturgy, and service, and priesthood, and saintliness can no longer be separated.” (p.14)

We are now moving in the direction in which everyone believes he/she can do whatever they wish, and this anarchy of the spirit leads to the end of civilization.  To ask of people to have a “performance,” – an obligation to the community, is to create discipline and direction. Today  we are moving with precious little direction.

8.ERH mentions the soul and implies that many persons do not have souls. [RF – in another essay he says that one is born only with a potential, and through one’s life one must earn a soul.] (p.16)

In the final part of the lecture, ERH holds forth against Humanism! The essence of this argument is that the Humanist doesn’t believe in lessons from history.  History today is believed to be a collection of facts, which of course do not speak for themselves. Meaning in history comes from a record of someone having insight from his/her experience and learning new lessons that renew our ability to re-create community. Humanists say all people are “human.”  Are people human who slaughter others? Are people human who destroy living environments and poison the earth?  Is greed human?  Of course, if “human” means natural, then all people are born that way, as natural animals. But, ERH asks, isn’t our goal to rise above animal status?  The classical Greeks didn’t believe in progress; life droned on in endless cycles whereby common people had no power to resist “the gods.”  Christianity was a reversal of this thinking.

Lecture 19

1.CAN WE DESCRIBE HOW WE IDENTIFY THE POWER OF GOD?

When you are in love, desperately in love, and you suddenly have to admit that this love is stronger than any of your reasons not to go for this girl, then you begin to fathom for the first time what God is.  It’s an overwhelming power. (p.2)

The proof of God is not by seeing him, but by seeing a power that overwhelms us, causing us to act in spite of ourselves and often at great sacrifice. The Holy Spirit proceeds from the father and the son.

2.     …in life, the lack of charity is much more disastrous and important than the lack of intelligence.  It is not important that everybody should understand everything else.  But it is very important that he should be required to agree.  (p.7)

ERH cites the split between the Eastern and Western Catholic churches as being caused by “not being asked” about a change in the liturgy.  It was unimportant that the change may have been necessary!

“We are only human beings if we are held together by conviction.”  [RF – inferring, not by gunpoint, or other forms of coercion, but by honest agreement.]

3.This implication is fundamental, THAT EVERYONE, AS A CHILD OF GOD (except children of course) HAS A RIGHT TO BE ASKED.  “…an unbreakable right to live out your mind, your spirit, your physique, even your love and affection.”  (p.9)

4.The lesson of the second millennium of the Christian Era was that we must learn to get along with each other, or create disaster. In 1919, Woodrow Wilson  proposed the League of Nations.  Proclaiming the old ways (of force) had to come to an end.

5.Odilo (998 AD) pronounced the idea of All Souls to symbolize our needed direction, to break down the barriers of nation, creed, race, etc., and see mankind as one.   THE POINT OF THIS STORY IS THAT ODILO  REPRESENTED A REVOLT OF THE INDIVIDUAL AGAINST THE TRADITIONAL AUTHORITY OF THE NATIONS, and as a result, a debate lasting 1,000 years has brought out the great spirit of both individual and of thenational literatures. [RF – if I understand him correctly, we must now move rapidly toward social orders where all peoples of the world are recognized as equal.

6.ERH points out the richness of history whereby mankind has engaged in this type of debate. It is the core issue at the heart of all social progress over the ages. Most of our history books are secular and largely omitted this sort of religious ethics in the story. (p.16)

True history is where humankind take on a “…new lease on life.”  “The ensoulment of mankind is at a standstill at his point.” (p.19)

Lecture 20

1.The idea of a universal history is not to try to teach numberless facts, BUT TO TEACH THE RELATIONS, THE RHYTHMS, some expectations, as compared with daily events.  Time seems to be ignored today as well as the fact that we have a limited time on earth, and the time it takes to bring about social progress.  Our expectations today are unrealistic.

A universal history, when it is taught, can have only this one purpose, to implant in you the power to overcome your private times, your private rhythms, and to share that rhythm which makes you brothers with the people 7,000 years  back.  History should make you indifferent to your contemporaries, and should make you very intimate with the people of all other times. (p.2)

2.It is impossible to convey and teach a pure faith. “…the first Christians were not the best Christians, and never are.” (p.3)

None of our acts are either clear or unambiguous; they are at once good and evil.

3.Since 1889 (Woodrow Wilson made his pronouncement), the  third millennium of the Christian Era has begun.  But obviously, many people do not yet see this.  Timing is crucial, and when things come too early, they are not recognized.

4.It is a great temptation, and relief, to us  when we don’t feel we have a decision to make.  We can neither educate nor influence without convictions.  We tend to  hide behind committees, to relieve ourselves from personal decision-making and responsibility.

5.In the third millennium we must learn with others.  Unless we find one voice to solve problems and come to a decision, these problems (war, poverty, peace, environmental destruction, etc.) will never be solved.  We must find one power that governs our steps.

6.Today, we tend to live as “playboys/girls.   Life can be divided into play and seriousness, and ERH asserts that  today we tend to play all the time, taking nothing as serious. We have ignored accountability for the consequences of our action. We take no personal responsibility for them.

When we fail to speak out honestly on important issues, language dies; we cannot survive on small talk, or lies.

7.Christianity claims that life is expensive; the notion of anti-Christ asserts that it is cheap!.   “Any act which is worth doing demands infinite devotion.” (p.13)

8.The riddle of history must be in time, the timing of events and our response to them.

The timing in our lives can only be done once.  Once it is spoiled, it is spoiled…We can all only pray that we are treated mercifully,…it is unavoidable that there are terrible mistakes…the mystery of the Christian era is that there is no mistake, no sin, no failure that cannot be amended…if you look into the better lives of better people, you find great miracles, great mysteries…There will be no future unless you people, as any older person can tell you, respect the moment of your acts so much that you know the timing is of the essence. (p.15)

9.THE PROBLEM IN THE THIRD MILLENNIUM IS, “WHAT MUST BE DONE. IS IT NECESSARY?” p.20-16

10.Finally, ERH asks, “how do you and I get orientation?”  And answered by citing the messages in the purpose of Christian  holidays, All Saints, All Souls.

END OF THIS SERIES OF LECTURES

Universal History – 1967 – Review

Just as the name suggests, this essay clearly states the crucial lessons we must take from history.  We are constantly threatened with oblivion, the author asserts and thus we must learn all we can about the nature of the universe and of mankind if we are to survive and grow with any quality of life.  To understand the changes that have evolved with different cultures, and the differences those changes have made, is his central argument for needing a universal history, which we do not presently have. Having said this, he then goes on to give examples of those changes, thus laying the groundwork for all his other writing.  Speech and naming, the central nature of Christianity in history, ethics, creativity, the development of human culture, how we become enslaved by certain types of thinking, the development of one’s soul, all are examples of issues raised here. The unavoidable picture of `mankind as one,’  is completely compatible with the essays of Joseph Campbell  on the power of myth.

CRUCIFORM CHARACTER OF HISTORY – 1967

Lectures 1-5 (Tippet Lectures)
Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.”We have at this moment in this world receded into a pre-Christian scheme of history.” (p.5)  ERH mentions Spengler and Toynbee as examples of historians who advocated historic cycles and constant  progress, “the upward spiral” (never retrogression, only advance),  Benedetto Croce who ERH calls “a new Hegel,” and John Dewey believed in spirals theories, which ERH eschewed. “People were back to paganism…The ordinary human mind is pagan.” (p.5)

Today there are advocates promoting the idea that various cultures should disappear, e.g. the Chinese, Jews, Serbs. Once we cannot accept certain peoples or cultures on earth, ERH asserts,  we are back to paganism, which is a philosophy of chaos.  The cyclical theory of history creates chaos.  “Today the cyclical doctrine of history is taught in nine-tenths of our schools.” (p.6)

2.These ideas come from philosophies of natural science, however  “…no human being has ever lived in this manner.” (p.7)  This is a false doctrine, which, with any close examination,  would belie reality.  ERH  claims that the pagans “stole history,” and the fault lies with the Christians and all of us who were too timid or too silent, and thus allowed ourselves to be dominated.

3.           I don’t look at things…I am looked on by my creator.  He looks at me and says  “What a fool you are.”  It is more difficult to see ourselves in the middle of history and take responsibility for creating it.  THUS, IT IS ALWAYS EASIER FOR ALL OF US TO IMAGINE THAT WE ARE OUTSIDE OF EVENTS. (p.8)

4.In sum the two opposing forces are 1) those who say that one cannot understand history unless one is objectively outside it, and 2) those  who maintain that one cannot understand unless one sees themselves as inside, as part of events.  THIS IS ESSENTIALLY THE RELIGIOUS ISSUE, or decision!  That is to say, taking responsibility for the state of society.

5.Man is defined by his passions, not by his brain (logic), and “…the result a the world which is created by these passions.  And it is a very mixed world, half diabolical, and half divine.”    Life is very risky!  Old and new ways are no criteria for decision-making in themselves.  We must learn to take responsibility for the state of society.

6.Scientific history assumes that the past and present determine the future.  Cruciform history assumes the opposite, that the future determines the present (as well as what should be carried on from the past).  Of course, we do not change past events, but we do reinterpret it as new experience reveals its lesson.  Scientific history, is oriented only toward the concrete reality, it focuses only on physical cause/effect.  Cruciform history assume the value of revelation, of our ability to create a better world (than living by the laws of the jungle).

…history is only that event which you have dreaded, expected, hoped for, which you then have seen — helped bring about, and which at the end is there, and you have to cope with it, because it is your own doing.  (p.11)

[RF – Rosenstock-Huessy interprets religion as a power within us to risk change, and to risk taking responsibility for something requires maximum fortitude.  This power derives from the Holy Spirit.  Thus interpreted,  the nature of religion is universal and  analogous to Christianity.  History is the source of evidence for truth – seeking truth is divine.]

History is our power to create a future.  “…without Easter, you cannot understand Pentecost…If you cannot delve into this event at the moment in which it hadn’t yet happened, you will never understand Christianity.” (p.12)   [RF – I assume this means, history not only tells us what happened, but how it came to happen and that is valuable insight for beginning new movements.]

7.The future cannot be derived precisely from the past, because our dreams can (indeed should) change the present. One can therefore create some modicum of order in one’s life by acting on the notion that the future governs interpretation of the past and action in the present!

8.IN ORDER FOR MANKIND TO BE CREATIVE, TO CREATE PEACE AND GOOD WILL, MAN MUST BE GOVERNED BY HIS DREAM AND ACTION ON THEM FOR A BETTER COMMUNITY IN THE FUTURE.  So the notion of past should be replaced by the term “beginning,” and the future, by “the end” of some phase, or epic.

Lecture 2

1.Progress is now interpreted to mean more and bigger material things. The content of the Christian message is to rise above this “fall of man.”    “…our Lord entered the world to heal fallen man from his constant regress, from his constant cycles, from his constant superstitions that something had to be done tomorrow, because it had been done yesterday; that (in the US) the South cannot give up segregation as a token that they were not defeated.” (p.6)  In other words, Christianity was necessary to establish a set of rules by which “progress” toward a peaceful community could be created.

2.Given that man is half animal and half potentially divine, the Christian notion of progress is that man may fall “less profoundly.”  (p.8)  It relates to man’s relation to the divinity.  When man realizes that he is responsible for the collective sin, that he is daily crucified, that all humankind is his brother and sister; this is progress.

3.Progress is the ability to move in the direction of concluding  conditions by  which we can live in peace with others, (especially ones “in-laws”).  “…suffering is the only source of wisdom, and not my brain here.” (p.14)

Lecture – 3

1.MAN MUST LIVE IN THREE GENERATIONS AT ONCE.  Thus the title of this lecture: “Love, hope and faith.” Love is practiced in the present, hope is for return of certain things from the past and faith must empower one toward action to  create a better future.

2.In the 4 gospels that describe the message, meaning, and heritage of Jesus, hope is not mentioned.  Jesus was hope-less in this sense, he lived on faith.  With hope, one knows what is worth hoping for, bigger, better, a return to what was good about the past.

Faith grows from despair, where there is nothing to hope for it is the amount of expectation to know things not now known, of being led onto new ways, we are open to being told, to being informed, to being led into His (God’s) world.  SO FAITH IS OUR CONNECTION WITH THE CREATIVE PROCESS OF THE FUTURE.  THE FUTURE IS EMBEDDED IN OUR HEARTS BY FAITH. Hope connects us with what we have experienced.   (p.3)

3.Christianity is not the Judeo-Christian traditions. It’s the only truth. ( p.5)  Modern theology books omit the notion that hope isn’t in any of the 4 gospels. “Lord of creation has incarnated.”  (p.5)  He was incarnated because he embraced 3 generations, the future, present and beginnings (past).  Hope holds onto beginnings. The true stature of man is that he belongs to and holds 3 generations at all times.

4.     Human beings have no problems, and are no problems, but they are creatures, unfinished creatures.  And that’s much nicer than to be a problem,…this unfinished creature is now responsible for the harmony of these three great branches of the outstretched cross over our heads, of the divine.  This cross is stretched out backward by our hopes, by which we retain the memory of things past.  It is stretched forward by our faith.  It allows the Creator to enter quite a new page in His book of His creation.  And the love holds the two together, as in the case where the parents are asked to agree to the innovation that this girl now has a right to call this wicked man her husband.  (p.6)

Lecture 4

1.The future beckons and can be grasped only by faith and willingness to be open to the possibilities of being transformed.  This lecture addresses this need to change, and thus its name, “Between Halloween and Labor Day.”

2.The problem is that for this 3rd millennium we must change and in order to change we must be freed from the past (1,000 years.)

We are all “nailed to a cross” metaphorically speaking, between the past and the future, in the present. The “gallows beam” of the cross symbolizes this dilemma.  Winston Churchill said, “Everyman is nailed either to a cross of action or to a cross of thought.”

3.History is the recalling of the past that is capable of allowing us to change, and anticipating a new future. We must admit that what was once future (an expectation), became a past, then was sanctified by the next generation ( our grandchildren).  Only thus can there be progress and peace.

4.What we should learn from war is to sanctify and keep the memory of the soldiers who died, because they died for a cause. If the cause was worth fighting for, it (history) means that we too might be called upon to fight.   History reminds us what is important. It places us in time.  WE KEEP ALIVE THE MEMORY OF SACRIFICE, BY WHICH THE WORLD IS MADE POSSIBLE.  The Gospels represent the story of Jesus, what he sacrificed for, and why he died.

5.For mankind, history is more important than the natural sciences because it tells us what is important, and what is important is told to us by our heart. The direction of that knowledge changes, depending upon one’s present insights and dreams:

…the crucial form.  Only in the Cross has man found a form in which the directions — changes, in which one thing is true, although the opposite is true, too. (p.9)

(the heart, and the term “although”) They cross out the tendency, the trend, the statistically probable, the, the recommendation, the reasonable, the sober.  ..although reason tells you you shouldn’t, – you do it.  That’s worth doing.  Nothing in life is alive, or is human, that is not able to defy some natural causes, some natural reasons. (p.10)

6.If mankind on this earth is to grow the rules to guide his social values, he must be capable of resisting the principles of physics, the principles that apply to dead things.

…unless you have this power to resist all the highways of the world, wide as they are, convenient as they are…making you as welcome as they do…you are not borne by the spirit.  You are not a second-born human being.  And this old rule that man has to be born twice is unfortunately simply true, although the churches have forgotten it. (p.11)

[RF – Obviously, he means the term “born again” differently from the present-day Christian fundamentalists]

7.Christianity did not begin with Christ. The willingness to sacrifice was present in all pagan tribes, “Otherwise there would be no mankind alive today.”  The meaning of the cross is that when one sacrifices, one belongs to the ages. (p.16) [RF – In another essay ERH  called the birth of Christ, “The center of history.”  I assume the meaning of this statement was that, these universal principles, while practiced before, had not been articulated.]

Lecture 5

1.The thrust of this final lecture seems to belie statements ERH makes elsewhere, to wit that the “Cross of Reality” is not rooted in religion.  Here he seems to make the point that  IT IS INDEED SO ROOTED.  That is, that we live in multiple times and multiple places, that we observe events as “inside them,” or outside (as objective observers).  And that the nature of these times and places is not caused only by natural events, but also decided by participants in the community. That an old social practice may be changed. The meaning of events, past and present, is constantly fought over on the battle field. – the dignity of a nation for instance. [RF, have we not just witnessed this in WW I and II, and in Serbia/Bosnia today?]  This, ERH asserts is what William James means in his essay THE MORAL EQUIVALENT OF WAR. In war then, meaning is decided!

What is now, and what has been cannot be known.  It can only be decided.    (p.3)

The first few pages of this lecture are eloquent statements to this effect.  And later…

…the superior light of the man who went to the Cross without complaint in order to elucidate that on this earth, without the gallows beams (of these types of decisions) on his back, man could not live as he was meant to live: in peace with the past and future. (p.10)

2.It is the weakness of these times that the notion of multiple times and spaces is not understood, and therefore we seem to lack references points for evaluating our experience.

So this I think explains our growing neglect, or our decreasing understanding of the mystery of times. Take the relation between the generations.  The hurry with which we move through time makes it for the young man quite feasible to forget the greatest riddle of mankind is the peace between fathers and sons, and grandsons, and how this should be obtained or created that a grandson is even patient to continue what his father and grandfather have started. (p.4)

3.This then reflects the riddle of speech, that in order for the future generations to continue what must be continued, they must understand what we say today.  And therefore…

This is the riddle of speech, that the speech is a flow, is a stream, a river that must fertilize and wet all the banks of the river, whenever the water touches the ground.  Every foot of this riverbank is a year of mankind.  And the river, of course, must connect these various decades, years, centuries. And he must not form puddles, and where every puddle is left alone to itself…. (p.5)

4.In sum,  history has amply demonstrated changes in direction that were necessary at a particular point in time; when some emphasis of action was no longer needed.  There was a time when it was no longer necessary to be martyred professing the love of Jesus. There was a time when the emphasis on the “church” needed to be changed to an exploration of the earth, the result of which was a rise in science and technology.  And ERH admonishes us that the present challenge is to learn to regenerate society.

At this moment, where the Great Society knocks at the door, we must make peace with people of other creeds, with people of other races, with people certainly of other idioms, and other religions.  (p.11)

Cruciform Character of History – 1967 – Review

This is a transcript of the Tippett lectures delivered by Rosenstock-Huessy at the University of the Pacific in Stockton, California.  Their focus was to differentiate scientific (or cyclical) history,  which is how all of us were commonly educated in school, from “cruciform history.”  The difference is crucial to our survival and growth toward peace in the world. Scientific history puts mankind outside events, inferring what will happen in the future, in spite of our efforts.  Cruciform history puts mankind inside events, and is based on mankind taking responsibility for creating a future guided by his dreams.  Having laid out this issue the body of the lectures indicates specific examples of how cruciform history can be fruitful.  This essay also describes a fundamental building block for the author’s views on the future of Christianity.

UNIVERSAL HISTORY – 1956

Lectures 1-9
Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

Theme – How do we regenerate community? This, of course,  is the fundamental question of all human social life, and it generates a series of questions for which humankind has had to find answers through the ages.  Of these, an important question is, “What type of thought and action are necessary?” Another name for such a guide is “religion.”

1.Today, ERH asserts,  the arts are a substitute for religion! This is misguided because, as Goethe wrote to his son, “…the Muse knows how to accompany, but does not know how to guide, or to lead.” (p.1)

2.It is only the church (religion ) that can guide us. Arts and sciences are both only companions, not guides for life.  THE QUESTION TODAY IS ONE OF A DIVISION OF LABOR, WHICH MANY RELIGIONS (and other organizations) ABOLISH. For instance, our worship of youth tends toward firing old people and putting young people into positions for which they are unfit. “Everybody knows everything, therefore nobody knows anything.” (p.3)

3.The Egyptians invented the division of labor, separating priests from laity – priests knew what was in heaven, the laity knew  what is on earth.  The concept of heaven is useful only if it is a metaphor for what humankind should  become, as a guide to our behavior. It was the priest whose division of labor was to communicate this to people, therefore providing a direction for social life by way of unifying heaven and earth.

Today in the USA, the pollsters, psychologists, and news reporters are the American priesthood.  This is a distortion of Luther, who wanted everybody to PARTICIPATE WITH THE PRIEST, as stated in his aphorism, “everybody his own priest.”  This has been distorted today to mean NOBODY A PRIEST. With no single direction, all disciplines become fragmented into their own self-interest. The business man makes money, the writer writes, the reporter reports events for the purpose of selling newspapers, etc. But what is to create community?

The problem with college students today is that they have learned neither a trade nor how to direct their lives.

4.Larger and more complex societies call for more complex organization, but these divisions must be unified. The first division of labor is priest and layman. The second is warrior and peasant. The third is rich and poor. Recognizing these divisions is basic to social survival and while we cannot change them, we can mitigate  the distinctions. The larger the country or the organization, the greater the number of divisions of labor.

                                                                 A few basic definitions

5.The idea of democracy has been distorted by a bloated notion of equality,  which has caused us to lose respect for divisions of labor. In war, the military takes precedence over laymen, and in any crisis the leader must take precedence over the subordinate. IN SHORT, IF PEOPLE’S  EFFORTS ARE NOT COORDINATED BY LEADERSHIP, THEN THERE IS ANARCHY – WHICH PRESAGES THE ULTIMATE TERROR AND DESTRUCTION.

6.Divisions of labor are necessary, and therefore must be filled.   We are always obligated to find our role in society (where we should put our energies) at a given point in time for social benefit. (p.8)  In ancient Egypt, the Pharaoh earned the right to leadership because he could predict the floods of the Nile, which united  upper and lower Egypt, he represented the unifier of heaven and earth.

Today in this country, we place faith falsely  in the intellectual as an ultimate authority, as another form of priest. The intellect is not a complete guide for ruling. It takes also hope, faith, and charity to lead, among other qualities! Science is also unqualified,  because it is pure mechanism!

7.Our liberal arts colleges today are ridiculous because they have no direction. They offer us no basis for unifying our experience, they only describe, analyze, compare, and speculate about reality. There is no meaning to any subject outside its internal logic. “Nothing can stand in reality that isn’t necessary.  And God reveals himself only in the things necessary.” (p.14)  The lack of unity in our lives today blurs or erases understanding of the necessity (meaning) of different divisions of labor.

8.The Egyptian cycles of life were symbols of unity depicting necessities of the community:  1) Horus, heaven and earth, 2) Ra, the dominance of the sun, 3) Osiris, the fact of death, 4)  Apis (the bull),  reconciling the new Egyptian science with the values of tribal spirits.  The great historical change represented by Egypt was the discovery of order  in the universe – of science; they discovered that the stars in the constellation of Pleiades returned to their original positions in the sky every 1460 years.

This cycle, of course, is  indifferent to social life on earth, but it had to be integrated somehow. This belief in the mechanism of nature they saw as meaning that life also was  (should be) eternal. To the Egyptian, 1460 years. was like one day.  All of this represented a fundamental change is beliefs from the old tribal values of ancestor worship.

Lecture – 2

1.The major difference between nomadic societies and agricultural societies is that nomads can’t divide labor; each member must be a jack-of-all-trades. Ancestor worship, therefore, was a logical basis for guidance. But with the advent of permanent settlements, an entirely new life evolved. Fortresses instead of “warpaths,” settlement instead of migration, professional soldiers instead of every tribal member fighting, commerce instead of basic self-sufficiency, writing to supplement oral speech.

2.ERH doesn’t like the term “civilization,” because today it  connotes a difference between tribe (nomad) and city; however, both had discipline (order), and the secrets of living in both included religion,  perpetuation of the species, preparation for the future. Civilization means more than plumbing and parking lots. Today modern man is once again a nomad (peripatetic). The temple replaces the nomadic meaning for the grave.

3.The advent of the city created new unifying elements in society. The city  created geographic unity, with Egypt a unifying of the upper and lower Nile, of heaven and earth, in addition to the basic tribal divisions.  Man in the eyes of the Egyptians became superior to nature because  nature, as represented by the stars,  which could only move east to west, while  man could also move north & south. Yet paradoxically, Egyptians preferred the inanimate world because it was more permanent – gold the most enduring material.

4.The present day domination of our lives by commerce is bound to destroy us, as will any worship of material things, because that kind of worship always leads to acquisition of non-necessities. Today we do not live to create a future but rather live for the  moment. Notice, for instance our increasing national debt – whereby our present excesses must be paid for eventually by future generations. We are destroying the future of society.

5.The Greeks  believed (borrowed) the notion of the circular sequences of events, of cycles of nature, from the Egyptians. Plato in the Timaeus, for instance discusses the endless phases of government monarchy, aristocracy, democracy and dictatorship. THE CONCEPT DENIES THE POSSIBILITY OF SOCIAL PROGRESS. One is bound to live from the ideas of the past. THE NOTION OF THE “BUSINESS CYCLE” IS EGYPTIAN IN MENTALITY.

6.To know the movements of the sky was the first profession (the priesthood), and a revolutionary step away from tribal thinking. It proclaimed the elements of heaven were connected to those on earth.

To write was to meet eternity. To carve the hieroglyphs on the temple walls is to proclaim the eternal truths from heaven. The daily order (roles) for the people of the land were likewise proclaimed. The edict is the first use for writing. Real language  was high-brow. Idiomatic language was an after-effect. The first to speak was the judge, priest, commander-in-chief, proclaimer.

7.In sum, the empires created stability in one place, which meant they had to deal with one set of climates  on one land and to care for it.  This required discipline, order, division of labor. Historically all of the “stable” empires have fallen and reverted back to nomadic or more primitive culture, whether Egyptian, Babylonian, Chinese, Mayan, or Incan. Today in our industrial countries we rape the environment, and people don’t wish to pay for the cost of conservation – they want tax reduction,  and cannot bring themselves to sacrifice.  THIS HAS BEEN THE CASE WITH ALL EMPIRES – THEY COULDN’T MAINTAIN  DISCIPLINE AND ORDER NECESSARY TO SURVIVAL.

Lecture – 3

1.The Tribes and Empires had done their work of establishing guidance from past experience (ancestors), and science (order in the universe).  All of this established a starting point for the Greeks and Jews.  The tribes, Egyptians, Greeks, and Jews were four very different ways of life, which were “against” each other.

2.Most of us believe there is order in science, but not in society.  ERH admonishes us to believe in social progress and social order.

…God visits the sins of the parents in the third and fourth generation, and forgives those who serve Him in the thousandth generation— is simply true.  It’s a natural law.  It’s an order of human history.  For a little bit of merit, your great, great, great, great-grandfather’s effort, you are here alive. (p.1)

3.Regarding the necessity to follow these natural social laws, we must either ignore  history, or participate in it.  What has made these four modes of life available to us  (Tribal, Egyptian, Greek and Jewish) is the church. (p.2)  Each of these societies was trapped in its one mode of life. Christianity admonished us to integrate all of them and emphasize any one at the right time.

The Tribes created a past (recognizing that we have fathers and grandfathers and great-grandfathers who fought for our membership to the ages of founding fathers rather than  existing only in the present moment, isolated in inconsolable loneliness.  AND THIS VENERATION FOR THE PAST, AND FOR BELONGING TO THE AGES, IS NOT “NATURAL” in the sense of what animals can do. We are more than animals.  The CALENDAR of the tribes goes from birth to wedding, from wedding to burial, from war to peace, from initiation to initiation, etc, without conception of dates. The tribes  created the station of KING, with an ancestry to which he is heir.

The empires created the “eternal present” of the heavens.  They discovered from the heavens the perception of the year,  the equinoxes, the return of the seasons as measurements for time, rather than funerals, etc. No tribe could observe the solstice. But since Egyptians discovered that the heavens and earth are connected, they reasoned that time is always the present. [RF – I don’t quite understand the logic of this point although he gives reasons on page five.]

The Greeks subsumed the best of these two notions, then went on to create an order to ideas  (philosophy) and to articulate principles of  art.  These are their contributions – philosophy (the act of generalization and comparison) and poetry (the expression of subjective response to events).

The Jews rejected both the tribal and empire ways of life, investing in their future by way of the notion of prophecy.  THEY CREATED THE IDEA OF FASHIONING THE FUTURE OUT OF THE PAST AND THE PRESENT.

4.These four ways of living formed the four foundations (qualities of mankind)  represented by Christianity, – kingship, priesthood, philosophy and poetry.

“We claim today that we are the heirs to all these four qualities {of man}.” (p.7)

In America we assume all of these possibilities, and have been successful in abusing all of them. Liberty is abused by everyone assuming to be an authority.  The innumerable sects in this country abuse the notion of priesthood. ABUSE CHEAPENS,  THEREBY DESTROYING IMPORTANT PRINCIPLES NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN COMMUNITY.

5.Of course, we possess some of the qualities of these past ways of life.  To a child parents are as royalty.  And we have the power to judge the priest as his edicts apply to our personal lives.

6.Each of these creations of tribes, empires, Greeks, and Jews (and perhaps this notion can be generalized to all real creativity) had to take place independent of the others.  Tribalism could not have arisen in the Egyptian empire, and the Egyptians had to reject the assumptions of ancestry otherwise each of their ideas could not have evolved to prove their validity. But each of the four was incomplete as total guide for organizing social life. They were practiced to extremes, exhausting their validity, and the civilizations upon which they were built declined. .

7.If truth came only out of the past, this meant that all knowledge was assumed to be known at that time. No change was conceivable. With the empires, since the heavens were in constant motion, there was no time to pause and evaluate events. The Jewish God had time; he created the universe from outside it.  The creation of the Sabbath by the Jews was a resting period, a time to evaluate the past week’s events – an action that was otherwise only attributed to the “creator.”

But the belief of Judaism is that we must tend in the direction of rest if we want to have freedom, if we want to be divine.  The discovery of the Jewish people is that — the God who set in motion this world must be superior to motion, that God is rest, eternal peace, that He is the god of peace, and therefore superior …If you keep all things going, nothing new can happen…all mankind’s history is only the record of those actions of freedom by which people did something that had never been done before…All this is newness. (pp.12,13)

The Jews created the notion that man, because he possessed some small part of divinity, could create some new beginnings.

8.The profundity of this idea is that we are free to accept a fact and act before necessity forces us to act, thus having some freedom for decision.  To wait too long is to eliminate our freedom to act willfully. If, for instance, we conserve the environment now, we will have some future options as to how and when to do things.  If all is destroyed before we act, we have forfeited  that freedom; having destroyed animal habitats and therefore the animal species within them, we cannot then decide to regenerate those species.

9.Freedom is the opportunity to create the future. The genius of prophecy, its difference from projection from the past, is that it speaks from the future.  It says that if we wish for a certain type of world in the future we must act a certain way now, or face the consequences .  “All prophets must be partially prophets of doom.” (p.18)

Prophecy is indifferent to temporal orders. That is, it implies WHAT OUGHT, rather than projecting forward WHAT IS.

God created cause and effect, and He created man to supersede cause and effect. (p.19)

10.Prophecy is not based on approval from others, it is not a Gallop Poll. Part of the meaning of Judaism is the willingness (courage) to be unpopular!

“…the whole world is just in a terrible mess today because we have no prophets.  We have only predictors.” (p.21)

11.The Greeks compared different cultures, but accepted them as-is. No judgment is involved. Humanism does not mean everybody accepting each other or being nice, Greeks were warlike and lived by tribal vendetta.  But not being willing to make judgments, not being willing to act on what they knew  in order to change their society for the better, they weakened the power of the great philosophies they created.

Lecture – 4

1.In this chapter ERH discusses the process by which Greeks made two orders into one, and how Jews  rejected both.  First, he declares that in 1945 an era of approximately 1900 years is complete, and now we should be able to combine the four modes of life – tribal (kingships), empire (priesthood), Greek (comparisonism and poetry),  and Jewish (rejectionism and prophecy) – all into a single mode. All of these were embraced by Christianity.

ERH first makes the case that in America we remain “Greek” thinkers; we embrace a mode of living whereby one accepts with equal validity all other modes of living, but observing them from the outside and not taking a stand for a single one. In short, we remain aloof from traditional religious involvement. However, in a broader sense, “Religion is where I have a singleness of purpose…..Nobody who lives can be just Greek.” (p.3)

[By “Greek”, I believe he means, thinking is enough, participation in the affairs of his community is unnecessary.)

2.The notion of “Greek thinking” is important related to his claim that it is the same as “American thinking.” Greek thinking, is secular (or temporal and objective, which is to say not committed to any particular mode of living other than secular. All of this assumes a mechanistic universe over which humankind has no control.  The “mind” – meaning logical thinking – can be controlled, but “nature” cannot be. The Greek separates thought from the body, from the temporal world. The IIliad testifies that mankind is controlled by nature, except for his thinking.

3.The implication of these ideas is profound. Christian Religious thinking assumed that we are under an obligation to create a unity on earth, to unite all peoples and all animals, to be the stewards of the earth,  “…that’s our destiny. We are meant to do this.” (p.11)   THIS IS THE CHRISTIAN MANDATE TO MANKIND.

4.The Christian religious logic is that either man has the power to intervene in the social and natural world,  or he is an automaton. [RF – my own interpretation of these ideas is that our destiny is to build “liveable communities.” This is our common necessity with other peoples on earth, and the idea that should unify us,   mind, spirit, and body. Greek thinking, ERH declares creates schizophrenia.]

Greek thinking therefore is incapable of creating a future, as it tends to remain an observer of what nature has in store for us.

5.Whenever knowledge is acted upon, it has social consequences to which we are never indifferent. Therefore it is impossible for us to be really objective, except in the act of verifying events.

To live in the mind only (as Greeks proclaim) is to separate one’s spirit from inclusion in life. Greek objectivity puts us outside humanity, outside nature. We can therefore usefully examine any subject only by admitting our own superstitions and our own bias. By such admission we become capable of rising above them, limiting the influence of our bias.

6.We can realize some fulfillment in life, (“find our bliss,” as Joseph Campbell terms it) only  by following some cause – and our only worry should be coming to that cause too late! THE MIND IS THEREFORE SUBSERVIENT TO THE HEART, to our loyalties.

…I have never seen a divine reason so far, but I have seen divine beauty in bodies, and I have seen divine hearts, and  divine souls…The mind — most people I know, are stupid. Lazy, prejudiced, blind, wishful thinking…that’s the least  important thing about us. But we have pure-hearted people, fortunately among us. (p.27)

[RF – ERH goes on to provide a number of useful examples pointing to weaknesses of the “mind” and pointing out that thought cannot be separated from our body. It is our logic that creates prejudice, hatred, greed, etc, or it fails to correct these base emotions.]

7.The Jew puts the church ahead of the mind, that is, ahead of our college training. The church must direct our thought and actions. The purpose of the Sabbath is to “have time” to unclutter our minds from daily struggle and action and become re-oriented to our true purpose.

Lecture – 5

1.This chapter is a type of summary explanation of the importance of distinguishing between Greek and Christian thinking. THE PROBLEM ERH raises is, “What is the limitation of Greek thinking, in terms of encyclopedic comparisons of different modes of life?”  A simple answer is that they made comparisons of current events, in the present time only. This led to generalizations about common elements. Generalizations tend not to inspire dedication.  One cannot love, “in general,” for instance.  One must love someone, or some idea or some thing, and act in particular situations. The same is true for any dedication to a cause.

Thus, Greek admonition to the “good” does not inspire dedication to one cause. “We can’t have a pluralistic universe for our worship.” (p.6) So an important idea, to generalize and see the big picture with all its elements, has been rendered impotent by robbing it of an additional concept, which is to select a particular application to a particular problem at a particular time.

In other words, it is one thing to have a tool box full of tools (in this case, intellectual tools), and quite another to know when and how to use a particular tool in a particular situation. Living in a world of abstractions (generalizations only), is artificial. We cannot live (survive) meaningfully in an artificial world for long. Anarchy results.

What ERH is saying is that the tribal societies had one guide for living, Egypt evolved another singular guide, as did the Greeks and Jews. BUT THE GENIUS OF CHRISTIANITY WAS TO SAY, IN EFFECT, THAT ALL THESE MODES OF LIVING HAVE VALIDITY.  THE TRICK IS TO DECIDE WHICH TO USE, OR ALLOW TO DOMINATE ONE’S METHODS, IN A SPECIFIC CASE AND TIME IN OUR JOURNEY THROUGH LIFE.

This Christian mode of thinking also harbors an important historical implication.  That is to say, if having  many tools in one’s tool box makes for the best carpenter (or community builder), then one needs to utilize as many case histories of past experience as possible, to know what tools are available and under what circumstances they seemed to work.

2.For example, ERH claims that:

“…in 1850 God went out of fashion more or less.  And you got universalism, and unitarianism, which is an attempt to have a Greek Christianity.” (p.6)

3.He points out several facets of Greek thinking that if carried to (if practiced by everyone), lead a society astray. For instance, homosexuality results from separation of the mind from the body (ala Descartes). Here ERH does  not refer to what we know today about genetic causes of homosexuality.  His conclusion is not that it was  immoral in itself, but representative of a larger pattern of wrong thinking, and certainly no model  for all of society. This is why Christianity opposed it as a guiding concept. [RF – it would  therefore seem that the fundamentalist Christians today have got the meaning all wrong. That is, they are misreading history by rejecting homosexuality on a moral ground.  They tend to reject other pre-Christian (Greek) contributions as a whole,  e.g.  their mantra against “secular humanism.”]

The aspect of Greek thinking tries to create an artificial world, with a mind, body, and soul outside reality, and  which strives to live in its own ivory-tower existence.  And a mind that tries to create its own world, of course will prefer a friend to a woman who has to bear children with great travail, and which is very expensive to run a household; financially, it costs little comparatively to have a friend. (p.8)

4.Another example of the limitation of Greek thinking (in spite of their great contributions to society) is that of eternal war. Since the mind is dominant above all else in their thinking, Greek humanism posits that man is the measure of all things. Therefore they, the Greeks, are both heaven and earth, and  “…everybody else has to be destroyed, or has to be kept out.” (p.9)

They simply could not, therefore, conceive of a world without eternal war!

5.     Encyclopedic knowledge, pure intellectual curiosity…all the vices of sex, which come from mere keyhole peeping — pluralism for everything,…absorption, annihilation, as Greeks — the Greeks were unable to hold their own politically or morally.  They’re just a closed book.  They ended. (p.9)

6.ERH concludes that our future depends upon, or is directly proportional to, its vitality, to how far we go back into history to see what human experience has been, so that we can see better the nature of our time. And therefore what modes of living are most likely to help us face and rise above our present social problems.

Today he suggests:

If you want to become a writer, your topics are not arbitrary.  They are dictated to you by the spirit of the age.  And if you want to know what you should write about today, you must write about pre-Homeric man. …WE HAVE TO GO FORWARD TO THE END OF TIME BY BRINGING OUT AGAIN THE ACHIEVEMENT OF THE PAST. (p.11)

7.ERH dwells on “Greek thinking”  because it reflects our times in America.  We have become too abstract in our thinking in our view and description of the world. Abstractions = generalizations. Buster is not thought of as Buster, but of his classification as a dog. The term “love” is an abstraction until it is felt in corporeal terms, as in our wife, husband, daughter and son. Greek pluralism provides us with many choices, but no direction as to how to guide our efforts.

The spirit of our times, he claims, is based on both Egyptian and Greek thinking about the spirit of prosperity and the spirit of plurality (generalizations or abstracting).  All of this leads to stoicism, cynicism, boredom,    and skepticism – everything is possible (anyone can be president), but nothing is necessarily true. (p.15)  [RF – I believe ERH intends “true” in this instance to mean, of social import.]

Contrarily, the pre-Homeric god-kings or god-men, gave commands and it was the duty of people to follow them.  The spirit of heaven in those times was manifest in real people and therefore could be related to.  What do we hear from people polled about their attitude toward American politics today?  Resoundingly, that we need leaders, someone honest and moral, someone we can be inspired to follow!

8.What the Greeks did then was to strip every proper name and replace it with a concept. God, in pre-Homeric times was the creative spirit within mankind. God, to the Greeks, became a concept, – mind.  In other words, mere description of the world in impersonal terms is adequate, and it is all we can do. The rest lies with the only element humankind can control, the mind. This attitude puts one outside the life of the universe; one is not god-like, but god himself. Such is the extreme of the life of the mind.

Lecture – 6

1. The basic idea of this series of lectures is that the Christian Era represented a new idea, which is that the creation of human community is going on now and every day. All previous views of reality maintained that there existed an established order in the universe, that all things were pre-ordained, that life consisted of endless repetitive cycles. Tribal life, Egyptian thought, and Greek thought were the same, that there was order in the universe and creation was not in the hands of humankind.

With the tribes, the dead judge the living. With Egypt, the living judge the dead (they, the dead, made mistakes which should not be repeated).

2.The Christian view was that humankind was capable of being co-creators of society in partnership with God. THE IMPLICATION HERE IS PROFOUND ACCORDING TO ERH.  It is that to live a fruitful life, we must do thingsdeliberately, according to our own decisions.  It means, therefore, that one does not live by mere imitation of Jesus, or for the sake of impressing others, but rather because it is the way we must live if we wish to improve community life.

[RF – By implication, humankind has the potential of enormous power engendered by language.  If morality is not the guiding principle for behavior, or at the very least of powerful and controlling leaders, society will tear itself apart from inherent animal instincts.]

Is there a difference between blind obedience or understanding and acceptance of a principle? How does one, for instance, tell if one imitates blindly, or intentionally, to impress others, or because one honestly believes in “the way?”  THE ANSWER IS THAT WE MUST ACT INTENTIONALLY AND TAKE RESPONSIBILITY FOR OUR ACTS, and not blame others when we fail. If one acts only to attract, it is the beginning of falsehood.

The intent of principles assumes one must act honestly and in the interest of the community. To take  responsibility for our actions is to be invested with the Holy Spirit.

3.The subtle meaning of the term, “To live a life in imitation of Christ.”  then is to be creative, to accept the spirit of responsibility for the state of community, and to act as a co-creator.  The converse, the “childish” view of religion, on the other hand is to accept the notion of “imitation” of good deeds for the sake of being good, more or less acting “mechanically” and unknowingly, assuming a narrow, denotative interpretation of language.

Following from this, the meaning of “Holy Spirit” (language) derives from actions. Words are cheap. Actions reflect their spirit, investing meaning.

4.To learn from past experience and to act to improve our communities is to live in the spirit of both past and future, unifying the two. Thus, one honors the visible and the invisible. Faith is invisible; we must believe that our acts in the present will create movement toward some desired future. The Holy Spirit is a mixture of these three spirits, of past, present, and future.  It is a dead end to be “stuck” in the spirit of past only, or present or future only.  For a fruitful life one must utilize all three. (pp.9-11)

5.The tendency today is to believe we are independent of the obligation to sacrifice if we wish to build a future for our children, or for the community   (it is the same). To be independent in the spirit of self-serving is to live only in the present.  To be logical is to learn from our experience and to reason in terms of what we know and can prove and can feel. IT IS NATURAL TO ACT THIS WAY. But to be creative, to think originally, to sacrifice for some unknown (future)  is not natural. It is “super-natural.”

6.In another sense, “…life is explained by death.” (p.6-14) –  This means that, as a guide to how we should act to be fruitful (live a fulfilled life), we must understand that we must learn from what others have taught us.  To learn from that is to know the significant parts of the past. The significant parts of the past have been created by those who sacrificed to find important truths, truths that tell us how to regenerate the community or to destroy it, as the case may be.

How does one write a constitution, found an organization, raise a child, sit on a jury, inspire love? In our lives, from time to time we reach impasses and don’t know how to act, and therefore require guidance.

7.Christianity tells us the meaning of dying, which is grounded in significant acts, defined as those worth dying for.  Socrates taught us how to die.  Jesus taught us why we must die,. so that an idea might live on past our death. SIGNIFICANT GUIDANCE FOR FRUITFUL BEHAVIOR CAN BE INHERITED FROM THOSE WHO PRECEDED US.  Death and life are intimately connected;  to know how to live includes also knowing how and why to die, or sacrifice, stand for an idea that must live on as a model for those who follow us.

8.We fear death, naturally.  But to die “well” creates new life.

9.Ultimately, the ideas that drive generations exhaust themselves and need to be renewed. Mankind is a strange animal: the evolution of society does not live in a single person or in a single principle, but is renewed during many generations, through many interpretations of the principle.  ERH claims not to be an idealist.  He believed in flesh and blood. “Idealists aren’t crucified,..” (p.19)  Jesus believed in life.

10.Understanding death is fundamental to living, and a broad generalization for the idea of creativity and change.  Life, the community, and movements cannot be renewed if they are not re-interpreted when they are no longer potent. For instance the power of Christianity has ebbed and flowed over the ages.  Christianity stands for renewal. “Creation is now and always.”  Today Christianity as practiced in institutions…

“…has been given to babes and sucklings, and has become this candy stuff for Sunday school, which makes it absolutely impossible to assign Him any importance….if I think of these Sunday schools, (I can’t) do anything but vomit all my Christian tradition.”  (p.21)

The uniqueness of humankind is that it can have the same spirit all over the globe.  This is not possible with any other animal.

11.No one born into this world can know his/her direction.  We must learn it from the experience of others. Prayer is noble when it admits one’s own will is not good enough, and asks for guidance from others.  God is not interested in the individual,  only in the community. (p.24)

12.One cannot organize anything after his/her death, but one can have influence in that one’s spirit enters another person.  This is not the same as prescription (following rotely) because creativity is driven by spirit. It must be free at every moment. Creativity is the ability to express and old idea in a new way, or to see an old problem from a new perspective. Ironically, commerce pays for predictability, which is the opposite.

13.Theology is the “enemy” of faith and religion.  Faith is the willingness to act without clear assurances. Religion is the willingness to carry forward a necessary idea that underpinned someone’s act from the past. Theology is the “philosophy” underlying some particular organization, an organized representation of a set of ideas. Its weakness is that it prescribes behavior, which is antithical to creativity. Prescription of behavior is to be contrasted with prescribing the spirit, or purpose, or hoped-for consequences of some behavior.

Any subject becomes dead in our minds when we believe everything is known about it. It then becomes an object of mechanical response; one can be objective about it when everything is revealed.  If this were true of humans, we would be nothing more than animals. The truth is that to renew ourselves, to be vital, we must continue to grow, to surprise ourselves, to have new revelations about ourselves.

14.Any living thing in nature dies.  Humankind  escapes death only through living on in the memories of others.  If a life was fruitful, then its spirit will influence others positively. One’s death should therefore be given meaning when it engenders a new beginning for another person.

15.The uniqueness of the Christian era was that it connected generations. (p.36) The meaning of the sacrament of marriage is that it creates a future by teaching children there can be peace (between the sexes). A child brought up in peace can hope to find the same peace.

The church therefore connects all peoples and all churches in that it harbors

“…the fruits of previous generations to sow the seeds of future generations.” (p.37)

16.Still another unique quality of the Christian church was that not only drew from past generations, but made those fruits “…total and explicit.”   As long as customs are not articulated explicitly, as long as they remain vague, then future behavior based on learning from past experience remains accidental.

Peace is created by everyone’s willingness to sacrifice. “The church says, `It costs a price to live in peace together’.”  (p.40)

Lecture – 7

1/7Making peace and moving toward solutions to social problems requires, 1) that one define the problem that caused dissention, 2) recognizing that the problem remains, 3) that past solutions are not working and finally, 4) a willingness to try something new.  Each era is confronted with a problem that, if not solved, will eventually terminate that culture or civilization. In this way epochs are identified and rendered explicit.

You have not made peace in 1865. You have not made peace in 1918. You have not made peace in 1945…And the whole life of the Christian era is based on the assumption that to break with one calendar, to break with one order, can only be done explicitly. (p.2)

Western man is living by accident, not having learned the lessons of these wars. A new epoch begins when people begin to think differently. There are two types of historical facts: those that change our thinking, and epochal events that fail to result in a change in thinking. The two world wars were epochal events, but they have yet to change our thinking, and therefore we remain “inside” this epoch, unable to break out by way of addressing the cause.

In America we are bringing on the next world war because we have not learned this lesson, and we support tyrants around the world. (p.6)

2.We remain, therefore, “jellyfish”; foreign policy is based on the immediate needs of commerce. And the churches seem impotent to address these problems.  Historians DO NOT MAKE EPOCHS, but when they are insightful they properly interpret them.

The first Christians suffered for 300 years before the rest of civilization recognized that Jesus brought on a new epoch.

There have been four epochs of the Christian church in 1956 years, soul, culture or role, mind, and nature (these have been defined in the first 5 lectures of this series).

3.People called the Reformation the dawn of a new era. A “counter term” for this era by non-Christian thinkers (whether in the church or not) was Renaissance, when science and art began to guide thought, rather than the church continuing to do so.

One cannot remain capable of regenerating society as long as one believes one must think according to the values of the 20th century; rather one must understand that we live in the much broader Christian epoch. (p.13) Only in this larger context are there regenerating criteria to guide evaluation of epoch-making events. Only thus can we know more completely what are the killing and what are the regenerating forces in that epoch.

4.Epochs are only slowly recognized. The turning points of 1776, 1789, 1917 were at first recognized only by the Americans, or French, or Russians, respectively, but in time the world recognized the consequences of these events that changed the world.  Our thinking about marriage, about what is public and private, about how to do business, about public responsibility, about the nature of the family, about rights and responsibilities has been changed by these events. The common term “community” has drastically changed its meaning.

5.ERH discusses a major outcome of these events.  This is the constant discussion of means as contrasted with  ends.

A good American is a man who declines to discuss ends.  He wants to discuss means…If you have a country that consists of 300 minorities, 300 denominations,..300 languages, you can only discuss means, because you’ll never agree on ends. (p.26)

The lesson to be learned here is something about the difficulties of bringing unity among peoples. Only some modicum of agreement as to what are common,  eternal values unites peoples.

6.The work of Christianity was to create this type of unity. The first 1,000 years of the church was needed to create the church; it looked mainly inward at its own forms. The old temple of Israel was taken over by a New Church, by a new Israel. (p.28)

The second 1,000 years was spent in unifying the world. “Now an empire is a world by itself.” instead of a limited set of borders.  There are no more emperors.

Today, we enter the 3rd millennium, and a new problem has arisen. Science and technology have fragmented the peoples of the world, families and communities, and the institution of marriage has all but been destroyed. Today in America almost 50% of all children are born out of wedlock.  THE GREAT PROBLEM OF THE 3RD MILLENNIUM IS TO RE-INVENT THESE SOCIAL UNITS.  We must bring some unity within and among them, beyond commercial interests and cruise ships.

How else can one account for divorce, the rampant use of drugs, juvenile delinquency, the common need for psychiatrists and other counselors, the general social alienation within national boundaries, as well as distrust between many groups, as evidenced by the present ethnic wars around the world?

7.Another measure of this fragmentation between social units is the over-valuing of commerce as the dominant criterion for judging the efficacy of public decision-making.

This great issue of our time..is one of the greatest experiences of the remaking of the human mind, in the face of great events…Does anybody deal with the real, the great transformation of the human soul and the human spirit?  (p.38)

8.In conclusion, what we need to do now is to find our place between the past and the future, to articulate where we are in our evolution so that we can see what is needed and get started. we must create one society out of these disparate fragments of society. “So that’s the theme of a real universal history.” (p.40)

Lecture – 8

1.Today, especially in America, we seem not to be interested in shaping a future. [RF – Other than for commerce and sewer systems, of course.] Crime, poverty, and alienation are rampant.  No doubt part of this stems from a misplaced faith in science, that it can tell us what is going to happen. But that’s the limitation of the scientific attitude.  If we believe in forces outside ourselves, in commerce and in nature, then we feel powerless to shape our communities.  BUT THE VERY FUNCTION OF RELIGION MUST BE TO DO JUST THAT – TO BELIEVE THAT A BETTER FUTURE FOR SOCIETY IS NOT LEFT TO CHANCE, THAT IT IS POSSIBLE TO ENVISION AND THEN DIG IN TO REMAKE IT HAPPEN.

Prophets are no longer fashionable today because we have lost faith in our ability to shape behavior in the direction of improvement. Today our pseudo-prophets are scientists, or “futurists,” who predict how many cars and plastic building materials will be available in the future. “Prophecy believes in the invisible, and is perfectly immune against what it sees before its eyes.” (p.3)

2.Over-population, crime, poverty, unmanageable bureaucracies, reliance on science as a method for pointing the way to a future  – all alienate us from each other. They atomize society, as Martin Buber said,  destroying our communities. WE NEED TO RE-ESTABLISH COMMUNITY AT ALL LEVELS, RE-ESTABLISHING REVERENCE FOR THE FAMILY, FOR DEVOTION AND LOYALTY AND PRIDE. WE HAVE LOST THE ABILITY TO FEAR THE LOSS OF THESE HUMAN VALUES.

When Darwinian concepts are applied to human interaction, when all commerce is “cut-throat” and personal interaction competitive,  then we tend to destroy all trust and integrity; the commercial ethic has a nasty habit of creeping into all interpersonal relations, as it seems to be doing today. Darwinian “evolution in history is decadence.” (p.9)

ERH gives evidence of the way Christianity has stood for regeneration by integrating all previous social accomplishments, i.e. the family, science, poetry and philosophy, prophecy  e.g. the accomplishments of the tribes, of the great empires (Egypt, etc.), Greek thinking, and Judaism.  (pp.10-16)

3.The issue of prophecy touches on the Gospels in terms of their representation as a stage in social change. The Gospels differ because each was addressed to different groups, each with different biases.  Matthew speaks to the Jews, Mark to the Egyptians and Romans, Luke to the tribes, and John to the Greeks. They were written in four different places, addressing different groups and value systems, but essentially with the same message.

So the four Gospels tell you of the march of the church.  In order to penetrate into these four regions, the church had to write its Gospel in four forms. (p.19)

4.THE SIGNIFICANCE OF COMMUNICATION CAN ONLY BE DETERMINED BY AGREEMENT WITH THE GROUP ADDRESSED. Thus, individual experiences by themselves have no meaning. This notion is fundamental because it indicates how language is vital – no group can exist without communication, the method of which is commonly agreed upon and understood.  (p.19)

One must speak to each individual or social unit with reference to that group’s cultural and linguistic context. Thus, the necessity for four Gospels. THIS IS WHY NO ONE CAN WRITE SIGNIFICANT STATEMENTS WITH ONE BOOK. THERE MUST BE MANY, AND THEY MUST ADDRESS DIFFERENT GROUPS. BUT EACH BOOK MUST REFLECT THE SAME SPIRIT.  AND, NO DOUBT THIS IS WHY ERH CLAIMS THERE CAN BE ONE UNIVERSAL RELIGION, BUT MANY WAYS OF EXPRESSING IT, AND MANY FAITHS!

5.ERH  addresses the relationship of death and dying to generating a future, how death can be fruitful.  (p.15-26)

6.The relationship of the state to the church is important to understand.  The state represents our need to survive in our present physical environment. The purpose of the church is to represent the future, how we solve present problems so that our communities may someday live in peace and prosperity. The church then should organize our will, our soul, our willingness to sacrifice for that future.  THE CITY OF GOD, (St. Augustine), makes the statement that no state must take away our yearning for a better government – no human can be God.

7.           …the mother tongue is not the only tongue in which the life can be expressed.  We know today that the spirit has to be transported in every generation…You cannot preach the Gospel without translation.  A fundamentalist is the enemy of Christianity, because he makes it impossible for a decent man to believe that the God of the Christians is a living God.  He’s just a paper god. Because a fundamentalist cannot translate.  They take the letter vivified, but the letter killeth…` the spirit vivifies, and the letter killeth’ is expressed in this tradition of Jerome where the Bible is translated into Latin….Jerome says the Gospel cannot be preached by repetition. (p.30)

8.How does one convert a number of people to a single spirit?  First, by converting individuals. Then, by groups of individuals.  In the Christian church, the first 500 years. were spent on converting individuals, and the next 1,000 years were spent unifying tribes.

Lecture – 9

1.”It seems to be a law…Nothing important happens unless somebody is willing to die for it.” (p.1)

2.There seem to be four steps to the renewal or founding of either a church or a secular community; ERH noted that for the church these steps were: a) Martyrs, b) fathers, c) monks and d) kings. In a like way the secular version of these steps is a) crusaders, b) discoverers, c) explorers and  d) inventors

Crusaders expose their lives to give to a cause; the discoverer seeks new continents or new aspects of the world; the explorer completes this process; and the inventors explore the inner world increasing knowledge.

THE POINT IS THAT ALL OF THESE 8 STAGES CREATED 8 TYPES OF HUMANS WHO SERVED THESE ROLES. ONE BEGETS ANOTHER – ALL ARE NECESSARY FOR FOUNDING OR RENEWING OF SOCIAL UNITS. THE FIRST FOUR CREATE A RELIGIOUS COMMUNITY, AND THE SECOND FOUR A SECULAR COMMUNITY. ONE MAY PREFER ONE TYPE OVER ANOTHER, BUT NO SINGLE TYPE IS ADEQUATE TO COMPLETE THE JOB. (pp.4,5)

3.One of the great problems of learning about others is that one tends to reject what one doesn’t like, judging it unimportant or for some reason objectionable. But to truly learn from social experience is to the reality of the processes, roles and values of different communities, whether we like them or not.

4.In a like way, each academic subject matter deals only with one aspect of a phenomenon.   For instance, science describes almost entirely with numbers. The sun is more than so much energy, it is also a useful metaphor, and it tells us about social phases related to growing food, etc.  This fragmentation of disciplines, which in turn reflects our thinking, results in barriers to understanding the larger context of problems.

…we enter today a third millennium.  There’s no doubt that by the year 2,000 the world will have to have a religion or it will not exist, a different form of our religion.  Mankind, society demands another group of leadership.  You can’t live by discoverers and inventors, if you want to organize peace. (p.11,12)

The two social types, explorers and inventors, are important, but not sufficient to maintain a world at peace, and by over emphasizing there value we are tearing the world apart.

5.This is why we must be interested in history, because there we learn these lessons – if, that is, one hears an organized and comprehensive view of history, a universal history!

True history is interested in transformations, without which human life cannot exist. LIFE IS GREAT BECAUSE, OR WHEN, IT DEALS WITH CREATING COMMUNITY.  Man becomes complete, not as individuals, but in community, where much greater tasks can be performed.  A dam cannot be built by a single individual with a single skill – it takes thousands, who must cooperate.

6.One person cannot know much of reality by oneself.

Get a friend who tells you off when you are wrong, and tell him off when he’s wrong, and you know each other. That’s the only way of living. Any attempt for self-scrutiny leads to the psychoanalyst. (p.13)

7.Holidays group people. “Easter is the holiday by which the members of the Church recognize they are members of the Church….God created man as a corporation-forming animal.” (p.14)

8.One of the major functions of the Church is to remind people that their very existence has been bought by the blood of many martyrs, by soldiers who fought to protect our country against enemies, by our revolutionaries, by those who fought for unions, for the environment, for justice, at great expense to themselves.  TO UNDERSTAND THIS MAKES US INTO  DIFFERENT PERSONS THAN WE OTHERWISE WOULD BE. And those persons are ones capable of creating peace and justice in the world. All of this has been given us without previous merit on our parts, and we therefore owe society a commitment whereby this tradition is carried on. It is this spirit which the church must give us.

9.The family is also a crucial incubator for engendering this spirit. The work-place is not. When, as today all institutions have lost their way, one can only begin to regenerate society by beginning with small groups, – family, neighborhoods, clubs, churches, etc.

Now the family, the tribe, the society of the future, which is the Tribe of tribes, has only one first interest: how can parents and children be of one spirit? How can mother and a daughter be of one spirit? How can mother and son be of one spirit?…What nature cannot give is one spirit between a father who is a banker and a son who is a professor.  Or one spirit between a daughter who is married, and a mother, who is Mrs. Luce.  (p.17)

The only force that will allow people with disparate experiences to live together in peace, must begin with a family (primary social unit) where more than one generation lives, plays, and prays together.

This engendering of one spirit is particularly difficult today, when the churches seem to view themselves as social, rather than spiritual organizations, and where they teach a religion for children. “The spirit is only true when people of different sex, and different age, and different mind serve in this spirit.” (p.19)

10.Part of this sharing of spirit requires one to realize there are different divisions of labor, or roles, for each of us at different times, whereby one is not equal to another. Today we seem not to believe in expertise in many instances. We believe our own experience is equal to, or superior to, that of others.

11.Also we kill the spirit with too much wealth. “Security is the death of life. Don’t ask for it.” (p.21)

ERH informs us of the prophet Malachi,

“I shall turn the hearts of the parents to their children, and the hearts of the children to their parents.  If this does not happen, the earth will be cursed and will perish.”  (p.22)

Generalizing this notion, if generations are not unified:  ERH BELIEVES THAT THIS PROPHECY HAS YET TO BE FULFILLED, AND THAT THIS IS THE JOB FOR THE 3RD MILLENNIUM. Our tendency today is to fragment the generations, and we seem to be “degenerated.”  As Buber says, “Industrial society atomizes society.”

12….children no longer believe what their parents believe…psychoanalysis is just an attempt to do something about this ridiculous disunity between the generations…Where there is one spirit,nobody has any Freudian complex.p.24

…obviously the human society has today a tremendous and dignified task…nothing is gained by running forward…it will be less and less church and more and more Free-masonry,..more philately, and more..Cadillacs..no future to you.  THE MIRACLE WHICH YOU HAVE TO PERFORM IS TO RECREATE THE SPIRIT WITH PEOPLE THAT HAVE GONE BEFORE YOU….

Progress is out, in your sense, technological progress….The only interest, the only field of action, the miraculous new foundation of the universe can only come when, against all expectations, some among us have the power to wait until they can act in two generations. (p.25)

13.The primary notion here is that significant movements and acts must be carried out in more than one generation.  ERH claims that “liberals” tended to believe in change for its own sake, thus, the son believed less than the father, in a shorter time span.  THE TRUTH, ERH CLAIMS, LIES IN JUST THE OPPOSITE. THE BASIC PROBLEMS ARE THE SAME, BUT METHODS FOR ACCOMPLISHING THEM DIFFER.

…children depend on your power to bestow on them a spirit in which they speak. They have to learn English, and not basic English. But high English, the highest, the English by which they can invoke and implore another person to join them, by which they can found a family again. (p.31)

14.It is always up to each of us to discern which, of the lessons from the past, need to be employed or emphasized at this time to re-establish or revitalize our present systems. Antiquity taught us the need for family, Egypt and other empires taught us science, philosophy, and the arts, and we must heed their lessons. We have the power to establish peace if we will only use it; otherwise we tear ourselves apart with war.

15.The origin of all creativity, and of power and motivation, is always “spirit.” It is not of this (the concrete) world, except as our actions manifest that spirit; the terms has no meaning if not acted upon.  The origin of a marriage is the spirit of love, and all actions (duties) follow.  For instance, duties of marriage to support, to help grow, to raise a family, to sacrifice, suffer, etc, all derive from love.  The origin of law is a love for justice and order.  ERH uses the term “incarnation.”

There is nothing else to be said about the whole history of mankind, that first love, and freedom, and imagination say it, and then we do our duty to have it come true.  And that duty takes suffering; it takes martyrdom; it takes fathers; it takes monks; it takes kings; it takes crusaders…and now it takes founders of families…all laws are the sedimentation of free creation.  Anybody who has experienced love knows that it comes first; it’s a new beginning.

If you ever in your life had a bright idea, or a new instinct of a new change of heart, make this the cornerstone of your understanding of the universe and you will understand that the universe begins with creation.  And it ends in incarnation, because that’s the experience of every potent and creative man in the world.  (pp.34,35)

Love begins, and hope and faith keep you going.

16.Summarizing:  We are powerless and lost until we learn how to create our lives — what engenders the spirit and what kills it.  To learn this, we must learn from experience,  going back to the beginning of history.  Personally, in the beginning we have little experience, and must therefore learn from history – what succeeded and what failed, what corrupted and what regenerated vitality.  But fruitful action always begins with spirit.  Since each generation lives in a different social, physical, and political environment, and since the notion of “incarnation of the spirit” means a change in human nature itself, the values and institutional forms each generation inherits must be renewed.

It seems today that our institutions (law, education, medicine, politics, religion, etc.) are not vital, and therefore are in critical need of redefinition. No doubt change of this magnitude will be wrenching, with no guarantee of success.  Today all forms of life on earth are threatened, as has always been the case before some great change began civilization anew!

 

HISTORY MUST BE TOLD – 1955

Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.   “…history is all that which explains why education has to keep changing.  History is those events which make it dangerous, which make it intolerable that people should live as though they lived from time immemorial.” (p.2)

2.There are many unimportant events that should not influence tomorrow. So history is dualistic, sitting in judgment of things that should not come back (like slavery), or of events about which we should make new decisions so that they can be carried on. In this sense,  then,  “…the past is still ahead of us.” (p.3)

3.Great events are brought about by people who do things, “regardless of the consequences.”  And this is an admonition for all of us, for our future, if it is to be fruitful.  The community must be directed by this attitude of having to decide what must be forgotten and what must be carried on (regardless of personal consequences).

The fecundity of the human race is based on the white heat of decision and the good conscience that we are in harmony with past action, and for this reason, have a future. (p.5)

Freedom cannot be achieved if you ask,  “What will be the result for me?”  Results are always uncertain.  One must therefore act without regard to pressures of the moment.

4.People from the past who deserve to be remembered either changed conditions or met new conditions in the right fashion.  Because we are free agents, we are free to change.

5.Things never stay the same.  Thus, our actions and behaviors must not be the same as they were in the past.  “In other words, past and future are both alive….nothing which has been bought by real human investment of heart and courage must vanish from this earth.”   (p.7)

6.Time is not homogeneous; historical epochs occur in fits and starts.  “In great moments, there is condensed the resolution and the decision of man to enter a new day, or to end an old day.”  (p.11)

7.Today, an event in one part of the world has repercussions everywhere else in the world. The human race is now indivisible, and if we cannot find world peace, we will tear ourselves apart.

8.Real history contains only  what once was new. “History then is the story of those things which have to be told because at one time they appeared to be impossible.”  (p.9)

History Must be Told – 1955 – Review

Today an event in one part of the world has repercussions everywhere.  The human race is now indivisible, and if we cannot find world peace, we will tear ourselves apart.  How can we find such peace?  Of course, by learning lessons from the past.  People from the past who deserve to be remembered either changed conditions or met new conditions in the right fashion.  “History then is the story of those things which have to be told because at one time they appeared to be impossible.”

 

HISTORY MUST BE TOLD – Draft Transcription

Lectures 1-6
Trial Studio Recording, not used for Record
Feringer notes
Last edited: 5-7-97

1.   History today tends to be either ignored as boring, or irrelevant.  There are too many “histories”, for instance, of science, of a war, or of a culture or country.  But ERH suggests there is only one history that has power, that is the history of mankind.

In my view, only such an approach to history gives it power to help us create our future.  Too often these “too many histories” are mere recordings of sequences of events, or are put together from a bias that distorts any ability to find truth from past events. (see p. 1-2 with the reference to Schopenhauer which indicates this view).

2.   Three points about history: 1) it occurs without regard to our happiness, 2) people conscious of history may be without an academic degree (i.e. not experts), 3)  true history is (should be) about changes, about newness. “It is the inheritance of acquired qualities, the transmission of new qualities.”(of human society.)p. 1-3

3.   It tells us how one thing came into creation, despite all the reasons why it shouldn’t. “History then is the story of new creations, or it is nothing.” p. 1-5

4.   “…history can only consist of the things that cannot be rationally analyzed and deduced..?” p. 1-5  For instance, animals mate because of chemistry.  Humans, by contrast never know when it is time to love. “It makes true love all the more miraculous…..History is the sum of the unbelievable things that become believable because they are told.” p.1-6

5.   For these reasons, the second dogma of history is that it is rather short. History is both new and old;  events, at a general level recur, and an recurring sunrise may be the dawn of a new day (for mankind.)  Thus, the telling of history is subtle and rife with choices by the story teller.  And since the “important” events cannot be rationally deduced or explained, history must be told as a story.

6.   From here ERH goes into a discussion of time, past present and future. i.e. The present is in tension between future and past. We have obligations to continue from the past that which should be continued (i.e. democracy, environmental respect etc.), to ignore the insignificant events, and to act to carry on those which must be carried on.

7.   The present is the time to act, we can lose time and gain time, past generations have prepared our own future, the future must be constantly re-created by our free choices.

8.   In order to maintain our sanity we cannot feel isolated, alone; we must feel we are part of the larger group or society . “What we call `history’ then is a sequence of acts that are freely done by people, and then in the end, miraculously fit together.” p. 1-13  To the extent that cultures of the world remain fragmented, at war, we will tear ourselves apart as a world.  To the extent that there will be some type of unity, we will then have a future.

History Must Be Told – Draft

Trial studio recording, not used for record

Review

Rosenstock-Huessy never gave the same lecture twice, nor taught the same course twice.  To have heard him again on the same subject one thus found the same fundamental points, but always with a difference. New examples, a different orientation and in the end the listener experienced, not contradictions but greater depth of understand and respect for the subtleties of the subject.  This issue of History Must Be Told covers the basic points about,  how we must make decisions and begin action in the present and the thrust of those actions must be toward creation of our desired future, how we must connect ourselves with larger communities so that we do not feel alone in the world.  He then goes on the examine how history represents choices which need to be made about what from the past should be forgotten and what must be told if it is to have the power of enlightenment.

UNIVERSAL HISTORY – 1954

Lectures 1-7
Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

This series of seven lectures deals mainly with the meaning of historical knowledge and the first stages of human history – tribal life.

Lecture 1

1.There are several guides one must follow before any meaning can be deduced from history.

a.One must be conscious of one’s bias, otherwise there is no reference point for selection of issues, or for  organization. Everyone has a point of view; one cannot operate for one day without one.

b.History can be told only as a story because the whole value of the effort is to determine how something new happened in the world, against all odds saying it couldn’t happen. Every great advance in civilization, whether in science, or politics, or art, had to break some mold and go against traditional knowledge.  When Jesus was crucified, who could have guessed at that time that his influence would persist and a great church would be formed? Einstein was first thought to be mad, and Rembrandt was unrecognized as a genius during this lifetime. SO THE IMPORTANT PART OF HISTORY IS TO CONVEY HOW SUCH A GREAT MIRACLE HAPPENED AGAINST THE ODDS. THE PURPOSE IS TO HELP SOCIETY THROUGH SOME CRISIS , THE SOLUTION TO WHICH SEEMS HOPELESS.  HOW THIS HAPPENED CAN BE TOLD ONLY THROUGH THE MEANS OF A STORY – NARRATIVE HISTORY IS THE ONLY MEANINGFUL HISTORY, because there is no logic or prediction in how those events happened.

c.Lack of predicted events means these events go against what can be seen at the time.  The famous stage-play HARVEY is a case in point.  The rabbit cannot be seen, but through a story it can be made believable.  Great creations of man likewise cannot be seen before they have occurred, because they exist only in the mind of the perpetrator.

d.Newness is always recognized with great difficulty, and with some delay. A generation or more may need to pass. Einstein waited 17 years before even a few scientists believed his theory of special relativity was valid, and longer before the whole scientific community accepted it, and longer still before public recognition.

2.History is the story of creation, of how all the elements of new life came into the society of different cultures. Lincoln would not have been a historical figure if he had not acted to maintain the Union and abolish slavery, thus changing life in the United States. truly historical events are therefore unique, unexpected, unheard of miracles of social creativity. Nothing else in past events is particularly interesting.

3.The purpose of history is to help us create a future; it should begin with the problems of our time. To solve these problems, our first step should be to examine similar past events to see what these might tell us about similar problems. Thus, the value of history in creating our future lies in direct proportion to how far it extends into the past.  Today Western culture refers to the Christian era.  To understand and respond to our religious problems then, one must go  back at least that far. History can be interesting, only as long as the future is interesting. (p.18)   “…the future of history is always the revival of the miracles of the past, plus those miracles that are necessary to make this revival possible.” (p.10)  One turns to the past in order to discover newness.

4.True history assumes that mankind must participate in regenerating society, which is to say that mankind is yet unfinished.  Each new advance represents an incarnation, a new life for society. And at each point, human nature changes as well.  Only such assumptions make  history vital, living, and relevant to our lives.  This is why history must be rewritten every generation.  New problems arise, old problems take on new forms, and different issues become the focus of examination of past events.

5.Part of the creative force of true history is to free one from superstitions in judging old from new. As said before, we are all biased and could not make decisions without  predisposition. Paradoxically, to change we must forget those biases in order to strike out anew.  The old saying, “history never repeats itself,” is an incomplete aphorism.  Old methods that establish qualities of life must be repeated,  for example, the fight for freedom, the fight for peace, the resistance against oppression.  Battles against these forces are eternal, and so there is some repetition. But there is also newness, and therefore, new means must be found in order to reestablish desirable conditions.

6.Of course individuals commit acts of self-interest so the repeated stories of human failure are neither new nor interesting.  BUT WHENEVER SOMEONE COMMITS AN ACT, NOT OF SELF-INTEREST, THIS BELONGS IN HISTORY. (p.26)

7.     …history is the sum of the events which make it necessary for a child to grow up differently than before. Other events we will not mention. They are not historical…Lincoln now belongs to the ages, your children have to learn the Gettysburg Address… If he had only lived in his own time, like professor Everetts, the senator,…your children could grow up without ever hearing the Gettysburg Address…So we call history those events which have made it necessary — a different way or approach of any man born afterward. (p.30)

Lecture 2

1.”All history, then, is between speakers and listeners. It is not between professors and students.” (p.1)

History in bits and pieces makes no sense and has little value.  It has value only if mankind is conceived as one, not as 23 different civilizations living side-by-side but isolated from each other.

There can be no meaning in the creation of the world and in its preservation and in its redemption if there is not one history.  The pluralism of history is the greatest atheistic enterprise of our age. (p.1)

2.ERH admonishes us in this country for providing too much freedom to the uninformed (mainly children), asking them to make choices for which they are ill equipped.

…modern education denies the  American child the privilege of being told…This is the first age in which man is left alone in space. (p.4)

3.We, he asserts, are lost in space with no direction.  We are space-oriented   thinkers  craving more material things, consumption-oriented, lacking much in moral judgment. We will not tax ourselves to improve education, we want lower taxes, we destroy the environment for profit and  we run up enormous national debt that leaves our children and grand-children to pay – in every sense destroying our future.

We have freedom to change all this, FREEDOM TO ORIENT OURSELVES, but to change requires our respecting and following the rhythms of time. The past, present, and future is a unit of time which must be understood and acted upon as a unit.  That is, we must begin in the present by working for a future we desire, then seeking similar past events that will guide us to move in that direction. When we are conscious of how to use the present in this way, it becomes expanded,  larger, meaningful, fulfilling.

4.Meaningful history, fruitful study of past events, creates this expanded present.  ERH points out these important distinctions between space and time. Space is things we can see and measure, and represents events in the material world.  Time, in contrast, is not visible, but is driven by the spirit.

The spirit, in turn,  is driven by listening to commands. Whether one becomes a physicist or doctor or teacher, one’s primary drive stems from one’s spirit, for better or worse.  To create a future has everything to do with the problem of time, and of specific times in which we live.

5.To enter our “times” is to enter history,  to participate in actions that will regenerate the community, and will move toward creating a future for it.

People who ignore this call are “counted out” from entering life; they remain beings with no spirit, with no future, and no sense of a fulfilled life, except to be able to consume more and die from chloresterol-clogged arteries.

TO ENTER INTO THE TIMES MEANS, AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE,TO TAKE ADVANTAGE OF THE OPPORTUNITIES OF THE MOMENT. One can act only in the present, not in the past or future!

6. ERH asserts that for the last 1,000 years we have developed our concepts of space, developing  science and technology.  But science and technology cannot provide us with guidance for action in community-building (except of course where to put the sewers.)

Using technology and science (space thinking) has nothing to do with the heart, with our feelings, or with engendering our spirit (soul). Heart and soul are the core of a vital social order, the source of its power.

All the marriage problems of the human race are problems with timing… Timing is a much broader field (than politics). But we have allowed it to crumble and to shrink, to so little bits of life that the rest of life is not taken care of. (pp.16,17)

It is as though our lives are like the 10-second time bites of advertising, With no extended time from past, or into future. Our knowledge of past provides us with case studies for guidance for action in the present.  Our drive must be, not only to survive in the present, but to do it in a way that creates the future we wish.

8.        …the heart is given us as the pre-eminent indicator of time, of timing. We have no other. The brain can never tell you.  The brain always tells you the opposite. The next millennium at this moment —we will have to start on timing, because today timing is destroyed. (p.18)

The theme of the future is not the world (i.e. more science), but society. And there is a definite opposition between society and world…World is everything visible and measurable. (p.19)

9.His point is not to reject science, but to define its contribution and balance it with other factors.  For instance, in science, contradiction is to be avoided.  In society, we constantly immigrate from one stage to another, wherein we become the opposites, child to adult, bachelor to husband or wife, husband and wife to parents, parents to grandparents. Receivers of past wisdom and authority mixed with our own experience, we use them to create added authority from our actions.  All of these stages require different laws for guidance, different appropriate behavior.

Today we tend to worship the mind, but in the third millennium we must re-learn the lesson that the mind must also love and be guided by its opposite, the heart, by an intuition of what feels right.

10.       I have tried to show you that we are at this moment vaulting between the second and third millennium of an era, which had three tasks to make all people so free that they could go into the future.  To allow them to conquer space. And now to allow them to organize society.

We have therefore three great thousand-year topics, themes of history which deserve your attention.  Church, for the people. The world, for space…And now we have the social problems.  Society, as the organization inside which man must be allowed to know when to do one thing and when to do the very opposite. (p.25)

Lecture 3

1.ERH identifies the crucial indicators of changes throughout history; these represent, not only the stages we have gone through, but also present evidence that those changes occur against seemingly impossible odds, and that these odds are overcome.

…we have now to round out now the whole era of history, the whole times of human endeavor into the impossible, into the surprising, into the unexpected, into the unnatural. (p.1/3)

Applying these criteria he identifies the stage we are now presently entering and thus the major thrust of our times.  Of these three different endeavors, we now are prepared to enter the third.

a.The creation of a church (Christian), that creates a universal guide to moral behavior fired all people to find a universal basis for integrating all peoples of the world. Universality also frees us to gain perspective on the physical universe (space). This took the first 1,000 years of the Christian era.

b.The second stage was the evolution of science and technology, which allows us to control our environments and thus frees us to address the final problem,  social organization.  This scientific achievement was the preoccupation of the 2nd millennium, how just ending. ERH asserts that space has now been conquered in the sense of basic methods and understanding, and that anyone who sees this as not accomplished, belongs to the past.

c.Finally, we enter the 3rd millennium to address the problem of better organizing society.

2.ERH reminds us of what is believed to be a common truism, that if one wishes to look into the future, one shall see what children are interested in.  This he refutes: “They are always behind. That’s why they are children.”  CHILDREN SIMPLY HAVEN’T HAD ENOUGH EXPERIENCE TO UNDERSTAND WHAT LIFE IS ABOUT; they have yet to support themselves, found a family, send sons and daughters to school.  The truism is a handicap to parents on this issue.

3.In general, man’s (humankind’s) evolution is from being “natural” (animal-like) toward becoming unnatural (civilized). Our evolution beyond animals has occurred only through society, and thus we have weathered changes that have engendered this progress:  a) Evolving language (and therefore families) to expand and validate experience. b) Learning from past experience, respecting authority (a & b were tribal eras).  c) Developing science, (i.e. the great empires like Egypt).  d) Developing philosophy and poetry (Greek accomplishments). e) Creating a future through prophecy (Jewish accomplishment). f) Integrating these previous eras into universal principles (Christianity). And now, g) Entering the 3rd millennium, to organize society.

Each era created freedom to progress to the next step.

4.THE DANGER OF CONTINUING TO ALLOW SPACIAL ORIENTATION (SCIENCE) TO DOMINATE OUR THINKING IS THAT INDIVIDUALS TEND TO BE TREATED AS COGS IN A MACHINE.  This is why we must now address social organization, which allows us to evolve as humans. This is to say, to organize society so that we have the appropriate freedom and peace among all groups on earth.

[RF – ERH in other essays, explains the consequence of modern social science having borrowed too much of its orientation and method from natural science: humans are treated as cogs in machines. The, social scientists seem to have forgotten that their field is differentiated from that of natural science.]

Scientific laws, by definition, allow no freedom, and no human future; society becomes fixed, ant-like, non-creative.  We no longer can act as an image of God, participating in the creation of the social world and of ourselves. Freedom means not being bound by natural science attitudes, which cause us to misinterpret the meaning of our experience.

5.To create a future, and to change is to create time, to have time to plan.  That is the meaning of the sabbath.  [RF – this is a subtle issue, time. What I believe he is getting at is that we have freedom for creativity only when we have time to reflect and re-examine and re-search.]

The church was to create a single people out of many presently separate and alienated peoples.  Science created one universe out of many universes, and in the 3rd millennium we must create one time out of many times.  [RF – the idea is, I believe, that human society cannot evolve when we are fragmented, when we are constantly battling each other.  The crucial notion then is that all creativity is in creating a society at peace.  To do this requires a unified concept including all cultures and races. One of order, but an order that can change when  our concepts of how to do this indicate reexamination (when war threatens).].

For instance, the Jews invented a life that was more concerned with the future than with the past or present.  Contrasted with Jews, the tribes invented a life dominated by ancestor worship, being more concerned with the past, and Egypt created a society more interested in the “eternal present.”  Christianity then unified these concepts, to the point of saying, “We need the freedom to choose to emphasize any one of these, depending upon the problem.” When social problems arise we may need to revert to some past practices, or on the other hand, invent something new.

6.   So the three elements of our history, one people, one space, one time, or – one church, one universe, and one society. (p.15)

From page 14 through the end of the chapter, he provides historical examples of how this sequence of events takes place in different cultures. Ultimately, unification is always the goal. Pre-Christian history has four stages, which, when combined, allow us more social tools and therefore more comprehensive ways to understand human experience. This in turn allows us to better communicate, find common interests and be more likely to create peace. Again, the four pre-Christian orientations were a) the tribal orientation, b) the empire orientation, c) the Greek, and  finally d) Jewish. Christian beliefs contributed to unifying all of these attitudes into a single way of thinking.

Lecture 4

1.The Christian era admonishes us to recognize time as the primary method for ordering society; to seek, not only the right actions, but the right time to act. For instance, “If you want to learn something in a new environment, the minimum today, as things stand in this country is two days and three nights,…” (p.2) If we are “space minded,” as we are brought up to be, i.e. technologically minded, then we believe that “seeing” is adequate to knowing about a place.  This, however, does not allow us to ascertain the spirit of the place.  That takes time; it takes speaking to people, getting their opinions, identifying what is important to them.

2.It takes time to become conscious of our illusions and biases, to interact with people, to get them to respond to us  “…people who do not know how to time their lives are licked.”

3.What leads a country into a future?  Not education (that leads to a career), and not science (that is a method only, as is education).  Neither science nor education  can create a new conscience, a new hope, or faith.

What are the great mysteries of our time?  What we do not yet know, and must know, is, 1) how society will organize work for all peoples in the world, for all tribes, and 2) how the Jews were replaced by the church.  HOW, IN OTHER WORDS WERE PEOPLE ABLE TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN ORDER TO FREE THEMSELVES FROM THE RESTRICTIONS OF BEING, MERELY TRIBAL OR MERELY EGYPTIAN OR MERELY GREEK OR JEW?  We know some of these things, but not how we will organize, or how the church came into being. (pp. 5-7)

4.In other words: 1) What is to be our principle for social organization, the role of women and all citizens? Peace between individuals, between cultures and ethnic groups, between nations, between sexes still evades us. 2) How do we incorporate the church (ethics and concern for building a future for society) into our everyday living, by not being trapped in one method (one cultural mode)?  ERH goes on to explain that we separate the church from the state “inside us.”  We do not consider career and worldly judgments from the standpoint of moral principles.   The standard for judgment today is that business are one sphere and church another sphere. Church is for Sunday morning.

5.At present, we say that all nations or peoples are equally right, or have a right to live the way they please.  THIS CANNOT BE TRUE, BECAUSE,  ONE CULTURE ENSLAVES ITS MINORITIES OR WOMEN, AND DESTROYS THE ENVIRONMENT, AND IT EFFECTS THE REST OF THE WORLD.  ALL IDEAS ARE NOT EQUAL!  It is a truism that, “What my neighbor does effects me and the rest of the world.”

6.A decent future, one that regenerates a spirit to allow for stable, regenerating societies the world over – this is worth sacrificing to the hilt for today, in the present, now!  (p.11)

To be creative is to sacrifice, to dedicate oneself totally, as Abraham did when he spoke out alone, or Jeremiah (voice in the wilderness). Real dedication is to persist when one is totally alone to have faith in one’s cause. From ancient ways of life we learn of models whose ideas succeeded beyond their death. THESE ARE THE EVENTS IN HISTORY THAT NEED TO BE REMEMBERED AND REPEATED AT THE RIGHT TIME.

Creation cannot take place as long as your own will enters anything you have to do. You see it must be stronger than you, yourself  (p.17)

7.Why do we have to recall the past, especially the Bible? “…to remind us of the intensity of living, of the singleness of purpose.” (p.18)  The ancients didn’t allow people to change. There was unity for one way of life only. “Once a baker, always a baker.”  To remain vital, individuals must have freedom to change, as do societies as well.  That is achieved through unity with a universal religion – one that is comprehensive, encompassing all of the past accomplishments of different religions, as well as the ability to select one emphasis (way of life) that may be called for at a particular point in time.

At one time, for instance, past authority may be most important to listen to, especially when some necessary way of living has been forgotten. At another time, new ways may need to be evolved.

8.To the end of the chapter ERH describes how ancients practiced many lifestyles within a tribe, pacificists, warriors, vegetarians, meat-eaters, etc.  But what we must learn is that those who survived practiced certain things that are necessities.  To fight when necessary, to maintain communication (language), to listen and respect elders, to bury their dead, to maintain a unity by respecting the rights of all members of the tribe equally, by dividing labor appropriately, etc.

Lecture – 5

1.This notion must be repeated as long as necessary, no matter how tired one may be of hearing it – that we must stop worshipping science, or commerce as ways into the future. (p.1/5) Today, technology and profit form the principle criterion used to justify all decisions. A forest with all its wild species will be destroyed for the sake of profit and a few short-term jobs.

What is most likely to carry us into a decent future (i.e. quality of life) will be our frail “consciences,” our willingness to tell the truth in spite of the risk, and ability to learn more from our experience and how people brought about change throughout the ages.

2.No one is free by declaring oneself to be free.  One can be partially free only by knowing one’s own prejudices, one’s own weaknesses, by knowing life’s temptations, by knowing how the family should be sacred, by knowing that we can only discern viable truth in social life after something has been experienced by at least three generations, each generation believing strongly enough to pass it on to the next.  Then we know what is necessary in lifestyle.  ALL OF THIS WE LEARN FROM HISTORY. ONE MAN, OR ONE GENERATION, OR ONE CULTURE CAN NEVER EXPERIENCE ALL THAT IS NECESSARY IN LIVING.  One must learn vicariously about the many variations inspiring the spirit of people to change, from the beginning of human time. Then we must be creative in seeing how to apply wisdom to present problems, risking new methods for solving problems when necessary. Individually, we are too frail, too ignorant, too naive to survive.  Individually, we would never have language or a heritage of learning – we would be as animals.

3.ERH points out that for our individual lives, we could exist with animal sounds.  The necessity and miracle of speech is that it allows us to communicate between generations. (p.8)

Speech is language which is to last for more than one generation…all language in the beginning is only vow. The first vow is the name of a person. They vow themselves to the name of their ancestor. You vow yourself to your husband as husband and wife. You vow yourself to recognize children born as your children. (p.9)

Language is only indispensable when part of the human being’s concerns are away, or dead, or not yet born….Mr. Korzybsky, the Russian, has called it that man is a time-binding animal. (p.10)

4.        …I’m not teaching what is in my head, but I try to put through my head what has been true for the last 7,000 years. And that’s obviously worthwhile. (p.11)

…names were created so that something would survive death.  And names are created so that somebody would live into the future with some clear consciousness of who he was. (p.12)

The horizon of time for tribesmen was between great-grandfather and great-grandson.

5.ERH claims to see no contradiction between the Bible and modern science. The Bible says that first plants were created, then animals, and then man, who is a little higher (because of his ability to participate in creation of society). The contradiction is seen only by “…silly asses who misunderstand both science and the Bible….So what’s the contradiction?”  (p.14)

6.A BASIC GUIDE TO UNDERSTANDING OUR EXPERIENCE RELATES TO OUR FEELING OF SECURITY.  Do we not often feel lost,  lacking of power over our lives, alienated, misunderstood, confused, not belonging, with no clear direction or unsure of what it might be?  Are these not common emotions?  We experience “today” as an eternal presence of these types of insecurity.  ONE PART OF THE SOLUTION is through our experience of time.  We cannot control the ticking of the clock, BUT WE CAN CONTROL our emotional impressions of time. 50,000 years back is an abstraction to us, but we can comprehend to some extent the life and sacrifices and environment of our great-grandparents, and imagine what the lives of our sons, daughters, and grand-children might or should be.

Time is therefore an important measure of our location in life.   Thinking in these terms of generations, immediately before and after our lives, gives us a sense of realism about what has been done and what  might be done, and what price there is to pay for certain types of behavior.  This tribal way of thinking about time is something we need to rediscover.

7.ERH claims this “raft of time” gives us orientation, and therefore reduces our insecurity and increases our feeling of hope and faith in gaining some control.

The name-giving process which tries to get hold of your ancestor and of your great-grandchild is incisive.  There is no speech without holidays, without great events, without picking and choosing some moments of time to be lifted above the average run-of-the-mill time.

Man’s history does not consist of the natural time of the scientist.  It is not a sequence of a thousand years, but it is the sequence of beginnings and ends which is something quite different; of epochs, of ages, or of generations. (p.16,17)

8.He asserts that we want to know how our parents and grandparents lived and worked, and of their accomplishments and problems, and how they confronted them. These are the people who have established our personal direction in society, figuratively speaking, the people from whom we have received orders.  We live today in the light of their accomplishments (and of course, in punishment for their shortcomings).  And we need to learn and understand these experiences as a basis for our own decisions today!

ERH states elsewhere that most of the time we act through weakness and cowardliness, and ONLY OCCASIONALLY RISE TO THE OCCASION to carry out acts that contribute to the community.  We need to understand these realities, and attempt to improve on them.  To be too self-centered (for instance, leaving a national debt for our children and grandchildren to face), or to avoid facing problems, only to have them grow to overwhelming proportions later, is evidence of our weakness.  All of this weakens a possibility for our future.

9.To act “rightly” always puts one in the minority.  But such acts can have such power as to convince the majority.  To act as a model “converts” the majority.

If the minority of yesterday has an important issue, then it will become the majority of tomorrow, but the majority will at the time, when the law is finally enacted, be already behind the times. (p.25)

Lecture – 6

1.People who are marching into an unknown future are great people because they face death.  They know change must occur and are willing to act on a prophecy.

Today’s poets enhance the act of prophecy because they sense our times, and cast back into history to find some period that parallels our present problems, which is also to guide us into change.  They then enlighten us by bringing forth from history what has been forgotten and what needs to be remembered now.  His example is that of poet Robert Graves, who was interested in exploring pre-Greek times, when they were attempting to meld the Tribal and the Empire ways of life. Once again, one must ask, “How, in other words did they manage this change?”

2.ALL OF THIS POINTS TO HOW WE GO FORWARD BY LOOKING BACK.  The fundamental needs of human society are the same in all times, and thus every generation must understand what those needs are, and how they are manifest in modern times.

3.Ideas are based on what we have seen (experienced) before – our hopes can only be based on recovering or enlarging those past desires.  ANY MEANINGFUL FUTURE THEREFORE CANNOT BE BUILT UPON HOPE ONLY,  BECAUSE THE FUTURE CAN NEVER BE THE SAME AS OUR PAST. Changes occur from one generation to the next.  WHAT IS A FUTURE BASED ON?  Certainly knowledge of past solutions offers a foundation, as does a sense of present conditions.  But then one must invoke faith as a motivator, because one can never be sure of  consequences.  The only entry to a future is through faith.  That is why those who are willing to act, to march forward into the future are great, because they have faith that their actions now will help create that future.  The norm in bad times is to give up hope.

This is why our prayer should be for faith, not hope. Faith overcomes the dread of the change. (p.6)

4.Any renaissance, any new life, any change realistically begins with something we do not understand.  Hope is always for “sausage,” for something physical.  Physical desire cannot strengthen us to march into the future. “Faith is a future cleansed from your clutterings of mind, and opinion, and ideas, and programs.” (p.9)

Of course we must unavoidably bring some clutterings of mind – opinions and ideas and plans. But the point is, one needs to be ready to release those ideas when it is called for.

5.What mediates between hope and faith?  Love, of course.  The spirit of love can function only in the present. Hope, love and faith integrate past, present and future.

ERH goes on to assert that today, in America, people function  only on hope. For instance, our present policy, personal and public, seems to be driven almost entirely by principles of commerce.

Nobody in this country at this moment has faith in the year 2200, at least not officially….If you read the editorials, they all think — by that time there has been a third world war and the whole world has gone up in flames. (p.11)

[RF – One might observe also that medicare is not expected to be available in a few years. The forests are going fast, pollution is progressing, etc., etc. Ironically, ERH points out that many “so called Christians” venerate the primacy of commerce as a basis for making most judgments.]

6.ERH points out that the “ancients” had only hope and faith, which were always in balance, as evidenced by their actions at death.  If the correct ceremonies, including sacrifices, were not performed, it would bode ill for the future.

7.Names conquer death.  To carry out any act today, “in the name of,” is to say in the spirit of, for example, Aristotle, or de Vinci or Bach – or the law. This connects the past with the present and future.  It is a recognition that the spirit of those great persons from the past lives on today.

[RF – Elsewhere ERH describes the fantasy of believing that individually we never die, but are transformed into some other “place,” e.g. a heaven of sugar-plumb fairies, or a hell of fire and brimstone, obviously all images of sensory life.  This, he claims,is not in keeping with true religious intent.]

Rather, it is the spirit of one who has died, that lives on in others, that invades the spirit of other people.  Scientists emulate the spirit of Einstein, thus, give him eternal life. The religious admonition is then to each of us individually is to live in a way that memory of each of us is likely to live on in others who knew of our way of life.  (20)

The real story of mankind has always been a religious story between one’s own hopes of that which is already done, can be preserved, can be expanded, perhaps, and that, something that is lacking will be created, despite our lack of creativity. (p.21)

…hope (can) always (be) expressed by quantity.  You can say “more” of something.  Faith can never be expressed by quantity, because it’s a new quality that doesn’t exist, yet. (p.22)

8.To summarize contributions of the tribe to civilization:

a.The grave, where recognition of the elders and ancestors manifests in the burial ceremony. The invoking of the ancestor’s name to carry into the future. The phrase, “in the name of,” carries past wisdom into the future.

b.The altar where “…all crooked things have to be straightened out again.”  The modern “altar” is not where animal or human sacrifices are made or paid, but other types of sacrifice; i.e. the future is only reached through sacrifice.  Sacrifice is the first payment by which change is made possible, because it means preparation in the present, the and cessation of some things we are doing now, which is often painful. For instance, consuming less, recycling.

c.Strangely, war is a contribution to the future.  War is the sacrifice made to protect our values.  It is not murder, which is individual.  It protects us from brutalization and other forms of exploitation from bullies.  The fifth commandment from the Bible, “Thou shall not kill,” does not speak to war.

d.Celebrations, the gathering, the meeting place, the getting into the “mood” to make commitment are all part of cementing unity among the people.  The notion of a holiday is fundamental to this unifying process.

Lecture – 7

1.Continuing on this theme of contributions of the tribe, we see that they possessed hope and faith, but not love in the sense of its regenerating power. ERH correlates hope with the past, with history.  Hope can, you recall, only be based on desiring something out of the past that had been experienced.

The past is long, and to learn its lessons takes patience:

History brings together all classes of themes.  Its superiority over any other type of knowledge is evident. And all minds concede its supremacy…. You (in America) believe that physics is superior to history…Physics is dust, dealing with dirt…History: it makes us into human beings….  (history)…unites the foreign — the far-distant one and that which is right around us.  It joins the past to the present.  It combines the most diverse forms and the most distinct species.  It is the dead who speak to you in the name of the dead, and it is accessible to you in the language of the living.  (p.2)

2.The spirit is material,  having a physical presence in connecting us with the dead and with the future generations. This is why history must be told, as it physically unites us with the past.

Hope results from being able to see something.  Faith, by contrast, is not located in the eye.  Rather it rests in the emotion of anxiety.  We are anxious about that which we cannot see.  Fear and hope are related.  We fear what we can see, or have seen!  Love (charity) is to be balanced with sacrifice.

3.History connects us to great events of human endeavor, or to the sum of the human spirit, as though each of us were the cell of a great man (Jesus or God?).  “THERE IS NO HISTORY UNLESS YOU BELIEVE THAT ALL MEN ARE ONE.  Instead you (in America) believe in this cheap `brotherhood of man’.” (p.13)

[RF – “All men are one”, means that we connect our individual lives with all of humankind through history, as contrasted with the notion of “brotherhood,” meaning “be kind and understanding to others.” While this notion of brotherhood may not be bad, it is inadequate.]

4.We, teacher and students, eat and live together, and I teach in order that I may harness human thirst to serve and enliven the community.  The community forms us, and individually we owe our lives to it.  It passes down to us language, history, our very physical existence, a government that protects us, a community by which we discover reality, and most of all a spirit that engenders creativity. It emboldens us to discipline and a willingness to sacrifice, all of which  supports our ability to rise above our animal nature and become HUMAN.

5.Ash Wednesday originally was the day of the dead,  the day in which the dead spoke to us.  At Carnival, masks are warn so that one can speak for the dead, for one’s ancestors. This is why every tribe had to have at least one mask.

6.To be spoken to is much more important than speaking ourselves. We get direction when someone speaks to us. The purpose of the medicine man was to redirect persons into the right path.

7.In the tribe, the dead speak to the living to provide orientation.  In empire culture (e.g. Egypt, China, Babylon), the living speak to the dead to give them direction.  Jesus speaks to both the dead and the living, because nothing in either the living or the dead has final meaning.

In the tribe, the living are always wrong, the dead always right.  Judges in modern society are the manifestation of the dead speaking to the living.  Law comes from the past.

In modern life, corporations and lawyers are also masks, legal fictions with no life unless real persons are behind them.  This fact is perhaps the most important problem in America (all industrial societies), much more so than competing ideologies such as capitalism or communism.  The problem is, what is most real or powerful, individuals or corporations?  Today, corporations seem to have all the power, BUT WHAT ENGENDERS VITALITY AND MORAL BEHAVIOR?

VITALITY AND FRAILTY GO TOGETHER. FEAR, HOPELESSNESS, AND FAITHLESSNESS DRIVE MANKIND ON TO SEEK MORE AND MORE POWER, but in the process life, humanity, and vitality are lost.  This is how power corrupts.

8.The curse of the tribesmen is that they don’t believe their ancestors have died. The achievement of history is based on the attempt to keep the spirit alive.  The trap of non-death is that succeeding generations cannot change. The misplaced tribal assumption is that all knowledge is already known (by the ancestors).

9.ERH goes on to explain that the primitive tribal people were fine and courageous, but simply wrong about some things, and that it is of course wrong for us to look down on them.  They solved the eternal problem of mankind by admonishing tribal members to carry their burdens of guilt and pain and to persevere.  They were kept in line  (on the straight and narrow) by the witch-doctor.

10.Survival of the fittest should mean, “He who helps his fellows survive beyond themselves.” (p.22)  The individual was always seen as less important than the survival of the tribe (no personal egos). Egos speak with authority, and the only authority in the tribe was the dead.

11.He goes on to define the sacred word “person” as understood by Americans.  The status of person:

…has been bestowed on every brat, without any obligation to continue the life of the race. But the word “person” is only available to those who want to do right, and who will fight wrong, because in this very moment, they enter upon a beaten path of life which they have to continue. (p.24)

To know right and wrong does not come about by introspection.  In reality, right and wrong is discerned by knowing what happened as a consequence of certain actions, and how those actions (might) need to be changed (manifested in a new way) in a present situation.  “You want to alter a law, you first must understand the law.” (p.25)

12.Uniforms, and other specific types of dress such as the robes of judges or the Pope’s dress indicate the wearer is speaking of the wisdom from the past (exercising authority from former generations).

END OF SERIES

HINGE OF GENERATIONS – 1953

Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Chapt. 1

1.ERH begins with a description of the wealth and sickness of the U.S.,  i.e. our worship of “means” for producing wealth.  With only 7% of the world population we use up 42% of its GNP, and therefore every other country must go to war with us.  We over-eat (3,400 calories average where 1800 is enough), over-drink etc. WE HAVE LOST SIGHT OF OUR ENDS.  This wealth does not produce genius or health or peace of mind.

2.Thus, we have put means before ends, and this does not produce a vital culture.

…we will have to learn that prophecy and vision always precede realization…In accidental events, the means come before the ends.  In historical events, the ends constitute the means. (p.5)

Saints, seers, monks, poets, all creative people have the ends (vision) first, then they work on means. He cites an example of the great chemist, Kekule von Stradonitz who was not allowed to study chemistry (which had no status as a profession at that time). But Stradonitzs’ vision was what chemistry should become, and he eventually followed “his bliss” as Joseph Campbell would put it.

3.Visions create new means to destinations.  Today, for instance, there needs to be an integration of the secular and the religious because the two points of view live side-by-side, but each isolated from the other, and thus neither has power. (pp.6,7)

4.WHAT ERH IS DRIVING AT IS HOW TO INTEGRATE SECULAR AND RELIGIOUS.  e.g. The Church  (Christian) tries to organize its ideas around how people die, secular thought, on the other hand, tries to organize around how people live. (p.8)

This process (the creative process that he declares is at the heart of Christianity) is also interested in how we change, (i.e. we are creative in the sense of seeing new possibilities for integrating thought).  (p.9) He points out how change is wrapped around the notion that change is a death and resurrection, an integration of dying (of old ideas) and renewing life.

5.        …at this moment, in the world of ours, there is nothing as a carrier and bearer of spiritual truth left but the family.  The family,  however has been reduced to something material and physical.  (p.12)

What he means by the term spiritual is the willingness between people to speak the truth to each other without endangering the relationship.  In this sense, “spirit” does never exists within a person alone,  but only between people.  It is a commonly shared “inner” feeling of willingness for fellowship. “Spirit is breathing together of different people….it means the founding of groups.” (p.13)

We seem only to be able to make people feel comfortable, thus achieving physical comfort at the expense of establishing common understanding.  Organizations, government, military, industry, even the church are too big, ERH asserts, to create this common spirit.

6.[RF – It seems to me this is a crucial point defining industrial civilizations and goes far to explain the reason for the breakdowns in our lives.  I have long felt that one of our main problems is to be more truthful with people. Truthful in a caring way, but without offending them.  Such behavior is, of course a subtle balance between naive, inappropriate trust on the one hand, and  an unwillingness to speak the truth at the right time. To be willing to hear and accept an uncomfortable truth requires courage and can only occur in an environment of a common spirit. ]

He suggests that the only place to re-establish the spirit is to begin in the family.  (p.13)

We seem to be artists at smiling and putting on a false face, as “…you cannot distinguish when a spirit is genuine, and when it’s just put on.” (p.14)

7.This notion of spirit is central to his philosophy and indicates why “religious” issues are ultimately at the core of all problems, most of all those of regenerating the community.  Only when we can be capable of truthfulness to others can we begin to restore or create human community.  This aspect of belief becomes the core of our ability to change, and  learn and finally  to our ability to be creative (find new truths).

8.HOW TO ESTABLISH SPIRITUALITY?  We cannot begin by defining what we (each of us) wants, but rather with a recognition of the sacrifices others have made for us.

This is to say, we must recognize that down through history those who have fought for freedom against oppression of any kind, against hunger, for truth in science and the appropriate establishment of professional ethics in all fields. Perhaps most difficult of all, to recognize those of our family who have gone without, so that we might have a better life.

Such a new type of defining makes for a very different yardstick for molding one’s attitudes toward the community. One then must find one’s own place in life BY MEASURING UP TO THESE HISTORICAL SACRIFICES BY BECOMING WILLING TO SACRIFICE WHEN NECESSARY TO PROTECT THOSE ACHIEVEMENTS.  THIS IS WHAT WE OWE TO THE COMMUNITY.

Chapt. 2

1.STUDYING THE PAST MUST begin with a goal, addressing a significant problem out of the present, then derive a method (of analysis) likely to achieve a solution. Otherwise history leads nowhere!

A life is not a good life that doesn’t know its direction.  It is groping for the means, but it is quite sure of its destiny, of its end.  (p.1)

Not to know the purpose of one’s life is to duplicate the life of the animal.

2.To invest in the idea of what one is willing to die for is like “…a capital of mankind in a new bank for the unity of the human race.”

We never know our destiny before the time of our death, that must be hidden from us.  However, in all great literature one knows the end of the story in the beginning.  What we learn is the means.  The Iliad, War and Peace, the biography of the William James Senior’s family (parents of William Jr. and Henry James, are examples of this point.  THE POINT IS TO LEARN THE SPIRIT BEHIND THE ACTIONS, TO KNOW WHAT WENT INTO SOME PARTICULAR OUTCOME.

Our present “secular” values are based on physical comfort. One knows not the

direction, but one learns means. This betrays our valuing of consumption above all else!

3.ERH goes on for several pages to tell why he venerated William. James Senior, to whom he attributed the possible regeneration of Christianity in this country, although James claimed to be an atheist!

James practiced and spoke of Christian principles, but never quoted the Bible He lived it!  The same with Saint Paul, who ERH claims is the greatest disciple. Paul never quoted Jesus, but spoke of the live moment, applying the principles to himself. (p.6)   This represented a oneness, a unity, a universality of principles for all people. This revealed a common spirit that could unit a community.

4.***  Act first to demonstrate the principles, only then can they be understood.  [RF – Now I understand what he has said in other places on this point that we can only understand that which we have experienced] “…history is a mysterious process of confronting a new situation which might be called `B,’ then relating it to an old event, `A’ ”  (p.9)

The power of this idea ERH demonstrates in the life of the James family as a great story. where William Jr. and Henry, although they tried, could not escape the ethical principles taught them. That is, the principles molded their spirit because they understood and lived them.

5.In this way the meaning of the principles is advanced, because each succeeding generation fulfills the prophesy and in the process attempts to out-do it.  Is this the meaning of the term,  “getting back to basics?”  One is both free to advance (change),  and reflect the wisdom of the past at the same time, (an apparent paradox). (p.11)

6.SACRIFICE: If there is no willingness to sacrifice for a principle, then ultimately war will arise to settle the issue. The revolt of youth of the 60’s in the U.S. is an example of the consequence of liberalism, where ERH claims the parents sacrificed for the children, but didn’t demand or teach them that sacrifices had to be made by them.  Likewise in pre-WWII Germany, where the immature youth were asked to make decisions, and this resulted in the rise of Nazism.

7.The job of teachers is to hand to the next generation what their own generation has given them.  If students have not been taught that the past has something to say to them about their survival, then teachers are in a Catch-22 situation, held in little respect.  THIS SEEMS TO BE THE ATTITUDE OF OUR TIMES NOW.  One’s own age is too limited, too narrow in experience to be a complete source for understanding our experience.

Only history of the ages, if one has studied it properly, can reveal the purposes for which we must make sacrifices.  For instance, carrying on the “eternal varieties” such as freedom, speaking the truth, being one’s brothers keeper, etc. The relation of one’s freedom to one’s own age is that one must understand what is necessity.

8.***History, in order to make sense, requires that a bridge is built between past generations and the present. Each new age faces new variations of old problems, and some new problems as well, and is therefore unique; and it must understand itself to be unique. Then when problems arise, it looks backward to see its relationship to the past wisdom.  Another of live’s many paradoxes is that  one needs to be individualistic, but also universal.  (p.16)

In the process of looking back one must ask “What is spiritually dead?”  How much of tradition is to be carried forward?  One can only answer this by saying, “First I must be independent, then I must be interdependent.”

Chapt. 3

1.ERH believes that civilization will fly apart unless there is unity of time in this way; that is, since the basics of survival cannot be understood to be revealed in any single epoch, all epochs of human existence must be drawn from.  And he points out that progress does not occur in a logical, evolutionary manner.

Rather, each generation tends to forget the principles upon which it was founded. It attempts to reinvent the world, seeking its own uniqueness, and in the process setting aside lessons from the past.  In practice shortcomings of its limited dogma should force it to look backward for both learning and visions of the future. [RF, it seems to me he implies that each generation reinvents reality (or tries to), then understands it has merely put “old wine in new bottles.”  Hopefully, the hard edges of reality penetrate its consciousness, forcing it to understand its freedom to invent is limited.]

2.This process seems to define a religious life, meaning that we see ourselves as needing to pass on the insights for survival to the next generation and instill in it the power of wisdom so that the future may be fulfilled.  In other words, to live not only for ourselves, but also for future generations.  It is therefore anathema to believe we have the moral right to live only for ourselves! THAT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A RELIGIOUS AND A SECULAR ATTITUDE! A religious life is one that lives to contribute toward the community and its continuance, while a secular life lives only for itself, as though no past or no future existed.  “People are loved who have been able to go beyond their temporary will.” (p.2)

3.The next question is, “How can an independent generation, without loss of character and individuality, enter the interdependence of generations?” (p.2)

ERH  says the answer is given by example of the James family described above, where the spirit of one generation enters that of the next generation.  This describes “how  the spirit of one generation enters the hearts and ears of another generation.”

This is the essence of moral questions. And the response is, each person must begin to act morally, caring for the welfare of others in addition to him/herself. William James, Sr. for example, had brought moral values into his home, down to earth, so to speak.

…the church had come down to earth in every life, and wasn’t dependent on a Sunday service, or on a liturgy, or on any denominational tie-up.

…something denominational just doesn’t work…because everybody feels that we live in a universal society-a greater universe.  And no denomination can cover it totally.  It’s just impossible. (pp.3,4)

4.He points out a “great historical law”,  THAT THE HERETICAL FORM OF AN INSTITUTION, AT THE RIGHT MOMENT, HAS THE POWER TO OUTLAST THE ORTHODOX BECAUSE IT ALREADY HAS A FOOT IN THE FUTURE.  This is because it becomes eloquent in the fact that it is responding to a situation has presented a barrier to progress. (p.5)

***Obviously here he speaks directly about the universal principles common to all serious religions.  How does one realize this power to transcend one generation into another, or, by implication, renew an institution?

By translating all the liturgy, the sermons, the chorales, the hymns, the thoughts, the prayer of the Psalms, of the Church into dinner talk, into breakfast talk, into the witty and cordial exchange, and the affectionate speech between parents and children. (p.5)

5.ERH goes on to show another example in history, of the revolt of the Patricians and Plebes against the Roman Senate, whereby Cneius Flavius broke the taboo of keeping secret the Roman law. (p.5)

During the next few pages he gives several other examples in history of the same phenomenon whereby generations were connected.  And, getting back to the James family, Henry James was a heretic. WHERE, IN OUR PRESENT AGE OF DOMINATING SCIENTIFIC THINKING, WHERE WE WILL NOT ACCEPT THE MORAL PRECEPTS OF THE POPE, OR THE PRESBYTERIANS, OR EPISCOPALIANS, ETC., WE WILL ACCEPT THE SAME IDEAS SPOKEN IN SECULAR LANGUAGE.  The implications of this notion of the HERETIC are fundamental.  It means that no one need become the slave of the organized church, that he/she can serve the community in the name of ethics (when the institution of the church becomes corrupted). One can deny the authority of that institution. (p.6)

6.In the same vein, the older generation cannot claim final authority; the heretic is essential for regeneration when reform is essential. Such heresy is founded on the love for our maker rather than for any earth-bound authority!

The James family was an example of the regenerating unit; in this age of bigness where personal commitment does not carry much power, the family is the unit that must preserve ethics, where they must be taught and lived out.  The reputation of the mindless bureaucrat is the image that one is left with as an alternative, an alternative that is obviously sterile in this age of little dedication beyond self-interest or avoiding blame for failures!

In the case of Henry James, he could inherit the spirit of comradeship better outside the church, but with no intention of weakening the church.

7.Private and public life must be one; there cannot be, as the business men assert, different standards for different institutions in life. THE POWER OF THE SPIRITUAL LIFE DEPENDS UPON OUR WILLINGNESS TO TAKE THE CONSEQUENCES OF OUR DECLARATIONS, OF OUR COMMITMENTS.  THE SPIRITUAL LIFE IS THEREFORE NOT PRIVATE, NOR PUBLIC, BUT OPENLY CONFESSED. In this sense we must live in the open, our commitments known to those around us.

8.Regeneration of our community and the success of our sons and daughters (whether of our own blood or of our community) lies, not in their parroting our ideas, but in their having the same spirit of invigoration and application to what we do, and to seeking and reflecting the truth, and representing the great achievement of the ages.  Our offspring will do it in a different way than we do, but we must have faith that they will do it. [RF – if properly taught, one must add.]

The heretic cannot command that his followers follow his ideas, because his very heresy disqualifies him from such work.  [RF – I’m not sure of the meaning of this notion, the reader is referred to the text.  (p.12)

9.The notion behind heresy is that we know today’s ideas are not the same as those in 1895, nor will they be the same  tomorrow.  But the seeking for truth, the faith in the future, and willingness to change will be the constants that must be passed on.

10.My purpose must be to make myself known to the next age, to belong to all ages, but to represent the past to the next generation so that they may have some reference points by which to judge their own lives.

11.To live a truly religious life is to stand for the whole of creation, the whole community and all that is in it, and for its continuation, its future.  (p.19)

One functions on several levels, for the self, for the family and group, for one’s profession, but ultimately all of this must have its place in creating the good community. “The world as created is good, gentlemen, but it isn’t good enough.”

Chapt. 4

More examples of previous points.

Chapt. 5

1.God is the power in us that allows us to speak.  It is the power to appropriate within us the power of language.

…all your rights to live in a democratic society depend on our conviction that you can appropriate the spirit of the institution in which you live by the power of the word….instead of becoming a product of your environment (as are animals)– you become the creator of your environment–the re-creator of your environment, by this strange volunteering for the affirmation.  (p.1)

2.We are a strange mixture of animal and divinity.  If the community is to survive, one must honor the language, speak the truth and get involved in commitments to the community. When too many people abuse this gift, they believe they can lie, cheat, refuse to get involved, all with impunity; as a result of course, the community degenerates.

3.*** We tend to live in a world filled with much fantasy [RF – Even scientists display this quality, I would suggest. They cling too long to questionable theories, unable to let-go of ideas which seem comfortable.] The world of the mind is safe, comfortably hidden from scrutiny.    It is reality that people often mistrust us, abuse us, our actions are unfruitful, our assessment of how people would respond to us is all off.  This is the price for living too much of our lives in fantasy, in daydreams; we are frustrated by the gap between our beliefs and reality.

Ultimately the way to a fulfilled life is to live as much reality as possible; that is, to not abuse the power of speech!  To find reality, truth (only possible through real speech), is to live a fruitful (religious) life.

4.Our nature, our natural faculties, are our animal part. “Man begins where you declare that your nature isn’t good enough.” (p.5)  We begin to overcome and rise above our nature through development of our spirit, of our soul. This is the process of becoming human in the true (spiritual) sense.

5.We all grow up with the acquiescence of others who forgive us our inanities.  They have faith that one day we will mature and contribute to the community, and respond appropriately to them.  Eventually we will do our part, in other words.  Our innocent youth is analogous to the fruit ripening on the tree. At this time, nothing we say is held against us. Judgment is held in obeyance because of our innocence.  EVENTUALLY, THEN, WE ARE MORALLY OBLIGATED TO PAY SOCIETY BACK. Certainly the argument that none of us asked to be born is irrelevant. We are here and given a gift, and therefore owe repayment whether we like it or not.  We never stop using the language we were taught, or the knowledge passed on to us. EARLY EDUCATION SHOULD BEGIN TO MAKE YOUTH CONSCIOUS OF THIS FACT AND TEACH THEM TO ADMIT THE REALITY OF THEIR CONDITION.

In short, it is our religion to give youth food, shelter, clothing, and most of all appropriate freedom to make up one’s own mind, in spite of the fact that youthful decisions are usually poor ones.  But, most of all, the youth should be taught to realize what they are given.

…the conditions of this freedom are very clear. You cannot do less than we are doing for you.  The society which you have to establish by your own deeds has already certain minimum requirements.  And they are unassailable.  (p.7)

These are the Christian prerequisites of life.  They are also the American, German, Egyptian, Muslim, Buddhist or tribal prerequisites that followed the universal principles of community-building through the ages.

6.TEACHING, is a metaphorical term.  Whoever speaks the truth about reality is in the role of teacher, or father, or mother, or mentor, regardless of age. The role is that of the speaker, and the students, son, daughter, etc. are to be listeners most of the time.  All cultures through the ages have developed and protected the integrity of languages and given this gift to the youth of each generation. This is why anyone who uses and accepts the power of language is admitting the value of religion.

7.        24th book of the Old Testament, the prophet Malachi has a strange prediction.  He says the earth must be cursed, and will perish, unless the parents turn their hearts to their children, and the children turn their hearts to their parents. And…the New Testament is considered the fulfillment of the Old….When Jesus comes, He says that the hearts of the parents now are turned toward their children. But the other held, that the hearts of the children must be turned toward their parents, is left to the Americans to fulfill.  (p.10)

ERH points out that Henry James and his family is an exemplification of this prophesy.  At risk is the future of any community when one denies the wisdom from the past.  THE TEACHER MUST HAVE AUTHORITY AND BE SEEN BY THE STUDENTS TO HAVE THAT AUTHORITY, AND STUDENTS MUST TAKE THAT AUTHORITY ON FAITH AT FIRST.

Chapt. 6

1.Each age tends to live by a dogma, isolated from the past and future.  To survive one must realize this, articulate that dogma, and fight against its parochialism.  “That is what the ancient people called the `question of salvation’.”   We are always called upon to rise above the dogmatism of our own age.

The genius of the just-past age was what created our own age.  An effective heretic must therefore go back, to, not to the letter, but to the creative spirit of the genius of that past age. The other side of the coin is just as necessary, to see the fallacies of that age and let go of them!

It is precisely that spirit of genius from the past age that is greater than our individual spirit, however necessary that individual spirit is; that “received” spirit is what regenerates the universe.  It is the same with church dogma.  Paradoxically, dogma is necessary, but more important is the spirit behind it. The dogma must always be overcome; but the spirit behind it must live on. This universal spirit thus frees us from the dogmatism of our individual spirit.

2.When we abdicate the discipline required to listen to the wisdom of the ages, or the lessons from the past age, we do not have freedom, but live in the prison of anarchy and war. THIS IS WHY WE HAD TWO WORLD WARS. OUR LEADERS DID NOT LEARN THE LESSON OF THAT EXPERIENCE.  These were caused because the past age lived within the dogma of its own age, without listening and disciplining itself with past wisdom.

3.What we do not solve in one generation  arises in the next.  As of today, over-population, politicalcultural isolation (as in Yugoslavia), uncontrolled massive bureaucracies, grossly unbalanced distribution of wealth (between rich and poor, both people and countries), despoiling of nature, disrespect for language, and most of all, lack of concern for the education of the young.

4.We cannot know everything, it is difficult to see the wisdom of a command from an authority or even recognize an authority.  One must learn to obey and be satisfied to learn of the meaning later. Paradoxically, if our leaders are seen to be stupid and slothful, one must react against them (such as when they make decisions for personal expediency, which seems to be common these days). IN SUM, WE MUST BE MORE WILLING TO MAKE SACRIFICES BEFORE WE UNDERSTAND. (p.7) [RF – Of course, ERH’s assertions about accepting commands from leaders “on faith” assumes those leaders deserve this respect. If not, they must be thrown out before the community can move ahead with its problem solving.]

5.***The basic plight and goal of mankind is that one must carry on from the past that which is worth carrying on. But also in our age we must strike out toward new ground, begin anew.

The main question is, …We come too late in our own lives unless we are allowed to continue what is worthwhile, and unless we are going to rely on other people to do with our lives something in continuation. (p.10)

6.Probably, each of us comes too late into our own lives by not understanding what must be continued from the past.  At the very least, we can pass on our own mistakes to others. Thus, our lives are wasted if we do not pass these mistakes on, because we usually cannot see to correct them during our own lives.

But we must also learn authority by having the freedom to discover it.  “Freedom begins with the recognition of necessity.” (Hegel) – just another paradox in living.

7.***We must also learn, and pass on to our children, that we must be, not only contemporaries of our own age, but contemporaries of another age. This is to say that heretics need to have help from another age in order to make their point.

If you are totally nature, then only your own time counts.  If you are not totally nature, you can get out of the accident of birth, the accident of your own time.  But then immediately you must look for allies in other times. (p.13)

Chapter – 7

1.The essence of ERH’s opening comments are based on the notion that WAR is the normal condition of human relations, and every once-in-a-while PEACE breaks out. Furthermore, if one does not take this fact into consideration, wars continue to be the normal course of events.  The cure for this is to prepare for future peace during peacetime, acting as though a war could happen at any moment if one does not anticipate its possibility..

These two realities, war and peace, must be kept in mind all the time; when one does not try to create peace all the time, war is always inevitable.  [RF – ERH believed that war was occasionally necessary because, when  brutes or tyrants are allowed to arise, like McCarthy in the America of the 50’s, or Hitler, or Mladic (in Yugoslavia), people must get rid of them, and this may require violence. If one does not fight them then the brutes continue to rule.

…the double ring of life consists of an alternation between faith and knowledge, between darkness and daylight, between war and peace. (p.2)

War is universal throughout society, including the battle of the sexes, war between friends at times, between boss and worker at times, between businesses – in addition to shooting wars, which are merely one manifestation.

2.One also prevents shooting by not sitting in judgment of others too quickly.  In the U.S. today, we tend to judge too soon the intentions of our enemy, or ignore them until the time for reconciliation has passed. No cause becomes fruitful unless someone is willing to die for it. Concordance results from putting oneself into the other’s shoes.

3.In this next section he dichotomizes rationalism and emotion.

Rational is everything sexless…Rational – (meaning) where no children have to be born and no people die – you can be rational.  But as soon as you get into this mystery, that if you do not sacrifice, there is no continuity of history, you get into the story of Adam into the last judgment day. (p.7)

This is nothing more than another expression of the notion of life always being half war and half peace, half rational and half emotional.  We tend to think like Greeks, i.e. in a world of abstractions, of theories, of ideology. “Plato and Aristotle, left the city of Athens and lived happily ever after in an academy, and taught what they pleased. BUT the result was that the first disciple was Alexander the Great…” (p.7)  In real life one is not free to think just anything, if one wishes to survive.  It was for this reason that ERH believed William James’  MORAL EQUIVALENT OF WAR is nonsense.

4.War comes when the sacrifices of the last war are forgotten. We must admit, he asserts, that we owe our existence to war and to peace.

5.***To be a Christian is to be willing to lay down your life, to make sacrifices for your community. Of the several roles in life, one must be ready and willing to take on any of them as the time demands, to be a civilian, to be a soldier, and to be a martyr. Willingness to sacrifice is what Christianity means. It is to pay the price of creativity, to create a life, a community, or to recreate (regenerate), constantly.  That is what renews life, continues the generations. The meaning of the “virgin birth” in Christianity is to be reborn by a spirit that has been passed to you,  then you become willing to pass it on to another.

To be a Christian is to fight for an integration of mankind, of equality among races, of justice, for example. The Jews believed, for instance, in one God.  This was heresy at that time because rulers were believed to be a god of the religion of that culture. It was for this reason that they were persecuted by almost all cultures.  That antipathy has lived on to a great extent.

6.The true soldier does not hate the enemy, “…only civilians do.”  (p.16)

7.Life is not just physical existence, but also a way of life, a culture.  Thus, fear of death is not just a fear of physical existence, but also for the culture, for the community.   (p.22)  He points out that physical existence, as a total value, is very limited; the French, in his example, were willing to surrender to the Nazis’ rather than to have Paris bombed.  Ironically, it was this very spirit (of value for the physical) that represented the degeneration of the soul of the French at that time.  Sticks and stones were more important than the spirit of the people!

Ironically, the very willingness to sacrifice physical survival for the cultural or spiritual survival of your community,  means that the prospect of war is reduced.   (p.24)

Chapt. 8

1.ERH venerates Jonathan Edwards, Ralph Waldo Emerson, and William James, who “…have rebuilt the American way of life three times.” (p.1)  Edwards put the question of the scientific mind “…squarely into the center of his work…”  In 1758 he was called to become the president of Princeton University, for integrating the church and the “secular brain”, of “…science gone wild on its own.”

2.We pray individually, in the privacy of our homes, but only a congregation can give us understanding of our age and our obligation to it (an obligation that may be against our will and self-interest).  Our personal desires (wills) are of no interest to the world of mankind.   The demands of the community are what are important.  “You don’t go there (to church) for good feelings). (p.3)

3.THE MINORITY in any organization or country or community must rule, that is, if they are the top. However,  he says that if the minority, only, reflect or manipulate the majority for their own selfish benefit, then the minority must not rule.  But the majority are never strong enough to stand on their own feet, they must be morally  led by the  “top minority.”  The prophets are those who should lead.

4.Edwards recognized three communities he needed to address. Each had to be addressed in different ways, just as with the apostles. These were, the fundamental church members (the converted), the agnostics (doubters), and the outright “sinners”, those who opposed the gospels. Each were spoken to in different terms. To the “outsiders” (sinners or intelligencia – people who believe in the dominance of their own willpower), he could point out the shortcomings of their views by reason.

It is a truism however, that the  powers that run the world are not reason, but emotion!  The majority possessed this innate power and were (are) poor in scientific expertise (reason), the intelligencia widened this gap and thereby raised their own importance.

5.Restoring the balance between science and religion was the reform that Edwards sought, after the beginning of the scientific age.

The social problem of humanity is caused by, or deepened because of, different points of view between neighbors. This will always be, but one must also accept the fact that we are one and the same part of humanity. Paradoxically, we remain different, but also the same. The problem is to learn to live together in peace. This is a non-secular assertion.  This unproven fact is not proven by any secular rationalization.

…no self interest can ever explain why the man who is interested in his own aims, and in his own self, has to feel that the people who do not serve his self-interest, like, for example, a good priest, or a good missionary, or a good preacher, or his wife, or his mother, why they are more intimately connected with him, and have more solidarity with him than all the people who he can make jump at his command and at his whim. (p.10)

This isn’t a dichotomy of two opposites, but one between perpetuity and of transiency. The secular world is transient; the ecclesiastical is more permanent.  The secular tendency, as a dominant force, leads therefore to degeneration because it becomes the law of the jungle, survival of the fittest leading to constant war.

6.The true contributors to the community therefore are those who do service without needing to be recognized. PARADOXICALLY, INDIVIDUALLY GUIDED BY OUR CONSCIENCEs WE CEMENT THE ORDER OF THE UNIVERSE, PERPETUATING  THE COMMUNITY AND THE CULTURE. (p.12)

7.The driving force to perpetuate the community is love, not will; love and will are opposites.  Love is like a newborn baby, weak but full of potential, the future.  Will is like the bomb, full of power, but enormously destructive when undisciplined by love.

8.The theme of secular philosophy in the last 300 years is that knowledge, emotions and will should have authority.  But these three qualities do not indicate that we are members of humanity, of a community, and they therefore possess no innate authority to require us to listen to them.

Secularism is an attempt to rival religion as a source of authority, describing the individual as not a member of a church, not married by love to a larger unity, and not taught and inspired by a higher authority. Thus, secularism, at the core, is brute force, pure force!  (p.14)

9.The sinful ego is analogous to Freud’s theory that we are driven by desire, and all of our rationalization is an attempt to justify those desires.  What Jonathan Edwards calls man’s bleakness, despair, blackness, being fettered by his repressions, and his pains and desires, are given in Freud’s analysis.

10.We are free only at certain times, and not at others.  We have freedom of will, but are also driven by desires. We are part god and part animal, and we must learn when to act as one or the other. When we fear, we are not free, and when we do not fear we can be free. Our will is an addiction that can enslave us.  “Freedom is something constantly lost and re-acquired.” (p.16)   The universal prayer in Christianity is to be emancipated from our own will,  because the will isn’t free, and we are god-like when free.

The person who has everything – money, success, women (or men) – no longer belongs to humanity and therefore cannot be taught, or guided, or inspired. He no longer represents the order of the universe in his own time.  When are people free, and when enslaved,  is the crucial question.  The animal is never free.

Chapt. 9

1.ERH differentiates between Greek and Christian.  The Greeks are encyclopedic and objective.  The Christians can love other than themselves.  The Greeks loved only Greek creativity. [RF – interesting statement; meaning that the Christian fundamentalists and homeopaths are Greek in their thinking, not Christian!]  The Greeks might be said to be passionate about ideas in the abstract.  Christianity, by contrast, asserts that mankind must be one, that there must be peace (between the intelligent and the stupid, between different races, and all forces that divide humankind).

2.Romanticism creates a second world, not of our world, but one that supplements it. Romanticism is “…just a world of feelings.”   Fiction is the creation of a second world, a toy, a plaything.  Intellectualism, the worship of ideas,  creates a world where the mind (logic) rules, e.g. Darwinism,  where the brutes exploit all others.

The implication for intellectuals is deep.  The educated classes tend toward Greek thinking, pre-Christian, the veneration of logic.  The time in which we live has nothing to do with the stage of our thinking.  That is, dominant logical, secular thinking is pre-Christian, and it perpetuates violence, exploitation, inequality, etc. THE HISTORICALLY MINDED PERSON KNOWS WHAT HE/SHE WANTS, WHICH IS NOT TO REVERT TO THE WORLD OF PRE-CHRISTIAN, BECAUSE HE HAS LEARNED THROUGH HISTORY WHAT THIS TYPE OF THINKING LEADS TO. (pp. 4,5)

Chapt. 10

1.ERH introduces the problem of choosing, as contrasted with having chosen, in which case  one reduces the arena of choice. In other words, to have order in one’s life, one must choose a point of view that  dictates other choices, and this is PURELY AND SIMPLY ONE’S RELIGION.  Once this occurs, one must become passionate about taking action.  One cannot live a useful life without acting.  One cannot survive always being encyclopedic.  In other words, one cannot survive with Greek thinking, as ERH calls it.

One’s religion must be an end in itself!  It must be all-encompassing, it must be the meaning of one’s life. It is not a means, but an end in itself.  Franklin, the scientist and secularist, said the ends are the means.  Means to what? He doesn’t say; a good life maybe, but that leads to the secular thinking described above. (p.3)

2.The willingness to treat all others as equal, the willingness to serve the community, the ability to experience the joy of giving and receiving, the unwillingness to destroy or to exploit, the willingness to trust and to love,  are all ends in themselves.  When present in one’s spirit, they represent the omnipresence of the divine spirit within us.

Ultimate “ends” and “means” are entirely different things.  Concepts and theories are means, and human beings are ends (hopefully becoming endowed with the divine spirit as defined above). “All escapists hide behind concepts.  The problem is that we often find it difficult, or cannot distinguish means from ends. “This is a terror of life.” (p.7)

3.ERH asserts that historically, Franklin and others subscribing to scientific (Greek) thinking were still accepted as religious members of the community.  But in time that thinking manifested itself into the form of what it always leads to, exploitation, then the wars, racism, ethnic cleansing, hate and exploitation in all its forms.

(RF, My sense is that, unless we believe that our intelligence and our power, is loaned to us, and that the source of our inspiration is one common spirit, then we degenerate into our animal nature of Greek thinking, as ERH calls it.)

The truth is charity, and hope, and faith, every quality of unconditional membership in human society can never be reasoned out by people who say that everything has to be useful.  This talk about enlightened self-interest is just ridiculous. (p.9)

4.The essence of secular humanist/logical thought is that we can have the content of religion without its form.  That we, individually, can decide ethical elements of social life, that we can be masters of our fate.  On the U.S. dollar bill this form of secularism is imagined; the pyramid, the eye of Horus, the 5-pointed star is Egyptian, a pagan star.

5.We live by dogma and cannot avoid it. Our dogma in America is the Constitution, or commonly accepted moral values. I cannot kill you except in self defence, etc.  And, by inference ERH says the existence of a good community is an end in itself.

It is not possible to have an opinion about anything without a dogma. We all depend upon dogmas every day.

The Trinity dogma is  1) everyone believes that God created the Universe, 2) people can redeem (create human community at peace), and 3) humans, acquiring the Holy Spirit is the method by which this could be accomplished.    (p.13)

6.ERH differentiates “real” or sublime literature from mere melodrama; real literature talks about reality, people in ernest trying to deal with life, with undesirable characters, and with man “whole,” not romanticized, into two dimensional characters.

Chapt. 11

1.Useful historical thinking is not just anecdotal, but tries to find the ideas of the ages reflected in the thought and actions of historical persons.  It ties together past, present, and future.

With this perspective one cannot predict from past experience in human society. One must await one’s death or the end of an age before knowing the consequences of actions, because humankind is capable of changing on short notice and taking a new, unpredicted direction, acting on passions or dogma rather than on logic. When a new course of action is taken by a community, we must therefore wait to see all its manifestations.

We can only write the history of George Washington now, and the man who writes this history fifty years from now must write a different and a better story…because he knows better.  (p.2)

2.History is most informative when the long-range consequences are known. Events cannot be understood at their beginning.  In the beginning, Christianity could very well be mistaken for 50 other religions. History begins only when one man’s life leaves an impression on another man’s life.  We can therefore only know the minimum when it spans two generations; this is the atomic unit of history.

3.Faith connected with action reflects one’s personal religion, or one’s manifestation of the religion one proclaims.

Tragedy is not that grief befalls people, but rather that their actions had no influence on others.

…I have taken the liberty of trying to give you the problem of a history of the human spirit, as opposed to the history of the human body, or human bodies of the mortals in us …  (p.9)

…reflecting the relation between the religious and the secular.

4.The problem of the historian is to get into two generations, two different “times.” A generation that follows another either enlarges the first values, or diminishes them, and this can never be predicted by causes, but it can be described after the fact. “By their fruits we shall know them.”  Secular history looks at causes. [RF – As an aside, today we even hear about raising our standard of living, about expanding production and consumption, when in reality we need to lower our standard of living.  Obviously the value of consumption and of free enterprize has become destructive of environment and of the family, as has our allopathic medical practices, our educational system, our courts and justice system,  all revealed to the perceptive observer.  Yet, the destructive nature of these practices has yet to be accepted by the average historian.

5.The story (meaning) of Christianity can be destroyed if one looks only at individual lives SEPARATELY. The major point of Christianity is that we see two generations as a unit; for example,  the life of Jesus and that of the Apostles.  Jesus laid out the ideas, then died and turned everything over to the Apostles.  THIS MEANS IN PART THAT EVEN THE LOWEST FISHERMAN COULD INHERIT THE SPIRIT OF GENIUS.  This was the first time in history that the unity of generations was proclaimed, and that is why it heralded the beginning of a new era.

6.A universal story meant that now all peoples could understand their relation to other generations, and therefore how to live in relation to others in the present. (p.15)

7.Here ERH takes off on an essentially new and significant idea, that Christianity also means that one must decide the economics between spending all one makes, or planning for sustained resources for future generations.  This is the whole problem of the capitalistic system, that it has failed to restrain greed or to consider sustaining future generations. [RF – The excuse is, “Technology will solve the problem”, while ignoring abundant facts to the contrary. Atomic waste is one of many examples.]

8.Paul never quotes Jesus, he lives the holy spirit instead.  Speaking with or claiming AUTHORITY does not derive from quoting others, but rather from living an idea and paying the price for doing so!  (p.17)

9.Americans are usually half-hearted, practicing one thing and acting on only part of the idea.  We claim to be democratic, but revere police and pay a heavy price (perhaps too much) for order in our communities.  Instead of preventing crime, we put money into prisons and punishment.

Obviously we need both centralized and decentralized decision-making, but the problem is how much of each, and how to bring balance. In other words, we should seek to be neither extreme  centrist or decentrist but rather progressive, balancing each according to the demands of the situation.

10.ERH asserts that the great decisions of history have nothing to do with morality of the individual who takes action.  It has everything to do with whether those decisions support the great movements and allow for progress.  Even the criminal can be redeemed if he/she carries out the right acts to help the community. “…if you have this sixth sense of history, you are fit for the kingdom of Heaven.”  (p.21)

11.The condemnation of Greek science or Greek philosophy is valid only when science and secular philosophy lead our thinking, rather than being led by the Christian principles.  We need science, but it is not an end in itself!

Chapt. 12

1.Secularism means one lives by one generation. To live only in one generation renders one impotent, unable to regenerate the culture.

2.To create a future one must be in earnest and disciplined in that direction.  In today’s world, people get ahead who smile, who are pleasant, and sympathetic, friendly, who “get along.” However, he asserts,  “Fruitfulness is not amiability.” (p.3)

[RF – ERH’s statements in this segment about loving  the opposite as meaning fruitfulness is not developed and seem to me un-understandable at this time.]

Chapt. 13

1.The soul is different from the mind.

2.Nature is neither good nor bad, it just is.  The notion is fundamental to beliefs of the secularistsnaturalists like Thoreau and Emerson and  Franklin, who held that nature is good and society is corrupted.  The point is, we cannot take our cues from the animal kingdom.  Their nature doesn’t change, but ours does every day.

3.We require and must live in more than one generation because our own is too limited, too parochial, too self-centered.  To live in another generation also renders the ability to make a comparison and thus, to see reality better.

The act of seeking the truth, no matter where it leads, always connects us with all of humanity, and this act is much more important than that of our own lives. (p.7)

4.To seek truth then is to be able to compare our own beliefs with something else, validating experience, so to speak, to find a higher truth.

Chapt. 14

1.[RF – the essay is rather abstruse here, but I believe he is making a distinction between seeing our fellow humans disconnected from ourselves. We often think of each other “objectively,” which makes our fellow humans into (its). This becomes a barrier to seeing one’s fellow humans with compassion. The difference is profound because we cannot really objectify our sense of interpersonal relations without separating ourselves from others, putting ourselves outside their lives.  To put ourselves outside their lives means disconnection; “we cannot take or give orders to them.” ]

Ultimately, to be unable to consider ourselves a member human  is to act in an animal way.   IT IS ONLY IN RELATION TO OTHERS THAT WE CAN RISE ABOVE AND GROW OUT OF, OUR ANIMAL NATURE.  This means to be capable of speaking to another. To exercise this choice, i.e. to be either part of, or consciously separate ourselves from others, is the only type of freedom we have as humans, and we possess this freedom only by virtue of communication.

2.Human beings cannot fathom why they think, unless they confront themselves with the fact that they, or a loved one, will die some day, or has died.

3.We think because we know we will die. “If only we would live (indefinitely), we would not think.” (p.6)

Our experience teaches us different things about life, and we are constantly fluctuating in our opinions about that experience.  To generalize (to think analytically) is to stabilize our thinking, to ascertain some truth about life.  And to ascertain truth inevitably leads us to see death all round us. We attempt to see our destiny, and we measure belief in a cause to the extent that we will die for it. Thus in our history we cannot avoid martyrs.

4.Catastrophes always bring out the more profound forces in humans. Catastrophe, risk, destiny, and the destiny of mankind  “…becomes only known by those acts of yours where you risk your life.”

5.FIVE RINGS OF IMMEDIACY :  These indicate the descending importance of risks we take in life.  The first four are essential for living, the last represents greed.

a.  Any event that demands death is most important.

b. Any event that demands personal devotion, dedication, standing up and being “counted”, i.e. a marriage, taking an oath of office etc.

c.Loyalty to some cause

d.Criticizing, but not acting (this is what most do, most of the time according to ERH)

e.To have an “attitude” an opinion, to describe, only events, puts one outside society.  The business tradition tends to live in this sphere, little loyalty, as little risk as possible, not to take a stand unless one must. The attitude is self-centered.

All of t his revolves around willingness to sacrifice (self) for the community. The first four are “living” – the fifth is just greed.

6.These are important rules for the continuation of the community. All persons must be concerned with the destiny of the community, because without it all individuals perish.  All of the first four are  essential, one cannot pick and choose if one wishes to find peace and progress.

7.To speak of the destiny of mankind is to know what has allowed society to progress, and to know that those qualities in the community must persist.  This means law, civil rights, economics, education, etc, all must exist in any generation.

8.To know all these things is to know that the past, present and future are one unit of time, and then one lives across the generations.

END OF SERIES

UNIVERSAL HISTORY – 1951

Feringer notes
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.A universal history is beneficial for comparisons   between different political orders, and to identify change in terms of progress or retrogression. For instance, change in classical Greece brought both  strength and weakness.  Their brand of Humanism could tolerate  but not accept other political systems surrounding them; they could never achieve peace, except temporarily. On the other hand, their invention of philosophy, and with it the concept of generalization,  freed them to see themselves and others objectively. Their development of poetry  freed them to see others differently:  “…a man can see himself and somebody who lives in another order, as friends.” (p.2)

2.In the past we have had no universal history because Greek scholars assumed that all things (Western) began with the Greeks, when in fact their culture was not invented full-blown but built upon Egyptian and  tribal customs. (p.1)

3.The Bible is a basis for a universal history because it contains all phases of  mankind, including Greeks. The Greeks could never establish anything political,  however, because they were poets and philosophers, neither of which advocates taking  political action. THE ILLIAD REPRESENTS A COMPLETE REFLECTION OF THE GREEK CONTRIBUTIONS.

4.ERH organizes this essay to establish some of the basic lessons from history  about mankind, and thus why a Universal History is important to teaching people these basic lessons.

a.God, the tribe, Jews, and empires  “..feel eternity whenever they officiate”  WHAT IS NOT ETERNAL. This is to say, when they officiate what is unique, individual. The Bible’s  great lesson is that humankind will die, and life must be organized around this fact.

b.The idea of “self” was born by the Greeks about 1,000 B.C. Before that time,   the individual was like a cog in some association,  all individuals seen as the same in the tribe  and nation as well.  Thus, human uniqueness was not a reality.  To relax, to read and write poetry as the Greeks did, is to attend the “self” and to conceive one’s self-consciousness.

c.Modern psychology makes the mistake of seeing the “self” as coming first, but  this concept is not historically accurate. Our first consciousness is that of being a part of something else.

d.Four different forms of the Greek spirit evolved,  1) epics (narrative dramas of Homer), 800 BC,  2) tragedy, 400-500 BC,  3) philosophy, 387-300 BC,  4) literature and Alexandrian period  philology, poetry, encyclopedias, 300 BC,  during periods of Greek history.

5.In general,  ERH attempts in this essay to show us that, unless one can see what changes have been made by different cultures, and what differences there are, then:

…they don’t know where they have to be liberals, and where they have to be fighters, and where they have to be family members, and where they have to patriots. (p.11)

These are the conditions under which tragedy might occur (e.g.  The Persian war’s effect on Greece).

The great problem of each era is to change, to rise above the problems at hand, and unless we can see our ways clear, to see how others through history have changed, to see phases by which change occurs. Unless there is a universal history we will be stuck within our own society, with no peace within or without.  Contrarily, cultures that believe the world began and will end within the time period of their culture have no way of identifying and understanding the consequences of their beliefs.

Universal History – 1951 – Review

This is a fragment that more or less outlines purpose and issues raised in the more complete series of lectures on the same subject dated 1967.  However, in this essay he emphasizes the place of the Greeks and their contribution as a summation of previous tribal and “sky empire” cultures and as a preparation for Christianity.  He asserts also that the Bible is the first universal history.

UNIVERSAL HISTORY – 1949

Lectures 1-6
Feringer notes
Last edited: 10-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

1.Universal history must rest on several premises: 1) the unity of all humans, 2) the evolution of fundamental attitudes toward the world  (i.e. who is man and what is his place in the world?),  and 3) attitudes and values likely to create a community voluntarily at peace.  These questions unify all movements and concepts of reality throughout history.  What we learn from a universal history is how we might regenerate our communities, unify the world, and create a society that will allow mankind to survive physically and grow spiritually.

2.ERH identifies four  basic sets of concepts, sources of our knowledge about reality: 1) tribal (pre-Homeric), 2) the great “sky” empires of Egypt, China, Babylon, etc., 3) Greek (beginning with Homer), and 4) Jewish. ERH sees each of these four  as important, but incomplete in itself.   Christianity  integrates these four approaches into a unity.

3.Tribal cultures taught us to look to the past as authority for guidance. This was called by anthropologists “ancestor worship.”

4.Empires, so-called discovered through star observations, that there was order in the universe, and thus created the foundation for science.

5.Greek philosophy mainly encompasses 1) mind, which we call intellect, 2) will, and 3) sentiment.  These three-mind, will, sentiment – are the gods of Greek thinking. The will wants, the intellect defines, and feeling sentimentalizes the environment. (p.3/1) These are the gods called humanism.  Will deals with things “outside”, love deals with the people who follow us, creating future.  Love and will are mutually exclusive. Will makes you a god, while love causes you to give yourself to others.  Will is management, and  love is mutual inspiration. THE GREEK MIND IS ONE‑SIDED INDIVIDUALISM. dominated by the male.  (p.7/1)

The Greek is at home away from home, e.g. in today’s jargon “at the office.”  Today, both man and wife are away from home, uprooted.  Thus, the suppression of feminine consciousness and preoccupation with Greek thought encourages homosexualist’s, break-up of the home, divorce, etc.

6.Jewish belief, supports the voice of prophecy and  the gods of Jewish thinking are love, hope, and faith. The soul is between hope and faith. Hope defines the future in terms of what knowledge from the past needs to continue, in addition to our present state of insights about what should change from the present. Faith  puts the future above the past, divesting oneself of definitions, (p.3/1)  Love is the arbiter between hope and faith – it tells you how much love balances naive hope against overstating faith.    Here the wife and daughter are  “…prominent features of the soul.” (p.7)  Their faith in the future is the major quality of the female soul.  TO THE GREEK MIND, TEMPERANCE, JUSTICE, AND COURAGE ARE UNDERSTANDABLE, WHILE FAITH, LOVE AND HOPE ARE, UN-UNDERSTANDABLE.  (p.10)

Who gets up in the morning because he is intelligent!? Rather it is because he’s full of hope.  Why work?  Because one loves one’s family.  Why go into politics? [RF – in the best sense of the word!]  Because one has faith in the future.

“…love is only possible (necessary?) because of our deficiencies.”  (p.13)

“Nature” tends toward advantages, favoring that which has more sun-light, is stronger, has more money, etc.   HUMANISM IS BASED ON WHAT IS “NATURAL” (on that which is external in the world). CHRISTIANITY IS BASED ON OUR DEFICIENCIES  (that which is “internal”).

7.Christianity,  “…is that institution which has tried to reconcile the Greek mind and the Jewish soul.  Christianity is a synthesis of antiquity, and it had to reconcile tribe, empire, Homer, and the prophets…..We today have to create out of the Christian experience the mind and the soul’s experiences.” (p.13)

Some crucial distinctions can be summarized in terms of three basic attitudes toward life, to wit: 1) The Greek believes all reality is  in the world and is natural, and one must adjust to it. 2) The Jews believe man is a sinner and eventually goes to God (out of the world).  3) The Christian believes he comes from God (out of the world), and enters  the world to create community. Thus, he needs to be reborn, re-incarnated,  regenerated, and changed each day.

The Christian is born every day.  The Jew leaves the world every day. The Greek adjusts himself to the world with the help of mutual recognition. …The Christian takes it upon himself to return to this world, and to encounter it. (p.15)

Obviously all three are necessary elements to living.

There is a paradox between allegiance and non-allegiance.  Clearly we need both, which Christianity recognizes.  Tribal and “empire” life had only one allegiance and possessed unity, but no freedom.  The Greek and Jew had other allegiances, but difficulty in unity.  Christianity attempts to unify these by causing revolution (change) each day.

Such revolution presents constant difficulties (paradoxes) as we experience  life.  In revolution,  the law must be changed.  On the other hand, woe be unto he to breaks the law.

Lecture 2

1.MULTIFORMITY.  The Roman says, once a Roman, always a Roman.  The Jew says the same about Judaism. The Christian says, we are all of these things, Romans (when in Rome…), Jews (with a soul) , but the Greek (with a mind/will/sentiment) depending upon the situation and need.

2.ANTI-CHRIST means man sees himself as god, and in so doing is against the brotherhood of man. (p.2/2)  Christianity attempts to unify – one humanity, one human race.

3.Each of the four  –  tribe, empire, Greek, Jew – is an approach to humanity.  Christianity, in attempting to unify these,  says the world is outside man because it is man’s soul that determines his “confronting” of the world, and he has the freedom to decide at each moment what course to take (of the four).

4.ACHIEVEMENT BY INDIRECTION.  “…to achieve anything in life, you must never aim at it.  It must always be the by-product of your highest aim.” (p.4)  Americans, ERH claims, are constantly unhappy because they seek happiness directly.  Unless we are willing to sacrifice self-interest we will never achieve it.  “He who wants to have a soul will lose it; and the man who is ready to lose his soul, will gain it.”  (p.5)

If you can admit that something is true, it is against everything you are interested in, then the truth will hit you.  Then you begin to live. (p.6)

5.Christianity and social unit,. mean  not only one human family over the world (treating, with equal concern, all people), but also unity through time, “…from the beginning of time to the end.” (p.7)

6.Surviving through time.  As individuals we must learn to survive through time.  Could we survive the end of the United States and still feel strong?  We must be willing to do this,  then to work to re-establish the spirit of the U.S. Thus, ERH left Germany and said to himself he could no longer be a German.  All immigration implies this choice. “Every man in the Christian era has a double allegiance.  He has to give God what is God’s, and to Caesar what is Caesar’s.” (p.9)

7.ON CHRISTIANITY AND DEATH;  “…Christianity is always based on a four-fold death.”  This is to say that in order to create a decent community and change and grow, one must be willing to sacrifice, or let go of certain things; 1) One must be willing to die for a cause, or to let go of his personal aims,  2) to let go of our government, 3) to let go of the boundaries of our region, and 4) to let go to the “…spirit of his own day, of his own time.”  (p.10)

8.ERH claims that today we are in a position where Christianity has lost its hold on the country. Christianity has lost sight of its aims, its spirit.

9.Christianity in the first 1,000 years  was established by the actions of four great monks. Jerome, who established that God’s word was not only in a single language, that it could and should be translated, and continue so in every generation.

Anthony said that not only Egypt’s fertile valley was “God’s country,” but the whole earth (he lived in the desert.)

Augustine taught us to go beyond the boundaries of the empire. Christianity was universal. God’s world and Caesar’s are different.  “Give unto Caesar…”

Athanasious was a revolutionary, against the government, against emperor gods.

Through these men, the evidence, validity, and philosophy  of Christianity was established.

Lecture 3

1.Modern humanism is impotent because it analyzes, and criticizes,but  then fails to act.   Anthony, St.Augustine, Jerome, and Athanasius were powerful for Christianity because they did act; they did sacrifice. THIS WAS WHY THE SPIRIT OF CHRISTIANITY COULD CARRY BEYOND AND RISE ABOVE THE TIMES.

2.”…the West is in decline, and that only the planet can revive it.  (p.2)  By this ERH means that  the West can revive only if it learns from the rest of the planet.  [RF, certainly the decline of U.S. credibility and power in the rest of the world confirms this notion expressed 25 years ago.]

3.We are born into a hostile world,  which we must come to love.  [RF – if we are to survive and create peace.]  We must love all of the world, that is, even the unlovable elements. The meaning of THE CITY OF GOD  is that belief in God’s world is essential to helping us through the dark night of this world’s experiences.  We must have faith that this can occur.  This is what is meant by getting outside time and space by means of our faith. [RF – dreams would be an example of “outside time and space.”]

4.Every generation in the Christian era depends upon reincarnations of the assertions of Jerome, Augustine, Anthony and Athanasius. (p.10)  (That is, someone in each generation should make these acts manifest in their own way.)  The 19th century literary figure, Herman Melville, in his novel , MOBY DICK created a metaphor for reincarnating these four acts.

The four evangelists speak to four different points. 1)Matthew spoke to non-Jews, writing against the Hebrews, the 12 tribes.  2) Mark wrote  against the Egyptians and their star worship, 3) Luke addressed the Greeks, relating their philosophy to its place in Christianity. And lastly, John spoke to the Christian converts. ALL TOOK ACTION, just as did the four after them, in 300 AD.

The church tries to help everyone acquire the power to get outside time and space. (p.13) [RF – If I understand this concept correctly, it means living not according to the mores of one’s own time, but the mores that ought to come true in the future.]

5.How does one acquire this power? Only by contagion, by example and in fellowship. One protects another; one has a place to flee when persecuted.

6.The second millennium is the era of revolutions against the four distortions of ancestor worship, star worship, poetry and systems worship, and prophecy worship; each was important but incomplete in itself.  (p.14)

These revolutions were replaced by the concept of “world” as one world. ERH claims the second millennium repeats the feats of the great empires in that it developed modern science. The 19th century was the age of domination of modern scientific thinking.

7.In the third millennium, we must now re-establish tribal interpersonal relations, but extend  them throughout the world. This will take the place of the tribes of antiquity, re-establishing the family of man on a global scale.

8.Six revolutions must be reincarnated each generation. During the  second millennium, the first three of these revolutions were instigated by monks who re-entered the world to become revolutionaries, Pope Gregory VII, St. Francis of Assisi, and Martin Luther. The second three were gentlemen who re-entered the world to become revolutionaries,  Cromwell, Napoleon and Lenin.

In short, all power in this world corrupts and must be opposed by a “Spiritual sword.” (p.19)    Gregory VII thus led the church into social action for the purpose of separating the spiritual role of rulers from that of spiritual leadership.  This was the inception of the movement to separate  church from state.

St. Francis freed us from oppression by proposing rotation of governments.  Luther freed us from oppression of church corruption and established “the nobility of the professional man.” (p.20)

Then came the three secular revolutions, English  (Cromwell and the right of citizens to bear arms), French/American and Russian all of which were universal revolutions.  The English limited the king’s powers, the French established universal civil rights, and the Russian,  limited industrial monopolies in their  move toward total control over  production.

9.IN SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION:

1)Lasting and positive change in  the world can only be achieved when built on a foundation of          spiritual power,   because the physical powers of the world cannot correct themselves .  Society can only be moved by pressures from the outside itself.

2)  Every secular power must be short-lived.

3) Action in the physical world is always in motion, either expanding or retracting, but never static. These revolutions represent that which left to themselves, always oppress. Gregory VII mitigated the power of emperors by making the church a counter political power. St. Francis countered the hereditary power of the state by insisting it be transient, even within the formal church organization. Luther fought corruption within the church and dignified the professional man.

4)The English, French,  and Russian revolutions were world revolutions as well. Cromwell introduced the right to bear arms against the state, or for the state to maintain a professional army.

Gregory said the worldly powers must be opposed by spiritual power. The world never moves by itself; we all must be motivated and our tendency is to remain static, stable.  God and saints are prime movers.

10.All movements (revolutions) try to make things revolve, while kept in balance.  The heroes of the second millennium are not saints, but revolutionaries. (p.24)

Lecture 4

1.The 2nd millennium of the Christian era tried to keep the achievement of the first millennium, the establishment of the church, and added to it the establishment of the “world” of mankind as a unit, where kings are no better than aristocrats, aristocrats no better than gentry, and gentry no better than commoners. And to accomplish this meant a rotation of roles in all countries. The high may fall, and the low may rise,  no person should “own” another.

2.Progress toward such goals is the aim of all revolutions.  Gregory, St. Francis, Luther, Cromwell, Napoleon, Lenin are examples Revolutionary people.   Gregory VII conceived the church as a world organization. (p.3)

3.The church is to be the builder of the spirit, which is the inner strength to stand up against all things material to the extent that materialism gets in the way. To create a good society takes spiritual strength.

The world is transitory, the spirit is everlasting.

ERH points out, through history,  how these revolutions have been fought to reflect the ideas for progress and freedom.

4.ERH also makes a powerful and convincing statement as to why we must learn more than one language,  to get “outside” our own culture,  as a sort of addendum for method in all of this. The core principle stated here is that to learn another language allows us to see ourselves to some extent as others see us.  And it keeps us from becoming too nationalistic or isolationist.

5.ERH expounds on and excoriates the notion of “liberalism” because it eulogizes thought as separate from language, as though thought were possible without language. LANGUAGE, real speech, speech about important matters is powerful, potent and potentially dangerous,  and may get one into trouble when acted upon. Liberals have a reputation of thinking only, but not acting – as academics tend to do!

The “liberal” attitude, in the process of discounting language, DOES NOT TAKE SERIOUSLY THE RABBLE ROUSERS, who by definition, often practice zealotry:

All the liberals end in nationalism.  The sons of the liberals have all become Nazis, in Germany.  The end of a liberal is always that his son becomes a fascist.  (p.17)

The core of the idea is that rationalism becomes an organizing principle. But, when there is minor anarchy, when there are many minorities, and many languages,  no one can conquer.  By implication, if  the liberals organize, then we cannot be conquered by rabble rousers. (p.18)

I firmly believe that the intellect has run away with Marxians, and that anybody who lives out of the intellect is always, remains sterile.  Marxism is a thought-out revolutionary theory, and therefore will bear no fruit….this time the war itself is the revolution….And the intentionally made revolution is child’s play compared to that.  …Revolution..is civil war…Now when a whole world is at war the only peace you can make is for the world…the real revolution…is planetary man versus national man. (pp.20-21)

6.The second millennium was devoted to revolution, to the rotation of governments. The church (universal) has been established. The physical world has been discovered.  WHAT IS YET UNDISCOVERED IN THE 3RD MILLENNIUM?  ERH’s firm answer is “mankind,” the re-establishment of the family, the tribal family to become universalized from the tribe.

The world revolution began with the Russian revolution in 1917 after WWI , and ended with the Russian revolution at the end of WW II.

“…we are now in the midst of living in one world, but not one family.  And therefore we are all divided in our loyalty.  Every one of us two parties….Man is ambivalent. (RF – multiform)  He has more than one valence.  And he must be occupied, and he must be able, you see, to operate a switchboard.  (p.25)

The revolutions of the past 1,000 years also revolutionized family relations Families are now fragmented, as members no longer work together on the farm.  “The relation of the human family…is no longer possible on the principle of world revolutions.” (p.26)   This must be carried out in the context of work and love.

Lecture 5

5/1To summarize up to this point: Since Christianity, we have discovered the  four “horizons,” or traps, or approaches to the world:  1) the tribe looking for guidance from ancestors, 2) the empire, looking for guidance from the stars, 3) the Jews, looking for guidance from the prophets,  and 4) Homeric man.

The tribe looks backward, Israel looks forward, the empire creates an  eternal presence neither past nor future (i.e. outside world of scientific description), and the Greeks create a poetical world of inner space, of comparisons and metaphors,  seeing man existing on both the outer world and the inner world of thought. [RF – How fundamental can one get? Here is the model for the new social science in a nutshell – all experience exposed to analysis in terms of time and space!]

CHRISTIANITY recognizes all four, but asserts that we must unify them, choosing the right approach in each different circumstance. The new Testament, therefore, is not an empty phrase! [RF – In other essays he puts Christianity at “the center of history” – i.e. the basis for understanding our experience is now completely articulated.]

5/2Since the “ancients” were each trapped in the peculiarities of their own method, from which they couldn’t escape, they were limited.

Existentialists recognize the changing flux of the human spirit. They  “…are the first philosophers who are not humanists.” (p.2)

3.With the fragmentation of the family,the members work and live in different places,  and thereby have lost their ability to understand each other because they have such apparent differences in their  experiences. They have lost their unity, their common ground, and therefore their ability to understand each other.

4.The Christian world created one God, one world, and now must create one society.

5.In the past the dichotomy was between believers in the true God and false  gods. It is well established that there is one God, and many lesser gods that drive us (desire, hunger, greed, fear, sex, etc.).

TODAY, people are divided between believing in one God or in atheism. As with the “gods” issue, we are not of a single mind, at times  believers and at times not.

The atheist finds order (unity) in the world.  The theist finds order in God.

6.Atheism and theism are corollaries; “All Christian faith is intermittent.” (p.8)  This is logical, because if we were God, we would never doubt ourselves.  But since we do, we know that we are not.  So at times we are believers and at times not.  At times we are creative, and at times not.

“How does man then solve this paradox?  By fellowship.  When one man grows weak, and he is an atheist, others hold out, have faith,  and carry him.  In any family, that’s true.  If one person has a nervous breakdown, the others are able to take care of him. Christianity says, `One man, atheist; fellowship, theist’…..if you try to think out God all by yourself, you must end in atheism.  Because nobody in his five senses can proclaim that he does believe in God  24 hours a day. (p.8)  (For instance, why do good people fail and foul people prosper? One cannot make sense from such experience.)

7.The mind cannot stabilize the world permanently. [RF –  that is, by following heros or dogmas, or losing oneself in art.]   Christianity is against idealism, although most Christians  consider themselves idealists.

The Greek humanists, believing the world is good, true, and beautiful, then say, “To live a good life get to know the world,” e.g.  discover the concrete world.  (p.12)    HOWEVER, WHEN PEOPLE  DO THAT THEY DO NOT FIND HAPPINESS.

Modern scientists (post-Einstein) see the world as not necessarily good, but merely “probable.”  Probability theory and chaos theory underlie  all modern science. While scientists see the “one world,”  it is neither true, good,  nor necessarily beautiful according to this view.  ERH claims  they therefore accept the same side as the theists.

All scientists see the world as ordered, and mechanical,  and therefore seek to discover its laws of order. That is, they see it as mechanical up to a point.  BUT THE HUMAN SPIRIT AND MAN’S INNER WORLD OF THOUGHT IS NOT MECHANICAL, IT IS UNFATHOMABLE.

Christian thought accepts the world as it is (one world and chaotic), teaching us to survive it, and make it as decent a place to live as possible.

8.Science isn’t interested in the goodness or badness of the world;  it merely describes it. There is, in fact, much evil in society,  e.g.  crime, greed, avarice, cowardliness, weakness.   HAD THE SOCIAL WORLD NOT CONSTANTLY REGENERATED ITSELF IT WOULD HAVE DESTROYED ITSELF LONG AGO.

9.RACISM WILL BE A CENTRAL ISSUE IN THE NEXT MILLENNIUM. TO MOVE TOWARD CREATION OF ONE SOCIETY IN THE THIRD MILLENNIUM, ONE NEEDS TO PARTICIPATE, GET INVOLVED. A major problem is one of organization.

10.One of the great paradoxes is the nature of mankind as an individual.  Man  the individual is not just individual, he is multiform (husband/wife, working group member, community member) also, and because of his weaknesses and new problems that society presents, he must constantly change, or be reborn, to use the fundamentalists term. (p.14)   And to be a group member, one must give up some individuality!

11.To prepare for the future one must give up something in the present, just as to attain and maintain good health one must watch one’s diet at every meal time.

12.One world, one science, one God, NOW IN THE THIRD MILLENNIUM, ONE SOCIETY MUST REPLACE MANY “TRIBES” TO THE EXTENT THAT THEY ARE NOW AND HAVE BEEN EXCLUSIVE. OR AT WAR WITH EACH OTHER.

13.Because problem solving socially takes varying lengths of time, movements  (causes) must continue for several generations if need be.

Lecture 6

1.ERH asks, What is a major problem of modern industrial, technological society?  It is disintegrating groups and individuals by fragmentation and too much change,  change for the sake of change, so to speak. “Modern industrial society `atomizes’ society,” said Martin Buber.  Too much change, too often, never leaves  time for any action to become stabilized or understood.

Modern man disintegrates, because he is forced by technological progress “…to leave his allegiances in an endless sequence.” (p.1)

The disintegration of the family is a major case in point.  [RF –  the family is strongest, in general,  in third world countries or in peasant societies that have been least touched by technology.)  “Modern man is a new type of nomad.  (p.2)

Another question (problem) of the 3rd millennium is, “Where can man put down roots?”  Is man to consider the entire world his community, and is there to be a spiritual home?

2.The crusade of science, of nature against empire,  to create one world has also created the untenable fragmentation of society and of the individual, both pulled in too many opposing directions.  How then are we to find ourselves in it?  How are we to re-organize our concept of society so that we can regain some stability and with it our sanity and ability to grow?

“…the human person cannot be contained by the world, because the world operates on us as a fragmentation bomb.” (p.5)

3.The rootedness of people in the 3rd millennium must be in time, not in space.  (p.7)   Friendships, speaking honestly and thoughtfully to people (all people), building lasting relationships, looking at situations historically so that one knows what has led up to the present and what needs to be carried on in the future – this was the way of the ancient tribes who were nomads,  not rooted in space!.  (p.8)

Another example of living in a time perspective would be to live in a way that one’s children of the family (or the younger generation in general) would recognize you as someone to follow, as their true parents! (p.14)   [RF – Indeed! My own father died when I was nine years old, and I never knew him nor did I find a surrogate. To be instructed by, and accept the values of the preceding generation is to be rooted, to belong, to feel at home. I felt adrift, spiritually, for many years.]

The ancients lived life “intensively” (fully), but they were exclusive and therefore fought endless wars (as we still do, of course). Today, we are pulled in so many directions we have lost the art of living fully; our attentions are enormously diluted.  We are much more inclusive of many cultures in the world.  BUT WHAT WE NEED IS INCLUSIVENESS AS WELL AS INTENSITY. And now we must concentrate on continuing our inclusiveness, but also work on living life more fully.

There is a great deal of indifference in the world.  Somehow, in the 3rd millennium, we must regain some passion about our work, greater “intensity” in what we do.  “We have made the `thing’  inclusive today.  The problem obviously is to make it intensive, too.” (p.9)

4.Perhaps we have some intensity about the wrong things.  There is a tendency today to backslide into past modes of operation.  Slavery in the South revived an ancient custom of the Greeks and others. Today in many countries there exist  near-slave conditions.

This backsliding appears to save resources.  [RF, what might be forgotten are the  other social problems something like a revival of slavery would cause.]  ERH suggests that projects must  today be built by free men, and yet be beautiful, and yet express the spirit of the times. He refers to architecture as an example, but this term seems to be a metaphor for all activities.  (p.10)

5.We need to keep an eye on the past (but not revive its mistakes), in order to go forward.

6.In the third millennium, we must re-establish the family,  in part by expressing our care for someone, by naming their accomplishments.  Today we suffer from anonymity.  To speak to others and express ourselves thoughtfully, caringly, and honestly,  is to set down roots in the human family.

By mutuality.  We nominate each other.  Nobody nominates you without your nominating him…As father and mother, and brother and sister only co-exist in correlation, nobody can be a brother except for another brother or sister….Very simple. It’s, after all, mutual embrace. (p.15)

…man – as man belongs only to the family because somebody looks at him… To God we pray…the world we observe; and we nominate each other, we talk to each other.  But we cannot talk to each other without giving  each other our title, our name, our place in time.  (p.16)

7.In general, ERH summarizes our social and psychological problems today and suggests how these trends can be changed to re-establish a single society in the world, fighting against the disintegrating influence of technology.

…fruitfulness is the criterion of love…If you wish to overcome mere technical progress and its consequential re-arrangement of nomads into disintegrating particles, you have to try to make them bear fruit through love. Now the simplest word for this would be `reincarnation. (p.19)

8.Human beings cannot be “handled” as other things in space.  Why? Because we are part spirit, which is not in space. “Human beings cannot be left alone, and cannot be handled.” (p.21)

9.In the third millennium, we must learn to break down the barriers to differences, but also maintain those differences.  There would be, “…no physicians, and no observers, and no philosophers.  But there are only partners, members.”

[RF – To observe is to be detached. To be separated from others is to be detached.  To philosophize is to generalize and therefore to be detached.]

10.”In the future  “…all human beings can only have adjectives, and not nouns as their signifying mark.”  In the 2nd millennium, man was recognized as something, as doctor, professor, plumber.  THESE ARE NOUNS.  In the 3rd millennium, we must address people as individuals. NAMES ARE DIFFERENT FROM NOUNS.  Names are specific, while nouns describe a general class of things. (p.24)

Universal History – 1949 – Review

This series of lectures covers many of the themes addressed in the 1967 lecture series,  that is, the crucial lessons all of mankind must learn from history.  However, in this series the author summarizes,  with a much more intensive analysis, the problems of our times and what is to be done in the third millennium if humane communities are to be re-established.  What characterizes our times?  Fragmentation of social groups (communities whose commonality is the sewer or water system), domination by scientific thinking unmoderated by ethical judgments, social indifference, subjection to too-rapid change  engendered by technology,  all of which keeps us constantly off balance.  Instability is rampant.  He then outlines some principles  he believes would  re-establish our sense of community.

THE ORIGIN OF SPEECH

Argo Press, Norwich, VT. 1981
Feringer notes
Last edited: 8-98

 

Contents

Introduction

Dr. Harold Stahmer offers an excellent introduction which, in addition  to a brief biography of Rosenstock-Huessy and the original contribution he makes to social science, describes the centrality of speech to this new method for social analysis.  Speech  makes the man: “The origin of human speaking is the speaking of human origin…The very name of God means: `he who speaketh: He puts words of life on our lips.” (pp. XIV,XV.)

Speech begins with vocatives (subjects being spoken to) and imperatives.  It begins with “formal speech,” which moves men to action and is embodied in ritual.  Our grammar books, on the other hand, begin with the nominative (the thing or person named), and the pronoun “I.”   The nominative is usable only when an experience is over.  I can only respond as an “I,” after I have been addressed as a “thought.” “I” is the last pronoun a child learns to use.

We discovered that our systems of formal logic were skewed by accepting this nominative distortion of our grammarians.  The beginning vocative and lyric stages of all experience are thus called illogical, even though they are essential before the narrative and nominative (abstract) modes can be applied.  Common sense, or daily talk, is a derivative of formal speech.

Gender, in vocative-driven grammar,  has a social meaning in addition to the physiological.  It identifies the required participation in living interactions, and is not synonymous with sex.  Neuter, in this context,  is not a third sex, but refers to all dead things.  Thus, vocative grammar is a mirror of the stages of human experience.  Inspiration through a vocative or imperative addresses us as “thou,” then forces us to respond as  “I.”  It makes us report as  “we,” and at the end, a story (narrative) speaks of us as “they.”  In this way we are conjugations through  stages of experience.

Instead of mental health, grammatical health is proposed.  Grammatical health requires the ability to command, the ability to listen, the ability to act,  and finally, the ability to free ourselves from the command by telling our story.  Only then are we ready to respond again.  Grammatical ill-health is demonstrated to lead to war, dictatorship, revolution and anarchy; and ERH shows how formal speech can overcome these four social diseases.

This four-stage unit of speech – command, listen, respond, analyze – is best defined in terms of a complete  “time-cup” to be fulfilled and discarded. All social order depends upon the power of invoked names to create a never‑ending series of such time-cups.

We call  this method of describing experience The Grammatical Method.  It is not exemplified by a set of rules as with traditional grammar, but rather as a method to help us understand our history and experience, to help us differentiate between valid and invalid names. It also helps us to determine responses appropriate to the stage of a particular experience or event.

Grammatical experience of this kind changes us.  In the world of today, there are people at many different stages of grammatical development, and our method offers them hope of more successful interaction and understanding.  It give us all a common history, a history aware of timing, and a foundation for a possible peace among men.  (p.129)

Formal speech is what creates us as human beings;  “…it intends to form the listener into a being which did not exist before he/she was spoken to.  Human speech is formative and it is for this reason that it has become explicit and grammatical…language can name a place, Tipperary in Ireland, and a child, Dorothy, the gift of God. This, animals cannot do.” (pp.4,5) If, Rosenstock-Huessy reasons, we are formed by speech, his most basic hypothesis is that through understanding the structure of speech we can understand better the nature of our humanity.  It would follow then that speech reflects our social health and is the path toward social regeneration.

Chapter 1 – The Authentic Moment of Speech

1.There are three types of human speech, preformal, formal, and informal.  Informal is a loosening or ignoring of the formal, and therefore always succeeds the formal.  Preformal is animal speech, which also invests some human speech; informal derives from both formal and preformal.  Formal is the most primary.

2.These distinctions are crucial to understanding the centrality of speech to our being!  Formal speech is what makes us human.

…we must forget all our informal habits when we wish to understand the sublimity, elation, exultation, gravity and precariousness which it takes to speak formally. (p.3)

By indirection, if formal speech is what makes us human and informal speech derives from it, to set aside formal speech is to erode our humanity (community).  Formal speech must be understood as containing the forms or structure of the way we become capable of expressing ourselves.   Reliance on informal speech, or mistaking it as equal in importance to formal speech, destroys the roots of our language.

3.To understand speech, one must begin with animals, or with primary (informal) groups such as the family, gangs, military barracks, all of whom use informal speech as a matter of course.   This is contrary to what psychologists, or linguists, or philosophers normally propose.  The child does not explain the man, where speech is concerned, because speech was taught to the child.  Thus, the evolution of speech is  1) preformal,  2) formal, and 3) informal.

4. Formal speech, the creator of our humanity:

…aims at something not aimed at by apes or nightingales:  it intends to form the listener into a being which did not exist before he was spoken to….The greatest forms of man’s speech are names.  They clearly are not animal language…the very name of God means:  `he who speaketh; he who enthuses man so that man speaketh.’  (p.5)

5.Formal may therefore be named “nominal.”  Pronouns – you, I, my, we, it, etc. – are used instead of names.  Thus our list of preformal, formal, and informal can be replaced with pre-nominal, nominal,  and pro-nominal.

6.There are many overlaps between human and animal experience, a nurturing family, a lover and coy mistress, a leader and his group,  etc. When formal language originated, humans found themselves between two opposing influences, the pre-nominal and the nominal.  This situation created the  compromise, or shortcut to speech  –  informal speech was thereby created. The pronoun logically had to become part of informal speech.  This is a logical conclusion.

With the intimacy of small, face-to-face encounters, less formal speech works perfectly well.  The relation between animal, man, and child is revealed.  “The ape in us speaks pre‑nominally, the man in us speaks by names (i.e. formally), and the child in us speaks in pronouns.”  (p.6)  Thus, speaking informally, we can be understood by using animal signs and sounds, i.e. by grunts, cries, moans, etc.  But such speech never transforms one.

7.Lullabies, nursery rhymes, gossip, prattle, whisper, propaganda, jokes, puns, sales talks, advertisements, etc. are informal – in the realm of the pronoun – emptying names by pointing, hinting, suggesting.  And at the same time they empty some meaning from formal language.  They do support the formality and power of real names when the formal is unnecessary (i.e. small group situations).  For instance, it would be absurd to call your father Mr. Jones most of the time.

It becomes crucial then to know the proper type of speech in the proper place,  when and where it is lacking,  and why it needs to be cast in proper grammatical forms.

8.The meaning of the question, “What is the origin of speech?” is that always there are different environments exemplified by the three forms of speech.  These environments do indeed  exist and therefore call for these distinctions.  The first languages existed in the pre-historic/pre-linguistic fields of force.   Individuals and groups are forced to become articulate, or perish.

A group where members are warring is in a pre-nominal stage, as related to the enemy, and must begin the road to healing by going through the three stages in sequence.  Science also is a formalization of the order in any environment.  Only with science (order) can we work to correct chaotic situations.  “When we have learned why one state of affairs is negative…we begin to understand the origin of the good.” (p.9)

To formulate the problem of speech in such a way shifts the field of the question out of linguistics and philosophy, to the realm of politics and history.  “…new speech is not created by thinkers or poets, but by great and massive political calamities and religious upheavals.” (p.9)

This is the opposite from studying the origin of speech by studying child psychology, because formal and informal speech are not invented by the child.

When do we feel  threatened by the absence of speech?  There are numerous situations, all of which reflect different dimensions of the problem.

Chapter 2 – The Four Diseases of Speech

1.A speech theory based on politics, such as the one advocated here, holds a distinct advantage over a theory based on abstract linguistics.  For instance, one can clearly identify “speech-lacking ways of life,” war for example.   Each side holds different assumptions about what is good and what is evil; what is right for one side is wrong for the other.  In ancient times, the power evoked by names of gods for each side were kept secret.  Each party spoke in different idioms, if not different languages.  Peace can begin only when speaking begins between the parties.  The outbreak of violence between two adjacent countries who don’t speak beforehand is no accident.

Speaking establishes law between the parties, then a new speaking unit is born that is common to both countries.  War represents a spacial discord between neighbors.  Speech during war means a non-trusting of the enemy, and therefore it is not listened to or believed.

2.  A revolution is a break in speech also, a battle between the old and the new, between two parties in a stale culture, full of hypocrisy.  Certain values are provided by those in power, but only practiced with lip-service. Laws favor the privileged, family is idealized, but divorce is high because unstable community values are felt as temporary.  Patriotism and freedom are invoked, but in fact they characterize only the privileged.  A protected class stifles new experiments that might shift power.  In sum, the old practices are opposed by the new (young), who desire a more vital future.

The language of the old has lost its meaning.  Speech here is broken off as well, because while the parties may use the same language, the words mean different things.  All of this is saying that the visions for the future are in conflict.  Language becomes “hollowed out,” as Martin Buber put it.

3.Degeneration occurs when the old have nothing of meaning to say to the young; the young see no future for the community.  Vitality exists only by way of constant change and experiment when the old ways no longer work, so when no new enterprises originate, sources of new life dry up.  The same failure in speech occurs as with revolution,  which breeds degeneration.  The old order is said to be degenerate in the sense of abusing and robbing the youth of their future.  Our present national debt is a good example; debt means borrowing from the future, by definition.  Degeneration represents a counter-revolution to the revolutionary situation, a gap in time between the past and the future. (p.13)

4.Anarchy (crisis) is the counterpart of war.  From the standpoint of speech, war is not listening to the enemy;  with anarchy, there is an unwillingness to give orders.  That means inadequate leadership, because to give orders implies rights for those who carry them out. (p.15)

5. Summarizing these points:

War – occurs from disagreements about national borders and not listening to what the foe says. Anarchy – is the lack of leadership in institutions; no leadership means no rights, and thus crisis occurs by not telling the friend (or citizen or employee) what to do.  The situation is usually brought on by unemployment.

Revolution – is an attempt to create new rules for a community, rules that, at first amount to inarticulate shouting (young inventing new words, or new meanings to old words, because of the hypocrisy of the old).

Degeneration – is the young disbelieving the old, seeing their speech as hypocritical repetition of words that are meaningless to them.

Speech includes listening and speaking, articulating and repeating.  A healthy speaking group uses old terms for new facts (repetition), new terms for old  facts (articulation), spreads out to new people  (speaking), and includes every worthwhile speaker (listening).  The two acts of listening and  speaking constantly extend the territorial frontier of speech.  We want to be able to speak to all and listen to all.  The two acts of repeating and articulating constantly extend the temporal frontiers of speech.  We want to link up with all past and future generations.  (p.15)

6.All four acts are fraught with risk:

a. In war, people who advocate listening to the enemy are excluded.

b. With anarchy, people who advocate speaking to “down-and-outs” are excluded.

c. In revolution, orders from the other side are ridiculed.

d. With degeneracy, “shouts” are “inaudible” (ignored).

One should not be misled by the cosmic suffering at these catastrophes. Is speech really the cause and solution? ERH answers with a resounding, “Yes.”   War is deafness, peace is willingness to listen.  Revolution is shouting, order is the ability to formulate. Crisis (anarchy) is muteness, credit is willingness to entrust. And decadence is stereotype,  rejuvenation, new representatives.  When speech is reestablished, the catastrophes, “…shrink to human dimensions.” (p.17) It thereby reestablishes the community by making the problems manageable.

7.If this is true, the structure of language should bear witness to political purposes, and highlight the consequences of our experience.

8.All four diseases and cures are inter-dependent; the occurrence of one leads to the others in time.  The structure of speech, as correlated with these types of events, can be evidenced by history.  In modern times the forms are both oral and written, while ritual and ceremonies bring the past to us in the present.

.

Speech was intended to make peace, to give credit, to respect the old and to free the next generation…By defining language as a social form among other forms of social behavior, it will be seen in its inter-relation with other institutions. (pp.18,19)

Chapter 3 – “Church and State” of Prehistoric Man

1.Animals and biologists reckon life from birth to death.  Considering social regeneration, one must reckon life the opposite order, from death to birth. This is because through speech we are capable of passing on our learning to the next generation.  The child does not have to re-invent knowledge, as does the animal, but he/she can be endowed by the dying generation.

These two powers of prescience before my birth, and of determination after my life, distinguish me from the animal.  The origin of speech lets the “natural” relation of birth and death be superseded. (p.21)

2.  A  burial, a funeral, a eulogy, an obituary are the speech forms and ceremonies that exemplify this death/life sequence.  There are no human beings who do not bury their dead.  Man thereby ceased to be an individual.  Rather he was called to continue in his parents footsteps.  It reverses nature by overlapping it with a social continuation of life.  Death is thereby transmuted into its opposite, and life is transmuted into its opposite. [RF – emphasis mine.]

3.The initiate is told where he is going. To anticipate death, to treat life as though it already stretched beyond his parent’s death, he is given a name that lasts beyond his physical life, and he is called to bridge time into the next generation.

4.Society (speech) reverses the chaos of nature and the law of the jungle.  In nature every specimen is born, and dies by itself. Fate prevails. Speech, on the other hand, creates continuity, freedom, peace, and order. Man’s emancipation from the animal forms means an enlarged share of life.

5.Modern thought tends to mix up into one stew, individual life, eternal life, social life, and historical life,  thinking all of them as the same. It is important, ERH asserts, to make distinctions and indicate relationships.

6.Is speech really capable of bringing order to chaos, and does history really indicate this?  Human societies begin in islands of peace, and they cannot begin with war or revolution, where  incest, war, jealously, rape, and anarchy are rampant. Peace is based on eliminating sexual competition, and this, ERH asserts, motivated the invention of the family as a legal unit.  While forms of marriage vary, all tribes have such forms.

7.The family has constraints.  Chastity in the family, which “tones down sex,” limits incest.  These taboos are the price paid for peace.  Originally, chastity did not apply to the individual, but rather to the mores within the family where sex was controlled and incest was taboo.  (p.24)

In sum, ERH provides examples of where the animal inclinations of humankind were ordered, and the family was created as an island of peace where strict rules needed to be applied.  There was a rhythm between chaste life on the one hand, and orgies and festivals on the other.

8.Before modern society positions in the family were stations of office; father, mother, brother, and sister were formal titles of offices first, and only sex relationships secondarily. If any member of the family conceives of its members as individuals, separate from a station in the family, the family as a unit begins to break up.  Today, “singleness” is common and more economically possible.  Family structure is much less stable, divorce common and violence in the family has increased.

9.The creation of social groups and institutions with offices, titles, and names was against natural animal behaviors.  Within  the family, any member, husband, wife, son or daughter, can represent the family.

They are of one flesh, according to the Church, which again seals the covenant of peace above `individuality’ or, better, their `dividedness.’  (p.25)

This beneficial, but  unnatural unit, is the fruit of speech and would not be possible without the naming and the handing down of traditions from parent to child.

10.Belief in marriage is akin to belief in God, or gods.  Both are founded on faith.  With marriage, our sexual and other instincts continue to be with us,  but marriage  boundaries create peace.  Faith that such an institution is necessary to maintain a community is all that overcomes our natural instincts, just as belief in some power outside us that imposes rules to make us better requires faith.  Both marriage and belief is founded on the same power.

11.There is a fundamental conflict between faith and reason, between theology and science.  It is “reasonable” to follow one’s sex urges in whatever context.  Only faith (in the future of the family) would restrain one.

12.Legitimate children are free to anticipate a “legitimate” place in the future of the community because their parents, having publically taken vows, have declared that the children were planned and would be under their protection and preparation.

My own future is made possible by the love of the preceding generation….Hence, every marriage meant the  founding of a small nation with due respect for the freedom of its future citizens, the free and legitimate children.  Parents sacrificed their lifetime and devoted their whole being to this founding act.  (p.27)

13.The tribe must be understood as an extended family.  But the basic unit of all community, originally, was the family, and since it preformed all functions – law, economics, medicine, etc. – from the family came our present formal institutions.  Thus, the wedding vows can be understood only in terms of indicating this middle ground between the past and the future, between preceders and successors, between ancestors and grandsons…an act of respect for traditional and for freedom simultaneously.  (p.28)

Chapter 4 – The Conflict of Political Sense and Common Sense

1.Any political structure (institution) expands the power, and the times and spaces of an individual.  This expansion is unnatural rather it is “supernatural,” transcending both time and space.  However, stabilizing as institutions are, they collapse without the faith and renewal by individuals committed to them.

2.Formal speech is the means for creating such faith and renewal through nominating leaders, who invoke a common spirit, initiate law, and signify to the body politic its institutional values.

3.Chaos is complex; it may annihilate bonds of fellowship by failing to give credit to those who produce,  thus creating anarchy.  It may annihilate vitality by destroying freedom, creating degeneracy.  Or it may annihilate laboriously established new boundaries, creating war.  The institution is always in danger of these basic forms of chaos.  All of these forms of chaos may be reversed by formal speech.  The very naming of social ills helps to cure them.

4.The tribe preceded the family, because peace and order could not occur until speech had been established.  Family life functions on an informal basis (using pronouns instead of proper names) – and common sense implies that tribal formalities pre-existed in the family.  The intimate living conditions of the family means that one can use shortened, informal speech because of this intimate experience.  When we know people less well, we must be more formal, addressing them as Mr. and Mrs., or “Mr. Chairman.”  Formal situations require explicit rules (laws), where informal speech does not require these.

At the fireplace of each family, the high speech of the tribal spirit is shaken down to the lowest denominator.  Thereby it becomes common sense.  (p.30)

5.Common sense (informal speech), therefore was derived from the formal speech of the tribe that preceded it.  It makes us at home within an existing structure.  The notion of Rouseau’s “noble savage” and Franklin’s “poor Richard” are false.

6.The formal act of naming, itself, is a political one in the sense that any new situation requiring a new name requires the group’s agreement .  Otherwise understanding is lacking. lack of understanding leads quickly to chaos.

7.The cry for peace and order is a desperate cry.  Shouting for freedom and for regeneration of the good old days, is futile. To establish peace requires specific understanding of the conditions for peace.  This is to say,  the creation of new rules that will be followed by the victims of chaos (the shouting, raging, crying, weeping people), who cannot be salved until the miracle of peace is experienced. FORMAL SPEECH PRODUCES EXACTLY THESE MIRACLES. (p.31)  [RF – emphasis mine.]

8.Does speech always reduce chaos, or save a community?  Obviously not; it fails as often as it succeeds precisely because people misunderstand, people lie, people do not have the courage to speak.  Some of the group are brutes gone berserk.  Some wish to break with the group and begin anew, on their own.  To speak is always a risk with no guarantees.  To speak is also to give power to others by virtue of the very act of revealing one’s thought to others.  To say one thing and do another, to teach one thing and believe another, to behave in private differently than in public, all are forms of the “devil.”

When oaths become hollow forms, all of these forms of deception are the diseases of common speech;   conflict cannot be far behind.

Ever since man spoke, he has been divided against himself.  Only half of his speech is successful and fully understood.  The other half is either dead  wood, or it is betrayed…The true miracles of speech, as with all miracles, are threatened by their false imitations…. Our analysis of the forms of speech should be helped by our sense of danger, of possible betrayal which lurks in all speech.  (pp. 32,33)

Chapter 5 – Speech Versus Reflection

1.To speak  is different from reflection.  Speech, both formal and primal, is used when there is chaos, or “high tension.”  To speak the truth in this situation is unsettling.  The result is unclear.  The temptation is to “cool out,”  use stale words, incantations without meaning, without the will to act on them.  (p.33)

2.ERH cites the Revolutionary and Civil  wars. In 1776, the articles of faith in this new country promised free and equal treatment.  In 1860, the unwillingness to carry out this promise came to a head.

3.The names of original speech face in three directions: they face the public who is told, the person who is called, and the spirit that is invoked. (p.34)  Modern thinking, in good scientific fashion, classifies different types of speech, the specific and the general, taboos, etc.  Authentic speech cannot be classified as going from facts to generalization.  To change the community, to save it from further chaos, one must be willing to speak.  One must be willing to be quoted,  and to insist that the thing must be said.  Speaker and listener must have faith that the words are true, have the courage to defend them from attack, and have hope that the community will believe the speaker.  The power of speech is founded on this triplicity.  And when this is lacking, the words are dead.

4.The product of analysis is quite different.  To generalize is to abandon the real situation where crisis occurred. Generalization has its place, but only after real events have been described.  Analysis derives from real life experience.  The act of science, is an act of faith in the truth of his work, his hope to be believed. He thus participates in real speech.  But the product of his work, the stripping of the risk and emotion of crisis from the incident being analyzed, is the “graveyard” for the living meaning for words.  [RF – I believe he means by this statement that generalizations, by nature of being abstractions, derive from past events.  New events confronting one in the present may or may not be accurately described by the traditional general term; therefore, misunderstanding may occur. ]

5.The act of being scientific follows the course of true speech:  1) The speaker’s predecessors established the method, and the speaker is also a follower (listener), 2) He is checked by his colleagues – the speaker speaks in fellowship,  3) He exposes himself to possible contradictions in the future – the speaker leads.

6.In this final section of the chapter, ERH defends the notion that, with “the creative mood of languages,”  names are fulfilled in the future.  We can know a person only on their death-bed. During their life they are still fulfilling the meaning of their soul (their name), and before that time of death, meaning cannot be finally pronounced.  Thus, to speak “primally,” is to look toward the future.  In this sense language creates our new social reality.

Chapter 6 – Logic on Trial

1. Science is said to be “reflective,” in the indicative mood.  It defines and describes something, and neither the speaker nor the listener can do anything about it. It speaks about a past event, a fact. To say, “Johnny is stupid,” is an indicative statement that tells the listener about the attitude of the speaker. The indicative mood absolves the speaker and the listener from any participation in the fact, except intellectually.  Indicatives are not a call to action, but a call to reflect.  This is the essence of logic,  a pure intellectual act.

2.”Greek Thinking”: At some time in the past (ERH doesn’t give a date, except to refer to Alexandrian scholarship, which he asserts did not produce one poem, prayer, or law. We assume some time around 356-323 B.C.)  Greek thinking focussed on the indicative mood as the true form of thought.  By contrast, this was not the case with the Hindu, Hebrew, Egyptian, Chinese, and others. In these non-Greek cases, ascertaining reality utilized other moods such as the imperative, optative, and narrative. In these non-Greek cultures, then, logic included all four.  He cites Genesis as an example of reflecting the other moods of thinking about speech, excluding  the indicative.

By this omission the connection between logic and the Bible, between reason and faith, was obscured.  Both seemed to speak of different processes:  the one (non-Greek) based on imperatives, optatives, narratives:  the other (Greek) on indicatives.  And both stubbornly declined to compare notes.  Hence theology is illogical to the logician.  And the logician appears irreligious to the theologian.  How absurd! (pp.40,41)

3.There are four moods  in the description of an event. in terms of speaking about it to another.  These include the call or motivation for action, the action itself, the describing of what happened during the experience, and finally, the analysis and generalizing. In speech terms, these are 1) imperative, 2) optative,  3) narrative, 4) indicative.

4.With these four, there is a speaker and a listener. Either one or both can refer to the act itself. They must be carried out in sequence to make sense.  The example ERH gives is as follows:

give an answer

may I have an answer

you have answered me

he answers

this sentence is the answer

The first four are examples of speech, the fifth is an example of thought (reflection only). The contrast is between speech and thought.  The first four place the speaker and listener in relation to concrete truth, and the fifth is “academic,”  abstract, timeless.

Speech, in is origins, was unwilling and incapable of formulating sentences in which speaker and listener did not enter.  This follows from the situation of oral speaking.  (p.42)

This is to say, since complex thought evolved only after speech, the original speech situation included only the speaker and listener.

5.The indicative relates to things and situations which need to be identified, and for which law depended.  An example would be, “Was it murder or self defense, theft or borrowing?” The phrase, “This is,” is a judicial sentence that makes no sense unless summing up contradictory proceedings.  No abstract sentence is true without such antecedents of concrete data.  (p.43)

There is an important distinction here, one between data and conclusion abstracted therefrom, as to what “things” the data indicate.  Thus, the indicative (analysis) always succeeds the other three moods. [RF – emphasis mine.] Here ERH implies that “fact” is always a judgement deduced from data (i.e. from the narrative) where there is a speaker and a listener, even though they may be tied by the written word rather than face-to-face.   Obviously, there is always the assumption that something living preceded the thing described. He gives examples of names such as Hitler, Japan, Negroes, Churchill and Roosevelt in WWII, that are all “loaded with living reality.”

6.Abstract statements make sense only in relation to real concrete statements and to a speaker and listener.

“It is illogical, then, to build a complete logic on the logic of abstract statements.”  Abstraction voids all data of life, it has transmuted the living into dead things, timeless, unpowerful.”  (pp.44,45)

7. In conclusion, no true thinker can lay claim to understanding wisdom unless he/she knows the difference between living and dead statements, which is to say, he/she has participated in the creating of the abstraction, thereby infusing life-giving into the speech process.

Speech as a Social Process

a.What Greek (Western scientific) thinkers tend to forget is that their science, their “facts,” are related only to data. They forget that, had there not been a community, a family that sacrificed for them, a family that created speech in a community of peace and finally a profession which taught them their methods, they would not be present to research.  All of these antecedents take time to produce, a much longer time than their work.  They make no distinctions between these two types of knowledge (living and dead statements).

The four root sentences given above, – “answer me,”  “may I have an answer,” “I have answered you,” and finally, “he is answering you,” – have a logical sequence.  Imperative must precede optative, which must precede the narrative, which must precede the indicative. (p.46)

b.There is a “secret” logic tying together the speaker and listener, which is the order by which it is being carried out.  This unity is in  a single time capsule.  The time taken for each step will differ.  These relationships are often called “frames of reference” today, but ERH asserts this concept is wrong. It is rather a “field of correspondence,”  of a speaker and  a listener, and related to an event.  A frame of reference is an abstraction outside the incidents, rather than being a necessary aspect of the exchange.

c.Formal speech (speech that moves people) is corporeal, while casual speech is not; three characteristics demonstrate this. 1) Any idea that is acted upon becomes social because of its consequences,  and therefore corporeal. 2) With a situation of speaker and listener, the burden is on the listener, the receiver of the imperative.  But when the listener becomes the speaker, the roles are reversed. 3) And finally, there are  changes in the physical world as a result.  With informal “chit-chat” such as  “the sun is shining,”  there is no call to action.

The division of labor, action and response, cannot exist unless there is formal speech in which people are moved to act, and formal speech rests for its success on these steps of function and role changes that take place in sequence. “Forms of language move people who speak and who listen, into the field of correspondence and out of it again.  Speech is movement.”  (p.50)

d.The dreamer is not “under orders” of an imperative, so unless he acts, he has little effect.  The scientist who ignores these steps preceding his report cannot succeed in understanding the roots of his own creativity, i.e. command (imperative), response (research), narrative (report of methods), and finally generalization.

The imperative:  p.51

a.Three important facts are expressed in the shortest form of any verb, 1) that somebody receives an invitation to act, 2) that the act lies in the future, and  3) the act is specific.  The imperative form of the verb preserves the most ancient layer of human Speech.  It invokes the original situation of formal speech. In this case two humans are temporarily fused in a time cup – the single word (imperative) sets all this in motion.

b.Three more facets of formal speech: one person is asked to obey, a worldly act is required, and the time span sets aside time for obedience to perform the act.  “All achievements are formidable.” (p.53)

c.Obedience. In these situations the listener is transformed into the role of a “soldier,” a participant in a social process.  The imperative reveals the confidence of the speaker that he knows the world and what must be done in it.  Mere knowledge is transformed into its purpose, action.  Therefore the imperative ranks as more important than mere indicatives, because it transforms known life into a future.  The imperative decides and defines an epic; the order given marks the divide between before and after (the decision), moving people in history; reason shines brightly because it is acted upon.

Between Order and Realization – p.54

a.Imperatives make us feel “enlightened,” lighting a way into the future.  It is empowering to make a decision and act upon it. However, the imperative is enlightening only if it is fulfilled.  The narrative gives meaning to the imperative.  The basic principle is that for effectiveness and achievement, creativity, etc., there must be this cycle of acts, followed in sequence, with each successfully completed.

b.At times, with large issues such as the establishment of justice and law, years, perhaps thousands, may elapse between command and response.  “Thou shalt not kill,”  for example.   Implied here is the notion that, in the case of lasting and important issues, each generation must create its appropriate response in the light of its situation. ERH cites the example of W. James’ essay, THE MORAL EQUIVALENT OF WAR, which to this day has not created a response, as his admonition/prophesy has been ignored.  (p.56)

The Lyric – p.57

a.What is between beginning and end of the sequence?  What is needed on the part of the person taking action to insure completion of the command?  One needs morale to go through with it.  How is this achieved? One must be “on fire” with enthusiasm. Enthusiasm is “lyrical.” Some rhythm needs to  “…contain reason for action.” We sing.  The lyric is between the dramatic and epic. Its grammatical form is usually called the subjunctive, although in Greek it is called “optative,” and in Latin it is called “conjunctive.”  “It is a mood of depreciation and curse, of blessing and praying, of rejoicing and wailing, of laughing and crying.”  (p.57)

b.To be on fire is a condition of a life really being fulfilled.  This emotional drive must not come from “brute passion,”  which leads to vice.  It must come from  inspired reason.  “Lyrics have their logical place and their grammatical forms between imperative and report, because they allow men to be on fire without becoming brutes.”

c.The lyric is a reflection of the appearance of the first person singular, the subjective in speech.  The process of carrying out the act involves  keeping up one’s spirits,  weeping, singing for joy, and other emotional support.

The lyrical mood descends into the dark depths of our body and carries the light of reason into the bottomless pit of the fires of sex, fear, jealousy, ambition, greed and pride which are born in these depths.  …In Aeschylus’ tragedies the real event is that for the first time the inner life of the hero behind this command becomes speakable.  (pp.58,59)

The Narrative  –  p.60

a.The narrative is the epochal mood;  the imperative is more concise, the narrative more lengthy.  The second contribution  of the epochal mood is that it is in the third person plural in one sense.  “He”  is neither speaker nor listener at the moment of telling, but rather in the role of the observer.

b.Furthermore, the narrative is historical, nothing to do with logic or with generalizations.  The two types of speech, narrative and imperative, are far apart.

The Abstract – p.61

a. The abstract has no meaning out of context. To say love, murder, chair, life, etc. raises only the vaguest of thoughts.  To say, “This is murder,”  can only have meaning in relation to some specific event.

b.The Greeks reversed this order by putting  the concept of “principles” first.  As a result, narrative truth is reduced to  a form stripped of all specifics.  In short, classifications are raised to the highest value.

c.While it can be useful in some instances to be freed from having to remember all the living details of evidence by use of abstracts (classifications), for example to say, “I am depressed,”  it is important to understand that this represents only partial truth.  Rosenstock-Huessy is adamant in defining the limits of abstractions, which he has dubbed “Greek thinking.”   He refutes the notion that thought of this type is more complete and rational than language  ( i.e. the utilization of all moods of speech as he defines above).

d.While this assertion as to the limited truth of abstractions seems somewhat academically obscure, Rosenstock-Huessy says its meaning could not be more destructive to our understanding of experience.  Five thousand years of grammatical and linguistic evidence in Western culture shows that beginning the teaching of language with abstractions,  is just the opposite from what we need if we are to understand our experience.  We cannot begin with abstractions but rather with the narration of events – events that create a “time cup” of imperative, lyric, and narrative, before the final abstraction (indicative).

e.There is one more important aspect of this notion of abstraction.  That is, numerability.  The abstract represents several possibilities.  Contrarily, in context, in the narrative, that same abstract can only mean one thing. It is unique and singular!  Another way of making this point is to reflect on the fact that an abstraction  represents a summary of single events.   The phrase “a chair” says that many individual chairs have been witnessed, and the concept summarizes their nature, something to sit on.  In this sense, many unique examples have been bunched into a single category.

f.A category such as a principle, the Greek philosophers claimed, was timeless and always the same.  And yet, it could not have been conceived without the time experience of viewing many singular events.  For this reason, Rosenstock-Huessy refutes the Greek notion that abstractions could exist out of time.  Thought is not out of time; it could not occur without a physical presence of the body that includes a brain and that experiences things over time.

g.In another dimension, Rosenstock-Huessy differentiates between narrative and indicative moods  by pointing out that history (that is, narrative history) is full of emotion described by the experience of people showing  risk, greed, love, etc.  Science, by contrast, is stripped of emotion, objective (removed from social experience), and therefore abstract.  The scientist, however, cannot or does not consider important all of the travail that was the price he personally paid for his creativity.

h.ERH ends this section by placing the notion of abstractions in their proper relation to the other moods of experience, at the end of the time-cup sequence of the imperative, the lyric, and the narrative.  It is useful to embrace the idea of the Greeks for the final step of generalizing in the indicative mood.

The Full Cycle of Speech  –  p.68

a.ERH summarized this chapter by reminding the reader that, if events are to be ordered for the purpose of creating community, the action to do so must occur in the sequence of:  1) An imperative – “Do this.”  2) The lyrical full of emotion – “I am doing this.” 3) The narrative – ” This is what I have experienced in the process.” 4) The indicative – “This is what has been accomplished.”  (The objectification and classification of the event).

b.This cycle is viewed as the natural, unavoidable sequence of events that must follow if anything to be accomplished.  The steps of this sequence vary enormously in time-spans.  For instance, after two thousand years since Jesus, Christians are still striving to fulfill his commands.  The time cup of democracy continues after hundreds of years.  At the other extreme, a time cup may last the few minutes required to take out the garbage.

c.Each of these sequential steps represents an order of grammar in tenses (past, present, future) and in  moods (imperative, lyrical, narrative, logical).  Other connections can be made as well.  For instance, revolutionary, future, and imperative belong together, as do lover, present, and lyrical.  Also, story-teller, past, and narrative as well as scientist, past, judgmental, and classifier are units.

d.Each stage also represents attitudes toward issues in the community.  For instance, to be conscious of the “present,”  one must be sensitive (to emotions including one’s own), willing to participate in society, find common ground.  The giver of imperatives, and narrators, require an acute sense of loyalty to truth.  The revolutionary looks to the future, and in so doing may be less sensitive to the present.  The evolutionists, the lovers of history, look to the past and tend to treat time as endless.

Each stage can be seen in terms of emotional temperature, the and giver of imperatives is “hot.”  The listener and subject acts “warmly.”  The process of narration should be neutral, and the scientist exhibits “cold” objectivity.

e.Formation of a community requires that people must communicate, understand each other, and agree, or find some modicum of agreement, as to each of the stages along the way.  Contrarily, disorder occurs when the thinking of any group in the community becomes trapped in any one of the stages.  The visionaries, the ones taking action, the reporters, and the scientists all think differently or represent a necessary but incomplete form of thinking.  In general, the community must balance between these.  And such balance must apply to the individual, as well.

f.All of this seems to add up to providing us the a road map with reference points to indicate our progress or retrogression in evaluating experience.

Chapter 7 – Dress and Speech

1.Rosenstock-Huessy asks, “How can my assumption, that formal speech has been spoken over long periods of time, be verified?”   There is evidence:  Luther answering a Pope’s words uttered in 1202, Jesus being called the second Adam because he spoke of regeneration, philosophers responding to statements made years or generations before other philosophers.  But, ERH asserts, there is even more telling evidence in the meaning of formal dress for ceremonies.

2.One of the most basic human instincts is to conquer death, and death is conquered, not physically, but socially, by way of passing on our social position and name to those who follow us.

The power to connect more than one generation is not given in nature.  If this death could be overcome, the danger of becoming res unius aetatis  –  (a matter of one age) – was conquered.  Funeral rites celebrate this conquest… All dresses are the uniforms of successors to people whose names have been recognized after their death, or resignation from office.  They are names bestowed on successors, connecting a before and an hereafter.  (p.78)

3.Dress and formal costume reflect a formal social role that changes.  No human group is without dress.  The present aspect of time is invisible without dress as a symbol of a social role.

We acquire, as I quoted before, a different body by putting on a doctor’s gown, a priest’s garment, a bathing suit, or a nurse’s uniform…History is a constant making and unmaking of temporary social orders…(p.75)

4.We acquire freedom and power by such investiture.  Major beginnings of social roles begin with initiation ceremonies, indicating a political and mental lifetime.

5.All names came before the bearer, and they associate the individual with groups, thus providing a set of cultural beliefs.

Chapter 8 – Ritual

1.Ceremony celebrates milestones in life, birth, death, marriage, initiation, etc.  And each ceremony has its unique ritual, unique in dress and speech.  Ceremony and ritual originate as life and death truths that demand our attention or the community is doomed.  By definition, then, ceremony and ritual deal with long time-spans, into both the past and the future.  All formal speech begins in ritual, because ritual defines elements  of our experience.  These truths that call for ceremony provide only general guides to action.  The burden of the action is to constantly fit our methods into new patterns that will re-establish the truth mandated.

2.Ceremonies deal with past accomplishments (what we have done), as marked by monuments, stories, eulogies, and obituaries.  What is allowed in the future is represented by inaugurations.

3.Inaugurations must protect freedom,  because one is not sure what the future might demand.   Freedoms are protected by rules that empower the subject.  The role of the subject at the inauguration is to be a listener, to those who have served in the past.  Thus, biography, monuments, funerals, etc. are recalled.

4.All of these milestones represent serious, long-term evolutions of processes that must occur in the interest of community survival.  They tie together generations.  When ceremony is applied to short-term events, the practice is vulgarized and leads to secularization.  When ritual or ceremony loses its meaning, it becomes hollow, the subject of satire.  When such meaning is lost, when performance of duties is not seen as a life-and-death matter, we lose our guide-posts ahead of us.

5.How do we interpret primary ritual, as to its importance and power to move us?  Not by the mere conveying of ideas.  Conveying ideas would take little power to perform and may not move or command the listener.  To create a life, a community, is to create time, a super time.  This takes power, which in turn is created by ritual spoken at the right time.  A ritual takes time in dealing with past accomplishments, and inaugurations.  This time in the present unites past and future.

6.The more we honor the names of the past, the more claim do we lay to the future. (p.81)  By naming, we create super power, and super time for the community.  By naming we are describing a clear orientation of time and our place in the larger ongoing processes.

The true leader invokes a spirit (through ritual), which unites and gives direction to the community.  Almost as an aside, here ERH states that power of the future  “…is in the hands of those who can provide jobs, and that means order.” (p.84)  [RF – I assume here he means this also indicates a way into the future that will continue divisions of labor.  This would continue giving meaning to individual lives. The emphasis above is mine.]

7.The history of law indicates that an interpretation of the period between death and birth requires the law of succession to be fundamental.

The first and originally the only law is the law of succession.  The two codes, the penal and the civil, depend on the difference between a violent death and a natural death. (p.84)

8.New ritual celebrating victory over oppression creates a victory over a negative aspect of life, and order out of chaos.  ERH cites the apostle Paul, who advocated women speaking in church. This was revolutionary in his time. The Holocaust Museum recently opened would indicate an evaluation of what we have learned from Hitler.

9.All of this is relevant to the centrality of speech.  Our rise above animals is based on our ability to remind ourselves each generation of our history and what must be done in the future.  None of this would be possible without the power of speech, manifested through dress, ceremony, and ritual.

10.Before our era, no word ever got into the dictionary unless it was used in ritual.  Names were not names before the chieftain or medicine man had addressed them in public ritual.  Flowers and animals, fire and water, trees and stones, all were spoken in the ritual before anybody ever spoke them. (p.87)

Ritual is needed to create language which will go down through fifty or one hundred fifty generations.   Languages are immortal because they aimed to immortality…Speech did not name the materials of nature; it did name the historical roles of men and things as they appeared to the “thing” or things of the tribe. (pp.87,88)

Chapter 9 – Grammar and Ritual

1.If all this is true, the logic of our sentences follows from the structure of the ritual.  [RF – What Rosenstock-Huessy calls, in other essays, “a higher grammar” than that we learned in elementary schooling.] The grammatical forms described in this essay, as contrasted with traditional Alexandrian grammar we have all learned, makes sense in real life situations.  The traditional grammar  (I love, he loves, we love, etc.) is learned out of context.

Ritual begins with pronouncements by an authority, that is to say, by ancestors and gods, addressing listeners (you!).  Each grammatical person in the exchange is of equal importance  in real life, because first and second person are interdependent.

2.In everyday speech, a speaker assumes the presence of a listener.  One makes no sense without the other, just as this writing would make no sense without you, the reader, to whom I speak here.

3.We know who we are by being named, by belonging, by being spoken to, all of which means we are first conscious of ourselves as a listener, in the social role of son, daughter, lodge member, etc.  Only later does our ego, represented by the “I,” the speaker, appear to us consciously.

4.In tribal ritual there were four stages; 1) Members were addressed. 2)  They sang and danced on being called. 3) They listened to the narration of the myth of the hero, long dead, who is represented by a mask.  They heard of his power and deeds, which they would be called upon to pattern their behavior after.  Finally, 4) objectification finalized the ritual in the form of a moral of the story.

Artifacts dug up by archaeologists are physical remnants of a once living, life-giving ritual.   Art, science, law, education, religion, and sports are our present-day rituals.

5.Modern dictionaries are a listing of dead words, dead because we should not be free to use those words without taking action on them. This is because thought, if not preparation for action is impotent.  And it is precisely that action that breathes life into our languages, ourselves, and our communities.

Chapter 10 – Question and Answer

1.Rosenstock-Huessy asks once again, “Do these statements about ritual apply to everyday language?”

Take two types of questions for examples.  1)  “Is this the road to Paris?”  and 2) “Is there a God?”  The former prepares one to participate in community life, the latter does not, and therefore is defined as a pseudo question.  The ritual in the first question lies in the demand for a commitment, e.g. “Will you serve?”  This commands a life-time of commitment.  To answer, “I will,”  makes people feel in contact with the divine when they dare to say, “I.”  (To speak is to participate in a possible creative act, which is a divine act.) (p.97)

2.Another type of question is that of doubt and searching.  When responding, we are acting in the role of first person, “I,”  perhaps doubtful and insecure in feeling our authority.  Our affirmation comes from prayer. “Prayer directs, illuminates, establishes him who has to speak with authority.” (p.97)  We are all priests, ERH declares, and …”Priesthood is the right obtained by prayer to speak with a claim to being followed and obeyed.” (p.98)

3.The purpose of ritual is to establish the authority of the speaker,  the truthfulness of the listener(s), and the truth of the statements.   In this process the ritual has achieved three things:

a.  Who and what questions fill a gap in established sentences.

b.  Promise, oath, and pledge questions place a witness behind his deposition.

c.  Invocations and prayer authorize the questioner to speak, “in the name of freedom,                                         decency,                          science, poetry, etc.

All of these questions define the speaker, the listener, and the world outside.  (p.99)

4.The first set of questions reaffirms the time axis, presupposing a history of spoken life.  A stranger who asks these questions is asking to participate in the community.

The second set of questions extends into the future. Those admonish people to back up laws, traditions, hopes, and promises.

The third set creates authority. All communities need leaders, who must have authority. These authorities are not superior human beings, but rather are figureheads through which the higher authority speaks.

All speech depends upon this distinction between speaker and listener, between authority and respondent.

All speech creates history and future.  High and low are established.  In the three sets of questions they may be recreated and imparted. (p.102)

The answer to the question, “Does common language have the same structural grammar as ritual?” then is yes, but it is an informal speech.  Common language must reaffirm past and future.

Chapter 11 – The Trivium and Symbols

1.Symbols are everywhere, in the dress of judges, in wedding rings, etc., symbolizing the voice of their constituents.  But there can be no symbols without previous speech, which established the symbol in a ritual ceremony.  Symbols are crystallized speech, and crystallized speech is metaphorical.  All speech is metaphorical in part.

2. Speech must be partly metaphorical because it must have the power to suggest a quality beyond mere appearances.  Science is also metaphorical for the same reason.  We cannot witness an atomic nucleus,  we can only diagram it, and the rest must be suggestion.

Chapter 12 – Grammatical Health

1.We have to be spoken to, lest we go mad, or fall ill.  (p.110)  All persons need to be addressed as unique. We need to be loved, and this  “exclusiveness” must be experienced.

2.This notion applies to leadership as well.  All leadership is based on the leader thinking of, and being understood  by, his/her people.  The leader thinks in terms of “my unit,” or in the army,  “my platoon.”  And only thus does that leader,  parents included,  have the right to give orders, or make requests of those who are “their own.”

“Come, Johnny.”  The invocation, “Johnny,” draws out  the mother’s self, the verb, “come,” draws out the child’s self.  Both surrender to a mutual interaction.  (p.112)

3.The vocative (to invoke, to call) and the imperative are natural forms indicating solidarity in groups between speaker and listener. The leader calls the name and gives the order.  The responders  give themselves to the cause. The leader rising beyond himself in this act.  “Come, Johnny,” joins the imperative and vocative.  There could be no community without the vocative case and the imperative mood.  These are a necessity for the health of the community.

In retrospect, neither the leader nor any individual follower can take personal credit for the achievement.  That must be a “we,” accomplished by a merging of the speaker and listener into one.

4.For health, we must be free to change between the “you” and the “I,” and the “we” and the “it,” depending upon the demands of the situation.

The religious, the poetic, the social and the scientific mind all should have their say and their grammatical representation in our souls.  We must be “you’s,” before we can be “I’s,”  “we’s,” or “its” to ourselves.  (p.117)

Grammatical health is the health of transubstantiation, of substantial change.  It (the spirit)  must die away, and be resurrected time and again.  This is because the spirit (of a cause, say) eventually becomes stale and must be resurrected.

5.”Ex-authorization” is a term Rosenstock-Huessy coins to reflect the declaration of the end to some spirit of an action that has died.  His assertion is that one must end a spell, a marriage, an oath, etc. when its purpose has passed, and a new action must begin.  This is the reason for sequence; one must begin with the spirit, the willingness to accept a command, to take a vow,  and one must not be dissuaded from this crucial act by the fact that it must be absolute.  For instance, if a marriage is only one interest among many,  if it is a relative commitment, then  it is very likely to end in divorce.

This then presents a paradox.  One must make the commitment as though it were the only important act in the world.  Then, when  it is done, one must end it.  In terms of the “thou, I, we, it” sequence, the “it” indicates a time for analysis, when the commitment is dead and over with.

Grammatical health is to maintain the integrity of the “time cup” for action.  “The ex-authorization of speech and the reference for the time cup are both the main tasks of grammatical health.”  (p.122)

Chapter 12 – Genus (Gender) and Life

1.Gender holds a social meaning and it is crucial to distinguish this meaning from physiology.  In this last chapter, Rosenstock-Huessy demonstrates this importance as reflected in our grammar.  The important distinction in everyday living is that between living things and inanimate objects.  Living beings have eyes and ears and take action; dead things are important, but not to be considered living.  Social scientists, treating people as “objects” (objectively) who cannot speak or listen, mislead us.  Actuarial concepts notwithstanding,  the purpose of social science is to help us understand our experiences and their purpose, to build a viable community.

Witnessing and living witness, gender and speech, create the times.  (p.120

2.There must be divisions of labor within the community.  The basic divisions in society for action are essentially between the person ordering and the person doing, the first person singular and the second person (listener). These divisions are, of course, carried out by both men and women.  But sex, as merely a physiological concept, is often mis-transformed in our grammar to a concept of a division of labor.  To unite physiology and a division of labor, as the same, is to stereotype social roles to the point of making them destructive.  It is to treat one as having no ears, and the other as having no mouth.

To engender social health and community, it is crucial to make the distinction and treat the grammatical “gender” as representing social roles that may (must) be carried out by either a man or a woman, depending upon the appropriateness of the situation.

3.In a parallel way, in ritual, corporeal things are used metaphorically, to represent concepts different from the objects themselves.  In ritual, one’s armor was representative of the role of soldier, and buried with the individual to indicate that his life, as well as his social position, was ended.  “They sealed him into the deliberately created space and time, country and period,  of which  he had become a member.” (p.123)

4.Supporting the notion of social role:

Astonishingly, nearly any word in Greek or old-German could be turned into a masculine, a feminine, or a neutral form…gender is a fundamental category of speech and…it does not intend to describe sex.”  (p.125)

5.We, of course, experience both men and women giving and receiving orders.  The fundamental division of labor in grammar is, then, between subject and object.  This means the ability to make  war and to make peace, to be dramatic at one time and undramatic at another time.

Gender is the interplay of speaker and doers of “the word,”  of revolutionary act and evolution, of sudden gradual process, of today and always, in life the life of speech…this is the ambitious aim of gender in grammar (p.127)

LINGO OF LINGUISTICS 1966

Lectures 1-3
Feringer notes
Last edited: 8-98

Contents

Lecture 1

1.”Language is the power to make yourself understood by a person who did not understand you the day before.” (p.4)  Linguistics, as they are handled today, have nothing to do with this, , because they only speak of people defining their terms.

2.Peace-making is not an act of will, but comes from the ability to give up one’s will in an act of love. True peace  must be found, rather than imposed. (p.6)

ERH suggests a metaphor: just as thousands of seeds fly through the air, but only a few grow and bear fruit, so it is with sentences.

3.He makes a distinction between speaking and “talking.”  Talking is uttering words, and speaking is backing up talking with consistent acts. (p.8)  It is the same between speaking and politeness.  Unless politeness is backed up by relevant acts, it does not reflect “speaking.” (p.10)

4.There are three circles of speech, 1) how people speak of you behind your back, 2) how they speak to your face, and 3) how you think of yourself.   When these three harmonize, there is peace (the ideal condition).  Also, this represents the three problems of human speech. (p.10)  Thus, “…language has everything to do with the relationship between the word and the man who utters it.”

5.One must learn the distinction between true words, words spoken with one’s whole existence and  character at risk and the other  (empty words unsupported by action).  (p.11)  Words spoken only for money or acclamation are empty.

6.No linguists can understand the true mystery of speech.

7.Beginning about 1180 at the University of Paris, the seven liberal arts were established, which allowed the study of grammar, the analysis of the structure of language. But there was no requirement for the “Holy Spirit” to guide the speaker, i.e. no insurance that our God-given ability to communicate was not wasted on  “prattle.”  There was no way to distinguish the important from the unimportant. (p.16)   “Obedience is something unknown in linguistics in American education.  And it is the beginning of wisdom.” (p.17)

8.Linguistics allows one to analyze sentences as though they stand alone.

Paganism means that man stands alone, just as science, as an isolated statement fragments knowledge.

Lecture 2

1.Curiosity is to be distinguished from “inquisitiveness.”  Idle curiosity may not be serious.  One must be willing to sacrifice one’s time and money in a calling, and then one is inquisitive, and can be transformed.  To be “called” opens the door to willingness to sacrifice.

2.To be called is to have a name – professor, biologist, doctor, etc,  “…there are not just verbs, and adjectives, and nouns….there are names by which we are called.” (p.2)  Man has a right to an honorable name.  Mere words are spoken of things and people. Names, by contrast, are spoken to people. “A name is something between you and me, from face to face.” (p.3)

To mis-speak about “things” may be a simple error, but to mis-speak about a person’s name to his face is much more serious,  more explosive. “All questions usually are insoluble in the way in which they are presented in our papers.  You will never solve the Vietnamese question as long as you do not call Ho Chi Minh by his name…He is the man we have to talk to.” (p.6)

3.To be human is to have a given name, and to speak about yesterday and tomorrow. Linguistics does not deal with the humanity behind language.

ERH goes on to indicate other factors of humanity not distinguished in linguistics, for instance, that the future is not created from the past, but the other way around. Time is a social creation, as people speak together who live in the same times. The future as something we strive to achieve impinges, not only on our interpretation of past events, but on our anticipatory actions today. Taking an examination at the university is  “…the product of your fear, or your hope for the future, and not the other way around.” (p.11).  Out of all of this comes the need for language, none of which is the concern of linguistics.

4.”Speech rejuvenates us because after I have listened so often to the fact that I’m my father’s son, suddenly somebody says, `Now you are a father. Now you have grandchildren’.  And by these actions,  we re-create the universe.  “Speech takes you from a hoped for future into an accomplished past….Now all language is built around this necessity to make things future into things past.” (p.12,13)

5.Christ came into the world to teach us that the past does not beget the future. “That’s the whole Christian doctrine…..The Revelation in Judaism is of the past, and the Revelation in Christianity is of tomorrow.” (p.14)  This is the  imperative  and the first form of language.

The second form of language is the subjunctive, the optative, the expression of feelings (the adjective).

The third is the indicative, the narrative about the past.

The fourth is from the outside looking in, the objective, the conceptual.

6.Language allows us to describe this flow of events.  “These are the four languages into which all human language is divided and organized.” (p.18)

Man is transformed by speech, or he doesn’t speak. And all linguists are quite sure that they are not changed, but language is changed by their research….But your and my listening and speaking will bear fruit if you allow yourself to become a different person by this impact… (p.19)

Lecture   3

1.Most people believe they have the power to lie in order to get ahead. ERH IS INTERESTED IN THE QUESTION, “HOW DO WE TELL THE TRUTH?”

We speak to others.  Well, then you cannot speak the truth, because others have always different interests from yourself.  And only if there is some almighty ruler in the universe who watches you and me will we limit our lying, and our egotism, and our vanities, and …  (p.3)

[RF – I’m not sure  how to interpret this. Is belief a psychological game we play on ourselves?  And what if “I” believe and others don’t?  What happens to the community then?   In general, if we don’t believe others speak truthfully there can be no power in language and it will die, along with the community. His assumption seems to be that we play games with language (lie) too easily if we don’t assume a God father is watching over us individually!]

2.Our only access to  religion lies through speech. Language is the process (the only process) by which we change and grow, by which we become human. (p.6)   Through language we keep alive the memories of others and of events. We are half animal (because we die) and half god because our names beyond our death.

Language is between people!  While it can describe other things in the world, it is the relevance of those things to people that defines its importance.

3.ERH defines the notion of “curiosity” as voyeurism, as wanton, destructive, as wanting to know something just to want to know it, for no other purpose.  Inquisitiveness for the scientist may be different.  The serious need to know is:

…the only excuse for all interest in humanity, you see:–our identity, our solidarity.  And as soon as you break away from this and observe — you are in great danger of treating the other part which you observe as an anatomist treats a corpse. And this is forbidden.  (p.12)

4.ERH speaks of crime and the need for punishment because “…you and I are just as weak as the criminal…” (p.14)

“…the presupposition of speech is that all people are capable of everything.” (p.15)

5.Most talking is not speech, it is small talk, “babble.” Only when it is absolutely necessary to communicate do we have speech, when our lives depend on it.

6.The true purpose of speech is to identify reality, to understand our experience, to plan for the future. We need to communicate with others to confirm and expand our own experience.

Lingo of Linguistics – 1966 – Review

These lectures were given at a conference on language held at Western Washington University.  Against the other speakers at the conference, Rosenstock-Huessy attempts to point out how “their” formal studies of the structure of languages represent abstractions ripped from the larger context in which “life-giving speech” takes place.  While he admits some value for such study, he points out how those formalizations omit the true nature of communication, which after all is an action between human beings who are struggling to survive against severe odds.  In these lectures he details the essential differences between linguistics and vital speech, between generalizations and flesh and blood.

ST. AUGUSTINE BY THE SEA – 1962

Santa Monica
Lectures 1-6
Feringer notes
Last edited: 8-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

One must be reminded that the author spoke to his audiences, always. Never did he read a lecture, as he believed the lecturer, in the process of really communicating with his audience, needed to respond to it on a fresh basis each time.  And “each time,” he would always have fresh insights into his topic; thus he  never gave the same lecture twice.  Continuity was maintained because his major points were generally the same, only reached by different routes,  emphasizing different variables depending upon the main issue being discussed.

The new reader of Rosenstock-Huessy needs to be reminded that his topics were not organized the way we have come to expect from our traditional school training.  ERH was a generalist in the most insightful sense of the word.  That is, individual topics upon which he touches, such as speech, religion,  community, grammar, understanding our experience by recognizing a method through which fruitful action proceeds, grammar, a between natural science and social science, etc. are always put into the larger context of the community and the universe.  No single  topic, he asserted,  had any but a limited methodological meaning outside  the context of larger human experiences. The ultimate problem to which all his subject matter relates is, “How is the community to be regenerated?”

The topic in this series of lectures was the regeneration of language and its meaning in our lives.  To best understand this reading one needs to keep in mind how ERH is relating language and speech to the various facets of this larger fabric of our everyday living.

The following notes are taken in their chronological order from the lectures, rather than re-organizing, which will occur as these notes are used in some future time for a specific audience in addressing a problem of interest.

Lecture-1

1.The necessity for speaking: “We are in great danger today that genuine speech will disappear.” Play (small talk) and serious speech are almost indistinguishable, and this is a very destructive tendency.

2.When is the word true, and significant? This is a relevant question because speech is constantly evolving, changing.  Humans transcend the world of animals because of our language. Human speech begins about 13 months after birth.  With all animals physical development is relatively complete at birth.  With this “other” world of humankind, speech, then evolves after physical birth because it represents a crucial arena of development for the child (i.e. his/her ability to change & grow), which requires a gestation period, just as does physical development.

THE MAJOR DISTINGUISHING FEATURE of true speech versus “play” speech (which he dubbed “talk”) is that true speech points toward the future (of society).  (p.4/1)

3.A major share of our behavior comes from our environment (in this case, mainly social environment), which is constantly changing.  If one is not prepared to know what knowledge should be carried from past to future, or  when we cannot know today what human guides to action are to exist in the future, then society turns to anarchy and usually violence.  This happened in Germany after WW I, where a lack of leadership, a lack of orientation and a lack of faith resulted in the violent upheaval of Nazism.

4.One cannot know what is a viable guide for creating a future for the society in which one lives by formula. Here is yet another distinction between a science of society and a science of nature.  Social truth is a truth that unites the spirit of a people and this can only be ascertained in no less than three generations.

Man, in order to ascertain social truth this, needs a power bigger than himself, which is the power of language; his word must be binding on himself.  Bowing to such authority, is usually more powerful than any individual (limited) view.

The power to create a future is to avoid following causes dogmatically (according to formulae).  Any principle, when applied, must be reinterpreted at each occasion and meaning changes over time as experience adds new dimensions to the issue at hand.

5.True speech helps us mark reference points in our lives, when a time for change is appropriate, when recognition is spoken at the right time. These reference points occur in the larger paradigm of time and space.  The explanation of these reference points moves through most all of ERH’s writing for great events indicate a “before and after” type of thinking. “Yesterday we did so-and-so,  tomorrow we will do something else – and here we speak English, south of the border they speak Spanish. But the basic issues are  universal.”  (p.10)

Power is speech: “God is all the powers that make us speak.”  (p.11)   To repeat, the power of speech lies in its ability to communicate the reality of our progress through life,  what is past and what is to be future, what is inside and what is outside us, as individuals or as applied to our groups.  Names have an eternal power because they outlive the person. They are the positive and negative  vestiges of eternal life. (p.15)

Lecture 2

1.It is not the object of our loves, (i.e. girl/boy, profession, cause)  that makes us speak, but rather the fact that we love is that holds the power. This is loves’ divinity.

2.From the gods, and from God, we are inspired (compelled) to speak, and because we each have a name, we  participate in a divine power.

3.Prayer invokes the power to tell us who we are. We can seldom raise this question to a fellow human  and obtain a truthful answer, because he is biased and therefore does not give us the truth. Thus, prayer is constantly on our mind.  And prayer always takes two – one to speak and one to listen.

One is never self-reliant, or self-made. ” Self reliance leads into the lunatic asylum.” (p.4/2)  For 200 years philosophy has begun and ended with having causing  (in part at least) the schizoid personalities  common today.

God exists only with the weak, because when we listen to others it means we recognize a power greater than ourselves. [RF – the speaker begins with the word “I,” in which case he/she acts as an authority, metaphorically as a god.] And when we listen to ourselves only, we go crazy.  One is incapable of love then, when one listens only to oneself.

4.Real speech always begins with an invocation, with an imperative. Analysis cannot tell us what to do directly. It can provide alternatives, but without some goal (and a commitment to it) one has no criteria for analysis. THE NATURAL FLOW OF ACTION,  is to commit, to act, to describe what happened, and then to criticize (in terms of goal achievement).  Numbers only, or measurement, or analysis, can never be the beginning of any action.  (p.17)

5.RELIGION-THEOLOGY-FAITH:  Religion is to accept a command [RF – in ERH essays the term “command” or “authority” means an action in the name of God or the community].  Theology means to analyze. Faith is to obey commands; thus, followers must have “faith” that such action will be fruitful.  One always needs to have faith in one’s ability to carry out the task.

The sequence of speech is from verb to verb. (see #8 below, end of 2nd paragraph)

6.Every act of mankind has to go through four stages if one wishes to learn from experience.

7.The basic problem is that there is a sickness over the world in which the meaning of our experience is not known because of our methods of analysis. We utilize the methods of physical science for social analysis, and this does not work because these methods provide no basis for change (of attitude). One cannot deduce what future we ought to fashion as a result of narrow analysis from experience. We must be free to change as insight and creativity might dictate.

Terms should be defined after, not before, the experience,  as the true learning experience might add new meaning to events.  ERH asserts that 1) there are four stages required for fruitful social analysis that leads to solving problems, 2) these stages must be followed in sequence, 3) they are derived from our experience, and 4) they define space and time in a way as to be meaningful reference points. If one does not have reference points, like following a map through new territory, one becomes disoriented.

8.Sensory experience provides metaphors of these four stages: 1) smell comes first [the problem is sensed, if only at the level of intuiting that something is wrong.]  In this stage a desired future is imagined,  whereby the problem is raised, i.e. how to get there from here.  2) Hearing and obedience is second.  3) Third is touch and contact (getting involved through action).  4) Eyesight is fourth,  i.e. the thing is accomplished and can be “seen.”  In this country we attempt to “see” clearly first; this is not possible because we cannot accurately predict, the result of our actions. Thus, we must have “faith” that our methods (actions) can give the desired result.

Grammatically, 1) the first step represents the goal being set, and it points toward the future, 2) the “you” (2nd person) is yourself as a listener to the voice of authority from a higher power, from the past, and 3) finally, when the task is accomplished, there is a “we” invoked, the group profits (if only in the sense of having tried) and is included in the benefits. Those having taken action may have been either hero or villain.  In general, taking action moves from verb to verb in each step, as the verb is conjugated, completing the process.

From the standpoint of religion, the time perspective is introduced through 1) faith, which points toward the future and requires willingness to believe that our efforts can create the desired future, 2) the present in which we act, in terms of love for the group and doing good work, and finally,  3&4) hope that past methods (or desired states) can be re-established.  Thus faith, love, and hope unify time in each single act, and in larger, epochal timespans as well.

9.Authority, God, is powerful only in the weak; we all alternate in feeling weak and strong from hour-to-hour or day-to-day.  (p.23)  This is important to understand because it describes how we change; to doubt ourselves at times prepares us to change.  It is where creation begins, and always the beginning of the “new” needs incubation; change always puts the future in question.  Thus the bringing to life (truth) of action, the realization of fruitfulness in action, is brought about by enacting these four stages in proper sequence. (p.25)   Another aspect of this notion is that the validation of knowledge only occurs in experience ( with the uniting of commitment, experience, description, and analysis.)

10.To summarize, in terms of our sensory system, these four stages are  smell, hearing, touch, and finally sight. We can  concentrate on only one stage at a time and in this sequence if we are to understand the detail of our experience..  One becomes schizophrenic if one attempts to experience all four at once, as many seem to think they can do in society today.  Understanding this ordering of events empowers people and is essential for empowering society.

Lecture – 3

1.We tend to abuse our senses of seeing and hearing, putting them out of a fruitful sequence FOR SOLVING OF SOCIAL PROBLEMS.  In our  scientific age today we tend to begin with analysis, with methods out of physics.  The regeneration of people and of society is not a “scientific” process, except that scientific methods can be a small part of it at times.  For instance, to judge someone by “seeing” only is to misconstrue their character.  Rather to see them in action, over time, is to see them more truly, to understand their attitudes,  their soul.

2.Upon death a person becomes super-human because he/she achieves life beyond, through the memory of friends. “That’s super-human.” (p.3/3)

ERH believed St.Paul suffers an undeserved reputation of misogyny; he admonished women to be quiet in church, to listen so as to learn to speak.  Paul’s goal was to prepare women for a new role, of becoming speakers rather than only as wailers in church. (p.4)

Death is important to understand in order to give continuity to the times. Each generation is free to change, of course, but the beginning of change is first to learn what is necessity, and this must be handed down from the past generation. Therefore each generation is rightfully present at the death bed. The major question for us today is, what do we have in common with both parents and children? Of course it is the necessary principles to insure survival of the community, to be received from the past, and passed on to the next generation.  Thus, “…if death is not conquered, or realized, or faced, there’s no hope. … “THE QUESTION FOR THE DAY IS, WHICH POWER ENABLES US TO ESTABLISH WHAT IS CALLED HISTORY, AND WHAT IS CALLED SOCIETY AND WHAT IS CALLED CONTINUITY?” (p.5)

3.ERH differentiates between man and animal in that man, in addition to basic animal senses, has an ability to “scent” present conditions. Here he tells the story of the biologist who believes that man takes 22 months to gestate, 9 months inside the womb of the mother and 13 months in the womb of language after birth. (p.7) He focuses on our ability to tell if something (group or cause) is alive or dead. MAN MUST FACE DEATH, in order to overcome it.

4.Our speech consists of three layers; names given us, the truth sought and finally, words we utter to communicate. Names are universal and international, therefore one third of all languages, are already international.

In another context, “Man’s common language begins when he names the dead (remembers heros, creates myths, etc.) and doesn’t forget them…”  (p.10)

Three words are specialized: they are hope, love, and faith, which also unite times into one larger epoch.  Hope builds on knowledge we have already touched, for a return to the past glory that we have shared with others.  Faith is built on a return to invigorate a name, and love builds on motivating (empowering) us in the present to act in creating a future. (RF – this concept of unity is crucial throughout ERH’s thought, i.e. fragmentation leads to death, while unity leads to fruitful life within the community.)

5.To live only in the present, or past, or future is to lose touch with much of reality. The world is constantly changing around us; our reference points to finding our way must locate us in time and space at any moment.  To do this we must constantly decide what will guide us best – consciousness, unconsciousness, looking to past knowledge, or present or future, looking inside (the group or our personal thoughts) or outside.  We can never focus in all these directions at once, but one of these reference points, or some combination, will be our best guide to action in each instance that calls for a response.

6.A fundamental need for all humans is to be spoken to; no other action will indicate so much respect.

The world is never static; therefore all meaning derives from seeing any single event in the context of some movement.  It is the same with architecture; a liveable home respects normal human movements reflecting a compatibility between them in the course of the life style it is designed for. “You  should only build where movement has already been experienced in which form it should develop.”  (p.19)

7.Tenets of human nature:

a.To speak to another is the highest show of respect.

b.Affluence is usually (almost always) a curse.  It doesn’t give direction to the destiny of mankind, rather it gives only a superficial sense of the world, non-hearing, non-loving, self-indulgent.

c.Modern society will be wiped out if its goal is to enjoy itself. We were not put here to enjoy ourselves.

I have tried to tell you last time that to understand means to have the courage to stand under the impact of these four states of our own existence, to confess that we are in love and passionate (about some one, or some cause, or something), to confess that we hear orders and want to obey them, to confess that in order to obey, we have to join the company of saints, or of the soldiers, or of the professors, of the student–always joining in with others, always becoming social.   No man can hear an order and end up alone.  You cannot even become a nun without finding an abbess who will hear your vows. (p.20)

d.Mankind tends to want to see an unchanging world, during his life.  That’s why the rationalist is the  most annoying  creature… he’s always the same type. (p.21)

e.The secret of human creativity is that we can become conscious of the stages of our development, and can thereby pass them on to the next generation.  No animal can do this,  and this quality rests on maintaining a vital language. Communication. Each of us has a biography, and only through language can we integrate  our knowledge of these stages and thereby prepare the next generation to complete the creation for a future. We owe our present state to our predecessors, in part at least.

8.ERH makes a strong and important distinction between action and passion. He says today these terms are often confused as the same.  Passion is the drive, but at times it may not at all mean action, it may mean listening, or waiting, or being obedient.  Action, on the other hand, means to be in motion all the time.

9.When we love something or someone we must bring something to our love, and eventually, through the expression of action, change that which we love, (add something to it, improve it). Just as the love object changes you, you should seek to change it.

To act fruitfully is to carry through these four stages, to thereby change the community and, in the process, ourselves. It is always painful. It is not easy to change. Simply being alive extracts a high price.

Every human being is at every one moment in all four states, and that’s why we are deeply torn. Man is not a harmonious being.  But only if these four situations are connected with other people, and they bear with us, can you ever find peace.  Not in one of these states can you be all by yourself.  And the problem of man is that he is not self-reliant.  That’s the only thing he certainly is not. (p.27)

Lecture-4

1/4Change is reflected in the action of speech, organically, and in our grammar: 1) In speech,  listening and commitment, the experience, the narration and analysis require a different attitude of the soul. 2) Organically, seeing, hearing etc. are as described above. 3) In grammar  the beginning is imperative, not rational and not based on memory.  Getting through experience will often call for the lyrical, to reinforce our emotional state to “hang in there.”

Only when the job is done can analysis then be appropriate and anniversary celebrations can occur, reminding us always of what had become necessary.

This seems to go against our present penchant to begin with a goal.  This paradox, it seems to me, is answered by suggesting that the goal must “feel” right, it must capture our imagination, and that is what is irrational.

2/4Time, in terms of sequence, is also important to the formula of change. Each stage must be recognized and acted on at the right time ( not mechanically determined),  and never can they be contemplated all at once. Sight, for instance, is fleeting, and regeneration will take  perhaps 30 years. Smell requires  perhaps weeks.

3/4Another important point he makes is that significant projects which we begin will usually not be completed in our life-times. He pointed out that Jesus depended upon the apostles to complete his work. This is why institutions are created, to carry on an idea which cannot be completed within a life time, i.e. creating a great university for instance. TIME THEN BECOMES AN IMPORTANT REFERENCE AND ELEMENT TO UNIFICATION IN CHANGE.

4.ERH coins the four attitudes in terms of “verts:”  introvert looks inside us for contemplation, extrovert looks at things outside us. If one looks toward the past one is a retrovert, and to the future, an ultravert. (p.7)

5.To be objective is to speak of dead things. “Dead things can be weighed and measured. Living things cannot. (p.8)  To be subjective, is to express one’s unique opinion.  To look into the future and create, one is “prejected” – the task is yet unfulfilled.

What we get from the past is trajected to us, bridged from the past – such as our language.   THE AUTHORITY OF THE TEACHER IS BASED ON THIS POWER TO CONNECT ALL TIMES AND CONDENSE THEM INTO SPEECH, to pass on to the next generation, instilling it with life.

“If he doesn’t do this..he only teaches his own nonsense…it isn’t worth anything…he has no right to teach.” (p.10)

IT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BEING ONLY AN INDIVIDUAL OR BEING A REPRESENTATIVE OF THE WISDOM OF THE AGES.

6.For the student’s part, he/she must put themselves into the study, happiness has nothing to do with it; the corollary is that the student must be more than just a student, he must take his part in receiving  the wisdom of the ages, gaining his authority and integrity by way of participating in the regeneration of life of the community.

that wisdom includes the four modes, that is, traject, preject, object and subject  roles, past, future, present, inside and outside. In sum, the time and space elements of experience.

7.Another way of stating the difference between natural science and a science of society is that the natural scientist assumes all knowledge is available to him at all times.  In society, if we are to be creative, to see anew and think anew, if we are to understand new conditions of our environment,  there is knowledge we cannot know; primarily, this would be what we will commit ourselves to. Such knowledge is subjective and only available to us at the right time. This type of revelation is not predictable. (p.12)

Having had our experience, we may not understand it until a much later time.  This type of understanding we cannot know until the right time.

Furthermore, the types of moods of knowledge – lyrical, dramatical, epochal, and analytical – also are a dimension of the stages of the process.  To have the end point only is not to know how it was generated, and therefore, how it might be re-generated. At any one time we live at a different front of knowledge – forward, backward, inward or outward; each stage is a reference point telling us where we are along a journey of problem-solving.  This is the only measurement possible in social science, as compared to numerical measurement in natural science.

Passing from one stage to another,  we must be “transformed,” otherwise the stage cannot be accomplished.

William James defines scientific psychology, as the science of mental processes.  What he meant was objectivity as the principle mode of thought.

“Such a narrow and fruitless view of the mind.” (p.13)

8.ERH defines the “soul” as that power to be transformed in the sense of changing from one stage or front to another. One literally becomes a different person. It is the power to change our consciousness. (p.14)

9.Regenerating community lies at the heart of our human-ness. To know we will die, but can conquer death by regenerating the community, is our “super-natural” ability. The animal kingdom achieves continuation by mere procreation, in which case their development is genetically determined.  Human-ness means that our spirit can be made to live longer than our own lifetime, because it is carried on by the next generation.  Spiritually and intellectually we become something new by this process.

The whole problem for every human being is to decide what is mortal and what is eternal…Every act or process that the divine creator expects to perform — peace among men, the building and settling of the cultivated area, the bringing up of animals or of children, the building of schools, whatever we do with the knowledge that this is what we are expected to do, runs though this gamut of command, of getting involved, of looking back and holding on and fast to it, and of saying one day, `It’s all over.’  (p.17)

10.When we are in one stage we are blind, deaf, and dumb to what goes on in other stages.

“Because we all change between moments of ecstasy and megalomania and moments of humiliation, and clumsiness, and blindness or deafness.  I think this is the most important handicap today for any spread of spiritual unity among mankind.” (p.19)

11.The (natural) scientist believes that he must be guided by principles rather than by experience. For understanding sticks and stones, “principles” will suffice,  but for society this doesn’t work in the same narrow, measurable, predictable sense.  When we change our attitude, for instance, everything needs to be looked at anew, one needs to start all over again.  Scientists have been unable to explain the source of their own creativity.  Max Planck “began all over again,” as did Einstein.  In a like way, to re-invent society, as we must do each generation, we must say that past knowledge isn’t good enough. (p.21)

Lecture – 5

1/5Other distinctions between natural and social science:  natural science believes the past creates the present, and the present the future.  IN SOCIAL SCIENCE THIS CANNOT BE, IF ONE IS TO REGENERATE COMMUNITY.

Mankind is stretched between past and future, and MUST CREATE A PRESENT. Creating a present means becoming conscious of and taking planned action toward some goal. What ERH means by this is that our present actions must be guided by what it takes to create the (social) future we wish. “The past and the future then form the present.” (p.2/5)

2/5He goes on about different parts of “time” in our lives.  The part of time that seems most meaningful to us is that which is dictated by the future. Thus, if we love our work, the “present” has meaning to us and is fulfilling.  The same with the historian, who must select topics relevant to building that future. Otherwise history is nothing more than a dead sequence of facts, meaningless.  “That’s why history has to be rewritten every generation, because our future reveals itself as a changeling…” (p.3)  New insights call for redefining the past.

3.The changing environment requires that knowledge also be regenerated. One is reminded of Whitehead’s famous aphorism, “Knowledge keeps like fish.” Each new age requires a new slant on knowledge (all knowledge), and therefore  a changed curriculum in schools.

He points out that the seven liberal arts, (astronomy, music, geometry, arithmetic, logic, rhetoric and grammar) are all pre-Christian. The conception of knowledge had to change after the Greeks, as it must with any new age. Mathematics changed in the light of the new forces of Christianity. MOST OF ALL, CHRISTIANITY MEANT NEW MEANINGS FOR GRAMMAR (a higher grammar ERH later explains) – WHICH IS TO SAY, THE PURPOSE OF THE NEW GRAMMAR WAS TO RECOGNIZE HOW MAN MUST CHANGE, PULLED BETWEEN THE PAST AND THE FUTURE. THEREFORE THE NEW GRAMMAR MUST SPEAK ABOUT BEFORE, DURING AND AFTER, (past, present, and future) as a single unit of time.

The old grammar of the Greeks and Chaldeans saw grammar in terms of individual words and sentences.  This new concept (Christianity) called for a super grammar. This was a new notion for mankind, that life was not an endless succession of repeated cycles.  Therefore, if humans were to participate in the creation of their own future, reference points had to be created by which to gauge the progression  (or retrogression) when it occurs.

This new grammar was necessary  (is necessary) because Christian doctrine meant that we had to continue to learn from the past, and take from it what we needed in the light of new “futures” we conceived of.  (p.4-7)

The alternative was to remain as simple animals, pushed about by natural forces.  This may be what is meant (in part) by “go forth and conquer the earth,”  THE CONQUEST IS MEANT TO MEAN, THAT OF SOCIETY RISING ABOVE THE ANIMAL STATE.

4.This whole idea of “change” was therefore codified by Christian doctrine – that man could change based on new insights and new demands, and a new vision of a possible future for society. Previous to this time, once a Jew, always a Jew, once a Roman, always a Roman, once a Greek, a slave, a nobleman – always.   And that aspect of Christianity meant that  all humanity was one family, which in turn required new learning and change. For one thing, we must mine the historical record to see the cause/effect of some aspect of behavior – as a starting point for renewal. And, since we cannot know what the future will hold, it must be lived by faith alone, that the change will be fruitful.

What has taken shape before can be seen and must be seen.  And therefore, funny as it may sound, man can only go forward, as long as he also looks backward. (p.14)

5.Back to grammar.  The basic forms of literature are  drama, lyrics, epics, and narrative. Drama creates expectations, lyrics expresses emotion, epic looks at the facts, and narrative is analytical (concerned with states of mind). Thus we have the cross of reality,  in that epic = past tense, lyric  the subjective present, drama = imperative; this is the type of  higher grammar,  just as math changed from Euclidian to higher math with Einstein.

6.The Old Testament laid down laws of right and wrong, but Christianity says that since the environment changes each generation, those old laws must be re-interpreted each generation.   In a smaller timespan, each decision we make calls for the same consideration, and this process adds to the meaning of the moral principle.  (p.20)

7.ERH states several ethical rules which he derived from Christian principles. 1) We speak to ourselves, reflecting how we think of ourselves, 2) We are spoken to and respond to others speaking to us and, 3) Others speak of us outside  our presence.  These are three basic grammatical forces we live under.

No young person can know himself, but in our old age we can hope that all of these streams of speech are unified; this accomplishment should put us at peace with the world and should be our goal through life. (p.22)  ERH points out other examples of grammatical living, i.e. to be loved and have loved, to find uniqueness and be a member of groups, demonstrating needed balance between singular and plural.  In general, especially in “Speech and Reality,” he describes in great detail this method.

8.Finally, with reference to the need to regenerate ethical rules, ERH points out that DOING GOOD is  a creation of the present. When this is done thoughtfully it takes imagination and cannot be determined by some absolute rule. In one instance murder may be necessary, in another it may be immoral. Shakespeare said, nothing is ever “good or evil”absolutely, it’s of the moment.  A slap on the face may be in one instance an act of kindness or love, or in another of hatred and hurt; it all depends.  THIS “RELATIVISM” IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE OLD AND NEW TESTAMENT.

Lecture-6

1.Culture  has nothing to do with “countries” per se, but rather the process within a country of allowing time for processes to develop at their own speed. Observing the laws of growth, like wine aging.

China and Peru have a civilization, but when processes within the civilization are not given their time to evolve, such as  dissent, or assent to a new principle like friendship or the healing of hurt, then the civilization sickens. “The Devil tells you, – you can have all your pleasures immediately and patience says you cannot.” (p.1)

2.For movements to be fruitful, one must wait and see if the idea is accepted by the grandchildren, who would also commit to it.  We must understand that we are responsible for the future now, which requires conservation, maintaining the Constitution, reminding ourselves of how to treat the poor or our neighbor.  Many seem to have forgotten such principles in this country. We are therefore obligated to insure (today) those things that must last into the future. A civilization that successfully achieves the goals of movements, will evolve “culture.”

3.Institutions, churches included, must not sacrifice the future for present fads, or conveniences, or pleasures.  For instance, a popular fad of the day is an admonishment from psychologists to “be ourselves.”  “We have a right to develop ourselves,” they say.  Well, there is some truth to this no doubt, but then we also have an obligation to sacrifice for the future, for our children, for our country if called, to maintain the principles of law. “…all  issues are religious, and the relation between man and wife is… of course the central issue of our faith.” (RF – I TAKE IT THAT THIS IS REPRESENTATIVE OF THE TRULY SACRED, WHAT IS CALLED “GOD’S WORK,” OF BEING A HERO, OF WHAT ALL SACRAMENTS OF THE CHURCH ARE INTENDED TO REMIND US OF,  WHAT HOLIDAYS ARE INTENDED TO REMIND US OF.

4.        …this earth is always in the throes of death, destruction, annihilation, extinction, drying-up, sterility, and decay. Death is upon us.  And every generation has to create a  larger humanity.  …The power of peace between men is the power of conservation of the human race. And speech is the method by which this is constantly achieved.  (p.5)

5.THE INDIVIDUAL AND THE PRINCIPLE OF SOCIAL UNITY:  ERH asserts that during the 19th Century the individual was promoted as the atom of society, the indivisible unit.  He points out that the individual can be torn apart. There is constant war unless there is peace (unity) between groups of people. And since the individual is created by speech, which in turn is generated in a community at peace, we must create peace.  War represents the lack of speech between the parties. Thus, the atom of society must be the community!

6.He makes a distinction between secular thinking and religious thinking.  Secular thinking is sociological (the individual is the social atom). Religious thinking requires that the social unit is community, and in community with God.  Thus, with church thinking, “that which may not be divided” of society becomes the trinity between Father, Son, and Holy Spirit that represents all of mankind. (p.9)  (RF – THIS SEEMS TO BE ANOTHER DEFINITION OF THE TRINITY, UNIFYING THE GROUP, IN ADDITION TO UNIFYING KNOWLEDGE OVER TIME. Truth is determined when it can be passed on and acted upon over three generations.)

7.Peace is also to include the notion of mankind as the caretaker of nature, of the earth’s resources, of the environment.

8.Underpinning the seeking of truth is the need to learn from our experience. Describing this process in terms of changing relationships is reflected in grammatical names of roles and their meaning.  Thus, the sequence of fruitful learning is: to receive a command (from the holy spirit that may also be described as “authority,” but always coming to us through other persons – e.g. through speech). This ERH calls “higher grammar” to distinguish the concepts from traditional grammar.  1) First comes the 2nd person  (me) listening to the command. 2) “Me” the listener changes into an “I,” willing to do it (first person).  Then the “I” working with others  becomes a “we,” plural. “We”  transforms   the event into 3rd person, changing its role into one of objective observer, into an “it.”. “It has been accomplished.” (p.10)

9.The “I”, is an AUTHORITATIVE ROLE. Authority may be thought of in many forms, a cultural more, an expert in any field, a parent or president.  BUT IT MUST BE REMEMBERED THAT BELOW THE LEVEL OF THE CREATOR OF THE UNIVERSE, ALL AUTHORITY MUST BE UNDERSTOOD TO REPRESENT SOMETHING HIGHER THAN OURSELVES THAT WE AS INDIVIDUALS REPRESENT, i.e. the law, a profession, an accepted scientific principle or moral principle. Children, beyond a certain age will not pay attention to parents unless they understand the parents to be representative of something beyond themselves.   “We are all either priests of the word, or we are nobodies.”  We are never self-made, we must always receive from others in order to grow.   SOMEONE ELSE ALWAYS CREATES US.

10.History is therefore not analysis (which is scientific, which cuts actual experience down to the bone of generalizations, omitting the unique.)  History is the “we” part of the grammatical method; it tells the story of past experience, as narrative, an essential step in the process of finding truth.

11.ALL SPEECH IS METAPHORICAL (p.15)  The visible hints at the invisible, “seeing with the eye of God,” or of Horus, etc. The invisible explains, and gives meaning to the visible. Thus, all speech is metaphor.

12.ERH provides another definition of God. (p.17)  The creator of the universe is such a power that we cannot define it.  Those things that cannot be defined are  by definition living, if only through humans. God is life to us and therefore cannot be defined any more than the U.S. or England could be defined.

Only those things to which we are indifferent can be defined.  An emotional relationship thus precludes defining. (RF –  I will not try to summarize the next few pages which provide ERH’s logic of how God and ethics are superior to all our institutions explaining, that these institutions must recognize and bow to the authority that created them. I believe the text must be read directly.)

13.ERH points out that one of the great moral decisions we have to make is how much we must give (bow to) ourselves and our fellow men, and how much to conservation of the earth.  One might put it similarly, how much to ourselves and how much to the community welfare?

14.A distinction between play and seriousness is paralleled as that between mere talk ( “the water is cold,”) and serious speech,( “we must come to agreement”).   Serious issues cannot be controlled;  they begin and end, but in between we only participate in a larger process we cannot control. Games and  small talk can, by contrast, be under our control. (p.21)

In serious speech or real issues, we learn something (or should).  Play is paid for in time consumed. serious issues are matters of  life and death whereas, play can be practiced and mistakes corrected. Serious life cannot be erased once enacted; it can only be learned from and a new situation responded to.

15.There is a distinction also between thought and speech.  Thought attempts to explain things logically, while  speech tells the listener of the meaning, of the emotional commitment to the issue.  Thus, tone in speech defies all rules of grammar. It reveals the spirit.  ERH asserts that the Old Testament and Greek philosophy put thought above spirit.  Christianity puts spirit ahead of thought.

17.Christianity, he asserts also, is embedded in the notion of one world, one unity, one creation.

…Christians of course had to emphasize that man is embedded in this one creation.  There is no beyond.  Christianity has never believed in what the children now are made to believe, and beyond outside this.  God has created one Heaven and one earth, and not a second heaven and a third earth.  And we are His children when we extend our power to breathe to our brethren and sisters.  And then we are filled with the spirit and we can make peace in His name. (p.24)

17.Ultimately then our lives should be guided by a dedication to following the ways which will regenerate community, they should “emblemize” ethical behavior.  Therefore, when we speak (true speech, that is):

We are transformed into conductors of this speech.  And a good speaker, of course, trembles in his whole body when he speaks, and the listener can be made to tremble….The human being who speaks has to stand under his own word–it returns to him–and binds him to the future.  (p.26)

18.When one speaks, then, he is committing himself to a new future for himself, he may have changed, –  and by indirection, he speaks to mankind.

CIRCULATION OF THOUGHT – 1956

Feringer notes
Last edited: 8-98

Lecture – 1

1.In social science, laws we make can be broken.

2.In traditional social science humankind is identified with nature; the assumption is that our “nature” is a given that we cannot avoid or change. It is prescribed. “Tricks to aid memory are not related to our development except in a minor way.” (p.2/1)

3.Natural laws cannot be broken, but in social science, we have the freedom to break laws or customs followed in society.

ERH makes a number of  distinctions between social and natural science throughout this essay:  1) Laws discovered about nature must be assumed to be absolute, otherwise no prediction is possible. Laws related to social behavior  are the opposite, to break them may signal a decline in the society or a change for the better leading to possible war or new customs.  2) Natural science laws last  forever because they are only possible for dead matter that is basically unalterable, like sticks and stones – dead thing s in other words. Social science laws,  by contrast are transient because humankind is yet unfinished, our nature is changing, what will hold a society together in one age will be insufficient in another.

4.Behavior that we call “natural”, such as greed, lying, thievery,  etc, may be natural (common) , but these qualities are antisocial.  What ERH  is driving at is that while some laws of nature may describe society, we are free to break out of such a mold,  but there is always a price to pay. The child who is not taught obedience causes undesired consequences eventually. Education can change our nature.  When anti-social behavior occurs,  there may be war to pay.

The law, for instance of child up-bringing, to obey, listen, read, play etc. ( the first four  “tones of the spirit”). When these are broken, when the child is made happy instead of learning them, society pays later.(p.1-6)

BREAKING LAWS OF SOCIETY WEAKENS OR DESTROYS THE SOCIETY.

5.It is also a social law that  we are free not to act the same. If one man is stupid in business and loses his money, another may take advantage and prosper.

6.Social science and natural science differ in their purpose and method.  Breaking a social rule has very different consequences from breaking a natural science rule.

7.Three attitudes in this country :

1) A common belief is that our thoughts are a private affair (i.e. religious beliefs).  This is wrong!  Our mind is a public affair because we think in terms of language. Since all thought that allows us to grow must be in terms of language and must receive validation from others, what we think is of public concern.

This is to say, our considered thought, our thoughtful thoughts, as contrasted with mental garbage that  is not what we wish to commit ourselves to. To keep an open mind before making a decision is, of course, important.  But eventually, a commitment we must make. Before commitment to marriage, one is private; but real life accepts the notion that a public commitment must be made.

2) What are called “public attitudes” are very real in the form of customs and cultural mores.   3) There is an attitude beyond our laws,  that which must be sanctioned by custom and the church.  What some call – God’s law.  When we truly believe in something, like a friendship, or our country, or to  marriage, then we must turn private to public.

8.To live is to respect these laws of society, commit to action to uphold them when necessary (such as opposing injustice), and be willing to pay the price.  To stand up for principles in which we believe and for which we  will sacrifice is a necessity for all persons if they wish to see a more decent community.

Much of the time we are cowards, too weak to do this.  But we become mature to the degree that we do take stands. AS LONG AS WE RECOGNIZE AND RESPECT GOOD DEEDS, SOCIETY WILL SURVIVE.

“Living” is the power to overcome social gravity in this way – to stand against those too weak to speak out and to act at a given moment.

9.To summarize:

…social laws only exist as long as we treat each other as members of one body, of one society, as one man’s acts react on somebody else, as your abusing the law will force the people to change the law for me, what I tried to tell you, which is the interesting thing about society.  Your mistake leads to the fences around my action. I’m forbidden certain things because you broke the law, or vice versa.

As long as you have solidarity it is perhaps not so very difficult for you now to grasp that the circulation of thought presupposes that there is one thought, one thinking process for all mankind.  And what you try is to secure your part in it, your membership, your participation in this circulation of thought. But that your nice ideas, that you have your private ideas, or your private knowledge, or your private education is an illusion.  (p.20)

10.  In a more general tone ERH says that we are all dogmatic to some extent, but the difference between him and his students is:

…you don’t know your dogmas, and I know mine. So I can be spoken to, and you cannot be spoken to. For example, you have the dogma that you have no dogma.

You also have the dogma that nature exists, or evolution…That is, you do not see that these are transient, human attempts to explain existence, and that you at any minute must be ready to sacrifice the term “nature.”  (pp.20,21)

11.People who speak to one another are not natural. We are human creatures, because we are still in the process of being unfinished.  Therefore we have no final nature. And people who achieve great acts, Demosthenes, Helen Keller, Lincoln, etc. become “super-natural.”  “Nature is that which man has to defy in order to come to life.” (p.21)     As pointed out above, it is natural to be self-centered, greedy, to lie to  avoid an uncomfortable situation, etc.

12.Humankind is that which nature cannot give, such as naming our children. “What  nature cannot give is the content of the social sciences.”  (p.22)

The spirit of a person  is  one’s soul.  When one believes in the unity of mankind,  one looks at individuals in a different manner. One’s face will often express the inner spirit. Nature does not incur distinctions between individuals except in obvious and superficial ways, like a woman wearing lipstick, or our differences in height or hair color.  Modern art paints man as natural – no distinction between individuals, no uniqueness.

13.We are “coined” by past events. Ever since the GOOD SAMARITAN, if we believe in that behavior as helping create a good society, then that event influences what we become.

The living God is that spirit which we allow our actions to be patterned after. “The first commandment is the backbone of any social science…”

None of this has anything to do with natural birth, but with the ideas that humankind is willing to abide by.  And this is why the circulation of thought is crucial to human survival.

A child is not either a son or a daughter.  Even the words “son” and “daughter” are already great offices in humanity, and that’s why we call the first man who allowed himself to be sculptured all his life, we call him “the son.” (p.27)

CIRCULATION OF THOUGHT – 1954

Lectures 1-26
Feringer notes
Notes started: Sept-’96 – Jan-’97
Last edited: 8-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

1.There has been a fiction in this country that we must be dominated by logic. ERH believes logic is an inadequate method for social analysis. The truth is just the opposite, if we are to understand our experience more clearly and find a direction that will ameliorate destructive divisions between peoples,wemust dominate logic, rise above it.THE TOPIC OF THIS COURSE IS TO EXPLAIN WHY AND HOW WE ARE TO MASTER “MERE” LOGIC.

2.At different periods of our lives there is a different intensity of thought; the variations in life reflect cycles ofintensity. For instance, in the timespan between the ages of 16-25 years one exaggerates the importance of philosophy, of logic, of language stud, etc. If we do not do it during this time, we will probably do very little during the rest of our lives.

3.The point is 1) thought is both our own doing, and2) it comes to us at certain times with greater demand. Thus, 3) when, why, what for?(1 & 2) are contradictory,of course,just as life is filled with contradictions (i.e. we are masters of our homes, but with guests, we wait on them and provide what they want).

4.In order to really stay alive, vital and aware that is, we must bow to certain rules for the development of our thinking. Most people are seldom aware of different types of experience and what it means day-to-day.ONLY THROUGH THE DEVELOPMENT, WHICH IS TO SAY CIRCULATION OF THOUGHT DO, WE COME FULLY ALIVE.”…thought is only our temporary guest, …every one of us at times must sleep, and God has obviously ordained sleep to warn us that we are not thinking machines.” (p.4/1)

5.We can go through life without being “spiritually” or “thoughtfully” alive. Thought at times meets no resistance, and at other times considerable resistance. What blocks and opens circulation will be addressed. Narrow, unchanging attitudes would be an example of a blocked “canal” of thought, i.e. people who, for the best reasons, claim to stand for “morals,” but seem to have a narrow interpretation of some concept. What is moral, for instance, is a subtle notion; in one instance some act, say punishment, may be moral, and in another context a punishment may be inhumane. Killing is recognized as acceptable in self-defense, for instance.

6.Thought is frail and easily breaks down, as for instance the ease in which misunderstanding occurs. Propaganda, false advertising, political rhetoric are examples of where gross mistrust occurs, and thus channels of communication are cut off.Connecting an abstraction like trust and love and honesty with specific situations can be difficult, often vague, and perhaps only very indirectly conveying meaning.

…thought is so much alive that it comes and goes as life does. (p.9/1)

7.The library is a graveyard of past events, of abstractions (principles), of stories that must be related to our present and future actions (i.e. these ideas have no meaning until brought to life by our actions).

8.Thought untempered by our own evaluation means the thought of others is the real governor of our thinking. Thought proscribed by the F.B.I., or a religious group, or any profession, is the same.We are free to borrow it, of course, but if we are not to be tyrannized by it we must be conscious of its possible value and proclaim it accordingly – either rejecting or accepting its validity.BUT WE ALSO HAVE A RIGHT TO LAY CLAIM TO OUR OWN ORIGINAL THINKING.

Most people are, probablyunconscious of the fact that they live off borrowed thought, thought never made their own by being annealed by their own careful testing and judgment.

9.It is this process of personal evaluation that allows us to participate in the circulation of thought and therefore in our own “coming to life.”

Today the mass media dominates or manipulates our thinking. Media has blocked many channels of thinking, or has presented barriers to one’s ability to think for one’s self. Half truths, false or wrong assumptions, speculation, introverted logicwith little if any supporting evidence, dominate all advertising, bureaucratic pronouncements, and political dialogue, resulting in corrupting or degenerating all circulation of thought. We are deluged by the media with subjects not worth thinking about.

10.What are the consequences of all of this? Is our future to be one of manipulation, of control by demagogues?Is our inability to understand our experience resulting in more and more individuals with fruitless or ruined lives?There is abundant evidence that the divorce rate, the crime rate, the drug addiction, bigotry, war, degeneration, can be attributed to a depressed ability to understand our experience.

“THOUGHTS ARE NOT UNDER OUR CONTROL IF WE DON’T DO ANYTHING ABOUT THEM. ANY THOUGHT MUST BE PUT THROUGH THE STRAINER OF REALIZATION.”(p. 21/1)

11.One of the primary problems reflecting fruitless thought is the speaking in generalizations, a habit rife today. Political speeches and religious sermons are excellent examples.Not that generalizing is wrong, but when it is detached from specifics it loses its meaning.What does love mean?Shakespeare’s love of England makes the term movingly profound and directional.

…God became one man, (Jesus) in order to show that a real thought is something utterly specific.It’s a mysterious way of proving to you the point of the circulation of thought, that Christianity had to take God out of the realm of your universal, abstract thinking…this one child in the cradle gives you a better idea of what thought has to become – flesh, you see – than all your wonderful generalities…(p.22)

12.Circulation of thought does not occur by our playing with ideas and never putting them to the test, or by endless dialogue.It is too abstract, nothing is tested, and ideas fail to come alive, to become manifest in concreteness.They merely float around inside our heads.LIVING IS CONCRETE.Thought, in order to have meaning, must have a counterpart in concrete events.

For instance, the idea that all people are, or should be, born free and equal is an idea that should be acted on, that should become true – where the “word should be made flesh.”At first maybe one person believed it, then a few more, and eventually it must become commonplace in all people’s behavior.

13.To get an idea to come true may require wars, certainly sacrifice, frustration, or debate, and certainly the path will have many barriers; some progress, then retrogression. Prejudices must be set aside, minds changed.It takes time, perhaps a thousand years.The path from idea to reality may be mysterious, but the channels of thought must be kept open in order for it to happen.Only then can progress occur.

No idea is worth anything if it cannot become true.

14.Logic is only one form, one system of thought.But our most important, meaningful decisions are not based on logic:whom we choose for friends, whomwe marry, what profession we enter, etc.

Lecture 2

1/2Three aspects of thought: 1) what an individual thinks, 2) what the world thinks of that thought at that moment, and3) what the world may think about it at some time in the future. All people who speak, participate one way or another in this process of circulation.

2/2There are two ways in which people speak of others – what is said in one’s presence, and what is said in one’s absence. Some are praised more in their absence than in their presence, and more commonly praised in their presence, and criticized in their absence. Our thoughts are judged to be wise or foolish, flippant or serious, reliable or imaginative..THE BIBLE says, “Judge not…” because this type of judgment is dangerous; we are very likely to misunderstand.To judge tends to mean we don’t think about the other’s speech any more.

Another dimension of circulation is not to reveal our true thoughts to others, so we either refrain from speaking or mislead.

3.Still another dimension of communication is when people value politeness over truth, which of course becomes a barrier to communication. To speak the truth in spite of consequences should not be interpreted as giving a person license to be nasty,  but simply that one way or another, communication is enhanced by truth.

4.The conclusion here is that what we think about ourselves andothers and what they think of us, is always interdependent.That is, we gain self-knowledge by listening to what others say about us;we can never be indifferent because their behavior toward us affects us.Here ERH quotes Goethe, “If you want to have joy in yourself, you must attribute value to the world outside.” (p.8/2)What we think of the world “recoils in us.”

5.PHILOSOPHY, POLITICS, AND RELIGION: Our own inner thoughts represent our philosophy. What others say about us is politics.When people speak truthfully to each other about their inner, deeply held thoughts that is religion. To be merely kind reflects no passionate thought.To speak the truth oftenraises passions, but in the long run truth leads to “heaven,” to more peace.

6.Four points about circulation relating to philosophy, art, politics, and religion: 1) the thought inside us, 2) the expression of that thought (which ERH calls art), 3) the judgment of your thought from others (politics), and finally 4) what we owe our community, to be truthful and thoughtful in our response to others (education and religion).To be “secular” doesn’t require truthfulness in our response to others.To be honest can be dangerous to us, and this is why it must be called “religious.”

…in every thought, there is an element of philosophy, an element of religion, an element of politics, and an element of art. (p.11)

7.Obviously, this is why we desperately need a few friends so that we can find the truth about ourselves as the world sees us.

8.THE POINT OF ALL THIS IS THAT IF COMMUNICATION IS TO OCCUR, the quality of thinking must attain a common standard within the community. OTHERWISE THERE CAN BE NO PEACE.This is why philosophy was opposed by Christianity, because philosophy is narrow, limited, it cannot be the standard for peace.Muslims cannot convert the world, nor can Platonists or Buddhists or Jews, or Communism or Capitalism.As long as there is no universal religion (as is Christianity which advocates “all of the above”), there can be no peace. And no peace means no progress because all dialogue degenerates into defensiveness.

9.This is why teaching is so important, so that there can be agreement on some common standard.THE IDEAL AT THE END OF ONE’S LIFE, IF ONE HAS LIVED “WELL,” IS TO HAVE ONE’S SELF-OPINION, THE RECOGNITION ONE RECEIVES FROM THE COMMUNITY, AND WHAT OTHERS WILL THINK OF ONE AFTER DEATH ALL IN CONJUNCTION. (p.15)

By the end of one’s life of having lived well, one has proved this principle (demonstrated by living out one’s beliefs) and thus deserves recognition and a memory of having been true to his ideals. Also, we assume that the person has contributed what he/she could to the community.THIS IS, OF COURSE, RARE; MOST DIE WITH UNFULFILLED EXPECTATIONS.

10.When a person stops learning and developing, one dies spiritually.For the remainder of life one is then simply filling space with no purpose. [RF, is it not a common source of regret whenreflecting on some event that we failed to speak truthfully?]

11.Martyrs have and deserve such approbation for their beliefs because they were willing to give the ultimate sacrifice for them. Martyrdom unifies people’s opinions, while teaching cannot achieve this. p. 23The wayof one’s death has deep meaning, determining the way others are likely to evaluateone.

12.Mental commandments, thought, have a spiritual life.Physical life begins and immediately sets on a course of degeneration.Spiritual life is the opposite – it begins as zero and evolves – and spiritual life begins with death in the sense that through education the child inherits from the past and is thus potentially capable of moving toward humanness. A good life means that one leaves a “good” name (reputation) behind.Most don’t wish to leave a “stinking” name at their death.

13.The essence of teaching is that one makes a distinction between what is the rule and what the exception; to learn what has been accidental in the teacher’s life, and what one believes is true as a rule of life. (p.26)

To teach is to make one feel old (regardless of one’s physical age) and the student feel young (a novice in the subject, regardless of age).

One cannot only teach by example, therefore one must state one’s thought, one’s intent, reveal one’s inner and very personal view of the subject. [RF – conditioning psychologists seem to have forgotten this necessity of making the inner life concrete through speech.This also helps students separate accident from intention. Such separation is also a subtle but important element of teaching, whereby new questions can arise about the subject.]

To teach therefore means that one must, as far as possible, understand the meaning of one’s experience, articulating that meaning in the process.

Teaching therefore is not merely drill, teaching involves, dissatisfaction with one’s fulfillment (perfection). TEACHING THEREFORE SHOULD RECEIVE THE HIGHEST RANK IN THE COMMUNITY.

Teaching is not merely quoting the thoughts of others.This practice cannot reach a student’s spiritor impassion him/her unless the student has the ability to judge experience in the light of the subject matter.ERH believed that there was little teaching in the America, it was mostly quotation and drill.

To teach, one must have become a master at some activity in life, as a motor mechanic, as a doctor, as a poet, etc.(p.30)

14.Philosophy is the beginning.Politics, and religion, and art are the results of living. (p.32)

This statement seems to summarize the essence of real teaching, as distinct from merely quoting others and eliciting memorization from students.And it is essential for the circulation of thought.

Lecture – 3

1/3The safest way to think of some individual is to ascertain what others have thought of them. ERHidentifies several stages of our lives, correlating personal development,”soul” and age – age being defined in terms of social role (types of authority), not by physiological measures.

ALL THOUGHT PROCESSESDIVIDE ONEINTO WHAT YOU THINK OF YOURSELF AND WHAT OTHERS THINK OF YOU. (p.6/3)What others think of us is important because that, also, is how we gauge ourselves for the most part.Ideally we should be able to separate our perception of what others think of us from our personal thoughts about ourself. Of course, what we think of ourselves is important and affects the opinions of others about ourselves, but probably the primary influence on our self-concept we derive from others’ opinions of us.

2.One of ERH’s primary points is that public opinion represents a unanimity, a uniting that makes for peace and is thusvery important.IT IS NOT THE INDIVIDUAL OPINION, BUT THE COMMON OPINION that is crucial to social developmentto the maintenance of language, to peace, etc.True revolution, for instance, is created when many people discover their common beliefs and act on them against the oppressive institution.

STILL ANOTHER IMPORTANT POINT IS THAT THE OPINION OF OTHERS CAN REINFORCE OUR OWN OPINIONS, which may be very tentative, but when we are reinforced by others we have confidence there is truth in our thoughts. EVERYONE WANTS – NEEDS – TO BE RECOGNIZED, AFFIRMED, AND RECEIVE AUTHORIZATION.ERH points out how elevating it is for us to unexpectedly discover someone loves us.

3.We never feel superior to thosewe truly love.”…love means to despair of oneself, and to need somebody else to restore one’s own self-confidence.” (p.11/3)

ERH points out that true despair occurs when our self-confidence runs out and when we are unaware of how others value us. Suicide is forbidden precisely because we never know ourselves who we really are. NO DOUBT THIS IS THE PSYCHOLOGICAL FOUNDATION FOR THE NOTION THAT ULTIMATELY “Jesus loves us.”

(RF – IN SHORT, KNOWLEDGE IS CREATED BY VOTE, AND IS THEREFORERESULTS FROMPOLITICS.)

4.Knowledge is affirmed when validated in a particular situation.”…virtue isnice at the right time, and a vice is a virtue at the wrong time.” (pp.14,15)

5.More definitions or dimensions of knowledge,a distinction between the importance of the thought and its content.If we believe in an idea and tell the world,are uninfluenced by what others think, and are willing to take the consequences of our utterances, then that is important thought – it should be listened to.(p.18,19)People recognize and are influenced by persons who “stick their neck out” for what they believe.

A speaker’s influence is based in part on his/her reputation; is he thinking his own thoughts or reflecting those of others, is he thought to be insightful or a fool, what is his thought relevant to?

6.Science – logic – does not rule our thinking about social event, because to be scientific means we believe in the rule of law (laws of nature – which are absolute).However, no society would ever hang together if we did not allow for exceptions, for forgiveness, for acceptance of breaking a rule. This is because we all make stupid mistakes, or misjudgments through lack of awareness, or insensitivity and THEREFORE MUST BE FORGIVEN.And to be forgiven means that we need the opinions of others regardless of some rule of law.Thus, many who proclaim a belief in science actually deny its validity every day in their social life. (p.21)

7.Religion consists of three elements: what I think, what the world thinks of my thoughts, and what my neighbors think.And some people tend to have three religions (rules for behavior), a different one for each of these three elements. In other words, we have faith that we deserve to be forgiven, faith that we can will justice for ourselves, and faith that there is lawfulness in a “dead universe,” (that is, order in natural science).How often do we believe in one form of justice for ourselves (where others should forgive us for our transgressions), and another justice for others who should be judged strictly by a rule of law.

…religion is an attempt to make the three into one.That’s why I believe in the Trinity.The father, who is the world; Christ, who is we ourselves; and the Holy Spirit, who are our neighbors.And that in these three forms, everybody has religion. (p.24/3)

8.To repeat, circulation of thought has the four elements, what one individual thinks, (philosophy), what others think of these thoughts (politics), how well (effectively) one speaks one’s thoughts (art), and the social significance in terms of an expectation for being acted upon – a faith that a true (worthy) thought will bear fruit one day (religion).

9.In some ways any one of these four elements could dominate in a specific situation.To have a philosophy is to sit in judgment. To bend to politics is to respond to popular demand, to have religion is to put truth and significance in the driver’s seat.The priest has his arts ( ceremony, candles, incense, architecture).

10.His point is that everyone participates in these four roles throughout life; everyone must rule themselves and perhaps others at some time, must have a point of view (philosophy), be concerned with what others think, etc., and therefore these four elements for the circulation of thought are universal throughout humankind.

Another way of expressing these ideas is that we serve four basic roles, as governor (at least of ourselves and families), teachers (of ourselves, families, neighbors) , upholders of laws and speakers truth (priests).And finally, that these rules apply to groups as well as to individuals – there is no distinction between the individual and the group in this latter aspect. The same for great and famous teachers and rulers as for the lowest citizen.

11.  Thinking is that power in the universe which overcomes gravity.And that’s why it is right to put this in form of a tree.Just as the sap rises in a tree, in the same way human thought rises.And we call this therefore “the spirit.”The spirit is always the combination of more than one form of thinking.Philosophy alone, that’s not spirit.Ruling alone, policeman — no spirit, you see. That’s just the law.Teaching, I’m afraid no spirit.But when you all (have) ritual, just pomp and forms; no spirit.But the combination of these three faculties, they make an inspired being…Lincoln, in the Second Inaugural, or the Gettysburg Address, you know that he is inspired, don’t you?

Why? Because he oversteps the bounds of one form of thought…There is something more than thinking.That’s the integration of thinking.(pp.31,32)

Lecture – 4

1/4We must learn to speak for ourselves, express important occasions for ourselves.

…the more central a truth is, the greater is the variety of ways in which it must be expressed by everybody in his own terms. (p.1/4)

A proposal of marriage, expression of one’s honest opinion, one’s philosophy, one’s insights, a response, an expression of friendship are examples. Ultimately, “all truths must be personalized.”

The highest moments of life are the most personal moments.And the greater your power to live is, the more untranslatable will be what you have to say…I call it `a journey into one’s own speech’.” (p.2)

2.To describe events is to make them a part of our inner world, to remember them and consider their importance. The corollary is, that is to also turn the “inside out.”That is, to act on an idea that is likely to improve (create a future for) the community.

…you can only have a divine spirit in you if the Word takes a special form inside of you. (p.3)

[RF – I believe the best comment to interpret this quote is to add another one, that “spirit” refers to our inner strength, the root of our being, our aliveness. In another text ERH defines God as, “The power within us which makes us speak the truth.” (See PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE SOUL, Argo Press)All of these expressions reflect the crucial role of language in our becoming alive to our potential.]

3.ERH despairs of the degeneration of language, and therefore of the culture.This is use of language to mask, to distort, to lie, or not to use it at all.THE WHOLE THRUST OF THIS LECTURE SERIES IS TO MAKE THE POINT THAT FOR LANGUAGE TO BE VITAL TO US, IT MUST BE USED, IT MUST CIRCULATE!

4.To expand the idea of the vitality of language ERH uses the metaphor of water welling up from a spring and how it must take on some soil and minerals if it is to nourish us.Just so, language takes on vitality when it is recreated by us in our personal speech. Knowledge is rendered truer by this process. “In social science something is truer in the more various ways it is expressed.” p.5Contrary to science (mathematics in particular).

5.ERH gets into a long discussion of government and power, the sum of which seems to be that the “church” and government are different,separate entities, and that government cannot be controlled by the church.This is because religion is an inner spirit of people, and government is an entity that must be based on fear of losing its power.The more people instilled with true religion, the less government is needed because government is for those who conduct themselves in a way that destroys the community, i.e. murder, theft, assault.THIS IS WHY THE ULTIMATE MEANING OF RELIGION IS TO MOTIVATE THE NECESSITIES TO CREATING A TRUE COMMUNITY.

6.The Communion in church, the service, illuminates or is intended to illuminate, the meaning of our acts. And forgiveness for our transgressions is a necessity, freeing us to “…start life again.” It is a gateway to revelation of life to ourselves.

Supplication breeds more government, faith breeds peace.Nothing is more expensive than war, nor as cheap as peace. “War is normal when we don’t behave as human beings.” (p.18)It is when we expect to get something for nothing that we germinate wars.

America (and most other countries?) ERH claims is based on cheating, on selling people things they don’t need, or misrepresenting (Let the buyer beware) and all that!This is why we need so many laws, so much government. We act this way because we lack real religion.

7.This section essentially describes the “12 tones of the spirit,”the commands for learning, for coming alive, for fulfilling life;

1) Listen, accept one’s name, learn from the past, receive first commands from parents. 2) Read, expand beyond one’s own family into society and history. 3) Playwith the ideas, early on when one is learning (when one has no social burden to perform), test, experiment,suspend judgment,wait to be called. “The playing is only important if you have something to live for which is serious.” (p.23)4) Doubt, to raise the question, “Does the present situation call for applying the rule, or an exception?”At one time or another almost everything must be open to doubt.Life is not nice, war the rule, peacethe exception.

8.Perhaps our most fundamental doubt isasking ourselves, “Are we loved?”By our family, our friends.We have reasons to be happy when people love us; then we are reverential, worshipful, poetical, lyrical and peaceful.Doubt is always this side of fulfillment, or certainty.Ideally, what we think of ourselves should coincide with what others think of us (and vice versa one might say; what others think of us is largely influenced by their perception of how we think of ourselves). Cynical doubt, especially of how others love us, leads to jealousy.Thus, we need friends, family, colleagues. We must always be joining up with something for a sane and fulfilling life. To be isolated because of individualism is a terrible fate.

Lecture – 5

1/5The holy days in Christianity – Christmas commemorates the creation of the world, Easter commemorates a revelation of the world (social world?),and Whitsunday (fiftieth day after Easter) that the world is redeemed.Here again lies an example of a secular foundation of religious holidays. In the end, religions seem to point to the creation of communities voluntarily at peace.

The implication is profound, that genetics is an inadequate explanation for the creation of human social life; all of which leads to the conclusion that some accommodation needs to be found in our thinking for the spiritual foundations of creation. This is to say, the spirit of creativity. What we need is to overcome the dominant physical science orientation of present thinkers. Without knowledge of our spiritual ancestors our lives are non-creative and certainly non-regenerative.

2/5The memory of saints from history is crucial to this reconsideration.They were dropped from religious recognition with the advent of Puritans. The saints represented those who lived the Christian way, (i.e. in a way to create peace in the world).Without this memory of what has to be paid to live in a better world we are very likely to degenerate, a common condition of our day.

ERH asserts that we must therefore choose which heroes from the past to give recognition, as reminders of how we must live, of the “…people who lived before us who are still ahead of us.” (p.4)

3/5Another message is here – that those who live only in their own generation, who do not recognize necessities for survival from past experience, are bound to perish.Physical life goes from birth to death, spiritual life goes from death to birth (from inherited knowledge), and it is the spiritual life that raises us above animals.

ERH estimates that 80% of the people are spiritually dead, unable to grow because of this deficit, and that the meaning of religion has to do with our daily secular life.

…our strange Protestant refrigerator called the “Protestant Church”…these Sunday services to think that it has to do with “religion”.It (religion) has to do with fact, with truth, with our secular life.It has absolutely nothing to do with something separate from our daily existence. p.5

4.First seven commandments for knowledge circulation:

1) listen2)read3)learn4)play5)doubt6)protest7)win (rule?) – (in IMPURE THINKER, he defines #6 as analysis & criticize , and #7 as protest, see p. 73)

Intellectual steps are the first 3.

Persons who are to rule or be in politics cannot have done much in their lives in the first 7 steps.This is becauseif they are too well known they become and are seen as prisoners of their own ideas – their ways are set, they are known as “experts.”Scholars do not make good rulers for this reason, nor is it easy for them to become elected. The president should be one who finally develops during and after an 8th stage (to legislate). (p.7)

5.The essence of “listening”is that one is brought into the real world, one is called by his/her name. By contrast, with reading and learning one is addressed “in general.”To speak only in generalizations is boring and unreal.To be spoken to and to listen to another calling your name makes one unique, and the world in this process becomes personal. THIS IS WHY CARING PARENTS ARE SO CRUCIAL. Parents are there to govern their children!(Contrary to what happens in the USA,where the prevailing attitude is to give children freedom too soon).

Children obeying andlistening to parents is not to be understood as enslavement, but rather as preparation for the carrying out of thinking of others so that they learn first to begin to participate in the community. Thinking for one’s self, doubting, comes later, only after this preparation. IN THE USA WE ALLOW CHILDREN TOO MUCH LICENSE, OR BURDEN THEM WITH DECISION MAKING TOO SOON.

Therefore this first step is crucial therefore.The child should be made to understand that it is a privilege to be a member of the family, and to be allowed to do dishes, or rake leaves. (see anecdote p.19 bottom)

6.Cultures are held together by understanding the important acts in life. To be introduced into the basic practices for survival is to learn what life is about. Household chores are the child’s first introduction into this fact, and he should be helped to experience this. Doing something for the first time, i.e. preparing a meal, making a box to hold tomatoes, cleaning one’s house,makes one a member.Celebrations of holidays are a recognition of an event that should be re-experienced so that the culture is reminded of what is important. It is a memory ofthe first time it happened. Thus, to celebrate a hero who sacrificed, to celebrate a revolution, a harvest,mothers’ and fathers’ days are vital.(See pp.20-22,3 for details about the origin of culture (secular) as it is derived from cult (religious).THE POINT IS THAT THE CHILD MUST BE MADE TO UNDERSTAND WHAT HAPPENS IF THE JOB IS NOT DONE.

The first stage of the circulation of thought is not intellectual, but of emotion, of awe for these reasons.

7.The sequence is important; listening begets reading, which begets learning, etc.As a parent, all of this is difficult; a child is emotional, illogical, self-centered, impatient. The parent must be patient, severely sticking to discipline with love, by commanding.But this will not work unless the child knows that the parents look up to an authority above them as well.

8.These stages remain with us all our lives, although the process of maturing means that one gradually takes over command of one’s self. At any age, for instance, one must listen to doctors or others who are authorities on some needed information. Obviously, to listen and follow is much easier thanhaving to decide.

9.Reading, on the other hand, is the discovery of the world on one’s own. It is an amplification, or correction, of what has been learned by listening. Our great intellectual insights come from experiencing and learning from our own mistakes.

10.Listening to commands from authority (parents first) helps us learn what is worth doing, what is necessary. THIS IS WHY ERH IS AGAINST PROGRESSIVE SCHOOLS, “DISCOVERY” ETC. All that has its place, but for the most part in the USA we err in the direction of burdening children with decision making too soon. Thus, listening, we learn values.

11.One learns from listening when one understands that there are things in life that must be done, and this is why the child must discern as part of their experience that the authority practices what he/she preaches!

Lecture – 6

1/6Our behavior must be governed one way or another by “authority,”either our own or someone else’s, or the “Holy Spirit.”We should decide which is which, but any novice, including the child, must be under someone else’s command, or be doomed to failure, reinventing reality for him/herself.ANOTHER VALUE of being put under the authority of another engenders the feeling of being wanted. It is crucial for a child to feel it was expected.

In a very different context, expectation is also important for one coming to a new job.If the manager is wise, he/she acts accordingly, as treating subordinates humanely will evoke their creativity to the job.

2.The ten commandments of the circulation of thought meets resistance in an environment where “Greek thinking” (the mind) dominates,where one’s will reigns supreme.To “obey” another seems to gall the humanist,who believes one must obey one’s own mind.

To beget children, to expect them and have expectations for them,is the same for parents as for teachers,and for all good managers as well, teachingas a basic process of administering.

3.Our mind is not our own to be cavalier about.We should have been taught by parents to reflect the highest norms and expectations of our culture. We have obligations.To listen and obey means that a leadership aspect of authority is lending some of that “higher” authority.

Aculture with expectations of us for citizenship means that THERE IS UNITY(A CENTER TO OUR THINKING), which is to say, a foundation for mental health.Otherwise one becomes schizophrenic.

Our mind does not begin with us, it has been put into us by our parents, and in time by others in the community.To teach and manage is seeingone’s students as future replacements as future parents, governors, managers, artists.THIS IS THE PROCESS IN WHICH ONE IS CALLED (BY NAME) TO INHERIT SOME SOCIAL ROLE. And this is a great honor, giving meaning to one’slife,bringing us to life.

4.Reading is self-exploration.One can read under orders or read under one’s own motivation.The former is obeying, the latter is in the spirit of reading.By the time one reaches high school and certainly college, one should not have to be told to read.IN MY OWN UNIVERSITY EXPERIENCE MOST STUDENTS DO NOT READ, THEY WISH TO BE TOLD, which is not reading.And they will never come to much.

To be in command, to be an authority, should mean to engender spontaneity.No one can command or authorize arbitrarily IF THE COMMUNITY IS TO BE SERVED.True authority, the right to command, can only be motivated by necessity.Perhaps most of all, real teaching does not create an automaton. To teach requires love of students (not liking necessarily), and this in turn means spontaneity.

5.The dialectics of listening and reading and the other eightcommandments must be in balance.As suggested above, each stage begets the next, but one always practices the previous commands to some extent in each act.To command, or listen, or obey, or doubt,once one reaches maturity, will depend on what the situation may require of you at that point in time. IF one has not first learned to listen, one is stifled in any attempt to read.

6.One cannot know what freedom is if one has not had to obey first.We are not born free, our thoughts are put into us in the beginning; thinking for one’s self begins slowly after a time, and only slowly increases with time.Most people believe they respond to their own thinking when actually they are “using” the thoughts of others without knowing it. Those who have not learned to obey in youth usually end up being blind followers later in life.

“..if you do not listen from the first to the seventh year, then you will have to listen from the 20th to the 70th year.” (p.7)

7.To learn anything, one must begin with a reference point which is specific, meaning unique, coming from one’s own experience.One cannot learn in general.One can memorize generalizations, but that is not learning in a sense of being able to apply the information.Only specific situations give one reference points.

Lord Charnwood:”Every religious experience begins with a command. Now a command is always specific.” (p.10)

8.”In the mental process harkening comes first, thinking comes second, speaking comes third.”Most believe that thinking comes first and speaking second.

9.Play is an important interval in our lives.In a subtle way it follows a command, “There is time, rest, relax, play.”It is like silence in music, a rest in music.

Memory is a promise, a waiting for when something is needed, to be fulfilled. An anticipation of something needed in the future.

On happiness – not very important.What we look for is meaning and fulfillment; only then will we find some modicum of inner peace.And all achievement must be paid for, sacrificed one way or another for.What happens one day is unimportant, because happy or not, it will pass.Life is one whole fabric.Things that should be remembered are things we should do something about at some time in our lives.

If we remember what we wish to do, where we want (or must) go in life,then when opportunity presents itself we will be able to respond.

Learning is necessary to prepare ourselves to become elders eventually; this is an example of the end determining the beginning.By contrast, listening and reading relate for the most part to our present states. Always, of course, with implications for the future.

10.To a great extent we do not know the meaning of what we do in the present.We cannot be sure of what our actions will lead to.We can know each other. We can’t know ourselves. (p.23)

(p.24) -ERH launches into the issue of the depths of one’s soul, admonishing us that we are much deeper than we believe, that we usually want to be superficial, but really are not.We should, but usually do not think of long years ahead for which we must also prepare, and be patient for.

(RF – I present the following extensive quotes because they seem to summarize the points he makes most succinctly.)

11.  It is utterly indifferent what is in front of your consciousness at this moment.I don’t care what dirty, or what clear, or what clean, or what nice ideas you haveof the world in general. I’m terribly concerned with that which is planted into you as going to come true in 50 years.It’s the only part of you that’s interesting to me.What do I care what you think of me?You may think I’m a fool.Please.Go ahead, do this.

As long as you listen to what I say, this will have been forgotten in 50 years that you were down on me.But what I have said, if I had said it with conviction and with truthfulness, it will come home.It will come back…That’s the great power of truth, you see, that always first he who says the truth has to be despised and ridiculed, but the thing that is true comes back on you, and tells you once more that you knew this, and you should have known, and you should have remembered it.

The relation — between the person who tells you the truth, that is, your teacher, and the truth is, that the teacher may get the beating, but don’t beat down the truth.And the truth of the matter is without cultivating your memory, you cannot connect your childishness with your memory. p.25

12.The important things of life are important for three generations of your own being.And you discover by learning that you are expected not to be a child, but that you are expected to be at the same time always a child, a man and an authority, if you’d prefer that word. Every one of us is asked to be all three….You will not believe a man who cannot show proof that he meant business in the three different ages of his life. (p.27)

13.  Most people live on borrowed convictions.A conviction is that which develops by learning in your youth, by verifying in your middle age, and by teaching in your old age the same truth.Otherwise there is no conviction, if you don’t do all three things.The rest is opinion. The rest is just ideas.Who cares for ideas or opinions?…I don’t.I want to see people who embody the truth, because it has stayed with them in three forms of life.

…only those mental things are really essential which reappear in your youth, in your own mature life, and in your own old age. (p.28)

14.  The mind is given us for conviction.But only very few thoughts, and very few contents reach this degree of density…

…typical is a poor, poor second, because to be typical means not to live, but to be lived by other people’s minds.

The decision in your own lifetime at this moment is: whether you will live by other people’s minds or whether you will really have a mind of your own. And you don’t have a mind of your own by having ideas.You have a mind of your own if that which you now learn will appear so real that you will do something about it in your manhood, and you will make other people do something about it in your old age.These are three phases of the mind, and that it means to have one’s own mind. (p.29)

15.  approval.That’s why I cannot hamper your life…We are not a state of which contents where I have the right to judge your future, but you have not the right to judge t he whole human past which I represent here to you.I must give you 10, 20, 30 years to do something, to find out if what I say is true.That’s why I need the authority of this college to be appointed.They find out who has something to say that is worthwhile listening to…Authorities of the college must know this.You cannot know. (p.31)

Lecture 7

1/7One must, today, bring together the beginning and the end of the mental life.The middle section is unseen and invisible from the beginning as well as from the end.

To analyze a thing is fine, but that does not mean to know it,and to analyze means to “kill” it, to draw a conclusion about it.To analyze means to doubt.(p.2)

2/7To doubt means to have divine power, to kill, and to have divine power means also the power to bring back to life, i.e. when we validate, practice, and teach ideas.

3.Children(and perhaps adults) need to be turned in the right direction, otherwise they become delinquent.

One must become absorbed by the first 4 commandments (for circulation of thought), so that in taking the next step (doubt) one understands that this must be done seriously, as a sacred event. Mental processes reflect our spiritual movement toward our destiny. p.6Those people who deserve admiration are those who change the direction of humanity.

4.To take the trodden path (in difficult decisions), to apply common sense thoughtlessly, is cheap and lazy.TO THINK FOR ONE’S SELF IS HARD WORK, TO ACT ON THOSE THOUGHTS IS ALWAYS RISKY. Most of life is living the thoughts of others. (RF – this is not bad because we don’t have time to reinvent reality when this is unnecessary.)

5.Infollowing the thoughts of others, one aspect of our lazy thinking is to oversimplify ideas, to take them out of context and disconnect them from their author. Out-of-context ideas are worthless distortions. ERH cites the example of USA in the thirties, where the bankers had no idea what to do. This was when many of FDR’s welfare programs were instigated and strongly criticized by these same. Not to see these New Deal measures in this context, as we tend to do today, completely distorts their meaning and usefulness.

6.Divine power is not only represented by the ability to doubt; to decide when to kill and when to give life is reflective of what we do every day.We raise animals, then kill and eat them. TO KNOW WHEN TO CONTRADICT ONE’S SELF is also part of divine doubting.

God is the unity of our contradictions.And you cannot live with any man unless you and he can agree that you are free to contradict what you said yesterday, and to do it peacefully and honorably. (p.17)

7.We must not have too much faith in ourselves.To do so means we don’t need God. To have faith in one’s self (i.e. self reliance) “…lasts until the next bankruptcy.” p.18

To doubt, to really doubt, seriously, is to rise to the level of the person whose thoughts one is doubting, to wrestle with angels so to speak. To doubt seriously is the only route to developing one’s individuality.

8.The next two commands for mental development are protest and wait.Doubt precedes protest.Doubt is either of one’s self or of the world, or obviously some combination of the two. And our doubts are constantly changing because the world (social) is changing. To wholly doubtone’s self is to go into deep despair of one’s courage.To doubt the world is to go into deep arrogance.

The highest doubt is of the existence of the God, the power that makes the world and us one. Doubt of God is comprehensive; to think of a new hypothesis of your own that would underlie a creative act, or certainly to doubt our ability to be creative, to doubt our ability to keep peace with our neighbor and doubtthe good will of the other fellow to keep peace with us – all of this is to doubt God.

9.In sum, doubt has the purpose of settling the issues you lovedAre you in love (either with another, or with some cause), and can you make others love you?

People always think as though their thought rules the world.It doesn’t. It always is mediated through this very great filter; (doubt).(p.25)

10.Constant doubters are just as extreme as the worst tyrants.Scientists who cannot relate to people, who treat everything and everyone as a “thing” are anexample.

Love is a compound of total doubt and total bliss, of the agreeable and disagreeable, of slavery and freedom.Love is the sum of all emotions. To be so split in mind and body, temporarily, is normal. Doubt and to analysis are permissible intermediaries, temporary suspensions of one’s unity.

We must doubt as part of the process of growing from one stage to another in our lives. To do this is against the grain of our lives; it reconciles our present or former beliefs with what we must (or are about) to become.

…when you are really desperate.When your doubt hits you hard, then you must know that this is nothing but life itself appearing to you from its two aspects of life lived and life to come.And both have to find their lawyer inside of you, their advocate.

As long as you know it, then you can doubt anything.Something is right formerly, and something has to be right tomorrow.That’s your real question. (p.28,29)

11.Thus, fruitful doubting is the process of change, at that crucial time of before and after, when our sense of identity disappears in the sense of a realization that we can no longer be what we were, but are not yet what we must become. It is the eternal process in all lives of new beginnings, which bring on new endings, of the Phoenix rising from the ashes, of resurrection and death, of our lives beginning all over again.

Lecture – 8

Doubt – the beginning of maturity and the 5th commandment for thought:

1/8The doubter is always a protester and a sufferer. To doubt means to stick one’s neck out, and this is especially difficult when one doubts commonly held values.To doubt is to take exception to some rule. To rule means to put the rule before the exception. Thus, to teach is both to doubt and to rule at different times.

2.The doubter can never succeed unless he/she learns to stand alone, to become an exception to the rule.

The doubter can never succeed in disabusing another of his strongly held ideas. For example, one could prove logically that a person (say a humanist) never practices humanism, but rather, lives by faith, love, and hope- but he will never admit this.

The humanist believes he is an “independent” thinker, self-made, and that dialogue benefits (circulates) for others, but not himself. (p.4) He tends to claim that all people are “good,” that criminal acts are accidents of a situation; he denies evil in the world.”We are all very evil…It’s better to admit it.” (p.7)

3.Persons who do not doubt their own thoughts at times, do not really wish to know the truth. ERH claims that most people hate the truth because it is often too painful. Likewise, the humanist also does not really seek the truth; no one does who is not a doubter of his own most coveted values.

We all carry doubts about ourselves inside us, if we will only admit it.We suffer shame, bashfulness, hypocrisy, fear, and vanity inside ourselves.THE ONLY TIME WE ACT TRULY AS INDIVIDUALS IS WHEN WE OVERTHROW THE RULES AROUND US AND RISK STANDING UP TO TRADITION. p.9In this instance, one declines to repeat what others do.

We do not exist (mentally) when we are born, we only become individuals in our own right when we begin to doubt conventions.

4.To doubt truth, then, is also to possibly learn by experience that our doubts were wrong, reinforcing a traditional truth.This step is necessary for true learning, of course. For example,one may practice monogamy out of habit, but only when one will stand up and declare, from practice, that it better fulfills life, will the practice be reinstituted every generation. To doubt truth in this way is not a negative, but rather a positive.One has demonstrated ability to learn and change with experience.

5.The doubter, by taking upon himself the risk of sinning, also acquires the first capacity for becoming a saint. How to transform sin into sanctityis your and my problem. (p.11,12)

For instance, to elope and live together without legal recognition may break the law; but then, if the marriage lasts 40 or 50 years a law has been reestablished. In this instance the man may say to the girl’s parents, “I eloped with your girl because you are just excessively strict, and we have to start a new life.” He may not be believed today, but will be tomorrow.

6.   I believe so that I may understand. (Anselm)

All great advances in life originate with doubters who are willing to live by their doubts, to say “I believe.”And this is to risk being a sinner. THIS IS WHY CHRISTIANITY ALLOWS REDEMPTION.To be redeemed is to doubtthe reason of advancing our knowledge and our models for behavior. To realize guilt.

To live this way is to become a person, an individual, to achieve a step in developing one’s soul, to acquire personal power in the process of renewing our life. This type of action renews the community as well, in the long run.

7.We are given life by our community.We first take orders from our parents, and our older brothers and sisters, and from authorities in the community.To be told is not acting in the first person singular, it is the second person singular.Only when we begin to doubt do we act in the first person.

We are, in this sense, acting as stages of grammar; to accept a command, “you” or “thee,” is second person. To doubt is first person, we say then “I”, believe.

8.Physical pain is abnormal and we avoid it, but mental suffering is a basic part of life that must be tolerated.All great inventors and thinkers have suffered the lag between the advancement of their new beliefs and the acceptance thereof. This is a gestation period for the community, as necessary as the wintering seed in the ground before spring flowering.ALL TRUE ADVANCES IN THOUGHT REQUIRE THIS TYPE OF SACRIFICE.

9.Time-span!There is a long time between being a “you” and acquiring the power to say “I.”There is a long time between being a student and a teacher, between listening to authority and being an authority.In mental life, the future always imposes itself on the present, driving the present in a basic way. We will not always (or should not always) be what we are at this moment.We should strive to become a future better person. The present and future are thus always in tension. If one lives one’s life only following the thinking of others,never doubting, one does not create a real future for himself. One remains spiritually stagnant.

Lecture-9

1/9People, with rare exceptions, don’t want to see or tell the truth for whatever the reason, weakness, or unwillingness to face the pain. We often know, down deep what is wrong with ourselves, but we don’t face up to it. No longer does the confessional seem to serve the purpose of having us face up to it. THE POINT IS THAT IT TAKES GREAT MORAL COURAGE TO SEEK AND FACE THE TRUTH AND ACT ON IT WHEN APPROPRIATE.

There are many “enablers” to our blindness, psychoanalysts, palmists, graphologists, ministers, bar-tenders all help us avoid the truth, or make money off our willingness avoid it.

2.What is the sequence of public acceptance and why is doubtingso painful?1) The doubter is usually thought a fool, 2) others may say, “He didn’t discover it, someone else did” (reminds us of the adage, “No one is a prophet in his own land,” and 3) eventually others believe: “I knew it all along, there’s nothing new in that idea.” In other words, one is not taken seriously, or one is plagiarized, or denied originality.One only rarely gets credit for one’soriginality.

3.One must not mistake “newness” for significance.It is important to say something that is true, that is important in some context, and to say it for the first time.It may be important to tell one’s best friend, even, that he has bad breath.But one must do it correctly, in the right context and at the right time (when he is willing to listen).It is the same in proposing to a girl, or seeking a job, or attempting to influence the group.

4.Once one gains a reputation as a listener, as a thinker, and as a speaker of the truth, one begins to mature and become influential.One gains the reputation of rising above mere opinion.And one must also be willing to be quoted. “The whole difference between the devil and God is only this: that when you speak divinely, you are ready to be quoted.” (p.5)

5.Other facets of promulgating circulation of useful thought: OF RULING AND TEACHING.Veracity and verification.Veracity means one is willing to be quoted, willing to stand behind one’s statements. Verification comes with experience, with applying and testing the usefulness of an idea. Both are necessary in order to earn the right to be listened to and taken seriously.

Thus, truth splits into an subjective element (veracity), and an objective one (verification).

At times, one may come to believe something perhaps intuitively or believe that something must become truth, such as honesty. One may be willing to live the idea, and stand behind his words, but not have time to verify, leaving that to others.THE POINT IS, TO ESTABLISH TRUTH AND PROGRESS IN THE COMMUNITY ALL THREE STEPS MUST BE TAKEN, to speak out and have others to listen, to stand behind one’s speech, and finally to subject it to verification.

6.IT IS CRUCIAL TO UNDERSTAND THAT ALL TRUTHS FROM THE PAST MUST BE REINVENTED BY US ALL IN THE COURSE OF OUR MATURING.Thus, one must doubt the old truths, to re-establish them, or to prove them inoperable at some given point in time.Also, in the process of renewing old truths,meaning is given to them throughliving them out, being skeptical, and re-establishing their validity.One may believe one has discovered a new truth, only later to discover it is out of the past. This is often the process of renewal.

7.One must not refrain from speaking out something that is perhaps not understandable to the listener, if it is the truth.The listener must receive the truth, then learn its meaning.

We are all children throughout our lives, in the sense of having to constantly learn something new that we had not known before.One cannot begin this learning process by only dwelling on what the “child” or novice might understand.It is essential in the learning process to initially take new information on faith, follow it (assuming the speaker is valid or authoritative), and then verify it when possible.

And no member of any one age can afford to mask his own style, his own way of thinking by hiding it from the others.It is impossible to let the child believe that the parents just believe like the child.And it is impossible for the parents to let the child know that it is not allowed to think like a child. (p.13)

8.The child is not prepared to doubt, and must not be led to believe doubting acceptable.Only upon maturity does one become capable of doubting usefully. Anyone might doubt arbitrarily, stupidly, or destructively.That is not real doubting, it is mere ego operating.

Emotional states, such as doubt, or cynicism, or obedience or loyalty should not be exaggerated.They are passing moods and only partly related to finding truth.

You begin to be a person when you admit inside yourself this great ambition to understand what you have been told, which is very difficult; to speak up when it doesn’t seem to be true; and to verify the two things – that which you have kept, and that which you have found, in your own application to your own business…p.15

9.Education and language – carriers of the spirit

Education is enormously expensive in any context, at any age.The community cannot afford to educate us for our own personal use per se. It is assumed therefore that we are thus obligated to receive and circulate our thought for the benefit of the community.

It is important to distinguish between “speaking” and “talk.”We talk all throughout the day, about weather, about chores, etc. To speak is to need to influence others on some significant issue, to commit one’s self on some issue (i.e. marriage, or in giving evidence.)Only much more occasionally do we truly speak by this definition, as compared to mere talking. Talk is less than speech!

“When the president of the United States says to Russia, `We’ll go to Berlin,’ he speaks.In the mean time, we all have talked about the possibilities about the encounter with the Russians. (p.22)

“As long as you think that your thought is just your private business, you don’t see this wonderful universe of the mind in which at every moment there is either right teaching or wrong teaching.Right ruling, or wrong ruling.And your talk is the premeditation to replace anything wrong in the teaching and ruling of the world by the right.That’s why it is so important that you should see that your preparation for the mind — mental life at this moment leads into some stream that is streaming all the time, because all the time the world is ruled and taught.There’s no cessation. You are the contributory stream, but you are brought up to this terrible fiction that what you think is your private business, and that it has no consequences.” (p.23)

10.  “Whether you decide you are (in a) blind alley (in your thoughts), or whether you decide that the world is waiting to be refreshed by your more correct and more recent, more vigorous speech makes all the difference for the treatment –for the way you will treat your own mind.If it is all just within this skull of yours, immured, then you have no reason to make any effort…If it is only your private property, then the children only must be kept happy.But if learning, as I told you, is the promise of your one day teaching, then you have to learn something. (p.23)

11.Just as our umbilical cord at pre-birth connects us with our physical heritage, our mind is an umbilical cord to the mental life of the community. Ultimately, we should strive to become a teacher and ruler in the most general sense (even of a small group, or of our household), and this “umbilical cord” to the community spirit is maintained. Thought is circulated to preserve the vital spirit of the community, just as our blood circulated to vitalize our physical bodies.

12.We believe that to have a mind and use it is a natural phenomenon.IT ISN’T. WE DON’T NEED LANGUAGE IN THE COMPLEX SENSE TO SURVIVE PHYSICALLY AS ANIMALS DO. WE COULD GET ALONG WITH GRUNTS AND PURRING.BUT FOR HUMANKIND TO PROGRESS MEANS THAT IT BECOMES SUPER-NATURAL, BEYOND NATURE, LEARNING FROM PAST GENERATIONS AND PASSING ON OUR KNOWLEDGE.THAT CAN ONLY BE DONE THROUGH THE SPIRIT AND THOUGHT, THROUGH SPEECH AND ITS CIRCULATION, IS THE ONLY METHOD BY WHICH WE BECOME HUMAN, “SUPERNATURAL.”

13.Referring to the difference between speech and talk, we can only truly speak and expect to be listened to when the spirit moves us, which is to say, not all the time.

14.Different divisions of labor means different roles in the community.The artist is the eternal child,describing his/her emotional response to experience of the world as he finds it. He functions in the present always, but not in the future. Artists are thus untiringly plastic. They are impressed by the miraculousness of the world, accepting it as is.

The soldier is untiringly protesting, resisting, contradicting and thus untiringly hard in his attempt to change the world. The priest attempts to overcome prejudices (inflexible attitudes), the plastic nature of artists,or the hard boiled rigidity of the soldier. He cares not whether what he uses is old or new. Old or new makes no difference. Prejudice is the opposite; it takes the same approach constantly. In the circulation of thought, one must see the appropriate method at the appropriate time.

15.(RF – This notion of the priest, the soldier, and artist represents condensations of not ten but what he later expanded into twelve “commandments” or “tones of the spirit” by 1961. What he called the artist represented the four qualities descriptive of both childhood and one’s behavior when entering a new field. In both instances one is the novice, where the role is to listen, read, learn, and play (experiment). Then in the next stage where “idea” is merged with action; this then is what he calls the role of the soldier here, the fighter. This role combines the actions of doubter, critic, protester, and sufferer.

Finally he defines the role of “priest,” to combine the roles of leader or legislator, teacher, prophet, and bestower.The three primary roles then represent the main functions in the circulation of thought and spirit. Of course, any thinking person at one time or another participates in all 12 functions, but the primary roles are the most emphasized by these persons.That is, the beginning stage of new thought (represented by the image of the child), the active stage of putting into practice in the community (the adult stage) and the final stage of “elder.”)

…everybody who wants to obey God’s will must find out what in his own good time is needed most.At this moment I think in this country teaching is needed, and saintliness is needed, much more than politicians. (p.31)

16.Finally ERH points out that, at every moment of life there is some activity that requires mentality and action. At each time when a decision needs to be made, someone’s idea must be used, someone must lead, must speak out, must educate, must fight. In the right sequence of actions, the 10 commandments are to be employed. THERE IS NEVER A VACUUM.

Lecture – 10

1/10The meaning of significant acts is not visible or apparent except in retrospect. This is one reason why most TV and especially sensationalism is so devoid of meaning, so inconsequential. Important decisions are identified by being followed up through sustained actions that demonstrate that meaning.Thought by itself is impotent.

“Jesus was invisible before he was resurrected.”

2.In a like way, differences in Christian sects are inconsequential, what is important is, “does humankind have a future.”Catholic, Protestant, Fundamentalist notwithstanding. The seed of potential is sown in the dark inside of the spirit, and only becomes known (outside) in time.

Here again he supports the notion that there is no heaven separate from earth. “God created one world only.”

Values can only be represented by those who have gone before us; only looking back can we discern their meaning. TRUTH AND OTHER ABSTRACTIONS MUST BE EMBODIED IN CONCRETE EXPERIENCE – OTHERWISE THERE IS NO UNDERSTANDING.

Goodness is the quality of a man, or of a woman, or of a human being.Truthfulness, the same. Otherwise we don’t know what it is…Whenever you use an adjective, it has to be derived from a noun.And the noun is a living (character). And we have nothing else to go by. (p.7)

3.The history of our schools, colleges and universities is based on the idea of regenerating the 10 commandments of learning, on the notion that teachers must beget students and all values must have forbearers. [Dartmouth is “Greek” in spirit because students live together, their associations based on an unintellectual communion. The University of Paris and others where students do not live in have communionbased only on the intellectual.

Doubt, the 5th commandment, is the basis for all higher learning. Thus, the 10 commandments (later to be called “the 12 tones of the spirit” are the basis for educating the population. (pp.8-10)

4.The evolution of new thought goes through three stages.Stage 1 of cycle: the promulgator of a new idea stands alone, nobody to back him up. Socrates is put to death, Nietzsche goes insane because nobody understood their new thought. This is the plight of all original thinkers. Stage 2, a small group makes a science of the idea (organizes it). Stage 3, the idea becomes commonplace, the science is accepted and finds its way into examinations. (p.13)

So the cycle of new ideas, first, one, next a few, next many, and finally commonplace (all).This cycle ERH asserts is universal for all new thought. For example, the Reformation was the point when theology became commonplace, the Bible was translated into the vernacular.”To have, to begin a new cycle takes the whole life of a person…” (p.17)

5.In the next few pages ERH shows how different stages of the cycle are emphasized by the culture of four countries. In France the individual (expert) is venerated, in Germany the small group of experts (scholars). In England learning (for the elite) is venerated, and in America, the single genius, the few scholars, and education is assumed to be within reach of everyone (and therefore none are venerated. In each of these countries, the (select) cannot sin.(Except in America, where only the athletic hero,or man-in-the-street cannot sin.) These values reflect to a great extent the mental life in each of these four cultures.

6.The so called “Western” countries are defined less by geographic boundaries, but rather a spiritual life – which incidentally is in danger of extinction. This is because no one country embraces the whole cycle. p.24All cultures attempt to achieve life everlasting, but the vital circulation of thought in Western Society is in danger because each of the four countries specializes and therefore isolates itself from the complete process of the regeneration of thought.

Lecture – 11

1/11These stages must be carried out in sequence to define a completeness by which the progress of thinking can be achieved.Any break in the chain precludes growth.The danger in these countries is that they tend to venerate only one part of the chain. In America little is venerated but the common man, and this results in little respect for genius, scholarship, or education. Observe, for instance, the lack of respect teachers receive and how poorly public schools are funded.

2.We are called to action either by someone else, or by self-determination. By listening to and obeying either commands from others, or commands from inside us.Both are valid, but we must be sensitive to which we are doing and which the community needs.

The phrase “thank you” means someone else has done something for me, something I need and cannot do without. This illustrates our own thinking comes from outside us at times, producing “electricity in the brain.”Our independence is not an independence from others, but an independence to think, to be creative.

3.The point being that there are higher powers which may determine what we do, as opposed to our own will, higher powers being a calling, an authority, leadership, inspiration, intuition.

4.During the next several pages ERH provides numerous examples of the cultural traits of French, German, English, and Americans trapped in their narrow view of their culture as described above.

He applauds these differences, BUT WARNS, no one stage is complete in itself, and the fullness of life can only be realized where there exists an opportunity to realize the power of all. Example, physicists in Europe theorized about automobiles, while Ford made cars for “everyman.”No one in Europe thought of that!It is only the sum of the creativity–

The connection of the four countries that have produced what you call “Western Civilization.” (p.16)

And each country seems blind to the fact that its view of life is not universal, but only a part of the larger system. (p.18)

5.There is a time factor crucial to understanding the stages.It takes time for each stage to unfold. The more people to be influenced for change, the longer the time needed.”It takes 30 years to change a college,”or perhaps a lifetime of one person.

Lecture – 12

1/12To illustrate the “insane veneration” of individualism in America, of everybody for himself, and few ever acting for the community ERH cites the phenomenon of McCarthyism. Example, the Republican party in Wisconsin could not do anything about McCarthy (during the l950’s), although everyone thought he was a scoundrel. In England, the elite would never have allowed such individualism.

MAJORITY RULE, as in America (if and when practiced) is open to gross errors

because the majority is fickle and can change from one week to the next. Majority rule is impossible.

2.The basic principle working for minority rule is that only a minority of some type is willing to sacrifice, and the spirit of sacrifice is necessary to solve the difficult problems of society and social change. .

3.HOW DO WE LEARN TO APPRECIATE THE POSITIVE VALUE OF IDEAS OF OTHER GROUPS AND THEREFORE LEARN BY SEEING OURSELVES AS OTHERS SEE US? Obviously this is a significant need for all cultures.

One must live under the influence of another point of view for some time in order to get a feel for its advantages and disadvantages.Then and only then can one devise a system that includes the strengths of all.

4.ERH likens a decline in thought to “soil erosion” in wasteful farming.He calls it “soul erosion,” or mind erosion.To live only for one’s self would orient us to attend to our momentary passions, an attitude which is not only selfish, but destroys the future.Any future must rise with a community spirit, otherwise there is anarchy. Thus, the attitude venerating the”commonness” of the common thinker only is bound to destroy the community.

5.The phrase “thank you” means someone else has done something for me that I need and that cannot do without.What illuminates our own thinking comes from outside us, producing the “electricity of the brain” (inspiration).Our independence is not an independence from others, but an independence to think, to be creative.

6.Education, language, and a community at peace:

Education is a public activity, to prepare students to participate in the community, which is to say, to sacrifice for the community!The community does not exist to make people independent or happy, it is the other way around. And happiness, or a sense of fulfillment, comes as a side effect.

Community peace is brought about by a cooperative spirit.Cooperation and participation in the community in turn is brought about by a mutual respect for the integrity (sacredness) of language.

7.Aware, intelligent, sensitive people can see that the common occurrence in the community is that most of the time its condition goes from better to worse. It is the great thinkers, the prophets who are willing to act on their knowledge and who to sacrifice, who to endow future communities with a regenerative spirit,who are able to turn this situation around.

Lecture – 13

1/13The idea goal for Dartmouth College, after four years, is to know what to do, how to act, and what to read, “…and how to keep going with your reading, because it’s a long life.” (p.7)Reading cannot be accidental (this is the fourth level or commandment).

2.It is too easy to allow ourselves to drift in some backwater of life, spiritually undeveloped.Sin is embedded in an unwillingness to participate in the community. One must learn to identify the “type of waters they swim in.”Swimming (living) in brackish, shallow, or putrid or stagnant water suffocates; one is cut from the stream of vital life.

ERH claims we are the best informed people in the world, but we lack wisdom about the meaning of that information. We lack basic knowledge, and most of all, have not been taught the 10 COMMANDMENTS OF THOUGHT DEVELOPMENT.

3.Movements rise and fall. We must be aware of these pulses of human endeavor.

The same fact can strike us in four ways, as a curiosity, as presenting hard work for us, as a need for education, or as a new enthusiasm and inspiration.

“What I owe you, is to tell you that your own life must bestride all four of these dimensions.” (p.18)

4.Primary Dimensions of Thought

The life in the community involves three basic dimensions: theology (unifying our thought), philosophy (ordering our thought), and sociology (acting on our thought). These questions in antiquity were represented by plurality, many gods, many worlds, and many peoples.TODAY (and since 1100) we accept the notion that there is one god (or none), one world (that is, one science for describing it) and one humankind. (p.18,19)

The latter (one mankind) is not commonly resolved yet, but we in this country tend to believe that the characteristics of all people are the same.

The “believer” says there is one God and he looks down on me, the Atheist says, “I look down on god, I create god from my rationalism.”

WE WILL NEVER HAVE A SCIENCE OF SOCIETY UNLESS WE CAN SAY ONE GOD, ONE WORLD, ONE HUMANKIND. p.20

5.Anselm founded the science of theology, reached, not by faith alone, but also by logic. (p.22,23) Abelard wrote the first book on theology.The revolutionary idea was that knowledge of God could be achieved outside the “faith.”

The ancient gods of humanity were inventions of mankind.

Anselm started the new theology by saying that one living God of Christianity was so much alive that He always was greater than any concept of God developed by any of the believers so far; that the first statement of God, or about God in theology therefore had to be: God is greater than your concept of God. (p.25)

He concluded this because all people who came to confessionwere sinners and needed absolution in order to remain functional in the community.The argument is:

that if a man has the courage to be — that is, to accept his own follies and weaknesses — he will find that he can be forgiven, but he has to accept them.He cannot say, “I am faultless.” And he cannot say, “God is narrow.”He has to admit the two paradoxes of the Anselmian theology: that your sins are as scarlet red, and that God is greater than all mind can register about His judicial, so to speak, capacity, and His mercy.” (p.26)

6.In other words, the beginning point of this logic is that God is a dynamic being which is always greater than your ability to understand experience.

The difference between theology and religion can be described this way: Anyone who has lived 20 years, who has been cared for, loved, taught language, passed examinations, been spoken to (given orders), has believed (in the existence of the world, of society, and of love).He has believed for 20 years. THAT’S RELIGION.

“It’s your religion that a teacher in Dartmouth College is not going to cheat you, or to do you special harm, or disqualify you for the future.That’s all faith.” (p.28,29)

Theology then is the science of those values we are willing to sacrifice for. There are many religions, some weak, some incomplete, some non-regenerative. Science is a religion to many, as are love, lust, money, or power.

Lecture – 14

Principles of Science and Christian Theology

1/14Anselm, Abelard, and Thomas Aquinas heraldeda new age, they changed the meaning of theology from a science of the gods, to a knowledge of one living God. The difference is fundamental because it meant a change from the gods as abstractions, to a God which was manifest through human behavior; this in turn meant that the state of society was to be controlled by humans. This knowledge was brought about by analyzing our doubts about ourselves.Doubt, despair, despondency has enlarged our vision of God. p.2

2.It is not possible to love all people, as we are admonished to do in a democracy.Many people have closed themselves to listening and learning how to be humane contributors to the community.

…the males in this country have lost the integrity of their minds.The women have lost the integrity of their bodies, and they (both men and women) go fumbling on.They seemingly are alive, but they aren’t alive, because the greatest powers that bind them into the process of the human spirit is already killed, already dead.Absolutely dead.They seem to live, but they live like weeds.They live from birth to death, but who cares?They are burdens on the community. (p.3)

They all have a religion (one’s religion is whatever one will sacrifice for), but these chosen religions are “second rate,”weak, inadequate, or the religions of the devil. They destroy the regenerative spirit of the community). IN SHORT, THEY ARE RELIGIONS THAT PUT THE CREATIVE PART OF ONE’S SPIRIT FOR SALE.Note how, for instance, the values of commerce determine so many major decisions, especially political decisions.

Examples: resistance to raising the minimum wage because it “costs too much,” we can’t afford clean air, or water because it costs too much; destroying the living environment for wild animals is justified because it creates jobs; we will not tax ourselves to repair schools, roads, bridges, or to enforce laws, or protect our national parks.We are the richest country in the world, but we make many judgements on the basis of dollar value RATHER THAN WHAT WILL CREATE A BETTER FUTURE FOR THE COMMUNITY.

The religion of commerce seems to dominate in this and other countries.It is this type of religion to which ERH refers.

As soon as he (any man) begins to think that the creative part of you and me, is for sale, and he treats me as somebody who can be bribed…anybody who declines to call a spade a “spade” and says all men are venial, all men are for sale, everybody can be talked into anything — he is the devil. (p.4)

3.Our Will to Power

ERH goes on to suggest that the plumber needs power to fashion a steel pipe, or the leader to govern needs power, but the power of the spirit required to lead any group into the future comes from other things.Any elected official who wants to be elected to acquire power should be voted out of office.

Power without function and accountability always leads to monopolies and dictatorships.

The religious experience begins with the prayer, “Thy will be done” and not “My will be done.”The prayer of the man who seeks power is, “Give me that, so that I can do my will.” (p.7)

4.You are your mother’s son.You are your father’s son. You are your children’s future father and begetter….These are the things that mold your will.You must learn what to will. (p.7)

Power varies. In one situation you will and should have power, in another, not. Power can disappear at a moment’s notice . Danger increases power, and dictators are necessary in emergencies. No rule follows in all situations.

5.Other aspects of our experience: at times we are right and our will should be done, we are in tune with the “divine,” and superior to a situation.At others we are wrong and need to be opposed as inferior to a situation.

Religion is the way in which you split yourself into service, or obedience, or suffering, or passivity, and acceptance of what comes to you, and obstinacy, and upheaval, and rebellion.This religion every man has…Where is God? Partly He’s in us, partly He’s against us.

Some experience is not what it seems to be; natural science centers around this type of experience, that nothing is what it seems in the world of things. All natural science looks behind appearances.

6.The point ERHis driving at is that when any action functions properly we need no theories, we just accept it for what it produces.But the moment things go wrong, we need theories to help us take action to correct (as far as possible) phenomena, or at least understand them better.The weather, for instance.”Science is always the answer to an experience of incompetency. Religion, as long as it functions, doesn’t need theology.” (p.11)

7.Science begins with prophets of doom. Marx predicted the end of free enterprize. And Republicans, terrified, especially after the 1929 crash, have made the state of the economy in the US into a collective enterprise.Therefore we no longer have free, private enterprize in this country, we have collective enterprize. Economics is a questionable science!

Prophets of doom serve the purpose of warning society, of rendering it capable of inoculating itself against the danger.This is why we control inflation so closely.THERE CAN BE NO SCIENCE OF SOCIETY THAT CAN’T PREDICT ITS OWN.In Biblical terms:

What the Bible always says: they have ears and can’t hear; they have eyes and can’t see.All Americans have eyes and can’t see at this moment….You boast of its statistics, of its productivity, of its wealth, of its standard of living. Don’t you see its weaknesses? (p.18)

ERH asserts in many essays that at present there is no “recognized” science of society. Science in any field demonstrates its viability when it shows it can cope with any crisis. (p.12)

You may have a science of politics when the first sentence of this politics book will read, “All societies come to the end of their rope.There is no state that will not be superseded by another state.”(p.14)

When we foresee downfalls of societies it means we might prevent it from happening. So science is a vaccination against defeat.

8.It was the breakdown of the church, a realization of its weaknesses that created a science of theology.What was the doubt in the year 1100 which motivated the creation of theology?A realization that man was so weak that no God would tolerate him.Therefore the existence of God was thrown into doubt. Theology is useful only as long as mankind despairs of itself.Psychoanalysis has been a substitute for theology only for the last 60 years.”…psychoanalysis is the negative aspect of theology with the answer, “There is no answer; there is no God.”(p.21)

9.Any science always needs three persons, or stages to be created: 1) the person who cries out passionately, “THERE IS A PROBLEM, I AM IN DESPAIR, I CAN’T STAND IT ANY LONGER.” 2) The person who hears the cry and comforts him, and cries out in turn for help. “Where is the expert?”3) Then comes that endeavor of the human spirit to inform the comforter and give him the competent answer for the special despair.These stages apply to all sciences;”…the growing forest, the forester on the spot, and the science of forestry.” (p.23)or in medicine, thepatient, the doctor, and the medical researcher for the disease.

And in church, the minister does not have to know theology as long as he/she is successful in helping members of the congregation. But when things break down, the theologian (theoretician) is to be called in.

The church lived happily without theology for 900 years, then its load of contradictions began to break it down, causing doubts.The whole history of Christianity, ERH asserts, is rife with contradictions. There are four Gospels and they all contradict each other.ONLY CHRISTIANITY ADMITS TO THIS CONDITION. No other religion has more than one Gospel, not Chinese, not Japanese, or Islam.

10.Thus, from the Bible, “the letter killeth.” (Our spoken contradictions). And therefore we must find the common spirit among these contradictions. (p.27,8)

ERH eloquently describes how this “Christian religion of despair” is a religion of progress, of creating a future by way of understanding the common denominators of the exceptions to the rules. For instance, one cannot protect one’s children at the expense of other children in the community. One must find balance. As situations change, rules change. Scientific principles change as new evidence requires. But this does not destroy science, because it is the spirit of the scientists that persists.In a like way, principles of a social order will change; what was right yesterday is not right today or will not be tomorrow.It is the love of people, a faith in their spirit that will build on changes.Thus, science and faith are not contradictory, they require each other; the scientists has faith in his method even though he knows that today’s theories will be disproven tomorrow.

11.Abelard was the first to apply this concept in Christianity; he discovered the principle of scientific progress.One makes progress by forgetting (setting aside) what has been learned,that is no longer relevant.

In this sense, any scientist must be willing to dismiss the theories of his own time if evidence and his logic indicates this must be done to understand some new event.

LECTURE – 15

1/15The many contradictions between different groups in the Catholic church at the turn of the first millennium motivated Abelard and Anselm (of Canterbury) to organize the many “ideas” about Catholicism in these groups into some unity. In other words, create a scienceor theology to unify church doctrine. WHAT CAME OUT OF THIS WAS THE UNIVERSITIES OF THE MIDDLE AGES.

2.Whenever there exists contradictions between different units of any practice, or generally speaking, whenever contradictory data appears in any field, it means that present theories are inadequate to explain those contradictions.THIS MEANS THAT A NEW, MORE BROAD FRAMEWORK OR THEORY NEEDS TO BE DEVELOPED TO UNIFY AND THEREFORE EXPLAIN THOSE CONTRADICTIONS – rendering them compatible. Such a new framework exceeds the previous conceptions.A classic example of this in modern science would be Einstein’s new theory of relativity, which assumed a new conception of the universe.

The primary effect of such new thinking is to indicate what, of the old theories, explains only unique events, and what is to be retained as generalized knowledge.

3.This is precisely what happened in the Catholic church.That which was previously “known” had to be replaced by what was presently unknown.

Obviously, the pioneers in this process are always thought to be crazy or heretics, regardless of the field of study.

The man who’s not polite, who is tough, and gruesome, and quarrelsome, is probably the man who has the real ideas. (p.3)

The first principle of new thinking is:

Progress is done at the risk of abandonment, abandon the old securities.You cannot have progress without sacrificing safety. (p.5)

The second is the principle of higher logic. Relativity and calculus in mathematics represent such jumps in logic.

4.Such a jump in the Catholic church at this time (1100) began with an attack on the logic of the Aristotelian syllogism: all men are mortals, and Socrates is mortal; therefore he must die.THE NEW TWIST WAS TO RAISE THE QUESTION, “What about the fact that Socrates’ spirit didn’t die?”But physically he is dead!

THIS IS THE MEAT OF PARADOX, AND WHEN THIS OCCURS THE CONTRADICTION BECOMES IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND.Socrates is both dead and alive.Reconciling such a paradox creates new and important insight into our understanding of experience.Both statements are true, but seem to contradict. We both love mankind and hate mankind. The soldier must kill the enemy, and also be compassionate toward him. (International code speaks against shooting prisoners of war.) In this example, the solder is asked also act like a civilian at the same time. Individually, we are sinners and saints at the same time.

5.ERH points out that we can grow only if we can understand such paradox in social science. “This is Abelard’s discovery, that the same thing may be true and not true at the same time….A university,…is a place where at the same time opposite truths are taught on the same subject.” (p.10)

6.Any action that is to be fruitful can only function when one point of view as to method is employed.One point of view at a time.As is indicated above, life is never so simple that one rule will apply at any given situation. Therefore, when several methods or points of view prevail, only one can be used at a time.

We can conclude also that any single point of view is enriched (rendered more understandable) when one is conscious of an opposing view. Plato calls for Aristotle, conservatism calls for liberalism (no change calls for change). THIS, ERH CALLS HIGHER LOGIC. p.11

We know that it is the heart of life, that our minds are so tyrannical, so absolutist, that the mind must be opposed by mind.

It is no merit to have unanimity in mental cases.The hearts must be united, and the minds must oppose each other…Your heart must be united, but not your mind.

You remember…that soul and mind are totally different. Here you discover the practical need for dialectics,…One person saying, “This illness comes from this reason,” and the other saying the very opposite.And they must not stone each other, but they must invite opposition in the mind.As long as their souls remain united…The soul is one, the heart one.The hearts of man must remain one. (p.12)

Lecture – 16

1.To become human, to rise above the purely animal state, we must attempt to find a true conception of the world, and of our experience.One early step in this process is distinguishing the characteristics of phenomena so that we can find some modicum of order to understand our experience.Otherwise we end up with any number of mental complexes and frustrations that create barriers to any fulfilling life.

Classification is fundamental to the process of “ordering.” The most fundamental events in our lives are our own nature, the nature of things, and the nature of the powers that control nature. Another way of putting these questions would be, the nature of humankind, of things, and of God.The second step is to identify not only general characteristics but also uniqueness of events, and to ascertain the meaning of each as related to our daily decision making. For instance, what are the universal qualities of all humans, and what is unique about Abraham Lincoln, orJimmy Smith; what do we carry into the future and how do we interpret events in the present?

To classify “rightly” is always controversial, but controversy, when entered into in the spirit of finding truth, is the essential key to growth and change. All important issues are controversial by definition until some modicum of agreement settles the issue (at least for a time).

2.The true university must bring out the opposing (controversial) logic to any problem.We progress only when, confronted with powerful, convincing logic and evidence against our own beliefs, we are willing to renounce those principleswe hold to be most obvious. This is accomplished in a spirit of acceding to a “voluntary ignorance.” Willingness to doubt is crucial for finding truth.

For example, when Max Planck in 1900 said there was no gradual increase in quantity, he opposed common logic. His opposing view had never been investigated before,but “quanta” bunches are now commonly accepted as true. He developed a higher logic to explain both apparent gradual increase and quantum increases in energy.

3.We must constantly remind ourselves that growth comes only with our capability to change, to become free of our own out-dated dogmatism and prejudices. A celebration of Easter is the celebration of the notion of the ability to change, to be reborn.

Those who do not dare to disagree with the opinions of the majority have no hope in achieving progress…”The higher logic consists of a higher step than that of the syllogism. In a true university, paradoxical truth must be taught, for it is only by this method that progress can take place.”(pp. 5,6)

“…By abandoning the old securities and sacrificing safety, the new principles can be brought forth…Each side (in a debate) is convinced that it is wholly right and denies the existence of a grain of truth in the opposing argument.The result is a distortion of truth by each side….Disagreement is the heart of university life…Abelard discovered the same thing can be true and not true at the same time. (p.6)

The essence of this insight is thatevents may possess two apparently opposing qualities, the general and the particular.

4.Accurate classification is necessary in order to determine cause and effect. For instance, the French revolution represented the secularization of the University of Paris, which had begun as a Christian institution. The revolution was a “religious event, more than a political event.” (p.11-16)This secularization indicated a major shift in thinking in France at the time.

5.We often go astray in our thinking by over-generalizing which leaves us at best with only half-truths. Paradox occurs when we find contradictions in our explanations of events. Paradox then signals the need for some higher truth that will render opposing theories compatible.For instance, before 1950 the properties of light were seen to have two distinct properties, with no single theory rendering one compatible with the other.Eventually the broader theory evolved, integrating the two.

The Trinity is another paradox of two opposing, simultaneous truths so that at each moment we must think and act with three time-frames in mind -past, present, and future.

The Romans fought for their civil peace.And Christ fought for the future…the Jews represented the holy past…The university is an image of Christianity, of this paradox that the Father is right, and the Son is right, and the Holy Spirit is right, although we think they speak different truths. (p.7)

The Jews were with the Father, and therefore the Son is blasphemous.The Christians said they were with both Father and Son. And the Romans wanted civil peace in the present. “Not the Holy Spirit, but the good spirit of the Rotary Club” (i.e. some agreement that would maintain civil peace). All sides are right. That we must attempt to consider all three time frames in making significant decisions is the lesson. In practice, one or another may need to be emphasized, depending upon the situation. But establishing a unity (peace) across time is essential to progress.

Antigone’s situation is the same, i.e. both Antigone and Creon are right. ERH goes on to describe how the University of Paris was begun by Abelard in 1170 and incorporated in 1180. This institutionalization cast it into the political arena, and this in turn created a bureaucrat to whom Abelard must report. Abelard however, represented another school of thought opposing the government authority (Bishop of Paris). The paradox is, of course, that we must have stability in our thinking, yet be willing to doubt and change. In each of these cases, higher principles are to be found that unified the opposing authorities.

THIS WAS THE MAJOR CONTRIBUTION OF THE MEDIEVAL PRINCIPLE, that progress is established by allowing for opposing points of view. The University of Paris was the first formal manifestation of this new idea in the church.

6.The principle was not to allow anyone to hold a vested interest in his own view to the exclusion of other views. Thus, at the University of Paris, the archbishop was a life-time appointment, but the influence of Abelard (his first student became Pope Alexander III), eventuated in faculty being elected that the Bishop could not overrule.To this day the administration represents one point of view, usually opposed by faculty.Democracy lives by election, monarchy lives by inheritance.

7.It is a truism that any government or point of view BECOMES DISTORTED WHEN LEFT BY ITSELF, UNOPPOSED.Thus, everything needs to be open to doubt at some time.Government always becomes oppressive, and can only function humanely when checked.

8.The new Christian dogma, discovered at the time of the formation of the medieval university, was that evolution and growth occurs when apparent opposing truths are reconciled with the discovery of higher principles.

“…that new truth has to be discovered every moment…that although God created the world, man became free in the middle of time.”(at the birth of Jesus)(p.16-16)

Free, that is, by being allowed to correct error in thinking. By doubting. This principle is inherent to Christianity.

(RF -This phrase, “…became free in the middle of time,”in essence refers to the integrating characteristic of Christianity. That is, the recognition that the truths of opposing religions from the past were partial truths.And to invoke the powers of all of these truths freed humankind from the bondage of narrower points of view. ERH expands on this idea in another essay.)

9.Evidence and logic can establish laws of nature, but can never anticipate human actions because humankind is capable of change.

“…we are not to be deduced by logical reasons in our best quality of being new, of being somebody for the first time…In as far as you are capable of a new thought, you are a new creature.”Growth usually comes from the unexpected. (p.17)

We are thus not slaves of stimulus response (except at the lowest automatic elements of our nervous system)- our freedom is proven by new thought.

10.The second dogma of Christianity is the separation of mind and soul.Mind, the logical part of our thinking, is different from soul (that part of our psyche that motivates a decision and prompts action on that decision. This is because new thought conflicts, by definition, with our “old” common sense, from our old logic.IN OTHER WORDS, NEW LOGIC, A HIGHER, MORE COMPREHENSIVE LOGIC, IS AT WAR WITH OUR OLD HABITS OF THOUGHT, and therefore cannot derive from the same source as the old “mind.”One part of our being must overcome another part.It is natural for us to wish to agree with others, and at times difficult and even dangerous to disagree.To what extent would you avoid disagreeing with some authority with the power to destroy you? This (second dogma) implies the higher power or strength or courage it takes at times to change! (p.18)

11.The Augustinian definition of this principle runs:

In necessaries, unity; in doubtful, freedom — liberty; in all, charity.” (p.19)

In a school of higher learning this dictum must be the guide. In elementary school learning is largely by rote.The essence of the life of themind is contradiction and freedom, while still living together in peace.

The peace of mankind depends on chaotic and explosive power of diversification AND on the peace-making power of the human heart.Mind in conflict with love, an integration of both mind (your logic at war with the logic of another) and soul.

12.The social qualities necessary to carry out this principle are faith, hope and charity. These cannot be willed by us directly:

They either surround us, like the atmosphere, or like the water in which we swim, or they don’t…(p.22/16)

This is why, to become truly human, one must participate in society; one cannot learn to swim by standing on land.

13.Necessity, doubt, and faith (charity) become manifest in three ages of living: 1) the elder represents authority, necessity, determination of what must be learned, 2) middle age represents doubt, when “authority,” the old ways no longer work, and finally 3) the child symbolizes the acceptance of authority, and love, unifying both authority and doubt.These three elements – the child, the adult and the elder – establish the power of the whole human race to progress. Here is yet another dimension of the Trinity.

14.The Trinity is manifest in our levels of education.In the university is represented the three profiles (generations) necessary for the circulation of thought in the direction of human progress: authority, the fighter (of authority), and love; or the elder, the adult, and the child. These principles, in terms of professional roles carried on past formal schooling, are the priest, the soldier, and the artist. The priest represents the ultimate moral authority, the soldier (meaning the fighter for new ideas) is the doubter.The artist (ERH asserts) is child-like in his drive to express his emotional response to events, unconcerned with past or future.

In contrast to higher education, in the elementary school only two generations are represented; there is no distinction between authority and doubt, as the child has no logical basis to doubt.

15.Another Christian discovery was that, since humankind begins as an animal with only the CAPABILITY for rising above a purely animal state, new-borns must change not only physically and mentally, but spiritually as well. This capability for change occurs only through language, and when it occurs we say one begins the journey to “human.” In Christian terms this means capable of being creative (thinking for one’s self) and acting on one’s thought to participate in improving the community. Clearly, such evolution requires freedom to seek truth and act on it.

16.To acquire these “human traits” allows one to rise above “natural” pettiness, jealousy, greed, and cowardice, while engendering a potential for creativity, courage, willingness to sacrifice for the community.A community voluntarily at peace is evidence that these principles are being practiced that “…the word becomes flesh.”

…when the whole man — child, adult, and elder in you and me come to life together, the world is as new as on the first day of creation.Something tremendous happens. Cathedrals are built.Cities are built. Kingdoms — nations are rising. (p.30)

 

LECTURE – 17

1.The problem with education inAmerica today is that it is directionless; a common dogma is that education is good for its own sake. But the question arises, “What is to be its direction?” It concentrates on facts, on data, and even some analysis, but when there is analysis it is arbitrary.(RF – ala Whitehead, THE AIMS OF EDUCATION, 1923, p.18)In all levels of education there must be three elements:

1) Necessity and therefore authority, 2) Freedom to doubt andfight for new insights when the old ones no longer seem to explain our experience. 3) Faith – a willingness to obey, to accept authority (until the stage of doubt sets in.) These levels are representative of social roles – the elder, the adult, and the child – and also reflective of three time-spans – past, present, and future.

God is the power that makes us speak at this moment, andHe commands us to listen as well; and that gives us common understanding with each other.The goal of education must be to create students who will listen to necessity, who will doubt and fight for truth, and who will respond (obey) commands towardcreating a future.Of course there are trade schools for working skills. BUT HOW DO WE MAKE A COMMUNITY? That must be the integrating goal of education, and trade schools, language, the classics, science and math are a subordinate part.

2.Knowledge is not education, because knowledge cannot decide what is necessary, what is dubious, and what is the charity between (us)… (p.5)

Why charity?Because, to create a community one must conquer jealousy, greed, and avarice, and know what friendship is. Otherwise, in our differences,we kill each other!

We must have unity between generations as to what is necessary. Community-building takes generations, and societies go in circles and tear themselves apart by disciplines going in different directions.There must be some stability in basic values.And of course we must doubt, in order to correct error. This trinity of purpose must unite all traditional subject matter.

3.The educated person rises above his own time, and his own animal instincts; the uneducated person is the slave of present demands and emotions. Only with such unity and sustaining of curriculum can education create the power to raise one above the temperament of the chimpanzee.

The educated person translates his own time in the context of history; in the context of past and future generations. One’s own “time” is always corrupting!

It’s the essence of religion to do this….to get man outside his own mere time…That’s why education without religion and religion without education is impossible. (p.16)

The jump in terminology from community building to religion is an accurate

description of the purpose of both religion and education. Our only indicator of a religious accomplishment is a community in which people live together voluntarily, and in peace.Our present communities are full of violence between warring social groups, within and without. That is why religion is inconceivable without education and action.

4.Democratic government is insufficient as a goal for education. The minimum requirement for government (secular law) is to organize people to get along with a minimum of agreement (to have a modicum of social unity and live in peace.)It deals with crime, inheritance, taxes, regardless of existing religions.

The purpose of Canon law assumes the necessity of finding the maximum of agreement between people, between the parts of their lives, because living is more than mere government.It deals with our attitude, our willingness to act, to support causes, to rise above our animal nature for survival. Only participation and sacrifice builds humane communities. Mere government does not motivate for such sacrifice.There is no possibility of progress without religion.

5.Even churches must compromise (sacrifice). In Bologna the medieval church compromised with the emperor regarding the division between secular and divine authority – the government having authority over physical property and the church determining who could marry. The Renaissance mentality was a secular shift in the medieval attitude, making no distinction between Canon law and imperial law, thus representing a strong Protestant influence.

LECTURE – 18

1.Compromise is essential between institutions because, as stated above, any idea or institution left by itself will eventually get out of hand. THE FIRST PRINCIPLE OF DEMOCRACY IS A BALANCE OF FORCES. At this time in America there is no higher education in law; there is only a discussion of cases – as in the journals.This is to say, there is no discussion of the merits of cases, no discussion of justice – it is all politics sans the balance of direction (religion). Observe in any daily paper the absurd judgments laid down by the courts at times.

ERH gives a vivid example of how a superb medical institution was created in Medieval times through doubting and compromise between medical theories and practices. Norman princes ruled Sicily, Genoa, Naples, and Salerno. Any European travelers to the Holy land (including Crusaders)journeyed back to Salerno when sick or injured because it was a “friendly” port.A great hospital was there. Its success was attributed to its location at the cross-roads of knowledge in medicine, to the testing of different points of view.Different points of view were constantly in conflict. The practice was to test competing theories and methods against each other – resulting in sharpening the of medical knowledge.

All science constantly changes because new things are discovered, and thus by definition there is always conflict between proponents of old and new ideas. Advance begins with the contradiction of the “common sense” of the time.In medicine there are conflicts between giving drugs, surgical procedures, and other therapies. Today, surgery and drugs dominate most procedures, as contrasted with “other” therapies. In the middle ages, the “other” (internal therapies) were dominant. Of course, in the middle ages the great challenges lay in curing disease, as contrasted to cutting it out today.

2.Traditions of public health, hygiene, quarantine were begun then.Salerno, as a leading medical center, originated and taught these things.

In antiquity (pre-Christian), there was little concern for human rights. No right of rebellion; one had to obey the law regardless of the justice of it. One lived under only one authority.Rebellion against this type of oppression was a revolutionary Christian notion.

3.In the university there arose a fourth faculty.In addition to religion, medicine, and law, Arts and Sciences were added.At this time great battles arose between nominalists and realists.Nominalists believed words were arbitrary, and with no absolute meanings for expressions of real experience. Today sales people and politicians tend to be nominalists. ERH placed his own beliefs with the realists with a qualification, “…we are all both obviously.Nominalists at times, and realists at times.”

The problem is to determine when and where there may be essential meanings, and where names can be arbitrary. Only with such decisions can we establish even a modicum of truth and understanding between people.

4.Some type of logic can be concocted to explain almost any event, no matter how unfounded it may be,so we need a more broad discussion of these important issues of nominalism and realism.Naming (classifying) creates reality in the sense of creating a consciousness of an event at hand.Naming “things” can be arbitrary. People, on the other hand, have both general and unique characteristics, so naming becomes more complex.

This is to say, to consider persons as “Japanese,” or “enemies,” or “Baptists” is an example of thinking of real people in terms of objects, of “classes of things,” which dehumanizes them.This is the tendency of the academy, to treat humansthe same as intelligent animals (as “natural” things, in other words). This tendency in turn means there is no thought to recognizing personal characteristics of a particular individual.

5.One then can deduce what happens when the nominalist view is applied to two very different entities:1) The names of dead “things,” e.g. chemical elements, dirt, steel. 2) The names of people, who are dehumanized by being characterized by the same principle, i.e. of general characteristics.

6.ERH concludes that we live today in a time of sophists (salesmen who use words arbitrarily – no connection with reality). The question of how we use generalizations is therefore just as serious as in the middle ages. The common practices of taking no responsibility for one’s words, of using language to misrepresent, of stating half-truths, are examples of modern sophistry.Obviously, such use of language leads toward the destruction of community.

Lecture – 19

1.The PROBLEM with universals in social science is the failure to distinguish BETWEEN INDICATING A UNIVERSAL QUALITY OF AN INDIVIDUAL AND INDICATING PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION. To call another personas a class is to dehumanize the person. THE SOLUTION in social relations is to use the general term (such as Jew) as an adjective and never as a noun. For instance, one could say without fear of affront, “He is Jewish.”

The problem with thinking of an individual only in terms of the universal in social science is that the practice precludes an opportunity to create peace by treating him/her as a human toward whom one must be capable of relating. “So, today this question of the universals again is loaded with dynamite.” (p.5)

2.When a person is classed as a noun, such as saying he is ” Russian,” it infers that the name tells one all one needs to know about the person.Obviously this is never true, so to say, “He is Russian …..plus X” implies unknown characteristics, therefore establishing a basis for possible future salutary relations.

3.From 1100 to 1500 we lived in an era where theology dominated thought; from 1500 to 1900 we lived in an era dominated by natural science (knowledge about things).Since 1900 we live in an era of social science, but the method remains that of natural science applied to mankind – treating individuals as things. (p.7)

4.In science no universal is valid permanently; knowledge changes constantly. ONE THEREFORE CANNOT BE EITHER A NOMINALIST OR A REALIST ONLY, ONE MUST ASSUME THERE IS SOME TRUTH IN BOTH CONCEPTS.Lying (falsifying) is using words with no truth behind them!The question is, “How are we to address each other so that our relations might be civil and engender mutuality?”

5.If God is merely an arbitrary name with no meaning, no manifestation in reality, then He doesn’t exist. In life, in social relations it is important that we use universals, i.e. titles such as teacher, or boss, or president, and when appropriate, personal identification, e.g. Mr. Smith, or George. We need the options of both modes of identification in order to speak properly.

6.This question of proper addressing of others also relates to the powers we invoke. By what authority do we speak, by authority of the president, or of the law, or of “my mother?”The next question is, “Who is speaking?” and the next, “Who is being spoken to, and what authority do they possess?”A criminal has certain rights before the law, for instance.

ERH goes on, “…in 1500, there was a declining interest in realism – and an ascending interest in the world of things.” p.15/19Today we tend to be completely dominated by thinking of everybody in nominalist terms.

7.The question of the universal for God is to be used quite differently than with people or things. Initially, both people and things were named arbitrarily.But the power of the creator can never be used or thought of arbitrarily. “God is the problem to have one name through all ages.” (p.17)

8.One can of course reject God,reflecting the assumption of a cynic, or skeptic, or atheist.This ERH calls a de-generate, “…a man who lives only in his own generation without connection with the past and the future.” (p.18)This is a person who is unconscious of the creative powers in life.

9.THESE ARE THE QUESTIONS WE MUST ABSOLUTELY ASK AND FIND ANSWERS TO if we are to make available to ourselves the power of language to make critical distinctions between the most fundamental experiences of living,i.e. how to deal with the divine, how to deal with things, and how to deal with humankind.

a.Universals have three methods, of the nominalist, of the realist, and of the “mutualist” (one who utilizes either of the two methods, or a mixture thereof, in each situation). To invoke the divine, one is dedicated to serving the truth, such as the Trinity. Only this power unifies the three different elements of life.

b. Invoking the divine unifies other attitudinal elements of social life as well, differentiating and applying the necessary, and the doubtful, and having faith so that one can believe and understand.

c. The nominalist (Platonist) classifies things in the world to bring order, but he is functioning after the things already exist.The attitude is applied post rem (after the fact).But since the nominalist believes thought is superior to concrete reality, words were assumed to be arbitrary.

d. The realist (Aristotelian – and also post rem) recognizes that any object has two qualities, a universal (such as a concept of a chair) on the one hand,and that of a particularchair.So one would say that he thinks also in terms of “in rem” (in the present), recognizing both after the fact, and during the fact, seeing both the universal and uniqueness of things. Since realism believes in the superiority of concrete objects from which thought followed, words were not understood to be disconnected from reality.

e. The medievalist believed in God, and was first a Realist, then in 1500 the notion of nominalismwas introduced. Ockham introduced this idea and heralded the age of modern science. Post rem treats everything as transient.

f. The final problem, the third solution, then addresses human society and the need to recognize a concrete reality, and the need for peace. In society people must learn to get along with others whom they may dislike, or with whom they disagree, or with whom they might be at war. The primary social problem then is to create peace, before which there can be no language,no human development.

To be creative in bringing about peace one needs to do several things: 1) change our human (animal) nature into one which is truly human (above animals),2) prepare one to have the ability to create a vision of WHAT OUGHT TO HAPPEN, AND THEN, 3) ACT TO MAKE THE REALITY HAPPEN. That is what the founding fathers in the U.S. did.American has become a reality, freedom became a reality, equal rights became a reality (or at least we have moved a good distance in that direction).In these instances one is acting in “anti-rem.” One imagines what should become a reality, then works to make it so. Only humans then have this capability to function in three time stages – before, during, and after the fact.Both nominalists and realists function to describe the world as they find it.Christianity therefore goes beyond mere philosophy toward integrating other fruitful methods.

America resulted from a historical decision. A reality was created by historical decisions over the generations and can now be verified – its ideals were not truth in 1776, but have since moved in that direction.

10.This is another example of the truth of the Trinity, the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit, to live in the whole of time, invoking the authority from the past, the authority the present, and the authority of the future.

Every great event in history – the US Constitution, the Magna Carta, Roman law – every great name – Caesar, Jesus, Michael Angelo, Einstein – all of those were the result of considering authority from the past, a vision of the future, and action in the present. The events were real – no figment of a historian’s imagination. ALL OF THESE EVENTS WE LEARN ABOUT REFLECT THE TRUTH OF THE MEANING OF THE TRINITY as a method for the creativity of mankind.

11.All of these events can be verified and defined because they are finished, they have happened.But future social events cannot be definitively predicted, because we are capable of doing something different, something which could nothave been anticipated. The human potential for this type of power is our reflection of the divine, of our capability for creativity that must be our goal.

So every human being is half definable, and half indefinable…By the power you have to speak to me, you can add life. And in bringing this life to bear on that, without …. something new enters which has not existed five minutes before.After you have spoken, there is a new spot in the universe. (p.29)

This is the argument to explain why God cannot be defined, because he is always alive, always there, always beyond definition and beyond our methods of proof.But divine power can be invoked.

12.Since God acts only through humans, and since part of human nature is indefinable, God is indefinable. And this is the argument against suicide – that since God is within all of us, giving us his power, we have no right to kill this Godly part of us.

13.To allow our acts and names to live after us, we must understand and practice that we speak in three “languages.”That is, one must speak differently about God, humankind, and things.

Lecture – 20

1.When we need “higher powers” than those within ourselves, must seek (invoke) higher “authority” for validation. (p.1)It might be the authority by which our college degrees are given, or the authority by which professional methods are given. Of course, we assume our own authority when we are creative and “break a mold.”

2.Something in natureforces us to seek order in reflecting its majesty, by naming and classifying events and things. ONE OF THE PROBLEMS IN NAMING IS TO SEPARATE SAMENESS FROM UNIQUENESS, for instance,identifying separate species on the one hand, or on the other, identifying uniqueness within a species.

3.There is the same problem in social affairs or ceremonial events, when one must address and be addressed by the appropriate title, Mr./Mrs., Judge (your honor). Senator. The distinction between the general and particular must be recognized in other events,teaching for instance. One can only teach when one appeals to the right instincts in specific students.Of course one needs to know the subject, but to teach, one must also communicate, taking the student into the spirit of the subject.At best we only teach sometimes. The teacher attempts to appeal to a specific student’s love for truth. (RF – my cynical side leads me to add, if any exists within the student. If not, then the teacher must step back and appeal to the student to come to life!)

This whole area of appealing language, of invoking, persuading, convincing language is neglected today. (p.5)

4.This is important and difficult to do, to find effective language for a given situation.The invocation (search for the right words), makes all the difference. In this situation to invoke is to search for those words with power.Invoking therefore is a call for power to persuade.

This is why the laws of learning as put forth by psychologists can never make more than a small and partial contribution to teaching.

Titles are important in this process. The purpose of titles is to insure that we speak to the right person for the right reason. The right words are names; and to call something by the “right” name is crucial as it is possibly disastrous if by the wrong name!(RF – I once heard a teacher address a black person in his class as “you people,” incensing the student.The teacher discredited himself in the eyes of the student by way of separating himself.

5.Authorities, names, powers are transient.When such powers are invoked, one is taken out of one’s own time, from the past and into the future, as is the case when all knowledge from the past is used. To so invoke the past ERH calls “bringing the knowledge to life.”In the middle ages men prayed, invoking the power of God for the purpose of invoking his authority to achieve their ends. They called this adhering to God’s spirit. Today, “God talk” is out, people want to continue to discover and name new things in the concrete universe.

In the middle ages the academy was appropriate for studying how to invoke the “spirit.” Today, the university is the opposite, to engender new truth by gathering different schools of thought together.

ERH asserts it is wrong to blame the Catholic church for violence against science.The Protestants attack Copernicus, he points out. “They were the fundamentalists of the time.”(RF – However, the Pope didshow the instruments of torture to Galileo, convincing him to recant his scientific conclusions.)

6.The academic world and the religious world are separate.The religious world’s purpose is to plant the spirit of God in people.After these methods and conclusions had been established, the university could turn to “discover” the concrete universe, developing new methods for describing it. The purpose of religion is to guide; that of science is to describe. To mistake religion for natural science is to create Bolshevism, Hitlerism, fascism,racism.

To denigrate religion or to mistake it as only philosophy is to eliminate direction for humankind (RF – or if not to eliminate, certainly to grossly narrow one’s view of the world).THUS, EDUCATION MUST HAVE THESE TWO PARTS (direction and description) – natural science for concrete reality, and guiding that knowledge toward building community.Mistaking natural science for the dominant focus of study leads human society in circles, emphasizing concrete nature, physical consumption, technology and production as goals in themselves, while humanity goes to destruction.

7.The concrete world is in constant change.To mistake religion for natural science is also to mistake for mere fashion that which must persist through ages of humans.

The world of nature is reality minus speech.The sciences investigate everything and everybody minus what he says about himself…The first thing you know of your real existence is that you are a named person to whom someone has lovinglyspoken. (p.18)

8.ERH describes the patient/doctor relationship.It is a crucial step for the patient to tell someone in authority (the doctor) what is wrong. At this moment the doctor becomes a part of a community dedicated to restore the health of the patient, and the patient “turns him/herself over to the guidance of the doctor.” Through speech, they instill confidence in each other.

If this doesn’t happen, that the patient feels that the doctor now has taken over, if this implantation of the doctor into the soul of the patient hasn’t happened, he cannot be cured. All the rest is minor. That’s only dealing with his body.That’s not a very important thing.And there the doctors make all the mistakes. (p.19)

(RF – I would generalize that the same relationship applies to all education, counseling, ministering, leadership.)

9.THUS, IT IS THE SPIRIT THAT HAS THE POWER TO CURE, TO EDUCATE, TO INSTILL THE CORRECT POWERS INTO THE PATIENT/STUDENT.This is not science, but it depends upon the power of speech.It comes from a uniting into one spirit.That is where our real power derives – where the love of science or love of the community, or the love of art originates.This origin is totally different from the product of action.

10.The power of the university comes from a clash of different opinions, BUT THERE IS UNITY IN THE PURPOSE OF FINDING TRUTH, doubting (and fragmenting) while being unified (at peace with their objectors) at the same time.The great advances in the great universities have come from this paradox of fragmentation and unity, of simultaneous warring opinions and peace.

THIS IS WHY IT IS SO IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THAT KNOWLEDGE AND SPIRIT MUST BE KEPT SEPARATE ON THE ONE HAND, YET UNITED ON THE OTHER. The term “research” means to turn over old knowledge, to give it a new look.To re-search!

11.The surest knowledge we have about anyone is that we speak with them, and they with us. Actions cannot be separated from intent if you wish to understand another.Only by speaking truly and respectfully listening with one another do we reallyknow our fellow human.

12.Nature teaches us that the objects of the universe can become expendable.When humans are treated as natural animals they become the same; thus the torture chambers, concentration camps, “ethnic cleansing” of late.

In living experience when commitments are declared, such as war, marriage, revolution, and degeneration, these four thingscan never be “experimented with” without risking disastrous results.

[Experimentation, like sports, is a class of activity that is meant either to be reversed or set aside, or done over and over again without effecting society. It is the difference between seeking truth and acting on it.Once knowledge is applied to serious events, like marriage or war – the results are permanent.]

This is why we can never make lasting peace, because people have confusednature with religion, thus constantly experimenting with those events that can never be reversed.

13.In sum, the academic mind deals with nature, the religious mind deals with authority.The academic mind collects knowledge, the religious mind considers what to do with it as it effects society. Nature describes things that have existed before.Individual human beings have never existed before; he/she is, of course, half species and therefore knowable, but the other half is by definition a singularly unique soul and potentially unpredictable.

Lecture – 21

1.[Some distinctions can be made between schools, academies, and universities.]In schools one learns some information, but has no obligation to use the knowledge in any specific direction.In an academy, one is dedicated to deepening one’s understanding of a specific subject related to some specific method, for instance the Academy of Sciences, the Academy of Arts. In the university one expands the knowledge of some subject by doubting, by encouraging different points of view about the subject.

In the academy the time to explore a subject is not controlled by the world outside, rather by the “those inside” who will declare when they believe there is sufficient knowledge to pass on to others. The academy of Plato, and subsequent similar institutions don’t change the world because they only ask that they be left alone to their researches.(p.5)

2.In antiquity the academician (Plato, Aristotle etc.) should be called a theologian because their use of the word physics included a study of God, men, and things. Beginning in 1450, our present date for the beginning of modern science, “nature” means a study of things only.

In 1450, with the onset of the Renaissance and rebirth of Greek thought, the understanding was not the same as in antiquity because the Renaissance concept of “nature” didn’t include politics and religion.

3.To speak means to transcend nature, to rise above the life of animals,

…in the moment where we can speak, we fight the death, the natural world.The natural world ends with death.And speech is in the world to fight death.That’s why you get an education, because you must help us to overcome the dying society of America at this moment, because everything merely natural is doomed.There is nothing natural that can last. (p.9)

4.Higher education is essential to any society because their spirit is to say to themselves, “We don’t know enough, we are ignorant and must begin again.” THE MIRACLE OF MODERN SCIENCE IS NOT THE PRODUCTS OF SCIENCE, BUT THE SCIENTISTS THEMSELVES.They engender the creative spirit, and creativity is a miracle. WITHOUT CREATIVITY THERE IS MERE REPETITION.

5.It takes a long time for creativity to be accepted.People haven’t experienced the new idea and are reluctant to accept new ideas until they have been tested beyond doubt.This gap is an incubation.

6.The incubation usually takes three generations to become commonly known and accepted.America didn’t really begin in the eyes of the world until it was discussed in Europe100 years. after the Plymouth landing.

7.The founding fathers (1776) were the product of an incubation in their family life for three generations. The true founding spirit of the first Pilgrims had been dulled because of their privations; and it was again revived in the founding fathers 150 years later.

8.All significant writing from the past by definition speaks to us today. Modern philology treats great texts as something written by somebody else, for somebody else. (p.30)In fact those great texts must be revived by assuming that they speak to us today, and were written with that intent.The Bible, for instance, treated as “literature” is treated as dead.To assume that it was written for us and is alive MEANS THAT WE MUST GIVE MEANING TO THE IDEAS, REINTERPRET THEM, RESURRECT THEM.

If the Bible isn’t written to you and me, don’t read it…It’s much better that you have never heard of it. p.31

9.In a like way, between 1500 to 1900 speech was “…relegated to an observable fact.And therefore has been treated as dead.” (p.31)The world still awaits for significant speech to come true.

When reading texts if you ask yourself, “Is this true?” you bring the world to life.Otherwise you treat it as dead.

There is no Christianity if Christ hasn’t spoken to you.And there is no Bible if it isn’t written for you.And there is no Gettysburg Address if it isn’t addressed to you.And there is no Shakespeare if it isn’t written for you….What have they appealed to,..?They have appealed to the womb of time that you and I must form.(p.36)

10.Indeed, the regeneration of our community and all communities depends upon our being educated andcalled into Church and state (community), to mature and give birth to new creatures of peace.(p.36)

And the world of science has always to be balanced by art and poetry. “If you do not remain unnatural, then science will kill you.” (p.36)A living (truly alive) person is always waiting to be recognized, to be heard, to listen, to be called to a cause.All of this happens because of language.And none of this exists in the world of natural animals.

Science makes us feel as generalizations (of human beings); it is only the arts that can make us feel unique again, make us feel self-conscious. “So, gentlemen, the academic spirit is fatal unless it is balanced.”

Lecture – 22

1.We suffer from our inability to distinguish between and create different methods for analysis of the three basic types of experience – Of God (power outside us), of humankind (including ourselves), and of nature (of things). This shortcoming”has landed us in concentration camps” because social science, especially psychology, uses only the method for analysis of things in its analysis of people.

2.Natural science methods treat all as “objects”, all alike. This is dehumanizing! Nazis treated Jews that way, otherwise they could not have killed them. The analyst feels unrelated to his/her subjects and treats them as numbers. One can see this attitude in all walks of life.A teacher who doesn’t care whether his students learn is the same.A doctor who doesn’t relate to his patients, treating them all as “clients,” the same.This kind of thinking depresses and eventually kills the spirit in any culture.

Buried in this misapplication is the assumption that it is possible to know all about humans whereas the very nature of our ability to be creative, and to grow and change, means that we can never be known fully. This assumption is therefore fruitless.

3.Dead, ineffective teaching means that one is taught skills only, but nothing vital about how those skills might vitalize the community. The education process should change its goal of teaching to allow both teacher and student to grow in the process. There is a contradiction between what is called scientific theories of learning, and the implanting a spirit of learning and living in the student. Students are taught to be automatons, tested only for memorizing.It is the spirit of learning that is necessary for community building.

Natural science method only allows one to look at concrete evidence, that which is outside.In human behavior it can discern actions, but not their meaning. The gauge for learning, whether inside the church, or the classroom or board or factory room is what happens outside these artificial environments. The gauge for learning must therefore be expanded beyond tests and opinion polls toactions in the community that which indicates the true ability of the inner life of people, their thoughts, their courage, their will to act to create a better future.

4.These are some of the misapprehensions about human behavior and community life that lead us astray in the process of thinking about ourselves. When we are treated objectively, we tend to think of ourselves at times as mere “things,” as atoms in nature.

[R.F. – one is reminded ofB.F. Skinner, the famous Harvard psychologist, who advocated “operant conditioning” as the method for teaching. In his research papers he would refer to his subjects, human or animal, as “organisms.”He claimed that psychology was a science in which one must discover how subjects could be “trained” to respond to his imposed manipulation. His method was to work with pigeons, assuming that thiswould give him a clue to the secrets of human behavior. The method never required any intimate communication with the subjects.As Rosenstock-Huessy averred, “Nature is the universe without speech.”That is, humans in this condition would have no past or no future; this would mean that we have an understanding of ourselves based only on our direct experience, having to reinvent reality so to speak, just as do wild animals.]

Articulated dreams of a better future are not of interest to the scientific psychologist because these factors lack the concreteness of measurable data.These scientists accept only their observed data.

5.Speech is the essential difference between nature and humankind.Of course, we begin life as dependent animals, but have the potential for growth and change. That growth comes from learning what it is to be human through a history of human events. Great works of art, great sacrifices, biographies of genius tell us how great societies have come into being. And conversely, what destroys community are greed, avarice, hatred, violence. In the other direction of time, we can dream of a better future, then act to attempt to create that future.Speech (language) allows us to enormously expand our understanding of human experience by extending social memory into the past and out to the future.

6.People who can communicate similar beliefs form the bond of culture. Those beliefs represent their “souls,” their inner life, beyond the reach of natural scientific analysis. What then is the realm of study directed to our inner life?It cannot be psychology or sociology, for the reasons stated above.

It is important here to point out the difference between our concrete experience and the abstract world of our various languages. Our first experiences in life are of movement, hunger, and pain. As a matter of fact, we learn many things about social relationships before abstract symbols like numbers and theories have any meaning for us.Our first experiences in life include commands from parents – love, fear, anger, frustration – in short, social relationships.

7.These experiences teach us, however consciously or unconsciously, about “things” and about “social life including our individuality.”The historical record tells us of the commonality of social life and the price to be paid for different actions. We can understand war, peace, love, hate, etc. History is meaningful to the degree that we can relate to it from our personal experience.

The stories of Jesus, of martyrs burned at the stake, of the accomplishments of genius, and great artists are real events that reflect the existence of a source of inner strength in humankind.

We know we have freedom of thought within us whereby we are capable of making a decision, and of being creative, and rising to great heights, and of having the strength to withstand privation, and to sacrifice.WHERE DOES THAT POWER COME FROM?

But if you know that the flame that’s burning in your heart is the same flame that created the universe and said, “Let there be light,” then you suddenly say, “Well, I have a very noble pedigree.I am the son of God.” (p.19)

This source of inner strength cannot be proven through any method of scientific measurement.But it can be experienced!ERH asserts then that this third element in the universe, the prime mover, the creator, is reflecting the creative power of human beings, and therefore must be part of a different social science.

8.The point of all this is that if we are to come more alive and realize our greater potential, we must realize that we possess withinsomething analogous to creativepowers that formed the universe.A freedom to change, to do new things, to become something more than we are now. WHERE DID THIS POWER COME FROM?

We can understand this power precisely because we have experienced it! It cannot be otherwise proven.One cannot prove with any data similar to that of science, the effect of love on us.It can only be experienced. We can thus relate to (understand) all of the great figures in history because we possess similar experience and the same powers as they.

9.We can understand justice, love, peace, war and sin, greatness and avarice when we admit that we are capable of similar heights and depths. (RF – ERH said to me once, “Be humbled by the fact that you are capable of achieving great heights or committing the most heinous crime ever committed, given the right circumstances.”)

In this way history should affirm some of the characteristics of human beings and empower us to explore further transformation.

10.The difficulties of mere physical survival by itself are considerable. The next step towardmoral and spiritual growth is far more demanding. Languagemaintains vitality only when truth is spoken, yet to speak the truth can be dangerous. Sacrificing individual benefit for the welfare of the community is equally difficult. We are free to decide either way on these issues, and indeed, there seem to be too few who can achieve these levels of behavior.

To “deem” is to think, to judge, or believe.To redeem is to think anew. Only by speaking the truth to each other can we achieve the e redemption essential to growth.”That’s what we mean when we say that Jesus came into the world to redeem the sinners,” which we all are! (p.20)The popular quote from John Donne,”…no man is an island,” comes to mind.

11.Contrarily, when we consider ourselves as mere “things,” as pawns of the forces outside us, we need not think about burdening ourselves with such creative responsibility. And this type of thinking is precisely what our present social science tends to engender.

At the heart of the new social science that is needed is that, “…man has to be told that he’s not a thing.” (p.21)A second aspect of the new science is to say to our fellow humans that peace is aided when we can speak and listen to others, and imagine ourselves in their circumstances.

So three aspects of a new social science are: 1) We must be told we are not “things.”We are capable of thought, and understanding and can change ourselves. 2) we must be capable of re-incarnating, (redeeming) ourselves and others, and are therefore free to make decisions and act.3) We must understand that peace is therefore possible. NONE OF THESE FACTORS CAN BE PROVEN BY THE TENETS OF NATURAL SCIENCE. BUT OUR EXPERIENCE REVEALS THE TRUTH OF THEIR EXISTENCE.

When cultures fail to communicate, and fail to understand that all humankind is one, they remain trapped in their fears and their jealousies, the future of which is always perpetual war, violent revolution, degeneration, and anarchy.

12.When we love and can trust someone, we must tell them. “The affairs of mankind have to be voiced….the highest life is the articulate life.” (pp.23,24) This sharing of the truth “rounds out our sense of reality.”In this sense, the articulate life is the necessary foundation for all community.

13.ERH likens the act of learning from past experience to that of vaccination, whereby learning from the past is a vicarious event, told us by others. The best learning is by real experience, but some learning must be by “vaccination.” For example, it isn’t practical to learn from jumping off a cliff, one would be advised to learn this from others.

14.In the same sense there is a limit to how principles and formulas prepare us for actions.Some useful aspects of understanding come from formulation of abstractions, but their meaningderives only from experience.ERH points out that Hitler, never having experienced peace, couldn’t incorporate the idea in his thinking.

15.Of course the first step of fruitful learning must always come from outside us,originally from our parents – “go to bed,” “eat your carrots,”, etc. So our first experience with the world is as a human being who listens whilebeing spoken to. As maturing takes place one might become an authority, and instead of being addressed as a “you,” in the second person, we are in the role of the first person. To your own children you command, “I tell you to go to bed.”This role of a “commanding person” is analogous to that of a creator, as that of a god, as a personal corner of power in the universe.Then we may experience the world of things, as shaping the world outside us, treating it as “its.”Thus, we must understand these three roles and step into each at the appropriate time.

16.Here ERH describes poetically, I believe, the spirit of the “true” scientist.

Things are not accessible to people who are not at peace with themselves, and with the rest of mankind. The realm of nature is only accessible to scientists.These are people who are without fear,..greed,..jealousy, who know their own prejudices, who are at peace with themselves, and who follow the force of their conscience and of the divine spirit.

…the condition of all science is the belief that peace and incarnation are events that have already prepared the scientist to do his share…that he has been met as a second person by somebody who has loved him and taken him up, and that he himself is able to love others.For the sake of the truth, he’s going to tell them the truth.And for the sake of love, he’s going to help them. And for the sake of hope, he’s going to go beyond what they and he at this moment know or do.Unless he is in such a position, he knows nothing about the steam, or electricity, or granite, uranium, or anything. (pp.20,30)(RF – emphasis mine.)

17.To summarize: The natural cycle of learning is first about ourselves, then where we should go, and only after these experiences can we know how to think about and what to do about natural phenomena.THE PROBLEM WITH SCIENCE TODAY IS IT BELIEVES WE MUST FIRST LEARN ABOUT NATURE, THEN OURSELVES, THEN WHAT OUR GOALS MUST BE. AND THIS IS A REVERSAL OF THE NATURAL CYCLES OF LEARNINGTHAT WOULD CREATE PEACE IN THE WORLD. ONLY THEN CAN WE HAVE CLARITY ABOUT THE “THINGS” OF THE WORLD. As a result of this reversal of cycles, the scientist has disconnected knowledge of nature from our social goals,thereby perpetuating war.

18.As a result, the scientist tends to see all people as “its,” as things,as objects of nature that cannot change. The scientist views evolution then only in physical terms, but cannot understand an evolution of spirit, of cultures.”Things in space” are to be weighed and otherwise numerically measured.But the future of human beings is not predicated on space in this sense.We cannot drive a car into the future; what will be our future is not of space, it is in our minds, our spirit – hidden, BUTREVEALING ITSELF THROUGH TIME. It is absurd to think of time as a fourth dimension of space.

AND ALL OF THIS IS WHY THE SCIENCE OF NATURE MUST BE DIFFERENT FROM A SCIENCE OF SOCIETY. One is predicated on measures of space; the other on measures of time in which change and evolution of the human spirit take place.

Lecture – 23

1.The academic cycle is analogous to the natural science cycle, the reverse of a cycle that would establish a viable social life.It investigates things first, then man, then a purpose for our lives.

ERH asks, “What is wrong with being objective? THE ANSWER IS, IT CAN ONLY APPLY IN A PERIPHERAL WAY TO UNDERSTANDING SOCIAL LIFE. The fact is,we all want to be judged by the circumstances surrounding our actions, and therefore, to be judged subjectively. We wish people to make exceptions for us!ERH quotes Shakespeare, “treat everybody according to his merit, and nobody is safe,” and concludes:

…objectivity means to treat everybody as a thing.(p.2)

Of course objectivity has its place because we must have competence in important positions, but it must be merged with other considerations.

Academic science tries to transform everything into a thing. p.6

2.ERH tells us that suicide means treating ourselves as “things.””Suffering is no reason to take your life; and joy is no reason to stay in life.” (p.3)Otherwise there would be no basis for asking soldiers to be ready to die for their country, or anyone else to sacrifice for the community, for that matter.

He points out that, logically, if one believes in the right to judge the world objectively, there is no reason not to pollute, or set off the bomb.

I have neither the right to blow up created matter, nor have I right to blow up myself. (p.5)

3.It is philosophy that asserts that we rule the world because it believes in the dominance of the mind. Therefore, the philosopher asserts, we have the power to make these types of unlimited decisions.

4.The academic community of social scientists tries to turn everybody into a thing and be objective about it.They call all parts of the universe “natural.” But the natural world is constantly at war.All animal societies are at war.And because human beings are still thought of as the same (especially minorities), human society has been unceasingly at war. The natural animal world has no other direction but conflict, and inanimate elements have no direction except the mercy of other forces of nature.

5.No vital society has ever been created with this type of logic. A fruitful alternative is to view society as having some direction toward peace, peace in an environment of justice.Objectivity is when everyone tries to manipulate everyone else – operating between the sexes, social classes, races, power centers, etc. This prevailing attitude is actually pre-Christian!(p.8)

6.To speak of the scientific attitude leads us also intofactoring (categorizing),finding the common denominator of people as a basis for thinking of groups;e.g. by age, or socio-economics, or values. This is called the “naturalistic” method of social scientific thinking. Churches, ERH asserts, follow the same route, often practicing that which reflects pre-Christian values.

7.Scientists and those who believe in science are not objective about their own basic values, however. The thinking, “let there be science,” or “science exists,” is not scientific, butrepresents a dogma. Useful as science is for describing things, IT OVER-REACHES ITS BOUNDS WHEN IT ATTEMPTS TO ASSUME IT IS AN APPROPRIATE METHODOLOGY FOR SOCIETY AND FOR ESTABLISHING GOALS FOR SOCIETY. (RF – In another essay ERH points out how scientists relegate, and separate moral thought from that of their “science,” assigning morals to religion. Their sin lies thereby in tearing asunder parts of social reality from others.

Similarly, religions overstepped their bounds when they assumed to apply religious concepts to describing nature ( thereby invading the boundaries of science.)

8.The term DOGMA tends to be pejorative, but in fact we could not make any decisions about anything if we didn’t believe in something.However, one’sdogma must be appropriate to the problem addressed.

Science deals with the question, “What is nature?”.Religion deals with the question, “By what authority does man act?”Social science deals with the problem, “How do we create a community that is at peace, with justice for all?” EACH OF THESE QUESTIONS EMPLOYS A DIFFERENT METHODOLOGY, AND ALL ARE NECESSARY IN ORDER TO DISCOVER THE SCIENCE OF SOCIETY. (pp.12,13)

The authority of God is greater than the authority of man, just asthe authority of law and justice is greater than the authority of a king or Pope!

9.In sum, the medieval church made the mistake of believing that to know about God was to know about things,thereby overstepping their boundaries, for instance when they demanded Galileo recant his theories. And modern scientists (beginning with Descartes) believed that to know about things meant also to know about mankind, thereby overstepping the boundaries of science. For instance, they eschew any consideration of the miracle of the scientist’s inner strength and creativity. In other words, they never were capable of explaining their own powers.

10.Henri de Saint-Simon (1760-1825), the father of modern science, was the first man in modern times to attempt to break the cycle of the physicists and mathematicians as a method of solving social problems.He realized that he couldn’t do it with the “mind” only, that ideas had no power until put into practice and he therefore must live them.(ERH asserts also that he was the first Existentialist therefore) He changed his life and the life of the world by advocating the building of two canals, Suez and Panama, which would help tie the world together. He built a road to the future, and died in poverty in the process.But he generated ardent disciples.

He, along with other great leaders in history, had the courage to risk total failure. Their works were carried on by disciples. Jesus, Saint Simon, Anselm of Canterbury and Abelard of the University of Paris, are cases in point. It was the same with many other great inventors and artists such as Tycho Brahe, Kepler, Rembrandt, and van Gogh, who were such founders but suffered failure during their lives.

The future belongs to those who can be ashamed.And I’m afraid the American prognostication is very poor, because of this shamelessness (of pragmatism).(p.19)

11.Here ERH begins to make the point that we must have opposing experiences to understand life.One cannot understand unemployment and poverty if one is constantly rich.One cannot understand love who hasn’t experienced hate and abuse.One cannot understand enlightenment without experiencing ignorance.There is a time to know and a time to be ignorant (to feel one needs to know more in order to understand). THE IMPORTANT PRINCIPLE IS THAT IN SOCIETY ONE MUST KNOW WHEN ONE NEEDS TO KNOW, AND NOT BEFORE.One cannot fathom the meaning of an event beforehand.One must have some experience of the opposite to compare.

One cannot understand the meaning of peace who has not experienced war.To understand the meaning of peace, then, one may have to go to war or be bullied by tyrants. Pacifists engender tyranny for this reason. (RF – In another essay ERH expands on these ideas, his thesis being that the time to fight against war is during peace, that the madness that is war precludes any listening by either side.)

12.To know these things about society means that at the heart of a social science is a sense of time and timing.

Love, respect, and education point to the past, present, and future.One should be respected for one’s accomplishments, for what one fought for. Lessons are to be learned from such heroes, past or present, as a basis for present decisions. And to build a road into the future one must educate the next generation.Dedication to good causes is always motivated by love (for people, or causes, or community welfare – they are all the same.)All of this becomes manifest through action, a primary part of which is our speaking the truth to one another.

We must therefore speak to the woman we love, to our parents, and to our children about the future in which we must participate in creating, and unifying the three generations of time.

13.There are four forms of speech: epics, lyrics, drama,and then the analysis of prose.The novel observes and analyzes.Lyrics sing of our love, epics speak of generations of lives, and drama is felt in the present experience.

(RF – the weakness of academic writing is its pure description and analysis. To speak as clearly and coherently as possible about our experience requires all four types of speech.)

14.SOCIAL SCIENCE MUST TEACH THE POWER TO SPEAK TO “NATURAL MAN.” Goethe was the father of a new epic in social science for this reason, because he wrote in all four types of speech, and therefore represented what is necessary for completeness in speech, in the circulation (and passing on) of thought. (p.29)

15.We speak to get beyond death (to leave a legacy for the future); we speak (in all four modes) to explain our experience in the present and therefore save our own lives (from insanity). And of course, if one is to speak, one must also listen!

16.Finally, our understanding remains incomplete unless we have listened to past generations.All time, past, present, and future, is therefore united in the act of survival and regeneration of community. “The word has the power to take everybody out of his here and now.And that’s why we speak.” (p.31)

17.To be young in spirit (regardless of one’s chronological age) is also to be a founder. To found something is to be reborn, regenerated, but at times at the risk of shame, defeat, and disappointment.

What is the source of this power to speak?

Lecture – 24

1.Two important questions are addressed in this chapter: 1)”How can a man who breaks new ground survive in a society that doesn’t even know this new ground exists?” and 2) “How does one gain acceptance for a new approach in any one cycle, from one’s colleagues?”

It is like discovering a new continent, if you discover a new way of life, a new way of thinking.When the first natural scientists said that they couldn’t make gold, or that they could prove that the sun was not turning around the earth, or that they could cut up corpses and thereby get an insight into the life of man, or animals — when all this was started, people said they were mad, or they were obsessed. (p.1)

2.Saint Simon tried to commit suicide at 60, and Goethe wrote a book on suicide. Many great thinkers or artists went unrecognized in their life, or died in poverty, or were ridiculed.

Creation of new ideas requires wealth, or a wealthy benefactor who would support their work.Maecenas was a sponsor, a protector of Horace.

“Government can never protect new life….Government only has laws.And the laws only deal with the known — can only deal with that which was yesterday.” (p.3)

…Goethe and Saint Simon, Abelard and Anselm, and Paracelsus and Copernicus…the beginners of new cycles (of life) had to look for a special sponsor….in the Middle Ages freedom was protected by the great abbots.They had the power to make exceptions…to invest, as our modern foundations can…so Abelard survived there this persecution, only with the help of an abbot. (p.4)

3.Paracelsus (1493-1541) was the first of modern scientists, his work were first published 1589,was supported by non-experts.

This reflects an important principle, that one does not improve and grow if one participates only in an activity for which one expects to get something directly.

You can’t get anything here, (in the classroom), if you do not surrender your own prejudice and your own will here.And that is the only right you acquire by sitting in a course.You can become better men, but you can’t get anything out of it. (p.7)

4.All of this presents the justification for private capitol and private enterprise, and private property.These are the only sources of new life, of protecting new ideas. “You can be protected by the powers that have been,..”

Anselm and Abelard were protected by abbots as we said above, Paracelsus was protected by rich and powerful friends, Saint Simon survives through his students, andJesus through his disciples.

5.To speak truthfully one must be free. These sponsors or protectors created an atmosphere of freedom for those theymentored.

Progress (in new thinking) is also based upon the competition between accepted authorities – a free debate.It was this free debate that allowed the Catholic church of the Middle Ages to become free from its contradictions, which were so destructive at that time. Abelard, in creating such a forum, was radical in the extreme. The division of labor in our government between judiciary, legislatures, and administration is the basis of all democracies, as Edmond Burke asserted in his comments on the French Revolution in 1789.

6.Another gift of these protectors was to provide leisure for genius to think.In other words, a gift of time.

7.Still another element of risk of creativity is that in one time new ideas may be idolized, and in another punished. Newton and Descartes, were recognized for their genius, while Paracelsus, Abelard, and Anselm were punished for theirs.

8.Four stages of evolution of new thought follow each other by a generation or more. First, the new idea (Copernicus and Paracelsus). Second, a new method or formal language for description (Newton and Descartes); Third, the experts accept the idea, (the Royal Society of Science was formed before Newton’s death in 1727 and served in judgment); Fourth, the idea is commonly accepted in the community, (perhaps even taught in the schools!!).

9.ERH points our that 150 yrs after Saint Simon, social scientists have not heard of his new method for that field. They still apply the method of natural science to explain social events.

10.Anselm asked the questions: “How do I constantly renew my notion of God? And how can I continuously pursue new definitions?”His answer was the incarnation of thinking, but he had no method for carrying this out, and he speculated that the answers were always beyond reason and beyond proof (at the time). In other words, the theologian had to be free to doubt orthodoxy.Abelard practiced the method, but Aquinas and Bonaventura formalized the method, which is to take all opposing (extreme) views of recognized authorities, then compare, factor, and deduce truth, which lies somewhere in the middle. They were the founders of the science of theology. (p.21)The ideas of Aristotle could be compared to the those of Augustine (one pagan and one Christian).

11.Bonaventura laid down another principle of new thought, that it must be listened to, if for no other reason than it represented genius. He also said that growth comes only from an excess of the spirit.Which is to say, great works are wrought by a passionate affection for the love of passing on the truth.Thus teaching can not be scientific.If students aren’t interested and passionate, they will simply memorize, which is not learning.

12.What is genius? “The life of the spirit lies in a sense of the important.” Where this is lacking, there is no worthwhile knowledge, logic, or education.

Bonaventura asserted that relevant truth is always urgent and therebyimportant.For one thing, the life of the spirit ERH called “learned ignorance” is always importantto be always ready to doubt one’s most closely held ideas.To search is to make initial investigation in any subject. To research is to reconsider previously held knowledge. Most people confuse research with search, then seldom doubt in the process.

13.In sum then, three stages of learning: 1) the attitude of learned ignorance, 2) the excess of the mind – a sense of urgency, of feeling the world will come to an end if truth is not found – and 3) the way of life, to go from research to research, to be constantly,mentally on the go, doubting, reformulating, reevaluating. p. 27

14.The greatness of the human mind is not that all of us could possibly understand abstruse propositions, like how the atom bomb works, but rather that some minds can follow these methods and agree. (p.28)Progress in thinking is quite unexpected, and initially seems illogical.ONLY IN RETROSPECT DOES THE LOGIC OF NEW THINKING FALL INTO PLACE.

15.Looking forward, some as yet-unknown solution seems impossible, and often new hypotheses seem illogical.Looking backward, all logic falls into place.BUT THE POINT IS THAT NEW THOUGHT NEEDS ALL THE HELP IT CAN GET.Which is to say all of us must participate in attempting to inform ourselves as to what must be in the future, and to become willing to promote new, hopefully fruitful ideas.

…you should say, “I must do it.I must help it.I must wait for it.I must yearn for it.I must proclaim it.I must defend it.I must get these people up, and put other people down.”Then it may happen.Otherwise it won’thappen.(p.29) (Italics mine – RF)

Thus, all of us have a part, a responsibility to participate in advancing solutions to all social problems.AS YET THESE PRINCIPLES FOR A NEW TYPE OF SOCIAL SCIENCE ARE NOT COMMONLY ACCEPTED.

16.ERH’s final admonition in this chapter:

…your (traditional) ideas of adjustment (to social norms) is so ridiculous, because it would mean that no progress could ever be made. p.30

Lecture – 25

1.Both Catholicism and Protestantism have a place in the circulation of thought, but employ different approaches in their theology.This is a related issue to the purpose of this course, which is THE SOCIOLOGY OF KNOWLEDGE. It deals with society and the processes of education and teaching, which are neither philosophical nor religious problems.

ERH ASSERTS THAT THE READER NEEDS THE INSIGHT TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN PHILOSOPHY, RELIGION AND THEOLOGY. (p.1)

2.The philosopher attempts to explain or rule the world.He/she purports to have a system of thinking which will explain our experience, however narrow it may be. He therefore claims authority, and begins the day by saying “I” (will do or command, or preach or influence).

IT IS IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THAT, ALONG WITH THIS ROLE, THERE GOES THE OBLIGATION TO TAKE RESPONSIBILITY FOR ONE’S ACTIONS.Although wemust act in this role of the authority at times,unless speaking is accompanied by LISTENING, and accompanied by PLAY (rest),one is led to human cruelty. That is, authoritativeness all the time leads to tyranny.      ERH says, that Hitler could neither play nor listen, therefore he could approve the death camps. He was the supreme example of an egoist!

Teachers need to be authorities in their field of teaching; but this is a role that is assigned by society formally, or acquired by consent informally.

3.THE TERM “PHILOSOPHY” IS DEFINED TO MEAN ONE WHO KNOWS ALL THAT IS KNOWN ABOUT SOME SPECIFIC ISSUE. One then can claim the authority to philosophize about that issue, but not others. This is in sharp distinction with merely having a set of opinions about some subject. For example, in the formal sense the philosopher would be the recognized authority to speak philosophically about some subject.The term philosophy, then,is intended to describe a truly unique and specific role.

The true philosopher legitimately assumes this daunting position.He can be said to speak with a capitol “I” in his field.

4.The “I” or authority role is that of a minor god, and what goes along with it is objectivity, evaluation, and setting him/herself outside the situation at hand.”Any physicist who goes into his laboratory leaves his personal life at home.” (p.7)

5.His listeners, those to whom he may speak authoritatively, are in the second person pronoun, “you.” THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION is simply that in religion, God is assumed to be the creator of the universe,above everyone as “the” authority.

6.”Philosopher” is analogous to “scientist” in that both set themselves outside the subject they study, and ASSUME THE SUBJECTS WILL NEVER CHANGE, general principles being eternal.(“A” must always be “A”.)

BUT LIFE IS NOT LIKE THAT BECAUSE TOMORROW WE HUMANS MAY HAVE CHANGED, AND THEREFORE A SCIENCE OF SOCIETY MUST BE DIFFERENT FROM A SCIENCE OF “THINGS.”(Reflect on the structure of speech; in real life we can change from moment to moment from the role of a “you” to an “I” to “we” and,even to an “it” when we try to be objective about people. That is, the analytical role is by definition one that steps outside that which is being observed.

7.In theology and social science, as well, one is inescapablyboth subject and object at the same time.

8.What should be the basis, whether one is object or subject? At times the methods of natural science might be of help, but whenever the issue involves the status of relations between people, then values must take over.

Religion is the basis by which these decisions are made, when the role must be that of subject. In the subject role, one ismaking decisions about the status of one’s self.THUS, EVERYONE HAS A RELIGION OF SOME TYPE. It may be a weak religion, or a religion of death and destruction, but a religion unavoidably. (p.12)

9.One cannot assume to know everything. One’s philosophy tells one to act on one’s own, as an “I,” as a god.Arrogance leads to overdoing one’s own authority, however, and this in turn leads to superstition and self serving.

10.We live under two authorities, one from our man-made laws and another from powers outside us, which tell us what is just and right.Justice cannot be written into universal laws. All rules must be interpreted when applied, considering the circumstances. Law attempts to consider some circumstances, but social change always leads far ahead of legal revisions.

If we bind ourselves to follow rules, sans interpretation,we shrink from making refined decisions, which in turn reduces our freedom to be fully human.To follow rules strictly is to act as a mechanic, as a machine.A science of society must therefore not be based on laws of nature (which is to say philosophy), but on laws that will improve society,with justice, freedom,and respect.

When decisions are made, one must determine which authority is to be imposed, that of nature or that of some power outside us that tells us what is just and good.

…you need a theology and not a philosophy to interpret the relation of authority to the people who have to obey. (p.17)

11.Religion means —

“…the ties which work with the rest of the world, with our children, with our friends, with the government, with society…Theology improves religion. Science improves practice.” (p.17)

There is another important distinction to be remembered. With philosophy there is no admonition to act, only to think. It is the life of the mind that makes up that world. With religion one must act, get involved, participate in the community life.

In science one discovers the laws of nature. In theology one establishes concrete goals and strives to change in conscious ways. That is, in religion one both discovers and establishes rules. For instance, a scientific psychologist attempts to discover how humans “will” act.A religiously oriented person attempts to discover how humans “ought” to act.Because humans are part animal (i.e. natural), and part capable of being creative (i.e. part god), our behavior will be derived from both sources. But consciousness of the difference is crucial.

It seems obvious there is no separation betweens the authority of theology and that of secular rules. Most decisions should follow part of each.For instance, the Council of Nicaea in 787 determined that the state has the right to determine rules governing inheritance and other aspects of the disposition of physical property.The church was to decide who would get married and to pronounce the moral legitimacy of certain types of relationships.

12.There is little fundamental difference between Catholicism and Protestantism. Protestantism began at that moment in history when the correction of theology was put into the hands of all the members of the group.It represented a new approach, a sociological one if you will, as to the how basic religious doctrine would be interpreted. The Christian content, however, remains the same in both.

“We cannot afford any longer in the year 1954 to believe in the eternal separation of Roman Catholics and Protestants. …In a world in which nine-tenths of the people believe in nothing, the one-tenth cannot split itself into 10 different groups and say of each other they don’t believe in anything.(p.22)

…put Protestantism and Catholicism in its time sequence.The time sequence is that Protestantism completes, not the religious, but the theological cycle that was started with Anselm of Canterbury, that what Anselm and Abelard did was done by the few for the priests, that was given, in Protestantism, to everyone. (p.23)

12.Religion and theology constantly need improving, just as science and practice need it.

Another important distinction between religion and theology is that to know theology (theory) does not mean to have religion. To know about something does not mean one has experienced it first-hand. It may have come from a friend of his third cousin’s maid.

13.ERH also makes a distinction between a common spirit and an individual spirit. Without common spirit there is social anarchy, war, and decadence. Individual spirit is two things, the ability to exercise freedom of thought and practice. (p.30)

14.He asserts that teaching children too much theology arrests their ability to have a sophisticated view of religion.Their beliefs remain childish because children cannot understand theoretical arguments.Much earlier in this series of lectures he states that most Christians harbor the religion of a 6 year. old.

“the yardstick of a civilization is the obedience to that which cannot be enforced.” Lord Woolton.(p.31,32)

In other words, to have religion we freely make the decision that when made the other way, weakens both the individual and therefore the community.

Lecture – 26

1.To have an education separatesone from the community.To educate means to make one self-conscious of generalizing, capable of seeing objectively (and subjectively), to learn from the past and to anticipate and move toward a future development of society.

There is a dichotomy between thinking and doing.One who is very good at doing things usually lives only within his own time period, believing that individuals and society were always as he has experienced them. Education, if it is of quality, teaches one to grossly expand one’s experience from the beginning of recorded history, through the present and into the future. These perceptions do not necessarily prepare one to withstand the battering of everyday community life.

As a matter of fact, one’s excellence usually interferes with becoming more excellent. Although we must attempt to practice some humility, we need to understand this dichotomy.

2.To educate means to spread ideas, to stretch someone out in extending their knowledge in scope and depth and at the right time. TO EDUCATE MEANS ONE LEARNS TO INTERPRET KNOWLEDGE AND APPLY IT IN CONSIDERATION OF PRESENT AND FUTURE NEEDS FOR THE COMMUNITYWELFARE.

3.To educate means that one needs not only the knowledge of natural science, but also of a social science that provides guidance for decision-making.This must include a sense of social processes and the time they take to be fruitful.

ERH asserts that we are not now educated to understand these things.Just look at the state of our society and the others around the world.There seems to be no end to the states of poverty, crime, degeneration, anarchy, war, and the like. Natural science methods do not warn us against damage done by trying to change the time and timing of these processes. Children grow up too soon, kill, take drugs by age 10.Children bear children by age 10. Marriages are short-lived, as are many professional relationships.These and other social processes are out of kilter, and natural science methods have nothing to say about our conception of mis-timing in these matters. We instigate technology that constantly unbalances society, and no one is saying STOP.

4.ERH credits Jean Gerson with inventing the grammar school; his dream was that every child of Christendom should have schooling. He was the chancellor of the University of Paris, presiding at the Council of Konstanze in 1415. He said:

…it is more important to teach the children than these damn (older) students and the Ph.D.’s(p.9)

5.Considerable anarchy reigned within the church at that time. The theologians were split. Anselm and Abelard came on the scene 75 years. later.

Social change, progress, the evolution of institutions, the establishment of a common spirit among people that would be the foundation for peace in a community – all take timesometimes hundreds of years.But our present social science, applying the methods of natural science, does not allow us to understand or even see the timespans of these events.

6.To be sure, some things in society can be predicted by mathematical calculations. Probabilities of election results, the occurrence of certain diseases, the numbers of school drop-outs.But this tells us nothing of what “individuals” are likely to do.Society is treated as an inert mass of things, as predictably reacting automatons. Creativity does not occur en‑mass, it is individual. WHAT SHOULD A MORE VIABLE SOCIAL SCIENCE DO?

7.1), much of our social knowledge can only be empirically known.We cannot understand concepts that we have not already experienced. 2), It must account for the fact that all researchers cannot possibly position themselves outside society, therefore they cannot possibly be unbiased, or objective, or undogmatic about people.The very questions they raise for study are biased. All social research must therefore take into account the researcher. This is not true for research in natural science. 3), Nature is not rational; it has characteristics that can be learned. But mutations always occur, neverpredicted. 4), Natural science has no direction, but human societies do (or must if they are to become viable) – which is to say, we all desire peace, justice, equal treatment under the law as elements of our goals. 5), A principle social goal is to change and grow, to become something we have never been before, and to create social progress from generation to generation.”…the first thing you have to admit in the social sciences is that they imply the possibility of change.” (p.24)

6) With interpersonal relations there is always some authority – of parents, of managers, of professions that certify.In the natural world there is no authority directing phenomena. 7) In human relations our very social existence is founded on speech, on our ability to communicate, and therefore a viable social science must include speech as one of its principle elements.There is no speech between elements in nature. In social relations, the existence of peace or war, animosity or love explains much.There is no such concern in natural science.

8) A viable social science must be one in which the social scientist him/herself will be changed before he can hope to articulate something that is new and convince others of its truth. (p.31)

Such a social scientist must be a judge. He “…must be so taken with the issue at hand that he himself first remodels his own way before he can say to others what they should do.He is the test case in whom the response must work itself out into reality.” (p.32)In other words, social scientists must passionately believe that the welfare of society depends upon their work, and be willing to act on it. They must know and practice the value, that to speak the truth may require sacrifice on his part, and be willing to suffer the risk.

In natural science, we make the atoms move.In the social sciences, the scientists themselves move. (p.33)

8..In short, a viable science of society must require that all events, including his own, involve the whole man.In natural science only the scientist’s analytical and descriptive skills are required.

9.Finally, in natural science, laws (of nature) are discovered.In social life, laws are created through agreement, negotiation, and trust in order to create peace.Of course, those laws are constantly changed as man changes.

10.To repeat once again, a new type of social science must be centered on speech, on the articulation and circulation of truth, in the process of gaining lasting agreement as to the best rules for governing social relations and mores.

End of Lecture Series

CIRCULATION OF THOUGHT – 1949

Lectures 1-6
Feringer notes
Notes started: 4-97
Last edited: 12-98

Contents

Lecture 1

        WHY MUST SCIENCE AND RELIGION BE INTEGRATED TO MAKE OUR LIVES MORE FRUITFUL?

1/1″The Holy Spirit” always ties together two times, father & son; B.C.-A.D.; Old and New Testament; this is clearly expressed in the Trinity and in the law and grace. This means it takes two generations for change (ideas to be accepted by others, even if “others” means a small group).

2/1IF ONE IS TO CHANGE, one must divest him/her self of the old ways by acting on new ideas, “…the thinker must deliver the goods before he’s paid for them…”

Founders are those who take the first step before anyone else knows.  Often, perhaps always, one pays a heavy price of slander, persecution, being called insane. Abelard, Paracelsus, Jesus, Einstein are examples.

3/1Natural science is to be differentiated from teaching by the fact that the teacher teaches accepted (traditional) knowledge while searching for something new. The idea of research is just that (re-search) for new knowledge. THE IMPLICATION OF THIS  NOTION IS FUNDAMENTAL, that with teaching, students must be taught that at any moment knowledge might be overthrown.

4/1Theology is different from natural science.  THE DIFFERENCE IS IN  THE MEANING OF PARADOX. Theology, addressing only issues of social science, is filled with paradox; we are cruel and loving, we curse and forgive, we gain lasting social order (peace) by allowing one freedom ( only when one does something voluntarily will it last – in other words, only when one has accepted an idea into one’s spirit). The constant battles of life are between issues such as good and evil, between acceptance of a government and resistance, between war and peace, between punishment and forgiving, between just and unjust laws.  THESE ARE THE BASIC TYPES OF SOCIAL PROBLEMS EVERY GENERATION FACES.   THEOLOGY IS THE SCIENCE OF BRINGING CONCORDANCE  (RECONCILIATION) TO CONTRADICTIONS.

5.Teaching must be centered on what is important and what is unimportant, otherwise the next generation will have to learn by themselves, by re-inventing the foundations of society.

…the question of importance always involves a distinction between eternal values and immediate values.  You have always to pause if you wish to give importance to a legal question. (i.e. between the eternal and the temporary)  (p.6)

6.In the medieval university (1100 A.D. -1500) the teaching was between two opposing sides to an eternal social questions (for instance, how to resist tyranny). Eternal questions are in constant battle against the temporal (immediate) questions.

7.To deal with eternal questions  representing eternal values is to take a risk because the outcome of our actions is never known.  Our neighbor may respond to our love and tolerance by tyrannizing us, or even killing us.  We may give a stranger shelter, not knowing if he will rob us.  BUT WHAT TYPE OF  WORLD DO WE CREATE IF WE DO NOT FOLLOW THE ETHICAL MANDATES?  To take on and live such mandates is the essence of being “alive” spiritually. ERH contends that most people don’t live, they don’t face life’s problems, they merely exist physically as consuming organisms, using resources.

8.There is an important distinction here between academies and universities. With academies the battle is between old and new knowledge,  which compete. There must be a commitment to one or the other.  In the university the battle is between different points of view about eternal questions, and  here  disputation and concordance are taught.

Lecture 2

1/2From 1600 to 1800 universities (teaching) and academies (research institutions) were separate, then in 1800 research entered the university.  Here ERH points out the phases of new information from new idea to commonplace.  1) One man dares to have the laboratory, 2) this spread to scientific institutions with  research laboratories, 3) then universities build laboratories, and  4) finally, everyone can have a laboratory. (p.4)   [RF – in modern times these phases have just been reflected  in the evolution of the computer, but the time-span was much faster.]

3/2In social science the phases will be repeated, but by different methods. One can’t find human nature in the abstracted atmosphere of the laboratory, but it may be by “camps”, work service camps, summer camps, exploration camps.  (p.4)

3/3In the middle ages (500-1450) the old logic of Aristotle held forth, of syllogism (what ERH calls “lower logic”).  Higher logic is concordance:

…the concording is done where two minds think differently, but in unity of heart overcome their discord. (p.5)  (the principle of dialectical concording)

Lower logic begins with an assumption that cannot be proven (all men are mortal),   and proceeds, (Socrates was a man, therefore Socrates was mortal).  There are, of course as many logics as there are people who put forth assumptive premises, and there is no way to solve differences between the assumptions, except by commonly agreed – upon methods of proof over time.

4.ERH contrasts higher and lower logic with areas in the natural sciences, lower mathematics (arithmetic),  and higher math (the introduction of infinity and zero).  In another essay he contrasts lower grammar (vocabulary, rules of semantics, spelling, etc.) with higher grammar (the phases of social roles as  between thought and action, and  between speaker and listener). When the speaker gives orders he is acting as a god. The “I,” role ERH calls it. In the parlance of this higher grammar, the listener is “you.” When one addresses dead things, or things outside society,  the subject is treated as an”it.”  Parallel of the “it,”  in social science, is the third person,  objectively treated as the “outsider.”

5.The power to speak has 3 aspects, 1) theological, reflecting the role of  a truth-seeker,  2) a material aspect,  the content of the message, and 3) social,  the willingness of the speaker to address someone.

Lecture 3

3/1The church was not necessarily opposed to natural science; from 1450 to 1650 the Catholic church embraced the new science.  There was a  distinction between the academy (research, but not teaching) and university (teaching, but not research).  There was also a distinction between the future (new knowledge) and the past (what should be preserved).

(RF – I interpret ERH’s assertions to mean, That the  natural sciences grew out of the Middle ages (Catholic church), because previous to 1450 the churches created the university, which was teaching only about  past liturgical knowledge.   The academy, dedicated to creating new knowledge based on objectivity,  was a very different creature.

In 1550 the Jesuit universities taught the natural sciences, to identify the miracles of the natural world.  Today, (beginning in 1600)  the tendency is to go back to the pre-Jesuit phase of the university, which was theological only, as in the time of St. Thomas Aquinas.

Since the evolution of academies, which were subsumed by the modern universities, the focus of universities shifted away from teaching.  THE UNIVERSITIES TODAY, ASSERTS ERH, HAVE FORGOTTEN THAT THEY EVOLVED FROM A CONCERN FOR ETHICS AND THEOLOGY.

2.If to live in the future is to be liberal, and to live in the past is conservative, either of these extremes is impossible.

They (liberals), have denied their own tree out of which they have grown…a liberal today is the most unhealthy creature in the world.  He has a background of only a hundred years; and that’s too short for any mind to be healthy…Liberalism…in this country means that a liberal can be without the conservatives.  Now that’s impossible.  (p.3)

In other words, modern liberals fail to make the distinction between what should be preserved from the past and carried forward, and what should be forgotten. That is why their prescriptions are impossible!

He goes on to say that the modern liberals force a choice between atheism and the old religion, this isolating each from the other.

3.The evidence of liberalism is all around us.  Liberals send their children to Sunday school or church, but don’t go themselves.  Knowledge in the university is taught with no references to the ethical considerations for practice.  There is little or no willingness to make sacrifices for principles. Little is sacred, thus, there is little motivation to make the extraordinary effort (sacrifice) to establish peace, or to save a marriage, to save the environment, or to concern oneself with the plight of the homeless.

In other words, the practice of ethics in an effort to create a better community takes an “infinite effort,”  and that  liberals are no longer inclined to do.

4.For instance, it is a very traditional thought to suggest that change, the creation of a new future and  human growth, can be achieved:

…without an infinite investment.  Because the three powers by which we create — love, faith, and hope — when they are treated as parts of space and time. (p.6)

In scientific and technological thinking, liberalism dominates and guide our values today. And at the other extreme, the so called super-religionists (fundamentalists?) separate their beliefs from the consequences of practice, believing that all will be right in heaven.  WHERE THEN IS THE MOTIVATION TO ACT “WITH INFINITE INVESTMENT” IN EITHER CASE?  “Doing God’s work,” as traditional religionists spout, is too abstract, and infers absolute guides for action out of the context of our everyday life.   Liberalism, on the other hand, sets human judgement, with all its frailties as an absolute standard.   (i.e. growth only in terms of physical amenities). After 1789, the scientific curriculum in the universities was considered totally sufficient. (p.10)

5.Academies of the middle ages, as research institutions, were intolerant of the religion of their member;  they would not tolerate science being guided by ethics.  The Liberals say, “You are the captain of your Soul.”  On the other hand, belief in the Holy Spirit posits, “The Holy Spirit is captain of your Soul.” Before 1789, the Catholics were not hostile to research, but they couldn’t tolerate the beliefs of non-Catholic researchers.  THE RESULT WAS A SEPARATION OF THEOLOGY FROM SCIENCE. (p.9)

Nobody is captain of his soul, or he has no soul.  Soul is your part in God. And how can you be the captain of your soul, the one thing with which you are not yourself, but better than yourself…”I am captain of my soul” condemns a man not only to loneliness and isolation, but it condemns him even to supervise his only growing point, his soul…from the point of his mind. (p.12)

Inspiration, intuition, the source of creativity does not derive from logic.

“The decision is whether the mind, which is fixed, shall govern growth, or whether it shall not…The mind is insufficient for making peace and for begetting children. (p.13)

6.The result of this separation was a continuing atomism of knowledge into separate compartments, between disciplines, and especially between science and values.

7.Three sources of enmity between science and religion:

a.1500 – 1640: Protestants say salvation comes from purifying the church. (Luther)  Protestants were against science.  Then, beginning with Descartes, the scientists said,  “purify the mind to better see the world around us.”

b.1640 – 1789: Catholics oppose cooperation with Protestants. “They don’t want to let their sheep lie with the wolves.” (p.15)

c.1789 – 1940:  the liberal mind of the scientist wants to subjugate the soul,  and the soul is lowered to the position of the “psyche.”

8.The anticipated consequence of accepting the basic tenets of science as a guide to social analysis:

aBrotherhood of all scholars.

b.The right of all men to benefit by the findings of this brotherhood.

c.Progress in science meant progress in life.

d.The public will sacrifice for scientific truth.

The actual consequence was:

a.This belief was exploded along with the atomic bomb (after 1940); some stayed with science, some were guided by ethics first.

b.All mankind did not benefit from every discovery because unprincipled people can use the knowledge for evil.

c.Monopolies formed and technological progress did not necessarily benefit mankind.

d.The masses don’t like truth, they preferred their legends.

IN SUM, THE BASIC TENETS OF SCIENCE ARE NO LONGER UNIVERSALLY BELIEVED TO BE VALID AS GUIDES TO SOCIAL THOUGHT, I.E. TO PROGRESS IN THE COMMUNITY.

9.The tenets of the chapel are:

aMankind is one; the human race must be seen in solidarity.

bProgress is possible if guided by the Holy Spirit.  Mankind can better itself by this method.

cProgress will benefit mankind when its end is peace based on voluntarily accepted ethics.

dThe clergy and laity are identical in their purposes.  Scientists can be bought by governments or private interests.  This could never be accepted as valid for churches.

KNOWLEDGE SHOULD MEAN SERVICE IS  ABOVE POWER.  “WITHOUT CHAPEL, SCIENCE BELONGS TO THE PIGSTY.” (p.19)

10.There must be mutual dependency between science and the chapel. Ethics, ungrounded in concrete behavior and observation of consequences are just as unthinkable as knowledge unbridled by standards.

ERH asserts that today the basic tenets of the chapel are unpracticed, and we see other races and socio-economic groups as different.  He gives an example in law of the relationship between the judge and judged to show the principle of the solidarity of the human race is essential for justice.

Lecture – 4

1/4The goal of human effort is to bear fruit, to create a society at peace.  A fruitful individual (a person whose thought bears fruit in others) is a person who can serve three basic roles, as a teacher, as a ruler and as a parent. (p.1/4)

2/4Knowledge devoid of charity and love is poison!  Here ERH makes the point that knowledge, put to use by and for greed destroys the society.

The idea is that scientists, and by inference all persons who create new knowledge must be guided by the four  dogmas of the chapel described in the previous chapter.

3.Creating new knowledge is always a risk to one’s own reputation, but if truth is sought in charity and love, one is willing to take such risk.  Thus, ethical belief always must control one’s dogma, as it “…prunes the tree of knowledge…”  Pruning  just as with trees, directs and engenders finer growth.  This occurs with:

…only people whose knowledge is so pruned, so ennobled, so cultivated that they will bear the brunt of slander, of false appearances, of misunderstanding. (p.4)

A man who has never been misunderstood has never said anything important. (p.5)

Man is at his best when he is in danger, second best when at work, third best with friends, and fourth best when alone without anything to do.  “The modern fiction is that man at leisure is better than at work.  That’s the opposite..” (p.5)

4Science will not survive if the four tenets (and a 5th, “let there be science”) are not followed.  These are ethical tenets, not from science but from theology, and supported by the Catholic church before 1500.  Without them science would collapse, rotting from the inside out, raising questions that do not bear fruit, cutting off communication between scientists, eliminating trust between the laity and the scientists. WHEN THE FIVE  TENETS ARE PRACTICED, THEY ARE COMPLETELY COMPATIBLE WITH CHRISTIANITY!

ERH contends that every one of the 4 are abandoned in this country.

5″…a decent man in the circulation of thought always tries to make himself superfluous.”  Thus, a good scientist always shares his discoveries with others.

6The circulation of thought, by its very process as described by these tenets, transforms thought. It is the seed of the apple, the link between the old and new tree.

One should manifest this idea by speaking on an important issue,  saying  in public what needs to be said and what nobody else is saying. For instance, in a city Council meeting one might need to say:

“I have to tell you that you are corrupt.”  That’s not intellectual,..but that is taking upon yourself in a personal expression…what before you thought everybody knew, and which has not been forgotten, and which you now have to bring back into circulation. (p.13)

7.”The miracle in creation is man.  And the miracle of man is that he grows.  And the miracle of man is that he grows in season, when the time has come in his life.” (p.15)

By this ERH means that we grow when we speak the truth at the right time, at the time when it will impress others to act in the right way, in a way that allows others (the community) to benefit.

8.St. Augustine said there are four ways to love; love above himself, love himself, love that which is like himself, and love below himself (people and creatures over-which he has power).  These four tenets must underlay our thought. Loving those below us gives us humility and also admits we must be wards of those we can control, such as children and animals and other life. Love truth and believe in its importance.

a.To love truth means also that we are willing to be guided by our teachers and by the Holy Spirit, and to listen to authorities, who by definition speak the truth.

b.To love ourselves means that we are willing to speak out, to respect ourselves, to see ourselves one day as authority.

To awake every morning and have to look at the world as though we had never seen it before, is to be willing to renew ourselves and grow.

Uninteresting is a man who thinks he is already in existence.  Interesting is a man who thinks he has never existed before today. (p.18)

You can’t love yourself if you have no secret.  You need to say “I know something which other people don’t know about me…The only interesting people are those who still  don’t know who they are.” (p.18)  That is, they are still growing.

We love ourselves most when we give to others, when we sacrifice for the community.  And we must love ourselves before we can love others.

9.In sum, we must love authority (above us), we must love ourselves, we must love our comrades, and we must love below us. (When we fall, we are “below” our normal selves, and to resurrect ourselves we must be willing to love ourselves in this state; as we do with others.

Lecture 5

1/5A “concept” or a “sphere of thought” or an “arena” within which some theory functions (what ERH calls a “cycle”) is always unique to any “problem,” and the method cannot exceed those boundaries. e.g. The laws for arithmetic cannot comprehend infinitely small, or infinitely large conceptions, these must be handled by a new system called “higher mathematics”.

THE POINT HE MAKES IS THAT EACH CYCLE IS UNIQUE AND REQUIRES ITS OWN METHOD, AND THERE IS NEVER A LOGICAL CONNECTION BETWEEN THESE GAPS. The rules (logic) for one level of thought in a given system never leads us to rules for the other. One must make a “jump” mentally.  [RF, -These concepts have everyday application. They are consistent with some of my own work focusing on criteria for problem formulation.]

2/5Logic is always based on a founding proposition that cannot be proven, but must be assumed. Thus, there are as many “logics” as there are propositions. ERH points out that in society, there are an infinite number of individual “logics.”  Syllogisms therefore have no power to answer the larger question of HOW TO INTEGRATE CYCLES. Such principles always derive from specific situations.

For instance, examining the commonly known  Socratic syllogism; All men are mortal… ERH CONTRADICTS THIS LOGIC BY POINTING OUT THAT SOCRATES IS MORE THAN MERE FLESH AND BLOOD.  His spirit has lived on. “You are a man plus something else.” (p.3)

3/5ERH also points out that labeling an individual tends to associate him/her within a logical context from which it is difficult to escape. He cites the case of an accused person in danger of being found guilty, solely because of the accusation.

ERH proceeds to show how the great achievement of the middle ages was to find a (CONCORDANCE), a method of freeing individuals from these labels.  The simple method is to place one’s self in the position of the other, then judge their behavior. (p.4)

The super-logic of the conscience means that the man whom I am judging is inside myself.  As soon as you have this conscience, you have two starting points to judge any event in the world,…the man as he appears from the outside. And you have the man as you identify yourself with from the inside. (p.5)

4THIS POINT OF VIEW MAKES AN ENORMOUS DIFFERENCE IN THE WAY ONE JUDGES EVENTS IN LIFE.  One sees an event from both inside and outside.  In one instance the inside may be most important, and in another, the opposite.  TO LIVE A MORAL LIFE, TO EVOLVE A SOUL, TO HAVE ONE’S SPIRIT LIVE INTO THE FUTURE, one must apply super logic and assume that physical death is only one factor in one’s entering eternity.  Conscience and evidence must be weighed and balanced in decision making.

From the year 1100 on there were distinctions made between evidence (outside) and intent (inside).

5.The phrase, “the brotherhood of man” is not empty, but an indication of our relations with our fellow humans.

ERH points out that today in the U.S. we are reverting back to evidence only. [RF – For example, the persistent, seemingly indiscriminate practice of judgment in American courts of   “not guilty by virtue of technical error”  in cases where the defendant is guilty of a crime.

Likewise, any evidence of social separation, by race, creed, etc. between churches, is an example of grouping by (outside) criteria only.  Originally the Catholic Church saw Christianity as the universal religion.  Concordance teaches us to see from both inside and outside.

The brotherhood of early scientists (before 1500) “…had to be prepared by the development of a highly refined conscience…scientific progress in the Middle Ages, is based on the identification with all men. (p.8)

6.Anselm of Canterbury laid down four propositions for Concordance:

a.Paradox:  Although Anselm prayed to God, he admitted to only knowing the absence of God. Thus, his application of super-logic, that at times we act “in the presence of God,” (morally), and at other times we do not. Or at times we act from conscience, and at others, by our logic (of self preservation). “So the paradox is, that God is omnipresent and omni-absent.” (p.10)  So, also, we must conclude that the evidence of God on a purely physical level is not enough.

“God is not to be seen in our consciousness.  You can only have Him in your conscience.” (p.13)    The mind can only grasp things which are “beneath man.” (p.14)

b.Progress is possible only through super-logic. The law of concordance in science is that we go from knowledge to ignorance, that we set aside (forget) the known and begin again with a clean mental slate.  All great leaps in science have followed this method.  THIS IS CROSSING THE GREAT GAP MENTIONED ABOVE, THE ABYSS OF IGNORANCE, IN ORDER TO PROGRESS.  As the old propositions are never broad enough to solve the new problem at hand, the old proposition is therefore “primitive logic.”  And such creativity is the meaning of the term RE-search.

Lecture – 6

1/6Continuing the #b proposition of concordance, all of work exists in the context of other persons with different points of view. Doubting, leading, teaching, protesting, etc. all take place in relation to other people.

2/6Regarding timing, teachers, leaders (founder of new institutions) must suspend hope for acceptance for their ideas in their own life times.

3/6We never possess “our own mind”.

“The mind is our participation in the social process of thinking.  What you call your mind, is only the reflection of your relation to the thinking of humanity.” (p.3)

Once we discover that our thinking makes us a part of the thinking of mankind we are set free. [RF – I am reminded of Hegel’s aphorism, “Freedom begins with a recognition of necessity.”]  This forms a unity of mankind because humans at their best wish to think “the” truth, about valid (significant) things. This is a social concept, not a scientific one.

4.Religious truth, or eternal truth takes a lifetime to come true.  Mathematical truths are unrelated to time.

Social truth (eternal truth) cannot be proven by what had gone on before, because it is constantly evolving to the end of time. It must “grow into” the thinking of people. It must be re-proven each generation.  [RF – Racial prejudice, for example, is still acceptable in most of the world, recently renewed in Serbia and Croatia.

In order for social truth to have universal participation, everybody must be ready for it. It only becomes part of our lives when we put it into practice.

5Fruitful thinking, creative thinking begins when self-interest has been set aside. We must admit that we are cowards, that there is a struggle to find truth, that we must overcome our cowardice  by being indifferent to danger (of speaking and acting on our truth), by overcoming our fear and trembling.

6Today the rules of eldership are threatened; we need to look for those powers that create the relation between one man and the seed of an idea, and the next man in whom that seed is likely to bear fruit.  THIS IS THE PURPOSE OF TEACHING.

7[RF – ERH now touches on “super-grammar,” the grammatical method, whereby, in the context of this lecture, the first stage for us (listening to authority), engenders the next stage (action, transforming the listening “you” into an acting “I”), then the next stage, acceptance by others, when the “I” turns into a “we”.]

8These three stages of “setting down roots” are analogous to the trilogy — the father, son and Holy Spirit. The role of the son is to  listen when addressed as “you,” of then later acting as god “I,” and of instilling the idea into others, “we.”  These three stages are reflected in a circulation of thought:

His youth, where he must trust in something waiting for him eternally; the adult man’s interest in manipulating in the world around him and mastering it; and the necessity of bearing fruit in future times when we ourselves are no longer alive, of surviving in our thought, since we cannot survive in the flesh. (p.13)

In carrying through these stages we achieve the goals of teaching, to pass on the keeping  of all of the features that universities, academies, and future social thinking require.  BUT THEIR PURPOSE IS TO DEVELOP CONSCIENCE IN THE INDIVIDUAL. THAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS “MEDIEVAL CYCLE.” (p.13)

9These stages are difficult to achieve, but they represent fruitfulness. Fruitfulness in the individual means devotion to seeking the truth and having the courage to speak it at the right moment.

But fruitfulness does not only depend upon the individual, it also depends upon  responses from the rest of mankind, on laity, and rulers.

10The scientist needs three disciplines to be fruitful – law, theology, and politics. In addition to science, he requires  a super-grammar and a super-logic, as described above.

11.(p.19) ERH confirms the centrality of the problem statement as the fundamental basis for organizing all knowledge.

Circulation of Thought – 1949 – Review

It is a truism to point out that how we think effects every corner of our lives. In this essay Rosenstock-Huessy raises the question, “How can we make our lives fruitful?”  His answer is through circulating thought.  But the statement raises many more questions than it answers.  Thought becomes transformed into helping us see and understand our experience more clearly when it proceeds through certain stages and those stages are not based on logic, but rather Concordance.  The thrust of this essay is to provide a detailed description of how Concordance is to take place.  The issues covered overlap considerably with those covered in his UNIVERSAL HISTORY, that is, teaching, theology differentiated from science, how we change, the university differentiated from the academy, the centrality of time, and of speech and the like.  But the cast of these issues are given meaning as they relate to how a society at peace with itself is to be created, and in turn, how thought must be  regenerated to achieve that end.

 

NOTES ON SELECTED ESSAYS OF ROSENSTOCK-HUESSY

Introduction
7-00 Feringer notes

Contents

Apology

This volume contains detailed notes on forty essays of Rosenstock-Huessy,  including his  lecture transcripts, books, and unpublished works.  Although these works represent only a fraction of the,  over six hundred listings in the Complete Bibliography  of his writings, as compiled by Lise van der Molen, I believe they represent the major outlines of his new method for social analysis, which he called  The Grammatical Method. These notes are intended to serve as an introduction to his thought, not as a substitute for reading the original manuscripts from which they were taken.

Such extensive notes for the works of a writer are uncommon, but in this case should not be perceived as a casual intellectual effort. One might well ask, “Why would one bother to shoulder such a considerable effort?”  There are two reasons.  When I was first introduced to Rosenstock-Huessy’s thought I was living under the dark cloud of an intellectual quandary. That is to say, I was trying to understand my own experience in the context of a world that seemed out of kilter.  Listening to Rosenstock-Huessy’s recordings was the beginning of an awakening.  His words reflected remarkable  insight into many significant questions in my own life about which I had given much thought, but had yet little understanding.  I was not long out of formal schooling.   While the technical education I had received was adequate as vocational training, the increasing problems of society, – environmental destruction, war, poverty, institutions in every field no longer effective in carrying out their professional purpose, – seemed overwhelming to the point of predicting dark future for society.  The prevailing blind faith in the primary methods for creating a healthy, viable society, science and  “free enterprise,”  has proven to be a foundation of sand.   Perhaps the most spiritually enervating notion I could not put out of my thoughts was that, what one might expect to be the guardian of social sensitivity,  institutionalized religion had seemed to have lost sight of its purpose and therefore proven no more viable than any other institution.

Rollo May sums up best our present social malaise:

The old  myths and symbols by which we orient ourselves are gone, anxiety is rampant; we cling to each other and try to persuade ourselves that what we feel is love; we do not will because we are afraid that if we choose one thing or one person we’ll lose the other, and we are too insecure to take that chance.  The bottom then drops out of the conjunctive emotions and processes—of which love and will are the two foremost examples.  The individual is forced to turn inward, he becomes obsessed with the new form of the problems of identity, namely  even-if-I-know-who-I-am, I-have-no-significance.  I am unable to influence others.  The next step is apathy.  And the step following that is violence.  For no human being can stand the perpetually numbing experience of his own powerlessness. [Love and Will,  Delta, 1989 edition, pp. 13,14]

This foreboding sense of society, then, was the context into which I heard Rosenstock-Huessy’s words Although at first  my understanding was superficial, intuition accurately foretold of the profundity he was speaking.  Although many others had spoken out about these same problems, either no solutions were suggested, or when solutions were given they proved to be completely inadequate, – narrow and fragmented, or so theoretical as to have lost any connection with reality.  Listening to Rosenstock-Huessy was vastly different, however, motivating further study of his work.  What followed in subsequent years was the most enlightening, empowering intellectual journey of my life.  I quickly came to perceive that Rosenstock-Huessy described a much grander canvas of human experience and its meaning and  I came to experience the transformation that took hold of W.H. Auden,  who said, “Speaking for myself, I can only say that, by listening to Rosenstock-Huessy, I have been changed.”   Or, as Paul Tillich said to Phillip Chamberlin, “Rosenstock-Huessy! When he speaks, it’s like lightening.”

These notes represent part of an extensive study requiring detailed note-taking.  At this point I must emphasize that these are notes, in contrast to a more tightly organized flowing, and condensed essay which would be my personal interpretation. These notes were taken in preparation for that project.  Notes are, by nature, somewhat cryptic, redundant and eliminating the rich and abundant examples in the original works.

The newcomer to Rosenstock-Huessy’s thought will find other barriers to overcome along the way.

Difficulties in Reading Rosenstock-Huessy

Extracting the gold in Rosenstock-Huessy’s essays requires work and careful thought, especially for the new reader.  When I began this study I felt off-balance,  overwhelmed with strikingly new ways of thinking about human experience.  One constantly struggles for reference points to guide understanding of the texts.  New thought, by definition, immediately forces one to find and learn those reference points.  New ideas either call for new terminology, which abounds in Rosenstock-Huessy’s writing, or re-defining of old terminology.  In reading his essays, for instance,  one experiences an education in the Latin and Greek origins of the English language.

Another difficulty of understanding Rosenstock-Huessy lies in needing to absorb the rich dose of intermingling of many significant issues at one time.  We are traditionally prepared to deal with one issue at a time, clearly stated, with a modicum of sequential logic and flow of thought.  But in his essays one is likely to be confronted with issues of speech, philosophy, religion, history, teaching, the nature of man, psychology, and sociology in various combinations.  For instance, in this age of scientific thinking one tends to be shocked to run across constant religious references.  As a result, one might be tempted to “write him off” as some kind of zealot whose writing of serious essays in social science seems out of place.  Such an impression could hardly be more off the mark. When one considers this seemingly strange injection of subject matter, one should realize, as did I, that no knowledge has meaning or power until it is acted upon, at which time it affects society and therefore takes on moral implications. Traditionally, we are taught to study knowledge out of the context of use,  which neither prepares us for application nor gives us all its meaning.  Rosenstock-Huessy is not interested in intellectual gamesmanship;  scholarship is only validated in use, he reminds us,  by way of the consequences of its use.  This assumption becomes a powerful force in sending one’s thinking onto a new level, a level that harbors the potential to become powerful enough to transform the reader.

Rosenstock-Huessy wrote and spoke with an enormously powerful style, but this quality also harbors some difficulties in understanding and getting used to.  George Morgan, in his incisive work, SPEECH AND SOCIETY: writes:

He struck me as a man of genius, full of striking insights, his language wonderfully alive. …At the same time his language was more puzzling than that of anyone I had read, far more than Nietzsche’s.  Flashes of meaning would catch my eye, then disappear around the corner before I could focus on them.  It was clear that he was not getting through to his readers as he should….He told me he suffered agonies from having too much to say. (p.ix,xi)

This is not an uncommon problem with all original thinkers, as I suggested above.  But  I have come to believe that his rhetorical style was as original as other elements of his thinking.  His speech and writing  weaves a rich tapestry,  describing the human condition by way of intertwining the two opposing languages of art and science.  Art, whatever its form, has as its purpose portraying the emotional experience of an event.  Science, on the other hand,  describes the structure and analysis of the event. Metaphor is emotionally powerful, but somewhat vague in that one can take several meanings from a given word. Science seeks precision, on the other hand.  Art attempts to achieve accuracy in gaining a feeling of living the idea and therefore needs an infinite variety of tones and color and a flow of events in time. Science attempts to achieve accuracy in describing space, where precision must be specific as possible. .  The blending integrates at once the mind and the heart.  We are certainly not taught to deal with this style, but there is a rich reward when one melds it into one’s soul.

Here is one example from a translation of his SOZIOLOGIE,  “In The Cross of Reality”:

All “men” kill, because they must seize living things in order to live.  And all men die.  So nothing that happens could become history if there were no cure for death…The history of mankind is composed on one theme alone:  how does love become stronger than death?  The scores of this composition, in the histories, must be copied in as many editions as there are generations of men.  For the composition is recomposed by those in every generation whose love overcomes a death or a murder.

What an intriguing way to begin an essay! At once emotionally and intellectually compelling, I take this essay, in sum, to develop the idea of how we mortals, afraid to die, seek to achieve a form of everlasting life, and in the process, a path in the course of everyday living, to “being alive.” For instance, Socrates died physically twenty-five hundred years ago, but his spirit has come down through the ages and still invests us with its intellectual power today.  The logic of the development of this essay I found compelling.

Rosenstock-Huessy dares, in this age of science, to introduce religion into the theme of eternal life.  The message of Jesus was used as an example to show how normal mortals can be transformed by a spirit that lasts beyond our death.    When I showed this, and a number of other passages to a poet friend, her response was, “This is not prose, it is poetry.”  Likewise, ERH’s epic work OUT OF REVOLUTION begins, “Our passions give life to the world. Our collective passions constitute the history of mankind.”

George Morgan goes on to say:

He often started a train of thought, then digressed to another, and may or may not have pursued the former in another paragraph, another chapter, or another book.  He made unqualified statements that he qualified elsewhere.  … when I raised questions he was never at a loss for a prompt answer. (p.xi)

However enigmatic and powerful, the reader inevitably struggles in some essays a bit, essays which one would hope had been better organized. .  So I admonish any reader who has not already become captivated by the power of Rosenstock-Huessy’s thought, to persist; the reward will be more than worth the effort. Some essays are beautifully organized, and some less so. But like anyone prospecting for gold, one may find the pure metal at one time, rich ore at another, and even less rich ore at still other times.  In sum, I have found the ore as rich as it gets.

I found the best way to overcome these  problems was to make detailed notes because my normal reading habits, geared as they were for the traditional logic of the essay style, were not  adequate for picking up many of the subtleties crucial to understanding  Rosenstock-Huessy’s texts.

The Process of Note-Making

When taking these notes, I attempted to put Rosenstock-Huessy’s ideas into my own words and make personal comments when it seemed necessary.      After beginning this process I began showing some of the notes to others in an effort to get feedback.  Each original essay was read at least three times; some required even  more study.  Each set of notes has been edited at least twice; most were revised in the process.  Where possible I asked readers to read the original essay, then, compare it with the notes.  One must be conscious of the fact that each of us is inevitably biased, but consciousness of that bias allows one to take this into consideration.  My hope is that with these precautions the notes in this anthology are as creditable as possible.   I am indebted to those who read the notes and made suggestions along the way.

The Grouping and Sequence of Titles

Any form of categorizing represents a point of view – assumptions about reality  whether this is done either consciously or unconsciously.  The order I suggest here is no different.  After two decades of concentrated study of Rosenstock-Huessy’s essays, a unifying framework began to piece together in my mind which seems to be confirmed with each new reading.  I believe that  keeping the following points in mind might help the reader formulate his/her own sense of the elegance and comprehensiveness of this Grammatical Method.  Keeping this “world view” in mind helped me put difficult-to-understand and seemingly isolated topics into a single context, thereby aiding in my overall comprehension.  Actually the individual essays took on additional meaning.

Another tool to understanding I found confirming was to overlay the statement inherent in each essay onto my own life experience and interpret how validly it seemed to fit.  I found both of these techniques useful to interpreting his writing.

I suggest the following assumptions to keep in mind as a starting point for the reader:

1.     The Grammatical Method addresses our ever-present problem of understanding our experience.  As such,  it subsumes all  disciplines, scientific and artistic, into a new method for interpreting the meaning of social experience. It is not a new natural science, or theology,  but  integrates both, and as with all integrating theories functions at the next higher level..  It builds on traditional knowledge, but by adding a new dimension (the study of knowledge in the context of use) it  changes the meaning of these disciplines and adds  power to them in the course of proposing a new science of society.

2.     All thought and action is given meaning only in the consequence of  use.  This means that society cannot be judged without an idea of what a viable, regenerating society might be.  I believe, then, that the constant question in Rosenstock-Huessy’s mind has been, “How do we create a viable community, one that engenders human survival and growth?”  The litmus for evaluation of  any community is the degree to which it is  at peace with itself.  Only thus can humans grow and evolve to their optimal potential.  War and other social diseases that would end human society as we know it demand  our attention, thereby arresting, for the particular moment in history,  our progress toward improvements in society.  The ever-present threat to society is that these social diseases will ultimately cause death when unattended.  Thus, the unifying principle that integrates these essays is how each  fits into social struggles for survival and movement toward the goal of  peace.

3.     Human beings are everlastingly unfinished.  As we grow,  we comprehend a greater reality and thereby alter our goals; ideals and the interpretation of past experience (history) must therefore undergo constant revision.  The ebb and flow of movements in history is, however, filled with both progress and retrogression. Any great change can mean a leap forward or slide backward.  Nazism and civil wars in Yugoslavia, Rowanda, and Cambodia in recent history have testified to a reversion to savagely primitive forms of behavior.   Because political and social environments change,  no particular solution lasts more than a generation.  The great problem of every age is to figure out what new responses are called for.  In short, how must society  recreate itself to remain viable?  To follow the old ways no longer viable is to decline, inevitably. The very nature of humanness is that we are  beings capable of change.

The seven categories into which I group Rosenstock-Huessy’s work are arbitrary, of course.  As I continue to study Rosenstock-Huessy, I will no doubt decide on revisions that make more sense to me, as I have in the past.  This is merely the latest generation of ideas; however, I am firm in my conclusion as to the unifying concept, i.e.,  the regenerating community.   There are many other issues he examines in detail such as love, time, art, religion, space, etc.  However, these themes are ubiquitous throughout.  George Morgan has already written an excellent book, Speech and Society, which summarizes Rosenstock-Huessy’s several definitions of these other themes.

No particular meaning should be imposed as to the sequence of categories, except what seems to flow logically for the understanding of  topics.  Religion is not more important than science, teaching, or history.  Within each category the essays are listed  chronologically.

 

1.     Reality

What are the fundamental worlds of reality that human beings experience?  The Cross of Reality symbolizes  the structure he found that would  reveal  the  qualities of conscious experience. We live in three worlds of time (past, present, and future) and two worlds of space (thought and the physical world). The key to opening these worlds lies through speech, which can only be created in community. Therefore,  we cannot conceive of ourselves only as individual as it is not possible for us to become human without community.  We must think of ourselves in terms of four different social roles   –  as “ourselves singularly,”  as a partner in intimate relationships, as a member of a working team, and as a member of a community.  At any given moment one must make a decision as to which of these four roles is to be the dominant one for an appropriate response. But decision-making, with the accompanying change it may imply,  is no simple event.  These  processes require an inner power to overcome the seemingly overwhelming forces marshalled against change.  To see more of reality is to be capable of seeing the world anew each day.  Powering renewal is “the practical function of our soul. ”

As a result of speaking with Rosenstock-Huessy and reading his essays,  I have constantly marvelled at how much he learned from his experience and at his power to see and understand a scope of reality vastly beyond my own.  The root of this power is described, I believe, by his Grammatical Method,particularly in the following works:

a. The Multiformity of Man – 1948

b. Cross of Reality – 1953

c. Grammatical Method – 1962

d. Cross of Reality – 1965

e. Economy of Times – 1965

f. Speech and Reality – published 1970

g. Practical Knowledge of the Soul – published 1988

 

2.     Speech, Language, and the Circulation of Thought

Speech is another  fundamental,   leading to  the creative ability to become conscious of a reality  far above the animal state in which we are born.  It is the gateway, the “open sesame”  leading to our consciousness of  our inner reality of thought.  Through our ability to communicate we become capable of naming and, thereby,  re-creating the concrete world in a new world of consciousness.   In the process we become capable of  learning from our own experience,  from others,  and from the experience of past cultures.  Such consciousness is essential in the creation of a future. Quite literally, naming  “creates the reality” of  both the  inner and outer (concrete) worlds in which we live.  Because speech creates our consciousness of these worlds, its patterns reflect the vitality of  any community at a given point in time.  Studying how speech is used, or not used, then identifies social  break-downs,  thereby identifying  cures.  The following works address  this issue:

a.  Circulation of Thought – 1949

b.  Circulation of Thought – 1954

c.  Circulation of Thought – 1956

d.  St. Augustine by the Sea – 1962

e.  Lingo of Linguistics 1966

f.  The Origin of Speech – 1981

 

3.     History

If one were to awaken each morning with amnesia one would be dysfunctional until an accumulation of experience offered reference points for judging the meaning of events.  The temptation of human nature is to live in the present only, because thinking in terms of the long range, of creating one’s future imposes discipline on behavior in the present.  History is the memory we possess of a culture and ultimately of all humankind.  The ability to make judgments about the meaning of the present and plan for the future of any individual or culture is in direct proportion to length of their historical memory.  The value of historical knowledge is, of course, never complete because new experience and new insights must alter our interpretation of past events.  This is not to say that the events themselves are altered, but our interpretation of their meaning is changed,  the cause and effects, especially long range effects are the source of new knowledge  crucial to survival.  It represents the case-study, so to speak, of human experience – the scope of  what we have been capable of as well as  patterns of lessons to be learned.  When one sees the similarity of cultures throughout time one is hard-pressed not to  believe that “humankind  is one” and conclude that the histories of all cultures are universal.  All cultures are telling different elements of the same story.   Questions arising today that  effect our future, put to history, offers a record of what types of problems persist, which type are ephemeral – and all of this becomes a beginning point for solving present problems in a way that moves us toward a more desired future.  Time then is a key to understanding social experience and it must be understood as a single fabric  Essays by Rosenstock-Huessy on history are the following:

a.  Universal History – 1949

b.  Universal History – 1951

c.  Hinge of Generations – 1953

d.  Universal History – 1954

e.  History Must be Told – 1955

f.   Universal History – 1956

g.  Universal History – 1967

h.  Cruciform Character of History – 1967

 

4.     Teaching

Teaching, Rosenstock-Huessy asserts, necessarily lies  at the heart of any science of society. If  humankind cannot inspire the next generation to carry on the movement toward peace, toward maintaining the hard-won success from the past  (such as justice, equality, the rule of law, of how to be creative),  we are certainly doomed.  If the next generation is not taught how to battle against the constant debilitation of  the ever-present causes of social diseases (war, revolution, anarchy, and degeneration),  that generation declines toward the level of other animals whose ability to grow dies with each generation.  And when this occurs, social life always begins again with the laws of the jungle.  Man must therefore teach these lessons!  The following works address Rosenstock-Huessy’s ideas on teaching:

a.  Andragogy – 1925

b.  In the Cross of Reality – 1927

c.  Man Must Teach – 1981

d.  Potential Teachers – 1952

e.  The Liberal Arts College – 1960

f.  Karl Marx to the Peace Corps – 1966

g.  Peace Corps – 1966

h.  The University – 1968

i.  Teaching Too Late, Learning Too Early – 1940

 

5.     Religion

Creating the wonders of community life out of raw experience is unavoidably purchased at the price of wrenching sacrifice,  but willingness to sacrifice presents an enormous challenge to common human weakness.  Powerful instincts push us in the direction of avoidance of pain, of the ambiguities of risk, which opposes a need to gain control of our lives.  Instincts drive us toward thinking of  the present only.  Evolving beyond our animal nature disciplines us to build a future.   Usually the “easy” way to respond has no value for building a future.  Ultimate power must be employed to overcome these daunting barriers; this power is named “religion” by Rosenstock-Huessy.  Finding the social truth is what is divine – taking generations.  Speaking the truth can, and often does, put our personal welfare at risk even to the point of being life-threatening.  “God is the power that makes us speak the truth” is one of  Rosenstock-Huessy’s trenchant definitions.  The degree to which truth is sought,  spoken, and acted on is a primary litmus of the viability of any community.  A  MAJOR QUESTION IS,  “WHAT IS THE NATURE OF THIS POWER AND HOW MIGHT IT BE ACQUIRED?”  This power cannot be defined or proven by logic, it can only be experienced.  Institutions are a physical manifestation of religion, but attending church is its least important dimension.  Rosenstock-Huessy defines one type of  religious act as speaking the truth in a difficult situation regardless of any negative consequences it may bear for the speaker.   These are a few of his important essays on this subject:

a.  The Christian Future or The Modern Mind Outrun – 1946

a.  Comparative Religion – 1954

b.  Four Disangelists – 1954 – Before and After Marx

c.  Talks with Franciscans – 1965

d.  Fashions of Atheism – 1968

 

6.     Philosophy

The distinction between philosophy  ( systems of thought defined as logical deductions from a  set of assumptions) and religion  must be clarified, because they are often mistaken for each other.  The difference is that between the heart and the mind.  Philosophy is an intellectual endeavor, and,  of course, the intellect can be one type of guide for behavior.  However, such religions are narrow and therefore confining.  Science is the popular religion of our day in industrial societies,   but the character of true religion, as defined above, is universal and not systematic.  Theology does qualify as a philosophy.  Both theology and philosophy are defined by doctrine and logic, following from the assumptions made by each denomination.   Organized thought in the form of philosophy has been  the valuable  invention of the Greeks, certainly  a major contribution to civilization.  There are, as we know,  many philosophies representative of how different civilizations and groups within have organized their views of reality. Some are productive, some not, some narrow, some broad.  Many exist side-by-side within cultures.  One might call them minor gods.   Our social problem, then,  is to find the tolerance point between those systems, by which order can be maintained and peace may reside.    But none of these should be mistaken for religion.   Two important essays on philosophy are:

a.  Philosophy and the Social Sciences – 1940

b.  Greek Philosophy – 1956

 

7.     Social Applications

Finally, Rosenstock-Huessy has written a number of essays on different social situations.  I have simply assembled these into a single group which I call “social  applications..”

a.  Make Bold to be Ashamed – 1953

b.  What Future the Professions – 1960

c.  Planetary Service – 1978

 

IN SUM

Aside from the methodology for discerning a clearer picture of reality  (the GRAMMATICAL METHOD), the seven categories represent the major themes that I find compelling, forming the foundation for creating community.  The many other themes he raises such as love, marriage, good and evil, hope, faith and incarnation, are common in many of the essays and constantly integrated into new concepts relating to the major themes.  I believe that if the reader understands Rosenstock-Huessy’s  thought on these seven categories he/she  will possess the best foundation for understanding the basic concepts for a  better, more full understanding as to the meaning of our social experience and therefore the significant decisions we make in our lives, and the consequences thereof which inevitably leads one to a more full life.  I believe this is the effect he has had on me.

PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE SOUL

Argo Books, Norwich, VT 1988
Introduction by Clinton C. Gardner
Feringer notes
Notes started: 9-10-88
Last edited: 9-98

Contents

Introduction

(from introductory notes by Clinton Gardner)

PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE SOUL is the final chapter in Volume 1 of DIE SPRACHE DES MENSCHENGESDHLECTS (THE SPEECH OF MANKIND) first published as ANGEWANDTE SEELENKUNDE in 1924 by Roether-Verlag, Darmstadt. It is based on a manuscript Rosenstock-Huessy wrote in 1916 for his friend Frans Rosenzweig.  Rosenzweig subsequently described it as providing “the main influence” for his epochal book, THE STAR OF REDEMPTION.  Rosenstock-Huessy always identified  PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE SOUL as the first elaboration of his proposed new method for the social sciences.

End of Introduction

Part 1 – Practical Study of The Soul

1.New names have a way of leading to new thoughts, even beyond those of the originator.  And the more   accessible to the reader a name is, the more its meaning is likely to be changed by the reader as he applies it to his own experience.

The title “Practical Study of  The Soul,” is a case in point.  With the rise of the field of psychology (especially in America), the meaning of the “soul,” originally defined to cover all “inner” life, was changed in keeping with the notion that psychology was a “science,” as in natural science.  The concept “soul” was narrowed to one that the method of natural science could research.  This was to say, applying to phenomena that  could be observed and measured.

Part 2 – The Science of Psychology

1.Psychology today doesn’t deal with the entire soul, but with its two “outer sides,”  the physical and mental aspects of life.(p.7), that is, to physical facets (senses & reactions) and mental facets (memory and intelligence).  In other words, “soul” was the same as “mind” – alternately  idea processor, memorizer, and  material responder.  This is considered the sum total of  the concept of  “mind” and what-ever is left from  the older concept of natural philosophy is relegated to the concern of theology.  Furthermore, as for Descartes,  mind was separated from body in the sense that thought was assumed to be capable of objectivity  (remaining outside of , or unrelated  to, whatever was the object of study, including other human beings).

Contrarily, Rosenstock-Huessy ASSUMES THAT MIND AND BODY ARE DIFFERENT FACETS OF A SINGLE ENTITY that must include phenomena more difficult to define, such as creativity, intuition, and love. Other scholars, namely  Wertheimer, Goldstein, Gelb, Koffka, and Adler, were like-minded.  These researchers averred that a proper method for discerning  social experience would need to include the whole person. The meaning of this will become apparent below.

Theodor Erismann’s book The Idiosyncracy of Things Mental: Inductive and Intuitive Psychology (1924)  is the latest example of an academic approach helplessly trapped between nature and mind like a donkey between two bundles of hay.  Even in the title, he confuses “mental”  research with research into the soul, and it gets worse in the body of the book.  This work is typical of hundreds like it. (p.8)

Part 3 – The Psyche

1.The term psyche means several different things to different people.  To M.D.’s the psyche is the patient’s temporary mental state in connection with physical ailments, a sort of  “…soul wedged between bodily and mental influences.”  Scholars, humanists, and teachers  also have reason to speak of the psyche, but from a different standpoint.  Here the psyche is the kind of holistic ability of the individual to absorb the more subtle expressions of life such as art, the purpose of mankind, moral and aesthetic judgments, and ability to learn.  This adds up to an individual’s  unique ability and outlook on life.

…the psyche is primarily the universal concept for a more or less capable “transformer,” which is what each man represents as he receives the infinite streams of the spirit. (p.9)

The analogy of the transformer might clarify why  the view of scientific psychology assumes that speed of comprehension and ability to save time is a mark of intelligence.  The notion is that different people inherit a “transformer” with different power.  Thus, all I.Q. tests are timed.  SCIENTIFIC PSYCHOLOGY SEES THE NOTION OF PSYCHE AS POSSESSING THE DUAL QUALITIES OF RESPONDING TO PHYSICAL REALITY OR RECEIVING SPIRITUAL REALITY.

Part 4 – The Occult Sciences

1.There is recognized yet another dimension of the term “soul” that is avoided  by legitimate studies, that upon which the occult sciences direct their attention.  Their focus is on the “cosmic powers of the human soul.”  This is a recognition of the creative powers within humans, capable of overwhelming all of the other powers of  mind and body.  “Magic, telepathy, spiritualism, and hypnosis concern themselves with the human soul as a ruling or yielding power in the world.” (p.10)

2.ERH contends there is a power, (one might say the creative or imaginative ability), that can take over and let us suddenly see the world in a new light, let us see laws of the world.  This power includes prophesy,  revelation, and receptivity to religious beliefs.  Psychologists, while recognizing such a power, relegate it to the domain of theologians.

3.”The soul either can conduct the streams of the spirit or it cannot. These powers of the soul should be investigated in terms of human, not supernatural, experience.” (p.11)  There needs to be a  distinction now between prophecy and magic.  Prophecy is embedded in human history, while magic is embedded in the cosmic, contemporary  universe.  The historical record is full of evidence of those who have been “taken by this power,”  this ability to see the world anew. The power involves creativity,  anticipating consequences of actions, and  sacrifice to build a better future for the community. This great power is necessary and must be called upon in our processes of rising above our animal nature, in our progress toward becoming “human.”  What is believed to be “magic,” on the  other hand, is a thing of the moment.

4.Psychologists, by not taking a stand of their own,  by avoiding “like the plague” this power of the human spirit to anticipate and directly shape social destiny,  robbed themselves of a fertile dimension of human power, neutralizing their ability to explain their own creativity.  And at the same time they :

…seem to allow theologians to promote an exaggerated cult of religious hero-worship….they’re  (theologians)  forced to treat a potentially higher study of the soul – the religious domain – without its natural ground floor.  (p.12)

This natural floor would unite religious study with all other aspects of natural human experience.  This dimension of the human soul is “…the natural foundation on which all faith rests, and the occult sciences preserve it.” Basically, the notion of needing to shape the future is either ignored, or denied as a possibility, by scientific psychology.  By contrast, the occult sciences are asking the right questions (how to shape the future), but with the wrong method (magic).  (p.12)

5.           What’s so frightening about the occult sciences?  They claim that any being, i.e. an individual soul, can exert a power over the world or over the immediate environment; a soul can train itself to master cunning abilities; it can call up spirits and phenomena…every being is the bearer of a separate consciousness, each `having it out with the world,’ ….Now we suspect that the order of the world would collapse if this were so. (p.13)

The psychologists also believe that the world is full of individuals (egos) who come to terms with the world by way of their reason; their assumption is that the powers derive from the reasoning mind.  The occultists assume to begin with a full blown “being.”

However, the `psyche’ of philosophy–as well as that of occultism—has been ripped out of the circuit that switched between God and the world, and lies isolated under glass. (p.13)

The occultists’ mistake is that their “soul beings” are endowed with the powers of the world, but lack divine reason that would restrain them.  The philosophers’ “I”s (egos)  are mental giants in the sense that they have the power to find truth, but are powerless before the laws of the natural world.  The occultists claim power over natural forces, but lack any divine reason.

6.These are the roots of two age-old  polar opposites –

…eccentricities of human nature: Orient and Occident, yoga and philosophy, asceticism of the body and `logicism’ of the mind.  …one-sided extremes…Buddha and Plato tyrannize the soul. …`the soul is not a thing.’  Both mistakes can be traced to the same error.  They apply a false grammar to the soul. (p.14)

Part 5 –  The Grammar of The Soul

THE GRAMMAR OF THE SOUL:  Here ERH asks if the soul has a grammar, is it defined? The assumption is that the soul is differentiated from mind, body, and spirit. Is it the sum of these?  If we are to create a science of society (and of the “individual”)  then there must be a method.

DOES THE SOUL have a grammar?  Now as the Word comes out of the soul, and the truest Word comes straight from the very depths of the soul; as we measure the power of speech precisely by the impact on the soul…then, just as the mind has logic, the soul will have a sense of the way words fit together–that is, “grammar” – as its inner structure. (p.15)

1.Logic and theory of cognition constitute the core of the humanities; logic and mathematics constitute the core of natural science; GRAMMAR constitutes the core of the soul, “…the key that unlocks the door…” (p.15)  No scholar or occultist understands this.

2.He likens the state of knowledge of the soul to that of science before experimentation and mathematics “…liberated it from the tyranny of logic.”

3.Today occultists and monists wish to master the soul with calculations based on space and nature, or astrology and mathematics. The innermost secret of the soul is believed by these to be rationality.

4.Academic psychologists assume that “I” included you, he, she, and it of things as well.

Children (all of us) learn that we are neither mother, nor father, nor God, but something else.  The first thing we learn is that we are spoken to. The child is always a “you” to a powerful being outside itself (i.e. it is spanked, corrected, adored, taught). We receive commands and become self-conscious, and are judged from outside.  (This is opposed to the modern social scientist’s perception – that we can say “I am” only after having been addressed as “you.”) We are given a proper name by that power.  No inanimate thing such as a tree or stone has a proper name.

The soul needs all three persons, I, it, and you – constantly changing and constantly indicating this change by inflections in speech. (p.18)

Here it is important to make a distinction between the ordinary grammar taught in school, which puts parts of speech in equal status, and the grammar of the soul, which accurately portrays one’s true feelings.  The former can be superficial and used as commerce (to give a false impression).  The latter reveals deeply held feelings.  The former  “…posits an artificial network of expedient `sewer’ technology as the essence of the fountainhead of speech which erupts so overpoweringly in men…. “Thus confusing the “ability to speak with the ” necessity to speak.” (p.19)

The important distinction here is between speech used for “small talk” or commerce (ordering coffee from the menu and selling a product) and speech used at important moments in life when one is committed; it is a distinction  between ordinary speech and “primal” speech.  Humankind is of course both ordinary and primal, and only occasionally are we capable of being fully articulate with primal speech.  Think, for instance, how often we feel misunderstood, or that we misunderstand others.  TO USE PRIMAL SPEECH IS TO EXERCISE OUR FREE WILL, TO EXERCISE THE “I” IN US. This is the subjunctive or optative mood.

The “I” represents power, the free will, things about to come into being, the subjunctive chorus, “Oh, that I had a thousand tongues,” – “If I for once were God.” (p.20)  This notion is also related to Idealism, and to freedom. “Freedom is the most pithy expression for not wanting to obey yet the laws of existence, for wishing to think of oneself not as a part of the world but as divinely inspired, as an Idealist”  (above the world).

5.Most would agree that love is the positive driving force for shaping the world.  Love is self-forgetting, not looking for unbridled  freedom, without wish or will.  Love also forgets the world.  as the poet says, “If I have only thee, if only thou art mine.”  “What do I care about Heaven or earth?” (p.21)  Love transforms.  It implores and commands.  “So the `you’ is virtually discovered for the first time in the imperative which arises from the transformation love creates.” (p.21)

Philosophy and  academe utilize the ” I”  to represent freedom from and power above the world, and the “it” to describe laws within the world. The third person represents the indicative mood, telling about things which are “resting,” unchanging, finished. (p.20)

BUT this grammar is incomplete.  There is no philosophy based on the YOU, because this is out of the world of philosophy, into the world of commitment.  The “I” is future tense, the “it” or indicative past tense, while  the “you” (imperative), or love, acts in the present.

Obviously it is primal grammar that reveals the true person, the soul.

6.To summarize: the soul needs all three tenses and moods to express itself fully.  Philosophies of freedom (idealism),  or of description (science) are incomplete; they have only one string on their fiddle of the complete soul, for which they attempt to sound what can only be sung by the other strings (all three).  “But the one sided “I” – oriented philosophers or matter-oriented occultists have a downright soul-destroying effect.  They discourage the soul from putting up all the strings placed at its disposal by the grammar of its speech.” (p.22) These limited philosophies continually are mistaken for the whole.  But to apply only these is to dwarf human potential.

To discover reality, one must constantly speak from one’s soul, honestly and courageously attempting to speak out about what seems “real.”  This means constant rediscovery, it means new expressions of speech.  True grammar (speech) that accomplishes this reaches for and develops the soul in mankind. It renews and awakens. Goethe said:  “Awaken in the blessed  hour and faithfully with every new union kiss, alive the old ones anew.”  (p.23)

7.Each new generation must transform speech.  In great literature –  epics, poetry, and drama – primal grammar is exponentially unfolded.  ERH  gives a number of examples from literature, of the soul speaking. (p.24)

8.Science carries us off into the world of space and of things finished.  The fine arts carry us off into the life of the first person.  THIS IS THE TREND TODAY, TO LIVE ONLY IN THE WORLDS OF SPACE AND SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS OF FREEDOM,  with the world of the second person, “thou shalt,” being assigned to the heads of state.  In this way the real life for ordinary persons is being loosened.

Separating the exterior life of government and law from common morality is an example of this trend. People are made into objects and statistics, into third persons.

“So between the state’s being a first person, and its treating people as third persons, all that is left for the soul is the categorical imperative of legally pre-established duty.  The only thing it isn’t meant to be is loving, listening, obedient soul, a soul with the power to transform itself, a soul which fuses law and ethics by suffering, a soul which asserts itself by acting, a soul beloved of God.” (p.25)

9.”…INDIVIDUALS, GROUPS, AND PEOPLE ARE PERFECTLY MATCHED IN ONE RESPECT: THEY CAN REMAIN AT PEACE WITH THEMSELVES ONLY BY CHANGING AND BEING TRANSFORMED.” (p.25)

10.A person must have lived through a lot before he/she can assume the first-person form “I”  That person must first be summoned by her proper name.  The relation between the summons and response is the “I.”  Such  a summons produces self-recognition and self-knowledge by offering a concrete challenge.

Thus, through all of the stages of transformation, from youth to young adulthood to adulthood at each stage the person abandons the old gods that commanded him and pays more attention to other voices, to parents, to teachers in school, to politics, to people, to faith, philosophy, love.  The whole person passes through the stages of you, I, and it, and is transformed.

To be transformed, we must listen and be called, and answer “I am here,” and then act.  The soul suffocates in a world of only thought, as the philosophers would have us do, a world of thought sans action.

11.Grammar, as defined above, is the discipline of  transforming persons into becoming more human. Its methods are variation, transformation, and changes of time.  School grammar recognizes punctuation, while primal grammar aims toward changing  the human spirit.  Our present situation, the crisis in teaching if you will, is the lack of the ability of our classroom grammar to change us.

“The grammar of primitive cultures already contains the entire miracle of being human as fully as does the grammar of the most advanced “cultures.”  People have received the former as well as the latter from a few original creators.

Part 6 – The Fate of The Soul

1.Occultists and psychologists  view the individual as an isolated being primarily controlled  either by one’s own willing of one’s behavior, or by the power of some outside “natural” force.  A natural force  would be either another person whose superior “will” can control others,  or (with psychologists) someone who might control propaganda.   In either case, the person controlled would be considered an “it” in the sense that he/she would be considered an “object.”  Astrologers would believe some influence from the position of stars, while the magician is believed to move natural objects at will.   A third, but weaker alternative to influence behavior would be a “calling” from the community,  when some necessary task needs to be committed to.

In relation to community, these same forces would seem to be contradictory, on the one hand implying  that the individual has free will, but on the other that that will is controlled by forces outside the soul. Both of these views, if true, would lead to egomania and mental or moral sickness.  Neither of these views can explain mental health in the environment of  normal life, which has pain and suffering.

2.The healthy person, although filled with pain and suffering and even failure, remains healthy if he/she is constantly transforming him/herself.  To remain mentally healthy, we must feel wanted,  and we must be open to be called, to be recognized, to feel competent and respected.  If we are free, which ERH believes we are,  community is held together by a spirit, and willingness to freely cooperate with others.  The implication for mental health, according to this view,  could not be more different than that of the occultists and psychologists.  This is to say that the first force that directs our lives is the call from the community to serve, which we must be willing to accept voluntarily.  Thus, the major driving force for our actions would be what the psychologists consider a weak third force.  In terms of ERH’s grammatical expressions, the primary forces in our lives that call us to action are not the ego centered “I,” or the other “it,” but rather the “you” (i.e. must do thus and so, else the community will fail.”)

“… a man who is not spoken to cannot become human.  Without being summoned, he will remain what he was, a natural being, an animal.”  (p.30)

3.Man remains an “it” until he is called.   He seeks uniqueness as well as belonging. the field of scientific psychology continues to miss the mark because it cannot recognize two souls.  The fact that two or more individuals  may be doing the same thing does not mean that those actions mean the same to them.  Nor do two or more individuals doing different things mean they are not thinking the same.  Psychology is therefore avoiding this type of problem.

4.Occultism plunges into the opposite stream from that of psychology, where prediction is concerned. They claim to describe the fate of one individual; science avoids this like the plague, applying actuarial statistics to predict probabilities of group behavior, but avoiding a study of the individual and thereby perpetuating pseudo-sciences. Superstitions – astrology, spiritualism, palm-reading, and theosophy – attempt to predict the future for individuals, their methods bound in mystery.

5.ERH defines the soul;

The microcosm of the soul is a parable of creation.

The essence of the soul fulfills itself as a life story.

The language of the soul transforms the world. (p.32)

In short, the soul is the creative force of humanity and only through it does humankind become transformed from animal to human during his/her life.  ERH asks how superstition can be replaced by a doctrine of historical method;  how the superstition of souls “chained by numerical combinations of matter or of the stars” can be replaced by mankind  transformed into a power that can shape the future for a better community;  and finally,  how laws of palmistry and phrenology can be replaced by  creativity and revelation?

Today the occult sciences employ the wrong method, and social science avoids these questions by employing an ineffective method for the study of the meaning of social experience.

Part 7 –  The Powers of The Soul

1.Soul and Psyche are different.  The soul seems to be the overall driving force that creates and exemplifies an individual “character” as it evolves through life.  Perception, association, thought, etc. have to be based on continuing lines of force; soul (character) is a bridge through the whole time of the individual’s life. (p.33)

Soul is not made up of habits, or talents, or one’s predisposition. Rather, it is one’s biography from the present to the time of death.   [ERH says somewhere that the purpose of life is to live; “living” appears to mean the meeting of crises and rising above them, evolving to the next stage of development.  No meeting of life on its terms, no soul is developed.  One is born only with a potential, which can only become realized as one participates in one’s own  spiritual evolution.

2.Courage and fear become the sustaining factors for a psychology of the individual soul. (p.33)  Fear and hope are the shaping powers.  Rarely do we perceive what we are indifferent to.  We must learn to rise above fear and pain, to persevere and grow in spite of barriers. “A person who avoids a crisis evades the soul-shaping tasks set before him. ….The deeper the suffering the soul goes through…the more forcefully it enters reality…”  (p.34)

Overcoming, striving, and undergoing occur completely in the solitude of the individual soul.  It is always a lonely battle.  All of these crises occur during changes in life-stages when the individual is challenged.  But the soul is not fragmented. It is the sum of a life, and the sum of the battle represents UNITY (a unique, individual character).

3.Each stage of life threatens us.  Such a challenge is a rehearsal for death, a kind of metaphorical death suffered during life.  The consequence is negative when we fail the challenge, and positive in  the sense of  the discontinuance of undesirable habits, paving the way for new life (change).  THIS IS THE EVERYDAY ENACTMENT OF DEATH AND RESURRECTION.

4.Death needs to be kept in mind in the act of meeting these challenges, because we need to remind ourselves of what we hope to become.  And thus our response to the challenge should lead us in that direction. THIS REPRESENTS A POSITIVE POWER OF FACING DEATH THROUGHOUT LIFE.  This is an important concept of ERH, in contrast to traditional scientific psychological views, which infer that we are at the mercy of forces outside ourselves.  The presence of a healthy “soul” is intended to overcome such environmental forces, thus allowing us to possess the power to participate in our own and in the group’s life to better both.

5.”The life of the soul awakens only in a person who boldly affirms the law of death and crisis…A crisis, after all, is a forestalled piece of death.” (p.35)  This is at once the risk and price one pays to become fulfilled, that is to be willing to submit to the pain of change.  The formative power of the soul must be trusted, “…to risk being shaped into what you and only you are called upon to become and are allowed to become.”   To do this one must listen for, and accept a call to act in some way, becoming a “thou” to listen and respond.  One must not to become addicted to only intellect, or glitter.  Relying solely on intellectual forces fragments (kills) the soul. (p.36)

Psychosomatic medicine, long since accepted as a force in healing of sickness, is an example of the power of a soul at work.   And how many diseases have their origins in the mind?

Part 8 – Community

1.When people are able to rely on one another, it relieves the crushing burdens one experiences when feeling totally alone in the world. The creation of community is essential to survival. To establish community requires trust in others, and trust occurs only between souls.  This counter balances the pain and suffering in life, and is why belonging is such a fundamental need.

2.The community retains its healing power (healing the soul torn by too many challenges)  when it accepts the same life-threatening tensions the individual suffers.

The existence of community, or the effect of entering a community, holds both risk and healing power.  In the process of entering community, the individual soul must suffer the “dissolving” of the framework that protects it.

“When the soul searches out a path for itself through the changes of body, or through the illusions of mental prejudices, it needs elbow-room, a husk, “space around its feeling,” so that it can wax and wane, be affirmed and denied, be checked and praised.  In the tension between fear and hope, the soul can shape itself only if it has a measure of freedom to experiment, of uncommitted elasticity, only if it is not subject to the public law of cause and effect at every moment.  (p.37)

3.     SHAME provides that elbow-room.  Without shame, before shame, or beyond shame, the soul does not grow.  Shame is the housing sheltering anything connected with the soul.  Shame is the grove in which anything to do with the soul has to be planted in order to grow.  To an empiricist inquiring about it from naked, indigenous people, the shyness accompanying shame seems as arbitrary as it does to an idealistic psychologist, who considers it highly unreasonable.  Shame does not fit the “system.”  If the soul were an “it” or an “I,” i.e. an object or subject, a thing or God, it would certainly have no need of shame.  Things and gods do not blush (see Homer!), nor do they tremble or sweat. (Remember Nietzsche’s angry outburst, “A god who sweats!”)  But a human soul, like you, conceals itself and shies away from things.  Thisverecundia (shyness) is the way we appear primarily when living in the second person singular.”  (pp. 37,38)

4.ERH goes on to say that the community (of souls) serves the individual, not by abolishing shame, but by “continually re-implanting the shame’s field of force into one of higher tension.”  In other words, we are more sensitive to our shame when among those of our own community.

The metaphor “naked soul” is descriptive.  The soul is delicate and needs a cloak or mask before the cold, objective world.  Paradoxically, the soul needs to reveal itself to others (souls) in order to evolve.  A community of souls provides both the protection in the form of acceptance of the individual, and the opportunity to listen lovingly and sympathetically to others.

5.Psychoanalysis is also parallel to the community in dealing with “diseases of shame.”  It attempts to destroy or overcome shame, an ambiguous function.  ERH points out that the soul cannot be healed by simply opening it up (to outside inspection); it needs a mask.  Like air coming into contact with a raw nerve, the process of “opening up” is always painful, and thus the soul needs some protection.  “Souls may only open themselves to other souls.”  [THIS IS FUNDAMENTAL].  For the psychoanalyst to open it up to searching “intellect,” he may only do this successfully by answering with his own soul.

6.Here again ERH speaks out  succinctly and eloquently.

That is why psychoanalysts (who are also natural ministers of the soul) often accomplish amazing things.  They offer their own shame, their own souls, when encountering the souls of others; they gaze out of their own souls as much as they gaze into the souls of others.(pp.38-39)

Part 9 – The Speech of The Community

1.The problem here appears to be, “How do we create a regenerative community?”  Regenerative means a community has suffered and experienced crisis, and, recovered from it.   In discussing this, ERH appears to be asking two other questions that this chapter discusses in some detail, namely  1) Why do we need community? and 2) What is primal speech and how is it engendered?   This latter point answers  his overall question by pointing out that regenerative communities are those in which primal speech is spoken.  Primal speech is speech about crucial problems.

2.The flow of ERH’s logic would seem to go something like this:

a.The community is an essential entity for human evolution for a number of reasons, the principle of which is that without it speech would not have evolved.

b.By “speech” he refers to what he calls “primal” speech – speech addressing important matters in human  affairs, as contrasted with “small talk,”  which deals with the weather and politeness.

c.Primal speech comes from the human soul, and it deals with deeply felt attitudes.  This is why it is so necessary to maintain a regenerative community, because its people speak honestly about important issues.

d.Primal speech is brought about by religion, which represents a spirit that in turn is engendered by a willingness of individuals to accept a command to go forth and carry out necessary deeds, regardless of the individual sacrifice required.

3.Details of these arguments are as follows:

Introduction:  In order to survive, grow, and prosper we need to comprehend reality to the highest degree possible, and to do this we must form associations with others (communities).  These in turn engender language, communication, and the creation of knowledge,  all of which allows us to transform the environment – social, mental, and material.  However, our comprehension of reality is never complete. Not only does the physical environment constantly change, but also our knowledge of it remains flawed. We must constantly renew that comprehension.

Only the change of attitudes and convictions causes such a renewal, which  also transforms the individual.  The motive for such transformation is always brought about by consciousness of the failure of our actions. This should set in motion forces that cause reconsideration of  old ways and invention of new ones.  To change deeply felt beliefs is often terrifying and risky.  Reflect on the adage, “The devil we know is better than the devil we don’t know.” Overcoming deep fears and engendering a willingness to suffer pain and sacrifice requires the maximum power we can command. The soul is therefore always riven with passion.  It is precisely the source of such power that ERH defines as “the soul.”

4.WHY DO WE NEED COMMUNITY?  We need community (a true regenerative community) because it provides a cloak (protection) for the individual so that he/she can speak truth  (from the soul) with some protection, for speaking the truth can often be a great risk.  Without such protection, the objective world would tear us apart.  Schizophrenia is an example of such ravage. (p.41)  Mental health, on the other hand, is maintained by being spoken to,  whether in love or hate. (All mental illness is a turning inward and closing out the world.)

5.Communities also have a dark side against which the individual soul needs protection.  People e mass, institutionalized individuals, “the establishment” – whether business, government, clubs, or even families — tend toward  seeking power instead of inner strength. These tend to the shifting of guilt instead of defending justice, toward the passionate obscuring of issues instead of revealing truth. p.49  These tendencies of institutions force individuals in their formal roles to lie.  Thus, institutional life,  like many other facets of experience, is a paradox; it is needed for our growth, yet the source of distorting reality and social destruction.  Another facet of stress of institutional life is focussed on the difference between group perceptions of reality on the one hand and the individual perceptions on the other – always different because each individual experiences only a little piece of reality.

6.If this paradox cannot be resolved,  what we call community is little more than a collection of people, but with no deep reservoir of common  understanding  or trust.  Such a community  self-destructs eventually because it has a low tolerance for stresses of any type. A regenerative community conversely  is precisely one that has the power and resolve to balance this paradox. Only through the existence of  primal speech can we have a true community of souls (individuals who have accepted and committed themselves to defend and work for a common spirit).  Trust and creativity are therefore essentials to the future of any community.

7.           Work transforms the world by pursuing its laws of cause and effect. The creative mind transforms thoughts, which it ponders in the light of a uniform point of  view. But neither mind nor matter alone can transform the person himself.  They have to be subordinated to a community that can. (p.50)

PRIMAL LANGUAGE:  Primal language is necessary language, language from the soul.  The Bible has served as an important force in the evolution of Western cultures because, 1) “…it tells the story of the universe of a history of people and souls,”  2) as a carrier of primal language. Primal language gives voice to our transformations in life, unifying people, fusing “…God, man, the World into a resounding we. (p.40)

8.Social grammar, as ERH contrasts with the textbook grammar of nouns and conjugations, is a necessary component to understand primal language.  Art exemplifies the first person plural,  representing a transfiguration and apotheosis (making a god of a person), as only a god can be creative.  “To create is the life of the soul.” (p.42)  Grammatically, the creative act, is represented by the first person “I” (subjunctive, conjunctive, optative, voluntative). The artist creates “maybes,” possibilities for the future, as contrasted with the cause/effect “laws” established by science.  Ironically, the social scientist can apply his method to many things, but  cannot account for his own creativity.   The “I” begins with the eternal freedom to change.

Science, by contrast, describes the world as it is. The “natural” world, attempting to discern the laws of cause/effect in how something works.  Grammatically, it (nature)  is represented by the third person, the “it,”  removed from the observer;  therein lies his ” objective” situation.  The beginning and end of scientific process is theories and laws.  This is the indicative mood, the most simple of the parts of social grammar. It seeks to find causes and effects, i.e. the internal workings of nature. (p.46)

9.The Missing Person:  It is ERH’s contention that traditional  social science methods, as described above, represent incomplete thinking patterns. One missing part is the commitment, the emotional attachment or dedication to a cause that engenders willingness to sacrifice, to set aside self-interest.  The part of speech represented by this voice is the “you,”  the voice of the second person, the person willing to listen to authority  and to respond. The first and third grammatical voices described above represent command (the “I”) and description of the world (the “it”), but where is the human dedication to cause?  This is the second person, both singular and plural,  the listener, the power that does more than describe. It is the power to act and complete causes.

10.Much language represents small talk, using cliches, the thoughts and words of others, superficial speech to describe (make ideas intelligible),  but with no power to move others.  The power to move others and be moved includes Religion.  “Religious language towers above art and science, because it integrates into “we’s” all three of the grammatical persons.” (p.41)  Religion’s shrine preserves transformation (change), as does legislation into law.  The fundamental principle of religion is that it is “the mystical marriage between God, man, and  the world of  I, you, it.”

Part 10 – Our People

OUR PEOPLE and chapter 11, SPIRIT, SOUL AND BODY will be described here as a unified piece.  The central theme (problem) appears to be a summary of the thesis that our major problem in life is to grow from animal into human being.  The first step in this process is understanding our experience, and this cannot occur with the present methods for social science.   A new science of society must be centered around Grammar; not the grammar of classroom texts, but a social grammar reflecting human commitment to causes.  He summarizes this new grammar by pointing out that LOGIC exposes errors in reasoning, SCIENCE (mathematics) exposes errors of the senses, and PRIMAL GRAMMAR exposes errors in commitment.  Our present social problems are causes because, while we employ logic and science on the one hand, we need a science of the soul (commitment), which is powered by the energy of the soul. This is  not the soul of “mind” conceived by present social science.  Therefore:

We need a new science of the soul…Meanwhile our field of study is being overrun by philosophy and psychology on the one hand and occultism and mathematics on the other… (p.53)

ERH offers in Chapter 10 a case study of Germany after WWI.  Some Germans made an impassioned plea to see themselves as victors, as a world power.  What they needed, ERH avers, is to re-create a people:

1.     A people, when a true congregation, is neither an authoritarian state (first person),  nor a population of  60 million (third person), but rather a people ready for its calling and for that reason alone is capable of facing the present and also of  regenerating itself physically and spiritually. The soul can renew body and spirit, but not vice versa.  Because when a “you” contemplates its task, both spiritual and physical paths open up.  Both convictions and one’s awareness of the outer world originate in contemplation. [German play on words: on Besinnung (contemplation), Gesinnung (convictions), and Sinne (the senses). Contemplation can renew the spiritual sense of self-consciousness, as well as the physical senses. (p.51)

2.Grammar in this schema is the discipline of change.  Reaching for material things as the dominating force in our lives makes one lose one’s inner bearings because the material world changes daily.  Acting only on ideals, principles, or dogmas makes one “pigheaded,” unchanging, as abstractions are outside concrete experience.

3.HAVING STABLE INNER BEARING, BUT CHANGING IN THE RIGHT WAY AND AT THE RIGHT TIME,  GIVES ONE SHAPE  (character, commitment, soul). (p.54)  Primal grammar is the method for renewal that Germany needed  at that time.  Our language today tends not to be “primal,” but rather more superficial, and thus resistant to change.  [RF – I am reminded here of the research of Chris Argyris who developed the concepts of single and double loop decision-making.  The single loop (the common practice) keeps repeating error. See REASONING, LEARNING AND ACTION, Josey-Bass]

4.In the final chapter, ERH makes a distinction between the soul (singular), spirit (plural)  and body.

One can say, namely, for both  men and women,  everything about them that has to do with the total duration and unity of their existence belongs to the soul.  Destiny, profession, marriage, children, honor, fame, disappointment, suffering, sacrifice, names–all these things are given meaning from the fact that they all belong to one united line, one life story for mankind. (p.55)

One’s bodily, material needs, on the other hand, start with daily bread and daily requirements of shelter, clothing, and urges.  So from the material point of view, marriage is only an expansion of sex and reproductive urges;  professions are only an expanded concern for dailybread, and so forth, just as Lasalle articulated it in his iron law of wages.  And yet there remains an immense difference between these needs and the meaning of the soul.  No matter how many daily wages are added together, they won’t equal the course of a life; no matter how many sexual acts, they won’t equal a marriage.

So for men and women, the material things about them are summed up in the concerns for units of time shorter than the ages of their own lives.  This explains, on the one hand, the immense importance  material things  have for people without real  destiny in their lives,  for the proletariate and all other people who have fallen prey to daily life. On the other hand, this explains the limits of material concerns, which remain passing in comparison with the course of a whole life. (p.55)

5.SPIRIT, the plural of soul,  goes beyond and above time of the soul. It is more than one soul’s lifetime,   an inherited succession of souls.  The carrying on of an idea beyond one lifetime, “Spirit is the power of mankind”  as compared to the power of an individual.  (p.56) Theology has been till now the custodian of all secrets of the soul.

A person remains inspired only as long as he finds himself within a structure that reaches beyond himself.

6.Spirit – of a club, organization, country, or profession – is what individuals subject themselves to.  The stronger the soul (of the individual),  the more they can embrace spirit. (p.57)  The spirit thus engulfs and restricts some personal freedom.   This  is necessary because unconfined “will” becomes total tyranny.

7.All causes (technology, science, professions, etc.) requires dedication by souls.  Souls in community commonly committed to a cause form a spirit, which is the only way social progress can be made. Society and social change, as with the soul, is regenerated by dedication to the spirit of social grammar as ERH defines it, by unifying the three grammatical persons of the “it,” the “you,” and the “I,” alternating between them with the appropriate rhythm.  To carry this out requires sacrifice by the soul, of time and  offered from the heart.  Voluntarism is needed to enlarge the soul.

The basic problem ERH seems to be addressing here is, “How can truly productive and healthy individuals and communities be created?”  He states near the end of the essay that a test of the true community is that it can emerge from catastrophe rejuvenated.  The method for such accomplishment is an education that develops the “soul.” In traditional socio/psychological,  secular language of today, the term soul would be translated to mean “character,” or “integrity.”  But, as pointed out, this conception falls short of accounting for social vitality.   He goes on the say that only souls are capable of responding to and evolving the “spirit” of an idea or institution, and thus souls are the fundamental input necessary to achieve true communities of associations.

SUMMARY

This treatise is significant, but subtle and difficult to clarify and summarize.  It addresses the question, “What  empowers us to rise above mere animal nature to become fully `human’ ?”  What, in other words, are the elements of our mental powers, with particular reference to the power to change and grow (i.e. the soul)?

The following matrix-type diagrams are intended as an aid to the reader to see the structure of  Rosenstock-Huessy’s argument.  By his own admission, this treatise formed the original structure for a new method for social science.  He suggests there exist four approaches to this question, three representing points of view from the past,  which are parochial and therefore inadequate to explaining the full nature of our mental powers.  The fourth diagram describing his “Grammatical Method” integrates the preceding three powers into a more comprehensive and sufficient whole.

The first point of view is that of the natural scientist, who defines the primary power of the “mind” as a receptor of sensory experience, capable of logically processing those data.  While some scientists may concede that the mind can also receive divine revelation as the source of creativity, and that there is a necessity for ethical values to guide human behavior, those phenomena are outside its method and concern.  In other words, the scientific can explain neither the scientist’s creativity nor the structures of religion.

The second point of view, interestingly comes from the ancient occult sciences such as magic, telepathy, spiritualism, and hypnosis.  This view posits “mind” as the creative force of the universe, its mental powers  capable of dominating the concrete world.  The mind, in other words, is capable of creativity on its own. However, these sciences recognize no ethical constraints as a necessity.  Rosenstock-Huessy concludes that while this point of view defends the right issue, the creative powers of our mind, it utilizes the wrong method and goal.  If there were validity to this method, he asserts, the social world would have torn itself apart long ago.  As with the natural scientist, this method precludes any integration with the other two sources of power.

The third aspect of the mind is the province of religion, the divine power that created the universe. Instilled into the human psyche, this harbors the power to overcome personal greed and avarice, and act selflessly along the models of Jesus, Buddha, Moses, and other religious founders and prophets.  Such behavior must, by necessity, guide the socially related decisions that engender human survival.  The limitation of this view is that it is oriented toward something outside society – paradise – and therefore does not make strong connections between the divine spirit and concrete experience.  Working to get into heaven does not necessarily imply a necessary foundation of social life, nor do religious mandates claim to do so.

The “Grammatical Method” recognizes the positive contributions of each of these methods and asserts that in order for us to understand the meaning of our experience as fully as possible and incorporate the power to change and grow, we need all three.   At the point of decision-making we would be empowered to recognize the significance of the decision and have the power to overcome the enormous forces presenting barriers to change and growth.  All such powers, also furnish the foundations for improving community.

The mind is made up of these three elements, the central position of which is the individual’s ability and willingness to think for him/herself, drawing on all three parts,  under the guidance of ethical (religious) behavior.  This action is the source of soul building.  One is not born with a soul, only with the capacity to develop the soul.   Greatness of spirit can be founded only on a strong soul.  The fundamental method by which the spirit of  all methods is conveyed in speech!

SPEECH AND REALITY – 1970

Argo Books, Inc. Norwich, VT 1970
Introduction by Clinton C. Gardner
Feringer notes
Notes started: 1-14-92
Last edited: August-98

Contents

Introduction by Clinton Gardner

1.    ERH is an influential thinker among many scholars, but is not well known generally. Harvey Cox, attending a meeting on theological thought in East Berlin, found as much in Rosenstock-Huessy as in Tillich and Bonhoeffer.  J.H. Oldham, a former President of the World Council of Churches has described Rosenstock-Huessy as “…one of the  remarkable figures of our time.”  Reinhold Niebuhr, Lewis Mumford, and Carl Zuckmayer  have hailed his work.  Yet in the U.S. he remains largely unknown.  Why?

2.    Part of the reason lies in the fact that for many years most of his writing was in German and remained untranslated.  Another reason was that he had no constituency in the U.S. because the basis of his thinking was questioning  and attacking the very foundation of traditional academic thinking in the fields of theology, philosophy, psychology, sociology, indeed in all of the social sciences.

He threatens the very basis of their existence, for all of his writing and teaching is, in effect, a storming of the academic trenches.  As Martin Marty wrote in The Christian Century in 1965, `Rosenstock-Huessy was ahead of his time–and he still is.’ (p.1)

Rosenstock-Huessy did not fit the academic mold in other ways.  Like Descartes, he waited to develop his ideas, writing  “out of the circumstances of his life,”  rather than spending time “neatening up” his ideas, as would a traditional scholar.  [RF – a more detailed  commentary on the implication of this style appears in the introduction of these notes.]

3.    Purpose of S&R? To dethrone Descartes’  method as the basis for all science. Cartesian method is assumed by social scientists to apply to society.  Beginning with Comte’s Course of Positive Philosophy (1830):

“…they adopted that same method.  In other words, the social sciences, down to our day, have more or less agreed with Descartes that he had discovered a new metaphysic, a universal and true view of reality which could be directed toward any investigation, be it of matter or man.” (p.3)

Contrarily, ERH contends that  1) Cartesian analysis applies only to natural science, 2) a method for social science can be found in the patterns of human speech, and 3) the Grammatical Method is universal, i.e. Cartesian method is one of its four elements.

4.    In general, ERH’s works are divided into historical, sociological, and theological as follows:

a.   Historical:  mankind is formed by 4 kinds of speech, 1) tribal, orienting toward ancestors (past),. 2) templar speech, originated in Egypt and oriented toward nature (outside society, such as stars),  3) Greek speech, oriented toward organized “thought” (i.e. poetry and philosophy), and 4) Prophetic speech, originated by Israel and oriented toward what humankind should become.

The Christian era fused these four types; it asserted that in order to understand our experience and survive, humankind moves in a rhythm between all of these. The rhythm (proper sequence for understanding types of experience) would be, in terms of grammar,  imperative, subjective, narrative, and finally objective.  Historical man unfolds in this pattern, as does significant everyday human experience. (p.6)

b.   Sociological & psychological works: how man discovers himself by speech (going beyond the I & Thou of Buber). That is, ERH submits:   1) First comes the “thou” by which man is called to create a future for the community.  2) He then discovers his “I,” his subjective, inner self. 3) Then  he responds by his action of contributing to the community denoted by “we” and   4) finally, he is recognized, objectively by the outside world, in the role of a third person “him.”   Thus, his philosophy addresses to the future and past in time, and the inward and outward in space (space meaning the inner space of the mind contrasted with everything outside it).  Speech creates our consciousness of and understanding of  social experience comprehensively in terms of the past and future  (what society has been and what it should become),  the inner world of thought, and the outer world of nature.

c.   Theologically:  What was called the “holy spirit”  can now be called the speech of mankind.  Man’s divinity consists in his speaking and listening.  “Supernatural” is man speaking “beyond himself” i.e. creating a community (a future). Life after his death exists in terms of the memory of humankind carried into the future.

“God is not a supernatural being, but the power that makes us speak… “We experience him every moment we reach out beyond ourselves, saying the word that needs to be spoken, that is timely, that moves us into the future.  Sin is abuse of the word, words that destroy peace and the truth that all language seeks to establish.”  (p.7)

d.   Assumptions:  1) Speech is man’s “matrix”  (that is, the structure of our speech reflects the structure of how society has survived over the millennia).  2) Speech precedes organized thought and therefore reflects its pattern, having been created intuitively. 3) A new method for the social sciences (and indirectly for all of science as well)  can be erected on the basis of how men speak and listen.

End of Introduction

Chapter 1  IN DEFENSE OF THE GRAMMATICAL METHOD

This provides the grand plan for the method, into which all other six chapters fit.

1.    The Unity of Social Research

a.   Assumption: ERH considers Ludwig Feuerback, in the nineteenth century, to be the father of  grammatical philosophy as a basis for social science.

b.   In defense of these assertions ERH cites several facts:

1)   The rise of social disciplines, history, ethnology, sociology, etc. augmented elements of society, but with no integrating principle.  “…in grammar only, is there performed such a multiformity within unity.”  (p.9)

2)   In philosophy a group of language thinkers arose in the 19th Century.

3)   Linguists began to look in the direction of society, previously having concentrated on its structure an not its social implications. Problems like social breakdowns and insanity were not previously addressed.

4)   Warnings came to indicate that social breakdowns and the condition or usage of language could not be separated. We have been warned by psychoanalysts, Nietzsche, and the Russian revolution in recent times that corruption of language usage and social breakdowns are concurrent.

5)   The organized study of Language had never been used as a universal method for social analysis, and ERH will show that the method for natural science excludes “…application to society, by establishment.” (p.11)

6)   Medieval and modern thinkers never laid claim to a method to explain changes in society.  They            contended that methods must either be “scientific” or “theological.”  (Science faults theology for not being scientific theology faults science for a lack of direction, and both ignore each other.) This attitude promotes fragmentation of thinking. ERH maintains  here that only through a social grammar can these groups can be united.  And he warns that unless such a unity is found, academe (in the social sciences) can be ignored by the masses, “…in our un-understandable division.” (p.11)

2. Social Dangers Compel Us to Speak Our Mind  (p.11)

a.   War, revolution, anarchy, and decadence eternally threaten the extinction of society.  [RF-I take this, not only literally, but as a metaphor for all groups within society as well.]

b.   He makes an important qualification, that he is not addressing individual ills, but only social ills. (p.12)

“We do not inquire into the problems of disease and death, suicide and lunacy here although they reflect social ills or correspond to social ills. We shall speak of social ills only in the sense that they comprehend more than one generation or more than one locality.”  (p.12)

[RF – I see this as a crucial distinction in his thinking.]

c.   Anarchy is the lack of cooperation within a group; there is too much individualism, no common inspiration! Socially, this represents a breakdown of a group’s inner space.

Decadence  is the lack of passing on old aims and ends.  Either people have no children, or children do not accept the old values.  This is a breakdown of time between present and past, an inability to reach the future in mind, body, or soul. (p.12)  There is a lack of faith, faith as a belief in the future.   Decadence condemns the next generation to barbarism!

Revolution  does violence to the existing order, as the old are liquidated, considered “past men.” (p.13) There is a break in time between present and future.

War  represents the increased efficiency in power of a government, where power is increased in attempts to extend that power over territory outside its own borders. This represents a breakdown in the management of “outer space.”

These are definitions of the social order, making distinctions between time and space fronts, past/present/future, inner and outer space. Such  distinctions offer reference points (locations in time and space) by which to assess social ills search for causes and cures, and measure corrective action.

(RF – If the reader has not read a definition distinguishing natural and social science, the following will be helpful at this point. The need for a new perspective for social science is apparent when one looks at how natural science defines these elements of time and space. To the natural scientist time is an endless stream with no beginning or end; past is past and of little importance, present is a micro-moment between past and future, and time can be divided almost endlessly, with an absolute value in measurement – Max Planck’s “C” constant, for instance.  Space is a given in nature, and descriptions of events are denotative in terms principally of space. All measurement seeks absolute accuracy and the measure for quality.)

(However, this does not describe how we actually experience time and space. We have a memory  that can strongly influence our view of an event. The future, if society is to survive, must be shaped because natural “animal” tendencies of greed, avarice, and self-centeredness would tear the world apart. Also, in the process of controlling our time, we increase the sensation of “present.”  In sum,  then, the social science of Rosenstock-Huessy includes the space and time perspective of the natural scientist, but expands it; additional dimensions of time render it flexible rather than absolute, and dimensions of space separate the world of thought from the world of concrete events. To denotative description, when we describe our feelings we just as often needconnotative speech – metaphor.)

The complete victory of any one (of war, anarchy, revolution or decadence) — ends society (p.13),  and the sustaining dominance of any one of these, over time, will do the same.  The validity of this paradigm can be understood upon reflection of one’s own life experience.

d.   All social research that does not address these ills is “superfluous,”  imprisoned in the reality of the “outer world.”  Dwelling on cures to social problems solely in the “outer world,” as our present social methods tend to do, exacerbates these ills.

e.   What are the Cures?  For war, peace begins when people begin to speak again. It took 10 years, 1945-55 for WWII, before peace began.  For decadence, words have no meaning between old and young, and the faith of the old is not transmitted, where language is mere verbiage, “a petrified ritual.”  Faith between the generations must be established. (p.14)  Anarchy “…means a lack of unanimity, of common inspiration…”  It is reflected in the fact that metaphorically, two languages are spoken within the group, and there is no communication – it is a Tower of Babel. Obviously peace begins when all speak one language.   With revolution, old values and terms are “ridiculed.” These are merely a reflection of many more indicators of social diseases. Problems, methods, and terms need redefinition. `

Obviously  “language is the weapon of society against those four ills.”( p.14,15)  Time and space distinctions as advocated above must be respected and unified, thought  with experience (the outer); action (in the present) must be informed by past experience and move toward a desired  future.

The four diseases dismantle society, by breaking down one of its fronts in time or space… The evil of decadence is the lack of faith in the future. The evil of revolution is the lack of respect for the past… War rages when anarchy between two groups is replaced by the violent effort of establishing unity…Wars prove the weakness of the peacetime system. (p.15)

3. Society Lives By Speech, Dies Without Speech

a.   There are four different “styles” of speech, one for each of the four fronts. (p.16)  1) External world, conquered by reason, logic, science. 2) The future is ruled (by values, laws passed).  3) The past is narrated.  4) Unanimity of the inner circle is expressed in song.

The energies of social life are thus compressed into words that must be articulated, circulated, and regenerated.  For instance, new meanings or new terms must be created when old ones no longer have power.

b.   Grammar is thus the most obvious organon for the teachings on society. Grammar here means a higher grammar where the consequences of action are correlated with    words, as contrasted with the lower, purely structural aspects of language,  e.g.  spelling, sentence structure, vocabulary. Social grammar refers to the consequences of our speech in society.

c.   Science (in general) has two languages, logic and mathematics. Aristotelian logic admits no paradox, as medieval logic does. The grammatical method retains medieval logic. (RF – as defined by Anselm of Canterbury). In this usage,  paradox signals the need for a higher principle that will unify the contradicting experiences.Mathematics retains the data, but strips off the appearances in evidence (i.e. uniqueness). (RF – in general,  he laments the limitations of the natural scientist’s concept of time and space when applied to social experience and its continued use as a method today by social scientists.)

d.   Man lives on the four fronts of two-fold time and space, past and future, and must constantly make a decision as to which one to expand or emphasize at any given moment.  For man to become conscious of past and future, inner and outer is essential. These facets of experience must be kept in balance, in perspective.  In other words, there is a time to plan for the future; there is a time to remember what values must be fought for out of the past (such as law and justice and freedom). As to space considerations, anarchy (within) and war must also be confronted as well.

e.   Natural science time and space concepts are not suitable in describing social experience. Scientific time is uni-directional and is  inexorable; space is singular in its concreteness and is unlimited.  Social time is flexible, pointing toward the past at times, into the future at times, and conscious of the present at times. Social space likewise is more expanded because recognition is made of the fact that we live, consciously, in two worlds of thought (which is subjective) and concrete nature,  (which is outside and objective). Contrary to what hard-core scientists might believe, they can never escape the subjectivity of their thought, their “inner” space.

f.    “LANGUAGE DISTRIBUTES AND ORGANIZES THE UNIVERSE, IN EVERY MOMENT, ANEW.      IT IS WE WHO DECIDE WHAT BELONGS TO THE PAST AND WHAT SHALL BE PART OF THE FUTURE.  OUR GRAMMATICAL FORMS BETRAY OUR DEEPEST BIOGRAPHICAL DECISIONS.”  (p.19)

1)   Tenses locate events in time:  he was,  she is,  they might be. “Any assertion in the present is biographical in that it presupposes past and future…” (p.19)

2)   To say “we” or “it” or “they” indicates whether the speaker includes the person spoken about within a group or outside it, or whether the object is considered a non-human “it.”

g.   It is important to indicate how the proposers of other methods of thought, science and theology, by their own admission, have left open room for another method by denying that their own method is concerned with social experience.  This in turn allows them to welcome a method uncontradictory to their traditional beliefs.

For instance, natural science has no rudder; its value lies in describing the concrete world. Theology, on the other hand, is not of this world, but offers direction, telling us what we should become.Only a method of society joins them and identifies the way to bring society to its potential.  Science and theology are necessary constituents, but not, in sum, adequate.  By putting their specialized fields into a larger context of society, each takes on greater meaning, thus allowing them to be more fruitful and respected – With the present separation, science and theology are burdened with goals their method is unable to fulfill. Science is too pervasive and theology is discredited.

THIS IS A FUNDAMENTAL STATEMENT.  It not only clarifies the problem, but renders the other two methods more powerful. It renders the method of science more solid by indicating its limits; ditto for theology, but also it re-introduces theology into the study of knowledge by providing an essential purpose for it.

h.   Regarding the integrating power of speech, ERH makes the following two assertions. 1) In order to evaluate our experience we must “orient” that experience (events) in time and space. 2) The way we use language provides the clue as to how orientation is to be accomplished. “Only when we speak to others (or for that matter, to ourselves), do we delineate an inner space or circle in which we speak – contrasted with the outer world about which we speak. (p.21)

The space of science is posteriori, and just one half of the complete phenomenon of space. But the truly human phenomenon of space is found in the astounding fact that grammar unites people within one common inner space. (p.21) [RF-emphasis mine]

The phenomenon of time is the same.  “Only because we can speak, are we able to establish a present moment between past and future.” (p.21)  What this seems to mean is that thought is an attempt to explain the outer, world and these two worlds must be integrated; thought unrelated to the outer-world cannot be validated, and unexplained experience cannot be understood.  We cannot  orient ourselves to, and by, a method of the outer world only, that is, by the method of natural science only. To become properly oriented, two things also occur:  1) The attributes of the inner world must be recognized and included (i.e. the “fact” of thought as different from concreteness). 2)  Communicating connections with others can only occur via the inner world of thought.  Thought, by being capable of naming and speaking about concrete phenomena, literally allows us to see hidden elements of those phenomena (i.e. other than merely appearances; appearance is corrected or balanced by measurement).

Two fundamental assumptions are crucial to understanding the grammatical method as the foundation for a science of society. 1) UNITY:  establishing a relationship between all elements of reality, for example, thought correlating with concrete events.  2) RECOGNIZING THE NEED FOR REFERENCE POINTS. Experience, in other words, cannot be understood without knowing where we are, and “where we are” can only be described in terms of time and space. Reference points are essential to free us from total confusion from the cascade of stimuli that imposes on our consciousness every waking moment.

Still another underlying assumption is that mankind is an animal born with a potential to become something beyond the animal state meaning,  “becoming human.”  Our nature in the sense of spiritual and psychological growth is not a given, but constantly changes, or has the potential to improve as we learn.

The implications of these assumptions explain the completeness for three basic methods for the understanding of experience.  One is to determine what “nature” ( the concrete world)  is like; its method is “natural science.”  Another is to determine what we should become.  Its method is theology, the idealist goal. Finally, the third is to determine how mankind (society) might be moved toward the goal.  The method for the latter problem is what is called  a science of society. It integrates (subsumes) the other two methods.  HUMAN SURVIVAL DEPENDS UPON ACHIEVING ALL THREE GOALS, AND FAILURE TO REACH  ANY ONE SPELLS THE DEATH OF SOCIETY.  Thus, we require a curriculum that addresses physical, moral, and social elements of experience.

/i.   He goes on to point out that inner space preceded outer space, because science could not have been created without the prior inner space of the scientists.

j.    Because of the dangers that threaten society,  we are constantly forced to pass judgement upon the status of affairs.  e.g. Is society decaying, disintegrating, is it going to last?  “The danger of death is the first cause of any knowledge about society.” (p.22).  Most conversation deals with this issue in relation to ourselves and our working group – the community.  All problems, ultimately, are about survival.

k.   In this conversation, and for these reasons,  we are all teachers.  We wish to influence others  by way of our observations, our conclusions of their meaning and hopefully what a useful response might be.

Natural science is based on pure reason.  Theology is based on the purity of the creed.  The validity of social knowledge wholly depends on its being based on pure teaching.  (p.23)

SCIENCE HE DEFINES AS VERIFIABLE KNOWLEDGE

l.    He defines “pure teaching”  as the fitting it into the “polychrony” of society.  Society contains many ages and problems and the four types of groups.  Pure teaching then must be about social concerns, but with no immediate concern for either teacher or student.  He contrasts it with “mixed teaching,” which is directed toward personal prestige, examinations, or current events.

[RF – This explanation appears contradictory. He seems to be saying that teaching is unconcerned with current events, yet it must focus on the problems of society.  Scientific teaching, as he describes it, appears to mean that  personal concerns of the student and teacher are to be set aside.  But, as he suggests elsewhere, not the personal biases of the student and teacher.  (?)    He then cites the four basic elements of pure teaching  – listening, speaking, studying (reading), and teaching.  I presume teaching in this context means explaining truth. The first step is to listen, “Listen and society will live, is the first statement and the perpetual promise of any social research.”]  (p.24)

Pure teaching, then would seem to begin with “listening”.  Pure teaching thus recognizes not two elements (I, and IT) but three, I, You, and IT.  The student, the teacher and the subject matter.

4. The A-Prioris of Theology and Physics

His assertion is that  the two other methods of analysis, science and theology, have omitted a whole realm of experience, and it is the burden of this section to prove it.  The two formulas representative of these two methods will be those of Anselm and Descartes.

a.   Anselm:  SO THAT WHAT WE HOLD BY FAITH ABOUT THE DIVINE NATURE AND ITS PERSONS, EXCEPT FOR THE INCARNATION, CAN BE PROVEN BY NECESSARY REASON WITHOUT THE AUTHORITY OF THE SCRIPTURES. (p.25) The subject matter of theology is divided into two parts,  1) divine nature and trinity, and 2) incarnation.  Method for #1 is logic and deduction. For #2, historical and personal experience.

Irreducible datum of Christian theology is the crucifixion, the rest of theology is then left for logical discussion. (p.25)

“Except” means that the existence of God can be proven by logic,  but cannot explain human experience or events.  Thus, Christianity is based on a fact plus reason (analysis).

b.   Descartes:  NATURAL PHILOSOPHY AND NATURAL SCIENCE ENDEAVOR THAT THE FACTS WHICH WE OBTAIN THROUGH THE SENSES ABOUT PHYSICAL NATURE AND ITS ELEMENTS, MAY BE PROVED, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF SPACE AND ITS EXPANSION, BY NECESSARY REASONING WITHOUT THE AUTHORITY OF OUR IMPRESSIONS. (p.26,27)  The meaning of this is that the existence of space cannot be proven, but is intuitive.  The rest of natural science therefore is deduced logically from space datum, e.g. rules about waves, movement, weight, etc. (p.27)

Time is either reasoned away or included (metaphorically) as the 4th dimension of space.  “God is a hypothesis for which he (the scientist) has no need within his own system.” (p.28)  Thus, God and “time” are omitted from the basic assumptions of natural philosophy.

c.   Rosenstock-Huessy, asserts that grammar, as the organon of a new science of society, concentrates on the phenomena of time. SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY  AND THE TEACHINGS OF SOCIETY ARE BASED ON THE ASSUMPTION THAT THE CONTENTS OF OUR CONSCIOUSNESS ABOUT THE SOCIAL CHANGES CAN BE PROVED, EXCEPT FOR THE EXPERIENCE OF PEACE, BY NECESSARY REASON WITHOUT THE AUTHORITY OF THE EMPIRICAL STATUTE LAW.  (p.28).

This statement is built in strict correspondence to the two other methodical claims.

d.   All three statements have the following in common. They include two intellectual enterprises,  one general philosophy, the other a specific science (or a number of them).  This double subject means that the problems with which they deal are large, complex, and founded on a philosophy, for which innumerable specifics are forthcoming. (p.29)

e.   All three attempt to replace empirical knowledge with general (universal) statements or basic laws.  Three  types of empirical knowledge are  the Bible (for theology), sense data (for science), and statutes of groups (for the social order or a true social science).  (p.29,30)

f.    All three must be based upon an assumption not possible necessary to prove, and  therefore always a “given” condition; expanded space and movement for science, incarnation for theology, and peace for the social teacher. (p.30)   The medium in each case is different,  with science by “intuition,”  with incarnation by church “tradition,”  with peace by way of “social laws” within groups of any type.  Evidence is sensation,history, and rules governing daily group life.

ERH points out that these three assumptions are fundamental to human thought.  We trust our sensory experience. History tells us that mankind has been around for a while, and therefore there is a future for the human tribe. Finally, we can only learn completely when there is peace.  These assumptions may also have to be enlarged, to space, movement, and to incarnation and the trinity.

The important fact here is that we are speaking of two types of data, one set that is given, and one set that can be identified by scholarly activity, by thought, by our creating it. (i.e. IF THIS, THEN THAT FOLLOWS type of thinking).  He goes on to explain that these two types of datum, science and common sense,  have been separated.  The three methods of analysis have things in common, and important differences. (p.31)

5. The Metanomics of Society, or Teaching

a.   “…no social science can communicate any truth to a student or reader who has no experience of peace…”    Anarchy, decay, revolution, and war destroy social teaching.

b.   It is natural for the social scientist to go with the methods of natural science if the choice is between that and faith. But society exists in a sea of time, of continuity and discontinuity, of changing values and a changing environment.  His examples:     if we know when a phenomenon is occurring in its proper time (order) and when not, when things are at war or at peace, “…we know all we can know about it.” (p.33)  To select books to read is to select contemporaries; we look forward to goals and backward to determine what to  take into the future; the older generation teaches the younger and waits for it to catch up (that is what classrooms are for mostly); representative thinking presented to the student stands between past (what our teaching represents) and future (what his learning is anticipating).  (p.33)

c.   Therefore, “The first embodiment of the new grammar of society, then, is education.” (p.33)   To get an education is to learn from the past and to have more of a future, more direction and responsibility.   Thus, the teacher represents the time element of the past, and the student the time element of the future.   In the classroom, or wherever, student and teacher become contemporaries.

d.   Dialogue has three basic elements, the logic of the discussion, agreement of the facts, and, importantly a victory over time, a joining of “distemporaries,”  a bridge in the generation gap, PEACE!  He asserts, that is not a part of nature,  and education is therefore pure social process. (p.34)

e.   Education therefore cannot be reduced to the “space thinking” of the scientist; his version of time is too mathematical. Nor is education dealing with eternity (theology, i.e. what we should become ultimately).  “Education is, in its form and method not dealing with eternity. Eternity may be its content.  But the educational process itself is secular, temporal, untheological, social…  It presupposes the desirability of peace.”  (p. 34)

f.    These three qualities of methods – space, incarnation and peace – are the minimum datum for each of these methods. The scientist must concentrate on space( without which mysticism becomes dominant), and the religious thinker on “the perfect man” (p.35)  otherwise values become manifold,  polytheistic, without unity.  Without peace (student and teacher becoming contemporaries, accepting the same problems, working together spiritually), teaching cannot bear fruit, as there is no willingness on the part of the student to accept and act on the truth passed to him.  THE MOST IMPORTANT ELEMENT OF TEACHING IS THE QUALITY OF THE RELATIONSHIP, THE PEACE, BETWEEN STUDENT AND TEACHER.

g.   What are the implications of time in social science?   Scientific time does not recognize, or make room for more than one quality of time. Because change is ambiguous (things may get either better or worse), peace means that the change came at the right time,  i.e. the best change is peaceful change, change that is supported and approved by most of the people. (pp. 35,36)  And thus, the change is most likely to be permanent.  In this way peace restores the time and space axis to society.

h.   To summarize, peace restores  the time and space axis to society; speech sustainsthe time and space axis; war, anarchy, revolution, and decadence are the major disturbances to the axis; the cure for them is for someone to speak his mind to his listener. Thus, “…this basic rule of social research in the phrase: listen so that we may survive.” (p.36)

Finally, ERH summarizes the basic methods for analysis of experience, 1) theology (genesis, to originate a new direction), 2) analysis (to calculate cause/effect elements for any event or class of events), and 3) synthesis (social teaching, how to maintain a healthy society).  The foundation of social teaching is peace, because  no truth can be exchanged or agreed upon until peace has been established between two people.

“At least we must establish peace between ourselves, speaker and listener, before we can communicate truth.” (p.37)  “…education is the primary experience of how mankind establishes peace between distemporaries…” (p.38)

These, ERH claims, are the three basic methods for evaluating experience.

6.  Meta-logic, Meta-esthetics, Meta-ethics, or the March of Science

He asks, why is a science at one time vital and at another time second rate?  Why was scholasticism progressive, scientific, and regenerating, why is modern theology apologetic, timid, reactionary?

COMTE, LAST, EHRENBERG, JASPERS, THE NEO-KANTIAN AND NEO-HEGELIAN SCHOOLS ALL             SUGGESTED DIVIDING UP THE EVALUATION OF EXPERIENCE INTO 3 SCIENCES, science (logic),     esthetics (social), ethics (theological).

Rosenstock-Huessy suggests the need to render a unity to these three compatible methods and points out that, without such unity, teachers do not deserve the confidence of students.  Each method must have its own integrity (division of labor), within a larger unity.

a.   Meta-logic, the method of a science of theology, appeared at the beginning of the 12th century because of the unsatisfactory working of the church.   The method of this new science is META-LOGIC based on the paradox, i.e. “Nothing comes from nothing; the world is created from nothing.” Also, humankind must change, but remain the same. (p.39)

Aristotle’s science included the will of the gods. Today, the term “nature” means nature minus the values of gods or God. Science and theology have been separated.

The notion of the paradox is no esoteric abstraction, but must be taken seriously, for it holds the power to create unity within differences. It lies at the very foundation of ordered thought, and is essential to all three fields of experience. In science, its appearance signals the need for a higher level of theory to explain *contradictions of research; in theology it, does the same for different interpretations of creed; in social science ERH explains:

My grammar of assent, my grammatical organon, is devoted to the task of supplementing the statute law of any given society with metanomics that explain and satisfy our enthusiasm for the synchronization of the distemporary, of old and young, black, brown and white, government and anarchy, primitive and refined, highbrow and lowbrow, innocence and sophistication, all at peace, in one human society. (p.41)

[RF – given the present social ills of the world, which seem unsolvable, this statement would seem to be a wild fantasy, the ultimate paradox.  But these are exactly what must be solved!  ERH goes on to explain:]

The equilibrium between the special social sciences in which man appears to differ, and the social philosophy which makes him appear eternally the same human being, is the secret of all research in the social field.  We cannot give up one side of the social paradox, either by identifying all men as being the same, or by allowing them to become so different that they lose their power of identifying themselves with others.  Peace is the term which expresses the existence of this paradox in society: that different people by having peace together, are identifiable. (p.42)

7.    Thesis

a.   All social change tends to create social diseases of one type or another.

b.   PEACE is the only condition that creates or engenders progress.

c.   If one has not experienced peace, one will not trust traditional learning. This is why peace must precede all teaching.

d.   The major effort of social science is how to create peace in an environment of constant social change.

e.   Methods include, 1) searching history for conditions similar to the present and thus learning what might be valid as a beginning, 2) communicating effectively, and 3) including all groups within society, lest they create war, revolution, anarchy, or degeneration.

f.    The principle parameters of a true science of society must be: 1) time and timing, i.e. a consciousness of past, present and future, and 2) education, absorbing proper lessons from the past, as well as learning the meaning of our present experience, and being motivated to take action to create a desired future.

g.   The three sources of knowledge to accomplish all of this are learning 1) what the natural world is like   (science), 2) what is the source of our creative power (religion), and 3) how to create a community at peace.

h.   The organon of speech must teach us to articulate our experience truly, to commit ourselves to higher ambitions than mere consumption and social parochialism.

Speech is composed of words we tend to take for granted but seem as trifles.  We hear them constantly (often in small talk), often corrupted by lying. This is at the root of much dissension because the corruption of the most important words creates the worst situations.  To treat speech – language – seriously “…is a great and noble risk.”

8. Schematic Survey   (p.44)

abstract term:         Meta-logic                 Meta-esthetics         Meta-ethics

concrete field:         values (gods)             nature (space)         society (time)

intellectual

tool:                    dialectics                  natural science        “metanomics”

proposed

task:                      concordia                  coordinating             synchronizing

discordant-                 movement               antagonistic

ium                          of distant                 “distempor-

canonum                   bodies:                    aries”

concording                system

contra-

dictory

eternal truth

starting points:       1050, Lanfranc          1543, Coper-            1808, Saint-

1142, Crusades            nicus                     Simon

1620, Descartes      World War I

Thirty Years’

War

Chapter 2 – Articulated Speech

Thought and speech are intimately related.  Unarticulated thought bears no social consequences, and no complex thought is possible without language.  Articulated thought, (speech) is always at the center of communication. Language therefore has no power unless and until spoken.  What then is the process of articulation that renders speech its power? Does language reflect human nature, or is human nature shaped by it?

2.     The basic measure of the power of speech is peace in the community, in uniting free and independent persons. Articulation is the means by which this takes place.

3.     Articulate speech is based upon these conditions:  1) The speaker recognizes the “wills” of others.   2) One believes in powers beyond and bigger than the time and space of the present moment.   3) Persons commit themselves to more complex thoughts than shouting & yelling.   4) Both speaker and listener place themselves on a “…far higher and on a more risky level.”  Speaking the truth can be  risky. (p.46)

4.     Although our ability to communicate tends to be taken for granted, articulate speech has some formidable barriers that expose it to failure.  It may be misinterpreted, it may misrepresent (used to lie), the speaker may be wrong, and he/she may be unable to express the ideas.

A CRUCIAL POINT HE MAKES IS THAT UNLESS A SUBJECT IS DRAMATIC, UNLESS  THE MESSAGE IS SEEN AS  IMPORTANT,  IT IS BORING.  GRAMMAR IS USUALLY UNDERSTOOD TO BE BORING!

Part 1. —  Our Four Responsibilities in Speaking  (p.47)

1.     Second set of facts about language:  1) person addressed must be called by his/her or some name (Sir, Madam, Ms., etc.)  2) The listener must answer.   The act of speaking, even in a simple two – party conversation, is a complex act.  It requires a name and an answer.   3) Intentions, desires and emotions (even if neutral) are part of this process, as is  necessity.   There must be a common language.  4)  There is a physical element; our sensory equipment must be in-tact or there is no impression.  Hence, both the inner thought and the outer physical world are needed (even if there is only sign language used).

2.     Four lessons to learn from a simple interaction:   1) Language has long since been established; thus proper use of speech respects the history of mankind.   2)  Three possible directions into which an answer can fit are  a)  “Go to hell,” an imperative,  b) objective statement of fact, “Sir,” indicatival, or c) indicating the “I” form of intention, “I am coming,” intentional form, subjunctive.  These three directions represent avariation within a linguistic tradition. “To articulate, then, is a highly complicated act that implies both identity and variation.” (p.49)  Thus, we transform the initiation of the interaction in the process of responding.

To speak is, indeed, a biological phenomenon of metamorphosis.  This biological fact, however, takes place within the kind, not within the individual.  For, it is the rebirth of that element which binds together the whole race…(p.31)

2.  The Cross of Reality  – (p. 51)

1.     Four facts about “speech-disease” (lack of articulation)

a.   When we speak we are connected, through the millenniums, in the  process of attempting to use the proper words. (time factor-past)

b.   When we respond we indicate a willingness to continue respecting  a communal act, i.e. continuing the vitality of the community into the future. Variations of articulation point toward a possible new way.

c.   Expression of intentions, emotions indicate (inner) feelings.

d.   Our observable responses are the (outer) front, the touching of our senses.

Thus, the cross of reality is representative in the most basic or common acts of speaking. “A human being, when speaking, takes his stand in time and space.” (p. 52)

Inward

Backward                                     Forward

Outward

2.    The time and space of living organisms differs widely from that of dead matter.   Dead matter, the subject-matter of physics, is mechanical and predictable. In time perspective, the past creates the present, and the present creates the future.  With conscious life, time has two directions, past and future.  We can remember and anticipate – both influence our thought.

In physics the interest is only in the concrete world of space and measurement.  Conscious life, being capable of thought, by definition has an inner dimension as well as a sensory system to indicate the outer world.

a.   The presence of living organisms is created by pressure from past and  future. Every word spoken is traditional and evolutionary.

“We steer between the origins of our patterns of language, speech, thought and our destiny.  Real time has two directions: backward and forward…The mechanical picture of a straight line starting at zero in the past and going forward towards the future does not apply to the living being…” (p.53)

b.   Space, in living organisms, is two-fold, with metabolism, growth, assimilation;  individuation requires a distinction between inner and outer space. With all speech there are two worlds, the inner world of thought, and outer concrete reality;   an inner circle reflecting the outside world.  Man is between two fronts of space, one facing inward, one outward, corresponding to the time aspect of backward and forward.  I am oriented inside my head, inside my family, my club, profession, community, country, etc., as against the “outsiders.”

We speak in an attempt to ease this strain.  To speak means to unify, to integrate, to simplify life.  Without this effort, we go to pieces by either too much inner, unuttered desire, or too many impressions made upon us by our environment, too many petrified formulas from the past, or too much danger and emergency from the future. (p.54)

3.    This means that for all living beings, including plants and animals, space is a conflict between inner and outer processes, as is time a conflict between responsibilities toward the past and the future.

With mankind, if we do not speak we cannot properly balance the conflicts between these four fronts of time and space. If we do not do this, we become inarticulate.  Lack of speech always leads to social break-downs.  War means there is no meaningful speech between the parties.  Insanity is the inability of the individual to connect the inner with the outer world.

Part – 3. The Pillars of Time and Space

1.    The defense against the 4 fronts of time and space is reflected directly in our grammar, in our social roles and methods of analysis of experience, as summarized in the  following matrix:

grammar                        role & method                ref. in time/space

——————————————————————————–

a.  come – imperative      leader/politics                 forward/future

b.  he has come             historian                        backward/past

c.  he is coming             scientist                        outer/concrete

d.  will he come              poet                              inner/emotional

Being stuck in any one role for too long creates distortion and is incomplete; a person requires all dimensions to see and understand experience fully. No single role is complete.  (RF –   It is also interesting to observe that each of the four branches of the cross of reality, in addition to correlating with time and space dimensions of experience, reflects the four basic mental functions – anticipation, memory,  sensory observation (and logic), and emotion.)

Scientists, philosophers, and clerics suggest there is thought in itself, i.e.  concepts are more than words,  beyond language, and mathematics or inspiration (from God) is more perfect than language.  ERH’S PARADIGM REFUTES THOSE IDEAS.  Hence, the gift of God to humankind is speech, and God is only present in humans through speech.

Speaker and listener, stationed at the center of the cross of reality, are in a position to see the distortions of a “single language,” such as mathematics, the language  for analysis.

The general public today more than ever, is warned against uncritical language, and invited to become analytical.  From chemical analysis to psycho-analysis, everything is analyzed.  Our bread is so well analyzed that nothing is left in it of the illogical grain and that vitamins have to be injected into the flour afterwards to make up for the losses by too much analysis.  And the soul is analyzed so well that all our loyalties and all our wishes and all our dreams are abandoned as just so many frustrations and chains and inhibitions. (p.59)

2.       WHY IS THE NOTICE OF GRAMMAR CRUCIAL TO OUR UNDERSTANDING OF EVENTS? Because it is delicate and dangerous to face the four fronts of life;   we are forced to decide what belongs to the past, the future, the inner and outer.   “Our grammatical forms in our daily speech betray our deepest convictions.” (p.59)

It is because a major part of our understanding of experience, especially in social science, focuses on understanding the thoughts of others, which are hidden from us except as they speak. The importance of this notion becomes apparent!  The person, in the act of deciding and speaking, thus reveals him/herself.

3.       To face the four fronts is to think and speak creatively, as compared to reflection and analysis only.  This is another way of saying that the language of science is incomplete for describing social experience.

4.       Science observes; this we are familiar with.  But reflection about the past, fulfilling past ceremonies and forms, recognizing customs, and the glorious past all are crucial reference points in our lives. Time stands still here. (The past cannot be changed!)

Politics and action: A description of either present (science) or past (history) makes no sense if action is not taken, and thus we must use education as preparation for action.    And neither of these have much meaning out of the context of our interests, our desires and what gives us fulfillment.  The inner front is crucial to us all.  [“May she love me, or may I not live to see this happen” is the language of poetry.  ]

Any society that would be purely scientific, or purely political, or purely poetic, or purely ritualistic kills the spirit. In time,  it physically kills the person.  It would be untenable.

5.       The freedom, the right and responsibility to choose which is to be when, (what is to be forgotten, what to be acted upon now, and what must wait for our action) represents our ultimate freedom in life. When we practice these freedoms is past, present, future, and which to  commit to thought only, or to describe the outer world as we see it),  represents our ultimate freedom in our lives, without which there is no freedom. WHEN WE PRACTICE THESE FREEDOMS WE ARE  REGENERATED DAILY!   (p.63)

6.       The risk in life comes because we can fail at these tasks.  We forget instead of  remembering, we hate instead of loving, we remain indifferent when we should boil over. We fail to describe an unreasonable or crazy situation,  or we fail to act when we should.

7.       Since we are not perfect, we require other people to help us to remember and love and act at the right time. We need articulate  speech (as contrasted with lying or small talk) and community, because we are not God.

The whole race is making up for my forgetfulness, my indifference, my fears, my madness (craziness).  (p.63)

8.       We attempt to participate in all four languages by participating in speech.

Language is not an imperfect first attempt of reducing us to logic, but an attempt to integrate one and the same cross of reality into every human heart and brain…When we are taught to speak, we are given the unifying orientation for our way through life and with all men. (p.64)

Our security every hour of life must be re-established, and this can only be done through practicing the four languages of speech to defend ourselves against these four fronts.  This is difficult, as is life.

Chapter – 3 – THE UNIVERSITY OF LOGIC, LANGUAGE, LITERATURE

ERH sets out with the thesis that thought, language, and literature reflect the culture(s) of human beings, that each has its division of labor, and that only in sum would a culture be known.  Wilhelm von Humboldt—

…believed that the structure of language contained the secrets of national individuality, of history, of man’s creative destiny.  He treated languages as a historian of philosophy might study the many schools of Greek thought, not for their own sake but for a complete picture of the possibilities of the human mind. (p.67)

He blames the arrogance of philosophers as wrong-headed in that their assumption that philosophy as a science of finding truth is complete He, ERH, then begins his analysis of each of these fields, –  thought, language, and literature.

1.       Philosophy represents only a science (logic) of a special kind of truth.

2.       Most  linguists have reduced language to the status of a tool  “…degraded to the level of brass tacks.” (p.70)  Thought, complex thought, would be inconceivable without our language!

3.       Literary criticism addresses the fact that, while thought (logic) must be formed by language, the act of thinking changes language.

Words return into language changed and transformed, sometimes petrified and paralyzed after having passed through the thinker’s mill….Our hypothesis is that they  (language, thought and literature) are rays of one fire burning in man to communicate to or to hide from his fellow man his share of truth.  And we throw out the hypothesis that thought, language, and literature, in so far as they are means of concealing or revealing truth to ourselves, to a partner, or to all men, are ruled by the same laws.  [RF – emphasis mine] (p.71)

Furthermore, he quotes Whitehead in support of his assertion.  I am assuming that his case rests, for inclusion of literature, on the fact that metaphor reaches beyond itself, into inference.  As Whitehead is quoted,  “…meanings miraculously revealed in great literature.”

ERH  connects literature with the use of the concept of “enthymeme,”   that of leaving out a link in a syllogism or chain of logic, either a premise or at times a conclusion, but still implying it.  Connotation, implication, or suggestion,  is just as essential as denotation.

a.       Any speaker on a platform tries to speak his mind in a lasting way. To do this he must think in a monologue, he must speak in a dialogue (with the audience),  and he is hoping for a lasting effect,  beyond the power of the moment.

b.       In monologue, he is thinking out loud; in dialogue, speaking  to his hearers, in “pleologue,”  beyond the audience, into the future.

c.       From pleology, literature developed. (p.72)

4.       ERH reasons that where thought has been disconnected from language, memory of the one step, monologue, has been forgotten, and thus the assumption that thought can be separated from language, and that language (of any lasting meaning) can be separated from literature.  (pp.72-73)

All three of these states, language, logic, and literature,  contribute toward meaning:

In reality, we discover as many new things about ourselves or about the world or about our beliefs through speaking out and writing down as by thinking inwardly.  The revealing and concealing process is equally at work in all three aggregate states. (p.74)

5.       Speaking of man’s nature:

a.       Man is essentially concerned with disclosure as well as with velation (veiling or covering up).

b.       He is constantly justifying himself to himself, and to others, in the acts of wearing clothes, speaking, reasoning, writing books, listening to the scruples of ourselves and others, and to the wisdom of books.  “At any given moment, man answers to his attitude with true or false statements.” (p.74)

6.       Since there is no difference in the method of  language, literature, and logic, a slip in  logic, for example is not important.  There is a unified whole in our thought that goes beyond any of the parts.  “A man’s thought is as much a piece as the nation’s literature.” (p.75)

Professionals tend to specialize in one of the three fields, and thereby, remain incomplete.  The common person, speaking every day and combining all three methods, will speak with power.

7.       Humankind is incessantly speaking and listening, or thinking and writing – to God,  to mankind, or to the world.  Every human being does this in every conscious moment of his life.  Man’s freedom to make decisions is pretty much limited to the choice to conceal or to disclose the truth of what is happening to him. (p.75)

8.       MANKIND’S REAL ACTION IS THEREFORE CONTAINED IN SOME PROPORTION OF  CONCEALMENT OR REVELATION.  COWARDICE OR COURAGE, CONCEALING OR REVEALING ARE THE MAJOR (TOTAL) ACTIONS OF MAN AS A HUMAN, AND SOCIETY AND HIS COMMUNITY ARE DIRECTLY EFFECTED BY HOW ONE WORKS OUT THIS BALANCE.

SOCIETY IS CONSTANTLY CHANGED AND TRANSFORMED BY THESE CONFESSIONS OR SUPPRESSION OF WHAT JUST HAPPENS IN OUR MINDS , OUR GROUPS, OUR DESTINIES. (p.76)

What then is the method which might combine these three methods?

9.       In the next two or three pages, ERH proves the common bases upon which language, logic, and literature in terms of how each reflects the same patterns of flow between space (inner and outer) and time (past and future) at each moment.  He establishes this in terms of traditional grammatic forms (indicative, subjunctive, and imperative, etc.) and how these reflect the three  forms of poetic writing (lyric, epic and dramatic).

For instance, epic and lyric poetry are largely unconcerned with time, in the sense that they deal with description (indicative) and subjunctive (desire or speculation), neither of which is concerned with action.

On the other hand, the dramatic form of poetry, focussing on the imperative, or a decision to make, is concerned directly with past and future.  The decision is whether to continue with past practices, or to make a break and risk a future of unpredictable possibilities.  This also is highly emotional (representing the inner space).  The lyric and epic forms dealing with the outer, larger  world. (see pp.77-79)

Naturally, any book can mix these four attitudes, but it must use these four cardinal attitudes precisely as a man who speaks can shift from perfect to imperative, from indicative to subjunctive (or optative) and still is bound to move within these forms of decision about our situation in time and space. As long as the biologists overlooked the polarity of inward and outward, and the philosophers that between the past and the future, the identity of the grammar of society with the grammar of language could be overlooked. (p.79) [RF – emphasis mine.]

10.     Will other literary forms than poetry, follow the same tendencies to recognize time and space?

The grammatical forms of imperative, indicative, optative and participle are recomposed in prose by oratory, mathematics, philosophy, and history.  Political speech is the articulation of an imperative; philosophy reflects on our inner thought.  Mathematics analyze relations in space and….all pure narration (in scientific prose) looks backwards and tries to conjure up the past and to quote its speech and utterances as faithfully as possible, needs hardly saying….even taken together, are only in charge of two modes of our conscious life, of the elating optative of our inner self and the analytic indicative of the external world….The two other wings of man’s expansion into time, present and future, are occupied by two other types of speech, the past by ritual, the future by all the imperatives…( pp 80, 81)

11.     Language is a living thing, and all life springs into life and dies.  Verbs used often tend to become nouns,  e.g. sing, and its past tense (the singer),  build (builder).   By our speech we must thus resuscitate the dead.  This means that verbs go from motion to standstill (dead).  To re-instill meaning (resuscitate) is the function of a living speech, i.e. to use the imperative.  (p.84)

All modes of speech (prose, poetry, ritual, and imperative) are necessary to balance and to allow us to fix our place in terms of time and space, that is, in the universe of our lives.  These are reference points necessary to find our way in evaluating experience, analogous to measurement in science.

At another level we must at all moments be free to shift our moods,   “…from the subjective “I,” to the objective “it,” and further to the listening “thou” and to the remembering “we.”   Otherwise, we are not able to see our experience fully.

12.     ERH gives still another example, that of the philosopher, pointing out that Descartes listened to the imperative, Cogita et eritis (Think and you will be). He was neither subject nor object, but a you, in relation to some impetus that took him over .  He thereby forgot that he himself first followed a command, in a sense. And that his god-like uttering “I think, therefore I am” was a second step in the process of his creativity.   The world cannot therefore be divided (as the scientist or philosopher thinks) into only subject and object.

13.     What are the major problems or phases we must go through in order to regenerate any group, which, to remind the reader once again,  is the purpose of a science of society?

a.       One must listen (to the imperative), to a command; we must be plastic, willing to be commanded.  This means willing to be cut off from the past, willing to be transformed.  “One” in this context is then only one type of noun, a thou (you), which is neither an “I” or an “it”. “One” in this position is neither  subject nor object, but preject, the pointing toward the future. But the “mood” that makes it possible to listen comes from the inside, based on emotion, on passion.

b.       The Grammatical “We” represents a group with a common experience, thetraject, oriented  toward the past “We” evidences those who have been cast from the past (shared experience) into the present.   Here the “mode” is that of indicative, or description.

Thus, the terms preject (you) and traject (we) must be nouns added to the subject (I, or inner) and the object (it, or outer).

14.     Each of these four situations or conditions – in/out, past/future – requires a different language for expression.  Thus, the four types of literature: the essay (logical), the epic, the lyric, and the ritual (dramatic).

15.     The method ERH uses is not to extrapolate from subject/object, or from  the old scientific terms of time and space, but to limit them by adding two more dimensions to them (adding to the natural science method for social science) i.e. traject/preject denoting past and future respectively. These terms correspond to the additional elements of time and space from science, i.e. past and inside, as the two additional dimensions of time and space.

TEACHING AND HOW  THE GRAMMATICAL

METHOD RELATES TO IT

16.     With teaching, our traditional approach has been to memorize and analyze.  But ERH points out that these are late processes in “…the biography of words and forms.”  (p.89)

This is for the simple reason that the “…truth which the student is expected to grasp is supposed to be in existence when he enters the school…” (p.89)    THIS, OF COURSE BELIES THE VERY PURPOSE OF TEACHING, WHICH SHOULD BETO PREPARE THE STUDENT TO GENERATE NEW KNOWLEDGE RATHER THAN SIMPLY REGURGITATING OLD KNOWLEDGE. The question implied is, “How do we prepare the student to understand a principle, to make the knowledge his own, transform him by way of being motivated to apply it and be changed in the process?”

17.     FIRST PRINCIPLE

Learning takes time. It must pass through the several stages of thought, speech, and  writing.

SECOND PRINCIPLE

Learning processes are analogous to the procedure of the court-room of law, a process which was eventually moved into academe.  (details below)

THIRD PRINCIPLE

Each part or role in the court-room procedure requires a different type of speech, or approach, or “language,” as ERH calls it.  These follow from the four fronts of time and space, past/future and inner/outer.

18.     Defense of the Idea

A living situation of any type, including teaching, evolves out of some problem raised.  In the case of teaching, the teacher has evolved a solution.   Analogous to the court-room situation, a citizen accused of committing some (alleged) crime, the question is, “Were his actions  legal?”  The purpose of the trial is to ascertain the culpability of the defendant in the law court.  In the classroom, the problem is the degree of probability of  validity of the solution posed by the teacher.

In both these instances, it must be kept in mind that the purpose is to determine what is the best course of behavior into the future. In other words, what is the truth?

Steps in court (or classroom) are as follows:

a.       Accusation is made by prosecutor, that the “law” was broken. In the case of classroom, a traditional view may be questioned.  It must be remembered that the original problem statement took place in a specific context, and the solution is to follow some accepted or newly proposed principle (method of solution).

In the case of teaching, the teacher himself must act, for a while, in the role of the prosecutor. In this role, the prosecutor’s defense is from tradition.  His method therefore is to present the accepted methods, rules etc. from the past and present the evidence in the case that these rules were broken.  THE PROSECUTION’S CASE RESTS ON DESCRIPTION FROM THE PAST. The method is essentially scientific, logical; looking outward as well as to the past. (p.92)

b.       The defense (a role performed by the teacher) is based not so much  visible evidence (that has been presented), but rather on intentions, on personal integrity, good faith (in court, bringing in character witnesses to establish this, who take an oath to tell the truth).  This process is essentially soul-baring, passionate, a personal response to the notion that this response is the only moral way to go; in other words, the best interpretation  to reach the intended goal.  The teacher defends his actions (proposed solution)  looking inward and to the future.  It is an act of  the will of the teacher.

c.       The teacher (who ERH calls a philosopher, a seeker of truth)  must align himself with a constituency willing to share the problem, willing to listen to the evidence and possibly be moved by it.  He must thus motivate his students to be called to take interest in the problem. The teacher was already motivated, as was the accused in a law court, to respond.  Now the constituency must be convinced to so respond.  The teacher,  defendant, and prosecutor, alike use all their persuasive powers to plead their cause.

d.       The judge and jury, then, having heard the evidence and the defense of the actions, makes a judgement.  This judgement is of course a decision, which is in turn a defining of what happened.  A definition is a summing up,  reaching, of a generalization if you will.  Such a generalization is more or less dead or un-living knowledge because it has had all details of the case stripped away, out of the context of time and space.

19.     To summarize:   1) The teacher, or defender, or jury has been called  upon to respond to some situation.  This represents a personal commitment, a calling, as willingness to listen, to be called “you” by some higher authority. 2) The evidence is presented and heard, and the event as experienced is retold to the court, including the 3) narration of specifics and the reasons for the solution.  Finally, (4) there is a judgement based upon how well the law was applied, if a new law should be formulated, or if the old law was indeed broken (in the case of classroom, the new proposed method refuted).  This last act is one of definition, of summarizing what has been learned in the form of a generalization, or a principle (of law).

But, as we have said above, principles or generalizations or laws represent dead knowledge (coagulated), a summary of all possible meanings of the principle at that time.  TO BECOME LIVING KNOWLEDGE, TO GUIDE ACTION IN THE FUTURE, the individual must, upon approaching another event, infuse (ERH uses the term resuscitate) that dead knowledge with life.  Because definitions, by establishment, combine many shades of meanings, the actor must make a decision as to which one, (possibly a new one), might apply to any given situation.  Thus, he gives life to knowledge.  ERH calls definitions and generalizations, research, libraries he calls, “…a petrification of life and knowledge.”  All of this awaits the reader to possibly bring it to life at the right time, that is, to act on the knowledge.

Finally, there are fundamental steps that cut across all of these processes.  We stated above that “full knowledge” of the meaning of experience must address the four fronts of time and space.  The point is that each of these four steps in teaching cited above represent these four fronts and regardless of one’s role, all four must eventually be addressed.  The sequence of steps will differ depending upon the presenter’s role and purpose.  ERH presents the following. (p.95)

sequence    mental function     time/space     language (special     mood

designation     definition)

1                memory               past               history                     indicative

2                anticipation          future             narration                  dramatic

3                logic                    outer              science                   descriptive

4                emotion               inner              poetry lyrical            subjunctive

The sequence in the court room (ritualistic) = 1,2,3,4

”     ”            ”          scientific research  = 3,1,2,4

”     ”            ”       obedience (teaching) = 2,4,1,3

Thus, he points out that our traditional teaching begins with the wrong information, with the decision before the case has been heard.  THIS DOES NOT RESULT IN TEACHING THE STUDENT HOW TO GENERATE NEW KNOWLEDGE, to applygeneralizations, or resuscitate dead knowledge.  In this case (traditional teaching), #2 and #4 have been omitted,  and the student has no way to transform knowledge.  Another way to describe the teaching/learning situation is to present a problem to which the student will be called.  This problem must be understandable (within the life experience of the student).  The calling is represented by #2. With #4, the student gives himself to the experience completely, making no logical prejudgments, but being absorbed in the situation.  With #1, he describes what has happened, he narrates or recalls the evidence.  And finally, he generalizes, defines, in preparation for meeting the next event.

The only ethical command which church and society can impose on man is: Give ear, think it over.  The first thing society must guarantee to its members is time for recollection and reconsideration….the processes of language, literature and thought…Audi! Lege! Medita! (Listen, Read! Think!)…And is not all education based on this assumption? (p.97)

It should be clear and no wonder that mental functions, time and space factors, and forms of speech are all coordinated  and provide essential  reference points in our journey through life. The answer to the beginning question in this chapter is that language both reflects human nature and in turn shapes it!

Chapter 4

He begins with the problem statement that all of the ancient dogmas have been replaced by modern ideas, except that of grammar.  This in turn has caused serious social disintegration.  For instance, Euclidean geometry, Ptolemaic astronomy, Galenian medicine, Roman law, and Christian dogma have long since disappeared from our texts.  “Ancient grammatical dogma still dominates.”

The reader might recall how dry and meaningless our grammar lessons were.  The structure of sentences and paragraphs are divided into categories of subject/verb/object, and different qualifiers such as adjectives and adverbs and conjugations were all memorized, appearing to have equal weight in the scheme of structure.  The whole process seemed mechanical and of little relevance to how we actually spoke and thought, therefore meaningless.

What the author advocates is that there can be a “higher grammar,” which is taught and structured to help us better understand life processes and aid us in understanding our life experiences.   There is an enormous difference, he asserts, in the consequences in our life between making a statement in the first, second, or third person. The mood is also important whether indicative, or evaluative (adjectival), or  reflecting a commitment in the imperative mood.

The principle problem with “lower grammar” is that it indicates no differences in emphasis and in political consequences.  For instance, to say I love or I kill  “…cannot be spoken without grave social consequences.  Hence, they presuppose emphasis…” (p.100)  Furthermore, these crucial utterances can be evoked or repressed by the way we think about grammar.  In traditional grammar these social consequences are not discussed.  All statements in conjugation, e.g. I love, he loves, we love, they love, are spoken with equal emphasis.  Finally he asserts that history cannot be a science because it requires emphasis (choice), the implication of values in what was important to stress.  With science, which is purely objective, and where description in itself is without added values there is no need to emphasize.

The worst sin is, of course, its Greek origin, our grammar school’s tradition from Latin and Greek sources.  The Greek and Latin names and tables of grammar have been handed to us even when we had to learn French, German, Spanish or Russian, or English itself. The wrong Alexandrinian table of grammatical values is with us everywhere. (p.99)

Part 1. –  Amatur (he is loved)

1.       Amatur is an objective statement of fact, “…reported by somebody who is neither the speaker, or writer nor the listener, or reader.” Neither speaker nor listener has any stake in the statement, and thus the concept “love” has no power.

Of love, ERH points out, we can only speak in fear and trembling if we speak of it in the first or second person. In the third person it is rendered powerless!.

Speaking in the third person abstracts from the speaker and listener; it is a two fold negation of a relationship.  “This reduces the linguistic situation to a monologue of a thinking subject who thinks an object.” (p.101)  The implication is that there exists an enormous gap between the meaning and mood, between the first and second person on the one hand, and the third person on the other.

Part 2 – Amo (I love)

2.       What are some of the gaps between first & second and third person moods?

a.  To say, “I love” has two implications, involvement in an act and admitting  it.  This is very risky because the act can then be interfered with. To speak out about what you either intend, or are in the act of doing, means others can enter into and change the situation.   ONE THEN SHOULD NOT SPEAK IN THE FIRST OR SECOND PERSONS UNLESS ONE MUST.

To say amat, “he loves,” has no such emphasis or commitment.

Time is also a factor.  To say I eat or I sleep is short term, with little chance for interference.  To say I love implies a life-long commitment. THEREFORE, AMO CAN NEVER BE AS PUBLIC A STATEMENT AS AMAT. It should only be spoken to the second person.

We conclude that amo is made of absolutely different stuff than amat and the history of language proves our point.  Amo is an emphatic form, a subjective exclamation which is quite wantonly inserted into the Alexandrinian table as an indicative.  The first form singular did not originate with the indicative.  (p.104)

Part 3 – Amas (Thou loveth)

3.       “The rift between amo and amat, however, is not wider than the rift between amas (you love) and amat.” (p.104)  Here he asks, what is the difference between the 2nd and 3rd person?

There is just as great a gap because the first person must have received authority to speak about the subject to the second person. You cannot say, “You love,”  as a friend unless the friend has already admitted this to you, just as you can only say “You have diabetes” if you are the person’s doctor.  Only a parent may say to his/her child, “You have been bad today.”   In the former case, the second person gave the speaker the authority by telling him/her first.  In essence, the first person, having received authority from the second person, opens the way for the other to become a listener.  Without such authority there isn’t liable to be a listener!

THIS EMPHASIS ON A “PRIMED” LISTENER IS A CRUCIAL ELEMENT OF THE SECOND/THIRD PERSON RELATIONSHIP.  If you say, “you are a fool,” to someone who is not prepared to listen, the speaker is powerless.

Why is advice unasked-for never given successfully? Because it has no power to unlock the recipient’s ear. In amat, no power is required to state the facts. They do not presuppose any social power or authority over other people. But the quality of any sentence in the second person is graded by the degree of authority  the speaker wields over the listener. He must have converted the listener to just that–a listener. (p.106)

Part 4 – Comparison

4.       a.  amo = speaker having decided to break his own silence on some issue.

amas = listener having decided to invite interference.

amat = speaker and listener have no commitment to an attitude before they listen, they neither defy nor interfere in their own affairs.

b.  Amo is debatable as to wisdom (regarding political consequences and  propriety), amat as to fact, amas as to authority.  Hence, knowledge = third person, authority = second person, communion = first person.

c.  Amat faces problems of truth. Authority faces the dilemma between listener’s freedom and his necessity.  Amas faces problems of  interference with one’s freedom. (p.107)

d.  Examples:  To say, “I sweat” = overcoming shyness.  To say, “you  sweat” cannot be done without permission, unless the first person is socially superior to the second.   “The social discrepancy between amat (knowledge of facts), amas (authority to tell), and amo (revelation of secrets) is enormous.  They represent three  different social processes between man, fellow man, and the outer world. (pp.107,8)

Part 5 – The Teaching of Grammar

5.       Alexandrinian grammar taught in our schools blinds the student to discovering the real person.

…it contradicts all the experiences of society and of us in society…Every man is told to think of himself or herself in a matter of fact way, as though he or she were a third person. This puts his or her human relations on a wrong, objective, basis which devaluates it.  For objectively, we speak of those who are absent and who therefore need neither blush nor listen. Human relations thrive where we attribute secrets of communication and loyalties of listening.  Human relations die where all our statements only contribute facts.”  (pp. 108,9)

Part 6 – History or Science

6.       The fourth form of the grammatical statement (after first, second, and third persons), is amavimus, “We have loved.”

a.  “We”  means a group (a merger) of speakers and listeners who have acted together and formed a successful fusion.

b.  Real history is “…the inside story of a We group…”  (p.109)

c.  “They” histories lie outside “our” group. These histories are scientific in that there is no personal responsibility for what has happened.  “They” are multiple to the scientist whose method is to make distinctions between things.  In a scientific age such as ours multiple histories abound, e.g. the history of Mexico, of Russia, of Boston, and even within different fields of science itself.  Only when humankind is seen as “one,” and we listen and speak to each other around the world,  could there be a universal history.

d.  “Our” history, by contrast, is among those of us who have spoken to  each other. Thus we have the right to say we.

e.  What “moderns” (in the pejorative sense)  teach as history implies 1) thought without language, 2) speechless thinkers and speechless societies. There is no distinction or emphasis between first, second and third  persons, or between “we” and “they.”

f.   The conclusion and implications?   1) All of us are,  at different times each day, in the role of  I,  you,  it,-we, and they. 2) We must understand the distinctions between these roles and the rights and responsibilities thereof.

For instance, “You love” can be justified if it is true and spoken as an act of healing, not as an insult.  “I love” can be justified if it is an act of faith and not shameless. “We love” can be justified if based on common experience, and not abstract dogma.  A sensitivity to the differences reflect the degree to which we are immersed in and caring about our spoken word.

Once the ways of speech are confused, the brazen intellect will obliterate all distinctions by speaking everything: the intellect neglecting the real social life between speakers and listeners…Brazen objectivity and whispering shyness are social malaises which spring from an insecurity of grammatical distinctions….The alexandrinian lists of grammatical forms cauterize the social sensibilities of the objects of our educational system…the wrong grammar is not ineffectual.  It does positive harm.  (pp.113,14)

Chapter 5 – How Language Establishes Relations

1.       The several traditional ways of dealing with language: 1) Phonetics, the physical aspects of making sounds. 2) Meaning, where semantics are systematized. 3) Historical, how language came about.  This is not the same as studying language in the context of use.   ERH proposes that we add a fourth approach, studying language in the context of use.  Language is a physical act, in other words, which can be scientifically studied.  The organs of ear, eye, respiration are involved. He points out the Greek meaning of shaking hands, is planting one’s self with the other.

a.  First principle: “The fundamental classifications of grammar and the fundamental classifications of social relations coincide.  Discovering the one, we discover the other.”  (p.117)

HERE HE POINTS OUT A VERY IMPORTANT PRINCIPLE THAT FITS ALL HIS THEORIES. IT IS THAT MAN IS INCALCULABLE, BUT HIS BEHAVIOR CAN BE CLASSIFIED IN ONLY A LIMITED NUMBER OF PHYSICAL AND SOCIAL POSSIBILITIES.

b.  Four  basic forms of speaking (and social) interaction are:

1) The speaker and the listeners are unanimous, of one spirit.  They agree.

2) The speaker and the listener are “dubious,” split, and of two spirits.  They are strangers.

3) The speaker depends on the listener, whom the speaker expects to act on what he has to say.

4) The listener depends on the speaker because the speaker has acted already.

Before going further with this analysis of these situations, one other element needs to be understood, that is, pre-conditions for speech interaction.

c.  The silence before speaking can have four  possible causes:

1)   Lack of a person to speak to, e.g. lack of an audience. This must include lack of a person WHO WISHES TO LISTEN. The listener is not yet ready.

2)   Lack of a person to listen to in terms of lack of the authority to speak, or of content, or of something extraordinary to be said. I would put this in another way, “lack of anything to say.” The speaker is not ready.

3)   Lack of relations between two people.  They may be strangers,  different  too far apart.

4)   Lack of distance, relations between people who are so close they  think they need not say anything.

In #1 & #2, the moment has not come. In #3, & #4 the scene is not set (with #3 strangers move with different thoughts; with #4 the unity and intensity are too close to “…allow for the distance in which alone language can fly back and forth.)  With #1 & #2 the time element is prohibitive, in #3 & #4 the space element is prohibitive.

d.  2nd Principle:  Social relations need a medium distance in space and  time. “All these situations correspond to the great situations of decadence, war, chaos, revolution.” (p.118)

Here he repeats the theme of the book, that language is a system of social relations, and grammar is the scientific process by which we become conscious of the system of social relations.  It is not the grammar of the classroom, of forms by themselves, however; this he calls lower grammar.  He calls his new social science “higher grammar,” and the rest of the book explains how this differs from lower grammar. Lower grammar systematizes relations between words only; higher grammar correlates these relations with social behavior and its consequences.

e.  3rd Principle: Communication, effective use of language “…becomes language properly speaking, when the relations are mutual and reciprocal.  When I speak and you listen, when I formulate and you repeat, when I object and you explain, when I sing and you fall in, we have human language.” (p.119)

f.   4th Principle:  “Language survives any individual speaker. Thus, language is obviously not restricted to  temporal and passing relations.  It tries to build up recurrent and remembered relations (also).”  (p.120)

Thus, words represent events from the past. Example:  One cannot speak of America, or of France or polo, without implying the processes that brought these entities into existence. In the process of communicating, we do either a service or a disservice, (as in the case of lying) to these past acts, and  thereby INTENSIFY LIFE.  This occurs by unifying separated acts dispersed by distance and time, into “…one stream of continuous conversation and recording.”

g.  Speaking “about” events is analogous to the shell (chaff) surrounding  the grain of meaning. (ERH calls this “small talk.”)  It represents only a small division of labor in the context of more serious communication needs.  More will be spoken about this later.

h.  5th Principle:  In the process of “real, meaningful speech”  we describe and interpret the universe, uniting all events since the beginning of history into the present.  This is a momentous thing because it allows us to learn from the past, and therefore  gauge change.

We, all the time, spread the good and the bad news.  And to spread news is the function of homo sapiens.  In this way, he establishes a permanent system of coordinates in time and space.  (p.121)

i.   6th Principle:  “All speech is transfer of actions to other human  beings, and thought is a subcase of such transfer.”  (p.122)

Transfer it because I have experienced it: by telling a tale (story).

”          ” so that it may reinforce my action (song, for instance):  “Let us go.”

”          ” so that it may eliminate resisting action about objections:   “He actually is going.”

”           ” so that I need not act myself: the command, “Go.”

j.   7th Principle:  “An individual becomes a person by being able to represent speaker and listener both within one person.”    Logic in this context can be understood  as the process of breaking down objections so that communication will not be severed.

[IT OCCURS TO ME THAT, IN SUM, THERE IS A MORAL OBLIGATION TO PASS ON OUR INTERPRETATIONS OF EVENTS SO THAT THE PROPER INFORMATION CAN BE MADE USE OF BY OTHERS.  EACH OF US THEN, IS OBLIGATED TO RE-ENACT THIS COSMIC PROCESS. -RF]

k.  Listening only is not enough.  If communication is to be effective,  what then is the role of the second person, the listener, and how can he be convinced to participate?

There are four basic situations that are a restatement of #b above, and not necessarily related to (#c) above.

1)  Old and young: people in succession, sacramental words and their  reiteration. (analogous to b,3 – speaker depends on listener)

2)  Friends in agreement: soloist & chorus. (analogous to b,1 – speaker and listener are unanimous, of one spirit)

3)  Strangers in disagreement: question and answer (analogous to b,2 – speaker and listener are split, of two spirits)

4)  Leader and led: command and response (analogous to b,4 – speaker  depends on listener because the speaker has acted already)

#1 and #4 are time-related, as are  all imperatives (trying to convince the listener to take the next step).  THE FUTURE DOES NOT JUST HAPPEN, IT IS PREPARED FOR AT THIS STEP! The future needs action now! “This impending and imperative character of the time concept “future” is overlooked in modern discussions.” (p.124,25)

#2 & #3 are space related, friends lie “inside” the circle, strangers “outside.”  Insiders give up some individuality for the group.  “The `inner’ life of man is not a privilege of private individuals.  Any group in the world has this inner sanctuary.” (p.125)

“Outside” means distance, separation, the making of distinctions.  In an argument or a dialogue (of voicing objections and asking for a defense) is an example of two individuals being separated (at least for that period of time).  The commercial world, traders, perhaps by necessity, partake of this type of speech. –

“But it is but one form of communication among others. Magister and disciple, singer and chorus, leader and respondent are of equal originality in their linguistic situation as the interlocutors of a discussion in the form of question and answer.” By isolating the interrogatory mood, the origin of question and answer was inexplicable until today. [RF – I know of many people who believe this as the main, if not only type of interaction]  As soon as we compare the prosaic process of question and answer to its parallels in historical tradition (formula and repetition), in musical unanimity (singer and chorus), in political challenge (imperative and response), question and answer are disclosed as one application of the general principle of social relations to be established through speech, the application to the meeting of two people from different spaces, and therefore of a different standard of objectivity.” (p.126 )

l.   Each of these languages has a different intonation: singing, scientific discussion (or commercial discussion), story-telling or history, any command. “Everybody knows that it takes years to acquire the voice of command that is without flaw and effort, neither shrieky nor embarrassed, but irresistible.” (p.127)

Each language embroils the speaker and listener in different types of social situations, and “…the eccentricities of the  whole of national languages have been built.” [RF – One is reminded of Chinese; one written language, many dialects.]   In summing up:

The past must be remembered by reiteration, the inner life must be felt, the outer circumstances and facts must be known, and the future must be done so that it may become a part of the unforgettable, knowable, experienced, and responded for time-space pattern called the universe.” (p.128)

The Classification of the Parts of Speech

1)  Pronouns, we, you, it, they, I,  “…only make sense when you  are actually talking to people, within one circle of peaceful relations. ”

2)  Nouns classify distinctions between things and people, but need  two sub-types indicating inside and outside.  The inside as with pronouns, the outside as objective phenomena.

3)  Adjectives indicate an evaluation, a looking to the past, an attempt to understand an object by connecting it with some common knowledge.  e.g. round, red table gives some idea of the otherwise unknown table. This connects us with the origins of life.

4)  Verbs indicate the imperative, the future, making the world over by action.

ERH now correlates grammatical forms with the social-relation  terminology. “All language may take four shapes, and so may all parts of speech:  The experience asks to be called future, past, objective or subjective (nominal), verbal, pronominal and adjectival form of language is something eternal.”     (p.130, 31)

5)  The subjective is called ours and mine by pronominal language.

6)  The objective, as between strangers, is extrapolated as by nouns, nominal language.

7)  The old is expressed as having certain qualities, adjectival usage.

8)  The new is expressed in process, as bound to come off,  imperative usage, because the success  depends on the act voiced.

“Or, we may table our findings as follows:” (p.123)

a.  The inward aspect stresses the unity of the interlocutors,  who feel their unanimity:  pronominal language.  (Pronouns: we, I, ours, mine, you, thou, yours, thine, etc. Conjunctions: and, but, in spite of, etc. Optative, subjunctive. Poetry, Music.)

b.  The outward aspect stresses the freedom of each  interlocutor who meets in an objective world: nominal language. (Nouns: stone, rain, fire, hail, tree, etc.; one, two three, four, five, etc. Indicatival speech. Arithmetics.)

c.  The backward aspect traces everything to its familiar qualities: adjectival language.  (Adjectives: red, green, good, bad.  Participles: loving, gone, been. These are both  historical background and moral judgement.)

d.  The forward aspect accompanies the unfinished creation of  the world of tomorrow:  imperatival language. (Verbs, imperatives: Thy will be done, thy kingdom come. — or Help! Stop! Listen! – Political eloquence, prophesy.)

And the true perfection in speech is not achieved by mixing the four styles but by being completely devoted to one of the four at a time. The most important fact about speech is that it must remain four-fold, and no one style can communicate the whole truth of the matter we are trying to convey.  No one style can be reduced to another.  Rational, scientific language is one of four different languages, and must remain so.  (pp. 132,33)

It should be obvious that ERH is using the term “languages” to express the  four references in time and space, outward, inward, backward, and forward, although he expresses these in different ways, in terms of nouns and verbs as above.  Also, in terms of disciplines, as the sciences, the arts (outside/inside), history and  sociology/prescriptive philosophies.  ONE SHOULD REMEMBER AS WELL THAT HE ASSERTS THESE ARE UNIVERSAL PRINCIPLES FOR ALL LANGUAGES.  The term “style” seems to mean one of the four disciplines.  It is important as well to note the idea of one-at-a-time and sequence.  This concept is central to his paradigms related to action.  For instance, the natural sequence in learning that is intended to affect the student’s acts outside the classroom, and  where motivation or “a calling” must precede action. 

Chapter 6 – THE LISTENER’S TRACT

1.       Traditionally we are not taught the importance of listening. Listening instead is represented as a different phenomenon, such as in the military training,  the issue is called “obedience.”   The goal in  this chapter is to emphasize listening as a part of language, and its fundamental meaning in terms of the imperative.

Is it not a justified question to ask ourselves how language must be composed in order to reach the listener so that he is set in motion and begins to acquire a fragment of the information and content of that which the speaker has said?….To educate means to be a representative of creation.  The long range process of listening: – this is education….The listener’s tract is one-half of the social relation that is established by the process of speech.  And this half is as varied, as complex, as the speaker’s tract.      (p.135)

a.  The four ways in which the human body is involved in listening: 1)  respiratory-oral tract, 2) outer tract such as gesticulation, 3) audition, 4) vision.  All of these are interrelated with each word in the message, and the failure to attend to any one effects all the others.

b.  Principle #1:  Energy differential is a crucial factor in effective speech, as the amount of energy of the speaker should match that of the listener. If the speaker appears  bored (mechanical, uninspired) so will be the listener.

If the listener is bored, the speaker shouts and is no more effective. In this case, the speaker is filled with his subject, but the listener is receiving only second-hand data and therefore only stores it in memory – at best.) “Any philosophy is deteriorated by the fact that it is memorized by the disciples.” (p.139)  Memorization only, at worst means one is unable to reproduce knowledge!

The moods of both speaker and listener must be the same. “It is the discrepancy that endangers our social system because speech is abused, in these inadequate responses, by one of the two interlocutors.” (p.138)

c.  Serious speech is effective only when hearers are willing to do something  about it. Only then does the speaker produce heirs to carry on his ideas. (p.139)

d.  Memory is important for clear messages.  When there is wrong memory or mis-interpretation, its value back-fires. Memory has power when it can be correlated with present, and new experience for the listener.

e.  Principle #2:   Memory must be accurate and translated into a form whereby it can be applied to a problem in the present.

The power of recognition that enables us to identify our own new experience with the record of past experience is a power that transcends logic and definitions.

The power of identifying us with people who express their ideas in other terms requires a quality of mind that is much rarer than logic or memory or sentiment.  It requires the superior power cultivated by the church and in the family:  The power of translating for the sake of mission and education the eternal truth into language of the times.  The power of translating fuses the different ways of understanding.  (p.140)

[RF – I understand this to mean the ability to accurately re-state the meaning of another’s message in one’s own words]

This is the most difficult objective to achieve in education, and when the student does not have that benefit of church and family, it clearly must be attempted by the teacher.

To educate, the speaker must arouse the listener emotionally, to take action intelligently, and observe new situations, and to translate memory. The speaker must, to achieve this, share his/her own excitement and methods.

f.   Lying has occurred since the beginning of speech. There are many forms: 1) Propaganda, where speaker uses subterfuge to convince listener to act in a certain way,  using short cuts or an attempt at cheap influence. 2) Hypocrisy is another form. Propaganda is impossible between people who live together, for obvious reasons. The purpose of speech is to animate the listener to the same degree as the speaker.

g.       Chart of degrees of effectiveness in speech (p. 142)

speaker             listener

chats                 smiles

talks                  listens

tells                   remembers

teaches             learns

sings                 feels

commands         obeys

argues               understands

prophesies         carries out

h.       The beaten track  represents repetition; it does not lead into the future.  Obviously, the point is not always to take, the beaten track or the less travelled-track, but rather to take whichever is appropriate,   at the right time.

Obviously, the point is crucial to education, apropos of principle #2, to translate memory appropriately in the light of present problem.  We teach to restore the honor of listening.

i.        To teach is to command — to listen is to carry out. In time of anarchy, one cannot teach, one must listen, serve.

j.        The listener must have expectations The silence before the speaker speaks  represents those expectations.

Learning requires three elements: the teacher, (conveyor), the administrator(resources), and authority .

Authority makes student expect to be inspired by public need. The student must be “emotionally” hungry for this.

Not our jokes, not our tricks, can lighten the burden of the student when he is not eager to learn.  And why should he be eager when he does not expect the extraordinary.?…the first stage in the listener’s track of hearing: his expectations, and his authorities that open him up to the important and extraordinary idea that he should listen…till he is transformed into a soldier of truth, service and peace for society.” (p.146)

To achieve this, the student (listener) must be given the complete set of phases in the social relationship (involving the whole person), to speak and to listen, to expect and to act, to be silent, and to command.  This requires all methods, all four basic  disciplines.

…Poetry, music, prose, mathematics actually plays on different senses that take part in the process of listening.  …No theory of education is satisfactory because theory is speaking scientifically.  Education is the full process of translating, out of the confusion of tongues, into one living language. (p.148)

k.       The student must be inspired to give “inner time” to the  subject, to think about it in off hours. The process of “giving time” is all on the side of the listener. This acceptance by the student to do this depends upon the teacher’s perceived authority to speak about the content.

This is a “life giving” process when it occurs, that is when the speaker has “taken time” to understand his topic and the listener is willing to give time and ultimately to act on the knowledge.

One assumes, of course, that “knowledge” in this case refers not to small talk, but to significant problems that need to be addressed in the community.  Other talk is simply passing the time of day.

l.     The listener must have the following feelings or attitudes:

1)   He should be willing to respond; it is his business to respond.  He should  feel, and should be made to feel, that he has been selected.

2)   He should feel that the thing asked is reasonable. In this case, the term  “reasonable” does not mean that it is plausible, but that it is something that should be done, and “this is the best alternative.”  [RF – ERH, rightfully I believe, thinks that today one of our social diseases is that we have too  many alternatives and no standards to tell us what one to choose.  The speaker’s role is important here. Thus, the concept of the imperative, “Listen! Be interested.”]  (p.151)

The concept of reason is not to speculate about what to do, but to find a solution to the problem that should be acted on.  ERH points out that all of these rules make no sense unless there is an emphasis, also depending on the context in which the problem is likely to arise.  He reminds us again that the student is, or should be, listening for the emphasis, the imperative part. The emphasis for the scientist, who primarily describes, is indirect, in his method, (“Let there be method.” (p.153) [RF – See an excellent description of science.]  ( pp.152,153). While the scientist’s work is objective, the act of the scientist applying himself to science is subjective. (p.153)

The powers by which the scientist gives his assent to practice science are not rational.

And our world goes crazy today because scientists have forgotten the basis of their own actions: that they have chosen between two irrational possibilities of the future: system or no system, the reasonable path of the system, without guarantee of success. (p.154)

And he continues:

The word rational does not include the problem of living into the future.  It is applicable to objects only.  Rationality is impossible when the outcome is unknown, because it lies in the future.  And rationality assumes that we remain unchanged and analyze objects.  The future, however, is that situation by which we undergo a change and are transformed ourselves. (p.154)

Chapter 7 – The Individual’s Right to Speak

Part – 1   Everybody Speaking

1.       The question (problem)  this chapter raises is, “What happens to me when I speak?”   When traditional grammatical study has been accused of viewing and using language as a “tool,” it means the attitude is to master language and use it to make speeches, in addressing others and perhaps in gathering one’s thoughts. This attitude is highly individualistic and tends toward forgetting that language would never have arisen without the participation of everyone in  community.  This means that language began evolving at the beginning of history, and will last until its end.  It can continue if there is one spirit to respect it, or civilization will end.   How can we understand its power better?

2.       ERH asserts that his birthright to speak freely is protected by the terms of grammar.  Why is this important? Because we all crave self-realization and this, he asserts,  occurs only  when understanding the sum of all phases of our lives.

3.       Wealth, biology (gender), marriage, profession, important as these are,  are not enough for self-realization. To a `city’ we must belong, in order to be human.”  This, and this alone, can bestow equality between every member, and this depends upon speech!

In community all its history belongs to the citizen, each participates in carrying on its vision, in narrating its great story…. The young student in his songs builds up courage for the great future tasks of his community….Physically, we are the children of our mother.  Mentally, however, our national language is our mother-tongue….  It gives us access to anything that has ever been called into existence by the community. (p.158)

4.       Language is the great “fortune” by which we might possibly understand each other, and thereby participate in this bounty.

“When we would thus penetrate into each other (in spirit), we always would experience a sublime moment in which new language was born, and new human words formed.” (p.160)

The mother tongue, what has been said and thought before us in the community, can be spoken by us, through us, and that has great sustaining value, spiritually.  We participate!  But we do not necessarily understand each other. All we can say is that we understand each other’s words, but to say that our interpretation of these words tell us the spirit, the inner life of the other, is quite another matter.  Only rarely does this happen, when one speaks what is in his heart at the right time.

5.       When we speak we either quote other ideas of the community,  or we create new ones. To speak means to crave unanimity, and ERH asserts this is proven by the fact that each language is assumed to be complete; whether it is 800 or 80,000 words, it is assumed to be able to say anything.

Part – 2   English Spoken

1.       Since there are many languages, one would not be able to assume that his language is complete.  HOWEVER, this problem was solved 2,000 years ago when the Bible appeared, because it has been translated into all other languages.  THUS, IT WAS LEARNED AND THIS NOW BECOMES “A NEW PRINCIPLE PROCLAIMED: ALL LANGUAGES MAY BE TRANSLATED INTO EACH OTHER.” (p.161)

2.       Thus  a universal Bible and universal science has transformed languages. They are no longer separate “individualities.” ( p.161)

3.       What are the conditions by which speech remains alive, and therefore reflects the spirit of the community?

Principle #1 :  “It is the essence of language to be momentary, fluid, fleeting.  Hence a word has its full truth only among the people between whom it spouts, and at the moment at which this happens.” (p.162)

Qualifications to this statement;  a) words should not be mistaken as accidental. When they rise to the occasion, speak the truth about it, they attain the level of a “…meaningful historical event.”  When such highest truth is spoken, it transforms the occasion as a memorable one!

Nor does this mean that intent to speak the truth is necessarily powerful.

At that moment of deep truth being spoken, it is the most powerful. All other truths, theories, historical events etc. are comparatively more remote, less powerful, more abstract in meaning.

In the event of speaking of the truth, the speaker assumes the listener will participate heart and soul.

As those words become removed from the situation, more remote (as with books, and other writing or quotations by others) they become more rigid in meaning, more formal, classic, moving toward petrification!

Petrification means the decrease of power of the words, of course, rendering them somewhat impotent when they cannot reflect the truth of the original occasion.

4.       To learn language, such as with children, or adults learning a language of science or of art,  the preparation has limited meaning. This situation is unavoidable and not bad as long as we understand it and do not mistake it for “powerful speech.”  True speech is therefore not available to the initiates  of other ages; the participants must have had “first hand experience” to comprehend the meaning.  When second-hand speech is thus mistaken for true speech (first-hand speech), there is no communication – and only chaos and violence can result!

“Having lost faith in speech, he no longer may obey the order of the day which is authorized by its creative power in the necessity of the moment.”   (p.163)

ERH quotes the Nazi propagandist Sorel, who in 1923  claims to have destroyed the power of words.  In 1933 the last issue of a Free Youth Journal headlined, “Words have lost their meaning.”

This was meant, by the way, in the book of Exodus when God said to Moses:  “There is no sky-world of astrology; you cannot hear what you have to do from the fourteen hundred and sixty-one year cycle of Egypt.  My name is, I am here and now.”  This meant two things in one: first, it meant that man must rise to the occasion, now. Second, it meant that to rise does not imply a blind reaction, a hit-or-miss move.  To rise to the occasion means to listen to the suffering of which speech is the healing.  Reality which remains speechless must drive man crazy. (p.164)

Implied in principle #1 is the fact that language is constantly dying.  Notice the meaningless ceremonies we go through almost daily where there is no context invoked that might give the words meaning.

Part – 3   The mental World

1.       Now to the inner structure of the language.   The first assumption is that language cannot exist without the common will of the community.  It is the common will vocalized.

2.       Two polarities, command and obey.  The speaker (one who commands) and the listener (one who obeys) reflect a common spirit in a group.  The commander is burdened to follow the will (spirit) of the group or suffer possible disinterest and lose his listener.  He has less freedom than the listener.  The person who obeys is less interested in the content; he accepts the command voluntarily, and thus expresses freedom. He is more relaxed, with less need to be tough. “A general has greater difficulty in keeping his freedom and equilibrium than his subordinates.”   The speaker’s equilibrium is maintained when the command is obeyed.  (p.165)

3.       Commands must be given in the proper tone.  Too soft a command suffers the possibility of not carrying force and thus not being obeyed.  Too loud may give offense and thereby reduce the spirit of the group to obey. Halfway between is therefore usually the most effective.

4.       A good imperative changes the course of the world.  Both speaker and listener are ( or must be) voicing the will of the group for such transformation to occur. .

5.       There must be a distinction between inner (spirit) and outer (problem being addressed).  To be objective refers to an object (problem) outside the “common will of the group.”  It offers resistance to the inner subjective (group will).  To speak objectively means referring to someone outside the group; “…it means that we are in the world, and have to expect resistance and difficulties.” (p.166)

Because  today we are so “world conscious”,  meaning  objective, with scientific  orientation, we have reduced our style of speaking  mainly to “objectivity” (to indicate).   When we speak within a group, when an order is given, or even in the event of criticism one can rely on a basic common spirit that reduces resistance.

But the world “outside” the group is different; it is more skeptical, resistant to suggestion and influence.  In this case one cannot rely on a common spirit, so commonality must rely on objective, spacial events that can be shared.  Thus we describe, take measurements, seek statistics; we calculate and measure to seek:

“..the right terms in which I speak of the objects of our actions so that we might break their resistance.” (p.167)

6.       Another terminology to meet is the past.  For the past to have meaning  it must be convincing that there was life there.  Life means names of people who spoke imperatives and led the fight.  Objective language cannot take the measure of such names.  Thus, the power of real history is to help us move in the present.

Facts are objective and dead.  Acts are historical and thereby restored to life in the name of the author of every sentence we report….In the sentence, `Constantinople was conquered by the Turks’ the Turks are the real agent, the subject of the sentence.  The old grammarians, therefore, called the expression `by the Turks,’ the ruling subject of meaning despite the grammatical form of the sentence.   (p.168)

We know that the wheel was invented, that the Battle of Hastings took place in 1066, but the men who dared to risk life,  are the center of history and of meaning.  Because we in the present are constantly confronted with  solving today’s problems  we therefore ask of  history,  “How did they do it?”  The passive and nominative are the forms into which speech turns with regard to the past.  “You live the past by speaking of great names.” (p.169)

7.       In our inner world, we are torn by emotions, unsureness of ourselves, not knowing how we will be evaluated by our fellows, what they will finally call us. At the extremes, we find states of ecstasy and hell.  “Therefore, the subject of the musical experience of this inner man is nameless in the deepest sense of the word.” (p.170)

To understand this inner world, it must be with pronouns,

You, I, mine, our, we thou, are the true forms of the realm of emotions and mixed motives…grammatical forms attached to these pronouns are subjunctive, optative..these processes are mere assumptions of inner experience…not yet materialized. (p.170)

ERH offers several examples of the force of poetry with  subjective grammar, pointing out that we all seek unity, and unity does not exist in the outer world naturally. “Nobody could speak if he didn’t believe in unity…” [RF – I would qualify this and say that it exists when we attempt to organize the natural world.  And do we not find laws that describe and allow us to predict events in the natural world?]

To sing (speak and sing poetry?), the power of language rests in itself, bridging the gap between inside and outside, therein creating a unity in both spheres. To sing belongs to neither past nor future.

H.      Freedom and; Free-will:  The only real freedom we have lies within our thought, because in the outside world, the world of concrete reality, there are numerous constraints. This is why to be “called” into a profession or some commitment, to dedicate one’s energies to a cause, is a decision representing and demonstrating free will.  The corollary of this is that  “…man’s own self is the greatest enemy of man’s free -will….Thoughts pay no custom duties, and they pass all frontiers.” (p.171)  The logic should be obvious. Only we ourselves can deny our own freedom of will.

[RF – Implied here it seems to me, but not specifically stated, is an important principle, one  I would name, PRINCIPLE #2.  This is, if our inner world of thought is the only place we find the possibility of total freedom and total unity, and conversely, the outer concrete world we find chaotic and confining, then we bring unity to the outer world by imposing on it.  In other words, through hypotheses proved, we create unity in the outer world which is recognized.  Of course, such unity only exists as long as people are around.]

I.        Is thought independent of language?  Obviously NOT, according to ERH.

1) Our thought must be validated by communication with others, and proved through observation and   discussion.

“Madmen think alone. Sanity depends on communion.”    Truth cannot be owned by us, but it can be imparted.  Thought, then, may be defined as opening ourselves to the truth. (p.172)

2)    To validate truth there must be two conversations.  The first, within ourselves where we debate, with ourselves,  some issue; here we anticipate outward conversation.

“Any thinker of quality is amazed by the poor level of the criticisms raised against his theses, for he knows many more dangerous objections to his own ideas….The mental world, then, is the duplication of the speaking world by unifying the speaker and the listener within one mind.” (p.173 )

3)    There is yet another element of language that is not commonly discussed.  Most philosophers of language believe that language is captured by the words in the dictionary, and that  systems of philosophy contain the thoughts of man. This in turn would imply that words were the same as speech, and thoughts the mental world.  These thinkers, ERH asserts, treat these two worlds, words and thought, as separate.  But is this not circular logic, to suggest that we speak about thought with words, but keep them separated?  Thinking according to this logic would then seem to be for curiosity.

Why we should respect each other’s curiosity I do not know.  I usually kill flies when they become too curious. ( p.173)

Part – 4    The Healthy Person

1.       To speak means to speak to someone (individual or group). And this “someone” must be called by his correct name. The someone named must therefore be “called” or addressed, in turn, by a “named” authority or power.  Thus, society precedes individuality.  For example,  “A woman I meet by accident would never have the authority to call me for my breakfast.  My mother had.”   This power or authority has, or should have, limits, however.  My mother should not have the right to choose my wife.

2.       “To think means to introduce better names (into society).” (p.174)  This means that at some point we must become independent, to rise above our names, to change the world, to name new things. “We think because we ourselves wish to speak with authority, just as we were spoken to before.” We also need to re-interpret the world, to either correct misconceptions or interpret new experience, our own.

“Thought gives man a kingdom.”  But that kingdom must be “ruled.”  And its rule comes from concrete experience! Law,  as related to all social life, could not exist if we did not speak out what we believe is the truth. Criminal acts would not be reported, we would have no friends, because the conditions by which we would live with others would not be spelled out.

3.       Speaking, addressing others when there is a reason, speaking what we really think and where some action needs to be taken, and where we are willing to take that action ourselves, or ask others to do it, is the way we individually contribute toward the community.

To speak means to enact the various roles in society itself.  By speech, then, we contribute actual power to the life of society…He does not speak who talks abouteverything under the sun…Speech enters the scene only when we are back of our words with our reputation, life, honor…Anything below this degree of veracity simply is uninteresting. (p.178)

4.       There is an important distinction between real speech and pseudo speech.  Real speech is spoken to the right person or right body at the right time, in the right place.  Many speakers, perhaps most, do not follow these criteria and are therefore ineffective.

The indications for right and wrong, good and evil, with regard to a sentence, are not of a logical or scientific nature.  They are a problem of timing. (p.180)

ERH goes on to explain by example.  2×2=4 is an eternally true  generalization.  But in the case of 7 people ordered to ride in a car made for 4, it can be said that 7=4 may also be true 7 in a car  made for 4 may at times be acceptable  in some situations. The basic difference between science and judgement is one of timing, where specifics, not generalizations, dictate the efficacy of the judgement.

For every truth, there is but one right process of law by which it ultimately can be verified.  The more serious the truth, the rarer the occasion. (p.180)

5.       In the classroom there is total freedom to say anything, as intellectual curiosity prevails. There is freedom to think, to contemplate, speculate.  In real experience, such as war, there can be no such freedom, as the situation controls our freedom.   In freedom we make a judgement. We must make judgement.

Part – 5     Yes

1.       “Whoever speaks believes in the unity of mankind.” To believe in the unity of mankind defines  a “yes,” an affirmation to life.

2.       One does not need to be conscious of whether he believes in something (a truth) or not; the fact that he participates in seeking it is enough.  This act of participation reflects  what is important in life.  To speak means that one believes there are listeners.  Since any statement can be translated into any language, we possess the ability to speak to all of humankind,  directly, or through translation.  Speech therefore has the power to unite all of humankind.

And since our power to evolve from animals toward becoming human is dependent upon speech, as has been established all through this essay,  to say “Yes” to belief in speech is saying yes to being called to life as a human, it is saying yes to seeking truth, to an obligation to contribute toward the great enterprise of creation of community.  All of this is to say YES to the spirit of humankind.

It is quite unimportant whether a man knows that he believes in God or not.  The power to speak is God because it unites me with all of men and makes us judges of the whole world….Unless we bow to this power, we must abuse our right to speak and to think. For either we try to use it right and tell the truth, think the truth, listen to the truth, or the tongue will dry up in our throat, and our ears shall hear nothing but cries of suspicion and hatred and despair.  We will be cursed by posterity as the destroyer of peace, of power, of credit, of order,  all things which truth alone can establish.  (pp.184,5)

The fact that we speak and that speech unites mankind and allows us to judge the world means that we believe in God.  To say NO to truth, to lie, to be a hypocrite is to destroy the world and at the same time be an unbeliever. [RF –  It seems to me to say “no” to truth (lying, in other words) is analogous to using democracy to destroy it, as the Muslims in Algeria claim today, 1992].

3.              “By speaking, the individual makes himself a cell of one tremendous body politic of speech.  Open your lips, and you have ceased to be yourself.  You have become a member and you occupy an office…”  (p.185)

To pretend, to lie, to order others to do what we are unwilling to do, to plan for others but not oneself, all who do these things are devils who destroy speech and the community. (p.186)

4.       Through speech, then, with these freedoms to make judgement, every  person has accessible to him/herself the ability to understand law, poetry, literature, science, and to participate in all of these in some manner. But the power of this freedom is realized only with discipline.   The franchise of free speech and thought is destroyed by the liar.  The liar therefore weakens and eventually leads to the destruction of society by destroying the validity of speech.

Thus, our freedom is two edged, to either create or destroy.  “This witchcraft of speech and thought–where is it anchored in our organism?”

Part – 6    Some Final Terms for Grammar

1.       “The individual, in his power to say

This has been

This shall be

I see this.  This is.

I am of it.  Let me be one of yours.

enters four orders of grammar.” (p.187)

2.       These powers can be summarized in the following table:

activity            grammar            mood                axis                  discipline

———————————————————————————————————————-

command        prejective           dramatic            future                ethics/prophecy

song               subjective           lyrical                inner world        art

remember        trajective            epochal             past                  history

calculation       objective            logical               outer world        science

3.       Everyone has these powers potentially, to pronounce something dead, to call something new into life (this shall be), to describe reality (this is), to participate in a group.

4.       These powers cast into the form of some professions:

practice law (trajective)

preach (prejective)

create art (subjective)

create science (objective)

These are constant because they represent our reference points in time and in space.  “The whole intellectual life of a nation–literature, legislation, politics, sciences, song and slang–is subject to grammatical analysis of its health.” (p.188)

5.       These activities are “macroscopical” because we see them every day.  Inmicrocosm we can parallel these with grammar within a sentence.

1. verbs           imperatives         politics

2. adjectives    subjunctives       literature and arts

3. nouns          narratives           tradition

4. numerals     indicatives          sciences

1.       projects us into the future, calls us to carry out the act.

3.       records the completion of the action for posterity; the thing has been  named.

2.       describes our inner state while we did the act, our emotions.

4.       classifies the product, by analysis.

“In this way, the individual’s attitudes in speaking have furnished us with one universal terminology for all processes of the spirit.  The cycle…applies to the greatest and the smallest and all the human phenomena of speech and thought.”  (p.189)

 

Index

adjectives…………………… 23, 29, 30, 41

anarchy………………………… 3-5, 9-11, 32

Anselm…………………………………. 5, 7, 8

answers………………………………………. 18

Aristotle……………………………………… 10

articulation………………………. 12, 13, 19

arts……………………………………….. 30, 41

astrology…………………………………….. 36

audience………………………………. 17, 27

Bible………………………………………. 8, 35

biology………………………………………. 34

Bonhoeffer……………………………………. 1

Buber…………………………………………… 2

calculation………………………………….. 40

calling…………………………….. 21, 22, 30

chorus…………………………………… 28, 29

Christianity……………………………………. 8

communication………… 4, 12, 25, 27-29,

35, 38

community…………… 2, 7, 11-14, 16, 18,

33-36, 39, 40

Comte…………………………………….. 1, 10

concept……………… 5, 17, 23, 28, 30, 33

contemporaries……………………………… 9

conversation…………………. 7, 13, 27, 38

cooperation………………………………….. 3

crusades……………………………………… 12

death……………………………………. 2, 3, 7

decadence……………………… 3, 4, 10, 27

decay…………………………………………… 9

destiny………………………………….. 14, 16

dialectics……………………………………. 12

dictionary……………………………………. 38

dimension……………………………….. 8, 14

disclosure……………………………………. 17

distemporaries…………………………. 9, 10

dogma………………………………….. 23, 26

ear………………………………….. 22, 24, 26

education……………. 9-11, 15, 22, 31-33

Ehrenberg…………………………………… 10

emotion…………………………… 15, 19, 22

epic……………………………………… 18, 20

ethics………………………………. 10, 12, 40

ethnology…………………………………….. 2

Exodus……………………………………….. 36

experience……….. 1, 2, 4-11, 14, 15, 19,

22, 26, 29, 31, 34,

35, 37-39

faith………………….. 3, 4, 8, 9, 21, 26, 35

formula………………………………………. 29

freedom………… 5, 16, 18, 25, 30, 36-40

fronts……………………. 4, 5, 14-16, 20, 22

future………. 2-6, 8, 9, 11, 13-22, 28, 29,

32-34, 37, 40, 41

generation………………………………… 3, 9

genesis………………………………………. 10

geometry……………………………………. 23

gesticulation……………………………….. 31

God………… 2, 8, 10, 15, 16, 18, 19, 36,

40

government…………………………….. 3, 10

hearing………………………………………. 32

history…………… 2, 8, 11, 13, 15, 16, 19,

22-26, 28, 29, 30,

34, 37, 40

Holy Spirit…………………………………….. 2

Humboldt……………………………………. 16

hypocrisy…………………………………….. 32

imperative………… 1, 13, 14, 18, 19, 23,

28-30, 33, 36

individual…………. 3, 13, 14, 22, 27, 28,

34, 38, 40, 41

interlocutors……………………………. 29-31

interpretation……………………. 21, 31, 34

Jaspers……………………………………….. 10

Kantian………………………………………. 10

knowledge………. 6-8, 11, 20-22, 25, 29,

31, 33

language………… 2-6, 11-20, 22, 24, 26,

27, 29-31, 33-39

Latin………………………………………….. 23

law……………. 5, 8, 10, 20, 21, 23, 38-41

leader……………………………… 14, 28, 29

learning……….. 9, 11, 20, 22, 30, 32, 35

legislation…………………………………… 41

liar…………………………………………….. 40

life…………… 1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 14-16, 18, 19,

22-24, 26-29, 33,

34, 37-41

listener……….. 10, 12, 13, 15, 23-33, 35,

36, 38

literature…………… 16-18, 20, 22, 40, 41

logic…………. 5, 8-10, 12, 15-18, 22, 28,

31, 37, 38

love……………………… 15, 16, 23, 24, 26

Marty…………………………………………… 1

mathematics…………………. 5, 15, 19, 33

matrix…………………………………….. 2, 14

medicine……………………………………. 23

memory…………. 2, 4, 15, 17, 22, 31, 32

method……….. 1-3, 5-10, 14, 18, 20, 21,

25, 33

mind………… 2, 3, 10, 16, 17, 20, 31, 38

monologue……………………………. 17, 23

Moses………………………………………… 36

mother-tongue…………………………….. 34

Mumford………………………………………. 1

music……………………………………. 30, 33

mysticism……………………………………… 9

name……………………………….. 13, 36-38

nature……….. 1, 2, 4-6, 8-10, 12, 17, 22,

39

Nietzsche……………………………………… 2

noun………………………………………….. 19

numerals…………………………………….. 41

oath…………………………………………… 21

object…………. 5, 19, 20, 23, 24, 27, 29,

36

Oldham……………………………………….. 1

oratory……………………………………….. 19

orientation…………………………. 6, 16, 36

origin……………………………………. 23, 29

paradox…………………………….. 5, 10, 11

participle……………………………………. 19

passive……………………………………….. 37

past……………… 1-6, 9, 11, 13-16, 18-22,

27-29, 31, 37, 40

peace……………………. 2, 4, 8-12, 32, 40

perfect…………………………. 9, 15, 16, 18

philosophy………. 1, 2, 8, 11, 16, 19, 31,

38

phonetics……………………………………. 26

physics………………………………. 7, 13, 14

poetry…………. 1, 15, 18, 19, 22, 30, 33,

37, 40

politics…………………………….. 14, 15, 41

power…………… 2, 3, 5, 6, 10-12, 17, 18,

23, 24, 31, 34-40

preject………………………………….. 19, 20

present………. 3-6, 11-16, 19, 21, 22, 28,

31, 32, 37

pronouns………………………….. 29, 30, 37

propaganda………………………………… 32

prophesy…………………………………….. 30

prose…………………………………….. 19, 33

psychology……………………………………. 1

question and answer……………….. 28, 29

rationality…………………………………… 34

reading………………………………………… 7

reality…………. 1, 4, 6, 13-17, 36, 37, 40

reason……………….. 1, 5, 7, 8, 20, 33, 39

reflection………………………………… 4, 15

reiteration……………………………… 28, 29

relations………………………. 19, 25-27, 29

religion………………………………………. 11

resistance……………………………………. 36

respect………………………………. 4, 34, 38

revolution……………………. 3, 4, 9-11, 27

risk…………………………….. 11, 16, 18, 37

scholasticism……………………………….. 10

social sciences………………………. 1-3, 11

society…………. 1-12, 16, 18, 19, 22, 25,

32, 38-40

song…………………………….. 5, 28, 40, 41

soul……………………………… 3, 15, 21, 35

space………… 2-10, 12-15, 18-22, 27-30,

41

speaker……….. 5, 10, 12, 15, 17, 23, 24,

26-29, 31, 32, 33,

35, 36, 38

speech………….. 1, 2, 4-6, 10-16, 19, 20,

22, 26, 28, 29,

30-32, 34-41

spirit………… 2, 16, 26, 28, 34-36, 39, 41

student………. 7, 9, 20, 22, 25, 30, 32-34

subject………….. 7, 8, 12, 13, 19, 20, 23,

24, 31, 33, 37, 41

subjectivity……………………………………. 5

subjunctive……………. 13, 18, 22, 30, 37

synthesis…………………………………….. 10

system……….. 4, 8, 12, 14, 26-28, 31, 33

theology…………………………… 1, 3, 6-10

thinker……………………………. 1, 9, 17, 38

thought……… 1, 2, 4-6, 8, 10, 12-20, 22,

23, 26, 28, 34, 37,

38, 40, 41

time………… 1-6, 8-16, 18-22, 24, 27-30,

32-34, 39-41

Tower of Babel……………………………… 4

tradition…………….. 8, 13, 21, 23, 29, 41

traject…………………………………… 19, 20

trinity…………………………………………… 8

truth…………… 2, 7, 9, 10, 12, 16-18, 20,

21, 25, 30, 31, 32,

35, 38-40

unanimity…………………. 4, 5, 29, 30, 34

unity………… 2-4, 6, 9, 10, 27, 30, 37-39

universe……………………….. 5, 19, 28, 29

values……………………. 3-5, 9, 10, 12, 23

velation……………………………………… 17

verb…………………………………………… 23

violence………………………………….. 3, 35

war……………………. 3-5, 9-12, 14, 27, 39

world………… 1, 2, 4-6, 10-14, 16-19, 25,

28-30, 33, 36-38, 40

World War I…………………………………. 12

writing…………………….. 1, 17, 18, 20, 35

Zuckmayer……………………………………. 1

ECONOMY OF TIMES – 1965

Lectures 1-5
Feringer notes
Notes started: August-98

Contents

[RF-This is his most extensive set of essays I have seen to date about social time and its meaning, as differentiated from the measurement of time in natural science.]

Lecture 1

1/1.ERH begins as usual with anecdotes centered around the location where he is speaking, in this  case Santa Barbara.  Economy has two meanings.  Pre-dating 1800, it meant that, from the house of God (nature),  plenty was created out of the wilderness.

After 1800, following Adam Smith, it came to mean simply the production of goods and services, buying and selling.  1) The old meaning inferred sacrifice was necessary in order to become a human being. 2) The new meaning inferred an avoidance of sacrifice.  The old meaning meant we must be convinced we are not wild animals,  and exist within the House of God where we are obligated to maintain an orderly house; the new meaning omits community strictures.  The old meaning inferred that there was a father, mother, and children. Learning what was right would open the gateway for achieving bounty.  (p.1-3)

2/1God’s world cannot stand without sacrifice of its creatures.  You are needed in creation in this massive process of processes that go on: water running down, storms blowing. You, too, are like a natural force that has to find its proper use. And if you don’t flow in the right direction,  there will be a blackout of civilization. (p.3)

3/1Tillich coined the world “theonomics” to indicate the complete meaning of the term economics. (p.5)  “…knowledge that a living soul has is conditioned on his obedience. ” The modern day economist doesn’t appear to be so obligated.

4.THE PURPOSE OF THIS ESSAY IS TO EXPLORE THESE TWO DIFFERENT MEANINGS OF ECONOMY AND TO RE-ESTABLISH AN INTEGRATION OF THE TWO.

Capitalists and communists alike, Adam Smith and Karl Marx both hold to the new meaning of the word “economics,”  Their philosophies speak of the individual, but not of maintaining a house of God where individuals are expected to sacrifice for the home (individual and community).

The Latin translations of the Bible took the word “economy” in Ephesians and in Corinthians to mean “dispensation,” from the Greek word “economy.”  (p.7)

5.All of this leads up to the notion that time in social life is entirely different than the time of the physicist.  The miracle of the Bible was that the entire portrait of mankind was demonstrated in a few years of a single life-time, that millennia may be required to achieve social peace, and finally that the immediate past and future in social terms is of little importance.  Sacrifice is always in the present, while  goal achievement is always in the (usually distant) future.

Lecture 2

1/2John Calvin’s teaching of economy was in line with the idea of theonomics.

“…the salvation of economics must have to do something with our power to distinguish serious things and leisure things, or things of leisure time that are not serious.” (p.3)

Work in the peace corps or any other meaningful endeavor cannot be fruitful if it is done with an attitude of leisure, of curiosity, of casualness.

2/2ERH asserts that, today most people don’t (or can’t) make the distinction between seriousness and play.  Their life becomes something to “play” with; work is said to be “fun,”  and learning the same. [RF – I know of no important learning that is fun.]

3/2God is in things and ourselves, but not to be seen otherwise. (p.9)   ERH goes on to explore how the divine cannot be seen, and contrasts that idea with the notion that in a scientific world the emphasis is on what can be seen, in  space. The distinction is made that in God’s world, rather than in space, time is crucial, as contrasted with the secular, scientific orientation to life, one based only on concrete evidence. People who are vain and ambitious want to see results in the short-term.  People who work for the long-term benefit such as teaching or counseling must have faith that their work will eventually be fruitful.  In many such jobs it is difficult to know of one’s success.  This is what he means by “doing God’s work.”

…the people who do not want to know what’s going to happen to their good deeds, they are able to concentrate on the good deed, and on the goodness of the deed so much that they really reach posterity. (p.12)

In effect, anyone who teaches, or administers seriously knows that his efforts must last far beyond his  own ministrations or even life-time.

In the life of Jesus,  we see  the reach of time, as the infinitely small (few years) becomes a measuring stick for all eternity.  Thus, mankind no longer needed to be lost in an eternity of time. (p.13)

4.”As soon as you leave the paths of the Bible and of Christian tradition, you lose all power to go beyond your day..” (p.15)   [RF – And one might add, to transcend the measurement of achievement by concretely present data.]

Lecture – 3

1. The only basis by which cultures can survive is that the people  know themselves and their goals over three generations; by contrast, when time is  fragmented,  when one generation cannot understand another, degeneration occurs and brings on catastrophe. Humankind, like animals, can only know the present, and certainly cannot understand one hundred years.  Unless, that is,  the people are imbued with God’s spirit by  sharing the lifetime of Jesus through the Bible.  [RF – The Bible, ERH asserts, represents the life-time of humans from the beginning to the end of time.]

It is precisely through the passing on of great thought and deeds that revives the spirit of any culture. “…everything we call ‘religion’, we call ‘church’, we call ‘Christian era’, we call ‘western man’, has to do with times, and not with spaces.”  (p.3)

2.To achieve the goal of becoming human, of being imbued with the spirit of sacrifice and of God,  takes time.  To overcome the mere animal notion of time as in present culture and have our achievements bear fruit in human affairs, we must listen to the message of our creator.

One of our constant experiences is that through the years nothing seems to change.  Certainly the news media is interested only in the present, and thus time tends toward becoming fragmented.

3.The pre-history of a catholic church lies not with the hero, or in sects, but in the act of hospitality.  “The house of God is where the known man and the unknown man meet on equal terms.  And this is always called “economy.”  (p.5)   Over time it allowed mankind to experience a unity – or at least for some to see the unity of all humans. Today the notion seems to have been abused.

4.In the theories of Marx and Adam Smith, the driving forces of western and Marxist theories, “enlightened self interest” is oriented toward individuals rather than “houses” and nations.

That cannot be the aim and highest goal of life.  For him [RF – I presume he refers here to Helmut von Moltke], the most important thing was the relation and bond between people; and finally between God and him. (p.7)

This is to say that one’s highest goal cannot be enlightened self-interest!  Self-interest may be part of our goal, but not the highest.

3-5The difference between the individual and a home is that in the home no single individual is always at the center; it is the whole house (all for one and one for all?),  as  “…man in a house is powerful, is human, if he can set the tone between the outer world and the inner world.” (p.9)

The centrality of the home is fading, and the last remnant we have now is thanksgiving, when we take a stranger into our home. In the home, brothers and sisters take care of  everyone, even if one is feeble- minded or otherwise handicapped.  TODAY THE COMMUNITY IS EXPECTED TO CARRY OUT MANY OF THESE FUNCTIONS. The centrality of the home, and therefore of this type of learning (to become human), is thus fading.

3-6Ethics are never individual; they depict relationships between people.  We can never know what we can do tomorrow.  Love must therefore dictate our behavior, not some abstract principle like ethics.  (p.16)

In the household we think of three generations, – grandparents, parents, and children.  The economics of the state are for a year.  The economics of society are for a much longer period.

Lecture 4

1/4Basically the east and west, the Russians and the Allies,  follow the same philosophy, that of down-grading the importance of family, of pushing individual pursuit. Of assuming that small, long-range support organizations are unnecessary for survival.  “We are homeless today.”  (p.1/4)  We need the house of three generations where no “individual” predominates.

2/4Today, there is no central spirit that holds the house together.  The town has become a world market, goods-oriented, space-oriented. The trouble is that we live only in the outer world of space, with no (or only weak) spiritual center of an inner world.

Here ERH differentiates “people” from “public”.  The public is the mass man. There is no sacrifice with “public,” there is no central spirit.  The public lives for the moment, living only in the outside world.  “PEOPLE”  is just the opposite on every count.   People live in houses, after the public meeting they go home, and  they are at home with the spirit of  their creator, thus living in both an inner and outer world are integrated into one.  “Anybody who cares for public opinion has forfeited the right to be listened to.” (p.7)

3.PEOPLE are thus not slaves to everything in the concrete world, and live in a time span longer than the present, living from the past into the future as well as the present. Power is related to the concrete world for the most part.  The normal person is liked and loved and needed, but he doesn’t need massive power.

In the spacial world,  time is of the essence.  In the spiritual world, one lives out of time.  One must therefore have patience and wait for the right time for peace to come. That is why a marriage can last forever! (p.10)

4.       And that is the reason why the Church has always spoken of eternity, and of Heaven and Hell.  They exist…You can think they cannot be painted; that may be, but everybody who wants to live without the notion of Heaven and Hell cannot rule, cannot teach, cannot get children and educate them.  He’s unfit for society.  The infinite is the condition of our finite actions. (p.10)

ERH  goes on to state that the true teacher is concerned with how the student will think about his studies in a year or five years, or twenty, not just how he thinks about them for the day.  It is the same with all important activity, especially with leadership.

5.The greatness of Adam Smith and Marx was that they admonished us to go forth into the world and seek out the unknown, create infinite space, don’t be provincial!

Any world that functions on the basis of space only,  of gold and war, can only produce more war or injustice.  It can never produce peace.

Lecture – 5

1/5In these lectures ERH claims to have pointed out that in the past three centuries  we have learned to measure space “ad infinitum.”  Man under the guidance of Adam Smith and Karl Marx has unified space, has equalized people at home and abroad with regard to their market.  HOWEVER, ALL THE HOUSES OF MAN HAVE BEEN DESTROYED.  “Factory time” applied to other elements of live destroys the meaning of experience. In the times of faith,  people did not believe that one could live by the factory or the school.

2/5Factories are based on the brain, while marriages are based on sex and love.  Science and technology cannot tell us who we are or what to do, they  cannot tell us how to use science and technology. (see Hutchins quote (p.2)

Nations, communities, homes are not built by factories or technology, but by congregations and brotherly love.

3.All of this takes time, a great deal of time, and cannot be built by the values of space.  Marriages take a life-time to build, and communities many life-times of individuals. Something important must last for 50 or 100 years, at least 3 generations. OUR INDIVIDUAL LIVES  HAVE MEANING ONLY IN TERMS OF  HOW WE CONTRIBUTE TO THESE TYPES OF “PEOPLE” GOALS.

Even the factory does not survive by wages alone, or the vision of the inventor, but by the spirit of all its workers.

So calculable things are the shadow, the projection of incalculable life.  And any society has as its future only the amount of investment in incalculables that will make all things that can be bought inferior–subservient is perhaps the best word–instrumental.  (p.9)

4.We do not live, cannot live by money values as the highest value.  We rely on people telling us the truth, otherwise we would not listen to them, nor they to us. The brain always ends in figures.  This is merely ancillary to how we maintain vital elements in society.  In society that is, not in physics. Numbers scratch the surface of things, and tell us nothing as to how we must maintain a vital home.

5-5All of this is because:

We have in us the very strange arrangement, that the past and the future are demanding on you and me to be represented at this moment.  Thinking, speaking, singing, playing, everything is a decision: how much of the past has to be kept; how much of the future has to be introduced anew, against the hindrance of the past: how much of the outside world, the traffic on the street, has to be respected:  we don’t want to be run over; and how much of the inner man has to be kept intimately with your own poetry, and your own songs, and your own love? (p.15)

6.                 A home is not by the will of its inmates peaceful.  It’s a gift of the gods if a husband, and a wife, and the children, and the grandparents can establish peace in a home. (p.17)

END OF LECTURE

Economy of Times – 1965 – Review

This is the most comprehensive and tightly-knit expression I have read from  the author about time and its basic meaning to society, as differentiated from the meaning of time in natural science.

Economy has two meanings; pre-dating 1800 it meant that from the house of God, plenty was created out of the wilderness.  After 1800, following Adam Smith and Karl Marx, it came to mean simply the production of goods and services, buying and selling. The old meaning inferred sacrifice was necessary in order to become a human being:  the new meaning inferred an avoidance of sacrifice.  The old meaning meant we must be convinced we are not wild animals and we dwell within the House of God, obligated to maintain an orderly house. The new meaning omitted community strictures .

Index

Adam…………………………………………………. 1, 3-5

Bible…………………………………………………….. 1, 2

community…………………………………………. 1, 3, 5

economics……………………………………………… 1-3

economy……………………………………………. 1, 3, 5

ethics………………………………………………………. 3

experience…………………………………………….. 3, 4

faith……………………………………………………… 2, 4

future………………………………………………… 1, 4, 5

generation…………………………………………………. 2

God…………………………………………………… 1-3, 5

history……………………………………………………… 3

individual……………………………………………. 1, 3, 4

Jesus………………………………………………………. 2

John………………………………………………………… 1

knowledge…………………………………………………. 1

Latin………………………………………………………… 1

learning………………………………………………….. 1-3

life………………………………………………………… 1-5

love……………………………………………………….. 3-5

Marx………………………………………………….. 1, 3-5

nature………………………………………………………. 1

orientation…………………………………………………. 2

past………………………………………………….. 1, 4, 5

peace…………………………………………….. 1, 2, 4, 5

Peace Corps……………………………………………… 2

philosophy………………………………………………… 3

physics…………………………………………………….. 5

poetry………………………………………………………. 5

]………………………………………………………….. 1, 2

CROSS OF REALITY – 1965

Woods Hole Lecture 1
Feringer notes
Notes started: July-98

Contents

1.”Man is a fearful animal.  And it always takes a society, a group, a family, a friendly circle to put him at rest. Before man can think, he must be offered a situation in which thinking is not threatening him with loss of position, outer danger, or any other threat from the outside. ”  (p.1)

2.What are the necessities for man to think objectively?  This is the fundamental problem posed in this essay.

3.Man lives in society where most experience is full of anarchy!  We are told what is reality, and if we do not believe it we go crazy because then we do not know who we are!   (p.3)

a.ERH quotes Oedipus, “I am oedipus because I am called Oedipus.”

b.He points out that Christ strove for his whole adult life, and  was put to death in the process of getting rid of his name, “Jew.”

4.Man must believe two things, as an heir and as an ancestor.  As an heir,  he must believe what he has been told about himself; as an ancestor, he must believe that he can change, that he may be transformed. “… because the future must not look like the past.” (p.5)

5.Two demands are made on us, from the past and from the future,  and the present is in collision between the two.  We know our past and our destiny (to die); WHAT WE DO NOT KNOW IS WHAT MUST BE DONE IN THE PRESENT.  This is collision between our ancestry and the way man must be transformed into an ancestor of the future.

6.A fundamental question related to  differentiating leader from subordinates or followers, is how much should the leader reflect the character of the followers.  The answer is,  “not at all;” leadership requires a different role than that of followers.

7.In sum, space (the inner space of thought and the outer space of nature) never exists separately from mankind’s  sense of time, which demands that we confront the battle between past and future;

Unless we decide perpetually between these four ways of being, truth loses our [its?] hold on us.  Only those who fight for the future, for the past, for the outer order, and the inner peace, alternatingly, may represent the spirit of man.  (p.10)

8.Four latin phrases represent these four fronts to reality:

a.Cogito ergo sum; I think therefore I am.

b.Mensurare possum, quia sum; measure for power, because it exists

c.Audio ut sim; “I must hearken to God’s voice before I come into being.”

d.Respondeo etse mutabor; I respond although I will be changed.

 

CROSS OF REALITY – 1965 – Woods Hole, E. Rosenstock-Huessy – Review

Rosenstock-Huessy has many descriptions and explorations of his Cross of Reality as a basic structure for a new science of society.  Each says the same thing in many different ways and with greater or lesser detail depending upon the length, and each offers a different shade of insight.  This short piece is a tightly woven, succinct statement of the core concept.

GRAMMATICAL METHOD – 1962

Lectures 1-3
Feringer notes
Notes started: 9-96
Last edited: 9-98

 

Contents

Lecture 1

1.THE ESSENCE OF THESE LECTURES SEEMS TO BE THE QUESTION:  WHAT ARE THE REASONS FOR THE PRIMACY OF SPEECH AS A NECESSARY FOUNDATION OF HUMAN SOCIETY?

2.The point of this lecture is that there is something in grammar that the linguists have never told us about, something higher than (beyond) the way they divide grammar into nouns and verbs and analyze syntax sentence by sentence.

“Intonation is a secret by which you can express all feelings, nearly, without words.” (p.1-3)   ERH  demonstrates his point with a story of a  Salvation Army crisis-line counselor, whose tone of voice was a crucial  factor; it betrays features of your soul.

3.ERH uses the example of Spinoza, who worshipped quantification,  and points out that this could only account for dead things, or society as a mass, but could not explain how individuals communicate.  In a like way, a dictionary is a quantification, i.e. it defines only the most common meanings of a word, which  all people can use or understand, but which do not tell the whole story.

In jurisprudence, definitions (of murder, for instance) are necessary, but when we attempt to necessarily apply these generalizations to experience,  the meaning soon becomes lost. Generalizations mean particular contexts have been stripped away, and with them much of the meaning.   Our experience is never in terms of generalizations, rather, it includes feelings, intentions, and unique details.

4.Names are much more than mere dictionary terms; In a social context, to call us by name is to provoke or invoke our spirit. And to address someone by name is to involve that person in life.  It is the inflection put on the words that reveals the spirit of the moment, and that is mainly what is remembered by listeners.

5.To listen is also to engage in conversation, it takes in both speaker and listener. ERH recounts a story of a lady and a diplomat pointing out the way meaning derives from intonation.

6.To speak has little to do with your brain (rationalizing); it has more to do with listening to Beethoven or Bach, wherein one loses themselves in a meditation, in the spirit of the situation.  TO LISTEN MEANS TO BREAK DOWN THE BARRIERS OF THE CONCRETE WORLD.

7.With leadership, one needs to make a distinction between  giving commands and carrying them out. “To will, is not enough.  You have to submit to some higher will, or you can’t get married.” (p.1-13)   This process is not rational.  Seeing eye-to-eye means one has “…given up the distinctions of our physical separation.”  (p.1-14)

8.Addressing persons by name renders them  capable of responding to a command.  Three grades of speech are names, numbers, and figures (images).  Names point to the future, figures to past (dead) things, and images to the present.

The naming if a new-born child is an anticipation of his/her future.  And when the Bible refers to “future life,” this has no reference to something beyond our real life, but is rather a calling of the child into life as we live it. (p.16)

 

Lecture – 2

1.Speech is dangerous, mortal and life-giving, or it is nothing!  (p.2)

2.Lust and love, peace and war are the subjects for this lecture.  It is precisely by the grammatical method that one is able to distinguish between these fundamentals of life, and this is not so through the influence of science as the basis for the analysis of language.  Words have to be spoken in order to allow us to love, and words must be spoken to allow us to live in peace.  Not so with lust and war.  Lust destroys love and war  results from enmity (not speaking).

3.Through language it is possible to distinguish between sex and love and between peace and war.  Man does not make war or love, unless they are like animals.  One declares both love and war, and one accepts both declarations.

We strive to be divine (creative) in our earthly existence; the evidence is our need to acquire power.  Both real love (as contrasted with lust) and real peace (contrasted with war) point to a future for us – and these are representative of a meaning for life.  (p.5)

4.Love and peace cannot be willed, they cannot be forced on another or they become degraded into lust and war the moment the force is reduced.  Love and peace occur or are acquired with sacrifice.  “Life, real life is never pleasurable.  It’s serious.”   (p.7)

5.You can decide over the phone  whether or not a man is going to commit suicide,  you can imagine that to speak is a potent act of life.

6.Marriage is not just between a man and a woman, it can apply to a political party, to a profession, to a country, etc.  The same rules apply in all cases, and the foundation for all is love.

7.Peace and love can be arbitrated, but not “made.”  And arbitration requires sacrifice on both sides.  Sacrifice means to give up something in the present to make the future.

8.The religious underpinnings of speech are inherent throughout the Bible:  In every utterance the word must become incarnate (reborn), pointing toward the future.  To realize our name, given to us at birth,  is to render it incarnate, i.e. “the word become flesh.”  An invocation is a physical utterance and the only way by which the spirit can enter reality.  So the spirit begins with a word that has become flesh, an indication that the spirit is ready to enter creation.

9.The sacrament of love is an indication that those smitten are willing to give up all else to manifest their love,    like the husband or wife willing to leave a home they love to go off with each other. Teddy Roosevelt illustrated this in agreeing to arbitrate peace between the Japanese and Russians (against the interests of the U.S.).

 

Lecture – 3

1.Living only in the present would not have led to speech.  In the present, things can be shown by the five senses,  but referring to the past or to the future requires speech.  For this reason also, (important) speech is prophetic, as it anticipates.

2.”Genuine speech is always either declaring love or declaring war.” (p.3)  It is relevant to the crucial, life-giving ability to change. To change is to end (kill) some habit or element of your life and strike out anew.  To change is revolutionary, and sometimes dangerous (the more important the change, the more dangerous). To love or war sets new things in motion; it can  create new nations or  new alliances, or break old ones.

3.Thus, the power to speak and act is a fundamental power of life, and this power will at times break laws.  These concepts are universal for all languages. This is what ERH calls a “deeper grammar,”  and thus the Grammatical Method.

4.Promise and fulfillment are also reasons why we speak; it is because we live in a context longer than our own lives, a time span necessary for fulfillment.  Three generations are required to establish a (social) truth.

5.The liberal arts education is necessary to counteract the effect of natural science thinking as it is applied to social (living) experience.  “Because we have to reach out beyond our own lifetime…..When we speak of people in Heaven, of the saints and — of the Resurrection at Easter, we mean that there are people who have died long ago and are still ahead of us.  If Jesus has any power in your lives, it means that He is still more of the future than you are.” p.3-5

Neither the future nor the past are access to our five senses, and thus the necessity for speech.

6.The deeper grammar of the human soul (for all languages and peoples), is reflected in the sentence, “Today I feel good.”   This simple sentence suggests comparison with past, and anticipates the future,  when one hopes health will continue.

ERH goes on to cite other examples and meanings of this grammar, pronouncing “death” to past events and  anticipating future events. The future is frail and most imperiled because it depends on what and whom we name, and a devotion to causes that do not now exist.  Names (Jesus, Hitler, Caesar) are a universal language “…from the beginning of humanity…” (p.9)

7.All speech is a creation of history, of tenses, of before and after.  Mere philosophy is abstract, stripped of such names in context.  All concrete thinking is dated, and is anti-philosophical. All life is predicated on death. Our friends and lovers may be dead tomorrow, and we had better make peace with them today. TIME HAS TO BE LEARNED.

8.We can always understand history if we believe in living speech, in peace and the conclusion of peace. ERH cites Hitler,  who went to war never knowing that no one could conclude peace with him because they couldn’t believe him.  [RF – The same with the Serbs and the North Koreans today (1994).]

If our speech cannot distinguish between peace and war (which is apparently the case today),  we are in a bad way, indeed!

9.Religious experience should give us the power to jump out of death (dead-end parts of our lives), to  change and “get going.” (p.14)

“The distinction between the secular mind and the religious mind is that the religious mind accepts the fact that life as a person begins by the experience of an order (a command). And if you think of your baby time, as a child — you know this very well–that the great fact is that somebody called you out by your own name and asked you to do something.”  (p.15)

 

Grammatical Method – 1962 – Review

Rosenstock-Huessy gave numerous lectures about his GRAMMATICAL METHOD.  This short transcript summarizes the core of fundamentals of that method: 1) that the method of natural science is inappropriate for social analysis,  and 2) how society lives and is regenerated by speech.  Not only do the fundamental acts that  make us human rely on speech, but the social interaction itself relies more on the spirit or intent than on the rational message.  To speak has less to do with and more to do with listening to Beethoven or Bach, wherein one loses themselves in a meditation in the spirit of the situation. In leadership, to will or to submit is not a rational act.  “Seeing eye-to-eye means one has given up the distinctions of our physical separation…”  and it reflects the spiritual act of our being.    In sum, the author lays out the forceful establishing speech as the creative center of becoming human.

CROSS OF REALITY – 1953

Lectures 1-24
Feringer notes
Notes started: Sept-’96 – Jan-’97
Last edited: July-98

Contents

Lecture – 1

1.To get some sense of the basic dimensions of life, one needs to know the difference between “play” and “real life.”  Play represents all those activities which are under one’s control.  Games, vacations, classrooms and the like are examples of play, as defined. Real life, on the other hand, is all those activities that once entered are unchangeable,  in the sense that the event occurred, has become a fact.   Speaking in public, one’s country of birth, the physical universe are instances. To be able to “drop out” of reality into man-made realities such as sports, vacations, and art is to be free from the constant tyranny of life.  To have time out in the form of rest or leisure  is to take time to reflect and find meaning. Therefore, play is a necessity.

2.With play, one chooses time and space at random:  “…everything real is not under our control.  You can’t call your own life into being and you can’t call it off.  It is a given.”

3.In play you control end and beginning, but in real life it is just the opposite – you do not control the end or the beginning. You are usually unconscious of them.  In real life you are only conscious of the “middle,”  and end precedes beginning.  In play, beginning precedes end. For example, when you go on a trip and return home you are at play, because you control beginning and end. The same applies to the classroom.  The writer of books, novels, and essays is “playing” with reality, but not participating in it; this is not bad, but it is necessary to know the difference.

“In short, we cannot control, or repeat events in real life, we cannot “take back” so to speak.  In play we do indeed control time.  In real life, in one aspect and one only we do control time, that is when we attempt to be efficient, to do a thing fast and at the right time.   However, in other aspects we cannot so control.”

4.Finally he states:

                   “All you read about science is only based on a philosophy of space.  But all you will have to learn about peace in human society must be based on an understanding of time.  And we have already laid down certain laws.  One is: time is experienced in such a way that the end is experienced before the beginning.  That’s the opposite from what the space-philosopher tells you.  Second, time has four leanings, four inclinations; it has four, so to speak, cases, as in declension, in grammar.  That is, it can be looked upon as something to be speeded up, and something to be slowed down, and something to be forgotten, done away with, so to speak, you see, and as something to be separated, to be broken up into past and future.  To be renewed, you also can say, if you understand it.  To be distinguished into old and new.”   (p.21-1)

5.These four aspects he describes in the middle of the text:

a.Lyrical, the mood, an emotional driving force, a “high point.”  To sing, praise a sunset, to whistle in the dark to keep up our spirits.  Here one has turned to inner thoughts, lost track of time, it stands still, “…you are lost on the inside.”

b.Outward looking, analytical. One is extremely conscious of time, one ignores mood, time is everything, it is speeded up to win records, or to achieve efficiency.

c.Dramatic, based upon the surprise, this are the epitome of change, where time is broken up between before and after.  Tragedy and comedy is the essence of this aspect.  Another order must come into being,  and the dramatic moment is the fulcrum, the moment of division.

d.Epochal.  It looks to the routine, those sequences that must be repeated in order to maintain the larger process of life, administration, or any other activity :  It could be sunset/sunrise, milk delivered each morning, files to organize, things to be done each day.  Here one looks to perpetuity, into incorporating the new into a procedure whereby it will be routinized, become part of a new process.  Here time seems to stand still because there is repetition, nothing seems  to change, time is “done away with, so to speak.”

To be free, creative, and productive,  one must understand and utilize all four of these aspects of time.  To be stuck on any one is to become broken down.  Time then is a prism with the four major colors, all of which must come together to make up the “white light of reality.”  “The prism breaks colors of reality, and so we have a spectrum of time,  …of running away with us – record time, you see; of standing still – lyrics; of being the same all over again – epochal; and of bringing in the contrast of old and new time, past and future, in drama.” (p.21-1)

 

Lecture – 2

1.To know the difference between epics and drama is to be free to choose, to “play” with time.

2.To “play for time” means to wait until the right time.

3.Play is the natural counterpart to work.  While one part of you may work, another needs freedom to play.  One only walks on one leg at a time, the other rests. Similarly a two party system of government means that the government can regenerate itself, take time out while the other party has the responsibility of governing. (p.5-2)

4.Life can be bifurcated between actual participation in “reality” and play.  All play, study and intellectualizing are time-out for reflection,  just as are the spectators at a stadium who observe only.

5.Drama introduces a new era, dividing time into before and after, leading the way toward necessary behavior in the future. (p.9-2)

6.Man rises above sin when he confesses what he has done.  To not do so is to prostitute.  In his soul, confession frees him to grow, by naming, and rising above the situation.  The deeds “before”, having been  forgiven, one is then free to change, “after.”

7.Where ERH goes into the arts to discuss the way they express human experience in terms of emotion, anger, anxiety, strength, etc, he prizes the immediate, the live experience because it is the most powerful.  Here he mentions how we tend  to revere that which is frail.  “The frail is lovable.”  Art captures the moment.

8.Our physical strength is analogous to the law of the jungle, and therefore is to be feared, but not loved.  TO FEEL FRAIL DEMONSTRATES OUR HUMANNESS.

“One bad look of your girl in the  morning, and your whole day is spoiled.  And that makes you a real — into a real human being, that you are frail, that you are fragile, that you can be destroyed any moment.”  (p.15-2)

One is uninteresting when one is big and strong. “You are only interesting to anybody  when you want to be loved if she knows that you need her, and admit it.” (p.15-2)

9.Ceremony reminds us that individuals are always less than the “position” the society might place them in.  All leaders, teachers, managers, sergeants and the like are in this position.

10.In sum ERH points out that play has its uniform and rules (forms), ceremonies,  planning and execution, and he likens all of these to the parallel forms in other dimensions of living, such as  in art, and especially in reality.

Lecture – 3

1/3.Reflection on reality is a first remove from reality, and succeeding stages of distillation of this reflection, i.e. reflection upon reflection,  is that much more removed from reality.

                   “And you’ll remember that we have a very fine meter, a very fine yardstick for grading reality.  Something is real when its time and its place are inexorable.  And something is unreal when we can at random call it into existence, or call it off.” (p.3)

2/3.Definition of God:  “God is the power which makes you speak–or makes you fall silent.”  (p.2-3)  You have the power to make  this choice, but it is a power not of your environment or of this world; it is outside the world. The power is to choose between play and seriousness.

On the levels of powers, there are three.  1) Divine (from God) –  the power to change, to found a new family, begin a new existence,  to know the right time to do something (a revelation).  2) Human power –  to “choose” to wage war or peace, “To be original means to translate faithfully into your own time and day.” (p.5-4),  3) Natural power – to drop out, to not choose, to relax, to play.

3/3Creativity  is divine inspiration, and all translation is creative.  Living is  translating ideas into one’s own action, and originality is to translate faithfully into your own time and day.  (p.5-3)  Man must be able to play (with things, with ideas) in order to translate.

4/Three levels of mental functions:  1) To play, with dead things that can be manipulated, i.e. games, theories etc.  2) To live with other humans by establishing one’s terms for relationships.  3) To be open to divine inspiration, to pray for enlightenment at the right hour.  One must employ all three in order to see and understand reality. (p.9,10)

5.ONE ASPECT OF THE CROSS – [RF – The cross is ERH’s chosen symbol referring to the basis by which we experience all of  reality.  Throughout many of his essays he refers in one way or another to these four dimensions of time and space (inner & outer, past & future).  I have heard some readers assume the symbol refers to the Christian cross, but in one of his essays he states unequivocally there is no necessary relation.  As a matter of fact it would seem to be the other way around.  Many religions utilize a cross in some form as their religious symbol, however ERH states that, since all religions are an attempt to provide direction in life, and the first step in accomplishing this must be to maximize our ability to understand experience (reality), it would be quite logical that these churches were conscious of the strong meaning of the cross in referring to reality.)

For those unfamiliar with Rosenstock-Huessy’s definition of time and space, he has enlarged the meaning taken by natural scientists.  With them “real” time has one dimension, from present into future. Space also only has one dimension, concrete, measurable reality.  His new social science method enlarges this conception because humankind and other animals can think and therefore possess an inner reality as well as the outer, concrete reality.  In addition, because we possess the attribute of memory we can experience time in several dimensions, including that of the physicist.

Other dimensions of the cross. 1) Sports = outer, representative of struggles, 2) Studies = inner, representative of thought.   3) Arts = creativity, newness, revelation, future, 4) ceremony = tradition, law and order, ritual – the past.

6. ( p.12-3) ERH  expresses his primary criticism of education, there is no direction. For example, the Christian message  is that the  Crucifixion (a great dramatic event), heralded a recreation of society.  It divided time into a before and after, meaning the old ways of the world were not good enough.

The church and its services are dedicated to reminding us of this event and its importance.

                   “Think of the great cathedrals — that has sculpture, and painting, murals, and …around the walls; and it has song, music, sacred music as the inside of the hearts of the believers who congregate in church.  But the greatness of religion would cease if there wasn’t a drama, directing the energies of cathedral, architecture, of music, and of sculpture, and painting towards the goal.” (p.13)

The  goal creates a future also by emphasizing the need to sacrifice for the community.

Today you have desire,  which will not point toward a future because desire is inside human beings (not the divine, which is outside). From desire there is no freedom, “…only a chain of gravity, and earthliness.”        (p.13-2)  No architecture, only housing, no formulation of movement (into the future), only seats (for 10,000 bureaucrats).  Thus, no direction = fragmentation, going off in all directions, confusion, ambiguity, no future!

 

Lecture 4

1/4.This lecture seems to be speaking about pointing out that the complete artist is one who can manipulate time, i.e. write stories of characters who are behind the times (comic characters) and ones who are ahead of their time,  (tragic characters).

2/4.The arts, architecture, drama, yes, and philosophy,  ERH believes to become dead (in one sense) when they do not attempt to free themselves from time.  That is, they are too abstract (out of time-controlled creations), or without passion, too commercial. Individuals who are overly specialized become imprisoned in a single dimensionality;  there is a difference between saying “I am an artist” and “I attempt to express the truth through art.”

3.All of this fragmentation and single dimensionality blinds one from a rounded evaluation of experience, and social sicknesses cannot be seen or are not seen as being one’s business.  “And that’s your generation’s business, to make these big cities livable again.  They aren’t what they should be.” (p.7-4)  They are “dis-eased.”

4.Aristotle asks, “What are the facts?” –  Socrates asks, “What question should be asked?”  Plato asks, “How shall we have a better city or state?”  And his answer was too “Idealistic” – we must have better poets and artists.

“Now this is then the Greek world, gentlemen, which the liberal arts  college at this moment represents to you.  It consists of Socrates, very little; too much Aristotle; and day-dreaming, star-eyed, idealistic Plato.” (p.16-4)

5.To create a future one must ask for less than he can get. To expect to get something for nothing is to look into the past.  A future requires sacrifice, the past no sacrifice. (p.23)

6.The question is never, “Should there be thought control?”  Of course there should be; otherwise there is never any order in thought.  The question then is, “Who’s and what type of thought control?”

7.Facts only, as the center of teaching, are misleading unless they are regulated by “thought control” – some rationale.

                   “…your choice is only between a secular thought control by the powers that be, or by a thought control by the historical process to which we bow if we want to belong to the era in which we live, where we say the most powerless of men has created our future. (Christianity)  The man whom the Romans, and the Jews, and the Greeks condemned, because He stood for the freedom of the human soul, you see, and against slavery, and against promiscuity, and for shame, and for all these things.”

                   “You can still save freedom in America if you turn to the right thought control.  I mean, the McCarthys will win if you have not a higher freedom, a higher thought control,…The question is between true faith and cheap faith, fascist faith, you see.  But the question is no longer between no faith and faith.  And that is the hard issue for you…..three quarters of you surrender just to fascism.  That’s not the answer. And the other quarter is — hankering for some old-fashioned anarchy. (p.26-4)

Lecture 5

1.Comments on the “academic mind.”  It hedges with such utterings commonly heard in the classroom: “Perhaps, therein lies the greatness of Shakespeare.” The message is ambiguous. ERH, on the other hand, urges a stand rather than ambiguity.  Take a stand, he urges, say, “therein lies…”  Next, he dislikes pluralizing, comparing, i.e. “This is one of the nicest, or best…”  Rather to recognize the unique, otherwise the remark is an insult. (p.3-5)

“Now that’s very hard for you to grasp.  You have been brought up in the salesman society, where you have to enter every house like the Fuller Brush man, and you must not insult anybody.  So you have always to be kind, nice, sweet, and what-not,…But the only thing is, you’re boring.  These statements don’t make any dents.  They make no difference, because they are stock phrases.  The — like this other, “perhaps, he is” — “This is one of the reasons.” — I don’t know anything after that.  I don’t know where you stand.  I don’t know where Shakespeare stands.  I don’t know where I stand.  Nothing has been done.” ( p.3-5)

In research one can hedge, but not in real life.

2.Third, the academic says, “It seems to me..”  This is obvious and boring, extra verbiage.

3.The term, “value” is an attempt to speak of divinity in a pluralistic fashion, saying, it is one of many, comparing so-and-so.

                   “I don’t care for the plurality if I don’t have the unity. Values is attempting to quote what other people by their lifeblood have created as a unity of life, as yardstick, as standard, as the sine qua non, that this is indispensable.  …It is, so to speak, the color spectrum without the white light.  That’s values. “Values” denies the existence of the divine, of God. ” (p.6)

4.Only unimportant truth can be passed on in the classroom.  It is our experience in unique situations that the real meaning of the ideas is fleshed out.

5.The campus and the classroom is where one says, “Perhaps”, or “This is one of many”, etc.    that is why only half truths can be spoken in academe.  Shakespeare is great because he saw drama in reality and tried to write about it,  to communicate what he had to say to the English people.

6.”All creative power in men is gratuitous.  The gifts of the Holy Spirit cannot be sold.” (p.12)

7.When the activities of play are carried over into another field, when the critic invades the field of creation, the whole enterprise collapses. (p.13)

8.The classroom quizzes, especially timed quizzes, are ridiculous.  The important object is that we learn something, and reflection should be given its proper time. (p.15)

9.       “What is being a good teacher? Allow other people into your own inner life, invite them in and see how your yourself are passionately at work.  Open here your cache how do you call this? — The iron curtain of your faith…And that is infectious.”     (p.17)

10.The realm of the spirit takes no space,  therefore it cannot be analyzed and measured.

                   “…in the life of the spirit, there is room for infinite infinities.  And therefore there is no measurement of “better,” or “more” — of “higher” and so on, …except when you know all of them, belong into oneness…whereas in the catalog of things to be numbered, …the better means, `I take this and not the other.’ ” (p.19)

11.Arts:

          “Everybody makes an ass of himself by saying anything (important) in his field.  So I am willing to make an ass of myself!” ( p.24)

           “…give us a power to face the future with hope, because they anticipate potential solutions…” Shakespearean drama allowed the English to survive for 400 years, which is quite a big order. Hemingway, by comparison is mainly description. …Every art creates a public. (p.21)

 

Lecture – 6

1/6.Reculer pour mieux sauter, step back so that you may jump higher. ERH devotes several pages to speaking about attempting to achieve something by holding back, or by stepping back for the purpose of gaining a momentum to go forward.  The issue arises from a question put by a student in the class.

2/6.Calculated risk does not apply to life relationships.  “A risk is a secular term for faith.” It has nothing to do with organized religion.  You cannot live without faith, which is an act committed because you have to do it regardless of consequences. (p-5)

3/6.Polytheism means pre-personal, the individual is not crucial. “There are no real persons in the world of play.  There are ideas, and there are games, and there are habits and there are types…”  When there are many, focussing on a single is never enough, because it doesn’t represent the whole. Thus, nationalism is never enough for any person to worship as everything.  It is true then that there are higher values than one’s country!

4/6.In a similar way certain roles must be beyond sex.  That is why robes are warn by academics, judges, and priests.  Uniforms for athletes are the same regardless of sex.

5.The cross of reality represents man divided in his organization in 4 different ways, as body in sports, as mind in the classroom, as souls in art, and as roles (carriers of office) in ritual ceremony. The soul is not a luxury, but it means one has a future beyond some present state of mind.  When one chooses, one is demonstrating that he/she has a soul.  “You cannot live without all the time alternating between these four attitudes. There is no way out.  You are always one or the other of these four..”  (p.15)

6.When one serves in any single role, as an athlete, thinker or actor, one must put the other three to work.  None of these activities or roles are singular or complete in themselves, since any one activity calls for the others.   For instance, consider the adage, “To put one’s heart and soul into an effort.”

7.Classical Greek thinking, in ignoring this rule,  has ruined;

            “…the academic profession, the  division of mind and body, the refutation — the repudiation of the existence of a soul and of a social obligation in society by your dress and your historical tradition….” …”The Russians of course have unfortunately in their so-called materialism — have really gone Platonic.  They think also that the mind has to rule, and the body has to serve.  I don’t believe this for a minute.” (p.15)

8.       “…the great truth of all religions: we are creatures on this earth, mind and body, role and soul…It is all earthly.  It’s all this side of creation. ” (p.15)

In sum,  these statements reflect one of the most common of ERH’s many assertions regarding his new social science method,  that of needing to find unity, of the interrelations between all things. When we separate ourselves from others, and from nature,  we war with other peoples, we think nothing of polluting the earth, of destroying animal species, etc.

9.In war, we have lost control of time and space, one neither knows who the enemy may be or when he will attack. Man is at war unless peace is made. Peace is not natural, it must be created. Think of the oft-quoted phrase “law of the jungle.”

10.”In order to make peace, gentlemen, you have to have a spirit that can be shared by your enemy.  Otherwise there can never be any peace.” (p.19) There is an  excellent story on this page as to how to make peace where Scripio Africanus is used as an example.

11.The spirit is the power to identify yourself with another frame of reference.  “When two frame of reference, with different soul, different body, different mind, and different role can be brought together, then you can have peace. ”  (p.19)

Lecture – 7

1/7.Greek Thinking = Descartes whose logic was based on separating mind and body.  “The body is wicked and the mind is good.”  (p.1)

2/7.Christianity = the spirit incarnate. Humans are the incarnation of a word spoken, creating man and therefore mind, body, and soul, as good.   “…all we know of God …is anthropomorphic.”   In our values we elevate the value of the mind, but “The soul — that is, your power to love, and to hope, and to show faith — is probably superior to your passing being.  Your mind.” (p.7)

3/7.Growth of man centers on the ability to change one’s mind constantly, BUT  FOR THE RIGHT REASONS.  A person changing one’s mind for a promotion, for “enlightened self interest.” is not a good enough reason, it is changing one’s mind FOR THE WRONG REASON.”  (p.2)  The MIND is good for reflection, but not for making crucial decisions; that comes from the heart. THE UNDERLYING FALLACY OF AMERICAN PSYCHOLOGY IS THAT MIND AND SOUL ARE TWO INTERCHANGEABLE ENTITIES.  (p.7)

4/7.PSYCHOLOGY  is not the study of mental processes! as has been defined by William James. Psychologists believe that there are two entities, mind and body, and that these exist in separate compartments. I believe this is not true!  “I am free because I possess a soul.”  To make decisions is to have a soul.  Psychologists, in believing  what they do, lead  as well to the notion that  EDUCATION IS GOOD FOR ITS OWN SAKE AND THAT TO BE EDUCATED IS TO BE GOOD.  But what if the education is wrong?

Art is to love, mind is to reflect, body is to will, role is to represent.  Four verbs: to will, reflect, love and represent   “…in order to describe any normal human being.”  (p.7)

                   “…this is our psychology in this course,…always split, or irradiate, or diversify into representative actions; into wilful actions, by resisting pressure; in reflect, which you call `thought’; and in loving actions, by which we try to get out of our ruts and out of our present day and unite in new form — into new forms, be it friendship, or be it a new nation, or be it a new town, or a new club which you found.  Wherever you enter a new compound, a new body, you strip yourself of your physical resistance against the outer world, because you take in something of the outer world and amalgamate, assimilate it,  without resistance.  You love it.”  (p.5)

5.Modern social science subscribes to the philosophy of Aristotle, to Greek thinking, which is pre-Christian, which did not know that man LIVES BY THE WORD, BECAUSE HE’S SPOKEN TO AND BECAUSE HE’S LOVED.”  Greeks thought that man could be described by man by himself. THIS IS THE WHOLE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN GREEK THOUGHT AND CHRISTIAN THOUGHT – that man cannot live unless he is spoken to. “God says, Adam, where art thou?” Adam does not know who he is, he must answer.   One isallowed to play, to go to school, to head an organization, by others.  We are never alone.  We are “allowed” by others who love us.

THE FIRST CONFUSION OF Greek, Communist and all non-Christian thought, is that love is not an essential element in the whole of man’s activities. The cycle of inner life must include all four –  thought, feeling, will and love.  Love does not want its own;  will is just the opposite.

THE SECOND CONFUSION, is that thinking is not a reflection of will, love and feeling.  “You cannot think in a vacuum.” THINKING MUST BE ABOUT THE LIFE EXPERIENCE IN ALL THINGS.  i.e. in contest.  Greek thought believes that thinking can begin inside itself.  ERH  cites the concept of utopia as a metaphor for thinking in the abstract – utopia is a place that doesn’t exist.  Thought for its own sake, unrelated to everyday reality, is moribund, without power. In classical Greek thought, every thought has equal importance.  In real life every issue is not of equal importance.  To repeat, the notion of knowledge for its own sake is absurd.

6.”God is the power that makes you and me speak.”  Speech is physical because it moves air,  creating sound waves.  But the CONTENT of speech becomes understandable “…only when you launch your life into the lifestream of eternity.” The meaning of this hour cannot be interpreted by this hour. “Therefore, any one sentence which we speak testifies to our being – riding on a wavelength of thousands of years.”  Thus, “God, is certainly not outside this word as a pensioned-off official who once created the word.  When either you and I have the power to speak the truth, then He’s present at this moment in this room…” (p.10)

Gravity, or inertia would say, don’t speak out, don’t put your neck out.  Speech goes against gravity, “…to speak, is an anti-physical bent in us to go upstream.” (p.12)

7.Greek thought has made  man initiators of ideas instead of the reflector of experience.

8.Willing to love is to subordinate others and things to one’s will. Love, by contrast,  is emptying one’s will and giving into.   Love is surrender; will is work.

9.Feeling is an attempt to glue together that which is separate.  In Greek thought, i.e. modern social scientific thinking, feeling becomes sentimentality (what would be nice) or related to senses only, thinking  has become abstruse (unrelated to reality), and love becomes will. (p.13)

10.Belief in God has some very practical results, because any of the many gods we worship should have power in relation to the whole. One lives by many gods – country, wife or husband, friend, job, profession, love – but God is the whole of all of these.

11.ERH quotes Jung, in Zurich, “You will find that two thirds of what’s called science in America is trash.”  (RF – I presume he refers to social science.)

 

Lecture – 8

1/8.Problem:  What war is, play and teaching are.  As long as we have not explained why a soldier dies for his country in Korea, and why a teacher teaches (in spite of sacrifices in salary and danger), “…you have not explained life, because these are the two foundations on which any society rests:”  (p.1-8)   This is inexplicable according to the theories of modern sociology.   It offers no explanation of why people willingly sacrifice.  ERH denies that it could be enlightened self interest.  (p.2)

2/8.Circulation of Thought, Philosophy 10 deals with the relationship between teacher and student.

3/8.Peace is analogous to play, but not entirely parallel.

4/8.No one wants to admit that he started a war, there is always someone else to blame. War occurs perhaps from playing chicken.  A leader may assume that threats will achieve his goal and has miscalculated, or for whatever reason, but it is seldom planned.  The goal of war is always peace, so peace must be fought for. (p.4)

5.LAW:  ERH points out that the existence of the supreme court was based on British Common law, where the laws were not written into the Constitution, but established by precedent.  Thus, the Constitution and Judicial decisions are separate, i.e. there is no law in the Constitution that says the government can restrict the right of citizens to travel abroad.  However, a presidential decree was allowed to stand (contrary to Constitutional freedom guarantees) because  the majority of Americans believe in the written Constitution only, and therefore they think  there is no breach when passport restriction takes place,  because it says nothing about passports. (p.7)

6.Freedom is only created by war! The Constitution was created by war and would never have come about otherwise.  One must have the energy to fight for what must be or there will be no decent community.   “I don’t care” means one does not have the energy to put into it.  WHEN PEOPLE DON’T CARE ABOUT CRUCIAL ISSUES, EVENTUALLY THERE WILL BE A WAR.  “…war is the reestablishment of an order lost and the discovery that the order cannot be reestablished without new elements entering this order.” (p.14)

7.The present is created by the past and the future. THE PRIMARY FACT OF EMPIRICAL EXPERIENCE, OF NATURE, IS THAT THERE IS NO PRESENT, it is a billionth of a billionth of a second.   “Present is a creation.  It comes from our faith in a qualitatively different future.  We have the power to introduce new elements into the life of the race, into the life of the continent, of the earth, of the world.  You have a new idea.  You can behave differently.  You can forgive your enemy.  You can make peace, in other words. Peacemaking, quality, is not in nature.” (p.17)

8.Religion is the application of the war principle in peace. The more religion you have in peacetime, the more you see that man is at war and peace all the time.

                   “Religion is not a luxury, gentlemen.  Religion is the looking-through — your play, is a looking through your — idiocy that you begin and you end.  Religion is simply the acceptance of the inevitable death of any good thing in life, if it is not renewed by the same energies which have constructed the good thing.  And that’s sacrifice.”  (p.18)

Religion is voluntary sacrifice.  Religion is acceptance of war and peace, between man’s animal nature and his knowledge of the final peace.  He must sacrifice to acquire and win peace for all men.

9.In play there is only the present, a meeting from 1:30 to 2:30, nothing to care for before or after.  “…play time only knows the present.  Real time is divided into past, present, and future.  Play therefore is incomplete. p.19 play isn’t serious!   Some people live in “play” time, are not quite serious about serious issues.  The revolutionary is too serious,  lives only in the future;  he denies the past and present, and will sacrifice himself to create a future.

10.PERSONAL FREEDOM  is the power of the individual to decide what is past, what is future, and what is present. For example, a girl waits for her boyfriend to finish school, thereby giving equal respect for the past (her parents) and her own future.  Elopement would be thinking only of the future.

Ideally one lives in a past, present, and future that are united. This is because the establishment, development, and  regeneration cycle of all institutions and movements requires time to occur. Institutions within the community,  such as marriage, government, business, and education are not built in a day, or a month, or a year.

                   “You have political insight, religious thinking, education, justice, anything important in the field of society only when and as long as three generations are taken care of…” 

                   “…Anything that can survive the interest and the different spirit of three generations is a dignified subject matter for human thought.  Anything more short-lived is second-rate. It isn’t bad in itself, but it approaches the transient, the play‑like.  It isn’t good enough…”

                   “…In serious time, thinking begins with three generations.  In serious time, past, present, and future are unfolding and balancing eachother.  In serious time, the present is the product of encroachment of the future and the present on your same soul, and mind, and person.  And in serious life, the end precedes the beginning.  That’s why there had to be and Old Testament ending, before there could be a new Testament.” (p.24)

Lecture – 9

1.Love.  Being loved transforms desire into love.  Love and desire must be distinguished; desire is just that, a wanting of something or someone, but love is the willingness to sacrifice to attain that desire.  It also must constantly be renewed.

2.Three stages of love: we desire to be loved, we await a response from the world, we can obtain that love by demonstrating a willingness to pay the price.

3.The military, and war are the cornerstones of the Constitution and of justice. (p.3)  (RF – I interpret this statement as meant to be taken metaphorically, i.e. the military = power, war means willingness to fight for principles (justice), and no important issue is established otherwise. Importance, by definition usually creates controversy.)

4.Freedom  is the ability to change the future into the past, and vice versa.  ERH uses the example of weeding a garden whereby the naturally growing weeds (the future) can be exterminated and replaced by planting desired flora that would not naturally be there.

5.On time and timing.  He cites Woodrow Wilson as an example.  In 1908 he planned for the 1912 election demonstrating that large events must be prepared for, must go through the proper phases, otherwise actions at the wrong time have no effect.  It is the same with all processes; in courtship for instance, the right steps must occur at the right time and in the correct sequence for success. One must prepare, to get to know the other person.  Getting engaged is just one phase, but the marriage should not come for a while.  (RF – Although this may sound like an unnecessary truism to include, clearly ERH wishes to bring to our consciousness everyday events that we tend to accept with little thought as to their inner workings.)

6.War and play.  War and play are one-sided aspects of human behavior, as they exaggerate aggressiveness. One must arm oneself for protection when necessary,  but this behavior is not appropriate for peace.  War and play differ in that play is controlled and can begin and end according to plan, and war is real and not so completely controlled.

The leadership in army or church must be able to move between war and peace, between the veteran and  recruit, between being a fighter and a citizen. The spirit of the army is within people, not in equipment. It is the same with religion;  real religion exists in the minds of the people, not in the church building.

7.Leadership in the military  is the opposite from civilian management.  The army leader must be capable of leading the “troops” into battle and have them willing to die for the cause.  The leader is therefore intimately involved with the followers. The true leader will instill followers with the spirit of the cause, creating true followers.  True followers will return from leave, with failed leadership they desert. (p.21-9)

Lecture 10

1.We are different persons in different situations, on the battlefield, at home, in the classroom, at work. For this reason leadership must be different and appropriate for each situation.  Patton was wrong to slap the soldier in the hospital; that was only appropriate behavior only under fire on the battlefield. It is not the slap itself that was wrong,  because any single act can have very different meanings in different situations. A slap can be an act or mercy of an insult, depending on the context.  We must therefore understand that we are  free to act in accordance with the demands of the situation.  IN LIFE THERE IS CONSTANT DEMANDS CONFRONTING US. TO BE SUCCESSFULLY RESPONDED TO, WE MUST UNDERSTAND THE NEED FOR DIFFERENT METHODS. (p..5)

2.What is supernatural?  Catholic writer Baron von Hugel told the story of an English officer in the Boer War who sacrificed his life for the sergeant.  That was a  supernatural event. That could be said to be an act of true religion that reflects an act of sacrifice. (p.11)

3.Leadership and management:

          “Leadership is much more comprehensive than  management….Leadership is the capacity of understanding the constant transition of man from recruit to veteran, from frontline soldier to off-duty soldier.  Any man who is so complete that he can understand …these transitions , can lead men.” (pp.15,16)

ERH makes an important distinction between division of service in the army and division of labor in bureaucracies in peace time.  Division of service means that the unity in the military comes first, then there are divisions of labor.  In the factory the division “divides people”.  In other words, it is important to distinguish between the ability to organize labor (management) on the one hand, and to inspire dedication to the cause on the other.

4.There exists a time factor regarding the meaning of roles when dividing labor. The worker always exemplifies the past, since his work is repetitious. The future is created by non-repetitious work, i.e. the manager, the researcher and the salesman.

 

Lecture – 11

1.       “…the mystery of any society is in its power to change from war to peace..the life of a political body depends on its still being able to do both, to go from peace to war, and from war to peace.” (p.1,2)

THE GREATEST REVOLUTION OF THIS CENTURY HAS BEEN THE INTEGRATION OF THE COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD BECAUSE OF TECHNOLOGY, NOT COMMUNISM OR CAPITALISM. A country can get into a war by itself, but it cannot establish peace by itself. (pp..4,5-11)  Two world wars give evidence that the leaders did not realize that they could make war by themselves, but not peace.

2.We need peace because that is the only time there is time to grow and progress. During war we are preoccupied with survival and there is no time to invent new forms.  We must survive by doing what is known in the present.  Only peace provides both space and time to invent, to develop new forms upon which nations will get along.

3.War is the natural course of events.  Peace is unnatural.

4.”War and marriage are the two cornerstones of serious life with which we cannot experiment.”  Thus, when we do not know how to make peace, wars continue.  This is the lesson of the great revolution of the 20th century.  It is the same with marriage.  When we do not know how to establish a viable relationship, marriages end in divorce and endless re-marriages.

Peace is only productive if it is used to prevent war. Otherwise there will be another war, until the issue is settled.  Threats are not all bad.  A war makes you stay awake and  take things seriously, or take a good enemy seriously. (RF – This statement sounds drastic, if not bizarre, but I believe he is making the point that we need stimulation to keep from going to sleep socially.)

5.Play is analogous to experimentation; serious life does not allow for experiment, as defined.  “…religion has gone completely today on the side of play.” (p.8)

                   “But what is called religion is so sweety that it is only therefore (for) 8 year-old children….Most suburban Christianity is just a nice play.  It’s a ritual. It has nothing to do with religion…It’s, its imitation.” (p.9) 

In other words, one can control the ritual, but not “religion.”

In a like way, experimentation requires control, and time.  When there is a crisis in real life one doesn’t have time to prepare, to experiment.

7.ERH’s next 10 pages deal essentially with the issues in Multiformity where he speaks ostensively of the working force and management as examples of the nature of humankind, the conclusion being that the individual is made up of several roles in the whole of life and is therefore not only a worker, but also a member of the community, of a family, of a close relationship, but all of these in combination – he/she is “multiform” and that is the man management must manage. His concern was that in the factory, when the worker is treated only as a worker, as a number, as a commodity, he is less effective and likely to, and should,  revolt.

 

Lecture – 12

1.He continues on the roles of the factory, the worker, engineer, manager, and salesman.  Each with a different role but all are be tied together in the process  of production.

2.The entire lecture is a brief history of economic development from tribe (and clan) to modern productive life.  ERH avers that in the past in order to understand our own economy today we must understand what  has not changed from the past and what has changed. He charts the evolving divisions of labor of the individual members of a tribe, where each man was a jack-of-all-trades by necessity: i.e. hunter, tanner, fighter, house-builder etc., to the present day, where there are literally thousands of job types.

3.Within these three basic job types – worker, engineer and manager he points out that during history there have always been the same basic roles.  The worker’s work was repetitive, the engineer’s work was the opposite (to constantly invent new things), and the manager’s job was to accommodate the changes between technology and worker.

4.In sum, the historical evidence indicates that the rate of change is increasing with such rapidity that all jobs are growing more monotonous (because of increasing divisions of labor in each profession), that the rate of change increases, increasingly destabilizing social conditions, and that any interruptions, or lack of adaptations causes war.

 

Lecture 13

1.Historically there have been 5 types of economies. 1) Hunting, in which the amount of land needed for survival had to constantly increase. 2) Raiding, (war – spoils system), which required increasing armies. They didn’t produce the food, but took it from others. 3) The peasant economy, which was agriculture and which required increasing demand for land.  4) The artisan economy which required divisions of labor for the crafts to build towns and an increasing demand for raw materials. 5) And the production economy which increased the routinization of labor and increased the demand for markets and efficiency. All of these increased the time of peace because they reduced the need to go to war (for material survival). (p.4-13)

2ERH points out that all economies throughout history had the same goal, to make a living, paying dividends (in food, land, commerce, etc.). Failure meant starvation. This was just as true with the Feudal system as with our capitol system (which is not entirely pure).

3.Today we have changed from a market-seeking economy to a market-exploitation economy, because of communication world wide, all markets are now known.

4.All economies live side-by-side, and no one can support a country by itself.  Capitalism, feudalism, hermitism are equally obsolete today and are equally inevitable as partial solutions. Thus, neither communism not capitalism are panaceas.

5.He speaks of the relationship between economics and war and peace.  War is always about jobs, about the unemployed.  Unemployment in peacetime is simply another form of war (locally).  When there is enough work to go around, there can be peace.  The basic problem of any nation is to see that people are fed properly so that they are willing to fight during war. (p.20)

6.The U.S. was populated by the unemployed from Europe.  Thus, both Europe and the U.S. prospered. Obviously, this is no longer the case.

7.All “sciences” (new arenas) begin with a crisis.  As with all problems, it is either a crisis that is upon us or one that is anticipated.

Lecture – 14

1.Problem: how do we become a “person,”  and how do we learn to understand others? To do both of these we must understand the different positions people find themselves in with different demands.  one comes from loneliness  and solitude, from his so-called individuality and it is not simple to become one with others. This power to be one and the other, asks for certain conditioning.

2.The whole thrust of our development is toward understanding both, i.e. in becoming a “human being.”  This is what  Christianity is all about. A newborn baby is not a human being in  this sense, nor is anyone who has not matured. Most people are actually in this in-between state. A human being is one who is well-rounded, who can put him/herself in the others position in an effort to attempt to understand.

                   A person is that human being which can cope with the four aspects of play, of war, and of peace…A human being who is not pigeon holed.  (p.1)

In other words, one who is not pigeon-holed into one role only.   To be only an athlete, or only a general, or only a husband, is not to be a whole person.  A person is one who, at the proper time, can take on the necessary role for the occasion, one who knows when to stop being one and to be another.

Furthermore, a person is not just born, but must become.  This is consistent with ERH’s idea of soul.  One grows by solving these problems.

When this lesson is not learned, we become schizophrenic, multiple personalities unable to find a unity.  The best evidence, beyond the roll-call in mental hospitals, is that we are so gregarious we cannot stand to be alone. p.3/14  A whole person is also one who can stand to be alone for an hour. (p.3)

3.Becoming a person takes attachment, a membership in a family. It means involvement, and being hurt. To be hurt means one has a soul.  Mind and soul are different, but often in this country mistaken for the same.

4.Mind, body, soul, and role.  Psychology is the science of the mental processes, of the mind.  It has nothing to do with the soul. “Now the soul is the power to change our role, our body, and our mind….It certainly has the power to overcome any one mentality, any one physical state, and any one social role–cultural role.” (p.7)

5.Shame is related to the idea of soul.  It is the ability to change at the right time, and it is the waiting after one knows that one is changed. In his example he cites the psychologist who is disenchanted with his field of study and decides to quit.

                   “The soul, you see, says inside the psychologist, `Well, today I say carry on.  I won’t tell my students.  And tomorrow, I’ll still carry on.  But the day after tomorrow, I shall write a letter to the administration and say, I resign.’  He can’t write this letter too early.  Or he’s licked.  So, during the waiting period he is ashamed.” (p.8)

6.The whole meaning of the soul, the problem it solves so to speak, is that is allows us to change and still be the same person.

                   “Your part in the divine life is the soul, because it can dismiss the  visible states of your existence in a material world…

                   … how can a man change without going insane?  Obviously, the brain can replaced by another brain, by another instruction. Yet you are the same person…you are more of a person, because you have been able to change your mind. (pp.10,11)

7.The soul and memory. Decisions the soul makes are what to remember and  what to dismiss.  One cannot have an open mind about any issue indefinitely; there comes a time to take a stand.

                   “Memory for the mind is not a savings box, but a promise.  The everything we shall remember is  meant to promise us someday in which this memory will come to life again and serve us well. …Nobody can remember history who thinks that history is the past…you think you can reach the future without loving the past.  …I copulate the future with all the unfulfilled promises and prophecies of the past.  And so I know every date.”  (p.11)

8.The soul does not function “with a mind” —“The soul only rings the bell and says, `This mentality is worn out.’  The soul is a conscience  providing unity against the divided logic of the mind, a division that causes schizophrenia, mental illness.  It is this unity that allows the growth of the personality.  Otherwise one drifts through life with no direction, no identity.

9.Compromise does not mean one loses one’s soul.  One must, of course, seek agreement, but if the agreement is not quite right, one must continue to fight.  Compromise is then only a step along the path.  For instance, corruption in government must always be fought. SUFFERING IS ALWAYS PART OF THE CREATION OF A SOUL. To care creates suffering, inevitably.

10.The soul is necessary because it furnishes the only route to rising above one’s heredity, or environment, or role. It enables us to re-create the unity of man despite all the differences of mind, body and society, or government.

11.The administrator tends not to have a soul, a soul that represents ability to change, that represents creativity. The administrator manages only what is known, for yesterday.  The true artist is a visionary,  creating something from nothing, “like God”.  Referring to Shakespeare, – “Everybody could have had these words at his disposal, as you know.  But nobody did anything with them.” ( p.20)  One assumes that an administrator could be creative, but many modern authors make a distinction between “management” and “leadership’.   The point is that, vitality requires change and  change requires the strength of a soul, suffering.

12.ERH describes his view of Christianity, that God created the universe with the power of the word, by naming events. Moses created Israelites, thereby he “experienced” the power of the word,  of creating.  We are brought into our existence by being named; any product or other material is created likewise.  That is, it is identified and can thus enter our consciousness. Americans identify themselves by of accepting the power of the Declaration of Independence and of the Constitution.  That is what makes us Americans!

13.He makes the distinction between the individual and the person.  The individual is an unformed being, while the “person” is the one who has faced the serious problems of life,  made decisions,  suffered, in short who has a soul.  One with a soul makes decisions, as knowing when to go from play to serious things, from peace to war, from war to peace, play to work.  We can’t make decisions if we wish to avoid suffering.

14.The family (however one must define it) is the time and space during which we are to develop into a person (soul), where we should learn  to change mind, body and role. The four points of the cross of reality, –  soul, mind, body, role – are (can only be) forged here.

                   “The central role of the family in developing a person. Role of the mother stands for dignity in the family,.  “She is the ritualist.  She says how to celebrate Christmas…. The father stands for energy, physical “wherewithal”, the breadwinner…The daughter represents, more than any other members, the soul.  “The great symbol of change of mind, body and role..which a girl has to undergo when she marries.  To become a nun is the same.  The virginity of the bride is in her power to dismiss the gods of her family and become her husband’s alter ego.  Nor should she surrender her bodily integrity to any “wanton demand, because the future of the human race is at stake through her…The son represents the mind, the student,  — the problem with chastity is the same with boy and girl, he must not sell his “mind”, his serious thought; rather he must maintain it until he is convinced that he should change.  One doesn’t “play” with ideas in the sense of not taking them seriously.  It is quite acceptable to test certain hypotheses, then accept or reject, but not to play for the sake of playing. ” (p.24)

Obviously, he does not intend these roles to be exclusive; rather they represent the central tendency, the “symbolic” major divisions of labor,  all of which are present in the other members of the family.

Lecture 15

1.ERH continues the theme that a person is defined, in part by the groups to which he belongs (i.e. family, work, organization), and partly as himself, of course repeating the “multiformity” theme.  Here he expounds on the family.

Thinking, feeling and willing involve thought, but none of these change the world.  The only thing that changes the world is love,  because it happens “beyond our will,” as does hate also.

The issue here is growth and how it is to be evaluated. We change by revolting, but when the decision has become a public dedication, when the revolutionary act is done, then must come evolution the living with the consequences of the revolt. That is how we grow.

2.To live by passion  is to leave the world a different place from the one we found. To marry, to defend an idea, to change from a boy or girl to a man or woman, requires the setting up of new standards of behavior. One must change  from mere “human being”, homo sapiens,  to a person with a soul.  This is an enormously subtle and difficult accomplishment requiring considerable inner strength.

3.Physiological growth,  automatic life processes like getting older are not what we are addressing here, of course.  Biography is representative of one’s conscious decisions, one’s history.  He cites Carl Schurz, who at age 23 rescued his teacher Gottfried Kinkel from prison and brought him to England  in 1850  “Such a man leaves his name behind himself, as Lincoln, then he belongs to the ages.” (p.6)

4.To leave home to change, (by implication), one must become detached:

                   “… to get detached from your home, from your prejudices, from your routines, from all your stupidity, from your boredom, BUT WOE TO YOU IF DON’T LEARN HOW TO ATTACH YOURSELF.”   (p.7)

One cannot just drop out. One must, in the process of change ,reattach one’s self to some new cause or some new person,  such as a wife or friend or group.

5.A major condition of growth is that one must be protected and one must not see all obstacles to growth.  One needs both these projections, againstknowing too much and the seeing all obstacles (so that they are not a nervous wreck from worry)   Childhood, studenthood,  new businesses or programs, all need protection. Change is a fragile transformation; one therefore needs protection until the transformation sets. (p.10-11)

6.To grow  requires shame.  Shame is the protective cover for a decision within yourself that is not yet ripe for revealing to the world,  like leaves around a bud or like innocence that must be protected. The hoary head is the protector. Detachment is second rate to attachment.  Our lives are a constant evolution of detachment and attachment.  A hoary head is a person who can love “…even there where he isn’t loved.  And a child is a person which is loved, although it cannot yet love.” (p.15)

7.Wisdom is one thing that can’t be bought; we pray for it, in church.

8.Willing, feeling, and thinking are on the way to detachment.  On the path to analysis, to production, objectivity is appropriate.  One must step outside,  use will,  suppress feelings and   think.  Is man acting in one direction only?   One must have time (to analyze).

 

Lecture 16

1.Married people cannot live by having only the interest of the other.  That is, each person must have some other center to his/her life, otherwise tyranny sets in.  ERH gives an example of a bride who demanded (and received) the promise that her new husband would not have other friendships that could come between them, that SHE was to be his major concern!   And of course this led to serious problems in the relationship.

2.HOW IS ATTACHMENT ESTABLISHED? By a spoken commitment! The only real speech is that which still has meaning 100 years later. i.e. a girl’s whispered “yes” to a proposal, a man’s oath to fight for his country. Attachment requires the spoken word, “yes.”   Power and  truth occur only after the fact, when the word has been verified by your actions. (p.11-16)

                   (Social) truth can never be verified by any objective index.  It can only be verified by your own action. If that word is true, then it has to come true…You have to make it come true.  So the truth is always planted into this world, gentlemen, by a word, and the acts follow. (p.12)

3.The declaration of faith in an idea represents and generates power by guiding things to their place in the scheme of things.  To live day-by-day robs one of the power to see the long term, the commitments, the declarations of faith.   To not make the distinction between the spoken word and a spur of the moment idea leads to impotence.

                   I call this impotent, you understand, because they cannot distinguish when the word is spoken with power, and when it is just said on the spur of the moment because they are drunk……Man creates attachments from nothing out of the power of the word.  (p.19)

4.When we make commitments, we speak ourselves and our lives into existence.

5.Words are general, but when we speak them in a specific situation and with honesty  they take on a new meaning, or perhaps the only meaning for us.

                   …between a lover and his bride, there is nothing in general.  There is something specific which nobody else can even understand.  In other words, the secret of human logos, of speech, is not 9,000 years ago.  You find one good woman who is willing to listen to you and to confide in you, you experience the creation of speech as though there had never been a word spoken on this earth.  (p.23)

6.Words should be spoken with ambiguity.  Why?  Because we are never sure of ourselves, how to speak our thoughts, nor how to connect with what others are intended to perceive.  Thus:

                   In any poet’s poem, the word bristles with all the connotations it ever had in thousands of years of meaning.  Then the word is polished  like a jewel,..like a diamond is in all its facets, it’s used by the man who speaks with love.  p.24

 

SUMMARY of first 16 lectures:

1.ERH begins distinguishing between “the tyranny of living, or real life” and play (including thought-games like theorizing.

a.Play is toying with serious reality – that which makes a difference in our lives.

b.Science is based on a philosophy of space (concreteness of reality).

c.Social science is based on a philosophy of time (the right time to act in order to influence others.

2.Time holds different meaning for natural science and social science. In the world of concreteness, time flows from beginning to end of events.

In the social world, where growth and change are  essential to survival, where such transformations are the product of past actions that are either coming to an end or require transformation, it is more useful to say that time unfolds from the end to the beginning.  This means  the purpose for the change determines the change.

3.In social science, time has four different “declensions” (or meanings). In natural science time has only one meaning; that is from beginning to end.  In social science then, to this one dimension must be added must be added three others that are psychological.  That is, how events effect us emotionally.

a.Time goes by quickly – we speed up time – and in this case we are super-conscious of time, thinking of efficiency.  We are  trying to do more with our time, hurrying to accomplish things. The older we get, the faster it seems to pass.

b.Time goes slowly  when we are bored, when our actions need to be routine, or repetitious, as contrasted with attempting to be creative and excited. Time seems to stand still!

c.Time is forgotten  when we live in our thoughts only.  It seems to stand still. The intensity of joy, in an exalted lyrical state, is a good example.

d.Finally, there is the epochal nature of time when high drama occurs, when there is an epiphany, either individually, or socially as a great moment in history.  Such events as the signing of the Declaration of Independence are so momentous as to be a milestone. They are  pivotal in that we think of them as “before,” and “after.”

Such a consciousness of time frees one to understand one important dimension of one’s experience and thus judge it more accurately.

4.Drama occurs in both real life and in play.  Play as ERH defines it reflects life:

a.Confession of sin allows us to go on, to rise above sin by naming it.

b.Art prizes the moment, captures it in time, in terms of emotional response.

c.Physical strength is to be respected and feared. Our frailty makes us human.

d.Ceremony reminds us that the position is more important than the individual.

All of these elements of serious life can be reflected in play,  but as a reminder.

5.Significant experience is differentiated from play or abstract life, by its inexorability. Play and thought are, by contrast, endlessly manipulable,  can be called into or out of existence at will. Serious experience cannot be.  For instance one cannot retract public behavior  it is always there for the record.  One can admit, or plan to reinforce or counteract it, but never truthfully deny it.

6.The power that creates freedom to choose our behavior lies outside us. “God is the power within us which makes us speak the truth.”

THREE TYPES OF POWER WE ALL POTENTIALLY POSSESS ARE:

a.Divine power: our power to change, to act courageously, and to know the right time to act.

b.Self power: to choose, to act creatively, also translate an idea into reality ( all translation is creative).

c.Natural power,   to drop out, hang loose, relax, to play, or   not to act (to drift thought life).

All of this is manifest in  our mental life or tendencies; a) to manipulate things (if this includes  manipulating other people, it means we treat them as “things.”   b) to respond to other people honestly or, c) to be open to divine inspiration, i.e. pray for enlightenment.

7.”Play” activities represent the fundamental structure of reality.

a. Sports  reflective of the struggle for life.

b. Study – reflects our inner life.

c. Creativity – reflecting new insights with the potential to lead to a new future.

d. Ceremony, law, tradition – reminds us of what should be remembered and followed from the past.

All of this is present in serious reality as well, and being conscious of this structure frees us to understand these events and utilize them appropriately.  All are essential to a vital life. To understand these elements is to be capable of finding one’s direction.  THIS STRUCTURE REPRESENTS THE REALITIES AND DEMANDS OF BOTH THE WORLD OF CONCRETE EXPERIENCE, AND OF MENTAL EXPERIENCE – OF  BOTH SPACE AND  TIME.

8.The problem today is that many institutions have lost sight of their direction.  Education focuses mainly on memorization, or description, but only in the rarest exceptions on how to transform those facts into action that will revitalize society. Likewise, the church seems to practice forms, but fails to instill the courage to live and act truthfully.  AN UNCONSCIOUSNESS OF THIS RESULTS IN THE EXERTION OF CONCRETE POWER, BUT NEITHER FREEDOM TO CHANGE, NOR INSIGHT INTO WHAT WOULD BE REGENERATIVE (DIVINE) DIRECTION, all of which results in inhumanity, and consumption of resources with little  regard for preservation or regeneration of living forms (including human life).

9.ONLY WHEN ONE BECOMES CONSCIOUS OF THESE DIMENSIONS IS ONE FREE TO CHANGE FROM ONE TO THE OTHER, to know the state of some situation and respond directly.  For instance, we must recognize when a situation demands ignoring, or planning, or action, or description, or analysis. These are the four elements of all situations, but to respond appropriately one needs to know which stage is called for at a particular point in time.

There is a time to suspend time, to be super conscious of it, to slow it down, or to divide it. Science  practices only the single dimension of super consciousness. There is a time to listen (to authority), to act, to describe what happened, and finally to analyze (and generalize). The sequence of these events is crucial.

10.Aristotle asks, “That are the facts?”  Socrates asks, “What question should be asked?”,  Plato (reflecting idealism)  asks, “How shall we have a better state?”  This portrait of Greek philosophy is represented in the modern liberal arts college, – too much Aristotle, Too much star-eyed Idealism, almost no Socrates. (p.16, lecture 4)

11.TO CREATE A FUTURE, one must do with less than one can get (i.e. to sacrifice), in order to acquire a surplus upon which one can experiment.  (p.3)

TO CREATE A FUTURE, the question is never, “should there be thought control?” Of course there should be, otherwise there is never order to thought.  The question then is, “who’s and what type of thought control?”

              You can still have freedom in America if you turn to the right thought control.  I mean, the McCarthys will win if you have not a higher freedom, a higher thought control…The question is between faith and cheap faith, (fascist faith)…But the question is no longer between no faith and faith….three quarters of you surrender just to fascism.  …And the other quarter is hankering for some old-fashioned anarchy. ( p.26-4)

12.Serious events in life force us to take a stand if we are to live life and not just drift (which ultimately destroys society).  One needs to recognize a situation  and ponder its nature.  But, ultimately, one must take a stand, try some solution; otherwise life is not only impotent, but boring.

Contrarily, we tend to be ambiguous, avoid commitment, avoid offending, avoid meaningful action, being nice to people when the situation demands frankness.

13.ERH MAKES THE POINT AGAIN & AGAIN THAT IT IS IMPORTANT TO DISTINGUISH A SPACIAL DIMENSION THAT IS UNNECESSARY IN NATURAL SCIENCE. No “object” of research is considered to have thought. In social science, on the other hand,it is crucial to separate thought and action. We must distinguish what is outside from what is inside,  and this sense represents the spacial symbolism in the model of the CROSS. Creativity and God are cases in point.  Original thought is one thing, the inner strength to speak out what we believe to be a valued truth is quite another. While our creativity may originate within us, the power to maintain that truth, possibly at great risk to career or even life, lies outside us.  The power of this, “outside” seems to be ultimate in overcoming barriers, regardless of how one may wish to call it.

There is yet another psychological  barrier to be overcome which is our sense of humility.  We are not all- powerful and we know it.  As a matter of fact, humankind seems to have two extremes of weaknesses. One is that we believe we are, indeed, in control of our lives and have this power.  THIS ISSUE ERH TO TREATS IN HIS ESSAY, “PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE SOUL” WHERE HE MAKES THE POINT THAT MYSTICS BELIEVE THIS  However the weakness of mystics should be  self evident  They would have torn the world apart long ago had this been the reality because the power can be used for evil as well as good. The other extreme is that we feel helpless, in which case we become impotent to create and therefore fulfill our potential destiny.

Yet another conformation of this idea is that he says, “All creative power in men is gratuitous.”  It seems to be a gift, but from where? If not from a divine power (which is to say a power for good),  then why are not all people evil?  Why are so many willing to sacrifice, to be fair, to speak truthfully,  even when they suffer upon doing so?  Atheists and agnostics have no answer for this question.

The great truth of all religions is that we are OF THIS EARTH, and therefore receivers of the ultimate creator.

14.ANOTHER FUNDAMENTAL POINT HE MAKES CONSISTENTLY IS PAST EVENTS HAVE THAT CANNOT BE CHANGED.  WHAT CAN BE CHANGED IS OUR THOUGHT ABOUT IT.   Knowledge (the context here is the school) is unimportant until we apply it, and that quite literally “brings knowledge to life.”   In all artificial learning situations it is not possible to apply much, if any knowledge, however the goal of all education must be to prepare one for application.

15.THE GOOD TEACHER  teaches when he/she presents himself as a model, allowing students to see and understand his passion, why he does what he does.  HE THEREBY CREATES THE POSSIBILITY OF MAKING AN ASS OF HIMSELF. But this is a price one pays to be a good teacher.  One commits one’s self publically.  THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF UNDERSTANDING KNOWLEDGE ONLY AT THE MOMENT OF APPLICATION.   Knowing ourselves (however painful) is the road to growth.  “Reculer pour mieux sauter”, step back so that you may jump higher. (p.6-1)

16.With reference to the CROSS, one of its representations is of four roles we act out. We  either play, (as in sports,  or in the classroom with ideas), or  make a decision, take action, or participate in ritual ceremony. Each activity calls for the others, but no one is complete in itself.

17.Humanity, in order to grow,  must be capable of communicating. ANY PART THAT CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ANOTHER has no choice but to be at war. But war, whether between two people, two institutions, or nations – it is all the same – is all absorbing, excluding all other activity. HOW THEN DOES ONE CREATE PEACE?

The only way is to find common ground (common spirit, a frame of reference)  with another Only then is there potential for peace.  The Middle East Arab/Israel, or Irish Catholic/Protestant conflicts are examples.  Each side must recognize the other, capable of putting oneself in that other context to believe that one, in that instance, would do the same as the “enemy.” Only them can one find peace – and only then begin to progress.

18.GREEK THINKING, another recurring theme in ERH, separates mind from body, thought from action. It elevates the importance of the mind.  Education, knowledge, art all for their own sakes,  have no meaning in life experience.  Only the consequence of use provides social meaning.

Psychology in America likewise confuses mind and spirit as the same.  One is for logic, the other is of the heart.  One doesn’t decide on a marriage, or what profession, or produce art, or decide loyalty – logically – these important decisions come from the heart.

19.LANGUAGE ISSUES; four verbs describe “any normal human” – to love, to will, to reflect, and to serve a role. We love others and ideas. Mind is to reflect, the body is to will (must be satisfied). To take on a  role is to represent.

 

Lecture – 17

The general sense I get about the Cross of Reality is that  in order to be capable of examining our experience fully, and capable of evolving into a full person, we must utilize at the right time one or more of four social roles or attitudes.  And because these roles or attitudes tend to be represented in the balanced family, the family becomes the primary means to achievement.  That is the importance of creating the full family!  All of this seems to be represented in the following, rather long quote:

              …I’ve accepted something from my ancestors and my founders. I have to hand it over.  I try my best to transmit it.  And in this process, I need help.  I may make blunders.  I may not be able to revive the spirit in you.  But at least what I’m doing is something within the process of the society in which I move…I’m not self-contained.  Words have come into me, streaming into me, thoughts, truth, experiments, experiences, traditions; I’m trying to revive them and make all of us again aware of their meaning, and of their direction.  That’s after all what I have been trying to do in this course.  And there is no miraculous thing….Because we are speakers and listeners, we are accepting ritual from the past,..and reinterpreting it in our own marriage of love, in our own affections, in our own passions.

              The corollary, gentlemen, of this for the family now has to be shown.  If you take these four attitudes of the – ritualist, of the lover, of the rationalist, and of the mystic, they are the vicious, vicious disintegrations of the body of the family.  Because if you now turn these four people into reasonable, living social members of a group, you will find that the mother is the ritualist; that the father is the rationalist; that the boy is the mystic, the lyricist; and that the daughter is the bride, waiting to be loved, and to be allowed to say “yes”, or “please.”

              It is that you and I spread into these four directions.  We go from the kernel of manhood into bridal state, into a motherly state, into a fatherly attitude, and into a filial attitude at the several points of our life. (pp.4,5)

He defines the rationalist as one who discerns means, and the mystic as one who dreams. The rationalist cannot determine what is important and unimportant,while  the mystic cannot correlate with the outside world.  Neither listens to commands from others, nor has an end.  ONLY WHEN ONE HAS AN END IN MIND DOES ONE KNOW WHAT MEANS TO CHOOSE OR HOW TO DIRECT ONE’S EMOTIONS. To live fully we need both rationalism and mysticism, logic and feeling, but at the right time and under the right direction.

That direction comes from the past, is filtered through ourselves, and thus reinterpreted in order to produce (create) a future.  A future not only for ourselves, but for the community also, – they must be the same.  We must love what we do, and thus be willing to accept the command (from the past), and be humble and say “please” and “thank you” to those who inspire us to follow, and help us along the way.   In another context, when we atomize our attitudes toward the direction of scientific (rationalist) thought only, or emotional thought only, we become destructive and end in the insane asylum. Thus, the rationalist and the mystic are “…dealing with conditions of achievement, but not with achievement…” (p.1)   In the same way, we must fulfill different social roles as individuals if we are to be complete.  THE GREAT SIN OF THE WORLD, THE BASIS FOR PEOPLE GOING WRONG, LIVING NARROW, FRUSTRATED OR TRAGIC LIVES,  IS THAT THEY DO INDEED FOLLOW ONLY ONE BEHAVIOR, OR SOCIAL ROLE AT ALL TIMES,OR MOST OF THE TIME.

He commonly uses the phrase, “the end determines the beginning”, and here tells the story of the boy who, when asked to circle what he wanted from the Sears catalogue for Christmas, circled every item.  No discrimination! Thus,  “If you do not have the answer to what end you will put all the content of the Sears Roebuck catalogue, you are a child.”  Some direction comes from the past, we need to listen to it.

What is important is what, from the past is important yet incomplete and therefore must be completed.  At the same time there are projects begun in the past  which should be ended.  Bureaucracies, for example whose purposes are no longer needed and therefore superfluous.

We are led by the word, and called by the word;  the word carries the power  to direct us,  harboring energy to motivate us. “The word” refers here to an act of speech which is a commitment by you that reflects your true belief and intent which prove themselves by your actions.

              “…these four powers — yes, no, please, and thank you — may not strike you as very important. As long as they do not strike you as very important, you do not know what the difference between talking and speech is, or between thinking and speaking….These four words are all said to the outside, humanity, in encounter, in meeting them.  And they take you up on these four words.” (p.8)

To say the it will rain tomorrow and it doesn’t is not to be called a liar.  Everyone will know you were giving an opinion. That is talk.    But, to make a promise then not keep it is real speech.  It puts your honor on the line.  That indicates the true power of speech to influence.

 

Lecture – 18

1.We live in a constant dualism of play and seriousness.  Play is time out to rest and to not be serious, time   to follow the role of the subordinate. With subordination a boss is in charge and must carry the burden of worrying about the world.  The subordinate only needs to worry about following orders.  THE PROBLEM IS TO KNOW, TO BE CONSCIOUS of our role in a given situation and to act accordingly.  ERH cites the example of Prince Hal in Henry IV, who whores around with Falstaff, but knows he is playing and enjoying himself, and will have to be serious one day.  We need play because we cannot live all through life by the same standards of performance.  One needs rest from the “burdens” of seriousness.

              What I’m trying to say is, at this moment that here really every hour of your life differs, that you can even not know in the morning when you wake…whether you can keep up this idea of definiteness all day long.  You may relapse into a juvenile and childish state, and take to playing.  I mean  any man, hardworking man may be just taken by a complete desire to complete relaxation. I think society understands these two states…the people who are one-gage minds, so to speak, and hearts, are not very much alive.  (p.5)

2.These many definitions Rosenstock-Huessy brings forth are essential for us if we wish to understand our experience more fully. The ability to Identify a situation, such as the difference between talk (speculation and opinion) and speech (the making of commitments that shape future events in our lives), make the difference between a vague consciousness of life and  enriched insight.  Play takes place in the present; in one sense the need for rest (time out) is necessary, but not serious in the sense that it leads us toward a future (growth). To create a future for ourselves is to take certain steps in sequence.  For instance, one must first commit to a goal and take the attitude that the many distractions will not alter that course. One takes the attitude of the suitor courting an idea, or a career with humility and anxiety.  One commits, one waits to be recognized, one is diligent. In the process one suffers attitudes of insecurity, anxiety, pain.  One waits for a response from others, and when one step is completed the next must be taken. .  This process of growth is never carried out alone.  There must always be someone who has faith in your possibilities, just as marriages and lasting friendships are first built upon anticipation that you have potential, yet unseen by others.

              Everything that points towards the future, gentlemen, has to have this now-or-never, this, this-and-nothing-else attitude…the first person who really takes you up on what you can be, that is the wife of your choosing.  And it takes 30 years before the rest of the world comes to the conclusion that she saw in you the person they didn’t see in the beginning at all.  (pp.8,9)

3.We must learn that we cannot live by ourselves, under our own steam.  We live by gradual discoveries the world makes about us…

              because without their complying with your offer, with your constant, making efforts, if there is not give and take, answer and response, you wouldn’t be able to live on.  (p.9)

He cites the example of the Canadian immigrant attempting to join the club, and the clerk who announced that he can do better, and the business man who woos customers.  Offer and response – and a third element, the time it takes to complete the response. This aspect of time will vary enormously from one situation to another and it is difficult to be patient, and at times the response may never come. When all is said and done, there is no such thing as a self-made person!

In general the chapter emphasizes the difficulty of creating a “unity,” a compatibility between the many different roles we play, attitudes toward situations we must face and people with whom we must deal.  We must depend upon mentors and critics, loves and enemies. A real marriage depends upon the husband and wife discussing and sharing work as equals; otherwise there is no true marriage.

 

Lecture – 19  The Cross

1.A definition of society:    a) a universe of situations, i.e. man at war,  at work, at play, in love, alone.  All of this as individuals, but in addition,  b) all of these must add up to a unified society.  Society makes demands for unity.

2.Economics:  Because the distribution of goods and services is so central to any group, economics is related to all major facets of the society.

a.  First ERH points out that in a “planetary” economy, war must be a central part.

b. Total war, or peace never occurs, we always have both at once. The difference is relative.

c.Nature of the economy (wealth).

d.There are many economies; war, peace, cities/rural, national/international, employment/unemployment, etc.

e.All economies are interrelated and must become integrated.  And one may assume by inference that an advantage for one may disadvantage another, thus to be integrated is to strike a balance between all these forces.

f.No more than perhaps one third of an integrated economy should be national (i.e. trade totally within national borders).

3.Soul is the power that controls  decision-making in all realms of reality, i.e. physical, mental, – economic, and political.

To sustain the “soul” we may at times need to abdicate from a situation, i.e. when it becomes unmanageable or intolerable.  At these times we become spiritually invisible, retracted into our inner world.

4.The soul is what unifies all of our social roles (as family member, work team member, husband or wife, intimate friend, and community member) into our individuality. The individual is thus “Multiform.”  ERH asserts that the notion of “individual” as the sole description of the person is a fallacy, an impossibility.  If all these roles were fragmented, one becomes schizoid; the roles must be unified for a healthy, functioning person to emerge.

5.In order for “man” to remain potent, to deal with the problems of life in some balanced, satisfying, fulfilling way, he must form a set of balancedattachments, i.e. in order to become multiform.  Dis-equilibrium means that onefactor dominates the others, or is missing.  “Committing suicide reflects the lack of ability to maintain those vital attachments.”  (pp.17,18,19)

A crucial aspect of “attachment” is to remain capable of detaching from any group, and re-attaching to some other group.  It would seem therefore that suicide can be a metaphor for detachment.

6.Founders of religious regeneration, a medicine against suicide!  There is a crucial difference between “can” and “may.” We can drop the atomic bomb, but we may not without causing suicide of the world by atomic war.  We become suicidal by being totally objective.  To be objective is to be detached from one’s subject. It is in this sense that ERH evokes the names of Buddha, Lao-Tzu, Abraham, Jesus. “they have in a strange manner put something in the place of suicide.” This is the role of a universal religion.

              “religion identifies the can, and the may.  Factually, we can do certain things, like murder, lie, ignore, but if we desire to sustain society into the future we may not.  This is the need for ethics and religion, which are to engender in us the strength to sustain the `may nots.'”  (p.22)

 

Lecture – 20

The question raised here is, “What is the place of religion in the process of attachment and detachment?”  Religion is needed precisely because of “… man’s power to destroy his own rhythm between attachment and detachment.” (p.1)

1.Detachment is death, as is objectivity (looking at things from the outside), viewing essentials as unessential to your life.  Detachment is the devil, and ultimately is boring.  Attachment, contrarily, is life, is feeling, is meaningful to one, and it is subjective. (p.2)  DETACHMENT IS NOT THE LIFE AND DEATH OF THE OBSERVER, BUT RATHER LIFE AND DEATH OF THE THING BEING OBSERVED; THE CLUB, ANIMAL, MINORITY GROUP, FOREST, ETC.

2.We cannot be objective toward others and expect them to be subjective toward us.  If we wish to know another we must pay for that knowledge by revealing ourselves.  Relationships are reciprocal: “…the funny thing about real life is that the other fellow calls you by the reciprocal name that you call him.” (p.7-20)  DETACHMENT MEANS DETACHMENT FROM HALF OF OURSELVES, because our lives include the necessity to belong to other groups, i.e. in the army, work, play, love affairs etc.

3.Biology is objectively studying other animals, but sociology, psychology, physiology, and other social sciences utilize the same methodology, they are “…glorified biologies.” (p.7)  If mankind is one, which ERH asserts, how can we be unbiased about studying  a humanity of which we are a part?

4.We are called by the name of our role in life – father, son, mother, daughter, secretary, captain – and when addressed,  those role characters in return call the caller by his corresponding role.  For instance, if the father is addressed, he replies “son.” WE ARE NEVER SELF RELIANT, WE ARE ALWAYS MUTUALLY RELIANT.  “This mutual reliance…is the real story of life…”   (p.7)

5.PARADOXICALLY, passion and agreement must go hand-in-hand.  This is a necessity for all groups.  All groups harbor different types of people, different attitudes that are held passionately.  The problem is, “How do we integrate these differences?”  With difficulty, one would say, but what we cannot do is exile persons with whom we disagree.  In today’s world that is no longer possible. In a like manner, in the family one needs to integrate power, beauty, ideals, and dignity (respectively symbolized by the father, daughter, son and mother). (p.10-20)  The opinions of each must be respected and compromise made.

6.Cooperation is illustrated by the story of getting 5 horses pulling a wagon to work together,  otherwise they injure each other.  It is the same with people, to get them to agree to a single direction.

7.Will and love:  One cannot will another to love oneself, one has to act so that the other person desires to love.  It must be the same with getting agreements between groups. (p.13)

8.Religion is an attempt to heal the evils of the world, which is to say, heal scars created by the wrong rhythms between attachment and detachment. ONE DOES A THING BECAUSE IT IS THE RIGHT THING TO DO, NOT FOR SOME PURPOSE BEYOND IT.   To do good for reward is the wrong reason to act.

              The purpose of living is to live.  There is no other purpose.  The purpose of religion is to give the most complete life under devastating circumstances.  …You can live the good life under the most trying and impossible deadlocks…

              When your detachments and attachments are completely wrong, when you have a tyrant as your master, you see, or when life, which is an end in itself, which has no ulterior motive, and no ulterior purpose.  That is, you can lead the good life in any minute on this earth, which is quite some promise, and really sounds like a terrible exaggeration….But there is a promise in all religion…that man’s life can be lived right in any minute.  (p.14)

(RF – I take this to mean that when one attempts to live consciously at each moment and makes decisions that are right at that time for that situation, one then lives the best life possible.)   This is the method for moving toward creating heaven on earth – there is no other heaven or hell. This may sound exaggerated, but those who use religion as a drug, as opium, as a false promise cannot find the same rewards, and certainly do not live truly.

9.When we live a “blissful life,” one in which we fulfill intended roles according to “reality,” the rules are likely to properly guide the rhythm of attachments and detachments.  Religion, like the family, exists for its own sake.  “There is nothing beyond them.” (p.15)

10.Anything that has a purpose must be guided totally by that purpose. Anything that has some end beyond it is mere method. If life is a means for some other end it is no more than a cog in a machine. Life is far more marvelous than that!

11.The raw material for a good life is always “there” at each moment, because life allows for the possibility to live right, to create a family, friends, proper relationships, to call others and be called. It is precisely the function of religion to allow us to see this.   (RF – And one might add, “Engender the courage to act accordingly.”)

12.The family is the most vital institution in the world, and it is the most complex,

              “…much more complex than a state, or a church, or an army, or a factory.  It contains the greatest opponents of each other…and it contains the two sexes and ages.” (p.18)

13.Here you have it, the reason the family is so fundamental to the regeneration of the spirit, because it is the forum in which it is possible for the individual to find and learn completeness.  That is, the complete roles of different individuals.  The family is by far the most complex institution.  Every other takes people to be equal, regardless of age or sex, or religion, because it sees them as contributors to some “other” goal.  But the family contains and forces the recognition of basic divisions of men, and teaches us how to deal with them in an amicable way.  It symbolically represents power (father), dignity and history (mother), soul and love (daughter), and ideals and future (son).  These are  qualities that we, and every group on earth needs.

The Bible represents a solution to the problems of divisions.  All roles can be changed and exchanged – employer/employee, private/general, – etc. except sex.  Adam and Eve represent the merging of this division.

Lecture – 21

On shame.  Shame is a very healthy and necessary thing.  In this age of science, people believe it is good to see everything, to “…turn everything inside out.” (p.1-21)  But this is just the reverse of what we should do in some cases.

1.The family represents mankind’s conquest of space and time. The mother looks back (at Adam and Eve with the first day of creation); the daughter with the last judgment day (with the whole selection of the human race in terms of heredity and whom she marries); the father represents the whole expanse of space (i.e. the dangers of the concrete world – by providing the “bacon” he, gives the time to do its thing).  And the son represents  the sense of conquest (pioneer of new ideas).  (p.5)

2.The institutions of the church and state and economy are the formal organizations through which the society continues.  “MAN IS THIS STRANGE ONE BEING THAT BY PERPETUAL CHANGE CAN CONTINUE.” (p.6-21)  He is capable of doing this, of regenerating, only if the family, the most complex institution, is fully represented and its roles performed.

EVERY INSTITUTION MUST BE REGENERATED EVERY GENERATION BECAUSE IT MUST CONSTANTLY CHANGE.  IT IS OUR JOB TO CHANGE IT, IF THE SPECIES IS TO CONTINUE.

3.Time and space are conquered by the four faces of outer and inner, past and future.

              “…keep the oldest prayers of the human race, the Psalms..at the same time allow novelty and fashion to enter your home, you have represented the secret of life in the midst of your home.  If you over‑stress any one aspect of it, the whole — the unit explodes…” (p.7)

When the family is not made justification of all institutions and the whole of life, there is fragmentation; one institution cannot communicate with another.  The church, speaking about the fall of Adam, about hell, fire and brimstone, about the last judgment (represented by mother and daughter), cannot communicate with father and son, who speak about science and philosophy, (separating space and time. The abstract process of categorizing, sans narrative context, is an act of destruction of meaning). Thus, in universities, departments of theology, business and the rest are separate, and in their separation become sterile.

              “…I go to the clergymen, and they tell me about my bad conscience, and they tell me that — everything will be visited, that I have to confess my sins, and that there will be a judgment day, and that we all are sinners,..and must become saints, and that’s again to the exclusion of all geography, and all politics, …”

              “I’m again hungry because..that’s very nice for my inner man, but I think…I don’t know what to do in this world when I go to these ministers…obviously, they don’t know……so you have this cleavage between the secular knowledge which is for men in their professions…Then you get the knowledge of the soul, of women’s part in all of us, you see, by which we try to solve this great riddle of what we are for in this world, really, and what we are dying for, and what are we living for.” (p.8)

4.Only science, or only religion (or to say it another way, only space and only time), when separated become an impotent absurdity. Space, is said to be the assignation for father and son because they are the traditional physical providers,  and time defines the role of daughter and mother because they are in charge of the family calendar – past and future), family life trains us to see this.  Otherwise, when separated, we do not understand the commonality between any woman and our wives and sisters, and therefore we rape them.  Or, speaking from the woman’s standpoint, we do not understand the necessity of concrete accomplishment and idealist progress in this world (i.e. father and son).

ERH also speaks about the fact that all of this is metaphor, that a whole individual needs to think in terms of all four of these factors, the inner and outer, past and future.

5.No doubt the numbers of rape and other crimes against the sexes, of divorces of people seeing psychiatrists, is evidence of broken families.  Women and men cannot cope with each other without religion (never to compromise, never to turn the other cheek, to forgive, to have faith). This means more war between the sexes, nations, organizations, etc.  Science and philosophy say nothing about not raping a girl or getting along between father and son.

 

Lecture – 22

1.Man, just as any bacterium or other form of life, strives to regenerate, to embrace the world and to live. In all creation only the family of man engenders the life of the spirit.

              “You are drawn into these four directions, and you are cursed if you do not fulfill them.” ( p.2-22)

2.Men in the plural are small, everyone like anyone else.  But when one man stands up and pronounces what is alive and what is dead,  he represents God; that is,  he acts in the image of God.

              “God’s power is to decide what’s dead and what’s alive…..Now whenever we have this power..to decide what is dead and what is alive, we are the single man whom God has created.”  (p.2)

3.The uniqueness of man.  All unique experience becomes, in time, routine. We retain our uniqueness, our individuality, by having new experience.  In doing this we manifest the singular person in the best sense.  But this is not all. In the process of being, of living fully and singularly fulfilled, we act according to past laws, according to future goals, according to survival in the concrete world, and according to our inner souls. (p.8-22)

4.Any life is full of pain, bliss (interesting he uses the same term as does Joseph Campbell, and with the same meaning) anger, friction, etc, and the amount of happiness is relatively small.  Goethe at 82 was quoted as saying he had never had more than 6 weeks of happiness during his life.  The idea is that life is unique.  Most people don’t really live at all, ERH claims; they don’t feel intensely, and therefore are neither really happy or unhappy.

He illustrates the point with a story about the girl who lived in perfect bliss for 6 months with her lover, then committed suicide because there was nothing left, she believed, to live for.   It is the same with all life. It was a unique experience, and such happiness was unusual.

If nothing is unique WE ARE NOTHING BUT MOSQUITOES, not human and not using our incredible gifts.  TO FEEL LIFE INTENSELY, TO LIVE IT MEANS TO SUFFER GREAT PAIN, BUT ALSO GREAT BLISS!

5.The way we consume our lives is our own judgment as to is what is unique. ERH uses the simile of carrying a glass of water (life), and in the process one must decide “at every moment” when to drink it and when to throw it away.  He cites Hamlet, declaring  that the greatness of the play is that Hamlet goes from incident to incident, taking  on each until all of the scoundrels have been unveiled, and that he has the courage to stand up to the possibility of being killed. He is a hero.  At times one might need to run and hide (as did Jesus), and at another time stand up and face evil. That takes courage.  To do this with a reverence for life takes courage.  Life is frail and delicate.

We cannot live life fully in this way without a personal dogma, without passion!  We must trust that our lives will not become common-place.  To do this we must feel each moment, not live like a thinking machine (as is the tendency of many).  We must speak to situations with a sense of their uniqueness. What is the greatness of Jesus’s words in the New Testament? That they had never been said before. (p.13-23)

6.ERH tells the story of a boy, the lover of the girl (cited above) who he could have saved from suicide if he had been able to point out other things in life that she could fulfill by trying to live fully.  SUCH IS THE POWER OF THE WORD TO CHANGE US.  But he was not up to it. He didn’t know what the situation was.

7.Life and death are not ultimate choices: There can be a good life and a good death, and vice versa. The point is, there are four possibilities:  life can be both positive and negative, and death is both plus and minus.  To understand this means that death, the be the effect of the way we live?  Part of the answer is the way we choose to die. That is an important consideration if we have the courage to think that way.

8.To live life, one must do what one must do, regardless of the outcome personally. “A man who doesn’t say this, cannot be spoken to.  He is just a prattler.” (p.15-22) We are fulfilled by finding the truth about ourselves, but if we have no truth, no standards for which we are willing to die, or sacrifice,  then we are not living.

              “…the essence of any knowledge about real life depends on your power to treat life and death with equanimity.  Otherwise you are just biased.  You are partisan.  And if your life comes first,..you certainly are not apt to know the truth….the knowledge of the truth depends on your indifference to life.  And that’s why so very few people know the truth, and why the truth is hated…any Quaker who risked his life in Massachusetts when he confessed that he was a Quaker.  Take any Jew who, under Hitler, forfeited his existence when he said that he was a Jew…one name you give to yourself can mean  your very existence.” (p.16)  

That is the price of truly living. To be willing to face death.

9.       “…we speak in order to relate, in order to relate the present moment to its proper place in space and time.” (p.17)

This quotation relates to the story about the couple in love, but the man is unwilling to marry.  After 2 years she leaves.  His point is that the man was not really interested in the girl beyond a temporary arrangement.  Thus, in personal relations, we need to be honest, to use our speech to declare our view of our experience truly.  This often takes courage.  To speak this way, truly, is to be possessed with the spirit of God.

              “The only thing a woman has to receive from her husband is his belief in God. All the rest is money….THAT’S YOUR HONOR, GENTLEMEN.”(p.17-22)

10.The relationship between man and wife is that the husband’s role is to herald the future, and the wife’s is “…holding onto what is created; the man is bringing in the next chapter…”  The woman holds onto faith in the past and present, the husband looking into the future.

11.WE BECOME FREE WHEN WE GET IN TOUCH WITH OUR MORTALITY. The church, the Old Testament is based on the idea that the prophet does not live to see his prophecy. With the spirit, death precedes life.  Each of us is here because somebody in the past died for us. Moses had to die in order for the next generation to get into the Promised Land.

To get in touch with our mortality, to understand that one day we will die, means that we live differently, more freely.  Those who are afraid to pay the penalty of death;

              “…cannot know truth, nor beauty, nor love, nor sacrifice, nor hope, nor faith….”  (p.20)

We only obtain these qualities when we are indifferent to the outcome of our behavior.  To achieve bliss is to live and die at the right time.  Jesus died at 33 (he didn’t do anything significant until he was 30), Lao Tzu at 40 or 45, and Moses lived to be very old.

The meaning of our entire life may be wound up in some series of events that last varying periods of time, but during that time a complete sequence of necessary events will take place, the birth, the development, and denouement. It may be 6 months or 3 years, or not at all.  There is a rhythm in the sequence, and each event has its unique rhythm.  This is what we must learn to feel.  And as individuals, we go through the same phases as civilization has in its entirety before us. (p.23)

              “One war, one crusade, one discovery of America may concentrate into one year so much awareness, so much interest.  And then you get 50 years of drabness, and indifference, and peace, you see, what people call `peace’. ” (p.24)

During those creative periods we are completely aware, and thoughtful, i.e. conscious of the world. During those periods one has lived!

              “The rhythm of real creation contains death as much as life.  And we have just to die as often as we live.  God always is dead in a society which only wants to live.  If you have all the life, then God gets all the death….We have a relation to death which is very practical.  It has nothing to do with your physical death..” (p.25)

 

Lecture – 23, More on Religion

1.Acquired qualities can be inherited, otherwise there would be no human history. (p.1-23)  Obviously ERH refers to the inheritance of ideas, of the spirit.

2.By implication, – spirit, and ideals are not worth passing  on unless someone was willing to die for them.  Our life is meaningful only to the extent that we  accept the possibility of needing to die if necessary.

              Death is this power to dismiss part of our life in due time…in order to have more life.  God has created death so that we might have more life.  Without death, there is no life, because death is a sacrifice of any given form.  (death is)…the timely dismissal of a stable form…That we survive the death is this part of our existence in order to enter a new life, to rise again. Death is everything which is not given to our will’s fulfillment. (p.5,6-23)

Thus, the martyr is not self made. ERH cites the example of his own life having been regenerated for having to depart Germany because of Hitler.

3.We seldom if ever get what we want out of life.  Life figuratively lasts two generations.  It exists in the interaction between that which we plan and the response given us by our environment (that which lies outside our mind).

The point is that we cannot really live by achieving what we had planned, we live when we are willing to be called, to find out what we should want!

4.On goals: what we usually aim for is below our dignity, our ability, because it comes from the past.

              You are more than any living thing you can aim at…Your life must be more precious.(p.7)

A purpose, general and therefore vague, is different from a concrete goal, such as owning a car or a horse.  We need not be conscious of our purpose, but must move very efficiently toward it nevertheless.

A destiny is the affirmation of the meaningful goal.

              “In destiny, you have the harmony between the cosmic order and the man’s place in the order.  Destiny exists…without aim, without purpose, and even without goal, because in destiny…a man is used who is the most — greatest misfit seemingly, the man who in his own constitution has not…the consciousness in himself to do it.”     (p.8) 

Destiny just happens!

5.If each of us strived only toward our “wills,” our desires, or conscious aims, there would be anarchy in the world.  We must find our place according to events around us, not overrating our place in life.  We therefore must not pray that our wills be done, but that thy will be done.  To see what we are called to do, what is necessary to help regenerate the community.  To do what must be done!  “What should I do to lead things to their destination”? (p.10-23)

6.All conservation starts from this insight, that in order to use things, we have to study their destination.

]             “Wherever you look,…man is asked to lead the creation to its destiny.  And therefore the first move he must make is to brush aside his own accidental will.  His greed, his envy, his avarice, his lust.” (p.10)

Obviously, we all combine doing our own will and doing the will of the community.  Our urges for sex, money, and comfort are for the immediate, the destiny of the universe is always for the long-range.

Western psychology seems to teach us the opposite, that our will is what we must carry out!

7.To live means therefore, both to impose our will on the universe, and to receive the will of the universe in return. p.11  Like breathing in and breathing out, to inspire and expire. Anxiety is the cutting off of inspiring the universe’s will.  To stop doing for others.  Nobody can be happy just doing his own will, because he becomes the slave of the object of his will.

8.Back to the issue of religion:  Religion is the ability to inspire and expire. Denial of this means denial of Jesus, or Abraham, or Buddha or Lao-Tzu.(p.13)  To subject religion to helping us fulfill our own will makes religion smaller than ourselves.  As long as we admit that, the part of our behavior the universe’s will is the best part of us, we are all right.  90% of the time we do our own “thing,”  but to do the other 10% is enough.

9.ERH cites the crucifixion, the failure of Jesus, as a triumph in the end.  Jesus demonstrated that he was willing to die for a cause.  Rockefeller, who achieved his will, and appeared to be a success, was ridiculed in Mexico City.

10.The high points in one’s life, when one makes an important decision, are worth more than other times.  The value of each hour is therefore never equal.   Inspiring, and expiring harmonizes life and death.  Harmony, in many other contexts is thus to be sought. (p.17-23)

11.The purpose of the church is to convince people to abandon their own wills and to receive the will of the universe, so that they can live together in peace.

12.Questions of “What” and “where did it come from?” are not useful. More importantly, we must ask, “What do we do about it?”    ERH makes the distinction between the “functioning” universe, which is social, and the  “resisting” universe, which is natural.  We live between these, in symbiosis with each.  To ask “What?” always produces a biased answer, as it always takes a pre-determined point of view to answer, so “…the answer is contained in the question.” (p.21-23) Therefore the question is of little use, producing a self-fulfilling prophesy.

13.Lao-Tzu suggested that non-function, that being unwilling to will, that incorporating life into death is just as important as willing.  To let things happen and not try to control them.

              That is the ideal of the Tao people in China,..to be a still, as noiseless, as indifferent as a drop of dew, distilled into this absolute elegancy of taking up as little space as possible… (p.24) 

This is where the metaphor of being at the hub of the turning wheel comes from.  It is important to see our unimportance, to be ambivalent, even  indifferent at times.

14.The important point is that when we have no reason, or insufficient information to make a decision about some issue, then we must be ambiguous about it.  In other instances, when a decision is called for, of course we must be specific!.

15.”…that you may be a person,…is the greatness of your place in the universe.” (p.28) Evolving into a person   is the product of our facing problems, of making important decisions toward growth and acting on them. “Nobody is born a person. You are born just brutal selves. Al Capone is not a person.  He’s a gangster.” (p.28)

(RF – This notion is expanded in his essay on the practical knowledge of the soul.)

 

Lecture – 24

This course is to be summarized by speaking about the religious leaders, Lao-Tzu, Abraham, Buddha and Jesus.

1.These men, like all great men and women, do not belong only to the country of their origin, or culture, or religion, but to humanity.  They are not interested in origins in general, but rather, “…as the name itself says, in a time in which we will have fulfilled our role within humanity.” (p.1)

2.The classroom is not the place to speak about religion because that is personal.  The classroom is not the place to make decisions, but the place where one prepares to make decisions.  One cannot speak about religion because one’s mind cannot be taken everywhere at any moment. We, in the classroom, play with ideas; decisions are to be  at the right moment.

3.All four of these men believed in death as part of life, in the fact that, in order for us to have been here now, someone died so that this was possible; someone left us a heritage.  This is the main difference between animals and man, “…somebody’s death preceded his life.” (p.2)  Parents give up some of their individuality to become a unit of a true marriage, as the husband and wife must appear to the children as one.

4.We enter our lives and our loves under the mask of death.  In the case of marriage, death means the end of bachelorhood. The black of nuns and priests symbolize the death of part of their lives, of giving up a potential that they might have.  In sum, we all must act on the basis of death as much as we act on the basis of life. (p.6-24)

5.The notion of “beyond” (heaven or future) is not the notion of a place (although that is a common interpretation). The real “beyond” is in the children of the person who has died.  “And therefore you must anticipate your death in your actions.” (p.6)

6.EDUCATION must emphasize that the children, as the descendants of those who have died, must carry on, making students capable of doing what we do before we die.

              Education cannot be sold.  Education is participation of the next generation in the great army of people (who count) in reality, because they encompass life and death in their consciousness, who are perfectly indifferent [to the risk they take in their decisions] and who are, because they have overcome this fluctuation of thought, which arises when you want to live forever…Only the man who acts indifferently, whether life or death follows, can act as a free man. (p.7,8)

7.Buddha represents the eye, and hub of the wheel, always open, but blind to the consequences of action.  Abraham’s willingness to sacrifice his son upon the request of God represents his willingness to give up his personal will for that of the lord’s.  In this action He made room for free people by teaching this lesson.  ERH cites an opposite example, what human sacrifice actually amounted to. mean. – the Swedish king in 1070 and Aztecs who performed human sacrifice so that the living may remain at the expense of the next generation. Both customs were eventually ended by the common sense of the people. – The point is, the lesson from the Old Testament Jews is that the next generation has as much right to freedom and life as did the previous.  (p.9-24)

8.The life of these four men is a double paradox, 1) because 1900 years ago (Christ), and 2250 years ago (Buddha), and 2600 yrs. ago (Lao-Tzu and Moses) and 3200 yrs ago (Abraham), all knew something that we do not know today.  They  are therefore ahead of us, and are models to follow, “…because in a way they are more alive than you, they have laid the principles of your own future life.” (p.11,12)

[RF – All of this seems totally analogous to our present day destruction of environment and insensitivity to over population.  Both of these acts may facilitate our own lives, but destroy the future of our children!]

9.It is not relevant from whom we learned our lessons. Great people, living models in the community who give witness to deeds of these four, are just as valuable to us as from the saints themselves.  THE IMPORTANT POINT IS THAT WE FOLLOW THAT DIRECTION. (The opposite philosophy from that of the Christian evangelicals.) TO TAKE SUCH DIRECTION IS TO MAKE ONE’S LIFE AND DEATH MEANINGFUL!  (p.13-24)

10.Second point, the messages have been passed down so that everyone can understand them.  Now we must respond to them as though they were being said to us personally. Resurrection must occur in our lives, martyrdom must occur, turning the other cheek, acting regardless of consequence etc. (p.15-24)

11.Four rooms in an apartment: kitchen, representing modern technology, living room representing history of past ages, bedroom representing peace and love (to last 50 years – two generations of the marriage), the studio (representing the present).  To be capable of moving between these different times and to be able to change one’s mind as the issue demands, is to find meaning. Space by itself is meaningless.  It must be injected with the times of lives.

12.Mind and soul are worlds apart.  Mind is the physical manifestation, representing death, while soul is spirit, attitude, the power of decision and commitment, where passion resides.

13.Multiformity in roles we play places on us an obligation to represent all of society at one time or another.  We are not only representatives of ourselves, we represent the group in which we claim membership. A professor represents all professors, as do doctors, lawyers etc.  Only sometimes are we our own representative.

14.Names and numbers:  We invoke the names of Jesus, Abraham, Lao-Tzu or Buddha because they were distinctive.  One is not born a “person,” one must act to become one.  Numbers, by contrast, are for non-living things.

15.To do God’s work is to help perpetuate life on the planet. (p.23) Our role is to play out the roles representative of the cross, to be a team member (man at work), to be a lover and friend, to be a contributing member of a community, and finally, to develop as a “person” (with a soul) These represent our mortal, unique roles. To fulfill all of these roles in a way that will point beyond our individual lives, that is the meaning of religion.  All of these roles must blend together into one whole society and one whole “person.”

              They call it unity.  But the unity and solidarity of mankind is something every one of you expected to achieve by being not satisfied with his roles in society….with his mind…with his physical endowment..but by knowing that what  mattered — whether you act as a lover, whether you act as a worker, or whether you act as a lady of society, to do in this moment that which will testify to the solidarity of the human race. (p.24) 

 

THE MULTIFORMITY OF MAN

Argo Press, Norwich, Vt. 1973
Feringer notes
Notes started: 11-90
Last edited: 12-98

 

Contents

 

PROLOGUE

I have added this prologue because of a debate I have had with a scholar.  My colleague took the position that, “This is a brilliant social analysis, but I don’t see what I can do with it.”  This position surprised me. This prologue is offered for the purpose of giving the reader a thumb-nail summary to more easily keep in mind the organization of the arguments during the reading. I believe this book is a little masterpiece, tightly drawn, and the most accessible of all Rosenstock-Huessy’s essays.  Its message is at once profound and original. And, judging from persistent social problems, of greater interest to us now, in my view, than at the time of its original publication.  As far as I can discern this essay is  unique among his works in English; I know of no other with this  same message.

Rosenstock-Huessy begins ostensibly with a management problem, asking, “What man does management manage?” The question is raised because the emergence of modern technology and its attendant economic system carried with it a terminally destructive side effect.  It is a truism, of course, to suggest that monumental inventions, such as the shift from hunting and gathering to agriculture, reverberate throughout the existing social structure.  These shifts, which are always drastic,  require quite literally a  redefinition and re-invention of social life. There could be little argument that the industrial revolution resulted in a replacement of muscle power with machine power, representing a change of equal magnitude to that of agriculture.  What then is the nature of the momentous change which he identifies? Mankind, Rosenstock-Huessy averred, must develop a new sense of social time and space,  “…such as the earth has never seen before.”  Dysfunctional societies and groups within them are common today.  This essay establishes why our present models for regeneration are incomplete and what a more efficacious model would look like.

The raising of a management question is intended to be representative of  all social relationships and the work place is an effective analogy to demonstrate Rosenstock-Huessy’s points. He immediately shifts to a more basic question, “What is the nature of man?”  The obvious effect of industrialization has been the fragmentation of all aspects of social life which had been stable, unified and largely under the control of small, rural groupings in pre-industrial society. Services such as health, counseling, work, the raising of children, social security in old age, teaching  and other basic services became fragmented. Services became removed to separate bureaucratized institutions, distant, beyond meaningful influence of individuals and small groups.  Prominent social scholars have written passionately about how lonely, insecure, paranoid and apathetic we tend to be, lacking a sense of identity and significance, all of which leads eventually to violence.  “For no human being can stand the perpetually numbing experience of his own powerlessnes,”  wrote Rollo May.

In confronting various bureaucracies, private or public, (it makes no difference), we experience this powerlessness daily.  Our great problem then becomes one of attempting to regain some control over our lives.  In general Rosenstock-Huessy strikes different aspects of this theme in all his essays. This is to say, he admonishes us to become more conscious of the nature of our experience and understand its meaning.  Specifically, in this essay he identifies a new sense of our self concept as a first step toward more control.

In tribal life the individual saw him/herself as an atom in the molecule of the group whereby any separation meant death.  The advent of Greek thought redefined this view by inventing the notion of the individual as a stand-alone creator of ideas, and this dichotomy, the individual versus the group,  has stood to this day.  Rosenstock-Huessy is suggesting that the  fragmentation of pre-industrial social structure necessitated a still more refined self concept because the individual has lost almost all of his ability to influence these new bureaucracies. Furthermore, the bureaucracies themselves have become inhumane, uncreative, unable to change – in short, unmanageable.  The two primary problems, which we face today are, instability, which powerlessness engenders, and the need to learn from experience and change in a way that creates a future. Given the social diseases which infect our societies, it should be clear that our present ways of thinking about ourselves are no longer viable.

What is the secret to social health which Rosenstock-Huessy has discovered?  He names four rules (social laws). Contrasted with the laws of nature described by the physical sciences however, laws of society are different. They refer to something which is living, vital, and therefore capable of regenerating itself.  These he characterizes by the name “ecodynamic laws.”

The first ecodynamic law addresses the problem of production, of essential goods and services..  Humans cannot function twenty four hours per day:  some processes require around-the-clock attention, such as hospitals, dams, emergency services, etc. Since no individual could function this way, the most basic unit of production must be a plural, a minimum team of three persons, each on an eight hour shift.  3 = 1 is the rule here.  The working molecule of production, when unified in spirit, can be both effective and efficient.

The second problem is that of the power relationship between the corporation and the individual and production team. The working molecule cannot create stability beyond itself because it lacks the power to influence a corporate magnitude.  Such influence requires a larger  collective such as a profession, or a union which can speak for the individual.  All = 1 is the ethic of the collective.  All = 1 is the call of the second ecodynamic law.

A third ecodynamic law addresses the problem of change, of reproduction as contrasted with the repetitiveness of production. The constant changes in the world require adaptation; old methods no longer suffice. This is renewal against repetitious production.  Change balances a possible future against a dead past; risk against a perceived security in the present; faith against hope. Change always includes risk, which, in turn, is daunting because it can go either way; success or failure, progress or retrogress. Real, meaningful change is an emotional earthquake. Individually, we do not possess the power to face change. Only the deepest form of relationship can overcome the terror of possible failure. Here the smallest social unit must be the dual, where one has deep spiritual, loving attachments  that motivate the call to rethinking and action.  Deep friendships, trust, and respect create such a spiritual strength necessary to overcome the barriers to change. Thus, the third ecodynamic law is described by 2 = 1.

In summary work teams, collectives and diads appear to define man as only one atom of a group.  How then can we call man singular, as the liberals are so fond of declaring?

Society is averse to man’s being taken as a singular.  The ideals of our group and class, the usefulness of our productive capacity, the sexual thorn in our flesh. all these forces are making us into parts of larger units, of a work group, of an inspired collective, or of a pair.  The naive liberal faith in the ubiquity of our oneness cannot be maintained.  Our singularity has to be re-stated.  It is no longer self-explaining. (p.64)

The fourth ecodynamic law deals with the problem of creativity, seeing the world in a new way when old ways no longer seem to be functional. We experience ourselves as a singular physiological, psychological, and spiritual unity at the center of our world.  We have fought our way through difficult decisions and creative processes.  We can lay claim to having earned a “soul,” a personality, much less calculable than that of the visible groups.  We know also that, to the extent groups can expand our individual power, they are nonetheless made up of a collection of souls, hopefully cooperating in peace and love.  Every great creative act, however aided by others, ultimately represents the freedom of an individual fighting for a remembrance beyond his days on earth.  An individual can only serve these groups if he has developed a singular power, a personality, a unique spirit. THE FINAL ECODYNAMIC LAW THEN IS 1 = 1.

Rosenstock-Huessy has offered four definitions of man; in three of these man is an atom of a group and each group is very different in both purpose and the demands of its members. The fourth face of man is, of course, individual. We imagine physical entities such as teams, communities, diads and individuals to have a unity in themselves, but how are they interrelated?   Is it not paradoxical to say that an individual can be all of these things , that is, a team member, a community member, a friend, husband or wife, and finally, “individual” at once?

Multiformity in this sense means that at a particular time we are one or the other, capable of changing roles even from moment to moment. Even capable of changing into a new type of person, as Rosenstock-Huessy always admonishes us to do as a necessity for inner growth.  Time then is the integrating bed-rock to understanding the functioning of social life.  Humankind is paradoxical in the sense that individuals can change behavior to become something else through time.  Unity replaces separateness when time is seen as a whole, that is, a time span over which all elements have become manifest.  Structure and function, space and time, must be inexorably intertwined to reveal meaning in social events.

Each of the four forms of the individual then has a separate existence, a different structure, a different purpose, a different spirit and a different time of existence.  For instance, life of work teams is perhaps three to five years before a member might leave or new members might be added.  Within each life-cycle the team has a unique quality.  Diads may be said to last half a lifetime because they cannot exist before maturity.   The individual, of course,  represents a single lifetime, and a community lives beyond  the life of the individual.  In sum, understanding the characteristics of these ecodynamic laws can guide us to greater stability and control over our experience. Stability and disciplined control or our participation in them are essential to fulfillment and growth.  This is what Rosenstock-Huessy means when he says we need a new sense of social time and social space.

I believe Rosenstock-Huessy  has discovered a new paradigm of basic relationships for industrial society which holds the promise of recreating man once again as a whole unified being. No individual can rise above an animal state in the singular, or mass form.  He must see himself as multiform. What man does management manage?  It must be the whole man lest the neglect of any one of his parts erodes the stability and unity of the whole.

.

NOTES FROM THE TEXT

Multiformity:  The essential notion of this book is that the modern tendency is to define man in terms of  single individual, or society. ERH contends that there are other elements of Man that identify human needs, and to ignore these elements, to over-simplify the definition of man  distorts our understanding of our own condition.

1.   The modern industrial age has created a new type of man.  Where in the past the peasant working his plot of land applied methods of production over which he could exert control, technology fragmented his life, rendering many of his skills obsolete overnight.  His sense of time and timing changed as well, producing a new sense. Man today lives in a new time and a new space, and he is burdened to define this new time and space in a way that will regenerate society.

The book emphasizes two major streams of thought. The first questions, “Which man does management handle?”  Indirectly it asks a much more important question:

“What is the nature of the new man that technology has created?”  The answer is that the rise of science has attempted to treat man as a machine: “…the world crumbles because some central fallacies about man are passed around as science today…science for four centuries has assumed that man was a part of nature and could be investigated LIKE ANYTHING ELSE… Will our economic thinking begin with economic man, the labor force, or with the whole man, not only as the producer of goods but as the reproducer of society?”

The answer is, of course that it must deal with the whole man.

In another dimension, ERH emphasizes the universal theme of man over mere “economics,” wherein he points out that the “factory” is simply a more permanent “house” than any one man’s house, and the term “factory” also stands for all public establishments that must last longer than the life of one man.

By starting with the factory as the most ephemeral kind of house in society, we can hope to prove in an unmistakable way the temporary character of every house.  (p.34)

Man has several social tasks to perform in order for society to regenerate,  work is simply one of them. The laws of the work-place must not determine all of man; it must recognize these other social tasks and needs of man and reconcile these other rules within its boundaries. (p. 35)

2.   The second chapter details the fragmentation of time that modern industry has created.  All work units are units of time, each of which is equal, each of which is intended to be as predictable as possible.  These leave no room for the unexpected, or for the planning of change – in short, for a future for the worker, man.  “The question arises: where is he going to find his future?” (p. 22)

3.   The molecule of production, First Eco-Dynamic Law. (p.23) A working unit is minimum 3 because man is not a machine that can function 24 hrs a day.  Modern man’s state in work is that of a group member, one of three 8 hour shifts.  “We have distinguished man’s state of aggregate in work and for work as something which resists complete individualization.”  “Work in society goes on whether a father dies, a child cries, or a wife’s heart breaks.  This is all expressed by the equation: three equals one. `Three’ expresses the un-individual and social character of man as co-worker.” (p. 31)

The author’s logic explaining this first eco-dynamic law is as follows:

a.   The conflict between economy and thermodynamics is no longer needed.  We have discovered the first kind of house devoted to nature, the house by which nature is made recurrent.  The factory has incorporated nature into the family of man.  Thanks to the era of technique, nature has become a part of man’s own history. No wonder that we can reconcile thermodynamics and economy. Housed nature is no longer the nature of mere physics.  It has been conquered by an historical victory.  Hence thermodynamics can be balanced by eco-dynamics.  On the other hand, we discovered man himself to be part of this nature housed in the factory.  He and his unique properties must be studied in a scientific way, since he has been made a part of nature. Man, who cannot be explained by the laws of thermodynamics, that would be an insult, an insinuation that he is dead — need not feel insulted if we begin to study his behavior in the factory.  Eco-Dynamics may even restore his dignity among his elder brothers: steam, coal and electricity.  (p.32)   [RF – It is a matter of historical record that individuals were indeed treated as cogs of machines and it is precisely this treatment that Rosenstock-Huessy speaks against when he used the term, “restore his dignity.”  He strives here to replace machine-like “management science” with a  humane science which didn’t kill the spirit of man.]

b.   No member of the “team” must take advantage of the absence of the other because members are interdependent. (p.26)

c.   The optimum size of a working unit depends upon that size which can be efficiently organized and managed in terms of the needs of the workers. Frictions between people are inevitable of course “It would be much more profitable in many cases to study these frictions than the seconds of time which figure in the time studies of piece-work.” (p.28)

d.   The group must protect the individual as a unit of “some” stability for the individual.  Modern work, as contrasted with the farm, is a transient place, one does not spend his life there, only part of it.  Thus, there is no stability or little stability and therefore, the group must serve, in part, this function.

e.   The group is a “living” unit, it has a beginning, middle and end and becomes obsolete, or its members change.  Living things die, dead things do not.  The life of the group is from 3-7 years, a time unit that depends upon the group, not some abstract principle or factory plan.

f.    A principle feature of the “first eco-dynamic law, three = one, is that the unit of production must be formulated at the smallest unit, not the single worker as the free enterprizers do, and not at the level of 1,000 as the communists do.

“The science of eco-dynamics in its formulations must give the minimum requirements and not the maximums.  It is opposed to the Liberal or Communist confusion between political science and political programs.  We purposely say `three’, while the political leader says `all and everybody.’  He is right; but we are right too.  The thing that makes Communism impossible, or at least delays it indefinitely, is the Communist party.”     (p.34)

4.   THE LABOR MOVEMENT – SECOND ECO-DYNAMIC LAW

The basic problem ERH raises is, how does the individual gain power and protection?  The answer is that he/she must become a collective.  ERH explains that the collective is to be distinguished from the masses; in other words, the collective is something between the masses and the individual.  For instance, mankind is the total, electrical workers are a part of that whole, and therefore a collective. The electrical workers were forced to organize when management identified them as “labor” rather than “their employees.” A community (municipality), a labor union, a neighborhood, a profession are examples of collectives.

a.   The collective represents the common characteristics of a type more or less an idealized set of characteristics.  It thus represents an important force in personality formation, i.e. “when a young man …looks back on his juvenile past he must think of it as the regular life of a young man of normal health and morals and of moral and healthy normalcy.”

b.   Why is the collective important?  Because the individual is too powerless, he/she needs to belong to some group, or group of groups, to experience friendship and reinforcement and identity. “We all wish to get rid of limitations or fetters of reality.  To all men collectives offer the escape they desire from the prison of our existence.” (p. 41)

c.   Collectives represent, in the time perspective, something in flux. “Ideals are not immortal.  They are tendencies in our dealing with reality.  They are expressing our fears or hopes about reality, they are our program of the future.” (p.42)

The second ECO-DYNAMIC law therefore is, ALL EQUALS ONE. (p.39)

5.   The Secret of a Self-Perpetuating Body, Third ECO-DYNAMIC Law

A review:  It is because nature is sleepless and mankind, being human, requires rest, that he must organize his community into different modes to combat this.  1) The first eco-dynamic law defines the working team, defined as extending over three shifts. This definitions follows the rule that archetypes must be represented by the smallest unity, not the largest. Thus the designation, 3 = 1. 2)  In education and all voluntary groupings where we seek commonality with others, we require the collective. A collective represents an idea that must live longer than a single person.  Thus the 2nd law, All = 1.  Mankind requires the shelter of the collective. 3) For reproduction, (regeneration) the dual, the diad, opposites, friend/foe, male/female, you/me is necessary.  “Whenever we become interested in the processes of succession of life on earth, heredity, reconstruction, historical evolution, we are bound to look at reality with eyes similar to those of Plato or Hegel.  The universe appears as a dialectical process.”  (God/devil, light/darkness, man/wife, heaven/earth.)

This law says that in all relations which are representative of generation and regeneration of man, TWO EQUALS ONE.

a.   We need the depth of intimate friendships that last longer than a single day.  Thus, a true marriage must be more than a series of sex experiences.

b.   THE TIMESPAN OF GROUPS. (p.49) – 1) the timespan of the working group is from 3 to 5 years. “Careful observations carried out in a factory over a period of 5 years, corroborated the fact that the constellations in the best team which make for the efficiency of a group are exhausted after that time.  All possible varieties of rivalry, competition, good neighborhood, leadership are exploited. ….A new commander, new privates, other sergeants must join the company.  Or it will grow stale and soon the army will be rotten.” (p.49) – 2) The collective, on the other hand, is too much work not to exist for a long timespan.  The church, government, a professional organization all must outlast a single generation. “The life of the spirit outlasts the physical life of one generation…..Our modern society, unaware of the contradictory concepts of “man” that are at the bottom of our various statements about man, has fallen under the despotism of short time spans. …A group of scientists observing the stars through an endless series of centuries are all serving the same leading idea, astronomy.” (p.50)  HE POINTS OUT AS WELL THAT THE INABILITY OF MODERN SOCIAL SCIENTISTS (I.E. PSYCHOLOGISTS AND SOCIOLOGISTS) TO RECOGNIZE THE IDEA OF COLLECTIVE (FOR INSTANCE A MARRIAGE) IN LONG TIME SPANS, ALLOWS THEM TO TREAT ALL EVENTS IN SHORT TIME SPANS. 3) THE DUAL is a polar unity, existing longer than the working group, but not longer than a generation (the collective).  “The telescope of centuries and the microscope of hours and seconds are extreme.” The dual organizes loves, of another, of a profession or country; it represents a conscious commitment that lasts half a lifetime (it cannot begin sooner than adulthood).

c.   We need the dual because we need an alter-ego, to obtain feedback sympathetically about the effects of our behavior. “Without the dual we all would go mad after some years of doubt and discussion. It allows us to exchange ourselves with somebody else without losing our personal identity!”  The notion of friend, wife, father, mother, brother etc. implies one other party to the “whole.”

d.   The notion of an alter-ego means that with the diad there is an intimate relationship that goes beyond the contract, beyond self interest; one gives more of one’s self to the intimate relationship.  It is based upon love,  and such energy and devotion is essential for the regeneration of any body or relationship.

Paradoxically, the dedication to the duo is actually against self-interest.  It is self-sacrifice for the good of the two.  “Propagation, then is in contradiction to self-interest.  It will be the more efficient the greater the self-interest it has had to overcome and the greater its power of overcoming it.”

e.   “We acquire a new status and a new character by being vested with the partnership in a body containing us and somebody else.  Our body is now replaced by this body politic into which we have been thrust with our partner.” (p.57)

6.   The Singular Man:  Fourth ECO-DYNAMIC Law

The author begins once again by summarizing: “You must work. You must grow. You must love.  These three equations demand fulfillment.  But in each of the three the alleged singular “man” has turned out not to be a singular at all.  Plurals, collectives and duals occupied the seat of the driver against all the liberal concepts of the classroom thinkers.” (p.62)

He begins ostensibly with a management problem, pointing out that the advent of modern technology that engendered the city, reducing rural economics, caused a major shift in the life-support systems of mankind.  In asking, “What part of man does management manage?” he answers that it must be the whole man, but then he had to ask, “Who is man?”

a.   Man turns out to be several things: – 1) because nature goes on unceasingly (24 hrs. per day) posing a need to protect against weather and hunger, man must join with others because he needs sleep. Thus, to protect against nature, the minimum work group is three (8 hr. shifts), although it may be up to 15 or 20.  The eco-dynamic law is, one (unit) = three (individuals). The man is then 1/3 of a working group.The TIME of the working group is 3-5 yrs before it has exhausted its originality and requires regeneration.

b.   Because work and causes and government must last longer than the lifetime of a single man, the collective must be organized to perpetuate the common features of man and carry on the causes. This allows humans to perpetuate themselves, living beyond a single lifetime.  Here “man” is also a member of a collective, and the eco-dynamic law is one = infinity, man is one of an infinite number of members in the collective.  The timespan is an entire lifetime.

c.   Because man is ultimately lonely and needs to be understood deeply, he must have intimate relationships; thus he is a member of a duo,a husband/wife/brother/sister, a friend. He must love and be loved.  The ultimate manifestation of this need is, of course, marriage.  “It is the response of the feeling, thinking and reflecting citizen upon his duties to his country.” (p.63)  It is thus conscious and can begin only in adulthood,  its  timespan is  half a lifetime.

d.   Finally ERH asks, to what extent is man singular if he ever is?  “The question turns out to be puzzling indeed.  For the naive thought of the period between the French Revolution and the World War, from Kant to John Dewey never felt any difficulty  in dealing with the singular of man as the clearest and safest unit for reasoning.  To us the situation is the reverse. Anything is more easily understood than the reality of such a unit or unity.  This bundle of nerves, this receptacle of collective slogans, this changing lover and suitor of all faiths and causes, why should he not be split?” (p.64) He is split into a working team member, a member of a community, and a wife/husband or friend.  “Society is averse to man’s being taken as a singular.  The ideals of our group and class, the usefulness of our productive capacity, the sexual thorn in our flesh, all these forces are making us into parts of larger units, of a work group. of an inspired collective, or of a pair.  The naive liberal faith in the ubiquity of our oneness cannot be maintained.  Our singularity has to be re-stated.  It is no longer self-explaining.”  (p.64)

e.   ERH discusses the definition of man as a rational animal, and points out that to do this means one would eliminate youth, old age, hours of passion, of sleep, of all non-rational consciousness, and end up with a small percentage of the individual’s existence.  On the other hand, man as a biographical unit, birth to death, having transcended all of the problems of work, of contributing to the community and of friendships, – finds his soul.  “By relegating reason to its proper place as one of the planets which are influential upon man’s biography, we have paved the road for a direct access to this biographical unit, man.” (p.67)

f.    What is the place of individualism?

“The soul is man’s power of fighting his way through different situations, different forms of existence, different convictions and social relations.  Man cannot avoid passing through many appearances and semblances…It is in those moments of extreme danger when a man might be mistaken for neither but one in the many that his soul begins to move and to persuade him that he is not doomed with his environment.  When everything seems to be calculable in a social setup, this one soul remains incalculable.” (p.68)

g.   The soul is not the same as mind, although many seem to have mixed up the two during the past 200 years. It becomes the connecting and integrating force to mediate the phases between membership in working groups, communities, friendships and marriages.  “Man has many forms of appearing in this world but just one soul.  That soul is no external form itself, because it is his power to overcoming death and change and coining meaning out of catastrophes and havoc.  What is the meaning of a sonata? It is neither in the many sounds, nor in any one melody nor in a special harmony.  But nobody can doubt that the sonata has a character, a meaning, a singular uniqueness.” p. 68

Finally he answers the question, what man does industry manage?  It must manage the whole man.  “Industry, though it mechanizes agriculture, must nevertheless invite us to farm the unique soil of man himself.  Living in an industrialized world, he can survive only if he is treated as if he were a special kind of soil.  This is a reconciliation …by which man and nature exchange roles.”   Thus, industry must manage the whole man so that he can survive the problems in the other parts of his life, so that he can come to the lathe or office desk or classroom with spirit, and capable of regenerating all phases of his existence.

The old science either treated man as an invariable, or as indeterminable.  “He remains one thing plus something else….the laws of eco-dynamics  defined these invariants of plural and collective, dual and singular.” Man is multiform. ( p.71)